Bidding Document

For

Turnkey Package of 1 x 50 MVA 132/33 kV

Portion of the proposed 220/132/33kV Grid station at Siot

GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS

VOL-I

Tender No: - SE-II/S&O/J/06 of 2015

November, 2015

SECTION I
INFORMATION AND INSTRUCTIONS
CONTENTS
PARA

TITLE

PAGE NO.

GENERAL

1.1.0
1.1.1
1.2.0
1.3.0
1.4.0
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.4.4
1.4.5
1.4.6
1.4.7
1.4.8
1.4.9
1.4.10
1.4.11
1.4.12
1.4.13
1.4.14
1.5.0
1.6.0
1.7.0

INVITATION TO BID ........................................................................................ i

SCOPE ................................................................................................................. i
ELIGIBLE BIDDERS ........................................................................................iii
QUALIFICATION OF THE BIDDER .............................................................. vi
QUALIFICATION OF THE SUB-CONTRACTOR .......................................vii
Power Auto Transformer...................................................................................vii
Circuit Breaker ..................................................................................................vii
Isolator...............................................................................................................vii
Instrument Transformers ...................................................................................vii
Surge Arresters .................................................................................................viii
1100 V Grade Power & Control Cables...........................................................viii
LT Switchgear ..................................................................................................viii
Battery and battery Charger ............................................................................... ix
Fire fighting systems. ......................................................................................... ix
Lighting System (Indoor / Outdoor) ................................................................... x
Ancillary items .................................................................................................... x
Control and Relay Panels .................................................................................... x
Civil Works ........................................................................................................ xi
Structures ........................................................................................................... xi
ONE BID PER BIDDER. .................................................................................. xi
COST OF BIDDING ......................................................................................... xi
SITE VISIT AND LOCAL CONDITIONS ......................................................xii

B.

BIDDING DOCUMENTS

1.8.0
1.9.0
1.10.0

CONTENTS OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS ....................................................xii

CLARIFICATION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS .........................................xiii
AMENDMENT OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS .............................................. xiv

C.

PREPARATION OF BIDS

1.11.0
1.12.0
1.13.0
1.14.0
1.15.0
1.16.0

LANGUAGE OF BID ..................................................................................... xiv

DOCUMENTS COMPRISING THE BID....................................................... xiv
PROFORMA OF BID ....................................................................................... xv
BID PRICES ..................................................................................................... xv
CURRENCIES OF BID .................................................................................... xv
DOCUMENTS
ESTABLISHING
BIDDER'S
ELIGIBILITY
AND
QUALIFICATIONS ........................................................................................ xvi
BID SECURITY .............................................................................................. xvi
PERIOD OF VALIDITY OF BIDS ................................................................xvii
PRE-BID MEETING .....................................................................................xviii
FORMAT AND SIGNING OF BID ..............................................................xviii

1.17.0
1.18.0
1.19.0
1.20.0

xii

xiv

D.

SUBMISSION OF BIDS

1.21.0

SEALING AND MARKING OF BIDS........................................................... xix

xix

ii

1.22.0
1.23.0
1.24.0

DEADLINE FOR SUBMISSION OF BIDS .................................................... xx

LATE BIDS ..................................................................................................... xxi
MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS ..................................... xxi

E.

BID OPENING AND EVALUATION xxi

1.25.0
1.26.0
1.27.0
1.28.0
1.29.0
1.30.0

BID OPENING ................................................................................................ xxi

CLARIFICATION OF BIDS ..........................................................................xxii
EXAMINATION OF BIDS
AND
DETERMINATION
OF
RESPONSIVENESS .......................................................................................xxii
CORRECTION OF ERRORS .......................................................................xxiii
EVALUATION AND COMPARISON OF BIDS ......................................... xxiv
PROCESS TO BE CONFIDENTIAL............................................................. xxv

F.

AWARD OF CONTRACT

1.31.0
1.32.0
1.33.0

POST-QUALIFICATION.............................................................................. xxvi
AWARD CRITERIA ..................................................................................... xxvi
PURCHASER'S RIGHT TO VARY QUANTITIES AT THE TIME OF
AWARD......................................................................................................... xxvi
PURCHASERS RIGHT TO ACCEPT ANY BID AND TO REJECT ANY
OR ALL BIDS ............................................................................................... xxvi
NOTIFICATION OF AWARD ..................................................................... xxvi
PERFORMANCE SECURITY.....................................................................xxvii
SIGNING OF CONTRACT..........................................................................xxvii

1.34.0
1.35.0
1.36.0
1.37.0

xxvi

iii

INFORMATION AND INSTRUCTIONS

GENERAL

1.1.0

INVITATION TO BID

Sealed item rate bids in two parts are hereby invited on behalf of Governor of Jammu
& Kashmir by Power Development Department (JKPDD) from experienced, reputed,
competent and financially sound Indian Contractors/Companies/Firms/Joint Ventures
fulfilling eligibility and qualification requirements specified in the Bidding Documents
for Design, Engineering, Manufacture, Supply, Erection, Testing and Commissioning of
1x 50 MVA 132/ 33 KV Sub Station of the proposed 220/132/33kV Grid Station at Siot
shortly subject to completion of 400kV transmission line which is to be laid by PGCIL.
The project is being financed through Honble Prime Ministers Reconstruction Plan and
is scheduled to be commissioned by- _______ 2017.

1.1.1 SCOPE
1.1.1.1

The scope of work for design, engineering, erection, testing and commissioning of
1 x 50 MVA 132/ 33 KV Sub Station Siot, Jammu covers the following :
a)

Design, engineering, manufacture, testing at manufacturers works,

packing and forwarding, insurance, transportation to project site, handling
and storage at site, erection, testing and commissioning of various Substation Equipments and Material such as:
Power transformer Two winding/Auto Transformer, Circuit Breaker;
isolators with or without earth switches(s); Instrument Transformers
CTs & CVTs ; Surge Arrester; C&R panels with all necessary instruments,
relays, meters, switches, internal wiring and other miscellaneous
equipment; Battery & battery charger; AC/DC distribution boards; Power
& Control cables, Cable trays; Bus-bars, Conductor & Conductor
accessories; Corona ball; Clamps & Connectors; Post Insulators &
Insulator Hardwares; Shield wire / Ground wire and accessories; Earthing
& Grounding conductor, Marshalling Kiosks, etc.

b)

Design, engineering, fabrication, testing at manufacturers works, packing

and forwarding, insurance, transportation to project site, handling and
storage at site, erection, testing & commissioning of :
i)

Structural works covering equipment support structures, substation

structures columns and beams, post insulator structures, lighting
mast cum illumination arrangement.

IV- i

ii)

e)

Grounding system (Earthing of equipment, substation

structures etc.), bus bar system including cross over connection,
jumpering etc., cable trenches, cable tray & cable laying.
Substation shielding against direct lightning strokes.
Design and development of substation layout drawings as per list in
volume-II(Plan & Elevation), within the available space as shown in
tender drawings, cable trench layout, earthing and shielding layout.
Note: It is obligatory on the part of the contractor to get the relevant
drawings vetted by the agency CEA/PDD.
d) Design, engineering, manufacturing, testing at manufacturers works,
insurance, packing and forwarding, transportation to site, handling,
storage at site, erection, testing & commissioning of all main
equipments including,Fire Fighting System,D.G. set,Lighting
system covering indoor lighting (control room building, DG set
building, fire fighting pump house, other buildings), substation
yard lighting, street lighting etc.
Galvanizing, painting and welding etc. where ever required

f)

Supply of all,erection tools & tackles

g)

First fill and 10% extra of consumables such as gas (SF6, N2 gas etc.) oils
& lubricants, filling compounds, touch up paint, essential chemicals etc.

h)

Co-ordination with the contractor of OPGW.

i)

Any other works required for erection and commissioning of the

substation.

c)

1.1.1.2

Civil Works
Design, engineering, supply of materials, providing labour, plant & equipment
including P.O.L. for civil works associated with the following as per the
recommendations of Geologist :
i)
ii)

iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
1.1.2

Construction of Control room building, fire fighting pump hose,other

buildings of the substation and water storage tank.
Foundations of substation structures including columns & beams, lighting
mast, street lighting poles, foundation of sub station equipment, auxiliary
equipment.
Construction of cable trenches (for 132 and 33 kV yard except main).
Construction of soak pit & oil collecting pit for inter connecting
transformers.
Construction of internal drainage system & sump pit for draining of rain
water.
Construction of road.

Details of scope of work are covered under various Sections of Technical

Specification.

1.1.3
(a) This is a turnkey contract. The bidder will be responsible for complete design
engineering, erection, testing and commissioning of 1x50MVA, 132/33 KV

IV- ii

portion of proposed 220/132/33KV Grid station Siot items not included in the
scope of work but necessary for successful completion/functioning of the project
shall be deemed included in the scope of work.
(b) In case there is any contradiction between this document and J&K State
Laws/Rules/Regulations/Financial Powers, the J&K State Laws /Rules/ Regulations/
Financial Powers shall prevail.
c) Any alteration in the existing earth mat will be in the scope of contractors work
and he shall not be paid any extra amount/payment/money.

1.2.0 ELIGIBLE BIDDERS

1.2.1

Indian firms, possessing the necessary competence shall be eligible to bid for works
detailed under scope of work.

1.2.2

The bid of the Firm/Contractors/Self help groups/Companies/Joint

Ventures involved in litigation/arbitration with PDD without completing
the works allotted to them shall not be considered besides, the bidder
shall have the following minimum Qualification Criteria for submitting the bid.

a) Average Annual financial turnover during last three years ending 31st March of the
previous financial year should be at least 30% of the estimated cost .
b) Experience of having successfully completed similar works during last ten years
ending last day of the month, previous to the one in which applications are invited
should be either of the following:i) Three similar completed works each costing not less than the amount equal to 40%
of the estimated cost.
Or
ii) Two similar completed works each costing not less than the amount equal to 50%
of the estimated cost.
Or
iii) One similar completed work costing not less than the amount equal to 80% of the
estimated cost.
1) The bidder or his associate must be either manufacturer of 132/33kV,50MVA power
transformer or 132kV class equipments such as circuit breakers,CTs,CVTs,Surge
Arrestor,Panels etc and 33kV C&R transformer panels,33KV LAs or higher rating
etc and must have designed,manufactured,type tested and supplied at least 05 Nos of
each such equipments which must be in satisfactorily operation for at least 02(two)
years as on the last date of sale of bidding documents or has to procure these
equipments from the reputed firms to be approved by the power development
department.
2) Equipments proposed shall be of similar or higher rating which should be in service for
a minimum period of TWO(2) years and satisfactorily performance certificate in
respect of this is to be submitted.
3) The bidder must have successfully executed at least one (1) 132 kV class
substation/switchyard which must be in successful operation for at least one (01) year
as on the last date of sale of bidding documents, provided transformers and circuit
breakers being offered are from manufacturer(s) who should have designed,
manufactured, type tested and supplied auto transformer and circuit breaker of 132 kV

IV- iii

or above class fulfilling the criteria under 1.2.2 (b) above for design and manufacturer
of the equipment.
4) e-bids may be submitted by :
A single firm that meets all qualification requirements set forth in para 1(a) &1(b)
above.
a) A joint venture of firms having not more than two partners who shall meet all
qualification requirements set forth in 1(a) & 1(b) above. Either of the partner can be
designated as lead partner on whose name tender shall be purchased.
b) All the e-Bids must be accompanied by the scanned copy of EMD in the form of
Bank Guarantee pledged to the Executive Engineer, Grid Construction Division
Jammu, JKPDD. No Interest would be payable on Earnest Money deposited with
the Department.
c) To submit Hard Copy of original instrument of EMD to Chief Engineer, System
and operation Wing Jammu PDD Complex Narwal Jammu J&K before the opening
of the Commercial & Technical e-Bid.
d) The date and time of opening of Financial-Bids shall be notified on Web Site
http://jktenders.gov.in. This will be conveyed to the qualified bidders automatically
through an e-mail message on their e-mail address. The Financial-bids shall be
opened accordingly on line on same Web Site at the Office of Chief Engineer System
and operation Wing Jammu PDD Complex Narwal J&K The e-Bids will be
electronically opened in the presence of bidders representatives, who choose to
attend at the venue, date and time mentioned in the above table. The bidders
representative attending the opening shall have to produce an authority letter issued
by the firm.
5) This SBD is available on the web site http://jktenders.gov.in to enable the
bidders to view, download the e-Bid document and submit e-Bids online up to the
last date and time mentioned in e-Tender notice/e-tender document. The bidders shall
have to pay the document fee of Rs 15000/- (Rupees Fifteen thousand only) through
Demand Draft payable to Executive Engineer Grid Construction Division, Jammu.
The scanned copy of the Demand Draft must be uploaded along with the e-Bid but the
original Demand Draft should reach the office of Chief Engineer, System and
operation Wing, Jammu PDD Complex Narwal Jammu J&K before opening of
tender. The e-tender document fee will be non-refundable.
6)The bidder must be either manufacturer of Power Transformer, main
equipments/structural material and other allied material himself or has to procure the
above material from the reputed firms having past experience of seven years along
with relevant test reports of material.
7) The foundations of Gantry, Columns/Equipments would be laid after approval of
drawings submitted by successful tenderer by CEA/PDD/ competent authority.
8)
The intending tenderer are advised to visit work site before quoting.
9) The Chief Engineer System & Operation Wing Jammu, Power Development
Department reserves the right to reject any or all the e-bid documents without
assigning any reasons thereof.
10) The Chief Engineer System & Operation Wing, Jammu reserves the right to
terminate the tendering process at any stage without assigning any reasons.

IV- iv

11)The offer of those bidders, who shall provide satisfactory evidence to the owner of
their capability and adequacy of resources to carry out the contract effectively, shall
be considered for evaluation. Bids shall include the following information.
i)

Copies of original documents defining the constitution or legal status,

place of registration and principal place of business; written power of
attorney of the signatory of the bid to commit the Bid.
ii)
Total annual turnover of supply of materials and equipment of similar
type over the last five (5) years.
iii)
Performance as prime Contractor for the supply of material and
equipment of similar nature over the last five years, and details of other
work in hand and contractual commitments.
iv)
Description of the plant for carrying out the work.
v)
The qualification and experience of key personnel proposed for
carrying out the work.
vi) Reports on the financial standing of the bidder including profit and loss
statements, balance sheets and auditor's reports for the past five (5)
years and an estimated financial projection for the next five (5) years.
vii) Evidence of access lines of credit and availability of other financial
resources.
viii) Authority to seek reference from the Bidder's banks.
ix) Information regarding any current litigation in which the Bidder is
involved, the parties concerned and disputed amount.
1.2.3

The bidder shall furnish detail of work in hand and current contract commitments.

1.2.4

The bidder shall furnish income tax/corporate tax clearance certificates.

1.2.5

(a) The bidder shall furnish list of testing facilities and adequate plant and
manufacturing capacity available to execute the works properly and expeditiously
within the time period specified. The evidence shall consist of written details of the
installed manufacturing capacities and present commitments (excluding the work
under this specification).
(b) The bidder shall furnish resume of key personnel to be dedicated to the project
alongwith organization chart. The key personnel assigned to the project shall not be
engaged in other projects till the completion of this project.

1.2.6

The bidder shall have adequate field service organization to provide the necessary
field erection and management services required to successfully erect, test and
commission the equipment as required under the scope of work.

1.2.7

The bidder shall have established Quality Assurance System and Organization,
designed to achieve high level of equipment reliability during the manufacture, field
installation activities and operations.

1.2.8

The Bidder shall submit the above details with documentary evidence to fulfill above
eligibility requirements.
The purchase of bidding documents will not entitle the bidder(s) to qualify the
eligibility criteria set for the bidder. The details furnished by the bidder along with

1.2.9

IV- v

the bid will be examined in detail as per the requirement of bidding documents and
accordingly his eligibility will be established.
1.2.10 Notwithstanding anything stated above the owner reserves the right to assess the
Bidder's capability and capacity to perform the contract, should the circumstances
warrant.
1.2.11 The type test reports of the following equipment shall be submitted by the bidder
alongwith the bid, failing which the bid is liable to be rejected.
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)

Power Transformers.
Circuit Breakers
Isolators with Earthing Switches & without Earthing Switches.
Instrument Transformers
Surge Arrestors
Relays and allied materials.

The type test reports of other equipment shall be submitted at the detailed design
engineering stage.

1.3.0 QUALIFICATION OF THE BIDDER

1.3.1

To be qualified for award of Contract, the bidder shall submit a written power of
Attorney authorising the signatory of the bid to commit the bidder specifically for
Jammu & Kashmir Power Development Department in Jammu/Kashmir with its
validity. Bids submitted by a joint venture or Consortium of two or more firms as
partners shall comply with the following requirements.
i)
The Proforma for Bid, and in case of successful Bidder, the Proforma of
Agreement shall be signed by all the partners so as to be legally binding on all partners.
ii)

The partner who has the requisite experience as given in the clause 1.2.2 of
this section shall be nominated as Lead Partner and this authorisation shall be
evidenced by submitting a power of attorney signed by legally authorised
signatories of all partners;
iii)
The Lead Partner shall be authorised to incur liabilities and receive
instructions for and on behalf of any and all partners and the entire execution of the
Contract including payments shall be done exclusively with the Lead Partner;
iv)

v)

All partners shall be liable jointly and severally for the execution of the
Contract in accordance with the Contract terms, and a statement to this effect
shall be included in the authorisation mentioned under (ii) above as well in the
Proforma for Bid and in the Proforma of Agreement (in case of successful
bidder);
A copy of the Joint Venture agreement entered into by all partners stating
clearly the financial and physical stake of each partner shall be submitted with
the bid. This agreement shall not be materially different from the draft
agreement submitted with the Bidder's application for purchase of Bidding
Documents.
IV- vi

1.3.2

Bidders shall also submit proposals of work methods and schedules, in sufficient
details to demonstrate the adequacy of the Bidders proposal to meet the technical
specification and the completion time.

1.4.0 QUALIFICATION OF THE SUB-CONTRACTOR

The bidder shall have reputed sub-contractors for supply of substation equipment/material
and for execution of works meeting the following minimum requirements and must
demonstrate through, documents from such sub-contractors, that based on known
commitments they will be able to complete the assigned job under their control.

1.4.1 Power Transformer Two winding

The bidder himself or the manufacturer(s) whose Power Transformer(Two winding)
are being offered should have designed, manufactured, type tested as per relevant
IEC/IS or equivalent standards, supplied, erected, tested and commissioned three (3)
No. 3 Phase for 132 kV or Six (6) Nos. Single phase transformers of 132kV class or
above and the same should have been in satisfactory operation for at least two (2)
years as on the last date of sale of bidding document.

1.4.2 Circuit Breaker

The bidder himself or the manufacturer(s) whose SF6 circuit breaker are offered should
have designed, manufactured, type tested as per IEC/IS or equivalent standard and
supplied, erected, tested and commissioned at least five(05) Nos. of Circuit Breakers for
each specified system voltages (145 kV & 36 kV) and fault levels and should have been
in successful operation for at least two (2) years as on the last date of sale of bidding
document.

1.4.3 Isolator
The bidder himself or the manufacturer, whose isolators are offered, should have
designed manufactured, tested as per IEC/IS or equivalent standard, supplied, erected,
tested and commissioned at least five (05) Nos. of isolators for each specified system
voltages (145 kV, 36 kV) and fault levels and should have been in successful operation
for at least two (2) years as on the last date of sale of bidding document.

1.4.4 Instrument Transformers

IV- vii

1.4.1.1 145 kV class CTs, PTs and 36 kV class CTs and PTs

The bidder himself or the manufacturer whose instrument transformers are

offered, should have designed, manufactured & tested as per IS:/IEC or equivalent
standard, supplied, erected, tested and commissioned at least five (05) Nos. CTs, PTs
each of 145 kV class and 36 kV class and should have been
in successful operation for at least two (02) years as on the last date of sale of bidding
document.

1.4.5 Surge Arresters

The bidder himself or the manufacturer whose surge arresters are offered should
have designed, manufactured and tested as per IEC/IS or equivalent standard ,
supplied, erected, tested and commissioned at least five (05) Nos. of surge
arresters for each specified system voltages (145 kV & 36 kV) and specified energy
capability and should have been
in successful operation for at least two (02) years as on the last date of sale of bidding
document.

1.4.6 1100 V Grade Power & Control Cables

1.4.6.1 Applicable for PVC control cable :
The bidder himself or the manufacturer whose PVC control cables are offered, should
have designed, manufactured & tested as per IEC/IS or equivalent standard, supplied,
erected, tested and commissioned in a single contract at least five(05) kms of 1.1 kV
grade PVC insulated control cables including 27C x 2.5 Sq.mm or higher size and the
same must have been in successful operation for at least two (02) years as on the last date
of sale of bidding document.
1.4.6.2 Applicable for XLPE Power Cable :
The bidder himself or the manufacturer whose XLPE Power cables are being offered,
should have designed, manufactured & tested as per IEC/IS or equivalent standard,
supplied, erected, tested and commissioned in a single contract at least five (05) kms of
1.1 kV or higher grade XLPE Power cables including 1C x 630 Sq.mm or higher size and
the same must have been in successful operation for at least two (02) years as on the last
date of sale of bidding document.

1.4.7 LT Switchgear
1.4.7.1 The bidder himself or the manufacturer whose LT Switchgear are offered, should be a
manufacturer of LT Switchboards of the type and rating being offered. He should have
designed, manufactured, tested and supplied at least five (05) nos. draw out circuit

IV- viii

breaker panels, out of which at least 5 Nos. should have been with relay and protection
schemes with current transformer. He should have also manufactured at least five(05)
nos. motor control centre panels of the type and rating being offered which should be in
successful operation as on the last date of sale of bidding document.
1.4.7.2 The switchgear items (such as circuit breaker, fuse switch units, contractors etc.), may be
of his own make or shall be procured from reputed manufacturers and of proved design.
At least one hundred circuit breakers of the make and type being offered shall be
operating satisfactorily as on the last date of sale of bidding document.

1.4.8 Battery and battery Charger

1.4.8.1 Requirements for battery Manufacturers

The bidder himself or the manufacturer whose batteries are offered should have designed,
manufactured & tested as per IS/IEC or equivalent standard, supplied, erected, tested and
commissioned at least five (5) sets of DC batteries of the type specified and being
offered, having a capacity of at least 300 AH and these should have been in successful
operation in power station / substation and / industrial installations for at least two (02)
years as on the last date of sale of bidding document.

1.4.8.2 Requirements for battery charger manufacturers.

The bidder himself or the manufacturer, whose battery chargers are offered, should have
designed, manufactured & tested as per IS/IEC or equivalent standard, supplied, erected,
tested and commissioned at least five (5) sets of battery chargers generally of the type
and rating offered, with static automatic voltage regulators and these should have been in
successful operation in power station / substation and / industrial installations for at least
two (02) years as on the last date of sale of bidding documents.

1.4.9 Fire fighting systems.

The bidder himself or the manufacturer whose fire fighting systems are being offered,
should have designed, manufactured, supplied and erected or coordinated the manufacture

IV- ix

& testing as per IS/IEC or equivalent standard, supplied, erected and commissioned
similar capacity and type of hydrant, HVW spray system and alarm & detection system
for at least two installations (substations or power stations) which are in successful
operation for two years in J&K State or any other state in India as on the last date of sale
of bidding documents and should meet requirements as per the J&K Fire and Emergency
Services or any nationally reputed test house/internationally reputed authority like
(FOC,London or NFPA, USA etc.)

1.4.10 Lighting System (Indoor / Outdoor)

The bidder himself or the manufacturer whose lighting system is being offered should
have designed, supplied, erected, tested and commissioned lighting system alongwith all
accessories for a similar installation and these should have been in successful operation
for at least two (2) years as on the last date of sale of bidding document.

1.4.11 Ancillary items

1.4.11.1 Conductor & conductor accessories; clamps & connectors; insulators & insulator
hardware; shield wire / ground wire and accessories; earthing & grounding

conductor; Post Insulators; equipment support structure, substation structures;

marshalling kiosks; rails tracks, cable trays etc.
1.4.11.2 The bidder himself or the manufacturer(s) whose ancillary items are being offered
should have designed, manufactured & tested as per IS/IEC or equivalent standard,
supplied ancillary items generally of the type and rating specified and these should
have been in successful operation in power station / substation for at least two (02)
years as on the last date of sale of bidding document.
Insulators of IEC make shall not be accepted.

1.4.12 Control and Relay Panels

1.4.12.1 The bidder himself or the manufacturer whose protective relays are being offered
should have designed, manufactured, tested as per IS/IEC or equivalent standard,
supplied, installed and commissioned protection relays including C & R panels and
these should have been in successful operation in 132kV power station / substation
for at least two (02) years as on the last date of sale of bidding document.
IV- x

1.4.12.2 In addition to the above requirement, the supply should have included at least
a)
b)
c)

Ten (10) Nos. of 132kV line feeder protection

Five (5) Nos. of 132KV bus bar protection
Complete protection for 132/33 kV transformers bank and auxiliary
transformer(s).

1.4.13 Civil Works

The qualification criteria for Civil Works is as mentioned in the relevant Section.

1.4.14 Structures
The bidder himself or his sub vendor, whose sub-station structures i.e. columns, beams
and equipment structures he intends to use, must have designed, manufactured supplied
and tested such structures for at least 2 Nos. 132KV sub-stations as per IS/IEC or
equivalent standards
1.4.16 In case the manufacturer is furnishing his bid based on the experience of his
collaborator, his collaborator shall have the same experience as stipulated in
clause No. 1.2.2 above. The manufacturer shall have a valid collaboration
agreement with the collaborator and shall provide documentary evidence in
support of the same alongwith back up guarantee from the collaborator for
satisfactory design, manufacture, testing and operation of the equipment /
material being offered.

1.4.17 The bidder shall submit the performance certificates, of the equipment
mentioned under Clause 1.2.11 herein above along with the bid failing which the
bid is liable to be rejected. The performance reports of other equipment shall be
submitted at the detailed design engineering stage.

1.5.0 ONE BID PER BIDDER.

1.5.1
Each Bidder shall submit only one Bid either by himself or as a partner in a
joint venture or in a consortium. A Bidder who submits or participates in more than one
Bid will be disqualified.

1.6.0 COST OF BIDDING

1.6.1 The Bidder shall bear all costs associated with the preparation and submission of
his Bid and the purchaser will in no case be responsible or liable for those costs,
regardless of the conduct or outcome of the Bidding process.

IV- xi

1.7.0 SITE VISIT AND LOCAL CONDITIONS

1.7.1
The bidder shall visit and examine site of Works and its surroundings and
obtain for himself on his own responsibility all information that may be necessary for
preparing the bid and entering into a contract for the works. The costs of visiting the site
shall be at the Bidders own expense.
The bidder shall acquaint himself with the actual local conditions and
requirements there of, including the transportation, communication facilities, utility and
labour conditions and shall not claim at any time after the submission of the bid or
subsequent execution of the contract that there was any misunderstanding with regard to
the conditions imposed by the contract or prevailing at site.
1.7.2 The Bidder and any of his personnel or agents will be granted permission by the
owner/ purchaser to enter upon its premises and lands for the purpose of such inspection,
but only upon the express condition that the bidder, his personnel and agents, shall release
and indemnify the owner/purchaser and its personnel and agents from and against all
liability in respect there of and shall be responsible for death or personal injury (whether
fatal or otherwise), loss of or damage to property and any other loss, damage, costs and
expenses however caused, which but for the exercise of such permission would not have
arisen.
1.7.3

Transportation Equipment
All necessary transportation equipment including lifting and handling equipment shall
be provided and/or hired by the Contractor at his cost.

1.7.4
In their own interest, the bidders are requested to familiarise themselves with
the Income tax Act, prevailing labour laws and other related Act and laws prevalent in the
state and country. Further the bidders are required to comply with Insurance Act
including Workmens Compensation Act and third party insurance and other relevant
provisions particularly with reference to the requirement of taking insurance for the
equipment/material during transportation, storage, erection, testing and commissioning
until defects liability period.
1.7.5

The bidder shall be deemed to have carefully examined all the Bidding Documents
and also to have satisfied himself as to the nature and character of the work to be
executed and where necessary of the site conditions and other relevant matters/details.

B. BIDDING DOCUMENTS
1.8.0 CONTENTS OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS
1.8.1
The Bidding Documents together with any Addenda/Corrigenda thereto,
issued in accordance with Clause 1.9 hereof and any minutes of pre-bid meeting issued in
accordance with Clause 1.19 hereof will include the following:

IV- xii

Volume-I
Section - I
Section-II
Section-III
Section-IV
Section-V
Section-VI
Section-VII

Information and Instructions

Conditions Governing the Contract
Additional Conditions of Contract
Project Features
Model rules for health and sanitary arrangements for Contractor's
workmen.
Contractor's labour regulations
Safety Precautions

ANNEXURES
Annex-I
Annex-I A
Annex-II
Annex-III
Annex-IV
Annex-V
Annex-VI
Annex-VII
Annex-VIII
Annex-IX
Annex X

Proforma for Bid (for Technical Bid)

Proforma for Bid (for Price Bid)
Proforma for Bank Guarantee for Bid Security
Proforma of Agreement
Proforma for Bank Guarantee for Performance Security
Proforma for Bank Guarantee for Advance Payment
Schedule of Tariff
Proforma for Requirement of Power Load
Proforma for Requirement of space for storage, Colonies, offices etc.
Indemnity Bond
Proforma for Agreement /Memorandum of Understanding.

Volume -II Technical Specifications and Guaranteed Technical Particulars

Note: Volume-II(technical Specifications) are enclosed with Draft NIT
.
1.8.2
The bidder is expected to examine all instructions, conditions, performance,
terms, specifications and drawings in the Bidding Documents. Failure to comply with the
requirements of bid submission will be at the bidders own risk. Pursuant to clause 1.27
hereof, bids which are not substantially responsive to the requirements of the Bidding
Documents will be rejected for which JKPDD shall have no liability whatsoever.

1.9.0 CLARIFICATION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS

1.9.1

A prospective bidder requiring any clarification of the Bidding Documents may notify
the Purchaser in writing or by Fax followed by the post copy confirmation at the
Purchaser's mailing address indicated in the Invitation for bids. The purchaser will
respond in writing to any request for clarification of the Bidding Documents which it
receives prior the Pre Bid Meeting. Written copies of the Purchaser's response
(including a description of the query but without identifying the source of query) will
be sent to all prospective bidders who have purchased the Bidding Documents.

IV- xiii

1.10.0

AMENDMENT OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS

1.10.1
At any time prior to the deadline for submission of bids, the Purchaser may,
for any reason, whether at its own initiative or in response to a clarification requested by a
prospective bidder, modify the Bidding Documents by issuance of an
addendum/corrigendum on the site of JK Tenders.
1.10.2
In order to afford prospective bidders, reasonable time in which to take the
addendum/corrigendum into account in preparing their bids, the Purchaser may, at its
discretion, extend the deadline for the submission of bids.

C.

PREPARATION OF BIDS

1.11.0

LANGUAGE OF BID

1.11.1
The Bid prepared by the Bidder and all correspondence and documents
relating to the bid, exchanged by the Bidder and the Purchaser, shall be written in the
English language. Any supporting documents and printed literature furnished by the
Bidder in another language shall invariably be accompanied by an English translation of
its pertinent passages. For the purposes of interpretation of the bid, the English
translation shall prevail.

1.12.0

DOCUMENTS COMPRISING THE BID

1.12.1 The bid prepared by the bidder shall include the following documents:
a)
b)
c)

d)

e)
f)

The proforma of bid, and Price Schedule completed in accordance with

Clauses 1.13, 1.14 and 1.15.
Filled in Guaranteed & Technical Particulars Schedules & other schedules
appended with the Bidding Document.
Names of manufacturers or sub-supplier from whom the bidder
proposes/intends to procure various equipment required for completion of
works.
Documentary evidence establishing bidders eligibility and qualification in
accordance with clause 1.2, 1.3 and 1.16 that the Bidder is eligible to bid and
is qualified to perform the contract.
Bid Security furnished in accordance with Clause 1.17.
Preliminary programme for completion of the Works indicating the order in
which he intends to carryout the Works in the form of a bar chart. This

IV- xiv

g)

h)

i)
j)

programme shall abide by the limit dates specified in the Contract and shall
constitute the basis to prepare the detailed programme to be furnished as per
the General Conditions of the Contract.
Detailed method statement justifying the methodology of execution proposed
by the bidder. This shall, interalia, provide method and technique of
manufacturers, supply, transportation, erection, testing and commissioning of
substation.
A statement of deviations and exception to the provisions of the Bidding
Documents in the format furnished in the Technical Specifications and a
clause-by-clause justification on the deviations demonstrating that the
deviations sought are either substantially responsive or are better than the
Purchasers specifications.
Filled in proforma of requirement of Power Load.
Filled in proforma indicating requirement of space for storage of
equipment, colony, offices etc.

1.12.2 No alteration shall be made to any proforma or to any schedule. Any correction of
prices or other data must be re-written both in figures and words and duly signed by
the bidder.
1.12.3 The Bid shall be accompanied by drawings, data, curves, suppliers/manufacturers
illustrated literature & catalogues and any other relevant information as required in
the specifications or deemed necessary by the Bidder to illustrate his Bid.

1.13.0

PROFORMA OF BID

The bidder shall complete the proforma of bid (Annex-I & IA) and the
appropriate Price Schedules furnished in the Bidding Documents.

1.14.0

BID PRICES

1.14.1
The price breakdown indicating Ex-works prices (including of packing
& forwarding charges), taxes, duties if any, freight, insurance, storage & handling at site
and services including assembly, erection, testing, commissioning shall be provided as
indicated in the schedule of prices.
1.14.2

Price Adjustment.

No price adjustment will be allowed ,rates of all items i.e main

equipments(power transformer) and other allied material shall be firm.

1.15.0

CURRENCIES OF BID

1.15.1 The unit rates and prices shall be offered entirely in Indian Rupees. All the payments
due under the contract shall be made in Indian Rupees.

IV- xv

1.16.0
DOCUMENTS
QUALIFICATIONS

ESTABLISHING

BIDDER'S

ELIGIBILITY

AND

1.16.1
The bidder shall furnish, as part of his bid, documents establishing the bidder's
eligibility to bid and his qualifications to perform the Contract if his bid is accepted.
1.16.2
The bidder shall furnish a brief write-up, backed with adequate data,
explaining available capacity (both technical and commercial) for manufacture and
supply of the required equipment within the specified time of completion, after meeting
all his current commitments.
1.16.3
The bidder shall confirm that all the facilities exist in his factory or at the
works of manufacturer for inspection and testing and the same shall be demonstrated to
the Purchaser or his representative at the time of inspection and witnessing of tests.
1.16.4
Reports on financial standing of the bidder such as profit and loss statements,
balance sheets and auditor's report of the past three years, bankers certificates, and other
related documents shall also be submitted with the bid.
1.16.5 The bidder shall also furnish an upto date list of substation work done by him for
132 kV and above substation in last seven (07) years.
1.16.6 The Bidder shall furnish performance certificates for substation of 132 kV and above
erected by him during the last seven (07) years.
1.16.7
The bidder shall furnish Information regarding current litigation if any,
in which the bidder is involved.
1.16.8 Bidders may note that they are subject to be disqualified, if they have made
misleading or false presentation in the proformae, statements and attachments
submitted in proof of the qualification requirements or have record of poor
performance such as abandoning the work, not properly completing the Contract,
inordinate delays in completion, or financial failure etc.

1.17.0

BID SECURITY

1.17.1 the bidder shall furnish, as part of his bid, bid security amounting to 2% of the
contract price
1.17.2
The bid security is required to protect the Purchaser against risk of bidder's
conduct which would warrant the security's forfeiture
1.17.3
The bid security shall be denominated in Rs. Favouring Executive Engineer
Grid Construction Division Jammu, JKPDD, and shall be in the form of:
a)

An irrevocable Bank Guarantee acceptable to the Purchaser issued by a

IV- xvi

nationalized/scheduled bank located in India, in the proforma provided in the

Bidding Documents (Annex-II) and valid for 30 days beyond the validity of
the bid subject to extension from time to time

1.17.4
Any bid not accompanied by an acceptable bid security will be rejected by the
Purchaser as non-responsive.
1.17.5 Unsuccessful bidder's bid security will be discharged/returned as promptly as
possible but not later than 30 days after the expiration of the period of bid validity
(including extension there of if any) prescribed by the purchaser.
1.17.6
The successful bidder's bid security will be discharged upon the bidders
executing the contract, and furnishing the acceptable performance security.
1.17.7 No interest shall be paid by the JKPDD on the bid security

1.17.8 The bid security may be forfeited:

a)
b)
c)

If a bidder withdraws or modifies his bid during the period of bid validity or
extension there of; or
If the bidder does not accept the correction of his Bid price, pursuant to clause
1.28
In case of a successful bidder, if he fails within the specified time limit to;
i)
ii)

1.18.0

sign the contract in accordance as per the bidding document; or

furnish performance security in accordance with SBD.

PERIOD OF VALIDITY OF BIDS

1.18.1 Bids shall remain valid for acceptance for a period of 180 days after the date of bid
opening prescribed by the Purchaser. A bid valid for a shorter period may be rejected by
the Purchaser as non-responsive.
1.18.2 In exceptional circumstances, prior to expiry of the original bid validity period, the
Purchaser may solicit the bidder's consent to an extension of the period of validity.
The request and the responses thereto shall be made in writing or by fax followed by
post confirmation copy. The bid security provided shall also be accordingly extended.
A bidder may refuse the request without forfeiting his bid security. A bidder agreeing
to the request will neither be required nor permitted to modify his bid, but will be
required to extend the validity of his bid security correspondingly. The provision

IV- xvii

regarding discharge and forfeiture of bid security shall continue to apply during the
extended period of bid validity.

1.19.0
a)

b)
c)
d)

e)

1.20.0

PRE-BID MEETING
A pre-bid meeting, open to all prospective bidders who have purchased the
bidding documents, will be convened in the Office of Chief Engineer, System
& Operation Wing Jammu, The date and time for this meeting will be
notified to the bidder within six(06) days in advance.
The purpose of the meeting will be to clarify issues and to answer questions on
any matter that may be raised at that stage.
The bidder is required to submit any questions in writing or by fax to reach the
Purchaser not later than ten days before the meeting.
Minutes of meeting, including copies of the questions raised and responses
given, will be furnished expeditiously to all those attending the meeting and
subsequently to all those who had purchased the Bidding Documents. Any
modification of the Bidding Documents which may become necessary as a
result of the pre-bid meeting, shall be made by the purchaser exclusively
through the issuance of an addendum /corrigendum via the site of JK Tenders
and not through the minutes of the pre-bid meeting.
Non attendance of the pre-bid meeting will not be a cause for disqualification
of a bidder.

FORMAT AND SIGNING OF BID

1.20.1 The Bidder shall prepare and submit one original and 5 copies of the documents
comprising the Bid/Offer hereof bound with the volume containing the bid Form, and
clearly marked ORIGINAL and COPY as appropriate. In the event of
discrepancy between them, the original shall prevail.
1.20.2 The original and all copies of the Bid shall be typed or written in indelible ink (in the
case of copies, Photostats are also acceptable).
1.20.3 The Bid shall be signed in handwriting of a person or persons duly authorized to sign
on behalf of the Bidder with Company seal.
The bid shall
contain the name, official address and place of business of person(s) authorised to
sign the Bid. All pages of the Bid including entries or amendments which have been
made, shall be signed by authorised signatory.
1.20.4 The Bid shall contain no alterations, omissions or additions, except those to comply
with instructions issued by the purchaser or as necessary to correct errors made by the
bidder, in which case such alternations/omissions/additions/corrections shall be
initialed with date by the person or persons signing the bid. Every bidder should
authenticate the cuttings besides all the documents concerning the bid should be
signed by the bidder.

IV- xviii

D. SUBMISSION OF BIDS
1.21.0

SEALING AND MARKING OF BIDS

1.21.1 The bidders shall submit bids in three (3) separate sealed covers as under;
Part-I

Techno-commercial bid

Part-II

Bid Security

Each part shall contain all the documents required but not limited to the following:

Part
No

Name

Numbers to be
submitted
Original

Copy of
original

I.

Techno-Commercial offer

I.1

Proforma of Bid (Techno-commercial)

I.2

Documents establishing Bidder's eligibility and

qualification (refer clause 1.2, 1.3 & 1.16)

1.3

Power of Attorney (authorising the signatory of Bid to

commit the Bidder)

I.4

Agreement of Joint Venture or consortium (if

applicable)

I.5

Letter of consent (from all subcontractors to ensure the

supply of equipment to bidder, if applicable)

Guaranteed & Technical schedules.

1.6

Other schedules

I.7

PERT-Chart for completion of works

I.8

Original set of Volume I,II,III,IV of Bid documents

including Amendment/Addendum to Bid Document
along with the reply to questionnaire issued, duly
signed with company seal on each page

II.

Bid Security

IV- xix

1.21.2
The original and each copy of the Bid shall be separately sealed in an inner
and an outer envelop, duly marking the envelop such as Original-Part I; Techno
commercial Offer & Copy Part I; Techno commercial Offer and Copy Part II. The
inner and outer envelope of Bid Security shall be duly marked as Part-II; "Bid Security".
1.21.3 The inner and outer envelopes shall be addressed to the Purchaser at the following
address
Chief Engineer,
System & Operation Wing Jammu,
Gladni Complex,Narwal, Jammu. (J&K)

And bear the project name, the invitation for bids (IFB) number, and the words Do
not open before ___________.
1.21.4 The inner envelope shall indicate the name and address of the Bidder to enable the bid
to be returned unopened in case it is declared late.
1.21.5 If the outer envelope is not sealed and marked as instructed above, the Purchaser will
assume no responsibility for the misplacement or premature opening of the bid.

1.22.0

DEADLINE FOR SUBMISSION OF BIDS

1.22.1 Bids must be received by the Purchaser in the office of :

Chief Engineer,
System & Operation Wing Jammu,
Gladni Complex ,Narwal, Jammu. (J&K)
Not later than ____________.
1.22.2 The Purchaser may, at its discretion, extend the deadline for submission of bids by
issuing an amendment hereof, in which case all rights and obligations of the Purchaser
and bidders previously subject to the original deadline shall thereafter be subject to
the new deadline as extended.
1.22.3 The bid shall be submitted in person or through courier service at the address
indicated in 1.22.1.

IV- xx

1.23.0

LATE BIDS

1.23.1 Any bid received by the Purchaser after the deadline for submission of bids prescribed
by the Purchaser, pursuant to clause 1.22, will be returned unopened to the bidder.

1.24.0

MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS: N/A

E. BID OPENING AND EVALUATION AS PER

NIT AND PROVISION OF
JK TENDERS.
1.25.0

BID OPENING

1.25.1
The purchaser shall open the Techno-commercial offer including
modifications made pursuant to Clause 1.24 and Bid Security in the presence of
Bidders' authorised representatives (not more than two) who may choose to attend
at the following location
Office of the Chief Engineer,
System & Operation Wing Jammu,
Gladni Complex, Narwal, Jammu. (J&K)

IV- xxi

The Bidders representatives who are present during the opening of bids shall sign a
register evidencing their attendance.
Envelopes marked Withdrawal shall be opened and read out first. Bids for which
an acceptable notice of withdrawal has been submitted pursuant to Clause 1.24 hereof
shall not be opened.
The envelope marked Part II; Bid Security will be opened first. A bid will be
rejected outright if Bid Security does not satisfy the requirement.
The Techno-commercial Offer i.e. part I shall be opened only of those bidders who
have submitted the bid security in line with the bid documents. The Part II shall be
kept in the safe custody of the Purchaser and will be opened at a later date to be
notified separately. The price bids of only those bidders will be opened whose
techno-commercial bids have been ascertained to be responsive.
1.25.1 The bidders' names, written notifications of bid, (including modifications and
withdrawals if any) and the presence or absence of the requisite bid security and such
other details as the Purchaser, at its discretion, may consider appropriate will be
announced at the bid opening.

1.26.0

CLARIFICATION OF BIDS

1.26.1 To assist in the examination, evaluation and comparison of bids, the Purchaser
may at its discretion, ask any bidder for clarification of his bid. The request for
clarification and the response shall be in writing and no change in price or substance of
the bid shall be sought, offered or permitted except as required to confirm the corrections
of arithmetic errors discovered by the purchaser during the evaluation of the bids.

1.27.0
EXAMINATION OF BIDS AND DETERMINATION OF
RESPONSIVENESS
1.27.1 Prior to the detailed evaluation of bids, the purchaser will determine whether each Bid
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)

Meets required eligibility criteria.

Has been properly signed.
Is complete and accompanied by acceptable bid security.
Is substantially responsive to the requirements of the Bidding Documents.
Provides any clarification and/or substantiation that the purchaser may require.

1.27.2 For purposes of this Clause, a substantially responsive bid is one which conforms to
all the terms, conditions and specification of the Bidding Documents without material
deviation or reservation. A material deviation or reservation is one

IV- xxii

i)
ii)
iii)
iv)

Which affects in any substantial way the scope, quality or performance of the
works.
Which limits in any substantial way, inconsistent with bidding documents, the
purchasers rights or the bidder's obligations under the contract.
Whose rectification would affect unfairly the competitive position of other
bidders presenting substantially responsive bids.
Which is incomplete or does not include all the works covered by the
specification.

The Purchaser's determination of a bid's responsiveness shall be based on the contents of

the bid itself without recourse to extrinsic evidence.
1.27.3
If a bid is not substantially responsive, it will be rejected by the Purchaser and
may not subsequently be made responsive by correction or withdrawal of non-conforming
deviation or reservation. Any Bid which is incomplete, obscure or irregular or only for a
part of the schedule is liable for rejection
1.27.4
The Purchaser may waive any minor informality or non-conformity or
irregularity in a bid which does not constitute a material deviation, provided such a
waiver does not prejudice or affect the relative ranking of any bidder.
1.27.5 Price Bid of the techno-commercially acceptable and responsive bidder so opened
will be considered for evaluation.

1.28.0

CORRECTION OF ERRORS: N/A

Evaluation will be strictly as per the provision in e-tendering.

IV- xxiii

1.29.0

EVALUATION AND COMPARISON OF BIDS

1.29.1 General
The bids will be evaluated and compared by the Purchaser from the technical and
financial points of views so as to make a selection for the complete work covered
under the bidding documents.

1.29.2 Procedure for Evaluation

The Purchaser shall evaluate the bids in the following steps.
a)

Step- I : Substantial responsiveness

The Purchaser will evaluate and compare only the Bids determined to be
substantially responsive in accordance with clause 1.27 hereof.

b)

Step - 2 : Techno-Commercial Evaluation

Detailed Techno-commercial Evaluation of only substantially responsive bids
will be done. Techno-Commercial proposal including time schedule for
supply and erection submitted by the Bidder shall conform to the conditions
set forth in the bidding document.

c)

Step - 3 : Price Evaluation

Price bids of only Techno-Commercially responsive bidders will be opened
and evaluated by the Purchaser as per the provision of e-tendering.

1.29.3 For evaluation of bids, the following shall be considered:a)

b)

Prices FOR project site inclusive of packing, forwarding, transportation,

insurance, storage and preservation at site including intermediate storage, if
any, and transportation from storage site to work site.
The cost of complete work of erection, testing, commissioning and handing
over of plant and insurance upto expiry of defects liability period.

IV- xxiv

1.30.0

PROCESS TO BE CONFIDENTIAL

1.30.1
After the opening of the bids, information relating to the examination,
clarification, evaluation and comparison of bids and recommendations concerning the
award of contract shall not be disclosed to the bidders or other persons not officially
concerned with such process.
1.30.2 Any effort by the bidder to influence the purchaser in the process of examination,
clarification, evaluation and comparison of bids, and in the decision concerning award of
contract, may result in the rejection of his bid.

1.30.3 The bidder shall not communicate or use in advertising, publicity or in any other
medium, photograph of the works under this contract, or description of the site,
dimension, quantity, quality or other information, concerning the works unless prior
written permission has been obtained from the purchaser.
1.30.4 All documents, correspondence, decisions and other matters concerning the contract
shall be considered of confidential and restricted nature by the bidder and he shall not
divulge or allow access there to by any unauthorised persons.

IV- xxv

F.

AWARD OF CONTRACT

1.31.0

POST-QUALIFICATION

1.31.1 The Purchaser will determine to its satisfaction whether the bidder selected, as having
submitted the lowest evaluated responsive bid, is qualified to satisfactorily perform
the Contract.
1.31.2 The determination will take into account the bidder's financial, technical and
production capabilities. It will be based upon an examination of the documentary
evidence of the bidder's qualifications submitted by the bidder, pursuant to Clause 1.16,
as well as such other information as the Purchaser deems necessary and appropriate.
1.31.3
An affirmative determination will be a prerequisite for award of the contract to
the bidder. A negative determination will result in rejection of the bidder's bid, in which
event the Purchaser will proceed to the next lowest evaluated bid to make a similar
determination of the bidder's capabilities to perform the contract satisfactorily.

1.32.0

AWARD CRITERIA

1.32.1
The Purchaser will award the Contract to the successful bidder whose bid has
been determined to be substantially responsive and has been determined as the lowest
evaluated bid, provided further that the bidder is determined to be qualified to perform the
Contract satisfactorily.

1.33.0
PURCHASER'S RIGHT TO VARY QUANTITIES AT THE TIME OF
AWARD
1.33.1
The Purchaser reserves the right to increase or decrease the quantity of goods
including services upto 20 percent of the Contract Price without any change in unit rates
or other terms and conditions during the execution of the contract. However, the variation
limit shall not apply to the quantities of civil works for the foundations of gantries and
other structures.

1.34.0
PURCHASERS RIGHT TO ACCEPT ANY BID AND TO REJECT ANY
OR ALL BIDS
The Purchaser reserves the right to accept or reject any bid, and to annul the bidding
process and reject all bids at any time prior to award of Contract, without thereby
incurring any liability to the affected bidder or bidders or any obligation to inform the
affected bidder or bidders of the grounds for the Purchasers action.

1.35.0

NOTIFICATION OF AWARD

1.35.1
Prior to the expiration of the period of bid validity, the Purchaser will notify
the successful bidder in writing by registered letter or by fax, that his bid has been
IV- xxvi

accepted. This letter (hereinafter and in the condition of contract called Letter of
Award) shall name the sum (hereinafter called the `Contract Price) which the JKPDD
will pay to the contractor in consideration of the execution of this contract.
1.35.2 The notification of award will constitute the formation of the contract.
1.35.3 Upon the successful bidder's furnishing of performance security, the Purchaser will
promptly notify each unsuccessful Bidder and will discharge their bid security.

1.36.0

PERFORMANCE SECURITY

1.36.1 Within fifteen (15) days of the receipt of letter of award from the Purchaser but not
later than the date of signing of Contract Agreement, the successful bidder shall
furnish to the JKPDD, performance security in the form of a Bank Guarantee for an
amount equal to 10% (ten percent) of the contract price in accordance with the
Conditions of Contract.
1.36.2 The performance security provided by the successful bidder in the form of an
irrevocable Bank Guarantee, shall be in favour of Jammu & Kashmir Power
Development Department issued by any nationalized/scheduled Indian Bank The
Bank Guarantee Shall be on the proforma attached at Annex IV and shall remain
valid until 30 days after the date of issue of Defects Liability Certificate.

1.37.0

SIGNING OF CONTRACT

1.37.1 Within fifteen (15) days of receipt of Letter of Award, the successful bidder or his
authorised representative shall attend the office of Chief Engineer, System &
Operation Wing Jammu for signing of the Contract Agreement. The proforma for
Agreement is attached at Annex-III
1.37.2 Failure on the part of the successful bidder to comply will constitute sufficient
grounds for the annulment of the award and forfeiture of the bid security, in which
event the Purchaser may make the award to the next lowest evaluated bidder or call
for new bids.

IV- xxvii

SECTION-II

GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF CONTRACT

SECTION-II
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
CONTENTS

S.No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

CLAUSE
DEFINATIONS
DUTIES AND POWERS OF ENGINEER-IN-CHARGE AND
ENGINEER-IN-CHARGES REPRESENTATIVE
ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT
SUBLETTING
LANGUAGE(S) AND LAW
DRAWINGS
CONTRACTORS GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES
CONTRACT AGREEMENT

IV- xxviii

PAGE NO.
4-9
9-11
11
11-12
12-13
14-17
17-27
27

9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45

PERFORMANCE SECURITY
INSPECTION OF SITE
SUFFICIENCY OF BID
WORK TO BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONTRACT
PROGRAMME TO BE FURNISHED
CONTRACTORS SUPEINTENDENCE
CONTRACTORS EMPLOYEES
SAFETY, SECURITY AND PROTECTION OF THE
ENVIRONMENT
OBLIGATIONS OF THE JKPDD
LABOUR
WORKSMANSHIP AND MATERIALS
INSPECTION AND TESTING
SUSPENSIONS OF WORKS, TRANSPORTATINS OR
ERECTION
TIME FOR COMPLETION, EFFECTIVE DATE AND
COMMENCEMENT DATE
EXTENSION OF TIME FOR COMPLETION
RATE OF PROGRESS
LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR DELAY
PROLONGED DELAY
TESTS ON COMPLETION
TAKING OVER
DEFECTS AFTER TAKING OVER
VARIATIONS
PAYMENT TERMS AND MODE OF PAYMENT
CURRENCIES FOR PAYMENTS
RISK AND RESPONSIBILITY
CARE OF THE WORKS AND PASSING OF PAYMENT
DAMAGE TO PROPERTY AND INJURY TO PERSONS
LIMITATINS OF LIABILITY
INSURANCE
FORCE MAJEURE
DEFAULT
TAXES AND DUTIES
OWNERSHIP
NOTICES
ARBITRATION
TERMINATION OF CONTRACT FOR JKPDDs CONVENINCE
JOINT VENTURES

IV- xxix

27-28
28-29
29
29
30-31
31
31-32
32
33
33-35
35-36
36-38
38-40
40
41
41-42
42
43
43-45
45-47
47-51
51
51-52
52
52-53
53-55
55-56
56
56-58
58-61
61-62
63
63
63-64
64-67
68
68

GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

CLAUSE-1: DEFINITIONS:
In the Contract, as hereinafter defined, the following words and expressions shall have the
meanings hereby assigned to them, except where the context otherwise requires:

i)

JKPDD/ Purchaser/Owner means the Jammu & Kashmir Power Development

Department and the legal successor in title to the JKPDD, who will employ the
contractor.

ii)

Contractor/Supplier means the person or persons, firm or company, group of

firms or Joint Venture, who has been awarded the work by the JKPDD and
includes the Contractors personnel, representatives, successors and permitted
assigns.

iii)

Engineer-in-Charge means the Chief Engineer, System and Operation Wing,

PDD, Jammu.

iv)

(a) Engineer-in-Charges Representative means Superintending Engineer and

Executive Engineer in-charge of the project. The Asstt. Executive Engineers/Asstt.
Engineers will assist the Engineer-in-charges representatives to perform the duties
set forth in Clause-2 hereof, whose authority shall be notified in writing to the
Contractor by the Engineer-in-Charge.

IV- xxx

(b)

The responsibilities assigned herewith as above in IV(a) to various officers

does not absolve them from taking the approval from the competent authority under
various state laws/rules/regulations and book of financial powers.

v)

Works shall include both permanent Works and Temporary Works or either of
them as appropriate and shall mean supply of Goods and Services.

vi)

Temporary Works means all temporary Works of every kind other than
Contractors plant, equipment and machinery required in or about the execution
and completion of the Works and remedying of any defects --therein.

vii)

Permanent Works means the permanent Works to be executed in accordance

with the Contract.

viii)

The Goods means all the equipment, machinery and/or other materials which the
Contractor is required to supply to JKPDD under the Contract.

ix)

Services means services ancillary to the supply of Goods such as but not limited
to transportation and insurance from ex-works till defect liability period, handling,
storage and preservation at store/site, erection, testing, painting, commissioning of
goods, training and other such obligations of the Contractor covered under the
Contract.

x)

Contract means the agreement entered into between JKPDD and the Contractor
as recorded in the Form of Agreement, signed by both the parties including all
attachments and appendices thereto and all documents incorporated by reference
there in.

xi)

Contract Price means the sum as stated in the Letter of Award payable to the
Contractor under the contract for full and proper performance of his contractual
obligations i.e. providing goods and services and remedying any defects therein in
accordance with the provisions of the Contract.

IV- xxxi

xii)

Plant and Equipment or Machinery means and include plant, equipment,

machinery, tools, appliances, other implements of all description or things of
whatsoever

nature other than the Temporary Works required in or about the

execution and completion of the Works and remedying of any defects therein but
does not include materials or other things intended to form or forming part of the
Permanent Works.

xiii)

Specifications means the specifications of Works included in the Contract and

any modification thereof or addition thereto or deduction there from as may, from
time to time, decided by JKPDD and/or submitted by the Contractor and approved
in writing by the Chief Engineer, System & Operation Wing Jammu.

xiv)

Drawings means the drawings referred to in the Specifications and any

modification of such drawings approved in writing by the Engineer-in-Charge and
such drawings, as may , from time to time, be furnished by JKPDD and/or the
Contractor and approved in writing by the Chief Engineer, System & Operation
Wing Jammu.

xv)

Site means the places where the Works are to be executed and any other places as
may be specifically designated in the Contract as forming part of Site.

xvi)

Store means the place where the goods supplied under this Contract are stored by
the Contractor near to the Project site. Such place will be treated as forming part of
site.

xvii)

Approved means approved in writing, including subsequent written confirmation

of previous verbal approval and approval means approval in writing, including as
aforesaid.

xviii)

Consultant means Central Electricity Authority (CEA) or any other person or

agency appointed by PDD for providing consultancy services, its legal successors
or permitted assigns.

xix)

Chief Engineer means Chief Engineer, System and operation wing, Jammu

IV- xxxii

xx)

GoI means The Government of India.

xx)

Sub-Contractor means the party or parties having direct contract with the
Contractor and to whom any part of the Works

has

been sublet by the

Contractor with the consent, in writing, of the Engineer-in-Charge and the legal
successors in title to such person, but not any assignee of any such person.

xxi)

Manufacturer means the party proposing to design and/or manufacture the Goods
as specified, complete or in part.

xxii)

Letter of Award means the letter from JKPDD or Chief Engineer conveying
award of Works subject to such reservations as may have been stated therein.

xxiii)

Tests on Completion means the tests specified in the Contract or otherwise

agreed to by JKPDD and the Contractor to be performed before the Works are
taken over by JKPDD.

xxiv)

Day means a day from midnight to midnight.

xxv)

Month means from the beginning of a given date of a calendar month to the end
of the preceding date of the next calendar month.

xxvi)

Week means seven consecutive days.

xxvii)

Quarter means a period of three consecutive months starting from January, April,
July and October i.e. January to March, April to June, July to September and
October to December.

xxviii)

C.E.A. means Central Electricity Authority.

xxix)

Near Relative means wife/husband, parents and grandparents, children, first

cousins, brothers-in-law, sisters-in-law and parents-in-law.

xxx)

Rupees means Rupees in Indian Currency.

IV- xxxiii

xxxi)

Words in singular number shall include the plural number and vice-versa where the
context so requires. He shall include She and vice versa.

xxxii)

IS Means Indian Standard specifications with latest amendments up-to-date or

revision as currently in force at the time of execution of the Works.

xxxiii)

Bill of Quantities/Price Schedule means the priced and completed bill of

quantities.

xxxiv)

Project Manager means the person appointed from time to time by the Contractor
and notified in writing to the JKPDD to act as the in-charge for the purpose of the
Contract.

CLAUSE-2

DUTIES

AND

POWERS

OF

ENGINEER-IN-CHARGE

AND

ENGINEER-IN-CHARGES REPRESENTATIVE:
i)

The Engineer-in-Charge shall carry out the duties specified in the Contract.

ii)

The Engineer-in-Charge may exercise the authority specified in or necessarily to

be implied from the Contract, provided however, that if the Engineer-in-Charge is
required to obtain the specific approval from a Competent Authority before
exercising any such authority, he will do so and convey the decision to the
Contractor.

iii)

The Engineer-in-Charges Representative will be appointed by and be responsible

to the Engineer-in-Charge and will carry out such duties and exercise such
authority as may be delegated to him by the Engineer-in-Charge under Sub Clause
(iv) of this Clause. He shall have no authority to relieve the Contractor of any of
his duties or obligations under the Contract nor except as expressly provided
hereunder or elsewhere in the Contract, to order any work involving delay or any
extra payment by the JKPDD, nor to make any variation in the Works.

iv)

The Engineer-in-Charge may, from time to time delegate to the Engineer-inCharges Representative any of the powers and authorities vested in the Engineer-

IV- xxxiv

in-Charge and he may at any time revoke such delegation. Any communication
issued by the Engineer-in-Charges Representative to the Contractor in accordance
with such delegation shall have the same effect as though it had been issued by the
Engineer-in-Charge. Provided that:

a)

any failure of the Engineer-in-Charges Representative to disapprove any

work or materials shall not prejudice the authority of the Engineer-inCharge thereafter to disapprove such work or materials and to give
instructions for the removal or for the rectification thereof.

b)

If

the Contractor questions any communication of the Engineer-in-

Charges Representative, he may refer the matter to the Engineer-in-Charge

who will confirm, reverse or vary the contents of such communication.

v)

The Engineer-in-Charge may have any number of persons to assist the Engineerin-Charges Representative in carrying out of his duties. Such assistants shall have
no authority to issue any instructions to the Contractor, except in so far as such
instructions may be necessary to enable them to carry out their duties and to secure
their acceptance of materials, plant, equipment and machinery or workmanship as
being in accordance

with

the Contract, and any instructions given by any of

them for those purposes shall be deemed to have been given by the Engineer-inCharges Representative.

vi)

Instructions given by the Engineer-in-charge shall be in writing, provided that if

for any reason the Engineer-in-charge considers it necessary to give any such
instruction orally, the contractor shall comply with such instruction. Confirmation
in writing of such oral instruction given by the Engineer-in-Charge, whether before
carrying out of the instruction, shall be deemed to be an instruction within the
meaning of this sub-clause. Provided further that if the Contractor, within seven
days, confirms in writing to the Engineer-in-Charge any oral instructions of the
Engineer-in-Charge and such confirmation is not contradicted in writing within
seven days by the Engineer-in-Charge, it shall be deemed to be an instruction of
the Engineer-in-Charge. The provisions of this sub-Clause shall equally apply to
instructions given by the

Engineer-in-Charges Representative
IV- xxxv

and

any

assistants of the Engineer-in-Charge or the Engineer-in-Charges Representative

pursuant to Sub-Clause (v).

CLAUSE-3

ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT

The Contractor shall not, without the prior consent of the JKPDD, assign the Contract or any
part thereof, or any benefit or interest therein or there under, otherwise than by:

(i)

a charge in favour of the Contractors bankers of any monies due or to become due
under the Contract, or

(ii)

Assignment to the Contractors insurers (in cases where the insurers have discharged
the Contractors loss or liability) of the Contractors right to obtain relief against any
other party liable.

CLAUSE-4
(i)

SUBLETTING:

The Contractor shall not sublet the whole of the Works except
provided by the Contract, the Contractor shall not

where otherwise

sublet any part of the Works

without the prior written consent of the Engineer-in-charge. However, any such
consent shall not relieve the Contractor from any liability or obligation under the
Contract and he shall be responsible for the acts, defaults and neglects of any subcontractor, his agents, servants or workmen as fully as if they were the acts,
defaults or neglects of the Contractor. Provided that the Contractor shall not be
required to obtain such consent for :
a)

b)

The provision of labor, or

The purchase of materials which are in accordance with the standards

specified in the Contract, or

c)

The subletting of any part of the Works for which the sub-contractor is
named in the Contract.

IV- xxxvi

(ii)

The Contractor shall furnish un-priced copies of the major sub-contracts (costing
more than Rs. 5.0 lacs) to JKPDD, wherever these are executed. This action
would, however, not involve JKPDD in any complications arising between the
Contractor and his sub-contractor(s) or any other liabilities. This action would also
be without prejudice to the provision under this Clause.

(iii)

In the event of a sub-contractor having undertaken the Contract in respect of the

work executed or the goods, materials, plant, equipment and machinery or
services supplied by such sub-contractor, any continuing obligation extending for
a period exceeding that of the Defects Liability Period or its extension under the
Contract, the Contractor shall at any time, after the expiration of such period,
assign to the JKPDD , the benefit of such obligation for the unexpired duration
thereof.

CLAUSE-5: LANGUAGE(S) AND LAW:

(i)

a)

The Contract Documents shall be drawn up in English. All correspondence

and documents relating to the Contract, exchanged by the Contractor and
JKPDD, shall be submitted in the prescribed form in English. All supporting
documents and printed literature in connection with the Contract shall be
preferably in English. In case the supporting documents and printed literature
are in any other language, these shall be accompanied by an exact translation
in English and in that case, for the purpose of interpretation, the English
translation shall govern.

IV- xxxvii

b)

The governing law to which the Contract is to be subjected and according to

which the Contract is to be construed shall be the Law in force in State of
Jammu and Kashmir and within the jurisdiction of

Courts of Jammu &

Kashmir at Jammu.

(ii)

Documents Mutually Explanatory

Several documents forming the Contract are to be taken as mutually explanatory of

one another, but in case of ambiguities or discrepancies, the documents shall take
precedence in the order in which they are set out in the proforma of Agreement.
(Annex-III).

CLAUSE-6 : DRAWINGS:
i)

After the award of Contract the supplier & purchaser will hold design co-ordination
meetings to finalize steps to be taken to implement the Contract including procedure
for submission of drawings, design details & approval thereof in such a manner &
procedures which would bring out workable solution to step by step process. At least
seven print copies of all the drawings for any part of the Work and seven copies of
complete design calculations shall be submitted by the Contractor for approval, at
least ninety days prior to the date on which such drawings are required to ensure that
the work is carried out in accordance with the approved programme Work. The

Engineer-in-charge

shall accord and convey the approval to the

design calculation and drawings, if found in order, within 30(thirty)

days from the receipt of the drawings from the Contractor.

IV- xxxviii

Otherwise he shall apprise the Contractor of his comments on such

design calculations and drawings within the above mentioned period.
ii)

Where such comments are communicated to the Contractor, the Contractor shall be
bound to ensure that 7 print copies of all the revised drawings and 7 copies of revised
design

calculations, in view of these comments, are submitted to the

Chief

Engineer, System & Operation Wing, Jammu (Engineer-in-charge)within fifteen

days of receipt of these comments. Similar course of action, as aforesaid, shall be
taken by the Chief Engineer, System & Operation Wing, Jammu on the revised
designs calculation and drawings. On receipt of approval of drawings/design
processes/design calculation etc. the Contractor shall furnish seven print copies( Five
copies of A1 size and 2 copies of A3 size) and two (2) nos. paper type reproducible
copies of approved drawings and ten copies of approved design calculation to the
Chief Engineer, System & Operation Wing, Jammu within 30 days of such approval.
In addition computer/Autocad drawings 2 sets of CD of such approved drawings
shall also be supplied.

iii)

Notwithstanding the approval of the *Chief Engineer, System & Operation Wing,
Jammus to the Contractors design and drawings, the Contractor shall be responsible
for the stability of Works in accordance with the provisions of the Contract and the
approval accorded shall not absolve him of his responsibility for meeting all
requirements of specifications.

iv)

One copy of the approved drawings shall be kept by the Contractor on the site and the
same shall, at all reasonable times, be available for inspection and use by

the

Engineer-in-Charge and the Engineer-in-Charges Representative and by any other

person authorised by the Engineer-in-Charge.

v)

The Chief Engineer, System & Operation Wing, Jammu shall, however, have full
power and authority to modify, from time to time, during the progress of Works, the
drawings approved previously in consultation with the contractor, as shall be
necessary for the purpose of proper and adequate execution and

completion of

Works. The Contractor, shall carry out and be bound by such modification.

IV- xxxix

vi)

Final Drawings

After completion of the erection work the Contractor shall furnish 5 copies (3 copies
of A1 size and 2 copies

of A3 size

duly bound in folder) and one copy on

reproducible tracing cloth or velograph of final as built drawings of work. For

computer/Autocad drawn drawings, two sets of CDs containing such drawings shall
be supplied. Each set shall include an index showing the drawing number, Revision
No. & titles.

vii)

Record Drawings

Prior to shipment of the equipment, the Contractor shall furnish to Purchaser one
complete set of full size permanent reproducible cloth or film copies of approved
quality and type and one full size set of prints of all suppliers drawings of structures
and equipment as finally built, including any suggested modification. In addition five
(5) bound sets of half-size prints of all Contractors drawings shall be

furnished.

Each set shall include an index showing the drawing numbers and titles and shall be
bound for permanent reference.

viii)

Instructions/ Procedures for Storage & Preservation, Installation/Erection, Painting,

Testing & Commissioning at Site and Operation & Maintenance of Goods.

The Contractor shall submit 7 sets of written detailed Instructions/Procedures in

English language, for Storage & Preservation, Installation/Erection, Painting, Testing
& Commissioning at site and Operation and Maintenance manual for each component
of equipment. The instructions/procedures shall be submitted as early as possible so
that final reviewed copies can be made available to the field for use in planning the
work well in advance of actual installation and operation. After review, seven (7)
durable bound copies of the final instructions shall be furnished. Each of these copies
shall have a presentation similar to a hard-bound book resistant to wear and tear and
firmly holding each of the pages.

A book

shall

contain a maximum of

approximately 240 pages to offer easy handling; if the material requires more space,
the manual shall be divided into two (2) or more volumes. Each volume shall have its
title, printed on the front of the binding and on the back of the book. The paper used,
IV- xl

the reproduction technique, the binding, and the presentation shall be of an approved
quality and type. 2 sets of CDs containing final Instructions/Procedures shall also be
furnished.

ix)

The JKPDDs specification drawings, specifications and other information to the

Contractor shall remain the property of the JKPDD. They shall not, without the
consent of the JKPDD, be used, copied or communicated to a third party by the
Contractor unless necessary for the purposes of this Contract.

x)

The Contractor shall be responsible for any errors or omissions in the Contractors
drawings unless they are due to incorrect JKPDDs specification drawings or other
written information supplied by the JKPDD. Errors, if any, noticed by the Contractor
in the JKPDDs drawings, specification and other information shall, however, be
promptly pointed out by the Contractor to the JKPDD. Approval by the

Chief

Engineer, System & Operation Wing, Jammu of the Contractors drawings shall not
relieve the Contractor from any responsibility under this Sub-Clause.

xi)

The Contractor shall bear all costs which he may incur as a result of delay in
providing drawings and other information or as a result of errors or omissions
therein, for which he is responsible.

xii)

The Contractor shall, at his own cost, carry out any alterations or remedial work
necessitated by such errors or omissions for which he is responsible and modify the
drawings and such other information accordingly.

CLAUSE-7: CONTRACTORS GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES:

(i)

Contractor to carry out Work with care and diligence.

The Contractor shall, in accordance with the Contract and with due care and
diligence, design, manufacture, assemble, test at manufacturers Works before
dispatch, transport to site, store and preserve, assemble and

erect, test and

commission the Goods and carry out the Works within the Time for Completion. The

IV- xli

Contractor shall also provide all

necessary

plant, equipment and machinery,

superintendence, labor and all necessary facilities required for completion of works
thereof.

(ii)

Contractor Responsible for Stability and Safety of Site Operations.

The Contractor shall take full responsibility for the adequacy, stability and safety of
all site operations and methods of execution, notwithstanding any approval by the
Engineer-in-Charge. The Contractor shall provide, at his cost sufficient illumination,
firefighting equipment in and around the place of work to the satisfaction of Engineerin-Charge. Further, Contractor shall not dump any material along the

river embankment, any loss of any sought shall be the sole

responsibility of the contractor besides he should follow the safety
precautions as covered in Section-6 of this Document.
(iii)

Instructions and Orders in Site Order Book.

All instructions and orders given by the Engineer-in-Charge or his Representative at

site are to be maintained in the Site Order Book and shall be taken to have been
conveyed to the Contractor for his compliance.
(iv)

Contractors Site Office.

The Contractor must have a office/email id to receive normal correspondence between

10.00 AM and 5 PM on working days and urgent correspondence at any time on all
days.

(v)

Shift Works

To achieve the required progress, subject to availability of shutdowns, the Work may
be required to be carried out round the clock. The time for completion and number of
working days shall not be affected by the number of shifts each day. No extra amount
on account of any shift work is payable to the Contractor.

IV- xlii

(a)

Whenever the work is carried out in shifts, shutdown, notice to this effect shall
be given by the Contractor to the Engineer-in-Charge regarding the details of
Works he intends to carry out in shifts so that necessary supervision
arrangements can be made.

(vi)

Setting out

The Contractor shall set out the Works in relation to original points, lines, and levels
of reference given by the Engineer-in-Charge in writing, and shall provide all
necessary instruments, appliances and labour for such purposes. Further shifting of
point, lines and levels to the place of work shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor. Before starting the erection work, Contractor may check the accuracy of
points, lines and levels given by the Engineer-in-Charge

If, at any time during the execution of the Works, any error appears in the position,
levels, dimensions or alignment of the Works, the Contractor shall rectify the error.

The Contractor shall bear the cost of rectifying the error, unless the error results from
incorrect information supplied in writing by the Engineer-in-Charge or from default
by another contractor, i in which case the cost shall be borne by the JKPDD or the
other contractor as the case may be .

The checking of any setting out by the Engineer-in-Charge shall not absolve the
Contractor of his responsibility for accuracy thereof.

(vii)

Contractor to keep Site Clean

a)

During the progress of the Works, the Contractor shall keep the site
reasonably free from all unnecessary obstructions and shall remove from site
any of his plant, equipment and machinery, surplus material or temporary
works, no longer required. The Contractor shall also keep the site clean, tidy
and orderly at all times and remove from site any wreckage, rubbish, scrap,
packing material etc. promptly.

IV- xliii

b)

In case the Contractor does not keep the area clean and if found necessary to
get the area cleaned, the Engineer-in-Charge shall issue a notice of forty eight
hours to the Contractor. In the event of non compliance by the Contractor,
the Engineer-in-charge shall get the area cleaned by some other agency. The
cost of such cleaning shall be borne by the Contractor. In case of rubbish,
accumulating due to deposition by more than one Contractor, the share of
charges to be borne by the Contractors as indicated by the Engineer-inCharge shall be final.

(viii) Clearance of Site on Completion

On the completion of the Works, the contractor shall clear away and remove from the
Site all his plant, equipment and machinery, surplus materials, rubbish and Temporary
Works of every kind, and leave the whole of the Site and Works clean and in a
workman like condition to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge
(ix)

Giving of Notices, Payment of Fees and Compliance with Statutes and

Regulations etc.

a)

Giving of Notices and Payment of Fees

The Contractor shall give all notices and pay all fees required to be given or
paid under any National or State Statute, Ordinance, or other Law, or any
regulation, or bye-law of any local or other duly constituted authority in
relation to the execution of Works and by the rules and regulations of all
public bodies and companies whose property or rights are affected or may be
affected in any way by the Works.

b)

Compliance with Statutes, Regulations etc.

The Contractor shall conform, in all respects, with the provisions of any such
Statute, Ordinance or Law as aforesaid and the regulation or bye-law of any
local or other duly constituted authority which may be applicable to the Works

IV- xliv

and with such rules and regulations of public bodies and companies as
aforesaid and shall keep the JKPDD indemnified against all penalties and
liability of every kind for breach of any such Statute, Ordinance or Law,
regulation or bye-law.

c)

Statutory Obligations
If the cost to Contractor in the performance of the Contract shall be increased
or reduced by reasons of the making, passing or promulgation of any law after
30 days prior to the latest date of submission of bids, in J&K or any order,
regulation or by-law having the force of the law, the amount of such an
increase or reduction shall be added to or deducted from the Contract Price as
the case may be.

(x)

Opportunities for Other Contractors

(a)

The Contractor shall, in accordance with the requirements of the Engineer-inCharge, afford all reasonable opportunities for carrying out their Works to:
-

any other Contractors employed by the JKPDD, and workmen, and

the workmen of the JKPDD, and

the workmen of any duly constituted authorities who may be employed

in the execution on or near the Site of any work not included in the
Contract or of

any Contract which the JKPDD may enter into in

connection with or ancillary to the Works.

(b)

The Contractor shall jointly use with other Contractors and the JKPDD,
approach roads, access roads and adits, drainage and other facilities. The use
of other Contractors facilities shall be coordinated by the Engineer-in-Charge
between the Contractors, if required, for execution of the Works connected
with the project. (Cost, if any, on this account shall be settled between the
Contractors concerned).

IV- xlv

The use of common facilities shall be coordinated by the Engineer-in-Charge

through meetings of various parties. In case of any conflict, the decision of the
Engineer-in-Charge in the matter shall be binding on all the parties.

(c)

If any part of the Contractors work depends, for proper execution or results,
upon the work of any other Contractor, the Contractor shall inspect and
promptly report in writing to the Engineer-in-Charge, any defects in
work

that

such

render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. His

failure to inspect and report shall constitute an acceptance of other

Contractors work as fit and proper for the reception of his own work, except
as to defects, which may develop in the other Contractors work after the
proper execution of his own work.

(xi)

Patent Rights and Royalties.

(a)

The Contractor shall indemnify the JKPDD from and against all claims and
proceedings for or on account of infringement of any patent rights, designs,
trademark or name or other protected rights in respect of any of his plant,
equipment and machinery or materials used for or in connection with the
Works or any of them and from and against all claims, proceedings, damages,
costs, charges and expenses, whatsoever, in respect thereof or in relation
thereto.

Except where otherwise specified, the Contractor shall pay all royalties, rent
and other payments or compensation, if any, for getting any materials required
for the Works.

(b)

In the event of any claims made under or action brought against JKPDD in
respect of any such matters, as aforesaid, the Contractor shall be immediately,
notified thereof and the Contractor shall be at liberty, at his own expense, to
settle any disputes or to conduct any litigation that may arise there from,
provided that the Contractor shall not be liable to indemnify the JKPDD if the
infringement of the patent or design or any alleged patent or design right is the
direct result of an order passed by the Engineer-in-Charge in this behalf.
IV- xlvi

(xii)

Packing

a)

The Contractor shall provide such packing of the Goods as is required to

prevent their damage or deterioration during transit to the final destination as
indicated in the Contract.

The packing shall be sufficient to withstand,

without limitation, rough handling during transit and exposure to extreme

temperatures, humid and salt laden climate (where applicable) and
precipitation during transit and open storage. Packing case size and weights
shall take into consideration, the remoteness of the Goods final destination,
the existing road condition and the absence of heavy handling facilities at all
points in transit.

b)

Project storage site

The Contractor shall submit instructions for packing, handling, marking,

storage code and documentation within and outside the package for approval
by the Engineer-in-Charge. The packing, handling, marking, storage code and
documentation within and outside the package shall comply strictly with such
instructions. These instructions can be modified/changed at any time during
the execution of works by the Engineer-in-Charge and Contractor shall
comply with such instructions.

(xiii) Delivery and Documents

(a)

Delivery of the Goods shall be made by the Contractor in accordance with the
terms specified in the Contract. The Contractor shall warrant that the goods
supplied under the Contract are new, unused, as per approved/ BIS
specifications unless provided otherwise in the Contract.

The Contractor

further warrants that the goods supplied under this Contract shall have no
defect arising from design, materials workmanship, installation or erection or
from any act of omission of the supplier that may develop under normal use of
supplied goods in conditions available at site.

IV- xlvii

(b)

The Contractor shall carryout all the required tests at his /manufacturers
works. No material/goods shall be dispatched unless required tests have been
performed and Material Dispatch Clearance Certificate (MDCC) has been
issued by the Engineer-in-Charge after witnessing the tests.

(c)

The Contractor shall request the Engineer-in-Charge for issue of MDCC as

under:
i)

In case tests at works are not to be witnessed by JKPDD, Contractor

shall carryout these tests through reputed and recognized test houses
of India and submit the test certificates to Engineer-in-Charge for
waiver of inspection along request for issue of MDDC for that
component/ material.

ii)

In case test at works are to be witnessed by JKPDD, Contractor shall

submit test certificates to the Engineer-in-Charge after such
inspection along with a request for issue of MDCC for that
component.

The Contractor shall be responsible for arranging Import License and

Customs clearance (wherever required). The JKPDD will assist the Contractor
where required, in arranging Import License and Import Duty exemption
certificate and obtaining clearance through the Customs. Any assistance that
the JKPDD can give to the Contractor shall be provided on a no
responsibility basis.

(xiv)

Transportation and Storage/Preservation

(a)

The Contractor is required under the Contract to undertake transportation of

goods from

FOB/Ex-works to

Project Site including clearing,

forwarding and handling at port of entry, storage and preservation at site,

intermediate location (if any) and further transportation to work site, including
handling wherever required. All necessary transportation equipment including

IV- xlviii

lifting and handling equipment shall be provided and/or hired by the

Contractor at his own cost.

(b)

Where the Contractor is required to affect delivery under any other terms, for
example, by post or to another address, the Contractor shall be required to
meet all the expenses until delivery on the site.

(c)

It shall be mandatory for the Contractor to specify the unit rates and prices for
the mandatory spare parts specified in the Schedule of Prices. The JKPDD,
however, reserve the right, during the execution of Contract, to vary the
quantity of mandatory spare parts specified in the Schedule of Prices.

(xv)

Quality Assurance

In order to ensure that the Goods to be supplied under this Contract and the civil
works to be executed meet the specification requirements, the Contractor shall
prepare a comprehensive quality assurance plan and submit the same within 30 days
after commencement date of the Contract to the Engineer-in-charge for approval.
Any national, or International quality assurance certificate such as IS : 14000
series/ISO 9000 series obtained by the Contractor along with its validity period shall
be stated.

CLAUSE-8 : CONTRACT AGREEMENT:

The Contractor shall, when called upon to do so, enter into and execute a Contract
Agreement in the Proforma, with such modification as may be necessary.

CLAUSE-9 : PERFORMANCE SECURITY:

IV- xlix

(i)

For the due performance of the Contract, the Contractor shall, within 15 (fifteen)
days of receipt of notification of award but not later than the date of signing of the
Contract Agreement, furnish to the JKPDD, a performance security for an amount
equivalent to 10 (ten) percent of the Contract Price. The cost of complying with the
requirements of this Clause shall be borne by the Contractor

(ii)

The performance security shall be in the form of an irrevocable Bank Guarantee on

the Proforma (Annex-IV). The Bank Guarantee shall be in favour of the Executive
Engineer Grid Construction Division Jammu , issued by

any Nationalised

/Scheduled Indian Bank.

(iii)

The proceeds of the performance security shall be payable to JKPDD as

compensation for any loss, resulting from Contractors failure to complete his
obligation under the Contract.

(iv)

The performance security shall be valid until 30 days after the date expiry of Defects
Liability period. No claim shall be made against the performance security after the
expiry of the Defects Liability period and the performance security will be discharged
and returned to the Contractor thirty days after the Defects Liability Period.

(v)

If the completion of last Defects Liability Period is extended due to the delays
attributable to the Contractor, he shall, at his own cost, get the validity period of
Bank Guarantee extended. Bank charges for extension of validity period of Bank
Guarantee due to reasons attributable to JKPDD shall be borne by JKPDD. The
Contractor shall furnish the extended revised Bank Guarantee one month before the
expiry date of the Original Bank Guarantee or any extension thereof. In case the
extended/revised Bank Guarantee is not received by JKPDD within the specified
period, the JKPDD, entirely at its discretion, shall be at liberty to encash the
aforesaid Bank Guarantee.

IV- l

CLAUSE 10 : INSPECTION OF SITE:

(i)

The Contractor shall be deemed to have inspected and examined the Site and its
surroundings and information available in connection therewith and to have satisfied
himself, as to

(a)

the form and nature thereof

(b)

the hydrological and climatic conditions

(c)

the extent and nature of work, materials for construction necessary for the
execution and completion of the Works and remedying of any defects
therein, and

(ii)

The Contractor shall be responsible for the interpretation of any data supplied by the
JKPDD. In case of any ambiguity, the contractor shall seek clarification from the
Engineer-in-charge the interpretation issued by the Engineer-in-charge shall be final
and binding.

CLAUSE-11 : SUFFICIENCY OF BID:

The Contractor shall be deemed to have satisfied himself as to the correctness of the rates
and prices stated in the Schedule of Prices, all of which shall, except in so far as it is
otherwise provided in the Contract, cover all his obligations under the Contract and all
matters and things necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Works and
remedying of any defects therein.

IV- li

CLAUSE-12 : WORK TO BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONTRACT:

The Contractor shall execute and complete the Works and remedy any defects therein in
strict accordance with the Contract to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge and shall
comply with and adhere strictly to the Engineer-in-Charges instructions and directions on
any matter whether mentioned in the Contract or not, touching or concerning the Works.
The Contractor shall take instructions and directions only from the Engineer-in-Charge, or ,
subject to the limitations referred to in Clause-2 hereof, from the Engineer-in-charges
Representative.

CLAUSE-13: PROGRAMME TO BE FURNISHED:

(i)

The Contractor shall within 30 days after the issue of LOA, submit to the Engineer-inCharge, for his approval a detailed work programme in Primavera alongwith 2 sets
of CDs of same indicating the following:

(a)

The order in which the Contractor proposes to carry out the Works (including
design, manufacture, supply, erection, testing and commissioning) so as to
complete the works within specified time schedule.

(b)

The times when submission and approval of the Contractors drawings are
(required time frame for this shall conform to that set out under Clause-6
hereof).

IV- lii

(c)

The times by which the Contractor requires the JKPDD

to furnish data/specification drawings, if any

to have completed any other associated Works

The approval by the Engineer-in-charge shall not relieve the Contractor from
any of his obligations under the Contract.

(ii)

The Contractor shall, supply to the Engineer-in-Charge, at such times as he may

direct during the progress of the Works, such written particulars, photographs and
information as are reasonably required by the Engineer-in Charge to enable a
progress record to be maintained in respect of the Works.

(iii)

The Contractor shall also submit a narrative report periodically with updated analysis
which shall include but not be limited to the description of the problem areas,
current and anticipated, delaying factors and their impact and an explanation of the
corrective actions taken or proposed.

CLAUSE-14 : CONTRACTORS SUPERINTENDENCE:

The Contractor shall provide all necessary superintendence during the execution of the
Works and as long thereafter as the Engineer-in-Charge may

consider necessary for the

proper fulfilling of the Contractors obligations under the Contract. The Contractor, or a
competent and authorized representative approved in writing by the Engineer-in-Charge,
which approval may at any time be withdrawn, shall give his whole time to the
superintendence of the Works. Such authorized representative shall receive on behalf of
the Contractor, instructions from the Engineer-in-Charge or subject to the provisions of
Clause-2 hereof the Engineer-in-Charges Representative. If approval of the representative
is withdrawn by the Engineer-in-Charge, the Contractor shall, as soon as is practicable,

IV- liii

having regard to the requirement of replacing him as herein after mentioned, after receiving
notice of such withdrawal, remove the representative from the Works and shall not
thereafter employ him again on the Works in any capacity and shall replace him by another
representative approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.

CLAUSE-15: CONTRACTORS EMPLOYEES:

(i)

The Contractor shall provide on the Site in connection with the execution and the
completion of the Works and the remedying of any defects therein;

(a)

only

such technical assistants as are skilled and

experienced in their

respective trades and such foremen and leading hands as are competent to
give proper superintendence of the Works; and

(b)

such skilled, semi-skilled and unskilled labour as is necessary for the proper
and timely fulfilling of the Contractors obligations under the Contract.

(ii)

The Engineer-in-Charge shall be at liberty to object to and require the Contractor to

remove forthwith from the Works any person provided by the Contractor who in the
opinion of the Engineer-in- Charge, misconducts himself, or is incompetent or
negligent in the proper performance of his duties, or whose presence on the site is
otherwise considered by the Engineer-in-Charge to be undesirable and such persons
shall not be again allowed upon the Works without the written consent of the
Engineer-in-Charge. Any person so removed from the Works shall be replaced as
soon as possible by a competent substitute approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.

CLAUSE-16: SAFETY, SECURITY AND PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT:

IV- liv

The contractor shall, throughout the execution and completion of the Works and the
remedying of an defects therein;
(i)

Have all the regard for the safety of all persons entitled to be on the site ad keep the
site (so far as the danger to such persons, and

(ii)

provide and maintain, at his own cost all lights, guards, fencing, warning signs and
watching, when and where necessary or required by the Engineer-in-Charge or his
representative or by any duly constituted authority, for the protection of the
machines, equipment, Works or for the safety and convenience of the public or
others, and

(iii)

take all reasonable steps to protect the environment on and off the site and to avoid
damage or nuisance to persons or to property of the public or others resulting from
pollution, noise or other causes arising as a consequence of his methods of
operation, and shall preserve and protect all existing vegetation such as trees on or
adjacent to the site which do not unreasonably interfere with the execution of the
Works. The Contractor shall be held responsible for all unauthorized cutting of and
damage to trees, by careless operation of his plant, equipment and machinery and
stockpiling of materials etc. and the JKPDD shall have no responsibility on this
account.

CLAUSE-17: OBLIGATIONS OF THE JKPDD:

(i)

Access to and Possession of the Site

The JKPDD shall, in reasonable time grant the Contractor access to and possession of
the site, which may, however, not be exclusive to the Contractor.

(ii)

Civil Works on Site

IV- lv

The Civil Works on the site if any, to be provided by the JKPDD shall be in a condition
suitable for the reception, movement, installation and maintenance of the Works
within the time or times indicated in the programme. The civil works required for
completion of the works, shall however be carried out by the Contractor under the
Contract.

CLAUSE-18: LABOUR:
(i)

Engagement of Labour

The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for the engagement of all labour,
local or otherwise, for the transport, housing, food, medical care etc. at his own
expenses.

(ii)

Supply of Water

The Contractor shall, so far as is reasonably practicable, provide on the site, to the
satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge or Engineer-in-Charges Representative, an
adequate supply of drinking and other water for the use of his staff and workmen.

The contractor shall arrange, at his cost, water for construction purposes at site.

(iii)

Epidemics

In the event of any outbreak of illness of an epidemic nature, the Contractor shall
comply with and carry out such regulation, orders and requirements as may be made

IV- lvi

by the Government, or the local medical or sanitary authorities for the purpose of
dealing with and overcoming the same.

(iv)

Disorderly Conduct etc.

The Contractor shall, at all times, take all reasonable precautions to prevent any
unlawful, riotous or disorderly conduct by or amongst his staff and labour and for
the preservation of peace and protection, of persons and property in the
neighborhood of the Works.

(v)

Contractor to follow Labour Laws

The Contractor shall, in respect of labour employed by him, comply with the
provision of the various Labour Laws, Minimum Wages Act as per

Rules and

Regulation as applicable and shall indemnify the JKPDD in respect of all claims that
may be made against the JKPDD for non-compliance thereof by the Contractor. In
case of non compliance by the contractor, the Engineer-in-Charge may take such
actions as may be necessary for compliance of the various Labour Laws and recover
the costs thereof from the Contractor.

(vi)

Housing for Labour

Save insofar as the Contract otherwise provides, the Contractor shall provide and
maintain such accommodation and amenities as he may consider necessary for all
his staff and labour, employed for the purpose of or in connection with the Contract,
including all fencing, water supply (both for drinking and other purposes), electricity
supply, sanitation, cook houses, fire prevention and firefighting equipment, and
other requirements in connection with such accommodation or amenities. On
completion of the Contract, unless otherwise agreed with the JKPDD, the temporary

IV- lvii

camps/housing provided by the Contractor shall be removed and the Site reinstated
to its original condition, to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge.

(vii)

Accident Prevention Officer

The Contractor shall have on his staff on Site an officer dealing only with questions
regarding the safety and protection against accidents of all staff and labour. This
officer shall be qualified for this work and shall have the authority to issue
instructions and shall take protective measures to prevent accidents.

(viii)

Observance by Sub-Contractors

The Contractor shall be responsible for observance by his sub-contractors of the

aforesaid provisions.

CLAUSE-19: WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS:

(i)

Manner of execution

The goods to be supplied shall be manufactured and all Works to be done shall be
executed in the manner set out in the Contract.

Where the manner of manufacture and execution is not set out in the Contract, the
Work shall be executed in a proper and workman like manner in accordance with
recognised good practices.

IV- lviii

(ii)

Covering up work

The Contractor shall give the Engineer-in-Charge full opportunity to examine,

measure and test any work on site which is about to be covered up or put out of
view.

The Contractor shall give due notice to the Engineer-in-Charge whenever such work
is ready for examination, measurement or testing.

The Engineer-in-Charge shall then, unless otherwise, notifies the Contractor that he
considers it unnecessary, without unreasonable delay carry out the examination,
measurement or testing.

(iii)

Uncovering work

If so instructed by the Engineer-in-Charge, the Contractor shall expose any parts of

the works.

The Contractor shall reinstate and make good such works to the

satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge.

CLAUSE-20: INSPECTION AND TESTING:

(i)

Independent Inspection

The Engineer-in-Charge shall have the right to inspect and/or to test the goods to
confirm their conformity to the Contract specifications at no extra cost to the
Purchaser.

The Technical Specifications shall specify the inspection and tests

required by Engineer-in-Charge. The Engineer-in-Charge may, delegate inspection

and testing of contracted equipment or a part thereof to an independent Inspector

IV- lix

and such independent Inspector shall be considered as the Engineer-in-Charges

Representative. Notice of such appointment shall be given by the Engineer-inCharge to the Contractor.

(ii)

Inspection and Testing During Fabrication/Manufacture

Any departmental representative or independent inspector nominated by

Engineer-in-charge shall be entitled during fabrication/manufacture to inspect,
examine and test the materials and workmanship and check the progress of
fabrication/manufacture of the Goods to be supplied

under

the Contract. This

shall take place in the Contractors/manufacturers premises. If the Goods are being
fabricated/manufactured on other premises, the Contractor shall obtain permission
from the Engineer-in-charge to carry out such inspection, examination and testing on
those premises.

The contractor shall certify that his persons conducting the tests are qualified
specialist on the subject matter of relevant tests.

No such inspection, examination or testing shall release the Contractor from any
obligation under the Contract.

(iii)

Dates for Inspection and Testing

The Contractor shall give at least 15 days notice to the Chief Engineer, System &
Operation Wing Jammu regarding his intention to carry out the tests. The
Contractor shall agree with the Chief Engineer, System & Operation Wing Jammu
about the time and place for the testing of the Goods as provided in the Contract.
The inspector nominated by Chief Engineer, System & Operation Wing Jammu shall
give the Contractor at least 24 hours notice of his intention to attend the tests.

IV- lx

(iv)

Facilities for Testing

Where the Contract provides for tests on the premises of the Contractor or of any
sub-contractor/ manufacturer, the Contractor shall arrange for to and fro travel,
boarding and lodging of two representative of CE, S&O Wing, Jammu shall be
borne by the contractor,

(v)

Certificate of Testing

When the Goods have passed the tests referred to in this Contract, the Chief
Engineer, System & Operation Wing Jammu shall furnish to the Contractor a
certificate within 15 days.

(vi)

Rejection

If, as a result of the inspection, examination or testing, the Engineerin-Charge

decides that any work/equipment/material is defective or otherwise not in
accordance with the Contract/specifications, he may reject such work and shall
notify the Contractor thereof immediately. The notice shall state the Engineer-inCharges objections with reasons.

The Contractor shall then, with all speed, make good the defect or ensure that any
rejected work complies with the Contract.

If the Engineer-in-Charge requires such Works to be re-tested, the tests shall be

repeated under the same terms and conditions. All costs incurred for the repetition
of the tests shall be borne by the Contractor.

IV- lxi

CLAUSE-21: SUSPENSION OF WORKS, TRANSPORTATION OR ERECTION:

(i)

Order to Suspend

The Engineer-in-Charge may, at any time instruct the Contractor to:

(a)

Suspend progress of the Works, or

(b)

Suspend transportation of the Goods, if fabricated/ manufactured at a place

other than on the site, which are ready for transportation to the site at the
time specified in the programme, or if no time is specified, at the time
appropriate for it to be transported, or

(c)

Suspend the erection of the Goods which have been delivered to the site

The Contractor shall, during suspension, protect and secure the Works or Goods
affected at the Contractors Works or elsewhere or on the site, as the case may be,
against any deterioration, loss or damage.

(ii)

Cost of Suspension

The additional cost, if any, incurred by the Contractor in protecting, securing and
insuring the Works or the Goods in following the Engineer-in-Charges instructions
under Sub-clause (i) of this Clause and in resumption of the Work, shall be added to
the Contract Price.

IV- lxii

The Contractor shall not be entitled to be paid any additional costs if such
suspension is necessary by reason of some default on the part of Contractor.

The Contractor shall not be entitled to additional costs unless he notifies the
Engineer-in-Charge of his intention to make such claim, within 30 days after receipt
of the order to suspend progress or transportation or erection.

(iii)

Suspension Lasting more than 90 days

If suspension has continued for more than 90 days, and the suspension is not due to
Contractors default, the Contractor may, by written notice to the Engineer- inCharge, request for permission within 30 days after the expiry of the above period
to proceed with the Works.

If permission is not granted within that time, the Contractor may treat the
suspension as an omission, of the section it affects or if the suspension affects the
whole of the Works, as an abandonment of the Contract by the JKPDD.

CLAUSE-22: TIME FOR COMPLETION, EFFECTIVE DATE AND COMMENCEMENT

DATE:

The Contract shall become effective on the date of signing of Contract Agreement
between JKPDD & successful bidder. The effective date shall be considered as
commencement date.

IV- lxiii

The time for completion shall be reckoned from Commencement Date i.e. the date
of signing of Contract Agreement/LOA whichever is earlier between JKPDD &
successful bidder.

The complete work is to be completed within 09 Months of Contract Agreement

between JKPDD & successful bidder. The bidder shall submit a bar chart along with
the bid giving schedule for completion of entire works covering supply as well as
services indicating commencement and completion of each activity and foundation
work considering zero date as the date of signing of Contract Agreement between
JKPDD & successful bidder.

The Works shall be completed and shall have passed the tests as per the prevalent
Regulations/Act on completion within the time indicated above.

CLAUSE-23: EXTENSION OF TIME FOR COMPLETION:

The Contractor may claim an extension of the Time for Completion, if the completion
of the Works is delayed by any of the following causes:

(i)

Extra or additional work ordered in writing under Clause-31 hereof.

(ii)

Delay by any other Contractor engaged by the JKPDD, which affects this contract
materially.

(iii)

Any suspension of the works under Clause-22 hereof except when due to the
Contractors default.

(iv)

Any force majeure conditions.

IV- lxiv

(v)

Delay on the part of the PDD in providing approvals/ clearances.

The Contractor shall give to the Engineer-in-charge, notice of his intention to make a
claim for an extension of time within 14 days of the circumstances for becoming
known to the Contractor for such an extension. The notice shall be followed as soon
as possible with full supporting details.

The Engineer-in-charge will evaluate such details and grant the Contractor from time
to time, either prospectively or retrospectively, such extension of Time for
Completion as may be justified provided always that, the circumstances leading to
the extension of Time for completion are other than through a default of the
Contractor. The Engineer-in-charge shall notify the Contractor accordingly.

CLAUSE-24: RATE OF PROGRESS:

If for any reason, which does not entitle the Contractor to an extension of Time for
Completion, the rate of progress of the Works or any section at any time is not
commensurate with the time for completion set out under clause 23 here of and in
the opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge does not ensure completion by the prescribed
Time or extended Time for Completion, the Engineer-in-Charge shall so notify the
Contractor in writing and the Contractor shall thereupon take such steps as are
necessary and the Engineer-in-Charge may approve to expedite progress so as to
complete the Works or such section by the prescribed time or extended time. The
Contractor shall not be entitled to any additional payment for taking such steps.

CLAUSE-25: LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR DELAY:

If the Contractor fails to complete the Work well within stipulated time as per the
bar chart submitted by the Contractor, the purchaser shall, without prejudice to its

IV- lxv

other remedies under the Contract, deduct the amount from any moneys in its
hands, due or which may become due to the Contractor, as liquidated damages a
sum equivalent to 0.5% of the balance work of contract price per week or part of
the week subject to a maximum of 10% of the contract price.

The payment or deduction of such damages shall not relieve the Contractor from
his obligations to complete the works or from any of his obligations and liabilities
under the Contract.

CLAUSE-26: PROLONGED DELAY:

If at any time it appears to the Engineer-in-Charge that the Contractor is unable to
adhere to the prescribed time schedule and the delay is not due to a cause for which
the JKPDD or some other Contractor employed by it is responsible or if the aggregate
of the liquidated damages levied in terms of the provisions under Clause-25 hereof
has reached a maximum of ten percent of the Contract Price, then the JKPDD may at
its discretion, by further notice to the Contractor either:
i)

require the Contractor to complete, or

ii)

may itself complete at the Contractors risk and cost, provided that it does so in a
reasonable manner, or

iii)

Terminate the Contract.

If the JKPDD terminates the Contract, it shall be entitled to recover from the

Contractor any loss it has suffered.

CLAUSE-27: TESTS ON COMPLETION:

(i)

Notice of Tests

The Contractor shall give to the Engineer-in-Charge, fifteen days notice of the date
after which he will be ready to make the Tests on completion hereinafter called the

IV- lxvi

Tests. Unless otherwise agreed, the Tests shall take place within fifteen days after
the said date, on such day or days as the Engineer-in-Charge notifies the Contractor.

(ii)

Time for Tests

If the Engineer-in-Charge fails to notify a time after having been asked to do so, or
does not attend at the time and place notified, the Contractor shall be entitled to
proceed with the Test in his absence and such tests shall be deemed to have been
carried out in the presence of Engineer-in-charge.

(iii)

Delayed Tests

If the Tests are being unduly delayed by Contractor, the Engineer-in-Charge may, by
a notice, require the Contractor to make the Tests within twenty one days after the
receipt of such notice. The Contractor shall make the Tests on such days within that
period as the Contractor may fix and of which he shall give notice to the Engineer-incharge.

If the Contractor fails to make the Tests within twenty one days, the Engineer-inCharge may himself proceed with the Tests. All Tests so made by the Engineer-inCharge shall be at the risk and cost of the Contractor and the cost thereof shall be
deducted from the Contract Price. The Tests shall then be deemed to have been
made in the presence of the Contractor and the results of the Tests shall be accepted
as accurate.

(iv)

Facilities for Tests on Completion

IV- lxvii

Except where otherwise specified, the Contractor shall provide, at his cost, such
labour, materials, electricity, fuel, apparatus, and other necessary equipments as
may be required to carry out the Tests.

(v)

Re-Testing

If the Works or any section fails to pass the Tests, the Engineer-in-Charge may
require such Tests to be repeated on the same terms and conditions. The costs on
account of repetition of the Tests under this Sub-Clause or

under

Sub-Clause-

30 (vii) hereof shall be borne by the Contractor.

(vi)

Disagreement as to Results of Tests

If the Engineer-in-Charge and the Contractor disagree on the interpretation of the

Test results, each shall give a statement of his views to the other within fourteen
days after such disagreement arises. The statement shall be accompanied by all
relevant evidence. In case of such disagreement, the decision of Chief Engineer,
System & Operation Wing Jammu JKPDD shall be final.

(vii)

Consequences of Failure to Pass Tests on Completion

If the Works or any section fails to pass the Tests on the repetition, the Engineer-inCharge shall be entitled to:

(a)

order one further repetition of the Tests as per the SBD,or

(b)

Reject the Works or section in which event the contractor shall replace that
part of work or section without any cost to the purchaser within reasonable

IV- lxviii

time without affecting the completion schedule. Testing on this part of work
or section shall be performed in the presence of Engineer-in charge or his
representative as per procedure specified above.

(viii)

Use by the JKPDD

In considering the results of Tests carried out, the Engineer-in-Charge shall make
allowances for the effect of any use of the Works by the JKPDD on the performance
on other characteristics of the Works.

CLAUSE-28: TAKING OVER:

(i)

Taking over

The Works shall be taken over by the JKPDD when they have been completed in
accordance with the Contract and duly inspected & cleared for energisation by
Electrical Inspection Agency of JKPDD, except in minor respects that do not affect
the use of the Works for their intended purpose, have passed the Tests on
Completion and a Taking Over Certificate has been issued. The spares, testing
instruments & devices, tools & tackles and consumables etc required for operation &
maintenance of Substation shall be taken over by JKPDD at the time of issue of last
taking over certificate of works under the Contract.
(ii)

Taking Over Certificate

The Contractor may apply to the Engineer-in-Charge for issue of a Taking Over
Certificate not earlier than fourteen days before he proposes to carry out
commissioning and acceptance tests on each equipment of the substation.

IV- lxix

The Engineer-in-Charge shall, within thirty days after the receipt of the Contractors
application either:

(a)

Issue the Taking Over Certificate to the Contractor stating the date on which
the Works were complete and ready for taking over, or

(b)

Reject the application giving his reasons and specifying the work required to
be done by the Contractor to enable the Taking over Certificate to be issued.

If the Works are divided by the Contract into sections, the Contractor shall be
entitled to apply for separate Taking Over Certificates for each such section.

(iii)

Use before Taking Over

The JKPDD shall not use any part of the Works unless a Taking over Certificate has
been issued in respect thereof.

If nevertheless, the JKPDD uses any part of the Works, that part which is used shall
be deemed to have been taken over at the date of such use.

The

Engineer-in-

Charge shall on request of the Contractor, issue a Taking over Certificate accordingly.
If the JKPDD uses any part of the Works before taking over, the Contractor shall be
given the earliest opportunity of taking such steps as may be necessary to carry out
the Test on Completion.
The Works shall not be deemed to have been taken over if they are not substantially
in accordance with the Contract.

The provisions set out under Clauses-28 and 30 hereof shall apply as if the part had
been taken over on the date it was taken into use.

IV- lxx

The Works shall not be deemed to have been taken over if they are not substantially
in accordance with the Contract.

CLAUSE -29 : DEFECTS AFTER TAKING OVER:

(i)

Defects Liability Period

a)

The expression Defects Liability Period shall mean a period of

Twelve months from the date the Works are taken over and the Taking Over
Certificate is issued.

Where any part of the Works is taken over separately, the Defects Liability
Period for that part shall commence on the date it was taken over.

b)

The defect liability period for each item of mandatory spare parts shall

be 12 months after particular spare item has been put into operation/
supplied whichever is later.

(ii)

Notice of Defects

If any defect appears or damage occurs during the defect liability period, the
Engineer-in-Charge shall forthwith notify the Contractor thereof. However, delay or

IV- lxxi

failure of the Engineer-in-Charge in notifying shall not relieve the Contractor from his
liability for remedying the defects at his own cost.

(iii)

Making Good Defects

Upon the receipt of such notice the Contractor shall be responsible for making good
any defect in or damage to any part of the Works which may appear or occur during
the Defects liability Period and which arises from either;

(a)

any defective materials, workmanship or design, or

(b)

Any act or omission of the Contractor during the Defects Liability Period.

The Contractor shall make good the defect or damage as soon as practicable and at
his own cost.

(iv)

Extension of Defects Liability Period

The provisions of this Clause shall apply to all replacements or renewals carried out
by the Contractor as if the replacement and renewals had been taken over on the
date they were completed.

The Defects Liability Period for the Works shall be extended by a period equal to the
period during which the Works cannot be used by reasons of a defect or damage. If
only a part of the Works is affected, the Defect Liability Period shall be extended only
for that part.
In neither case shall the Defects Liability Period be extended by more than twelve
months.

IV- lxxii

(v)

Failure to Remedy Defects

If the Contractor fails to remedy a defect or damage within a reasonable time, the
Engineer-in-Charge may fix a final time for remedying the defect or damage.

(a)

If the Contractor fails to do so, the Engineer-in-Charge may Carry out the
work himself or by others at the Contractors risk and cost. The costs actually
incurred by the Engineer-in-Charge in remedying the defect or damage shall
be recovered from any payments due or which may become due to the
Contractor.

(vi)

Removal of Defective Work

If the defect or damage is such that repairs cannot be expeditiously carried out on
the site, the Contractor may, with the consent of the Engineer-in-Charge and after
furnishing a proper security acceptable to the JKPDD in case the item is paid for,
remove from the site, for the purposes of repair, any part of the Works which is
defective or damaged.

(vii)

Further Tests on Completion

If the replacements or renewals are such that they may affect the performance of
the Works, the Engineer-in-Charge may request that the Tests on Completion be
repeated to the extent necessary. The request shall be made by notice within thirty
days after the replacement of renewal. The Tests shall be carried out in accordance
with Clause-28 hereof.

(viii)

Right of Access
IV- lxxiii

Until the Final Certificate of Payment has been issued, the Contractor shall have the
right of access to all parts of the Works and to records of the working and
performance of the Works.

Such right of access shall be during the JKPDDs normal working hours at the
Contractors risk and cost. Access shall also be granted to any duly authorised
representative of the Contractor, whose name has been communicated in writing to
the Engineer-in-Charge.

Subject to the Engineer-in-Charges approval, the Contractor may also, at his own
risk and cost, make any tests which he considers desirable.

(ix)

Defects Liability Certificate

When the Defect, Liability Period for the Works or any part thereof has expired and
the Contractor has fulfilled all his obligations under the Contract for defects in the
Works or that part, the Engineer-in-Charge shall issue, within thirty days, to the
Contractor, a Defects Liability Certificate to that effect.

No certificate other than the Defects Liability Certificate referred to herein above
shall be deemed to constitute approval of the Works.

(x)

Exclusive Remedies

IV- lxxiv

The JKPDDs remedies under this Clause shall be in place of and to the exclusion of
any other remedy in relation to defects whatsoever.

CLAUSE-30: VARIATIONS:
Rates quoted shall be firm inclusive of all taxes viz E.D, WCT, Entry Tax,
Package & Forwarding Tax, Freight & Insurance, Local Taxes, etc. No price
variation of any sort on any account shall be allowed. Rates of all items
mentioned in THE B.O.Q. shall be FIRM however quantities of civil works may
vary by +/-20%.

CLAUSE-31: PAYMENT TERMS AND MODE OF PAYMENT:

i)

Payment Terms for supply, erection, testing and commissioning of Main

equipment/ conductor and all other allied materials including Power Transformer.
a)

10% of contract price shall be given as mobilization advance as interest

bearing at the rate of 15% against bank guarantee of 110% of the
mobilization advance issued by any nationalized/ scheduled bank. The
mobilization advance shall be recovered from progressive payments of
the contractors within 12 Months failing which the same shall be
recovered by way of encashment of bank guarantee.

b)

80% of payment shall be released against the quantities of civil works

executed viz control room building/Santry post which should be
completed as per the Bar Chart submitted.

c)

90% of Contract Price of goods/ equipment, shall be paid as progressive

payment on the receipt of goods/ equipment at site and on submission of
suppliers commercial invoice in triplicate, copy of GR/RR, copy of packing
list, Material Despatch Clearance Certificate (MDCC), Indemnity Bond as
per format annexed at Annexure-X, Material receipt certificate based on
packing list issued by representative of Engineer-in-charge after receipt of

IV- lxxv

goods at site and copy of insurance policy(s) taken by the Contractor as

per provision of Contract.

The balance payment of the contract price shall be made after successful
erection, testing & commissioning and issuance of inspection clearance
certificate by inspection agency of J&K,PDD within 30 days thereafter.

ii) WORK CONTRACT TAX:-Deduction towards work contract tax and

income tax shall be as per the prevailing rates and shall be made from
every interim payment by the Executive Engineer in-charge project. Any
increase in work contract tax shall be borne by the bidder and increase in
negative side shall pass on to the department.

CLAUSE-32: CURRENCIES FOR PAYMENTS:

The Payments shall be made in Indian Rupees.

CLAUSE-33: RISK AND RESPONSIBILITY:

(i)

Allocation of Risks and Responsibility

The Risks of loss of or damage to physical property and of death and personal injury,
which arise in consequence of the performance of the Contract shall be allocated
between the JKPDD and the Contractor as follows:

(a)

The JKPDD: the JKPDDs Risks as specified in Sub-Clause (ii) below.

(b)

The contractor: the Contractors Risks specified in Sub-Clause. (iii) below.

IV- lxxvi

(ii)

JKPDDs Risks

The JKPDDs Risks are:

(a)

loss or damage due to the use or occupation of the Works or any part thereof
by the JKPDD; except as may be provided for in the Contract;

(b)

Loss or damage to the extent that it is due to the design of any part of the
Works by the JKPDD or those for whom the JKPDD is responsible.

(iii)

Contractors Risks:

The Contractors Risks are all risks other than those identified as the JKPDDs Risks.

CLAUSE-34: CARE OF THE WORKS AND PASSING OF RISK:

(i)

Contractors Responsibility for the Care of the Works.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the care of the Works or any section thereof
from the Commencement Date until the Risk Transfer Date applicable thereto under
Sub-Clause (ii) of this Clause.
The Contractor shall also be responsible for the care of any part of the Works upon
which any outstanding work is being performed by the Contractor during the Defects
Liability Period until completion of such outstanding work.

(ii)

Risk Transfer Date

The Risk Transfer Date in relation to the Works or a section thereof is the earliest of
either:
(a)

the date of issue of the Taking Over Certificate, or

IV- lxxvii

(b)

the date when the Works are deemed to have been taken over in accordance
with Clause-30 hereof, or

(c)

The date of expiry of the notice of termination when the Contract is

terminated by the JKPDD in accordance with these Conditions.

(iii)

Passing of Risk of Loss or of Damage to the Works

The risk of loss or of damage to the Works or any section thereof shall pass from the
Contractor to the JKPDD on the Risk Transfer Date applicable thereto.

(iv)

Loss or Damage Before Risk Transfer Date

Loss of or damage to the Works or any section thereof occurring before the Risk
Transfer Date shall:
(a)

to the extent caused by any of the Contractors risks, be made good forthwith
by the Contractor at his own cost, and

(b)

to the extent caused by any of the JKPDDs Risks, be made good by the
Contractor at the JKPDDs expense if so required by the Engineer-in-Charge
within thirty days of the occurrence of the loss or damage. The price for
making good such loss and damage shall be in all circumstances reasonable
and shall be agreed by the JKPDD and the Contractor, or in the absence of
agreement, the JKPDD shall fix a reasonable price which shall be final and
binding.

(v)

Loss or Damage after Risk Transfer Date

After the Risk Transfer Date, the Contractors liability in respect of loss of or damage
to any part of the Works shall, except in the case of gross misconduct, be limited:
(a)

to the fulfillment of the Contractors obligations under Clause-30 hereof in

respect of defects therein, and

(b)

to making good forthwith loss or damage caused by the Contractor during

the Defects Liability Period.

IV- lxxviii

CLAUSE-35: DAMAGE TO PROPERTY AND INJURY TO PERSONS:

(i)

Contractors Liability

Except as provided under Sub-Clause (iii) of this Clause, the Contractor shall be liable
for and shall indemnify the JKPDD against all losses, expenses and claims in respect
of any loss of or damage to physical property, death or personal injury occurring
before the issue of the last Defects Liability Certificate to the extent caused by;

(a)

Defective design, material or workmanship of the Contractor.

(b)

Negligence or breach of statutory duty of the Contractor, his sub-contractors

or their respective employees and agents.

(ii)

JKPDDs Liability

The JKPDD shall be liable for and shall indemnify the Contractor against all losses,
expenses or claims in respect of loss of or damage to any physical property or of
death or personal injury whenever occurring, to the extent caused by any of the
JKPDDs Risks.

(iii)

Accidents

The Contractor shall be liable for and shall indemnify the JKPDD against all losses,
expenses or claims arising in connection with the death of or injury to any person
employed by the Contractor or his sub-contractors for the purposes of the Works,
unless caused by any defaults of the Engineer-in-Charge or other Contractors
engaged by the JKPDD or by their respective employees or agents and in such cases

IV- lxxix

the JKPDD shall be liable for and shall indemnify the Contractor against all losses,
expenses and claims arising in connection therewith.

CLAUSE-36: LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY:

(i)

Liability after expiration of Defects Liability Period

The Contractor shall have no liability to the JKPDD for any loss of or damage to the
JKPDDs physical property which occurs after the expiration of the Defects Liability
Period unless caused by gross misconduct of the Contractor.

(ii)

Mitigation of Loss or Damage

In all cases the party claiming a breach of Contract or a right to be indemnified in

accordance with the Contract shall be obliged to take all reasonable measures to
mitigate the loss or damage.

CLAUSE-37: INSURANCE
(i)

The Contractor shall take all risk insurance cover for the full value of the contract plus
15% thereon from EX-Works till the expiry of the defects liability period naming
JKPDD as the beneficiary. In case erection and /or commissioning is delayed due to
any reason, the period of insurance shall be extended to cover the actual defect
liability period.. The insurance cover shall be taken against any loss or damage during;

IV- lxxx

a)

Transportation of the Goods including loading/unloading, from the

manufacturers place to the place of installation viz FOR at site including
storage etc..

b)

Erection testing and commissioning and;

c)

The Defects Liability Period.

The goods supplied under the Contract shall be comprehensively insured through
Insurance companies in India to cover all risks including but not limited to floods,
riots, earthquakes, any other natural calamities etc. against loss or damages
incidental to manufacture till the defect liability period. For the items lost/damaged
during the entire period of insurance, the claim for the same will be lodged by the
Contractor with the insurance company and replacement will be made by the
Contractor expeditiously without any cost to the purchaser.

The claim ascertained by the insurance company on account of loss or damage will
be passed on to the Contractor after the Contractor has made good the loss or
damage.

(ii)

Contractors Plant, Equipment and Machinery

The Contractor shall insure his plant, equipment and machinery brought on to the
site for its full replacement value, while on the site against any loss or damage
caused by any of the Contractors Risks.

(iii)

Third Party Insurance

a)

The Contractor shall insure against his liability due to any act or omission on
the part of Contractor, his agents, his employees, his representatives and
sub-Contractors or from riots, strikes and civil commotion for any material or

IV- lxxxi

physical damage, loss or injury which may occur to any property, including
that of the JKPDD, or to any person, including any employee of the JKPDD, by
or arising out of the execution of the Works or in the performance of the
Contract and occurring before the issue of the last Defects Liability
Certificate.

b)

In the event of any claim in respect of which the Contractor would be entitled
to receive indemnity under the policy being brought or made against the
JKPDD, the insurer will indemnify the JKPDD against such claims and any
costs, charges and expenses in respect thereof.

(iv)

Employees

The Contractor shall insure and maintain insurance against his liability under SubClause-36 (iii) hereof.

CLAUSE-38: FORCE MAJEURE:

(i)

Definition of Force Majeure

Force Majeure means any circumstances beyond the control of the parties, including
but not limited to:

a)

war and other hostilities, (whether war be declared or not), invasion, act of
foreign enemies, requisition or embargo;

b)

rebellion, revolution, insurrection, military or usurped power and civil war;

IV- lxxxii

c)

ionising radiation or contamination by radio activity from any nuclear fuel or

from any nuclear waste from the combustion of nuclear fuel, radio-active
toxic explosives, or other hazardous properties of any explosive nuclear
assembly or nuclear components thereof;

d)

Riot, commotion or disorder, except where solely restricted to employees of

the Contractor or of his sub-contractors.

e)

(ii)

Earthquake affecting Contractors work.

Effect of Force Majeure

Neither party shall be considered to be in default or in breach of his obligations

under the Contract to the extent that performance of such obligations is prevented
by any circumstances of Force Majeure which arise after the date of the Letter of
Award or the date when the Contract becomes effective, whichever is the earlier.

(iii)

Notice of Occurrence

If either party considers that any circumstances of Force Majeure have occurred
which may affect performance of his obligations, he shall promptly notify the other
party.

(iv)

Performance to Continue

Upon the occurrence of any situation of Force Majeure, the Contractor shall
endeavour to continue to perform his obligations under the Contract so far as
reasonably practicable. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer-in-Charge of the
IV- lxxxiii

steps he proposes to take including any reasonable alternative means for

performance which is not prevented by Force Majeure. The Contractor shall not
take any such steps unless directed so to do by the Engineer-in-Charge.

(v)

Additional Costs caused by Force Majeure

If the Force Majeure events exceed a period of six months and if the Contractor
incurs additional costs in complying with the Engineer-in-Charges directions under
Sub-Clause (iv) of this Clause then, the Contractor shall be compensated for the
additional costs and expenses during the period of Force Majeure exceeding six
months and for the costs and expenses to be incurred for the continuation of
execution of the Contract.

(vi)

Termination in Consequence of Force Majeure

If circumstances of Forces Majeure have occurred and shall continue for a period of
twelve months then, notwithstanding that the Contractor
thereof has been

granted

may

by

reason

an extension of Time for Completion of the Works,

either party shall be entitled to serve upon the other 30 days notice to terminate
the Contract. If at the expiry of the period of 30 days, Force Majeure shall still
continue, the Contract shall be terminated.

(vii)

Payment on Termination for Force Majeure

If the Contract is terminated under Sub-Clause (vi) of this Clause, the Contractor shall
be paid the value of the work done.

The Contractor shall also be entitled to receive;

IV- lxxxiv

a)

the amounts payable in respect of any preliminary items so far as the work or
service comprised therein has been carried out and a proper proportion, as
certified by the Engineer-in-Charge, of any such item in which the work or
service comprised has only been partially carried out,

b)

the cost of materials or goods reasonably ordered for the Works or for use in
connection with the Works which have been delivered to the Contractor or of
which the Contractor is legally liable to accept delivery. Such materials or
goods shall become the property of JKPDD when paid for by it and the
Contractor shall place the same at the JKPDDs disposal,

c)

the amount certified by the Engineer-in-Charge, being the amount of any

expenditures which in the circumstances was reasonably incurred by the
Contractor in the expectation of completing the whole of the Works insofar
as such expenditure shall not have been covered by any other payments
referred to in this Sub-Clause.

CLAUSE-39: DEFAULT:
(i)

Notice of Default

If the Contractor is not executing the Works in accordance with the Contract or is
neglecting to perform his obligations there under so as to seriously affect the
carrying

out of

the Works,

the Engineer-in-Charge may give notice to the

Contractor requiring him to make good such failure or neglect.

(ii)

Contractors Default

IV- lxxxv

If the Contractor;

(a)

has failed to comply, within a reasonable time, with a notice under SubClause ( i ) of this Clause, or

(b)

assigns the Contract or subcontracts the whole or part of the Works without
the JKPDDs written consent, or

(c)

Becomes bankrupt or insolvent, has a receiving order made against him or

compounds with his creditors, or carries on business under a receiver, trustee
or manager for the benefit of his creditors or goes into liquidation.

The JKPDD may, after having given fourteen days notice to the Contractor,
terminate the Contract and expel the Contractor from the site. Any such expulsion
and termination shall be without prejudice to any other rights or powers of the
JKPDD under the Contract. The JKPDD may upon such termination, complete the
Works itself or by any other Contractor.

(iii)

Valuation at Date of Termination

The Engineer-in-Charge shall, as soon as possible after such termination, certify the
value of the Works and all sums then due to the Contractor as at the date of
termination in accordance with Clause-32 hereof.

(iv)

Payment after Termination

IV- lxxxvi

The JKPDD shall not be liable to make any further payments to the Contractor until
the Works have been completed and the Defects Liability Period is over. The JKPDD
shall be entitled to recover from the Contractor the extra costs, if any, of completing
the Works after allowing for any sum due to the Contractor under Sub-Clause (iii) of
this Clause. If there is no such extra cost, the JKPDD shall pay any balance due to the
Contractor.

(v)

Effect on Liability for Delay

The Contractors liability under Clauses-26 and 27 hereof shall immediately cease
when the JKPDD expels him from the site without prejudice to any liability
thereunder that may have already occurred.

CLAUSE-40: TAXES AND DUTIES:

(i)

For Supply of Goods:

The prices quoted shall include all duties, levies and taxes, within the state or outside
the state, in India that may be levied according to the Laws and regulation. Nothing
in the contract shall relieve the contractor from his responsibility to pay any tax that
may be levied in India on profits made by him in respect of the Contract.
(ii)

Income Taxes on Staff

The Contractors staff, personnel and labour will be liable to pay personal income tax
applicable in respect of such of their salaries and wages as are chargeable under the
laws and regulations for the time being in force and the Contractor shall perform such
duties in regard to such deductions thereof as may be imposed on him by such laws
and regulations.

CLAUSE-41: OWNERSHIP:
Ownership of goods shall pass from the Contractor to the JKPDD on arrival of the
goods at site. However, such passing of ownership shall not in any way dilute the

IV- lxxxvii

responsibility of the Contractor to insure the goods as per Clause-40 hereof and shall
not absolve the Contractor of his obligations and liabilities under the Contract. The
goods shall be handed over back to the Contractor for performance of services under
the Contract.

CLAUSE 42: NOTICES:

(i)

Service of Notices on Contractor

All notices or written orders to be given by the JKPDD or by the Engineer-in-Charge

to the Contractor under the terms of the Contract shall be served either by sending by
post to or delivering the same to the Contractors office on site or his principal place
of business, or through email or such other address as the Contractor shall nominate
for this purpose.
(ii)

Service of Notices
All notices to be given to PDD shall be served to the CE, S&O, Jammu and concerned
Executive Engineer.

(iii)

Change of Address
Either party may change a nominated address to another address by prior written
notice to the other party.

CLAUSE-43: ARBITRATION:
Except where otherwise provided in the Contract all questions and disputes relating to the
meaning of the specifications, design, drawings and instructions herein before mentioned
and as to the quality to workmanship or materials used on the Work or as to any other
question, claim, right, matter or thing whatsoever in any way arising out of or relating to the
Contract, designs, drawings, specifications, estimates, instructions, orders to these
conditions or otherwise concerning the Works or the execution or failure to execute the
same whether arising during the progress of the Work or after the cancellation, termination,
completion or abandonment thereof shall be dealt with as mentioned hereinafter.

IV- lxxxviii

i)

If the Contractor considers any work demanded of him to be outside the requirements
of the Contract, or considers any decision of the Engineer-in-Charge on any matter in
connection with or arising out of the Contract or carrying out of work to be
unacceptable, he shall promptly ask the Engineer-in-Charge in writing, for written
instructions or decision. There upon the Engineer-in-Charge shall give his written
instructions or decision within a period of thirty days of such request.

Upon receipt of the written instructions or decision, the Contractor shall promptly
proceed without delay to comply with such instructions or decision.

If the Engineer-in-Charge fails to give his instructions or decision in writing within a

period of thirty days after being requested for or if the Contractor is dissatisfied with
the instructions or decision of the Engineer-in-Charge, the Contractor may within
thirty days after receiving the instructions or decision file a written appeal to the
Development Commissioner(Power), JKPDD who will constitute a committee of
three members viz. (i) Chief Engineer, Planning & Design Wing, J&K PDD, (ii)
Chief Engineer, System & Operation Wing, Jammu and

(iii) Superintending

Engineer, Planning & Design Circle, Jammu. Chief Engineer, Planning & Design
Wing J&K will be the convenor of the committee to resolve the dispute. The
Committee shall afford an opportunity to the Contractor to be heard and to offer
evidence in support of his appeal within forty five days of the receipt of the appeal
by the Development Commissioner,(Power),

The Chief Engineer, Planning and

Design wing, J&K PDD shall give a decision on behalf of the Committee within a
period of thirty days after the Contractor has been heard and the Contractor has
given evidence in support of his appeal. If the Chief Engineer, Planning & Design
Wing does not give a decision within thirty days, the Contractor will have the right
refer the dispute to Arbitration.

If the Contractor is dissatisfied with this decision, the Contractor, within a period of
thirty days from receipt of the decision, shall indicate his intention to refer the
dispute to Arbitration failing which the said decision shall be final and conclusive.

Except where the decision has become final and conclusive in terms of sub-para(i)
above, disputes or difference shall be referred for adjudication through arbitration to
IV- lxxxix

an Arbitral Tribunal of three arbitrators appointed jointly by the Power Development

Department, J&K ( JKPDD) and the Contractor. Where the mandate of an Arbitrator
terminates, a substitute arbitrator shall be appointed according to the rules that were
applicable to the appointment of the arbitrator being replaced.

The Arbitral Tribunal shall follow/be guided by the basic principles and procedures as
contained the J&K State Arbitration Act. All arbitrations under the contract shall be
treated as domestic arbitrations. The parties shall be free to agree on a procedure for
appointing the Arbitrators. Failing any agreement for appointment of Arbitrators, each
party shall appoint one Arbitrator and the two appointed Arbitrators shall appoint the
third Arbitrator, who shall act as the presiding Arbitrator.

ii)

The said Arbitrators shall have full power to open up, revise and review any decision,
opinion, direction, certificate of valuation of the JKPDD.

iii)

If either of the parties fail to appoint its Arbitrators in pursuance of sub-clause (i)
above, within 30 days after the receipt of the notice of the appointment of its
Arbitrators or the two appointed Arbitrator fail to agree on third Arbitrator within
thirty days from the date of their appointment then the appointment shall be made
upon request of J&K PDD by Chief Justice, High Court of J&K or any person or
institutions designated by him.

iv)

Neither party shall be limited in the proceedings before such arbitrators to the
evidence or arguments before any authority herein above for the propose of obtaining
its said decision. No decision given by any authority in accordance with the foregoing
provisions shall disqualify it from being called as a witness and giving evidence
before the arbitrators any matter whatsoever relevant to the dispute or difference
referred to the arbitrators as aforesaid.

v)

The reference to arbitration may proceed notwithstanding that the Works shall not
then be or be alleged to be complete, provided always that the obligations of the
JKPDD, and the Contractor shall not be altered by reason of the arbitration being

IV- xc

conducted during the progress of the Works.

Neither party shall be entitled to

suspend such work to which the dispute relates and payment to the Contractor shall be
continued to be made in terms of the Contract.

(a)

All arbitrations shall be held at Jammu (J&K)

(b)

The language of the arbitration proceedings and that of all documents and

communications between the parties shall be English

(vi)

The decision of the majority of arbitrators shall be final and binding upon both the
parties.

(vii)

The cost of the arbitration as fixed by the arbitrators shall be borne equally by the
parties unless the settlement agreement provides for a different apportionment.
However, the expenses incurred by a party in connection with the preparation, and
presentation of its cases prior to, during and after the arbitration proceeding shall be
borne by that party.

(viii)

All awards of arbitration shall be in writing and shall state reasons for the amount
awarded.

CLAUSE-44: TERMINATION OF CONTRACT FOR JKPDDS CONVENIENCE:

(i)

The Chief Engineer, System & Operation Wing Jammu JKPDD shall be entitled to
terminate this Contract at any time for the JKPDDs convenience after recording
sufficient reasons and getting approval from the relevant contract committee after
providing the contractor an opportunity of being heard for which 30 days prior notice
shall be given to the contractor by the Executive Engineer, in-charge project with a
copy to the Engineer, in-charge..

(ii)

In the event of such termination, the Contractor shall be paid by the JKPDD as
provided in Sub-Clause 40 (vii) hereof.

IV- xci

CLAUSE-45: JOINT VENTURES:

If the Contractor is a joint venture or consortium, all partners of the joint venture shall be
jointly and severally liable to the JKPDD for the execution of the entire Contract in
accordance with its terms.

IV- xcii

SECTION III

ADDITIONAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

CONTENTS
CLAUSE
3.1
APPROACH ROADS

TITLE

PAGE NO.
xciv

3.2

LAND

3.2.1

Land for the use of Contractor ............................................................................. xciv

3.2.2

Entry by the JKPDD on the land handed over to the Contractor .......................... xcv

3.3

TRAINING OF THE JKPDDS & CONSULTANTS PERSONNEL xcv

3.4

POWER FOR CONSTRUCTION AND OTHER PURPOSES xcv

3.5

SITE ORDER BOOK

3.6

FLOODS xcvii

3.7

xciv

xcvi

DISPUTESIII-5

IV- xciii

ADDITIONAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

APPROACH ROADS
Access to the Site of Works shall be available before commencement of works. While
efforts will be made to keep the approach roads open through-out the year, the Jammu &
Kashmir Power Development Department (JKPDD) shall not be responsible for any
damage or loss suffered by the Contractor due to closure of the road(s) on account of
landslides, weather conditions or any other reasons whatsoever.

LAND
Land for the use of Contractor
The Engineer-in-Charge, will, at his discretion and for the duration of execution of the
Contract, make available on the Site, land for construction of Contractors temporary
houses for staff and labour, field offices, stores, and workshop required for execution of
the Contract. Leveling and dressing of the site and construction of temporary roads,
houses, offices and workshop as per plan approved by the Engineer-in-Charge shall be
done by the Contractor at his own cost. The Final Payment Certificate shall not be issued,
until and unless the Contractor has handed over the possession of vacant land allotted to
him for the above purpose as per direction of the Engineer-in-Charge. The requirement
of land for above purpose shall be indicated in the Bid.

IV- xciv

Entry by the JKPDD on the land handed over to the Contractor

The JKJPDD, if deems fit, may enter any portion of the land handed over to the
Contractor for the purpose of executing the other works (not included in this Contract),
through its agencies or through other contractors, as the case may be and the Contractor
shall act in accordance with the directions of the Engineer-in-Charge. The contractor
shall also afford all reasonable facilities for the execution of such works (i.e. works not
included in this Contract) including the handing over of required land for structures to the
other Contractors or their workmen or the JKPDD workers who may be employed in
execution of such works.

TRAINING OF THE JKPDDS & CONSULTANTS PERSONNEL

The Contractor shall in pursuance of provisions of technical specification or as specified
elsewhere, provide free of charge adequate facilities for training any of employees of
JKPDD and of consultant CEA in the manufacturing works / at site. In addition to that
the Contractor will provide one number vehicle INNOVA, SCORPIO or equivalent
alongwith driver including repair and POL etc. at the disposal of Engineer-In-Chief/
his representative for monitoring the works during the period of execution of
contract.

POWER FOR CONSTRUCTION AND OTHER PURPOSES

(i)

The purchaser shall make arrangements for providing construction power to

various sites, colonies, offices and associated areas of the Contractor within
areas of JKPDD sites at 3-Phase. 415V 10%, 50Hz 3% AC Supply. The
bidder shall submit the construction power requirement in kW at each site in
the format given at Annex VI. The electrical energy consumed by the
Contractor shall be measured by a suitable meter installed at the point of
supply, which shall be sealed in the presence of the Contractor or his
authorized representative and read every monthfor determining the
consumption of electricity. Each supply point shall be treated as separate
connection. Arrangements for further distribution of power to the

IV- xcv

Contractors sites, plant, equipment and machinery, workshop, colonies,

and offices from the point of supply shall be made by the Contractor at
his own cost. The electrical installation plan shall be submitted for approval
of the Engineer-in-Charge.
(ii)

Before the release of the connection, JKPDD shall require the Contractor to
make advance consumption deposit at prevalent rates and rules of Government
of Jammu & Kashmir. The energy consumed as above shall be charged as per
as per tariff in vogue. Any changes in the energy rate and rules during the
contract period in respect of the energy consumed for the execution of works,
Contractors offices and residential colonies shall be to the account of the
Contractor.

(iii)

The Contractor shall adhere strictly to the provisions of

J&K Electricity

Act/Rules/Tariff as amended from time to time.

(iv)

The JKPDD neither undertake to meet with the full demand of the Contractor
nor to guarantee an uninterrupted power supply. One shut down in a month
may be availed by JKPDD for general maintenance work on its transmission
and distribution network. The Contractor shall make his own arrangement for
generating sufficient standby construction power if required, at his own cost to
carry on the Works during such or any other shut-offs or interruptions of
power. The JKPDD shall not entertain any claim of the Contractor on account
of generating stand by construction power or any damage or loss that may be
caused to his plant, equipment and machinery and works as a result of any
shut down, breakdown or voltage fluctuations in the power supply. The
Contractor is expected to have necessary protection to his electrical equipment
and sufficient standby facilities.

SITE ORDER BOOK

The Engineer-in-Charge shall maintain the site order book systematically and securely
till completion of the Works. The site order book shall be available at the site during
IV- xcvi

working hours. Orders regarding the Work as and when necessary shall be entered in
this book by the Engineer-in-Charge or his representative with dated signatures in
exercise of the powers vested in him, which orders shall be duly noted by the
Contractor or his authorized agent with his dated signature. Order entered in this book
and noted by the Contractors agent shall be considered to have been duly given to the
Contractor.

FLOODS
(i)

In case of floods resulting in flooding of the work areas, the Contractor shall
make his own arrangements, at his own cost, to shift goods, all his plant,
equipment and machinery, materials including if any, supplied / issued by the
JKPDD and labour to safe place. The work shall be resumed after receding of
floods and dewatering the area.

(ii)

The JKPDD shall not be liable for any loss of or damage to the men,
Contractors plant, equipment, machinery works or materials on account of
floods and no compensation whatsoever, in this regard shall be paid to the
Contractor.

Disputes
In case of any ambiguity between GTP and the ISS/CEA Guidelines/CVIP
manuals, the ISS Guidelines shall prevail.
In case of any difference in the interpretation of any clause of the contract the
interpretation of Engineer-In-Chief shall be final.

IV- xcvii

In case the rates of any item of work are not available in the contract, the same
shall be settled by mutual negotiation between the Contractor and
PDD.
During the execution of the work the theft/pilferage of material/equipment shall
be sole responsibility of the contractor, in no way the JKPDD shall
be held responsible.

SECTION - IV
MODEL RULES FOR HEALTH AND SANITARY ARRANGEMENTS FOR
CONTRACTORS WORKMEN

CONTENTS

CLAUSE

TITLE

PAGE NO.

4.1

APPLICATION .................................................................................................. i

4.2

DEFINITIONS .................................................................................................... i

4.3

FIRST AID .......................................................................................................... i

4.4

DRINKING WATER ......................................................................................... ii

4.5

WASHING AND BATHING PLACES ............................................................ ii

IV- xcviii

4.6

LATRINES AND URINALS ........................................................................... iii

4.7

DISPOSAL OF EXCRETA .............................................................................. iii

4.8

PROVISION OF SHELTER DURING REST ................................................. iii

4.9

CRECHES ......................................................................................................... iii

4.10

CANTEEN ........................................................................................................ iii

IV- xcix

SECTION-IV
MODEL RULES FOR HEALTH AND SANITARY ARRANGEMENTS FOR
CONTRACTORS WORKMEN

4.1

APPLICATION
These rules shall apply to all buildings and erection works of Jammu & Kashmir
Power Development Department (JKPDD).

4.2

DEFINITIONS
(i)

Work place/or work site means a place at which, at an average 50 or more

workers are employed, in connection with construction work.

(ii)

Large work place or large work site means a place at which at an average
500 or more workers are employed in connection with construction work.

4.3

FIRST AID
(i)

At every work place, there shall be maintained in a readily accessible place

first aid appliance including an adequate supply of sterilized dressings and
sterilized cotton wool. The appliances shall be placed in good order and in a
large work place. They shall be placed under the charge of a responsible
person who shall be readily available during working hours.

(ii)

At large work places, where hospital facilities are not available within easy
distance of the work, First Aid posts shall be established and run by trained
compounders.

(iii)

Where large work places are remote from regular hospitals, an indoor ward
shall be provided with one bed for every 250 employees.

V-i

(iv)

Where large work places are situated in cities/towns or in their suburbs and no
beds are considered necessary owing to the proximity of city or town
hospitals, suitable transport will be provided to facilitate removal of emergent
cases to the hospitals. At other work places, some conveyance facilities such
as car, shall be kept readily available to take injured person(s) or person(s)
suddenly taken seriously ill, to the nearest hospital.

4.4

DRINKING WATER
(i)

In every work place, there shall be provided and maintained at suitable places,
easily accessible to labour, a sufficient supply of cold water fit for drinking.

(ii)

Where drinking water is obtained from an intermittent public water supply,

each work place shall be provided with storage where such drinking water
shall be stored.

(iii)

Every water supply storage shall be at distance of not less than 15 metres from
latrine, drain or any other source of pollution. Where water has to be drawn
from an existing well which is within such proximity of latrine, drain or any
other source of pollution, the well shall be properly chlorinated before water is
drawn from it for drinking. All such wells shall be entirely closed in and be
provided with trap door which shall be dust and water proof.

(iv)

A reliable pump shall be fitted to each covered well, the trap door shall be kept
locked and opened only for cleaning or inspection which shall be done at least
once in a month.

4.5

WASHING AND BATHING PLACES

i)

Adequate washing and bathing places shall be provided, separately for men &
women.

ii)

Such places shall be kept in a clean and drained condition.

V-ii

4.6

LATRINES AND URINALS

There shall be provided within the precincts of every work place adequate number of
latrines and urinals in an accessible place. If women are employed, separate urinals
and latrines shall be provided for them. All these shall be cleaned regularly and kept
in a sanitary condition.

4.7

DISPOSAL OF EXCRETA
Unless otherwise arranged for by the local sanitary authority, arrangements for proper
disposal of excreta by incineration at the work place shall be made by means of a
suitable incinerator approved by the local health officer or Engineer-in-Charge.
Alternatively, excreta may be disposed of by putting a layer of nightsoil at the bottom
of pucca tank prepared for the purpose and covering it with a 150mm layer of waste
or refuse and then covering it up with a layer of earth for a fortnight (when it will turn
into manure).

4.8

PROVISION OF SHELTER DURING REST

At every work place there shall be provided free of cost for the use of labour, two
suitable sheds, one for meals and the other for rest.

4.9

CRECHES
At every work place, at which 50 or more women workers are ordinarily employed,
there shall be provided a creche for the use of children, belonging to such women.

4.10 CANTEEN
A cooked food canteen on a moderate scale shall be provided for the benefit of
workers wherever it is considered expedient.

The above rules shall form an integral part of the contract.

V-iii

SECTION V
CONTRACTORS LABOUR REGULATIONS

CONTENTS
CLAUSE

TITLE

5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12

PAGE NO.

SHORT TITLE
1
DEFINITIONS 1
DISPLAY OF NOTICE REGARDING WAGES, ETC.
2
PAYMENT OF WAGES
2
FIXATION OF WAGE PERIODS 2
WAGE BOOK AND WAGE SLIPS ETC
3
REGISTER OF UNPAID WAGES 4
REGISTER OF ACCIDENTS 4
FINES AND DEDUCTIONS WHICH MAY BE MADE FROM WAGES 5
REGISTER OF FINES
6
PRESERVATION OF REGISTER 6
POWERS OF LABOUR WELFARE OFFICERS TO MAKE
INVESTIGATION OR ENQUIRY 7
5.13
REPORT OF LABOUR WELFARE OFFICER
7
5.14
APPEAL AGAINST THE DECISION OF LABOUR WELFARE
OFFICER
7
5.15
INSPECTION OF BOOKS AND SLIPS
8
5.16
SUBMISSION OF RETURNS
8
5.17
AMENDMENTS
8
FORM I .
i
EMPLOYMENT CARD REGULATION i
FORM II ii
ATTENDANCE CUM-WAGE CARD ii
FORM III
iii
REGISTER OF FINES iii
FORM IV
iv
REGISTER OF DEDUCTIONS FOR DAMAGES OR LOSS iv

V-iv

SECTION - V

CONTRACTORS LABOUR REGULATIONS

5.1

SHORT TITLE

These regulations may be called the Jammu & Kashmir Power Development
Department, Contractors Labour Regulations.

5.2

DEFINITIONS
In these regulations, unless otherwise expressed or indicated, the following words and
expressions shall have the meaning hereby assigned to them respectively, that is to
say:-

(i)

Labour means workers employed by Jammu & Kashmir Power

Development Departments Contractor directly, or indirectly through a subcontractor or other persons or by an agent on his behalf but will not include
supervisory staff like section officers, etc.

(ii)

Fair Wage means wage whether for time or piece work notified at the time
of inviting tenders for the work and where such wages have not been so
notified, the wages prescribed by the Jammu & Kashmir Power Development
Department for the area in which the work is done. Such wages will not be
less than the minimum wages fixed by the Government of Jammu & Kashmir
for that class of employee engaged on the same type of work in the same area.

(iii)

Contractor shall include every person whether a sub-contractor or head-man

or agent, employing labour on the work taken on contract.
Normally working hours of a worker should not exceed 9 (Nine) hours a day.
The working day shall be so arranged that inclusive of interval for rest, if any,
it shall not spread over more than 12 (twelve)hours on any day.

V-1

5.3

DISPLAY OF NOTICE REGARDING WAGES, ETC.

The Contractor shall

(i)

before he commences his work on Contract, display and correctly maintain

and continue to display and correctly maintain in a clean and legible condition
in conspicuous place on the work, notices in English and in Hindi and local
language spoken by the majority of the workers, giving the rate of wages
which have been certified by the Engineer-in-Charge as fair wage and the
hours of work for which such wage are earned, and

(ii)

5.4

Send a copy of such notices to the certifying office.

PAYMENT OF WAGES
(i)

Wages due to every worker shall be paid to him direct.

(ii)

Arrears claimed after 3 months after the completion of the Work shall not be
entertained.

(iii)

5.5

All wages shall be paid in current coin or currency or in both.

FIXATION OF WAGE PERIODS

(i)

The Contractor shall fix the wage periods in respect of which the wages shall
be payable.

(ii)

No wage period shall exceed one month.

V-2

(iii)

Wages of every worker employed on the contract shall be paid; (a) in the case
of establishment in which wage period is one week within 3 days from the end
of the wage period and (b) in the case of other establishments before the
expiry of the 7th day or 10th day from the end of the wage period for the
number of workers employed in such establishment not exceeding 1000 and
exceeding 1000 respectively.

(iv)

When the employment to any worker is terminated by or on behalf of the

Contractor, the wages earned by him shall be paid before the expiry of the day
succeeding the one on which his employment is terminated.

(v)

All payments of wages shall be made on a working day except when the work
is completed before the expiry of the wage period in which case final payment
shall be made within 48 hours of the last working day at work site and during
the working time.

5.6

WAGE BOOK AND WAGE SLIPS ETC

(i)

The Contractor shall maintain a Wage Book of each worker in such forms as
may be convenient at the place of works, but the same shall include the
following particulars:

Name of the worker.

Rate of daily or monthly wages.

Nature of work on which employed.

Total number of days worked during each wage period.

Dates and periods for which worked overtime.

Gross wages payable for the work during each wage period.

All deductions made from the wage with an indication in each case of
the ground on account of which the deduction is made.

Wages actually paid for each wage period

Signature or thumb impression of the worker.

V-3

(ii)

The Contractor shall also issue a wage slip containing the aforesaid particulars
to each worker employed by him on the work at least a day prior to the day of
disbursement of wages.

(iii)

The Contractor shall also issue an Employment Card in the prescribed

Form I (attached) to each worker on the day of work or entry into his
employment.

(iv)

The Contractor shall issue an Attendance cum Wage Card as per Form II to
each worker on the day of entry into his employment.

5.7

REGISTER OF UNPAID WAGES

The Contractor shall maintain a register of unpaid wages in such form as may be
convenient at the place of work but the same shall include the following particulars.

5.8

i)

Full particulars of the labourers whose wages have not been paid.

ii)

Reference number of the muster roll and wage register.

iii)

Rate of Wages.

iv)

Wage period.

v)

Total amount not paid.

vi)

Reasons for not making payment.

vii)

How the amount of unpaid wages was utilised.

viii)

Acquaintance with dates.

REGISTER OF ACCIDENTS
The Contractor shall maintain a register of accidents in such form as may be
convenient at the work place, but the same should include the following particulars.

i)

Full particulars of the Worker(s) who met with accident.

ii)

Rate of wages.

iii)

Sex.
V-4

iv)

Age.

v)

Nature of accident and cause of accident.

vi)

Time and date of accident.

vii)

Date and time when admitted in hospital.

viii)

Date of discharge from the hospital.

ix)

Period of treatment and result of treatment.

x)

Percentage of loss of earning capacity and disability assessed by medical

officer.

xi)

Compensation required to be paid.

xii)

Date of payment of compensation.

xiii)

Amount paid with details of the person to whom the same was paid.

xiv)

Authority by whom the compensation was assessed.

xv)

Insurance of all the labourers is mandatory,any claim whatsoever on account

of accident/death will be the sole responsibility of the contractor .

5.9

FINES AND DEDUCTIONS WHICH MAY BE MADE FROM WAGES

i)

The wages of a worker shall be paid to him without any deductions of any
kind except the following:
a)

Fines

b)

Deductions for absence from duty i.e. from the place or the places
where by the terms of his employment he is required to work. The
amount of deduction shall be in proportion to the period for which he
was absent.

c)

Deduction for damage to or loss of goods expressly entrusted to the

employed person for custody, or for loss of money or any other
deduction which he is required to account, where such damage or loss
is directly attributable to his neglect or default.

d)

Deduction for recovery of advance or for adjustment of over payment

of wages, advances granted shall be entered in a register.

e)

Any other deduction which the Jammu & Kashmir Power

Development Department may from time to time allow.

V-5

ii)

No fine shall be imposed on any worker except in respect of such acts and
omissions on his part as have been approved of by the Engineer-in-Charge.

iii)

No fine should be imposed on a worker and no deduction for damage or loss

shall be made good from his wages until the worker has been given an
opportunity of showing cause against such fines or deductions.

5.10 REGISTER OF FINES

i)

The Contractor shall maintain a Register of Fines and a Register of

Deductions for Damages or Loss in Form Nos. III & IV respectively which
should be kept at the places of work.

ii)

The Contractor shall maintain both English and in the local language, a list
approved by the Engineer-in-Charge clearly stating the acts and omissions for
which penalty or fine may be imposed on a workman and display it in a good
condition in a conspicuous place on the work.

5.11 PRESERVATION OF REGISTER

The wage book, the wage slips, register of unpaid wages, the register of accidents, the
register of fines, deduction required to be maintained under these regulations shall be
preserved for 12 months after the date of last entry made in them and shall be made
available for inspection by the Engineer-in-Charge, labour officer or any other officer
authorised by the Jammu & Kashmir Power Development Department on their behalf.

V-6

5.12 POWERS OF LABOUR

INVESTIGATION OR ENQUIRY

WELFARE

OFFICERS

TO

MAKE

The Labour Welfare Officer or any other person authorised by the Jammu & Kashmir
Govt. on their behalf shall have power to make enquiries with a view to ascertaining
and enforcing due and proper observance of the fair wage clause and the provisions of
these regulations. He shall investigate into any complaint regarding the default made
by the contractor or sub-contractor in regard to such provision.

5.13 REPORT OF LABOUR WELFARE OFFICER

The labour welfare officer or other persons authorised as aforesaid shall submit a
report of result of his investigation or enquiry to the Engineer-in-Charge concerned
indicating the extent, if any, to which the default has been committed, with a note that
necessary deductions from the contractors bill be made and the wages and other dues
be paid to the labourers concerned. In case an appeal is made by the contractor under
para 5.14 of these regulations actual payment to labourers will be made by the
Engineer-in-charge or authorised agent after the Jammu & Kashmir Power
Development Department has given its decision on such appeal.

The Engineer-in-Charge shall arrange payments to the labourers concerned within 45

days from the receipt of the report from the labour welfare officer.

5.14 APPEAL AGAINST THE DECISION OF LABOUR WELFARE OFFICER

Any person aggrieved by the decision and recommendations of the Labour Welfare
Officer or other person so authorised may appeal such decision to the labour court,
within 30 days from the date of decision. The decision of the labour court shall be
final and binding upon the Contractor and Power Development Department as the
case may be.

V-7

5.15 INSPECTION OF BOOKS AND SLIPS

The Contractor shall allow inspection of the wage books and the wage slips, register
of unpaid wages, register of accidents, the register of fines and deductions to any of
his workers or to his agent at convenient time and place after due notice is received or
to the Labour Welfare Officer or any other persons, authorised by Engineer-in-Charge
on his behalf.

5.16 SUBMISSION OF RETURNS

The Contractor shall submit periodical returns as may be specified from time to time.

5.17 AMENDMENTS
The Jammu & Kashmir Power Development Department may from time to time add
to or amend the regulations and on any question as to the application, interpretation or
affect of those regulations, the decision of the Engineer-in-Charge or of his authorized
representative shall be final.

V-8

FORM I
EMPLOYMENT CARD REGULATION
(refer para 6.6 (iii) Section VI)

Name & Sex of the worker.

Age

or date of birth.
Fathers name
Identification marks.
(Particulars of next of kin (wife and children, if any or of
dependent next to kin in case the worker has no wife or child)
Name ..
Full address of dependents

(Specify village, district and state).

Sl.No
1

Name and address of

employer (Specify
whether a contractor or
Sub-contractor).
2

Particulars of location
work site and description
of work done
3

Total period for

which the worker is
employed
(From..to)
4

Actual number
of days worked

FORM I (Contd.)
(BACK SIDE OF THE CARD)

Nature of work
done by the workers

Wage period

Wage rate (with

particulars of unit in
case of piece work)

VI-i

Total wage earned

by the worker
during the period
Shown under
column(5)
10

Remarks

11

Sig

FORM II
ATTENDANCE CUM-WAGE CARD
(Referred to in Para 6.6 (iv) Chapter-VI)

Card No. .
Name of Contractor.
Name of work..
Name of worker
Address
Designation..
Rates of wages

Dates

Attendance

Signature of person marking

attendance

REMARKS

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
etc.

FORM II (Contd)
(ON THE BACK SIDE OF CARD)

Wage period

Date on which
overtime Worked

Gross wage payable

VI-ii

Deductions if
any.

Actual Wages
paid

Date
paym

FORM III
REGISTER OF FINES
(refer para 6.10 (i) Section-VI)

Sl.
No.
1

Fathers/
Name Husbands
Name
2

Sex

Department

Nature and
Date of the
offence for
which fine
imposed
6

VI-iii

Whether worker
showed cause
against Fine or
not, if so, enter
date.
7

Rate of
Wages

Date and
amount o
fine
Imposed

FORM IV
REGISTER OF DEDUCTIONS FOR DAMAGES OR LOSS
(refer para 6.10 (i) Section-VI)

Sl.
No.
1

Fathers/
Name Husbands
Name
2

Sex

Department

Damage or
loss caused
with date

VI-iv

Whether worker
showed cause
against deduction
if so, enter date.
7

Date and
amount of
deduction
Imposed

Number
of installment, if
any

SECTION - VI
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CONTENTS
PARA
6.1 to
6.26

PAGE NO.
Safety Precaution

VI-1 to VI-11

VI-v

SECTION - VI

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
6.1

Suitable scaffolds shall be provided for workmen for all Works that cannot safely be
done from the ground, or from solid construction except such short period work as
can be done safely from ladders. When a ladder is used, an extra workman shall be
engaged for holding the ladder. If the ladder is used for carrying materials as well,
suitable footholds and handholds shall be provided on the ladder and the ladder shall
be given an inclination not steeper than 0.25 to 1 (0.25 horizontal and 1 vertical).

6.2

Scaffolding or staging more than 3.6 m above the ground or erected floor, swung or
suspended from an overhead support or erected with stationary support shall have a
guard rail properly attached, bolted, braced and otherwise secured at least 0.9 m high
above the floor or platform of such scaffolding or staging and extending along the
entire length of the outside and ends thereof with only such opening as may be
necessary for the delivery of the materials. Such scaffolding or staging shall be so
fastened as to prevent it from swaying from the structure.

6.3

Working platform, gangways and stairways shall be so constructed that they do not
sag unduly or unequally, and if the height of the platform or the gangway or the
stairway is more than 3.6 m above ground level or floor level, they shall be closely
boarded, and shall have adequate width and shall be suitably fastened.

6.4

Every opening in the floor of a structure or in a working platform shall be provided

with suitable means to prevent the fall of persons or materials by providing suitable
fencing or railing whose minimum height shall be 0.9 m.

Employees working on

steep slopes or otherwise subject to possible falls from levels not protected by
guardrails or safety nets, shall be secured by safety belts.

6.5

Safe means of access shall be provided to all working platforms and other working
places. Every ladder shall be securely fixed. No portable single ladder shall be over
9.0 m in length while the width between side rails in hung ladder shall, in no case, be
less than 28 cm. for ladder upto and including 3.0 m in length. For longer ladders, this
i

width shall be increased at least by 6 mm for each additional 30 cm of length.

Uniform step spacing shall not exceed 30 cm. Adequate precautions shall be taken to
prevent danger from electrical equipment. No materials on any of the Sites of Work
shall be so stacked or placed as to cause danger or inconvenience to any person or the
public.

6.6

EXCAVATION AND TRENCHING

All trenches, 1.2 m or more in depth, shall, at all times, be supplied with atleast one
ladder for each 30 metres length or fraction thereof. Ladder shall be extended form
bottom of the trench to at least 0.9 m above the surface of the ground. The side of the
trenches which are 1.5 m or more in depth shall be stepped back to give suitable slope
or securely held by timber bracing, so as to avoid the danger of sides to collapse. The
excavated materials shall not be placed within 1.5 m of the edges of the trench or half
of the depth by the trench whichever is more. Cutting shall be done from top to
bottom. Under no circumstances undermining or undercutting shall be done.

6.7

DEMOLITION

Before any demolition work is commenced and also during the process of the work:
(i)

All roads and open areas adjacent to the site shall either be closed or suitably
protected.

(ii)

No electric cable or apparatus which is liable to be a source of danger over a

cable or apparatus used by the operator shall remain electrically charged.

(iii)

All practical steps shall be taken to prevent danger to persons employed from
risk of fire or explosion or flooding. No floor, roof or other part of the
structure shall be overloaded with debris or materials as to render it unsafe.

6.8

All necessary personal safety equipment as considered adequate by the Engineer-inCharge shall be kept available for the use of the persons employed on the Site and
maintained in condition suitable for immediate use, and the Contractor shall take
adequate steps to ensure proper use of equipment by those concerned.

ii

(i)

The Contractor shall provide rubber gauntlets, gloves, mats, boots and
galoshes, insulated platform and stools, safety belts, hand lamps, tower
wagons and other special insulated

devices as required for working on

electrical equipment and apparatus.

(ii)

Workers employed on mixing asphaltic materials, cement mortar and cement

concrete shall be provided with protective footwear and protective goggles.

(iii)

Those engaged in mixing or stacking of cement bags or any materials which is

injurious to eyes shall be provided with protective goggles.

(iv)

Those engaged in welding Works shall be provided with welders protective

eye shields.

(v)

Stone breakers shall be provided with protective goggles and protective

clothing and seated at sufficiently safe intervals.

(vi)

The Contractor shall not employ any person below the age of 18 years.
Whenever a person above the age of 18 years is employed on the work of lead
painting, the following precautions shall be taken:-

(a)

No paint containing lead, sulphate of lead or product containing their

pigments shall be used except in the form of paste or readymade paint.

(b)

Suitable face masks shall be supplied for use by the workers when
paint is applied in the form of spray or a surface having lead paint dry
rubbed and scrapped.

(c)

Overalls shall be supplied by the Contractor to the workmen and

adequate facilities shall be provided to enable the working painters to
wash during the cessation of Work.

(d)

Measures shall be taken, whenever required, in order to prevent danger

arising from the application of a paint in the form of spray.

(e)

Measures shall be taken, whenever practicable, to prevent danger

arising out from dust caused by dry rubbing down and scrapping.

(f)

Suitable arrangements shall be made to prevent clothing put off during

working hours, being spoiled by painting materials.

(g)

Cases of lead poisoning and suspected lead poisoning shall be notified

and shall be subsequently verified by a medical officer appointed by
the competent authority.

iii

(h)

The contractor, when necessary, shall arrange for medical examination

of workers and same shall be monitored by medical officer appointed
by competent authority.

(i)

Instructions with regard to special hygienic precautions to be taken in

the painting trade shall be distributed to working painters.

(vii)

The Contractor shall observe all safety precautions to control the noise on all
Sites and also provide all workmen deployed in the affected areas with the
necessary equipment for safety against noise.

6.9

When the Work is done near any place where there is risk of drowning, all necessary
equipment shall be provided and kept ready for use and all necessary steps taken for
prompt rescue of any person in danger and adequate provision shall be made for
prompt first aid treatment of all injuries likely to be sustained during the course of the
Work.

6.10

Use of hoisting machines and shackle including their attachments, anchorage and
supports shall conform to the following standards or conditions:

(i)

These shall be of good mechanical construction, sound materials and

adequate strength and free from patent defect and shall be kept in good
working order.

(ii)

Every rope used in hoisting or lowering materials or as a means of

suspension shall be of durable quality and adequate strength and free
from patent defects.

(iii)

Every crane driver or hoisting appliance operator shall be properly

qualified for his job.

(iv)

In case of every hoisting machine and of every chain ring hook,

shackle swivel and pulley block used in hoisting or as means of
suspension, the safe working load shall be ascertained by adequate
means. Every hoisting machine and all gears referred to above shall be
plainly marked with the safe working load.

iv

In case of hoisting machine having a variable safe working load, each

safe working load and the conditions under which it is applicable shall
be clearly indicated. No part of any machine or any gear referred to
above in this paragraph shall be loaded beyond the safe working load
except for the purpose of testing.

The capacity of the hoisting

machines shall be periodically checked.

(v)

The Contractor shall notify the safe working load of the machines to
the Engineer-in-Charge whenever he brings any machinery to Site of
work and gets it verified by the Engineer-in-Charge or his
representative.

6.11

Motors, gearing, transmission, electric wiring and other dangerous parts of hoisting
appliances shall be provided with efficient safeguards.

Hoisting appliances shall be provided with such means as shall reduce to the
minimum, the risk of any part of a suspended load becoming accidentally displaced.
When workmen are employed on or near electrical installations which are already
energized, insulating mats, wearing apparel, such as gloves, sleeves and boot, as may
be necessary, shall be provided. The workers shall not wear any rings, watches and
carry keys or other materials which are good conductors of electricity.

6.12

All scaffolds, ladders and other safety devices mentioned or described herein shall be
maintained in safe conditions and no scaffold, ladder or equipment shall be altered or
removed while it is in use. Adequate washing facilities shall be provided at or near
places of Work.

6.13

These safety provisions shall be brought to the notice of all concerned by display on a
notice board at a prominent place on the Site. The person responsible for compliance
of the safety code shall be named therein by the Contractor.

6.14

To ensure effective enforcement of the rules and regulations relating to safety

precautions, the arrangements made by Contractor shall be open to inspection by the
Labour officer and/or the Engineer-in-Charge.

6.15

In addition to above, the Contractor shall take the following specific precautions for
the Underground Works.

(i)

All

precautions

regarding

safety

of

personnel

working

in

tunnels/caverns/shafts, in connection with the handling of electrical

installations, loading, blasting and seepage water etc. as specified in the
relevant stipulations of IS codes shall be taken by the Contractor in order to
ensure safe underground working. He shall also provide adequate medical,
drinking water, sanitation, lighting and ventilation facilities.
(ii)

Emergency material shall be provided at each underground excavation

heading

This equipment shall include, but not be limited to the following:

- 3 stretchers

(iii)

3 woolen blankets

2 appliances for artificial breathing

1 oxygen flask

3 explosion-proof lamps

wound dressing and disinfection material

anti-pain injections

gas masks

At least two members of the Rescue Team as described hereinafter, properly

instructed and trained in the rescue procedures, shall be in each crew working
underground.

(iv)

Prior to the commencement of construction, the Contractor shall organize and

train a Rescue Team composed of his employees. This Rescue Team shall be
capable to render help after accidents caused by fire, gas explosion and
avalanche etc.

(v)

The Rescue Team shall be organized in such a way that sufficient number of
members are ready for action at any time until the Completion of Work.

(vi)

The Rescue Team members shall be instructed and trained for their task by a
qualified and experience person. If required, the Contractor shall hire an
vi

outside specialist to perform such training.

A refresher training for all

members of the Rescue Team shall be conducted at least every six months.
(vii)

Each Rescue Team member shall be skilled in giving the first aid, dealing with
the appliances for artificial respiration and firefighting equipment and shall
possess a good local knowledge. Adequate equipment for reaching even the
remotest working area shall be at their disposal.

(viii) The Contractor shall submit the details of the proposed Rescue Team
organization to the Engineer-in-Charge for approval.

6.16

The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable and proper precautions for the
safety of the people on the Works and shall comply with the provisions of current
safety law and building and construction codes as may be applicable. All machinery
and equipment and other sources of physical hazards shall be properly guarded. The
Contractor shall have a full time staff exclusively in charge of securing the safety of
the Work ensuring that all safety regulations are followed and in charge of
indoctrination and teaching course on safety to the work force.

6.17

The Contractor shall provided all necessary fencing and lights to protect the public
from accidents and shall be bound to bear all the expenses of defence of every suit,
action and other proceedings at Law that may be brought by any person for injury
sustained owing to neglect of the above precautions and to pay any damages and costs
which may be awarded in any such suit, action and proceedings to any such persons
or which may, with the consent of the Contractor, be paid to compromise any claim
by any person.

6.18

About his employees, the Contractor shall ensure as follows:

(i)

Each employee shall be provided initial indoctrination regarding safety by the

Contractor so as to enable him to conduct his Work in a safe manner.

(ii)

No employee shall be given a new assignment of work unfamiliar to him

without proper introduction as to the hazardous incident thereto, both to
himself and his fellow employees.

(iii)

Under no circumstances shall an employee hurry or take unnecessary chances

when working under hazardous conditions.
vii

(iv)

Employees shall not leave naked fires unattended.

Adequate firefighting

equipment shall be provided at crucial locations.

(v)

Employees under the influence of any intoxicating beverage, even to the

slightest degree, shall not be permitted to remain on Work.

(vi)

There shall be suitable arrangement on every site for rendering prompt and
sufficient first aid to the injured.

(vii)

The stair cases and passage ways shall be adequately lighted.

(viii) The employees, when working around moving machinery, shall not be
permitted to wear loose garments. Safety shoes are recommended when
working in shops or places where materials or tools are likely to fall. Only
experienced workers shall be permitted to go behind guard rails or to clean
around energized or moving equipment.
(ix)

The employees shall use the standard protection equipment intended before
and after it is used.

6.19

The following precautions shall be taken for fire prevention:

(i)

All construction areas and storage yards shall be kept clean and well arranged.

(ii)

A clear space of 15 metres around the outer boundary of saw mill and lumber
storage area may be provided. All lumber shall be stored in sections with fire
breaks with a distance of 15 metres between consecutive section.

(iii)

All combustible waste material, wood scalings and soiled rags etc shall be
removed daily and burnt in suitable burning area. The saw mill and lumber
yard shall be kept free form accumulation of combustible debris.

(iv)

Fires, welding, flame cutting shall in general not be permitted in combustible

area. Fires and open flame devices shall not be left unattended.

(v)

Smoking shall be prohibited in all fire prone areas, flammable material

storages viz. Carpentry, paint shops, garages, service stations etc.

No

smoking signs shall be pasted on all such areas.

(vi)

Accumulations of flammable liquids on floors, walkways etc. should be

prohibited. All spills of flammable liquids shall be cleaned up immediately.

(vii)

Smoke pipes from Diesel Engines passing through roof of combustible

material e.g. in compressor stations on various Sites shall be insulated by
asbestos. All joints of smoke pipe shall be riveted, welded or otherwise
viii

securely fastened together and supported to prevent accidental displacement or

separation. The joints shall not be leaky.
(viii) Flammable liquids, lubricants etc. shall be handled and transported in safety
containers and drums which can be kept tightly capped.
(ix)

Storage of fuels and other flammable materials and liquids shall be set not less
than 100 m away from the Works and permanent installations. All storage
installations and tanks shall conform to the regulations set out in relevant
Indian Standards.

(x)

Petrol or other flammable liquids with a flash point below 100 degrees
Centigrade shall not be used for cleaning purpose.

(xi)

Oxygen cylinders shall not be stored with combustible materials.

(xii)

All electric installation shall be properly earthedn. Repairs shall not be made
on electrical circuits until the circuit has been de-energized.

6.20

THE FOLLOWING FIRE FIGHTING ARRANGEMENTS SHALL BE MADE

BY THE CONTRACTOR:

(i)

Fire extinguishers and fire buckets filled with clean dry sand, painted red,
shall be provided at all fire hazardous locations viz. Bathing and Mixing Plant,
Winch houses, Workshops, store yards, Saw-mill, Switch Gear Room,
Compressor Stations, Office establishments etc. The extinguishers shall be
inspected, serviced and maintained in accordance with manufacturers
instructions. The inspection shall be evidenced by notations on tag attached to
the extinguisher.

(ii)

Full reliance shall never be placed on portable hand extinguishers as all of

these have a very limited capacity.

Water, in ample quantity and under

adequate pressure, shall always be available for fire fighting.

(iii)

Where a group of work points are located beyond the range of protection from
a public water supply, the installation of a water system for private fire
protection shall be warranted.

(iv)

Evacuation facilities and fire exit shall be provided at all locations featuring
fire hazards.

ix

(v)

Siren or other suitable fire alarm arrangement shall be made on all Sites.
Warning signs shall be pasted at all locations having fire hazards.

(vi)

All staff shall be conversant with the use of all type of fire extinguishing
apparatus.

(vii)

In the event of fire on electrical mains or apparatus, the effected part shall
immediately be completely isolated from its source of supply of electrical
energy.

(viii) Demonstrations and training in fire fighting shall be conducted at sufficient

intervals to ensure that sufficient personnel are familiar with and are capable
of operating fire fighting equipment.

6.21

When any work is carried on, which is likely to affect the security or stability of an
installation or structure or any part thereof and endanger any person employed, all
practicable precautions shall be taken by shoring or otherwise to prevent collapse of
structure or fall of any part thereof and thus remove the cause of danger to such
structures and the persons employed.

6.22

For persons engaged in handling of corrosive materials, adequate equipment shall be

provided.

6.23

Where, in connection with any grinding, cleaning, spraying or manipulation of any

material, there is emission of dust or fume of such character and to such extent as is
likely to be injurious to the health of persons employed, all practical measures shall be
taken by securing adequate ventilation or by the provision and use of suitable
respirators or otherwise to prevent inhalation of such dust and fume.

6.24

The Contractor shall strictly follow the safety procedures & practices as mentioned in
Indian standard IS5216-1982 Guide for Safety Procedure & Practices in Electrical
Work during the execution of this

Contract. In this regard the under J&K

Electricity rules 1978 shall also be applicable to the Contractor to fulfill the safety
precaution for workmen and Plant.

6.25

In addition to instructions contained here-in-above the safety regulations contained in

the following IS Codes shall also apply wherever the provisions in the codes are
exhaustive in nature.

i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)

6.26

IS:4756-1978
(Reaffirmed 1991)
IS: 3696-1987 (Part-I)
(Reaffirmed 1991)
IS: 3696-1991 (Part-II)
IS: 3016-1982
(Reaffirmed 1990)
IS - 5216-1982
Part 1 & 2
(Reaffirmed 1990)

Safety Code for Tunneling Work

Safety Code of Scaffolds & Ladders
(Pt. I Scaffolds )
Safety Code of Scaffolds & Ladders
(Pt. II Ladders)
Fire precaution in welding and cutting
operations
Guide for Safety procedures and Practices in
Electrical work
Part 1 General
Part-2 Life saving techniques

Notwithstanding the above provisions, the Engineer-in-Charge may require the

Contractor to follow any other Act or Rules in force in J&K in respect of Safety
Precautions so as to ensure the safety of the Workmen and the Plant and the
Contractor shall promptly comply with such requirements.

xi

ANNEXURES
CONTENTS
ANNEX

PAGE NO.

ANNEX - I
13
PROFORMA OF BID (FOR TECHNICAL BID)
13
ANNEX - IA
15
PROFORMA OF BID (FOR PRICE BID)
15
ANNEX II
17
PROFORMA FOR BANK GUARANTEE FOR BID SECURITY
17
ANNEX - III
19
PROFORMA OF AGREEMENT
19
ANNEX IV
22
PROFORMA FOR BANK GUARANTEE FOR PERFORMANCE SECURITY 22
ANNEX V
24
PROFORMA FOR BANK GUARANTEE FOR ADVANCE PAYMENT
(ON A
NON-JUDICIAL STAMP PAPER OF THE REQUISITE VALUE) 24
ANNEX - VI
26
SCHEDULE OF TARIFF
26
ANNEX VII
27
PROFORMA FOR REQUIREMENT FOR POWER LOAD
27
ANNEX VIII
28
PROFORMA FOR REQUIREMENT OF SPACE FOR STORAGE,
COLONIES,
OFFICES ETC.
28
ANNEX IX
29
INDEMNITY BOND
29
ANNEX X
33
PROFORMA FOR AGREEMENT / MEMORANDUM OF UNDERSTANDING33

xii

ANNEX - I
PROFORMA OF BID (FOR TECHNICAL BID)
Tender
:
Tender Notice No. :
From
:
To

Sub: Bid for __________________________

(Description of works)
Dear Sir,
With reference to Bidding Documents forwarded to us under your letter No.
______ dated __________, we, the undersigned, having examined the Bidding
Documents including corrigenda/addenda for the execution of the above named
Work, offer to execute and complete the whole of the Works in conformity with
the said Bidding Documents.
We are enclosing herewith the Bid Security amounting to __________ (in words
and in figures) in the form of _______ of the Information & Instructions".
We confirm that our Bid shall remain valid for one hundred eighty (180) calendar
days and the Bid Security shall remain valid for a period of two hundred and ten
(210) calendar days from the date of opening of Techno-Commercial Bid.
We undertake, if our bid is accepted, to commence and to complete the whole of
the works comprised in the contract within the time specified by JKPDD in the
Bidding Documents.
We further confirm that in the event the Bid is accepted, we shall furnish
performance security of the Information & Instructions" towards successful
performance of the contract and shall execute the Contract Agreement of the
Information & Instructions".

Scope & General Technical Requirement (Section I)

Page 13 of

Unless and until a formal Contract Agreement is executed, this Bid, subsequent
correspondences together with the Letter of Award of JKPDD shall constitute a
binding Contract between us and JKPDD.
We understand that JKPDD is at liberty not to accept the lowest Bid Price. We
also understand that JKPDD is at liberty not to accept any or all Bids and JKPDD
is at liberty to negotiate with Bidder(s) at any stage.
Dated this

day of

20

(Signature and Full Name)

Title

(affix seal here)

Firm's address:

Telephone:

Telex:

Cable Address:

Fax:

Witness

(Signature and Full Name)

Scope & General Technical Requirement (Section I)

Page 14 of

ANNEX - IA
PROFORMA OF BID (FOR PRICE BID)
Tender
Tender Notice No.
From
To

:
:
:
:

Sub: Bid for __________________________

(Description of works)
Dear Sir,
With reference to Bidding Documents forwarded to us under your letter No.
______ dated __________, we, the undersigned, having examined the Bidding
Documents including corrigenda/addenda for the execution of the above named
Work, offer to execute and complete the whole of the Works in conformity with
the said Bidding Documents for the sum of ____________(in words & figure).
We are enclosing herewith the Bid Security amounting to __________ (in words
and in figures) in the form of _______ of the Information & Instructions".
We confirm that our Bid shall remain valid for one hundred eighty (180) calendar
days and the Bid Security shall remain valid for a period of two hundred and ten
(210) calendar days from the date of opening of Techno-Commercial Bid.
We undertake, if our bid is accepted, to commence and to complete the whole of
the works comprised in the contract within the time specified by JKPDD in the
Bidding Documents.
We further confirm that in the event the Bid is accepted, we shall furnish
performance security of the Information & Instructions" towards successful
performance of the contract and shall execute the Contract Agreement of the
Information & Instructions.

Scope & General Technical Requirement (Section I)

Page 15 of

Unless and until a formal Contract Agreement is executed, this Bid, subsequent
correspondences together with the Letter of Award of JKPDD shall constitute a
binding Contract between us and JKPDD.
We understand that JKPDD is at liberty not to accept the lowest Bid Price. We
also understand that JKPDD is at liberty not to accept any or all Bids and JKPDD
is at liberty to negotiate with Bidder(s) at any stage.
Dated this

day of

20

(Signature and Full Name)

Title

(affix seal here)

Firm's address:

Telephone:

Telex:

Cable Address:

Fax:

Witness

(Signature and Full Name)

Scope & General Technical Requirement (Section I)

Page 16 of

ANNEX II
PROFORMA FOR BANK GUARANTEE FOR BID
SECURITY
To
Executive Engineer
Grid Construction Division
Ambedkar chowk Jammu.

WHEREAS, (Name of the Bidder)_________________ (hereinafter called "the

BIDDER") has submitted his bid dated __________________for (Name of Contract)
____________________(hereinafter called "the Bid").
KNOW ALL men by these presents we (Name of Bank)______________ of (Name of
Country) _________________ having our registered office at ____________(hereinafter
called "the Bank") are bound unto the Executive Engineer Grid Construction Division
Jammu in the sum of ______________ for which payment well and truly to be made to
the JKPDD, the Bank binds himself, his successors and assigns by these presents.

SEALED with the Common Seal of the said Bank this

20_____

day of

THE CONDITIONS of this obligation are;

i)

If the Bidder withdraws his Bid during the period of bid validity specified in the
Proforma of Bid; or

ii)

If the Bidder having been notified of the acceptance of his Bid by the JKPDD
during the period of bid validity;
a)

fails or refuses to execute the Proforma of Agreement in accordance with

the Instructions to Bidders, if required; or

b)

fails or refuses to furnish the Performance Security, in accordance with the

Instructions to Bidders.

We undertake to pay to the Executive Engineer Grid Construction Division Jammu

upto the above amount upon receipt of its first written demand, provided that in its
demand the Executive Engineer Grid Construction Division Jammu will note that

Scope & General Technical Requirement (Section I)

Page 17 of

amount claimed by it is due to it owing to the occurrence of one or both conditions,

specifying the occurred condition or conditions.

This Guarantee will remain in force upto and including the date 210 days after the closing
date of submission of bids as stated in the Information and Instructions and any demand
in respect thereof should reach the Bank not later than the above date.

DATE.

SIGNATURE OF THE BANK.

WITNESS..
(Signature, Name and Address)

SEAL.

Scope & General Technical Requirement (Section I)

Page 18 of

ANNEX - III
PROFORMA OF AGREEMENT
THIS AGREEMENT MADE the ..day of ....20BETWEEN
Chief Engineer, System & Operation Wing Jammu, Gladni Complex, Narwal Jammu
(J&K) .(hereinafter called the JKPDD) of the one part and (Name of
Contractor).of (mailing address of Contractor)..(hereinafter called the
Contractor ) of the other part.

WHEREAS the JKPDD is desirous that certain goods and services should be provided
viz. (Brief description of goods & service)..and has by a letter of Award
dated..accepted the offer by the Contractor for the supply of Goods and carrying out
the services.

NOW THIS AGREEMENT WITNESSETH as follows;

1.

In this Agreement words and expressions shall have the same meanings as are
respectively assigned to them in the conditions of Contract hereinafter referred to.

2.

The following documents shall be deemed to form and be read and construed as
part of this Agreement, viz;

i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)

this Proforma of Agreement

the Letter of Award
the additional conditions of Contract
the General conditions of Contract
the Technical Specifications
the Drawings
the Schedule of Prices
the offer by the Contractor

Scope & General Technical Requirement (Section I)

Page 19 of

ix)
x)
xi)
xii)
xiii)
3.

model rules for Health and Sanitary arrangements for contractors

workmen
contractors labour regulation
safely precautions
the Information and Instructions
the schedule of supplementary information, if any

The aforesaid documents shall be taken as complementary and mutually

explanatory of one another, but in case of ambiguities or discrepancies, shall take
precedence in the order set out above.

4.

In consideration of the payments to be made by the JKPDD to the Contractor as

hereinafter mentioned, the Contractor hereby covenants with the JKPDD

to

provide goods and services and remedy defects therein in conformity, in all
respects, with the provisions of the Contract.

5.

The JKPDD hereby covenants to pay the Contractor, in consideration of the

provisions of goods and services and remedying defects therein and completion of
the Works, the Contract Price at the times and in the manner prescribed by the
Contract.

In WITNESS whereof the parties hereto have caused their respective common seals to be
hereunto affixed (or have hereunto set their respective hands and seals) the day and year
first above written.

A)

SIGNED, SEALED AND DELIVERED

By the said

By the said

NAME

NAME ..

On behalf of the Contractor

On behalf of the JKPDD

In the presence of :

in the presence of :

..

Scope & General Technical Requirement (Section I)

Page 20 of

NAME ..

NAME .

Address.

Address..

Note: This Proforma is included in the Bidding Documents only for the information of
Bidders. Only the successful bidder shall, in due course, be required to fill this Proforma.

Scope & General Technical Requirement (Section I)

Page 21 of

ANNEX IV
PROFORMA FOR BANK GUARANTEE FOR
PERFORMANCE SECURITY
To

Executive Engineer
Grid Construction Division
Ambedkar chowk Jammu.

WHEREAS (Name and Address of Contractor).. (hereinafter called

the Contractor) has undertaken, in pursuance of Contract No...
dated...

to

execute

(Name

of

Contract

and

Brief

Description

of

Works).(hereinafter called the Contract).

AND WHEREAS it has been stipulated by you in the said Contract that the Contractor
shall furnish you with a Bank Guarantee by a recognized bank for the sum specified
therein as security for compliance with his obligations in accordance with the Contract;

AND WHEREAS we have agreed to give the Contractor such a Bank Guarantee;

NOW THEREFORE, we hereby affirm that we are the Guarantor and responsible to you,
on behalf of the Contractor, upto a total of........... (Amount of Guarantee) in
words and figure to be inserted by the Guarantor, representing the
percentage of the Contract Price, specified in the Contract, and we undertake to pay you,
upon your first written demand and without cavil or argument, any sum or sums within
the limits of ......... [Amount of Guarantee] as aforesaid without your needing to
prove or to show grounds or reason for your demand for the sum specified therein.

Scope & General Technical Requirement (Section I)

Page 22 of

We hereby waive the necessity of your demanding the said debt from the Contractor
before presenting us with the demand.

We further agree that no change or addition to or other modification of the terms of the
Contract or of the Works to be performed there under or of any of the Contract
documents which may be made between you and the Contractor shall in any way release
us from any liability under this guarantee, and we hereby waive notice of any such
change, addition or modification.

This guarantee is valid until the date 30 days after issue of the last Defects Liability
Certificate.

C)

SIGNATURE

AND

SEAL

OF

THE

GUARANTOR
Name of Bank
Address
Date

Note: The Bidder are not required to fill this Proforma.

Scope & General Technical Requirement (Section I)

Page 23 of

ANNEX V

PROFORMA FOR BANK GUARANTEE FOR ADVANCE PAYMENT

(ON A NON-JUDICIAL STAMP PAPER OF THE REQUISITE VALUE)
1.

In consideration of the Jammu & Kashmir Power Development Department

(JKPDD) (which expression shall unless repugnant to the subject or context
include its administrators, successors and assigns), (hereinafter called the
Principal) having agreed to make advance payment to (Name and full address of
the Contractor).(hereinafter called the Contractor(s)),

(Which expression

shall unless repugnant to the subject or context or meaning thereof include its
successors, administrators, executors and permitted assigns), whose bid for (Name
of the Contract)has been accepted and to whom the acceptance of the bid has
been communicated by a letter of Award and who is required to execute a formal
agreement on conditions of productions of a Bank Guarantee for (amount both in
figures and words)...

We, the (Any nationalized/scheduled Bank of India licensed to

do business in India by Reserve Bank of India) (Hereinafter referred to as the
Bank) do hereby undertake, promise and guarantee payment to the Principal on
demand all the amount advanced by the Principal to the said Contractor.

2.

The Bank Further agrees that:

i)

The Principal shall have the fullest liberty without affecting in any way the
liability of the Bank under the Guarantee or Indemnity, from time to time,
to vary any of the terms and conditions of the said Contract or to extend
time for performance by the said Contractor or to postpone for any time
and from time to time any of the powers exercisable by it against the said
Contractor and either to enforce or forbear from enforcing any of the
terms and conditions governing the said Contract or the securities

Scope & General Technical Requirement (Section I)

Page 24 of

available to the Principal and the Bank shall not be released from its
liability under these presents by any

exercise by the Principal of the Liberty with reference to the matters

aforesaid

or by reason of time being given to the said Contractor or any other

forbearance, act or omission on the part of the Principal or any indulgence

by

the Principal to the said Contractor or of any other matter or thing

whatsoever

which under the law relating to sureties would but for this

provision have the

ii)

effect of a releasing the Bank from its such liability.

These presents shall be governed by and construed in accordance with

J&K Laws.

iii)

The Bank hereby declares that it has the power to issue this Guarantee and
the undersigned has full power to do so.

iv)

It shall not be necessary for the Principal to proceed against the Contractor
before proceeding against the Bank Guarantee herein contained shall be
enforceable against the Bank, notwithstanding any other security which
the Principal may have obtained or obtain from the Contractor, shall at the
time when proceedings are taken against the Bank hereunder, be
outstanding or unrealized.

v)

The Guarantee herein contained shall remain in full force and effect,
during the period that would be taken for the performance of the terms and
conditions of the said Contract, Letter of Award and the Agreement which
is to be executed as aforesaid and that it shall continue to be enforceable
until the completion of delivery of goods at site.

3.

The Bank lastly undertakes not to revoke this Guarantee until

Scope & General Technical Requirement (Section I)

Page 25 of

Dated the .

Day of .20..
Here affix the Common Seal of the
Bank for .Bank ltd.

Note: The Bidders are not required to fill this Proforma.

ANNEX - VI
SCHEDULE OF TARIFF

Scope & General Technical Requirement (Section I)

Page 26 of

ANNEX VII
PROFORMA FOR REQUIREMENT FOR POWER LOAD

Sl.#

Location /
Purpose

Load Requirement
in kW

Expected Time
Schedule

Remarks

Total

Scope & General Technical Requirement (Section I)

Page 27 of

ANNEX VIII

PROFORMA FOR REQUIREMENT OF SPACE FOR STORAGE,

COLONIES, OFFICES ETC.

Sl. No

Description

Space for storage of

equipment
a)
Outdoor
b)
Indoor
Space for
construction of
Colonies, Offices etc.
Total requirement of
space

Space
Requirement in m2

Scope & General Technical Requirement (Section I)

Expected time
schedule

Remarks

Page 28 of

ANNEX IX
INDEMNITY BOND
THIS INDEMNITY BOND is made this day______________ by ___________________
_________________________________________, a company incorporated under the
____________________________ having its Registered Office at ________________
________________________________________________________________________
___ (hereinafter called as Contractor or Obligee which expression shall include its
successors and permitted assigns) in favour of Chief Engineer, System & Operation
Wing Jammu and having its Project site at Siot, Jammu region (J&K)(hereinafter
called JKPDD which expression shall include its successors and assigns):

WHEREAS JKPDD has awarded to the Contractor a Contract for ___________

___________________

of

Equipment

___________ vide its Letter of

and

materials

of___________________

Award/Contract No.__________________________

_________________ (hereinafter called the Contract) in terms of which JKPDD is

required to hand over various equipment to the Contractor for execution of the Contract.

And WHEREAS by virtue of the said Contract, the Contractor is required to execute an
Indemnity Bond in favour of JKPDD for the Equipment handed over to it by JKPDD for
the purpose of performance to the Contract/Storage, Preservation, Erection portion of the
contract (hereinafter called the Equipment).

AND THEREFORE, This Indemnity Bond witnessed as follows:

1.

That in consideration of various Equipment as mentioned in the Contract,

valued as per attached schedule to be handed over to the Contractor in
installments from time to time for the purpose of performance of the Contract,
the Contractor hereby undertakes to indemnify and shall keep JKPDD
indemnified, for the full value of the Equipment. The Contractor hereby

Scope & General Technical Requirement (Section I)

Page 29 of

acknowledges actual receipt of the initial installment of the Equipment etc. as

per details in the Schedule appended hereto. Further, the Contractor agrees to
acknowledge actual receipt of the subsequent installments of the Equipment
etc. as required by JKPDD in the form of Schedules consecutively numbered
which shall be attached to this Indemnity Bond as to form integral parts of this
Bond. The Contractor shall hold such Equipment etc. in trust as a Trustee
for and on behalf of JKPDD.
2.

That the Contractor is obliged and shall remain absolutely responsible for the
safe transit/protection and custody of the Equipment at JKPDD Project site
against all Contractors risks whatsoever till the Equipment are duly
used/erected in accordance with the terms of the Contract and the
plant/package duly erected and commission in accordance with the terms of
the Contract is taken over by JKPDD. The Contractor undertake to keep
JKPDD harmless against any loss or damage that may be caused to the
Equipment.

3.

The Contractor undertake that the Equipment shall be used exclusively for the
performance/execution of the Contract strictly in accordance with its terms
and conditions and no part of the equipment shall be utilized for any other
work or purpose whatsoever. It is clearly understood by the Contractor that
non-observance of the obligations under this Indemnity Bond by the
Contractor shall inter-alia constitute a criminal breach of trust on the part of
the Contractor for all intents and purpose including legal/penal consequences.

4.

That JKPDD is and shall remain the exclusive Owner of the Equipment free
from all encumbrances, charges or liens of any kind, whatsoever. The
Equipment shall at all times be open to inspection and checking by Engineerin-Charge/his representative or any other employees of JKPDD authorized by
him in this regard. Further, JKPDD shall always be free at all times to take
possession of the Equipment in whatever form the Equipment may be, if in its
opinion, the Equipment are likely to be endangered, misutilised or converted
to use other than those specified in the Contract, by any acts of omission or
commission on the part of the Contractor or any other person or on account of
any reason whatsoever and the Contractor binds himself and undertakes to
comply with the directions or demand of JKPDD to return the Equipment
without any demur or reservations.

5.

That this Indemnity Bond is irrevocable. If at any times any loss or damage
occurs to the Equipment or the same or any part thereof if misutilised in any
manner whatsoever, then the Contractor hereby agrees that the decision of the
Engineer-in-Charge/his representative as to assessment of loss or damage to
the Equipment shall be final and binding on the Contractor. The Contractor
binds itself and undertakes to replace the lost and/or damaged Equipment at its

Scope & General Technical Requirement (Section I)

Page 30 of

own cost and/or shall pay the amount of loss to JKPDD without any demur,
reservation or protest. This is without prejudice to any other right or remedy
that may be available to JKPDD against the Contractor under the Contract and
under this Indemnity Bond.
6.

That any loss or damage as stipulated, Volume-I of Bid document of the

equipment and the material during transit, storage, handling, erection, testing,
commissioning & operation and maintenance till the end of defect liability
period at any stage shall be Contractors responsibility and the replacement of
the damaged equipment shall be entirely at Contractors costs irrespective of
the amount and time of receipt of any claim by the Contractor.
And in consideration of the provision of the Letters of Award/Contract
No._______________________________________________, the Contractor
has the obligation to insure the equipment until the Defect Liability Period.
Therefore, the Indemnity Bond shall apply absolutely irrespective of the
amount and time of receipt of any claim.

7.

NOW THE CONDITION of the Bond is that if the Contractor shall duly and
punctually comply with the terms and conditions of this Bond to the
satisfaction of JKPDD, THEN, the above Bond shall be void, but otherwise, it
shall remain in full force and virtue.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Contractor has hereunto set its hand through its
authorized representative under the common seal of the Company, the day, month and
year first above mentioned.

SCHEDULE NO.

Sl.
No.

Particulars of the
Equipment handed
over

Qt
y

Particulars of Despatch title

Document..RR/GR/
B/L/A WB No. & Date

Value of the
Equipment

As per list attached

Scope & General Technical Requirement (Section I)

Page 31 of

Total FOB/Ex-works value

Add prorata Marine/inland transportation and Marine/inland insurance.

WITNESS

Scope & General Technical Requirement (Section I)

For and on behalf of

Page 32 of

ANNEX X
PROFORMA FOR AGREEMENT / MEMORANDUM OF
UNDERSTANDING
(On Non-Judicial Stamp Paper of Appropriate Value)

This agreement / Memorandum of Understanding (MoU) has been entered into

onday of

BETWEEN (Name of Bidder), a company incorporated in and

having its registered office at..herein referred to
as. . (which expression shall unless it be
repugnant to the context or meaning thereof shall mean and includes its successors and
assigns).

Of the first Part

AND

(Name of Manufacturer), a company incorporated in .

and having its registered office
at... herein referred to as
.(which expression shall unless it be
repugnant to the context or meaning thereof shall mean and include its successors and
assigns).

Of the Second Part

WHEREAS

Scope & General Technical Requirement (Section I)

Page 33 of

(Name of Bidder) has been awarded the Contract Package

No._____________by Chief Engineer, System & Operation Wing
Jammu herein referred to as JKPDD which expression shall unless it be
repugnant to the context or meaning thereof shall mean and include its
successors and assigns).

(Name of Manufacturer) has represented that they will supply the (Name
of Equipment) through (Name of Bidder) to JKPDD with responsibility
for performance of the contract for the design, engineering, manufacture,
testing before dispatch, transportation, insurance, handling, storage and
preservation, erection, testing and commissioning at the sites of
installation for (name of equipment).
(Name of manufacturer) will fulfill the warranty obligations of (Name of
equipment) and commit itself for supply of spares and servicing of
the. as and when required by JKPDD in future after the
fulfillment of warranty obligation of the Contractor to JKPDD.

(Name of Manufacturer) has gone through the Contract documents as

furnished by (Name of Bidder) and confirms that they have knowledge of
the provisions of the Contract including the Scope of Work stipulated
therein with respect to Sl. No. 2 and 3 above and that they are agreeable to
carry out the work in conformity with the obligations and requirements as
per the Contract.

For the performance of the contract, (Name of Manufacturer) confirms

that they have all the requisite technical expertise, experience, knowledge
and the required infrastructure. (Name of Manufacturer) further confirms
that they have fully equipped shop facility backed up with adequate
resources like plant, equipment, testing facilities and personnel enabling
design, engineering manufacture, shop testing, supply of equipment as per
contract specification and schedule and shall deploy personnel for
supervision of erection, testing and commissioning at the site of works.

NOW IT IS HEREBY AGREED AS FOLLOWS:

Scope & General Technical Requirement (Section I)

Page 34 of

a)

That (Name of Bidder) and (Name of Manufacturer) agrees and

undertakes that the progress of the scope of work shall be maintained at all
times as per the agreed schedule under the contract.

b)

That the Bidder and Manufacturer shall be liable jointly and severally to
the JKPDD for the execution of the Contract in accordance with Contract
terms.

c)

That Parties shall not disclose information, documents, drawings,

understanding etc. or any confidential matters / information in relation to
these presents to any third party without mutual consent.

d)

That this understanding shall be valid till the warranty obligation of

(Name of Bidder) and (Name of Manufacturer) and beyond that the MoU
shall be binding on (Name of Manufacturer) for supply of spares and
services to JKPDD directly without reference to (Name of Bidder).

IN WITNESS WHEREOF the Bidder and Manufacturer have herein to set their
respective hands through their authorised representatives under the common seal of the
company, the day, the month and year herein above mentioned.

For and on behalf of Manufacturer

For and on behalf of Bidder

(Name and Designation of the Authorised

Scope & General Technical Requirement (Section I)

Page 35 of

Signatory with Company seal)

(Name and Designation of the Authorised

Signatory with Company seal)

WITNESS (With Name & Designation)

WITNESS (With Name & Designation)

1.

1.

2.

2.

3.

3.

CONTRACT AGREEMENT NO-_____

THIS AGREEMENT IS MADE on thisday of..,
2015 BETWEEN the Governor of Jammu & Kashmir through Jammu
& Kashmir Power Development Department

(hereinafter called

JKPDD) of the one part and ______(Name of the Contractors/Self help

groups/Companies/Firms/Joint

Ventures)

registered

under

Indian

Companies/Societies Act. having its registered office at -------------------(hereinafter called the Contractor) of the other part.
WHEREAS the JKPDD is desirous that certain Goods and Services
contained in the Package designated as Contract Package in the Bidding
Documents viz. 132/33 KV Grid Sub Station Siot Jammu should be

Scope & General Technical Requirement (Section I)

Page 36 of

provided and has by a Letter of Award No. ---------------------- accepted

the offer submitted by the Contractor for the supply of Goods and
carrying out the Services.
NOW THIS AGREEMENT WITNESSETH as follows:
1

In this agreement, words and expressions shall have the same

meaning as are respectively assigned to them in the Conditions of
the Contract hereinafter referred to.

The following documents shall be deemed to form and be read and

construed as part of this Agreement, viz.:
i)

this Contract Agreement No. --------------

ii)

the Letter of Award issued under JKPDD letter No. -------------------------------.

iii)

the Additional Conditions of Contract contained in Volume I of the Bidding Documents after carrying out modifications.

iv)

the General Conditions of Contract contained in Volume - I

of the Bidding Documents after carrying out modifications.

v)

the Technical Specifications contained in Volume - II of the

Bidding Documents after carrying out modifications.

vi)

the

Specification

Drawings

contained

in

the

Bidding

Documents.
vii)

the offer submitted by Name of the Contractor vide their

letter No. ---------------------------

viii)

the Model Rules for Health & Sanitary Arrangement for the
Contractors workmen contained in Volume-I of the Bidding
Documents.

Scope & General Technical Requirement (Section I)

Page 37 of

ix)

the Contractors Labour Regulations contained in Volume-I

of the Bidding Documents.

x)

the Safety Precautions contained in Volume-I of the Bidding

Documents.

xi)

the Information and Instructions contained in Volume-I of

the Bidding Documents after carrying out modifications.

3. In addition to above, the following correspondence exchanged

between PDD & M/S ________ (Name of the contractor) on
various aspects of the officer shall also form part of Contract.

a.

________________________________________________________

b.

________________________________________________________

c.

________________________________________________________

d.

_________________________________________________________

e.

and so on

The aforesaid documents shall be taken as complementary and

mutually explanatory of one another, but in case of ambiguities or
discrepancies, shall take precedence in the order set out under
Para 2 above.

In consideration of the payment to be made by the JKPDD to the

Contractor as hereinafter mentioned, the Contractor hereby
covenants with the JKPDD to execute and complete the Works and
remedy defects if any, therein in conformity, in all respects with
the provisions of the Contract.

The Contract Price in respect of this Contract shall be Rs----------------(Rupees in words )

The

JKPDD

hereby

covenants

to

pay

the

Contractor,

in

consideration of the execution and completion of the Works, the

Contract Price at the time and in the manner prescribed by the
Contract.

Scope & General Technical Requirement (Section I)

Page 38 of

The documents specified under Paras 2 and 3 above shall be

designated as under:

8.1

Contract Agreement No. ----------------i)

Contract Agreement No. -----------------

ii)

Letter of Award: -------------------

iii)

Correspondence

between

Chief

Engineer

System

and

Operation wing ,Kashmir and the Contractor indicated under

Sl.No.3,
8.2

Contract Agreement No.___________________

i)

Information and Instructions

ii)

General Conditions of the Contract

iii)

Additional Conditions of the Contract

iv)

Project Features

v)

Model Rules for Health & Sanitary Arrangements for

Contractors Workmen.

vi)

Contractors Labour Regulations.

vii)

Safety Precautions.

viii)

Annex - I to XI

Contract Agreement No. ________________

8.3 Contract Agreement No. _______________(Documents of Technical
Specifications___________ Volumes)
8.4

Contract

Agreement

No.

___________________(Documents

of

Technical Specifications___________ Volumes)

8.5

Contract

Agreement

No._________________(Documents

of

Price

Schedules______________ Volumes)
8.6

Contract Agreement No.

Scope & General Technical Requirement (Section I)

Page 39 of

Commercial/Technical Details contained in Name of the

offer.

Contractors

Contract

Agreement

No.

__________________(Price Schedules
8.7

Contract

Agreement

No.________________(Documents

of

specification drawings)

IN WITNESS whereof the parties have hereunto set their respective

hands on the day and year first written above.
SIGNED & DELIVERED

For and on behalf of

Name of the Contractor

For and on behalf of Governor of

Jammu & Kashmir,

Name
Designation & Address
________________________________
________________________________
________________________________

Name
Designation & Address of the
authorized Signatory

Authorized Signatory
In the presence of two witnesses
1.

Authorized Signatory
In the presence of two witnesses
1.

2.

2.

Scope & General Technical Requirement (Section I)

Page 40 of

1. Name
Designation & Address

1. Name
Designation & Address

2. Name
Designation & Address

2. Name
Designation & Address

Scope & General Technical Requirement (Section I)

Page 41 of

Bidding Document
For
Turnkey Package of 1 x 50MVA,
132/33 kV
Portion of the proposed 220/132/33Kv Grid Substation Siot

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Volume II, Part 1)
Tender No: - SE-II/S&O/J/06

November, 2015

BIDDING DOCUMENTS
FOR
TURNKEY PACKAGE OF 1 x 50MVA, 132/33
kV
OF THE PROPOSED 220/132/33kv GRID
STATION SIOT
Jammu & Kashmir

Scope & General Technical Requirement (Section I)

Page 42 of

VOLUME-II, PART 1
SECTION - Project Description & Scope,
SECTION - General Technical Requirements
SECTION - Specific Technical Requirements.

Govt. Of Jammu & Kashmir

Power Development Department.
System & Operation Wing Jammu.
C O N T E N T S

VOLUME II (Part 1)

Scope & General Technical Requirement (Section I)

Page 43 of

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1. SECTION - PROJECT DESCRIPTION AND SCOPE

2. SECTION- GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS (GTR)

3. SECTION- SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

Scope & General Technical Requirement (Section I)

Page 44 of

PROJECT DESCRIPTION AND SCOPE

1.

Introduction

1.1.

Power Development Department of Jammu & Kashmir, Govt. of J & K is the

state utility responsible for Power transmission and distribution of electrical
energy from state power generation projects and share from Central Govt. Power
Projects to various types of consumers in the state of Jammu and Kashmir. The
infrastructure development in transmission system of Jammu region under
Prime Minister reconstruction programme covers various works of
transmission lines and associated sub-stations in Jammu region.

1.2.

The present scope of work covers the following:

The erection and commissioning of 1 x 50MVA 132kV / 33kV Grid Station at
Siot in Jammu region on turn key basis. The scope of work pertaining to
substation is given in subsequent clauses.

1.3.

The 132 / 33 kV substation at Siot will have following bays:

132 kV Yard
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)

132 kV Line bays

132 kV bays for 1 No. 50 MVA, 132/33 kV, Three
phase two winding Power Transformer
132 kV Bus coupler bay
132 kV bay as spare bay for Transformer-II (Space
only)

4 Nos.
1 No.

1 No.
1 No.

6 Nos.
1 No.
1 No.
1 Nos.
1 No.

33 kV Yard
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)

2.

33 kV line bays
33 kV Transformer bay
33 kV Bus coupler bay
33 kV Aux. transformer bays
33 kV bay as spare bay for Transformer-II (Space
only)

Detailed scope of works

The detail works broadly covers the following:

2.1

Design, engineering, manufacture, testing including testing at manufacturers

works, supply including transportation to site & insurance, storage at site,

Scope & General Technical Requirement (Section I)

Page 45 of

erection, testing and commissioning of the following equipments/material,

complete in all respects:
(a)

50MVA, 132kV / 33kV, three phase, two winding transformer

(b)

132kV circuit breakers, isolators with or without earth switch(s),

Current Transformers, Potential transformers and surge arresters.

(c)

33kV switchgear including circuit breaker, isolators, earth switches,

current transformers, voltage transformers and surge arresters etc.

(d)

Complete conventional control & protection system alongwith

associated equipment and provision for up gradation in future to a
completely automated substation.

(e)

Fire protection system

(f)

LT switchgear (AC/DC Distribution boards)

(g)

DG Set

(h)

Batteries & Battery Charger

(i)

1.1 kV grade Power & Control cables along with complete accessories

(j)

H.T. Cable(s) along with accessories

(k)

Lattice and pipe structures (galvanized)

(l)

Bus Post Porcelain Insulators, insulator strings and hardware, clamps &
connectors, Equipment terminal connector, Conductors and conductor
accessories, shield wires / ground wire and accessories, Aluminum
tubes, Bus bar and earthing materials, Bay Marshalling Kiosk, spacers,
cable supporting angles/channels, Cable trays & covers, Junction box,
buried cable trenches.

(m) Complete lighting of control room cum administrative building, bay

controller kiosks and illumination of the switchyard

(n)

Any other equipment/material required to complete the specified scope.

Scope & General Technical Requirement (Section I)

Page 46 of

2.2

Civil works:
Design, Engineering and Civil work shall include but not limited to the
following: (a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)

2.3

Foundation for Lattice, pipe and equipments support structures

Foundation for lighting poles, Bay marshalling box, panels and control
cubicles of equipments wherever required
Cable trenches along with covers and sump pits
Stone spreading and anti weed treatment of substation area
Permanent water supply for control room cum administrative building,
bay kiosks buildings and Fire Fighting system
Buildings for Control room
Foundation of 1x50 MVA transformer
Foundation of 1x250 KVA station transformers
Rain water harvesting

Studies / Design calculations :

The scope of studies / design calculations shall include but not limited for the
following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)

3.

Insulation co-ordination- Location of Surge Arrestors

Direct stroke lightning protection
Short circuit forces calculations for strung conductors and equipment
supports
Calculations for selection of Bus bars & spacer
Structure design calculations for lattice and pipe structures
Design calculations for foundations, cable trenches, roads etc.
Battery sizing calculations
Lighting design calculations for Bay Controller kiosks and outdoor
switchyard including street lighting

The bidders are advised to visit the substation site and acquaint themselves
with the topography, infrastructure and also the design philosophy. Before
proceeding with the construction work, the Contractor shall fully familiarize
himself with the site conditions and General arrangements & scheme etc.
Though the Purchaser shall endeavor to provide the information, it shall not
be binding for the Purchaser to provide the same. The Bidder shall be fully
responsible for providing all equipment, materials, system and services
specified or otherwise which are required to complete the construction and
successful commissioning, operation & maintenance of the substation in all
respects. All materials required for the Civil and construction/installation
work shall be supplied by the Contractor. The cement and steel shall also be
arranged by the Contractor.

Scope & General Technical Requirement (Section I)

Page 47 of

4.

The complete design (unless specified otherwise in specification elsewhere)

and detailed engineering shall be done by the Contractor based on conceptual
tender drawings.

5.

The Contractor shall also be responsible for the overall co-ordination with
internal/external agencies; Supplier of Purchasers supplied equipment,
project management, training of Purchasers manpower, loading, unloading,
handling, moving to final destination for successful erection, testing and
commissioning of the substation/switchyard.

6.

The scope of work includes preparation of single line diagrams and electrical
layouts including layout arrangement for transformers, erection key diagrams,
electrical and physical clearance diagrams, control and protection schematics,
wiring and termination schedules, civil designs (as applicable) and drawings,
design of fire fighting system and air conditioning system, indoor / outdoor
lighting/illumination and other relevant drawings & documents required for
engineering of all facilities within the fencing to be provided under this
Contract, are covered under the scope of the Contractor.

7.

Minimum phase to earth & phase to phase distances are indicated in the
drawings enclosed with this specification. The heights of different levels
indicated in the drawings are indicative only. Contractor is to confirm the
adequacy of the same and if required, column height and beam width for
gantry structures shall be modified by the Contractor subject to Purchasers
approval without any cost implication to the Purchaser.

8.

ACSR twin Moose conductor have been indicated for main buses for 132 kV
and 33 kV respectively. For equipment interconnections in 132 kV Bus
coupler bay, 33 KV Transformer and Bus-coupler bays, ACSR twin Moose
shall be used. While in other 132 kV and 33 kV bays ACSR single Moose
conductor shall be used for equipment interconnections. The Contractor is to
confirm and ensure its adequacy in terms of corona performance. The average
limit of 10 kV per meter and 500 micro Tesla for Electric and Magnetic fields
respectively are to be met at a height of 1.8 meter from Ground level. The
Contractor shall furnish all calculations and documents in support of the
above during detailed engineering.

9.

Any other items not specifically mentioned in the specification but which are
required for erection, testing and commissioning and satisfactory operation of
the substation are deemed to be included in the scope of the specification
unless specifically excluded.

10.

The Purchaser may repeat some of the type tests and additional type tests as
indicated in the specification.

Scope & General Technical Requirement (Section I)

Page 48 of

11.

SPECIFIC EXCLUSIONS
The following items of work are specifically excluded from the scope of the
specifications:
a) Leveling of yard for 132/33 kV Grid Station.
b) Fencing & Protection/retaining works of entire Grid Station land.However
providing of mesh fencing of 132&33 KV switchyards will be in the scope
of work.
c) Staff quarters.
d) Laying of LT power network along the three sides of outer fencing of Grid
Station and erection of temporary 250 KVA 11/.43 KV Sub/Stn for
Constructional Power.
e) Laying of earthing mat in 132&33KV switchyard. However mandatory
modification of earth mat because of laying foundations will be in the scope
of work.

12.

PHYSICAL AND OTHER PARAMETERS

Location of the Substation - The location of substation is indicated below:
Sl. Name
of
No. substation

Name of State

Nearest Rail
Head

1.

Jammu & Kashmir

Nearest rail head Northern

for the proposed Railway
site is Jammu

Siot in Jammu
region

Railway

Soil Data:
Preliminary Soil Investigation report (FOR TENDER PURPOSE ONLY)
attached herewith as annexure_____ to _______ .
Environmental conditions at Siot
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)

Installations
Altitude above sea level
Longitude
Latitude
Ambient air temperatures
Maximum

Outdoors
565 m
33 o 36 37 E
74 o 23 04 N
48oC

Scope & General Technical Requirement (Section I)

Page 49 of

Yearly average
Minimum
(f) Humidity
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)

Special corrosion conditions

Solar radiation
Atmospheric UV radiation
Seismic Accelerations

(k) Average number of thunder

storm days per annum

13.

30oC
0oC
100 %(Max)
10% (Min)
kW/m2
kW/m2
0.15g horizontal Acceleration
Zone - 4 vertical Acceleration
20

LEVEL OF SITE
Switch yard level for 132 kV yard, Transformer yard and 33 kV yard is
different. Different levels at Siot substation are indicated in the drawings
enclosed with this specification.

14.

BASIC REFERENCE DRAWINGS

The reference drawings, which form a part of the specifications, are given at
Section Tender Drawings. The bidder shall maintain the overall
dimensions of the substation, phase to earth clearance, phase to phase
clearance and sectional clearances.
The enclosed drawings give the basic scheme, layout of substation, substation
buildings, associated services etc. However, the Bidder is advised to get these
clarified from Purchaser.

15.

ORDER
OF
PRECEDENCE
OF
DIFFERENT PARTS OF TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATION
For the purpose of present scope of work, technical specification shall consist
of following parts / sections and they should be read in conjunction with each
other:
1)
2)
3)

Project Description and Scope

General Technical Requirement(GTR)
Technical specification for Power transformer

Scope & General Technical Requirement (Section I)

Page 50 of

4)
5)
6)
7)

Technical specification for Switchgear (Major Substation equipment

excluding transformer)
Technical specification for Relay and Protection Panels (Applicable for
substation without automation system)
Technical specification for Substation Automation
Technical specification for Substation Auxiliaries covering

8)
9)

Station transformer
DC battery and Battery Charger
AC /DC Distribution board
Power and Control Cables
Lighting System
Structures
DG Set
Fire Protection System

Technical specification for Civil Works

Technical specification for Switchyard Erection
covering Bus bar system, Earthing system (covering earthing &
grounding conductor), Shielding system (shield wire/ground wire,
lightning mast), Cable laying (covering Cable trays, accessories, cable
glands, cable terminations, cable lugs, conduit pipe), Tubular bus
Conductor / Rigid Aluminium pipes (for bus bars, overhead connections
and equipment interconnection), Marshalling kiosk, Clamps &
Connectors, Bushings, hollow column insulators and support insulator /
Bus Post Insulator, Insulators, Hardware fittings Insulators, Conductor
(for bus bars, overhead connections and equipment interconnection),
Galvanised stranded steel Shield wire / Ground wire, Spacers, Earthing
tension clamps, Flexible copper bonds, Terminal Block, Fuses, Terminal
connectors, Motors, Motor Control Centre, Unit Compressed Air
System, Galvanising

10) Specific Technical Requirements

11) Guaranteed and other technical Particulars
12) Tender drawings

16.

SPECIAL TOOLS AND TACKLES

The bidder shall include in his proposal the deployment of mandatory
operation and maintenance equipments before handing over as per
annexure-I required for erection, testing, commissioning and maintenance of
equipments. However a list of all such devices shall be indicated in the
relevant schedule provided in the BPS.

Scope & General Technical Requirement (Section I)

Page 51 of

Annexure-I

Sno Description
1
Spanners of all sorts

Quantity
1 Set

Spring Charging Handle

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

SF6 gas filling Kit

Gas leakage detector
Multimeter
Meggar Motorised 5KW
Screw driver
Wire cutter
Drill Machine
Oil testing machine of 100 kv range with
accessories
Welding Machine dry type up to 5kv with
accessories

1 No each for
132KV and
33KV for breaker
1 No
1 No
1 No
1 No
1 Set
1 No
1No
1 No

11

17.

1 No

FACILITIES TO BE PROVIDED BY THE

PURCHASER
Purchaser shall make available the auxiliary HT power supplies on chargeable
basis at a single point in the Sub-station. The prevailing energy rates of the
state shall be applicable. All further distribution from the same for
construction and permanent auxiliary supply shall be made by the Contractor.
However, in case of failure of power due to any unavoidable circumstances,
the Contractor shall make his own necessary arrangements like diesel
generator sets etc. at his own cost so that progress of work is not affected and
Purchaser shall in no case be responsible for any delay in works because of
non-availability of power.
For water required for construction work, the Contractor shall make his own
arrangement at his own cost and the Purchaser shall in no case be responsible
for any delay in works because of non-availability or inadequate availability
of water.

18.

SPECIFIC REQUIREMENT

Scope & General Technical Requirement (Section I)

Page 52 of

(i)

The Bidders are advised to visit substation site and acquaint themselves
with the topography, infrastructure, etc.
(ii) The Bidder shall be responsible for safety of human and equipment
during the working. It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to
coordinate and obtain Electrical Inspectors clearance before
commissioning. Any additional items, modification due to observation of
such statutory authorities shall be provided by the Contractor at no extra
cost to the Purchaser.
(iii) Tensions per phase in 132 kV and 33 kV lattice structures shall be
decided by the Contractor considering all aspects of layout design i.e
maintaining all clearances, electric & magnetic field etc subject to
Purchasers approval.

Scope & General Technical Requirement (Section I)

Page 53 of

GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS (GTR)

CONTENTS
CLAUSE
NO.

TITLE

PAGE NO.

1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7

FOREWORD
Ci
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Ci
STANDARDS
Cii
EQUIPMENT DESIGN REQUIREMENT
Ciii
SYSTEM PARAMETERS
Ciii
AUXILIARY SUPPLY
Civ
GUARANTEED & OTHER TECHNICAL PARTICULARS/
ENGINEERING DATA AND DRAWINGS
Cv
1.8
MATERIAL / WORKMANSHIP
Cviii
1.9
Clamps and Connectors Including Terminal Connectors
Cxix
1.10
CONTROL CABINETS, JUNCTION BOXES, TERMINAL BOX
AND MARSHALLING BOXES FOR OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT
Cxxi
1.11
LAMPS AND SOCKETS
C
xxiii
1.12
Bushings, Hollow Column Insulators, Support Insulators
Cxxiv
1.13
TERMINAL BLOCK
Cxxv
1.14
MOTORS
C
xxvii
1.15
MAJOR EQUIPMENT, AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT, ANCILLARY
ITEMS, OTHER WORKS
Cxxxi
1.16
DESIGN IMPROVEMNTS/COORDINATION
Cxxxi
1.17
QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAMME
C
xxxii
1.18
TYPE TESTING, INSPECTION, TESTING & INSPECTION
CERTIFICATE
C
xxxiii
1.19
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING AT SITE
C
xxxvii
1.20
TRAINING OF PURCHASERS ENGINEERS
C
xxxviii
1.21
INSTRUCTION MANUALS Cxxxviii
1.22
DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS
Error! Bookmark not defined.
ANNEXURE - I
C
xxxix
1.0
GENERAL
Cxl
2.0
TEST LEVELS
Cxl

Scope & General Technical Requirement (Section I)

Page 54 of

3.0
TEST METHODS FOR RIV
Cxl
4.0
TEST METHODS FOR VISIBLE CORONA
Cxl
5.0
TEST RECORDS
Cxlii
6.0
SEISMIC WITHSTAND TEST PROCEDURE
Cxlii
ANNEXURE - II
Cxlii
LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS
Cxliii
ANNEXURE-III
H
lxxxviii
LIST OF DRAWINGS/DOCUMENTS TO BE APPROVED TO QUALIFY FOR
SECOND ADVANCE
H
lxxxviii

Scope & General Technical Requirement (Section I)

Page 55 of

GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS (GTR)

1.1

FOREWORD
The provisions under this section are intended to supplement general requirements
for the materials, equipments and services covered under other sections of tender
documents and is not exclusive. However, in case of conflict between the
requirements specified under other sections, the requirements specified under
respective sections shall prevail.

1.2

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.2.1

The Bidders shall submit the technical requirements, data and information as per
the technical data sheets provided under Section Guaranteed and other
Technical Particulars of the bid documents.

1.2.2

The Bidders shall furnish catalogues, engineering data, technical information,

design documents, drawings etc fully in conformity with the technical
specification.

1.2.3

It is recognised that the Contractor may have standardised on the use of certain
components, materials, processes or procedures different from those specified
herein.
Alternate proposals offering similar equipment based on the
manufacturers standard practice will also be considered provided such proposals
meet the specified designs, standard and performance requirements and are
acceptable to the Purchaser / Owner. Unless brought out clearly, the Bidder shall
be deemed to conform to this specification scrupulously. All deviations from the
specification shall be clearly brought out in the respective Schedule of
Deviations. Any discrepancy between the specification and the catalogues or the
bid, if not clearly brought out in the specific requisite schedule, will not be
considered as valid deviation. Deviations listed elsewhere in the tender shall be
ignored and it shall be assumed that the provisions of the specification are fully
complied with by the Bidder.

1.2.4

Except for lighting fixtures, wherever a material or article is specified or defined

by the name of a particular brand, manufacturer or Vendor, the specific name
mentioned shall be understood as an established product as far as function and
quality are concerned. The objective should not be to limit competition. For
lighting fixtures, makes shall be as defined in Lighting System under
Section- Substation Auxiliaries.

1.2.5

Equipment furnished shall be complete in every respect with all mountings,

fittings, fixtures and standard accessories normally provided with such
equipment and / or needed for erection, completion and safe operation of the
equipment as required by applicable codes though they may not have been
specifically detailed in the Technical Specification unless included in the list
of exclusions. Materials and components not specifically stated in the
specification but which are necessary for commissioning and satisfactory
Ci

Section

Specific Technical Requirements

operation of the switchyard/substation unless specifically excluded shall be

deemed to be included in the scope of the specification and shall be supplied
without any extra cost. All similar standard components/parts of similar
standard equipment provided, shall be inter changeable with one another.
1.3

STANDARDS

1.3.1

The works covered by the specification shall be designed, engineered,

manufactured, built, tested and commissioned in accordance with the Acts, Rules,
Laws and Regulations of India.

1.3.2

The standard of material should be adhered and should be as per IS/BS

standards. In case of any ambiguity between GTP and ISS/CEA
Guidelines/CVIP manuals, the ISS guidelines shall prevail upon.

1.3.3

The equipment and material to be furnished under this specification shall conform
to the provisions of the latest issue with all amendments (as on the date of bid
opening) of standards specified under Annexure-II of this section, unless
specifically mentioned in the specification.

1.3.4

The Bidder shall note that standards mentioned in the specification are not
mutually exclusive or complete in themselves, but intended to compliment each
other.

1.3.5

The Contractor shall also note that list of standards presented in this specification
is not complete. Whenever necessary, the list of standards shall be considered in
conjunction with specific IS/IEC.

1.3.6

When the specific requirement stipulated in the specifications exceed or differ

from those required by the applicable standards, the stipulation of the specification
shall take precedence.

1.3.7

Other internationally accepted standards which ensure equivalent or better

performance than those specified in the standards referred in the specifications
under Annexure-I/ individual sections for various equipment shall also be
accepted. Copies of such standards shall be submitted by the bidder without any
extra cost to the owner. The approval of the owner to comply with these standards
shall be required to be obtained by the bidder.

1.3.8

In case the governing standard for the equipment is different from that specified
under Annexure-I/ individual sections for various equipment, the salient points of
difference shall be clearly brought out in Schedule of additional information of
Section- Schedules with English language version of standard or relevant
extract of the same. The equipment conforming to standards other than specified
under Annexure-I/ individual sections for various equipment shall be subject to
Owner / Purchasers approval.

1.3.9

The bidder shall clearly indicate in his bid/ design calculation/ relevant drawings
the specific standard in accordance with which the works will be carried out.
Cii

Section

Specific Technical Requirements

1.3.10

One copy of each standard to which the offered materials/ equipment will conform
shall be supplied by the bidder without any extra cost to the Purchaser.

1.4

EQUIPMENT DESIGN REQUIREMENT

1.4.1

The 132 kV system is being designed to limit the power frequency over voltage to
1.5 p.u. The equipment furnished under this specification shall perform all its
functions and operate satisfactorily without showing undue strain, re-strike etc.
under such over voltage conditions.

1.4.2

All equipment shall also perform satisfactorily under various other electrical,
electro-mechanical and meteorological conditions of the site of installation.

1.4.3

All equipment shall be able to withstand all external and internal mechanical,
thermal and electro-mechanical forces due to various factors like wind load,
temperature variation, short circuit etc. for the equipment.

1.4.4

The bidder shall design terminal connectors of the equipment taking into account
various forces that are required to be withstood.

1.4.5

The equipment shall also comply with the following:

a)
b)
c)

All outdoor EHV equipment except marshalling kiosks shall be suitable

for hot line washing.
To facilitate erection of equipment, all items to be assembled at site shall be
match marked.
All piping, if any between equipment control cabinet/operating mechanisms
to marshalling box of the equipment, shall bear proper identification to
facilitate the connection at site.

1.4.6

Operating time of circuit breakers and protective relays have been specified in
respective sections.

1.5

SYSTEM PARAMETERS
EHV equipment and system shall be designed in accordance with the following
system parameters:

1. System operating voltage

132 kV

33 kV

2. Highest system voltage

145 kV

36 kV

3. System frequency

50 Hz

50 Hz

4. Number of phases

5. System earthing

Effectively earthed system

Ciii

Section

Specific Technical Requirements

Short circuit level for 1

6. sec. Duration
7. Corona extinction voltage

31.5 kA

25 kA

8. Minimum creepage
distance (25 mm / kV)
9. Minimum clearances*

3625 mm

900 mm

1300 mm
1300 mm
3800 mm

320 mm
320 mm
2800 mm

iv)
Equipment 4700 mm
interconnection level (1St
level) from ground
v) Elevation of lowest
portion
of
insulators
supporting
live
conductors,
equipment
parts etc. from plinth level

3700 mm

i) Phase to Phase
ii) Phase to ground
iii) Sectional Clearances

2550 mm

For ensuring the requisite clearances from fencing, the height of fencing shall be
taken as 2500 mm.
* For altitudes above 1000m and upto 3000m the clearances shall be increased by
1.25% per 100m.
Note: The rated lightning impulse, switching impulse, power frequency withstand
voltage level, Radio Interference Voltage (RIV) and major technical parameters
of the equipment/ material shall be as per values given in the respective Section
of the equipment/ material as well as in Section-Specific Technical
Requirement.

1.6

AUXILIARY SUPPLY
The Sub-Station auxiliary supply is normally met through a system indicated
under Section Substation Auxiliaries having the following parameters. The
auxiliary power for station supply, including the equipment drive, cooling system
of any equipment, air conditioning, lighting etc shall be designed for the specified
Parameters as under. The DC supply for the instrumentation shall also conform
to the parameters as indicated below:
Normal

Section

Variation in Frequency in Phase/Wire

Civ

Specific Technical Requirements

Neutral

Voltage

Voltage

Hz

415V AC

10%

50+ 5%

240V AC

10%

50+ 5%

220V DC

10%

DC

connection
3 Phase
4 wire
1 Phase
2 wire
-

Solidly
Earthed
Solidly
Earthed
Isolated
2
wire
system

Combined variation of voltage & frequency shall be limited to 10%.

1.7

GUARANTEED & OTHER TECHNICAL

PARTICULARS/ ENGINEERING DATA
AND DRAWINGS

1.7.1

The technical information, data and other details shall be furnished by the
Contractor in accordance with the Section Guaranteed & other Technical
Particulars for each set of equipment / material as specified in the Technical
Specifications.

1.7.2

All engineering data submitted by the Contractor after final process including
review and approval by the Purchaser shall form part of the Contract Document
and the entire works performed under these specifications shall be performed in
strict conformity, unless otherwise requested by the Purchaser in Writing.

1.7.3

The list of drawings / documents which are to be submitted to the Owner /

Purchaser shall be as indicated in respective technical section. The Contractor
shall necessarily submit all the drawings/documents unless anything is waived.
The Contractor shall submit relevant drawings/design documents/data/test
reports as asked for.

1.7.4

DRAWINGS

1.7.4.1

The substation layout drawings showing plan and sectional elevation, structural
drawings, cable trench layout etc. and other relevant drawings are enclosed in
Section- Tender Drawings. The various drawings appended with the
specification are for tender purpose only. The successful tenderer shall
prepare detailed drawings with all minor details based on the Purchaser's
Drawings for approval by the Purchaser.

Cv
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

1.7.4.2

After placement of order, the successful tenderer shall also furnish the following
for the approval of Purchaser.
a)

b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)

All relevant drawings pertaining to various equipments like power

transformer, Circuit Breaker, isolators, Instrument Transformers, Surge
Arresters, battery, battery charger, AC/ DC Distribution board, station
transformer, LT switchgear, lighting system, power & control cables, and all
other ancillary items as specified in various sections of the specification.
Substation layout drawings in details (Plan, sectional elevation, structural
layout)
Clearance diagram
Power and control cable schedules.
Cable trench layout in the substation yard .
Substation structure design calculations
Direct Stroke Lightning Protection design and layout
All Control & protection design documents and drawings
Erection and maintenance manuals
All civil works design and drawings
Any other relevant design / drawing not specifically mentioned but required
by the Purchaser during detail engineering

1.7.4.3

All drawings submitted by the Contractor including those submitted at the time of
bid shall have sufficient detail to indicate the type, size, arrangement, material
description, Bill of Materials, weight of each component, break up for packing
and shipment, dimensions, internal & external connections, fixing arrangement
required and any other information specifically requested in the specifications.

1.7.4.4

Each drawing submitted by the Contractor shall be clearly marked with the name
of the Owner / Purchaser, the unit designation, the specification's title, the
specification number and the name of the Project. If standard catalogue pages are
submitted, the applicable items shall be indicated therein. All titles, noting,
marking and writings on the drawing shall be in English. All the dimensions
should be in metric units.

1.7.4.5
1.7.4.61.7.4.5 Further work by the Contractor shall be in strict accordance with these
drawings and no deviation shall be permitted without the written approval of the
Owner / Purchaser, if so required.
1.7.4.71.7.4.6 The review of these data by the Owner / Purchaser will cover only general
conformance of the data to the specifications and documents interfaces with the
equipment provided under the specifications, external connections and dimensions
which might affect substation layout. This review by the Owner / Purchaser may
not indicate a thorough review of all dimensions, quantities and details of the
equipment, materials, any devices or items indicated or the accuracy of the
information submitted. This review and / or approval by the Owner / Purchaser
shall not be considered by the Contractor, as limiting any of his responsibilities
and liabilities for mistakes and deviations from the requirements, specified under
these specifications and documents.
1.7.4.81.7.4.7 All manufacturing and fabrication work in connection with the equipment
prior to the approval of the drawings shall be at the Contractors risk. The
Cvi
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

Contractor may make any changes in the design which are necessary to make the
equipment conform to the provisions and intent of the contract and such changes
will again be subject to approval by the Owner / Purchaser. Approval of
Contractors drawing or work by the Owner / Purchaser shall not relieve the
Contractor of any of his responsibilities and liabilities under the contract.

1.7.4.91.7.4.8 Approval Procedure

The scheduled dates for the submission of the drawings as well as for, any
data/information to be furnished by the Purchaser would be discussed and
finalized at the time of award. The following schedule shall be followed generally
for approval and for providing final documentation.
i)

Approval/comments/by Purchaser on initial As per agreed schedule

submission

ii)

Resubmission(whenever required)

iii)

Approval or comments

iv)

Furnishing of distribution copies in bound 2 weeks from the date of

volume (5 copies per substation and one copy final approval
for Consultant)

v)

Furnishing of distribution copies of test reports

(a) Type test reports (one copy per substation 2 weeks from the date of
plus one copy for Consultant)
final approval

Within
3(three)weeks
from date of comments
including both ways
postal time)
Within 3 weeks of receipt
of resubmission.

(b) Routine Test Reports (one copy for each -dosubstation)

vi)

Furnishing of instruction/operation manuals (5 as per agreed schedule

copies per substation and one copy for
Consultant)

vii)

VCD highlighting installation and maintenance

techniques/ requirements of circuit breaker &
isolators (one per substation plus one for
Consultant)

viii) As built drawings & CD/Optical Disc (Two

sets per substation plus one set for Consultant)
NOTE:

Cvii
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

-do-

On completion of entire
works

(1)

(2)

(3)
(4)

(5)

(6)

The Contractor may please note that all resubmissions must

incorporate all comments given in the earlier submission by the
Purchaser or adequate justification for not incorporating the same must
be submitted failing which the submission of documents is likely to be
returned.
The drawings which are required to be referred frequently during
execution should be submitted on cloth lined paper. The list of such
drawings shall be finalized with the Contractor at the time of Award.
All major drawings should be submitted in latest Auto CAD Version
The instruction Manuals shall contain full details of drawings of all
equipment being supplied under this contract, their exploded diagrams
with complete instructions for storage, handling, erection
commissioning, testing, operation, trouble shooting, servicing and
overhauling procedures.
If after the commissioning and initial operation of the substation, the
instruction manuals require any modifications/additions/changes, the
same shall be incorporated and the updated final instruction manuals
shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Purchaser.
The Contractor shall furnish to the Purchaser catalogues of spare parts.

1.8

MATERIAL / WORKMANSHIP

1.8.1

General

1.8.1.1

Where the specification does not contain references to workmanship, equipment,

materials and components of the covered equipment, it is essential that the same
must be new, of highest grade of the best quality of their kind conforming to best
engineering practice and suitable for the purpose for which they are intended.

1.8.1.2

In case where the equipment, materials or components are indicated in the

specification as similar to any special standard, the Owner / Purchaser shall decide
upon the question of similarity. When required by the specification or when
required by the Owner / Purchaser, the Contractor shall submit, for approval, all
the information concerning the materials or components to be used in
manufacture.
Machinery, equipment, materials and components supplied,
installed or used without such approval shall be liable to rejection/ run the risk of
subsequent rejection, it being understood that the cost as well as the time delay
associated with the rejection shall be borne by the Contractor.

1.8.1.3

The design of the Works shall be such that installation, future expansions,
replacements and general maintenance may be undertaken with a minimum of
time and expenses. Each component shall be designed to be consistent with its
duty and suitable factors of safety, subject to mutual agreements. All joints and
fastenings shall be devised, constructed and documented so that the component
parts are accurately positioned and restrained to fulfil their required function. In
general, screw threads shall be standard metric threads. The use of other thread
forms will only be permitted when prior approval has been obtained from the
Owner / Purchaser.
Cviii

Section

Specific Technical Requirements

1.8.1.4

Whenever possible, all similar parts of the works shall be made to gauge and shall
also be made interchangeable with similar parts. All spare parts shall also be
interchangeable and shall be made of the same materials and workmanship as the
corresponding parts of the equipment supplied under the specification. Wherever
feasible, common component units shall be employed in different pieces of
equipment in order to minimise spare parts stocking requirements. All equipment
of the same type and rating shall be physically and electrically interchangeable.

1.8.1.5

All materials and equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with the
manufacturers recommendation(s). Only first class work in accordance with the
best modern practices will be accepted. Installation shall be considered as being
the erection of equipment at its permanent location. This, unless otherwise
specified, shall include unpacking, cleaning and lifting into position, grouting,
levelling, aligning, coupling of or bolting down to previously installed equipment
bases/foundations, performing the alignment check and final adjustment prior to
commissioning in accordance with the
initial operation, testing and
manufacturers tolerances, instructions and the specification.
All factory
assembled rotating machinery shall be checked for alignment and adjustments
made as necessary to re-establish the manufacturers limits. Suitable guards shall
be provided for the protection of personnel on all exposed rotating and / or
moving machine parts and shall be designed for easy installation and removal for
maintenance purposes. The spare equipment(s) shall be installed at designated
locations and tested for healthiness.

1.8.1.6

The Contractor shall apply oil and grease of the proper specification to suit the
machinery, as is necessary for the installation of the equipment. Lubricants used
for installation purposes shall be drained out and the systems flushed through
where necessary for applying the lubricant required for operation. The Contractor
shall apply all operational lubricants to the equipment installed by him.

1.8.1.7

All oil, grease and other consumable used in the Works/ Equipment shall be
purchased in India unless the Contractor has any special requirement for the
specific application of a type of oil or grease not available in India. If such is
the case he shall declare in the proposal, where such oil or grease is available.
He shall help Purchaser in establishing equivalent Indian make and Indian
Contractor. The same shall be applicable to other consumables too.

1.8.1.8

A cast iron or welded steel base plate shall be provided for all rotating equipment
which are to be installed on a concrete base unless otherwise agreed to by the
Owner / Purchaser. Each base plate shall support the unit and its drive assembly,
shall be of design with pads for anchoring the units, shall have a raised top around
and shall have threaded in air connections, if so required.

1.8.2

Provisions Against Exposure to Hot and Humid Climate

Outdoor equipment supplied under the specification shall be suitable for service
and storage under tropical conditions of high temperature, Zero temperature, high
humidity, heavy rainfall and environment favourable to growth of Fungi and
Mildew The indoor equipment located in non-air-conditioned areas shall also be
suitable for similar conditions.
Cix

Section

Specific Technical Requirements

1.8.3

Space Heaters

1.8.3.1

The heaters shall be suitable for continuous operation at 240 V AC supply voltage.
On-Off switch and MCB shall be provided. One or more adequately rated
thermostatically controlled heaters shall be supplied to prevent condensation in
any compartment. The heaters shall be installed in the compartment and electrical
connections shall be made sufficiently away from below the heaters to minimise
deterioration of supply wire insulation. The heaters shall be suitable to maintain
the compartment temperature to prevent condensation.

1.8.4

Fungistatic Varnish
Besides the space heaters, special moisture and fungus resistant varnish shall be
applied on parts that may be subjected or predisposed to the formation of fungi
due to the presence or deposit of nutrient substances. The varnish shall not be
applied to any surface or part where the treatment will interfere with the operation
or performance of the equipment. Such surfaces or parts shall be protected against
the application of the varnish.

1.8.5

Ventilation Opening
In order to ensure adequate ventilation, compartments shall have ventilation
openings provided with fine wire mesh of brass to prevent the entry of insects and
to reduce to a minimum the entry of dirt and dust. Outdoor compartment openings
shall be provided with shutter type blinds and suitable provision shall be made so
as to avoid any communication of air/dust with any part in the enclosures of the
control cabinets, junction boxes, marshalling boxes and panels, etc.

1.8.6

Degree of Protection

1.8.6.1

The enclosure of the Control Cabinet, Junction Boxes and Marshalling Boxes,
Panels etc. to be installed shall provide degree of protection as detailed here
under:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)

Installed out door: IP 55.

Installed indoor in air conditioned area: IP31
Installed in covered area :IP 52
Installed indoor in non air-conditioned area where possibility of entry
of water is limited :IP41
For LT switchgear (AC & DC distribution Boards): IP52

1.8.6.2

The degree of protection shall be in accordance with IS:13947 (Part I) / IEC: 947
(Part I) / IS:12063 / IEC:529. Type test report for degree of protection test, on
each type of the box shall be submitted for approval.

1.8.7

Rating Plates, Nameplates and Labels

Cx
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

1.8.7.1

Each main and auxiliary item of substation is to have permanently attached to it in

conspicuous position a rating plate of non corrosive material upon which is to be
engraved manufacturers name, year of manufacture, equipment name, type or
serial number together with details of the loading conditions under which the item
of Sub-Station in question has been designed to operate, and such diagram plates
as may be required by the Owner / Purchaser. The rating plate of each equipment
shall be according to IEC requirement.

1.8.7.2

All such nameplates, instruction plates, rating plates of transformers, reactors, CB,
CT, PT, SA, Isolators, C & R Panels and equipment shall be bilingual with Hindi
inscription first followed by English. Alternatively, two separate plates one with
Hindi and the other with English inscription may be provided.

1.8.8

First Fill of Consumables, Oil And Lubricants

All the first fill of consumables such as oils, lubricants, filling compounds, touch
up paint, soldering/brazing material for all copper piping of circuit breakers and
essential chemicals etc. which will be required to put the equipment covered under
the scope of the specifications, into successful operation, shall be furnished by the
Contractor unless specifically excluded under the exclusions in these
specifications and documents.

1.8.9

Finishing of Metal Surfaces

All metal surfaces shall be subjected to treatment for anti corrosion protection. All
ferrous surfaces for external use unless otherwise stated elsewhere in the
specification or specifically agreed, shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrication.
High tensile steel nuts & bolts and spring washers shall be electro galvanized to
service condition 4.
All steel conductors including those used for
earthing/grounding (above ground level) shall also be galvanized according to IS:
2629.

1.8.10

Galvanization

1.8.10.1

All steel structures, steel conductors including those used for earthing/ grounding
(above ground level) bolts, nuts and washers, D-shackles, link strain plates etc
shall be galvanized. Purity of zinc to be used for galvanization shall be of
grade Zn 99.95 as per IS: 209(1979). Hot dip galvanization of members and
heavy washers shall conform to IS: 4579 and that of fasteners to IS: 1367. Spring
washers shall be electrogalvanised as per IS: 1573. The galvanization shall be
done after all fabrication work is completed except that the nuts be tapped or rerun
after galvanization. Threads of bolts and nuts shall have a neat fit and shall be
capable of developing full strength of the bolts. All galvanised material shall
withstand tests as per IS: 2633-1972. The galvanised steel shall be subjected to
six (6) one minute dips in copper sulphate solution as per IS: 2633.

1.8.10.2

The galvanised surfaces shall consist of a continuous and uniform thick coating of
zinc, firmly adhering to the surface of steel. The finished surface shall be clean
and smooth and shall be free from defects like discoloured patches, bare spots,
unevenness of coating, spelter which is loosely attached to the steel globules,
spiky deposits, blistered surface, flaking or peeling off, etc. The presence of any
Cxi

Section

Specific Technical Requirements

of these defects noticed on visual or microscopic inspection shall render the

materials liable to rejection.
1.8.10.3

Galvanising of each member shall be carried out in one complete immersion.

Double dipping shall not be permitted. All bolts, nuts, locknuts, washers etc shall
be hot dip galvanized.

1.8.10.4

After galvanising, no drilling, threading or welding shall be performed on the

galvanised parts of the equipment except nuts which may be threaded after
galvanising. Sodium dichromate treatment shall be provided to avoid formation
of white rust after hot dip galvanisation.

1.8.10.5

The weight of zinc deposit shall not be less than 610 gms per sq.m of the
surface area and in addition, the thickness of zinc coating at any spot shall
not be less than 85 microns unless specifically mentioned. Stub members,
anchor bolts shall have heavier zinc coating not less than 800 gms/sq.m. The
owner reserves the right to measure the thickness of zinc deposit by Elko meter or
any other instrument acceptable to owner and reject any which shows thickness of
zinc at any location less than 85 microns. Should the galvanising of the sample be
found defective the entire batch of steel shall have to be regalvanised at
Contractor's cost. The testing on the galvanized material shall be carried out as per
IS: 2633.

1.8.10.6

The weight of zinc deposit over the threaded portion of the bolts, nuts and
screws shall not be less than 300 gms per sq. meter of surface area and
thickness of zinc at any spot shall not be less than 43 microns. The threads
shall have extra deposit of zinc which shall be removed by die cutting after
the completion of galvanising. The removal of extra zinc shall be carefully done
so that threads shall have minimum deposit of zinc on them as specified.

1.8.10.7

Sharp edges with radii less than 2.5 mm shall be able to withstand four
immersions of the standard Preece test. All other coatings shall withstand six
immersions. The following galvanising tests should essentially be performed as
per relevant Indian Standard.
-

Coating thickness
Uniformity of zinc
Adhesion test
Mass of zinc coating

1.8.10.8

Galvanised material must be transported properly to ensure that galvanised

surfaces are not damaged during transit. Application of zinc rich paint at site shall
not be allowed.

1.8.11

Painting

1.8.11.1

All sheet steel work shall be degreased, pickled, phosphated in accordance with
the IS: 6005 Code of practice for phosphating iron and sheet. All surfaces
which will not be easily accessible after shop assembly shall beforehand be treated
and protected for the life of the equipment. The surfaces, which are to be finished
and painted after installation or require corrosion protection until installation, shall
Cxii

Section

Specific Technical Requirements

be shop painted with at least two coats of primer. Oil, grease, dirt and swarf shall
be thoroughly removed by emulsion cleaning. Rust and scale shall be removed by
pickling with dilute acid followed by washing with running water, rinsing with
slightly alkaline hot water and drying.
1.8.11.2

After phosphating, thorough rinsing shall be carried out with clean water followed
by final rinsing with dilute dichromate solution and oven drying. The phosphate
coating shall be sealed with application of two coats of ready mixed, stoving type
zinc chromate primer. The first coat may be flash dried while the second coat
shall be stoved.

1.8.11.3

After application of the primer, two coats of finishing synthetic enamel paint shall
be applied, each coat followed by stoving. The second finishing coat shall be
applied after inspection of first coat of painting.

1.8.11.4

The exterior colour of the paint shall be as per shade No: 697 of IS:5 and inside
shall be glossy white for all equipment, marshalling boxes, junction boxes, control
cabinets, panels etc. unless specifically mentioned under respective sections of the
equipments. Each coat of primer and finishing paint shall be of slightly different
shade to enable inspection of the painting. A small quantity finishing paint shall
be supplied for minor touching up required at site after installation of the
equipments.

1.8.11.5

In case the Bidder proposes to follow his own standard for surface finish and
protection procedures or any other established painting procedures, like
electrostatic painting etc., the procedure shall be submitted along with the Bid for
Owner / Purchasers review & approval.

1.8.11.6

The colour as given below shall be followed for Fire Protection system
S.No.

Pipe Line

Fire Protection System

1
Hydrant and Emulsifier
system pipeline
2
Emulsifier system detection
line- water
3
Emulsifier system detection
line- Air
4
Pylon support pipes

Base colour

Band colour

FIRE RED

FIRE RED

Sea Green

FIRE RED

Sky Blue

FIRE RED

The direction of flow shall be marked by (arrow) in black colour.

1.8.12

Welding

1.8.12.1

The welding works shall be done as per approved fabrication drawings which
should clearly indicate various details of joints to be welded, type of weld length
and size of weld, whether shop weld or site weld. Symbols for welding on
erection and shop drawings shall be according to IS:813. Efforts shall be made to
Cxiii

Section

Specific Technical Requirements

reduce site welding so as to avoid improper welding due to constructional

difficulties.
1.8.12.2

Welding of structural steels shall be done by electric arc process. The procedure to
be followed, materials, plant and equipment to be used, and testing and inspection
procedures to be applied shall be to the satisfaction of the purchaser and shall
conform generally to relevant acceptance standards viz. IS: 816, IS: 823, IS: 814
and Indian Standards Hand Book for metal arc welding.

1.8.12.3

All the welders to be employed for the job shall have qualified the appropriate test
laid down in IS: 1811 and IS: 817. If the welder fails in these tests, two further
sets of tests shall be undertaken and the welder to qualify must pass both these
sets of tests. Routine testing of all welders shall be done every six months. The
Purchaser also reserves the right to have any welder retested at any time.

1.8.12.4

Each welder shall be assigned an identification mark and such mark shall be
marked on the structure adjacent to the weld on completion of any structural
welded joint. The entire weld of any structure joint shall be made by one welder.

1.8.12.5

The Contractor shall maintain records of all the welders identification marks, the
joints welded by each welder, the welding procedure adopted, welding machine
employed, pre and post heating done and any non destructive test done and stress
relieving heat treatment performance on such joints. All such records for entire
welding operations shall be accessible to the Engineer in charge for welding work
accomplished in the preceding months as token of acceptance. But such
acceptance shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility regarding
adequacy & safety of welding operation.

1.8.12.6

100 per cent of the welds shall be inspected visually for external defects.
Dimensions of welds shall be checked. The length and size of weld shall be as per
approved fabrication drawings. It may be slightly oversized but should not be
undersized. The profile of weld is affected by the position of the joint but it
should be uniform. In case of butt and corner welds, the profile shall be convex
and in case of submerged arc fillet weld it shall be slightly concave. The welds
should have regular height and width of heads. The height and spacing of ripples
shall be uniform. The joints in the weld run where welding has been
recommended shall as far as possible be smooth and should not show any humps
or crater in the weld surface. Welds shall be free from unfilled craters on the
surface, undercuts, slag on the surface and visible cracks. Such inspection shall be
done after further radiographic/ultra sonic examination. If found necessary and
directed by the Purchaser, the work shall be dismantled and redone duly replacing
the defective materials including basic members. Weld gauges shall be used to
measure the size of the welds.

1.8.12.7

The acceptance of the welded work shall depend upon correct dimensions and
alignment, absence of distortion in the structure, satisfactory results from the
examination and testing of the joints and the test specimens as per IS, soundness
of the welds and upon general workmanship being good.

1.8.12.8

The electrodes used for welding shall be of suitable type and size depending upon
specifications of the parent material, the method of welding, the position of
Cxiv

Section

Specific Technical Requirements

welding and quality of welds desired e.g. normal penetration welds or deep
penetration welds.
1.8.12.9

Where coated electrodes are used they shall meet the requirement IS:814 and
relevant ASMI SEC IX. Covering shall be heavy to withstand normal
conditions of handling and storage. They shall be free from all defects, which
would interfere with performance of electrodes.

1.8.12.10 Only those electrodes, which give radiographic quality welds, shall be used for
heavily loaded structures and those subjected to dynamic loading.
1.8.12.11 Where bare electrodes are used theses shall correspond to specification of the
parent material. The electrodes shall be stored properly and the flux shall be
baked before use in an oven in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements
as stipulated.
1.8.12.12 Specific approval of the engineer in charge shall be taken by the Contractor for the
various electrodes proposed to be used on the work before any welding in started.
1.8.13

Packaging & Protection

1.8.13.1

All the equipment shall be suitably protected, coated, covered or boxed and crated
to prevent damage or deterioration during transit, handling and storage at site till
the time of erection. On request of the Owner / Purchaser, the Contractor shall
also submit packing details/associated drawing for any equipment/material under
his scope of supply, to facilitate the Owner / Purchaser to repack any equipment /
material at a later date, in case the need arises. While packing all the materials,
the limitation from the point of view of availability of Railway wagon sizes in
India and transportation limitations stipulated in specification should be taken into
account. The Contractor shall be responsible for any loss or damage during
transportation, handling and storage due to improper packing. Any demurrage,
wharfage and other such charges claimed by the transporters / railways etc. shall
be to the account of the Contractor. Owner / Purchaser takes no responsibility of
the availability of the wagons.

1.8.13.2

All coated surfaces shall be protected against abrasion, impact, discolouration and
any other damages. All exposed threaded portions shall be suitably protected with
either a metallic or a non-metallic protecting device. All ends of all valves and
piping and conduit equipment connections shall be properly sealed with suitable
devices to protect them from damage. The parts which are likely to get rusted,
due to exposure to weather should also be properly treated and protected in a
suitable manner.

1.8.14

Handling, Storage and Installation

1.8.14.1

Electrical installation work shall comply with all currently applicable statutes to
Indian Electricity Rules/ Regulations under Electricity Act 2003, fire insurance
regulations and safety codes in the locality where the equipment will be installed.
Nothing in this specification shall be construed to relieve the Bidder of this
responsibility.
Cxv

Section

Specific Technical Requirements

1.8.14.2

Unless otherwise specified, installation work shall comply with the requirements
of latest editions of applicable Indian Standards.

1.8.14.3

Tolerances shall be as established in the manufacturer's drawings. No equipment

shall be permanently bolted down to foundation or structure until the alignment
has been checked and found acceptable by the Owner / Purchaser.

1.8.14.4

The Contractor shall furnish all supervision, labour, erection tools, and equipment
upon cranes, rigging materials and incidental materials such as bolts, wedges,
anchors, concrete inserts etc. required to completely install, test and adjust the
equipment.

1.8.14.5

The manufacturer's drawings, instructions and recommendations shall be

correctly followed in handling, setting, testing and commissioning of all
equipment and care shall be exercised in handling to avoid distortion to stationary
structures, the marring of finish or damaging of delicate instruments or other
electrical parts. Adjustment shall be made as necessary to the stationary structures
for plumb and level, for the sake of appearance or to avoid twisting of frames,
binding of hinged members, etc.
a)
b)
c)
d)

All support insulators, circuit breaker interrupters and other fragile equipment shall preferably be handled with
cranes with suitable booms and handling capacity.
No part of the structure shall be utilised to lift or erect any equipment without prior permission of the Engineer(s) of
the Owner / Purchaser.
The slings shall be of sufficient length to avoid any damage to insulator due to excessive swing, scratching by sling
ropes etc.
Handling equipment, sling ropes, etc. should be tested before erection and periodically for strength.

1.8.14.6

Induction motors shall be installed and commissioned as per IS code of practice

IS: 900 and the manufacturers instructions.

1.8.14.7

Care shall be taken during handling of insulating oil to prevent ingress of

moisture or foreign matter.

1.8.14.8

Bending of compressed air piping should be done by a bending machine and

through cold bending only. Bending shall be such that inner diameter of pipe is
reduced.

1.8.14.9

Cutting of the pipes wherever required shall be such as to avoid flaring of the
ends. Hence only a proper pipe-cutting tool shall be used. Hack saw shall not be
used.

1.8.14.10 For cleaning the inside and outside of hollow insulators only Muslin or leather
cloth shall be used.
1.8.14.11 After installation of all power and control wiring, the Contractor shall perform
operating tests on all switchgear and verify proper operation of switchgear and
correctness of the interconnections between various items of the equipment. This
shall be done by applying normal AC or DC voltage to the circuits and operating
the equipment. Megger tests for insulation, polarity checks on the instrument
transformers, operation tests on equipment, and the manufacturers installation
tests shall be carried out by the Contractor, who shall also make all necessary
Cxvi
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

adjustments as specified by the manufacturer for proper functioning of the

equipment.
1.8.14.12 The Contractor shall arrange at site all the equipment, instrument, and auxiliaries
required for testing and commissioning of equipment.
1.8.14.13 Equipment furnished with finished coats of paint shall be touched up by the
Contractor if their surface is soiled or marred while handling.
1.8.14.14 Petroleum conducting jelly shall be applied for current carrying joint connections,
clamps etc. to avoid corrosion.
1.8.14.15 Silicon polish (water repellent) shall be applied on all insulation, stacks, bushings,
etc. after installation and before commissioning to avoid tracking.
1.8.14.16 Testing, commissioning at site will be as per Clause 1.19, "Testing &
Commissioning at site" of this section.
1.8.14.17 The bidder shall have to co-ordinate with the supplier of transformers for
erection & commissioning of transformer.
1.8.14.18 The following checks shall be carried out as part of the installation work:
a)

Check for physical damage. Any damage to the equipment at the time of
receipt shall be reported to the Owner / Purchaser
b) Check from the name plates/packing list that all items are as per order and
specifications.
c) Check tightness of all joints, clamps and connecting material.
d) For oil filled equipment check for oil leakage, if any, also check oil level and
top up, wherever necessary.
e) Check earth connections.
f) Check cleanliness of insulator bushings.
g) All checks and tests specified by the manufacturers in their drawings and
manuals, literatures, as well as all tests specified in the relevant codes of
standards.
1.8.14.19 In accordance with the specific installation instructions as shown on the
manufacturers drawings or as directed by the Owner / Purchaser or his
representative, the Contractor shall unload, store, erect, install, wire, test and place
into commercial use all the equipment included in the contract. Equipment shall
be installed in a neat, workmanlike manner so that it is level, plumb, and square
and properly aligned and oriented. Commercial use of switchyard equipment
means completion of all site tests specified and energisation at rated voltage.
1.8.14.20 The Contractor shall provide and construct adequate storage shed for proper
storage of equipment. Weather sensitive equipment shall be stored indoors. All
equipment during storage shall be protected against damage due to acts of nature
and accidents. The storage instructions of the equipment manufacturers /
Purchaser's Engineer shall be strictly adhered to.

Cxvii
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

1.8.14.21 Contractor shall engage Manufacturers Engineer(s) to supervise the

unloading, transportation to site, storing, erection, testing and commissioning
of the various equipment / material covered under the specification.
Contractor shall unload, transport, store, erect, test and commission the
equipment as per instructions of the Manufacturers Supervisory Engineer(s)
and shall extend full cooperation to them.
1.8.14.22 In case of any doubt/misunderstanding as to the correct interpretation of
manufacturers drawings or instruction, necessary clarifications shall be obtained
from the Owner / Purchaser. Contractor shall be held responsible for any damage
to the equipment consequent to not following manufacturers
drawings/instructions correctly.
1.8.14.23 Where assemblies are supplied in more than one section, Contractor shall make all
necessary mechanical and electrical connections between sections including the
connection between buses. Contractor shall also do necessary adjustments/
alignments necessary for proper operation of circuit breakers, isolators and their
operating mechanisms. All components shall be protected against damage during
unloading, transportation, storage, installation, testing and commissioning. Any
equipment damaged due to negligence or carelessness or otherwise shall be
replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.
1.8.14.24 Contractor shall be responsible for examining all the shipment and notify the
Owner / Purchaser immediately of any damage, shortage, discrepancy etc. for the
purpose of Owner / Purchasers information only. The Contractor shall submit to
the Owner / Purchaser every week a report detailing all the receipts during the
week. However, the Contractor shall be solely responsible for any shortages or
damages in transit, handling and / or in storage and erection of the equipment at
site. Any demurrage, wharfage and other such charges claimed by the
transporters, railways etc. shall be to the account of the Contractor.
1.8.14.25 The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the equipment/material until the
same is handed over to the Owner / Purchaser in an operating condition after
commissioning.
Contractor shall be responsible for maintenance of the
equipment/material while in storage as well as after erection until taken over by
Owner / Purchaser, as well as protection of the same against theft, elements of
nature, corrosion, damages etc.
1.8.14.26 Where material/equipment is unloaded by Owner / Purchaser before the
Contractor arrives at site or even when he is at site, Owner / Purchaser by right
can hand over the same to Contractor and there upon it will be the responsibility
of Contractor to store the material in an orderly and proper manner.
1.8.14.27 The Contractor shall be responsible for making suitable indoor storage facilities,
to store all equipment which requires indoor storage.
1.8.14.28 The words erection and installation used in the specification are synonymous.
1.8.14.29 Exposed live parts shall be placed high enough above ground to meet the
requirement of electrical and other statutory safety codes concerning clearances
and practices.
Cxviii
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

1.8.14.30 The design and workmanship shall be in accordance with the best engineering
practices to ensure satisfactory performance throughout the service life. If at any
stage during the execution of the Contract, it is observed that the erected
equipment(s) do not meet the minimum clearances as given in Clause 1.5, the
Contractor shall immediately proceed to correct the discrepancy at his risk and
cost.
1.8.15

Equipment Bases
A cast iron or welded steel base plate shall be provided for all rotating equipment
which is to be installed on a concrete base unless otherwise agreed to by the
Purchaser. Each base plate shall support the unit and its drive assembly, shall be
of a neat design with pads for anchoring the units, shall have a raised lip all
around, and shall have treaded drain connections.

1.8.16

Tools And Tackles

The Contractor shall supply with equipment one complete set of all special tools
and tackles for the erection, assembly, disassembly and maintenance of the
equipment. However, these tools and tackles shall be separately packed and
brought on to site.

1.8.17

Support Structure

1.8.18.1

The Contractor is required to supply structures of various equipment and other

structures. The details of structures are covered under Section Substation
Auxiliaries of the specification. The support structure for all equipment shall be
supplied by the Contractor. The equipment support structures shall be suitable for
equipment connections at the first level i.e. 4.7 meter and 3.7 meter from plinth
level for 132 kV and 33kV system respectively. All equipment support structures
shall be supplied alongwith brackets, angles, stool etc. necessary for attaching the
operating mechanism, control cabinets and marshalling box (wherever applicable)
etc.

1.8.18.2

In case of any deviation in this regard the bid is liable to be considered technically
non responsive and shall be liable to be rejected.

1.8.18.3

The minimum vertical distance from the bottom of the lowest porcelain part of the
bushing, porcelain enclosures or supporting insulators to the bottom of the
equipment base, where it rests on the foundation pad shall be 2.55 meters.

1.9

Clamps and Connectors Including Terminal

Connectors

1.9.1

All power clamps and connectors shall conform to IS: 5561 & NEMA CC1 and
shall be made of materials listed below:
Cxix

Section

Specific Technical Requirements

a)

For connecting ACSR conductors

Aluminium alloy casting, conforming

to designation A6 of IS: 617 and all
tests shall conform to IS: 617

b) For connecting equipment

terminals made of copper with
ACSR conductors

Bimetallic connectors made from

aluminium casting, conforming to
designation A6 of IS: 617 with 2 mm
thick bimetallic liner and all test shall
conform to IS: 617

c)

Galvanised mild steel wire

For connecting G.I. wire

d) i) Bolts, nuts & Plain washers

ii) Spring washers for items a

to c

i) Electrogalvanised for sizes below

M12, for others hot dip
galvanised
ii) Electrogalvanised mild steel
suitable for atleast service
condition-3 as per IS: 1573

1.9.2

Each equipment shall be supplied with the necessary terminals and connectors, as
required by the ultimate design for the particular installation. The conductor
terminations of equipment shall be either expansion, sliding or rigid type suitable
for Twin & Single Moose ACSR or any other suitable flexible conductor with 300
mm and 250 mm sub conductor spacing for 132 kV and 33 kV respectively. The
requirement regarding external corona and RIV as specified for any equipment
shall include its terminal fittings and the equipment shall be factory tested with the
connectors in position. If corona rings are required to meet these requirements
they shall be considered as part of that equipment and included in the scope of
work.

1.9.3

When copper to aluminium connections are required, bi-metallic clamps shall be

used, which shall be properly designed to ensure that any deterioration of the
connection is kept to a minimum and restricted to parts which are not current
carrying or subjected to stress. The design details of the joint shall be furnished to
the Purchaser by the Contractor.

1.9.4

Low voltage connectors, grounding connectors and accessories for grounding all
equipment as specified in each particular case, are also included in the scope of
work.

1.9.5

No current carrying part of any clamp shall be less than 10 mm thick. All ferrous
parts shall be hot dip galvanised. Copper alloy liner of minimum 2 mm thickness
shall be cast integral with aluminium body for bi-metallic clamps.

1.9.6

All casting shall be free from blowholes, surface blisters, cracks and cavities. All
sharp edges and corners shall be blurred and rounded off.

1.9.7

Clamps shall be designed to carry the same current as the conductor and the
temperature rise shall be equal to or less than that of the conductor at the specified
ambient temperature. The rated current for which the clamp/connector is designed
Cxx

Section

Specific Technical Requirements

with respect to the specified reference ambient temperature, shall also be indelibly
marked on each component of the clamp/connector, except on the hardware.

1.9.8

All current carrying parts shall be designed and manufactured to the minimum
contact resistance.

1.9.9

Clamps and connectors shall be designed to be corona controlled. Corona

extinction voltage for 132kV class clamps shall not be less than 105 kV (rms) and
RIV shall not be more than specified 500 micro volts at the test voltage specified
in respective sections.

1.9.10

Tests
Clamps and connectors should be type tested as per IS: 5561 and shall also be
subjected to routine tests as per IS: 5561. Following type test reports on three
samples of similar type shall be submitted for approval.
a)
b)
c)
d)

Temperature rise test

Short time current test
Corona and RIV (dry) test
Resistance test and tensile test

1.10
1.111.10

CONTROL CABINETS, JUNCTION

BOXES, TERMINAL BOX AND
MARSHALLING BOXES FOR OUTDOOR
EQUIPMENT
The control cabinets/ boxes all types of shall generally conform to IS: 5039/ IS:
8623, IEC: 439 as applicable and the clauses given below.

1.10.1

Cabinet/ boxes shall be free standing floor mounting type, or wall mounting type
or pedestal mounting type as per requirements. A canopy and sealing
arrangements for operating rods shall be provided in marshalling boxes/ control
cabinets to prevent entry of rain water.

1.10.2

Control cabinets/ junction boxes/ terminal boxes shall be outdoor type, rigidly
constructed out of sheet steel or aluminium and shall be dust, water and vermin
proof. Sheet steel used shall be at least 2.0 mm thick cold rolled / 2.5 mm hot
rolled and properly braced to prevent wobbling. There shall be sufficient
reinforcement to provide level surfaces, resistance to vibrations and rigidity
during transportation and installation. In case of aluminium enclosed bow the
thickness of aluminium shall be such that it provides adequate rigidity and long
life as comparable with sheet steel of specified thickness.

Cxxi
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

1.10.3

Control cabinets, junction boxes, terminal box shall be provided with double
hinged doors with padlocking arrangements. The distance between two hinges
shall be adequate to ensure uniform sealing pressure against atmosphere.

1.10.4

All doors, removable covers and plates shall be gasketed all around with EPDM/
Neoprene gaskets. The gasket shall be tested in accordance with approved quality
plan. The quality of gasket shall be such that it does not get damaged/ cracked
during the ten years of operation of the equipment or its major overhaul whichever
is earlier. All gasketed surfaces shall be smooth, straight and reinforced if
necessary to minimize distortion and to make a tight seal. Ventilating louvers, if
provided, shall have screen and filters. The screen shall be fine wire mesh made of
brass.

1.10.5

All sheet steel works shall be degreased, pickled, phosphated and then applied
with two coats of zinc chromate primer and two coats of finishing synthetic
enamel paint. The colour of finishing paint shall be light admiral grey in
accordance with Shade No. 697 of IS: 5 outside and inside shall be glossy
white.

1.10.6

The terminal boxes/ control cabinets/ junction boxes/ marshalling boxes shall be
designed for the entry of cable from bottom by means of weather proof and dust
proof connections. Boxes and cabinets shall be so designed with generous
clearances to avoid interference between the wiring entering from below and any
terminal blocks or accessories mounted within the box or cabinet. Suitable cable
gland plate projecting at least 150 mm above the base of the marshalling kiosk /
box shall be provided for this purpose along with the proper blanking plates.
Necessary number of cable glands shall be supplied and fitted on this gland plate.
This gland plate shall have provision for some future glands, if needed to be
provided in the future. The glands shall project at least 25 mm above the gland
plate to prevent the entry of moisture in the cable crutch. The glands shall be dust
tight, screw or double compression type and made up of brass. The glands shall
have provision for securing armour of the cable separately and shall be provided
with earthing tag. The glands shall be Nickel plated and shall conform to BS:
6121.

1.10.7

All electrical connections and contacts shall possess ample cross section and
capacity for carrying continuously the specified current without undue heating.

1.10.8

All cubicles shall be provided with a thermostatically controlled space heater,

interior lighting facilities and one single-phase power outlet (3 pin) with socket.
All indicating and control devices shall be mounted on the front door.

1.10.9

Thermostatically controlled space heater shall maintain cubicle temperature to

prevent condensation. The heaters shall be suitable for 240 V AC supply voltage.

1.10.10

A 240 V, single phase, 50 Hz, 15 Amps. AC plug and socket shall be provided in
the cabinet with ON OFF switch for connection of hand lamps. Plug and 15
Amp socket with switch shall be of industrial grade.

1.10.11

For illumination of control cabinet/ boxes, a 20 watts Compact Fluorescent Lamps

shall be provided. The illumination lamp shall be controlled by the door switch.
Cxxii

Section

Specific Technical Requirements

1.10.12

All control switches shall be of rotary switch type and toggle/ piano switches shall
not be accepted.

1.10.13

Positive earthing of the cabinet shall be ensured by providing two separate

earthing pads. The earth wire shall be terminated on the earthing pad and secured
by the use of star or self-etching washers. Earthing of hinged door shall be done
by using a separate earth wire.

1.10.14

The bay marshalling kiosks shall be provided with danger plate and a diagram
showing the numbering/connection/feruling by pasting the same on the inside of
the door.

1.10.15

In accordance with the requirements stipulated under Section- General

Technical Requirements control cabinets, junction boxes, terminal boxes and
marshalling boxes shall conform to type tests and shall be subjected to routine
tests in accordance with IS: 5039.
a) The following routine tests along with routine test as per IS:5039 shall also be
conducted:
i)
ii)

Check for wiring

Visual and dimension check

b) The enclosure of bay marshalling kiosk, junction box, terminal box shall
conform to IP-55 as per IS: 13947. After degree of protection test on control
cabinet, HV test [2.5 kV (rms) for 1 minute], insulation resistance and
functional test shall also be conducted.
1.10.16

Motor control centre installed in control cabinets shall be as per Clause No. 9.0 of
this section.

1.11

LAMPS AND SOCKETS

1.11.1

Lamps
All incandescent lamps/CFLs/LEDs shall use a socket base as per IS-1258,
except in the case of signal clamps.

1.11.2

Sockets
All sockets (convenience outlets) shall be suitable to accept both 5 Amp & 15
Amp pin round standard Indian plugs. They shall be switched sockets with
shutters.

1.11.3

Hand lamp
A 240 volts, single phase, 50 Hz AC plug point shall be provided in the interior of
each cubicle with ON-OFF switch for connection of hand lamps /CFLs/LEDs.
Cxxiii

Section

Specific Technical Requirements

1.11.4

Switches and fuses

1.11.4.1

Each panel shall be provided with necessary arrangements for receiving,

distributing, isolating and fusing of DC and AC supplies for various control,
signalling, lighting and space heater circuits. The incoming and sub circuits shall
be separately provided with switchfuse units. Selection of the main and sub
circuit fuse ratings shall be such as to ensure selective clearance of sub circuit
faults. Potential circuits for relaying and metering shall be protected by HRC
fuses.

1.11.4.2

All fuses shall be of HRC cartridge type conforming to IS: 9228 mounted on plug
in type fuse bases. Miniature circuit breakers with thermal protection and
alarm contacts will be preferred. All accessible live connection to fuse bases
shall be adequately shrouded. Fuses shall have operation indicators for indicating
blown fuse conditions. Fuse carrier base shall have imprints of the fuse rating and
voltage.

1.12

Bushings, Hollow Column Insulators, Support

Insulators

1.12.1

Bushings shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with IS: 2099 & IEC:
137 while hollow column insulators shall be manufactured and tested in
accordance with IEC: 233/IS: 5621. The support insulators shall be manufactured
and tested as per IS: 2544 / IEC: 168 and IEC: 273. The insulators shall also
conform to IEC: 815 as applicable.

1.12.2

Support insulators, bushings and hollow column insulators shall be manufactured

from high quality porcelain. Porcelain used shall be homogeneous, free from
laminations, cavities and other flaws or imperfections that might affect the
mechanical or dielectric quality and shall be thoroughly vitrified, tough and
impervious to moisture.

1.12.3

Glazing of the porcelain shall be uniform brown in colour, free from blisters, burrs
and similar other defects.

1.12.4

Support insulator/bushings/hollow column insulators shall be designed to have

ample insulation, mechanical strength and rigidity for the conditions under which
they will be used. The torsional strength, tensile strength, requisite creepage
distance for the class of voltage of operation and other parameters of insulators
shall suit the requirements of the specification.

1.12.5

When operating at normal rated voltage, there shall be no electric discharge

between the conductors and bushings, which would cause corrosion or injury to
conductors, insulators or supports by the formation of substances produced by
chemical action. No radio interference shall be caused by the insulators/bushings
when operating at the normal rated voltage.

1.12.6

Bushing porcelain shall be robust and capable of withstanding the internal

pressures likely to occur in service. The design and location of clamps, the shape
and the strength of the porcelain flange securing the bushing to the tank shall be
Cxxiv

Section

Specific Technical Requirements

such that there is no risk of fracture. All portions of the assembled porcelain
enclosures and supports other than gaskets, which may in any way be exposed to
the atmosphere shall be composed of completely non hygroscopic material such as
metal or glazed porcelain.
1.12.7

All iron parts shall be hot dip galvanized complying with relevant IS and all joints
shall be air tight. Surface of joints shall be trued up with porcelain parts by
grinding and metal parts by machining. Insulator/bushing design shall be such as
to ensure a uniform compressive pressure on the joints.

1.12.8

The puncture strength of the bushings shall be greater than the dry flash over
voltage.

1.12.9

Bushings shall be either of oil filled condenser type, hermetically sealed to

prevent ingress of moisture and with suitable facility to indicate oil level or shall
be of polycone or solid core type depending upon application.

1.12.10

All insulators of identical ratings shall be inter-changeable. The insulators shall be

suitable for hot line washing.

1.12.11

The bushings, hollow column insulators and support insulators shall conform to
type tests and shall be subjected to routine tests in accordance with IS: 2099, IS:
2544, IEC: 60233 & IEC: 60137. In addition to this, the following tests are also
to be conducted on the hollow column insulator as per standards mentioned
hereunder. The type test reports shall be submitted for approval.
i)
ii)
iii)

Ultrasonic test as a routine test

IEC: 60383 and IS: 4318
Bending test for bushing of Surge Arrester, CT, IS: 3070 (1993)/relevant
CVT and PT
IEC
Bending test for insulator of isolators
IS: 2544/relevant IEC

1.13

TERMINAL BLOCK

1.13.1

All internal wiring and external connections to equipment or to control cubicle

shall be made through terminal blocks, preferably vertically mounted on the side
of cabinet/junction box.

1.13.2

The terminal blocks shall be 650 V grade and shall be rated to carry continuously
the maximum current that is expected to be carried by the terminals. These shall
be made of moulded, non-inflammable, complete with insulated barriers, stud type
terminals, washers, nuts and lock nuts. Screw clamp, overall insulated, insertion
type, rail mounted terminals can be used in place of stud type terminals. But
preferably the terminals blocks shall be non disconnecting stud type equivalent to
Elmex type CATM4, Phoenix cage clamp type of Wago or equivalent.

1.13.3

The terminal blocks for Current Transformer and Voltage Transformer secondary
leads shall be provided with test links and isolating facilities. The current
transformer secondary leads shall also be provided with short circuiting and
earthing facilities.
Cxxv

Section

Specific Technical Requirements

1.13.4

The material of terminal block moulding shall not deteriorate because of varied
conditions of heat, cold, humidity, dryness etc. that would be anticipated at the
location where the equipment is proposed to be installed.

1.13.5

The terminal shall be such that maximum contact area is achieved when a cable is
terminated. The terminal shall have a locking arrangement to prevent cable from
escaping from the terminal clamp unless it is done intentionally.

1.13.6

The conducting part in contact with cable shall preferably be tinned or silver
plated, however Nickel plated Copper or Zinc plated Steel shall also be
acceptable.

1.13.7

The terminal blocks shall be of extendable design.

1.13.8

The terminal blocks shall have locking arrangement to prevent its escape from the
mounting rails.

1.13.9

The terminal blocks shall be fully enclosed with removable covers of transparent,
non-inflammable, non-deteriorating type plastic material. Insulating barriers shall
be provided between the terminal blocks. These barriers shall not hinder the
operator from carrying out the wiring without removing the barriers.

1.13.10

The terminals shall be provided with the marking tags for wiring identification.

1.13.11

Each terminal boxes/ cubicle/ panel shall be provided with 20% spare terminals
unless otherwise specified and these spare terminals shall be uniformly distributed
on all terminal blocks.

1.13.12

Unless otherwise specified, terminal blocks shall be suitable for connecting the
following conductors on each side:
a)

All circuits
circuits

b)

All CT circuits

except

CT Minimum of 2 Nos. of 2.5 sq. mm

copper flexible.
Minimum of 4 Nos. of 2.5 sq.mm
copper flexible.

1.13.13

There shall be a minimum clearance of 250 mm between the first / bottom row of
terminal block and the cable gland plate or side of the box. Also, the clearance
between two rows of terminal blocks shall be a minimum of 150 mm.

1.13.14

The arrangements shall be in such a manner that it is possible to safely connect or

disconnect terminals on live circuits and replace fuse links when the cabinet is
live. Cabinet wiring would be suitable for 60 (sixty) Deg. C.

1.13.15

Wiring

1.13.16

All wiring shall be carried out with 1100 V grade, PVC insulated stranded copper
wires. The minimum size of the strand used for internal wiring shall be as
follows:
Cxxvi

Section

Specific Technical Requirements

a)
b)

All circuits except CT circuit

CT circuits

: 1.5 sq. mm Copper

: 2.5 sq. mm Copper

1.13.17

All internal wiring shall be securely supported, neatly arranged, readily accessible
and connected to equipment terminals and terminal blocks.

1.13.18

Wire terminations shall be made with solder-less crimping type of tinned copper
lugs, which firmly grip the conductor and insulation. Insulated sleeves shall be
provided at all the wire terminations. Engraved core identification plastic ferrules
marked to correspond with the wiring diagram shall be fitted at both ends of each
wire. Ferrules shall fit tightly on the wires and shall not fall off when the wire is
disconnected from terminal block.

1.13.19

All wires directly connected to trip circuit breaker shall be distinguished by the
addition of red coloured lettered ferrule. Number 6 & 9 shall not be included for
ferrule purposes.

1.13.20

All terminals including spare terminals of auxiliary equipment shall be wired upto
terminal blocks. Each equipment shall have its own central control cabinet in
which all contacts including spare contacts from all poles shall be wired out.
Interpole cabling shall be done for all equipment.

1.13.21

The Contractor shall furnish all wire, conduits and terminals for the necessary
interphase electrical connections (where applicable as well as between phases and
common terminal boxes or control cabinets. For equipment rated for 400 kV and
above, the wiring required in these items shall be run in metallic ducts or shielded
cables in order to avoid surge overvoltages either transferred through the
equipment or due to transients induced from the EHV circuits.

1.13.22

All input and output terminals of each control cubicle shall be tested for surge
withstand capability in accordance with relevant IEC publications, in both
longitudinal and transverse modes. The contractor shall also provide all necessary
filtering, surge protection, interface relays and any other measures necessary to
achieve an impulse withstand level at the cable interfaces of the equipment.

1.14

MOTORS
Motors shall be Squirrel Cage induction motors of sufficient size, capable of
satisfactory operation for the application and duty as required by the driven equipment
and shall be subjected to routine tests as per applicable standards. The motor shall be
of approved make.

1.14.1

Stator
a)

Stator Frame
The stator frames and all external parts of the motors shall be of rigid
fabricated steel or of casting. They shall be suitably annealed to eliminate any
residual stresses introduced during the process of fabrication of machines.
Cxxvii

Section

Specific Technical Requirements

b)

Stator Core
The stator laminations shall be made from suitable grade magnetic sheet steel
varnished on both sides. They shall be pressed and clamped adequately to
reduce the core and teeth vibrations to minimum.

c)

1.14.2

Insulation and winding

i)

All insulated winding conductors shall be of copper. The overall

motor winding insulation shall be of conventional class E type. The
winding shall be suitable for successful operation in hot, humid and
tropical climate with the ambient temperature of 48 oC The insulation
shall be given fungicidal and tropical treatment as per IS:
3202/relevant IEC.

ii)

Any joints in the motor insulation such as at coil connections or

between slot and winding section shall have strength equivalent to that
of slot sections for the coil.

Rotor
a)
b)
c)

d)
e)
f)

1.14.3

Rotor shall be adequately designed to avoid overheating during the starting

and running conditions
Rotors shall be properly balanced so as to keep the vibration under running
condition within the limits.
Rotors of induction motors shall be of rigid core construction with bars firmly
secured and solidly bonded to the end rings. The end ring assembly shall be
such that it is free to move with the expansion of the bars without distortion.
The connection of the bars to the end ring shall be made by brazing or fusion
welding.
Rotors shall be so designed as to keep the combined critical speed with the
driven equipment away from the running speed by at least 20%.
Rotors shall also be designed to withstand 120% of the rated speed for 2
minutes in either direction of rotation.
All high-speed rotors shall be constructed with provision of rebalancing the
rotor on its site position without major disassembly.
Bearings

a)
b)

c)

Depending upon the capacity and loading conditions, manufacturer shall

design suitable grease lubricated or oil lubricated bearings.
Greased ball and roller bearings when used shall be of reputed make subject to
purchasers approval. The minimum standard life of the bearings shall not be
less than 30,000 working hours taking all motor and driven loads into account.
These shall be pressure grease gun lubricated type fitted with grease nipple
and shall have grease relief devices.
Bearings shall be so constructed that the loss of grease and its creeping along
with shaft into motor housing is prevented. It shall also prevent dirt and water
from getting into the motor.
Cxxviii

Section

Specific Technical Requirements

d)

e)

1.14.4

Unless otherwise approved, bearing lubrication system shall be such that no

external forced oil or water is necessary to maintain the required oil supply or
keep bearing temperature within permissible limits.
For oil-lubricated bearings, drain plugs shall be provided for draining any
residual oil when required.

Enclosures
a)

b)
c)
d)

1.14.5

Motors to be installed outdoor shall have hose proof enclosure equivalent to

IP 55 as per IS: 4691/relevant IEC. For motors to be installed indoor, the
enclosure shall be dust proof equivalent to IP 54 as per IS: 4691/relevant
IEC.
Two independent earthing points shall be provided on opposite sides of the
motor for bolted connection of earthing conductor.
Motors shall have drain plugs so located that they will drain water, resulting
from condensation or other causes from all pockets in the motor casting.
Motors weighing more than 25 kg shall be provided with eye bolts, lugs or
other means to facilitate lifting.
Cooling method

Motors shall be of self-ventilated type having TEFC (Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled)
enclosure.
1.14.6

Rating plate
The rating plate shall conform to the requirements of IEC/IS incorporating the year of
manufacture.

1.14.7

Operational features
a)

b)

1.14.8

Continuous motor rating (name plate rating) shall be at least 10 percent above
the maximum load demand of the driven equipment at design duty point and
the motor shall not be overloaded at any operating point of driven equipment
that will arise in service.
Motors shall be capable of giving rated output without reduction in the
expected life span when operated continuously in the system having the
particulars as given under Section : Specific Technical Requirements .
Starting requirements

a)

b)

All induction motors shall be suitable for full voltage, direct-on-line starting.
These shall be capable of starting and accelerating to the rated speed along
with the driven equipment without exceeding the acceptable winding
temperature even when the supply voltage drops down to 80% of the rated
voltage.
Motors shall be capable of withstanding the electrodynamic stresses and
heating imposed if it is started at a voltage of 110% of the rated value.
Cxxix

Section

Specific Technical Requirements

c)
d)

e)

1.14.9

The locked rotor current shall not exceed six (6) times the rated full load
current for all moors, subject to tolerance as given in IS: 325/relevant IEC.
Motors when started with the driven equipment imposing full starting torque
under the supply voltage conditions specified under Clause 1.6 shall be
capable of withstanding at least two successive starts from cold condition at
room temperature and one start from hot condition without injurious heating
of winding. The motors shall also be suitable for three equally spread starts
per hour under the above referred supply condition.
The locked rotor withstand time under hot condition at 110% of rated voltage
shall be more than the starting time with the driven equipment at minimum
permissible voltage by at least two seconds or 15% of the accelerating time
which ever is greater. In case, it is not possible to meet the above requirement,
the Bidder shall offer centrifugal type speed switch mounted on the motor
shaft which shall remain closed for speeds lower than 20% and open for
speeds above 20% of the rated speed. The speed switch shall be capable of
withstanding 120% of the rated speed in either direction of rotation.
Running requirements

a)

b)

c)
d)

The maximum permissible temperature rise over the ambient temperature of

48 deg. C shall be within the limits specified in IS: 325/relevant IEC (for 3
phase induction motors) after adjustment due to increased ambient
temperature specified.
The double amplitude of motor vibration shall be within the limits specified in
IS: 4729/relevant IEC. Vibration shall also be within the limits specified by
the relevant standard for the driven equipment when measured at the motor
bearings.
All the induction motors shall be capable of running at 80% of rated voltage
for a period of 5 minutes.
Motors shall be capable of developing the rated full load torque even when the
supply voltage drops to 70% of rated voltage. Such operation is envisaged for
a period of one second. The pull out torque of the induction motors to meet
this requirement shall not be less than 20% of full load torque.

1.14.10

Tests shall be carried out in accordance with the requirement stipulated under
Section General Technical Requirements. Motors shall conform to the type
tests and shall be subjected to routine tests as per IS: 325/relevant IEC. The type
test reports shall be submitted for purchasers approval.

1.14.11

TESTING & COMMISIONING

An indicating list of tests is given below. Bidder shall perform any additional test
based on specialties of the items as per the Field Quality Program /instructions of
the equipment Supplier or Owner/Purchaser without any extra cost to the Owner/
Purchaser. The Bidder shall arrange all instruments required for conducting these
tests along with calibration certificates and shall furnish the list of instruments to
the Owner/ Purchaser for approval.
a)
Insulation resistance.
b)
Phase sequence and proper direction of rotation.
c)
Any motor operating incorrectly shall be checked to determine the cause
and the conditions corrected.
Cxxx

Section

Specific Technical Requirements

1.14.12

Parameters
a)
b)
c)
d)

1.15

Type of motor
Type of earthing
Rated voltage
No. of Phases & frequency

Squirrel cage induction motor

Solidly earthed
415 V
3 phase, 50 Hz.

MAJOR EQUIPMENT, AUXILIARY

EQUIPMENT, ANCILLARY ITEMS,
OTHER WORKS
The detailed specification, parameters and technical requirements of major
equipment like transformers, circuit breakers etc.; auxiliary equipment like
station transformers etc.; ancillary items like bushings, hollow column / post
insulators, control cabinets, Marshalling / terminal / junction boxes, terminal
blocks, motors, terminal connectors, busbars, insulators, earthing mat, and
works like civil, structural work etc are covered under respective Sections of
specification. The contractor shall comply with all requirements stated
therein in addition to requirements stated in this section.

1.16

DESIGN
IMPROVEMNTS/COORDINATION

1.16.1

The Bidder shall note that the equipment offered by him in the bid only shall be
accepted for supply. However, the Owner / Purchaser or the Contractor may
propose changes in the specification of the equipment or quality thereof and if the
Owner / Purchaser & Contractor agree upon any such changes, the specification
shall be modified accordingly.

1.16.2

If such agreed upon change affects the price and schedule of completion, the
parties shall agree in writing as to the extent of any change in the prices and /or
schedule of completion before the Contractor proceeds with the change.
Following such agreement, the provision thereof, shall be deemed to have been
amended accordingly.

1.16.3

The Contractor shall be responsible for the selection and design of appropriate
equipment to provide the best co-ordinated performance of the entire system. The
basic design requirements are detailed out in this specification. The design of
various components, sub-assemblies and assemblies shall be so done that it
facilitates easy field assembly and maintenance.

1.16.4

The Contractor has to co-ordinate designs and terminations with the agencies (if
any) who are Consultant / Contractor for the Owner / Purchaser. The names of
agencies shall be intimated to the successful bidder.

Cxxxi
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

1.16.5

The Contractor will be called upon to attend design co-ordination meetings with
Engineer, other Contractors and the consultant of the Owner / Purchaser (if any)
during the period of Contract. The Contractor shall attend such meetings at his
own cost at Jammu or at mutually agreed venue as and when required and shall
fully co-operate with such persons and agencies involved during those
discussions.

1.17

QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAMME

1.17.1

To ensure that the equipment and services under the scope of this contract whether
manufactured or performed within the Contractors works or at his SubContractors premises or at the Owner / Purchasers site or at any other place of
work are in accordance with the specifications, the Contractor shall adopt suitable
Quality Assurance Programme to control such activities at all points necessary.
Such programme shall be broadly outlined by the Contractor and finalised after
discussions before the award of contract. The detailed programme shall be
submitted by the contractor after the award of contract and shall be finally
accepted by the owner after discussion. A quality assurance programme of the
Contractor shall generally cover the following:
a)
b)
c)
d)

e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
m)
n)

His organisation structure for the management and implementation of the

proposed Quality Assurance Programme.
Documentation control system.
Qualification data for bidders key personnel.
The procedure for purchases of materials, parts, components and selection of
Sub Contractors services including vendor analysis, source inspection,
incoming raw materials inspection, verification of material purchases etc.
System for shop manufacturing and site erection controls including process
controls and fabrication and assembly control.
Control of non conforming items and system for corrective actions.
Inspecting and test procedure both for manufacture and field activities.
Control of calibration and testing of measuring instruments and field
activities.
System for indication and appraisal of inspection status.
System for quality audits.
System for authorising release of manufactured product to the Owner/
Purchaser.
System for maintenance of records
System for handling, storage and delivery and
A quality plan detailing out the specific quality control measures and
procedures adopted for controlling the quality characteristics relevant to each
item of equipment furnished and/or services rendered.

1.17.2

The Owner / Purchaser or his duly authorised representative reserves the right to
carry out quality audit and quality surveillance of the system and procedure of the
Contractor/ his vendors quality management and control activities.

1.17.3

Quality Assurance Documents

Cxxxii
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

The Contractor shall be required to submit the following Quality Assurance

Documents prior to inspection of Purchaser of the equipment and material for
approval.
a)

b)
c)
d)
e)
f)

g)

All non-destructive examination procedures, stress relief and weld repair

procedure actually used, running fabrication and reports including
radiography interpretation reports.
Welder and welding operator qualification certificates.
Welders identification list, listing welders and welding operators
qualification procedure and welding identification symbols.
Raw material test reports on components as specified by the specification and
/ or agreed to in the quality plan.
Factory test results for testing required as per applicable codes/ mutually
agreed quality plan/standards referred in the technical specification.
The quality plan with verification of various customer inspection point (CIP)
as mutually agreed and methods used to verify that the inspection and testing
points in the quality plan were performed satisfactorily.
Inspection report duly signed by the representative of owner and quality
assurance personnel of contractor for the agreed inspection hold points.
During the course of inspection, the following shall also be recorded:
i. Any importance repair work carried out or to be carried out to make the
job acceptable.
ii. The repair work remains part of the accepted product quality.

1.18

TYPE TESTING, INSPECTION, TESTING

& INSPECTION CERTIFICATE

1.18.1

All equipment and material being supplied shall conform to type tests including
additional type tests as per technical specification and shall be subjected to routine
tests in accordance with requirements stipulated under respective section. Owner /
Purchaser reserves the right to witness any or all type tests. The Contractor shall
intimate Owner / Purchaser the detailed programme about the tests at least three
(3) weeks in advance in case of domestic supplies & six (6) weeks in advance in
case of foreign supplies.

1.18.2

The reports for all type tests and additional type tests as per technical
specification shall be furnished by the Contractor along with equipment/
material drawings. However, the reports for all type tests as per technical
specification and equipment / material drawings for major substation
equipment / material such as Circuit Breakers, Isolators (with/without
Earthing Switches), Instrument Transformers, Surge Arresters, Main Relays,
Bus Post Insulator, Wave Trap, Insulator Strings, Clamps and Connectors,
Spacers shall be submitted by the Contractor along with with the bid. The
type test reports of other equipment/ material shall be submitted at detailed
engineering stage. The type tests conducted earlier should have either been
conducted in accredited laboratory (with accreditation based on ISO/ IEC Guide
25 / 17025 or EN 45001 by the national accreditation body of the country where
laboratory is located) or witnessed by the representative(s) of Owner/ Purchaser /
Utility. The test reports submitted shall be of the tests conducted within last 5
(five) years prior to the date of bid opening. In case the test reports are older
Cxxxiii

Section

Specific Technical Requirements

than 5 (five) years ago, on the date of bid opening, the contractor shall repeat
these tests(s) at no extra cost to the purchaser.
1.18.3

In the event of any discrepancy in the test reports i.e. any test report not
acceptable due to any design/ manufacturing changes (including substitution of
components) or due to non compliance with the requirement stipulated in the
technical specification and / or IEC / IS or any / all additional type tests not
carried out, the same shall be carried out without any additional cost implication
to the Owner / Purchaser.

1.18.4

The charges for type tests, additional type tests & special tests on different
Substation equipment and to be conducted if required by purchaser, shall be
paid by the purchaser at the rates given in Schedule of Prices.

1.18.5

The Owner/ Purchaser reserves the right to get any or all type tests
conducted/repeated. In case of repetition of the type and additional special tests if
required by the Owner / Purchaser, test charges shall be payable as per provision
of the contract.

1.18.6

The Owner/ Purchaser or his duly authorised representatives and / or outside

inspection agency acting on behalf of the Owner / Purchaser shall have at all
reasonable times free access to the Contractors / sub-vendors premises or works
and shall have the power at all reasonable times to inspect and examine the
materials and workmanship of the works during its manufacture or erection. If
part of the works is being manufactured or assembled at other premises or works,
the Contractor shall obtain for the Engineer and for his duly authorised
representative permission to inspect as if the works were manufactured or
assembled on the Contractors own premises or works. Inspection may be made
at any stage of manufacture, despatch or at site at the option of the Owner /
Purchaser and the equipment if found unsatisfactory due to bad workmanship or
quality material is liable to be rejected.

1.18.7

The Contractor shall give the Owner/ Purchaser/ inspector thirty (30) days written
notice of any material being made ready for testing. Such tests shall be to the
Contractors account except for the expenses of the inspector. The Owner /
Purchaser/ Inspector, unless witnessing of the tests is virtually waived, will attend
such tests within thirty (30) days of the date of which the equipment is notified as
being made ready for test/inspection, failing which the Contractor may proceed
with the test which shall be deemed to have been made in the Inspectors presence
and he shall forthwith forward to the Inspector duly certified copies of tests in
triplicate.

1.18.8

In case of failure of any type test, the Contractor is either required to modify the
design of the material and successfully carryout all the type tests at his own
expenses. The decision of the Purchaser in this regard shall be final and binding.

1.18.9

Bidder shall indicate the laboratories in which they propose to conduct the type
tests. They shall ensure that the tests can be completed in these laboratories within
the time schedule guaranteed by him in the appropriate schedule.

Cxxxiv
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

1.18.10

The entire cost of testing for acceptance and routine tests and tests during
manufacture specified herein shall be treated as included in the quoted unit price.
All acceptance tests as stipulated shall be carried out by the supplier in the
presence of Purchaser's representative. The record of routine tests, as and when
desired by the Purchaser shall be furnished by the contractor.

1.18.11

In case of failure in any type test, if repeat tests are required to be conducted, then
all the expenses for deputation of inspector/Purchasers representative shall be
borne by the Contractor. Also if on receipt of Contractors notice of testing, the
Purchasers representative does not find equipment or materials to be ready for
testing, the expenses incurred by the Purchaser for re-deputation of his
representative shall be borne by the Contractor.

1.18.12

Before sample selection for type testing, the supplier shall be required to conduct
all the acceptance tests successfully in presence of Purchaser's representative.

1.18.13

The Owner / Purchaser or Inspector shall, within fifteen (15) days from the date of
inspection as defined herein give notice in writing to the Contractor of any
objection to any drawings and all or any equipment and workmanship which in his
opinion is not in accordance with the contract. The Contractor shall give due
consideration to such objections and shall either make the modifications that may
be necessary to meet the said objections or shall confirm in writing to the Owner /
Purchaser / Inspector giving reasons therein, that no modifications are necessary
to comply with the Contract.

1.18.14

When the factory tests have been completed at the Contractors or subContractors works, the Owner / Purchaser / Inspector shall issue a certificate to
this effect within fifteen (15) days after completion of tests but if the tests are not
witnessed by the Owner / Purchaser / Inspector, the certificate shall be issued
within fifteen (15) days of receipt of Contractors test certificate by the Engineer/
Inspector. Failure of the Owner / Purchaser / Inspector to issue such a certificate
shall not prevent the Contractor from proceeding with the works. The completion
of these tests or the issue of the certificate shall not bind the Owner / Purchaser to
accept the equipment should, it, on further tests after erection, be found not to
comply with the stipulation in the Contract. The equipment / material shall be
dispatched to site only after approval of test reports and issuance of Material
Dispatch Clearance Certificate (MDCC) by the Owner / Purchaser.

1.18.15

In all cases where the Contract provides for tests whether at the premises or at the
works of the Contractor or of any Sub-Contractor, the Contractor except where
otherwise specified shall provide free of charge such items as labour, materials,
electricity, fuel, water, stores, apparatus and instruments as may be reasonably
demanded by the Owner / Purchaser / Inspector or his authorised representative to
carry out effectively such tests of the equipment in accordance with the Contract
and shall give facilities to Owner / Purchaser / Inspector or to his authorised
representative to accomplish testing.

1.18.16

The inspection by Owner / Purchaser and issue of Inspection Certificate thereon

shall in no way limit the liabilities and responsibilities of the Contractor in respect
of the agreed quality assurance programme forming a part of the contract.
Cxxxv

Section

Specific Technical Requirements

1.18.17

It shall also not relieve the contractor of his obligation of furnishing equipment /
materials in accordance with the specifications and shall not prevent subsequent
rejection, if such equipment / materials are later found to be defective.

1.18.18

The Owner / Purchaser shall have the right of having at his own expenses any
other test(s) of reasonable nature carried out at Contractors premises or at site or
in any other place in addition to aforesaid type and routine tests, to satisfy that the
materials comply with specification.

1.18.19

The Owner / Purchaser reserves the right for getting any field tests, not specified
in respective sections of the technical specification, conducted on the completely
assembled equipment at site. The testing equipment for these tests shall be
provided by the Owner / Purchaser or arranged by Contractor at extra cost to the
purchaser / Owner (as agreed upon).

1.18.20

Test Reports
i)

All records of routine test reports shall be maintained by the Supplier at

his works for periodic inspection by the Purchaser.

ii)

All test reports of tests conducted during manufacture shall be maintained

by the Supplier. These shall be produced for verification as and when
requested for by the Purchaser.

iii)

Copies of all test reports shall be supplied for approval before shipment of
equipment. The reports shall indicate clearly the standard values specified
for each test to facilitate checking of the test reports. Five (5) bound
copies of test report shall be submitted after approval of test results along
with the equipment. This report shall include, but not necessarily be
limited to the following
-

List of tests carried out on all equipment and its components

A description of the test equipment with diagram showing arrangement
of the test instruments and devices.
Sample computation, where necessary or desirable, to show the test
values employed in the equation.
Curves showing relation of tests quantities.
Data in tabulated form
Comparisons of the test results with the guaranteed requirements of the
specification and explanation of deviations, if any.
Oscillograms, if any.

1.18.21

Corona, Radio Interference Voltage (RIV) and seismic withstand test procedure
for equipment shall be in line with the procedure given in Annexure I of this
section.

1.18.22

Testing Values
For all type and acceptance tests, the acceptance values shall be those values
guaranteed by the Supplier in the Guaranteed Technical Particulars or the
Cxxxvi

Section

Specific Technical Requirements

acceptance values specified in the relevant standard whichever is more stringent

for that particular test.
1.19

TESTING AND COMMISSIONING AT

SITE

1.19.1

(i)

Necessary tests at site will be required to prove the readiness of the

equipment for energising the substation. The commissioning tests
shall be carried out by the Contractor under the technical supervision
of the manufacturer. Contractor / Manufacturer shall arrange all
consumables, material, equipment, meters, gauges and the like, necessary
for the performance of all tests and recording the results of the tests and
assume full responsibility for the operation and safety of the equipment
during all tests. Manufacturer / Contractor shall prepare reports of all tests
and these reports shall be incorporated in the final test report.

(ii)

The site tests shall comprise of:

a) Field stage tests or pre-commissioning tests, to be carried out during
erection, to demonstrate that the equipment or any component or
sub/assembly has been properly erected and functions correctly.
b) Commissioning tests, precedent to the acceptance of work, in respect
of the equipment or any section of the equipment, to demonstrate
proper operation.

(iii)

1.19.2

General checks
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)

1.19.3

The successful tenderer shall carry out the required checks and tests on
the equipment to be erected by him under this specification. After
carrying out proper checking and testing of the complete installation of
substation, it shall be commissioned by the tenderer for its successful
operation and shall be handed over to the purchaser.

Check for physical damage.

Visual examination of zinc coating/plating.
Check from nameplate that all the items are as per order/specification.
Check tightness of all bolts, clamps and connecting terminal using torque
wrenches.
For oil filled equipment, checks for oil leakage, if any, also check oil level
and top up wherever necessary.
Check for ground connections, quality of weld and application of zinc rich
paint over weld joint of galvanised surfaces.
Check cleanliness of insulators and bushings.
All checks and tests specified by the manufactures in their drawings and
manuals as well as all tests specified in the relevant code of erection.
Check for surface finish of grading rings (corona control ring).
Pressure test on all pneumatic/hydraulic pipelines at 1.5 times the rated
pressure shall be conducted.

Pre-commissioning Tests
Cxxxvii

Section

Specific Technical Requirements

On completion of erection of the equipment and before charging, each item of the
equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned and then inspected jointly by the Owner/
Purchaser and the Contractor for correctness and completeness of installation and
acceptability for charging, leading to initial pre-commissioning tests at Site. The
lists of pre-commissioning tests to be performed are given in respective chapters
and shall be included in the Contractors quality assurance programme.
1.19.4

Commissioning Tests

1.19.4.1

The available instrumentation and control equipment will be used during such
tests and the Owner/ Purchaser will calibrate all such measuring equipment and
devices as far as practicable. However, unmeasurable parameters shall be taken
into account in a reasonable manner by the Owner/ Purchaser for requirement of
these tests. The Owner/ Purchaser will apply proper corrections in calculation, to
take into account conditions which do not correspond to the specified conditions.

1.19.4.2

Any special equipment, tools and tackles required for the successful completion of
the commissioning tests shall be provided by the Contractor, free of cost.

1.19.4.3

The specific tests to be conducted on equipment have been brought out in the
respective chapters of the technical specification.

1.19.4.4

The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining statutory clearances from the
concerned authorities for energisation and commissioning of the equipment and
the substation. However, owner/ purchaser will provide necessary assistance to
the contractor and necessary fee shall be reimbursed by purchaser on production
of requisite documents.

1.20

TRAINING OF PURCHASERS
ENGINEERS
The Purchaser intends to train minimum two (2) Engineers for each equipment
such as transformer, breaker, control & protection, instrument transformer, battery
charger, D.G. set etc. at the Manufacturers works of the equipment supplier for a
period of two (2) weeks in assembly, operation and maintenance of various
equipment. However, the duration of training, number of Engineers, and the
specific equipment shall be finalised after placement of order. The Contractor
shall co-ordinate with equipment supplier for such training. The Purchaser shall
bear the cost of to and fro passage. The boarding, lodging, local transport etc. for
Engineers sent for such training shall be borne by the Contractor. The tenderer
shall indicate in his offer the general conditions and price for such training.

1.21

INSTRUCTION MANUALS

1.21.1

The Contractor shall submit to the Purchaser, Instruction manuals for erection of
all the equipments, covered under the Contract within four (4) months before
commencement of supply of the first equipment. The Instruction manuals shall
Cxxxviii

Section

Specific Technical Requirements

contain full details and drawings of all the equipments furnished, the erection
procedures and testing procedures. These Instruction manuals shall be submitted
in the form of two (2) CDs and two (2) hard copies.
1.21.2

If after the commissioning and initial operation of the plant, the instruction
manuals require any modifications/ additions/ changes, the same shall be
incorporated and the updated final instruction manuals in the form of the two (2)
CDs original and two (2) hard copies shall be submitted by the Contractor to the
Purchaser.
i)

The operating and maintenance instructions together with drawings (other than
shop drawings) of the equipment as completed shall be supplied two months
before the commissioning and shall be in sufficient details containing every
drawing and information required for the installation, testing, setting and
adjustment of all components after installation, commissioning, operation and
maintenance of the equipment and all the components, dismantling and repair
besides the data needed for the servicing of the components and ordering the
spares.

ii)

Detailed dimensioned assembly and cross-section drawings and description of

all the auxiliaries and drawings identifying all spares for re-order.

iii)

They shall give a step by step procedure for all operations likely to be carried
out during the life of the plant/ equipment including erection, testing,
commissioning, operation, maintenance, dismantling and repair. Each manual
shall also include a complete set of approved drawings together with
performance/rating curves of the equipment and test certificates wherever
applicable. The contract shall not be considered to be completed for purposes
of taking over until such instructions and drawings have been supplied to the
Purchaser / Owner.

1.21.3

A separate section of the manual shall be for each size/type of equipment and shall
contain a detailed description of construction and operation, together with all
relevant pamphlets, drawings and a list of parts with procedure for ordering
spares. Maintenance instructions shall include charts showing lubrication
checking, testing and replacement procedures to be carried out daily, weekly,
monthly and at longer intervals to ensure trouble free operation. Wherever
applicable, troubleshooting locations charts shall be included to facilitate finding
the cause of maloperation or breakdown. A collection of the manufacturers
standard leaflets shall neither be accepted, nor taken as compliance of this clause.
The manuals shall be specifically compiled for the concerned project.

ANNEXURE I

Cxxxix
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

CORONA, RADIO INTERFERENCE VOLTAGE (RIV) AND SEISMIC

WITHSTAND TEST

1.0

GENERAL
Unless otherwise stipulated, all equipment together with its associated connectors,
wherever applicable, shall be tested for external corona both by observing the
voltage level for the extinction of visible corona under falling power frequency
voltage and by measurement of Radio Interference Voltage (RIV).

2.0

TEST LEVELS
The test voltage levels for measurement of external RIV and for corona extinction
voltage are listed under the relevant clauses of the specification.

3.0

TEST METHODS FOR RIV

3.1

RIV tests shall be made according to measuring circuit as per International Special
Committee on Radio Interference (CISPR) Publication 16-1 (1993) Part 1. The
measuring circuit shall preferably be tuned to frequency with 10% of 0.5 MHz but
other frequencies in the range of 0.5 MHz to 2 MHz may be used, the measuring
frequency being recorded. The results shall be in microvolt.

3.2

Alternatively RIV test shall be in accordance with NEMA standard Publication

No. 107-1964, except otherwise noted herein.

3.3

In measurements of RIV, temporary additional external corona shielding may be

provided. In measurements of RIV, only standard fittings of identical type
supplied with the equipment and a simulation of the connections as used in the
actual installation will be permitted in the vicinity within 3.5 meters of terminals.

3.4

Ambient noise shall be measured before and after each series of tests to ensure
that there is no variation in ambient noise level. If variation is present, the lowest
ambient noise level will form basis for the measurements. RIV levels shall be
measured at increasing and decreasing voltages of 85%, 100% 115% and 130% of
the specified RIV test voltage for all equipment unless otherwise specified. The
specified RIV test voltage is listed in the detailed specification together with
maximum permissible RIV level in microvolts.

3.5

The metering instruments shall be as per CISPR recommendation or equivalent

device so long as it has been used by other testing authorities.

3.6

The RIV measurement may be made with a noise meter. A calibration procedure
of the frequency to which noise meter shall be tuned shall establish the ratio of
voltage at the high voltage terminal to voltage read by noise meter.

4.0

TEST METHODS FOR VISIBLE CORONA

Cxl

Section

Specific Technical Requirements

4.1

The purpose of this test is to determine the corona extinction voltage of apparatus,
connectors, etc. The test shall be carried out in the same manner as RIV test
described above with the exception that RIV measurement are not required during
test and a search technique shall be used near the onset and extinction voltage,
when the test voltage is raised and lowered to determine their precise values. The
test voltage shall be raised and lowered to determine their precise values. The test
voltage shall be raised to 130% of RIV test voltage and maintained there for five
minutes. In case corona inception does not take place at 130%, test shall be
stopped, otherwise the test shall be continued and the voltage will then be
decreased slowly until all visible coronas disappear. The procedure shall be
repeated at least 4 times with corona inception and extinction voltage recorded
each time. The corona extinction voltage for purpose of determining compliance
with the specification shall be the lowest of the four values at which visible corona
(negative or positive polarity) disappears. Photographs with laboratory in
complete darkness shall be taken under test conditions, at all voltage steps. i.e
85% 100%, 115% and 130%. Additional photographs shall be taken at corona
inception and extinction voltages. At least two views shall be photographed in
each case using Panchromatic film with ASA daylight rating of 400 with an
exposure of two minutes at a lens aperture of f/5.6 or equivalent. The
photographic process shall be such that prints are available for inspection and
comparison with conditions as determined from direct observation. Photographs
shall be taken from above and below the level of connector so as to show corona
on bushing, insulators and all parts of energized connectors. The photographs
shall be framed such that test object essentially fills the frame with no cut off.
For recording purpose, modern devices utilizing UV recording methods such as
image intensifier may also be used.

4.2

The test shall be recorded on each photograph. Additional photograph shall be

taken from each camera position with lights on to show the relative position of test
object to facilitate precise corona location from the photographic evidence.

4.3

In addition to the photographs of the test object preferably four photographs shall
be taken of the complete test assembly showing relative positions of all the test
equipment and test objects. These four photographs shall be taken from four
points equally spaced around the test arrangement to show its features from all
sides. Drawings of the laboratory and test set up locations shall be provided to
indicate camera positions and angles. The precise location of camera shall be
approved by Owners/Purchasers inspector, after determining the best camera
locations by trial energisation of test object at a voltage which results in corona.

4.4

The test to determine the visible corona extinction voltage need not be carried out
simultaneously with test to determine RIV levels,

4.5

However, both tests shall be carried out with the same test set up and with as little
time duration between tests as possible. No modification on treatment of the
sample between tests will be allowed. Simultaneous RIV and visible corona
extinction voltage testing may be permitted at the discretion of
Owners/Purchasers inspector if, in his opinion, it will not prejudice other test.

Cxli
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

5.0

TEST RECORDS
In addition to the information previously mentioned and the requirements
specified as per CISPR or NEMA 107 1964 the following data shall be included
in test report:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)

6.0

Background noise before and after test.

Detailed procedure of application of test voltage.
Measurement of RIV levels expressed in microvolts at each levels.
Results and observations with regard to location and type of interference
sources detected at each step.
Test voltage shall be recorded when measured RIV passes through 100
microvolts in each direction.
Onset and extinction of visual corona for each of the four tests required
shall be recorded.

SEISMIC WITHSTAND TEST

PROCEDURE

6.1

The seismic withstand test on the complete equipment shall be carried out along
with supporting structure.

6.2

The bidder shall either arrange to transport the structure from supplier's premises /
sites or alternatively supply structures as per approved / recommended structure
drawing for the purpose of seismic withstand test only.

6.3

The seismic level specified shall be applied at the base of the structure. The
accelerometers shall be provided at the terminal pad of the equipment and any
other point as agreed by the Owner/ Purchaser. The seismic test shall be carried
out in all possible combinations of the equipment. The seismic test procedure
shall be furnished for approval of the Owner/ Purchaser.

ANNEXURE II
Cxlii
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL STANDARDS AND CODES
India Electricity Rules
Indian Electricity Act
Indian Electricity (Supply) Act
Indian Factories Act
IS-5

Colours for Ready Mixed

Paints and Enamels

IS-335

New Insulating Oils

IS-617

Aluminium and Aluminium

Alloy
Ingots and Castings for
General Engineering Purposes

IS-1448 (Part 1 to Part 145)

Methods of Test for Petroleum

and its products.

IS:2070

Method of Impulse voltage

testing

IS-2071 (Part 1 to Part 3)

Methods of High Voltage

testing

IS-12063

Classification of degrees of
protection
provided
by
enclosures
of electrical equipment

IS-2165
(Part 1: 1997)
(Part 2: 1983)

Insulation Coordination.

IS-3043

Code of Practice for Earthing

IS-6103

Method of Test for Specific

Resistance (Resistivity) of
Electrical Insulating Liquids

IS-6104

Method of test for Interfacial

Tension of oil against Water
by the Ring method

IS-6262

Method of test for Power

factor & Dielectric Constant
of
Electrical
Insulating
Liquids.

Cxliii
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

IS-6792

Method for determination of

electric strength of insulating
oils.

IS-5578

Guide
for
marking
insulated conductors.

IS-11353

Guide for uniform system of

marking & identification of
conductors
&
apparatus
terminals.

IS-8263

Methods
for
Radio
Interference Test on High
Voltage Insulators.

IS-8269
IEC-60506

Methods
for
switching
impulse tests on high voltage
insulators

IS-142

Stability tests

IS-924 (Part 1, 2 & 4)

Low Voltage Fuses

IEC-60060 (Part 1, Part 4)

High Voltage Test Techniques

IEC-60068

Environmental Test

IEC-60071

Insulation coordination

IEC-60117

Graphical Symbols

IEC-60156

Method for the Determination

of the Electrical Strength of
Insulation Oils.

IEC-60270

Partial
Measurements.

IEC-60376

Specification and Acceptance

of New Sulphur Hexaflouride.

IEC-60437

Radio Interference Test on

High Voltage Insulators.

IEC-60507

Artificial Pollution Tests on

High Voltage Insulators to be
used on AC Systems.

IEC-6094

Common Specification for

High Voltage Switchgear &

Cxliv
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

of

Discharge

Control Gear Standards.

IEC-60815

Guide for the Selection of

Insulators in respect of
Polluted conditions.

IEC-60865 (Part 1 & Part 2)

Short Circuit Current

Calculation of effects.

ANSI-C.1/NFPA.70

National Electrical Code

ANSI-C37.90A

Guide for Surge Withstand

Compatibility (SWC) Tests

ANSI-C63.21, C63.3, C36.4

Specification
for
Electromagnetic Noise and
Field Strength Instrumentation
10 KHz to 1 GHz

ANSI-C68.1

Techniques
Tests

ANSI-C76.1/IEEE21

Standard
General
Requirements
and Test Procedure for
outdoor Apparatus Bushings.

ANSI-SI-4

Specification for Sound Level

Meters

ANSI-Y32-2/C337.2

Drawing Symbols

ANSI-Z55.11

Gray Finishes for Industrial

Apparatus and Equipment No.
61 Light Gray

NEMA-107T

Methods of Measurements of
RIV
of
High
Voltage
Apparatus

NEMA-ICS II

General
Standards
Industrial
Control
Systems Part ICSI-109

CISPR-1

Specification for CIPR Radio

Interference
Measuring
Apparatus for the Frequency
Range 0.15 MHZ to 30 MHz.

CSA-Z299.1-1978h

Quality Assurance Program

Requirements

Cxlv
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

for

Dielectric

for
and

CSA-Z299.2-1979h

Quality Control
Requirements

Program

CSA-Z299.3-1979h

Quality Verification Program

Requirements

CSA-Z299.4-1979h

Inspection
Requirements

IS-10028 (Part 2 & 3)

Code of practice for selection,

installation & maintenance of
transformer

IS-2026 (Part 1 to Part 4)

Power Transformers

IS-3347 (Part 1 to Part 8)

Dimensions for Porcelain

transformer Bushings for use
in
lightly
polluted
atmospheres

IS-3639

Fittings and Accessories for

Power Transformers

IS-6600

Guide for loading of Oil

Immersed Transformers

IS-3737

Gas operated relays

IS-1886

Code
of
practice
for
installation and maintenance
of transformers

IS-6272

Industrial cooling fans

IS-335
IEC-60296
BS-148

Insulating
Oils
Transformers &
switchgear

IS-6792-1972

IEC-60076 (Part 1 to Part 5)

Method for determination of

Electric strength of insulating
oil
Power Transformers

IEC-60214

On-load Tap-Changers.

IEC-60289

Reactors

Program

TRANSFORMERS AND REACTORS

Cxlvi
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

for

IEC-551

measurement of transformers
and reactors noise level

IEC-60354

IEC-60076-10

ANSI-C571280

General requirements for

Distribution,
Power
and
Regulating Transformers

ANSI-C571290

Test Code for Distribution,

Power
and
Regulation
Transformers

ANSI-C5716

Terminology & test Code for

current Limiting Reactors

ANSI-C5721

Requirements, Terminology
and Test Code for Shunt
Reactors Rated over 500
KVA

ANSI-C5792

Guide for Loading Oil

Immersed
Power
Transformers
upto
and
including 100 MVA with 55
deg C or 65 C Winding Rise

ANSI-CG, IEEE-4

Standard Techniques for High

Voltage Testing

NEMA-TR-1

Loading Guide for oil immersed power transformers

Determination of transformer
and Reactor Sound Levels

NEMA standard publication

for Power Transformers

CBIP manual on Transformer

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
IEC-62271-100
IS: 2516

High Voltage Alternating

Current Circuit breakers

IEC-60427

Synthetic Testing of High

Voltage Alternating current
circuit Breakers

IEC-61264

Pressurized Hollow Column

Insulators

IEC: 60376

Sulphur Hexaflouride (SF6)

Cxlvii
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

CEAs report of the committee for the standardisation of parameters and specification
of major items of 400 kV substation equipment.
CEAs report for the Standard Parameters of 800 kV Transmission System in IndiaRev II, October 2004.
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS, VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER AND
COUPLING CAPCITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
IS-2705 (Part 1 to Part 4)

Current transformers

IS-3156 (Part 1 to Part 4)

Voltage transformers

IS-9348

Coupling
capacitors
capacitor dividers

and

IS-4379

Identification of the contents of

Industrial Gas Cylinders

IEC-60044-1

Current transformers

IEC-60044-2

Voltage transformers

IEC-60186

Capacitor voltage transformers

IEC-60358

Coupling
capacitors
capacitor dividers

IEC-60044-4

Instrument Transforms:
Measurement
Of
Partial
Discharges

IEC-60481

Coupling Devices for power

line Carrier Systems.

ANSI-C5713

Requirements for Instrument

transformers

ANSI-C92.2

Power Line Coupling voltage

Transformers

ANSI-C93.1

Requirements for Power Line

Carrier Coupling Capacitors

Bushings
for
Alternating
Voltages above 1000 V

and

BUSHING

IS-2099

Cxlviii
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

IEC-60137

Insulated
Alternating
1000V

Bushings
for
Voltages above

IS-12676

Transformer bushings

IS-2029

HV
porcelain
Insulators

IS-3070 (Part 2)

Lightning
arresters
for
alternating current systems:
Metal oxide lightning arrestors
without gaps.

IS: 5621

IEC-60099-4

Large Hollow Porcelain for

use in electrical installation
Metal oxide surge arrests
without gaps

IEC-60099-5

Selection
and
recommendation

ANSI-C62.1

IEE Standards for S A for AC

Power Circuits

NEMA-LA 1

Surge Arresters

bushing

SURGE ARRESTERS

application

CUBICLES AND PANELS & OTHER RELATED EQUIPMENTS

IS-1248, IS-3231, (Part -3)
IEC-255 (Part1 to 3)
BS-142

Electrical relays
system protection

IS:2147

Degrees of protection provided

by
enclosures
for
LV
switchgear and control gear

IS-4483 (Part I & II)

Preferred panel controls and

dimensions

IS-5039

Distributed pillars for voltages

not exceeding 1000 volts

IEC-60068.2.2

Basic environmental testing

procedures Part 2: Test B: Dry
Heat

IEC-60529

Degree of Protection provided

by enclosures

Cxlix
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

for

power

IEC-60947-4-1

Low voltage switchgear and

control gear

IEC-61095

Electromechanical contactors
for household and similar
purposes

IEC-60439 (Part 1 & Part 2)

Low voltage switchgear and

control gear assemblies

ANSI-C37.20

Switchgear
assemblies,
including metal enclosed bus.

ANSI-C37.50

Test procedures for low voltage

alternating
current
power
circuit breakers

ANSI-C39

Electric measuring instrument

ANSI-83

Components
equipment

IS-8623: (Part 1 to 3)

Specification for switchgear &

control assemblies

NEMA-AB

Moulded
systems

NEMA-CS

Industrial controls and Systems

NEMA-PB-1

Panel Boards

NEMA-SG-5

Low Voltage Power Circuit

Breakers

NEMA-SG-3

Power Switchgear Assemblies

NEMA-SG-6

Power Switching Equipment

NEMA-5E -3

Motor control centres

IS: 1248 (Part 1 to Part 9)

Direct
acting
indicating
analogue electrical measuring
instruments & their accessories

Alternating
current
disconnectors (Isolators) and
Earthing switches

case

for

electric

circuit

and

DISCONNECTING SWITCHES
IEC-60129
IS-1818
IS-9921 (Part I to V)
Cl
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

IEC-1129

Alternating current
switches
induced
switching

earthing
current

IEC-60265 (Part 1 & Part 2)

High voltage switches

ANSI-C37.32

Schedule of preferred ratings,

manufacturing
specifications
and application guide for high
voltage air switches, bus
supports and switch accessories

ANSI-C37.34

Test code for high voltage air

switches

NEMA-SG6

Power switching equipment

IS-8792

Line traps
system.

IS-8793

Methods of tests for line traps.

IS-8997

Coupling
systems,

IS-8998

Methods of test for coupling

devices for PLC systems.

IEC-60353

Line traps
systems.

IEC -60481

Coupling devices for power

line carrier systems.

IEC -60495

Single sideboard power line

carrier terminals

IEC-60683

Planning of (Single Side-Band)

Power line carrier systems.

CIGRE

Teleprotection
report
Committee 34 & 35

CIGRE

Guide on power line carrier

1979.

CCIR

International radio consultative

committee

PLCC AND LINE TRAPS

Cli
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

for

devices

for

AC

for

AC

power

PLC

power

by

CCITT

International
telephone
committee

telegraph
&
consultative

EIA

Electric industries associations

PROTECTION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT

B)

IS-2419

Indicating instruments

C)

IS-6236

Recorders

D)

IS-722 (Part I to IX)

Energy meters

E)

IS-8686

Specification
for
static
protective relays and tests

Application guide for protective

relays

Electro-technical vocabulary,
electrical relays & electrical
power system protection

IEC-60051 (Part 1 to Part 9)

Recommendations for Direct

Acting indicating analogue
electrical measuring instrument
and their accessories.

IEC-60255 (Part 1 to Part 3)

Electrical relays

IEC-60297 (Part 1 to Part 4)

Dimensions of mechanical
structures of the 482.6 mm (19
inches) series.

IEC-60359

Expression of the performance

of electrical & electronic
measuring equipment.

IEC-60387

Symbols for alternating-current

electricity meters.

IEC-60447

Man machine interface (MMI)Actuating Principles.

BS-89

BS-90

BS-37

IEC-60255 (Part V & VI)

IS-3842 (Part I to VIII)
F)
G)

IS-1885

Glii
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

IEC-60521
IS-13010

Class 0.5, 1 and 2 alternating

current watt hour metres

IEC-60547

Modular plug-in Unit and

standard 19 inch rack mounting
unit based on NIM Standard
(for
electronic
nuclear
instruments).

ANSI-81

Screw threads

ANSI-B18

Bolts and nuts

ANSI-C37.1

Relays, station controls etc.

ANSI-C37.2

Manual and automatic station

control,
supervisory
and
associated
telemetering
equipment

ANSI-C37.2

Relays and relay systems

associated with electric power
apparatus

ANSI-C39.1

Requirements for electrical

analog indicating instruments

IS-325

Three phase induction motors.

IS-4691

Degree of protection provided

by enclosure for rotating
electrical machinery.

IEC-60034 (Part 1 to Part 19)

Rotating electrical machines

IEC-Document 2

Three phase induction motors

(Central Office) NEMA-MGI

Motors and Generators

MOTORS

ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT AND COMPONENTS

MIL-21B, MIL-833 & MIL-2750
IEC-60068 (Part 1 to Part 5)

Environmental testing

IEC-60326 (Part 1 to Part 2)

Printed Boards

MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP STANDARDS

Gliii
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

IS-1363 (Part 1 to Part 3)

Hexagon head bolts, screws and

nuts of product grade C.

IS-1364 (Part 1 to Part 5)

Hexagon head bolts, screws and

nuts of products grades A and
B.

IS-3138

Hexagonal Bolts
(M42 to M150)

ISO-898

Fasteners: Bolts, screws and

studs

ASTM

Specification
materials

IS-5561

Electric Power Connectors

IS:617-1994

Aluminium

and aluminium
alloy ingots and
castings
for general engineering purpose

IS:8309

Compression

and

and

tests

Nuts

for

CLAMPS & CONNECTORS

aluminium

type
tubular
terminal ends for
conductors
of
insulated cables

IS:8394

Soldering and welded type

terminal ends for
conductors of insulated cables

NEMA-CC1

Electric power connectors for

sub stations

NEMA-CC3

Connectors for use Between

aluminium or aluminium Copper Overhead Conductors

Specification for Conductor and

Earthwire Accessories
for Overhead Power Line
Part I-1981: Armour Rods,
Binding Wires and Tapes for
conductors
Part II-1981: Mid Span Joint &

BUS HARDWARE AND INSULATORS

IS-2121

Gliv
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

repair sleeves for conductor

Part III-1992: Accessories for
earthwire
Part IV-1991: Conductor and
earthwire
accessories
for
overhead power lines (Non
Tension Joints)
IS-731

Porcelain
insulators
for
overhead power lines with a
nominal voltage greater than
1000 V

IS:2108-1977

Black heart
castings

IS-2486 (Part 1 to Part 4)

Insulator fittings for overhead

power lines with a nominal
voltage greater than 1000 V

IS:2544-1973

Porcelain post insulators for

systems with nominal voltage
greater than 1000 V

IS:3138-1966

Hexagonal Bolts and Nuts

IS:3188-1980

Dimensions for Disc Insulators

IS:4218-1976

Metric Screw Threads

IS:10162-1982

Specification for spacers and

Spacer dampers for twin
horizontal Bundle conductors

IEC-60120

Dimensions of Ball and Socket

Couplings of string Insulator
unit

IEC-60137

Insulated
bushings
for
alternating voltages above 1000
V.

IEC-60168

Tests on indoor and outdoor

post insulator of ceramic
material or glass for Systems
with Nominal Voltages greater
than 1000 V.

IEC-60233

Tests on Hollow Insulators for

use in Electrical equipment.

Glv
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

malleable

iron

IEC-60273

Characteristics of indoor and

outdoor post insulators for
systems with nominal voltages
greater than 1000 V.

IEC-60305

Insulators for overhead lines

with nominal voltage above
1000 V - ceramic or glass
insulator units for a.c. systems
characteristic
of
String
Insulator Units of the cap and
pin type.

IEC-60372 (1984)

Locking devices for ball and

socket couplings of string
insulator units : Dimensions
and tests.

IEC-60383 (Part 1 & Part 2)

BS:137-1982 (I & II)

Insulators for overhead lines

with nominal voltage above
1000 V

IEC-60433

Characteristics
of
String
Insulator Units of the long rod
type.

IEC-60471

Dimensions of clevis and

tongue couplings of string
insulator units.

IEC:60575-1977

Thermal
Mechanical
performance test & Mechanical
Performance test on string
insulator units

ANSI-C29

Wet
process
insulators

ANSI-C29.1

Test methods for electrical

power insulators

ANSI-C92.2

For insulators, wet-process

porcelain and toughened glass
suspension type

ANSI-C29.8

Wet-process
porcelain
insulators apparatus, post type

ANSI-G.8

Iron and steel hardware

CISPR-7B

Recommendations

Glvi
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

porcelain

of

the

CISPR, tolerances of form and

of position, Part 1
ASTM-A153

Zinc coating (hot dip) on iron

and steel hardware.

IS-2678

Dimensions & tolerances for

Wrought
Aluminium
and
Aluminium Alloys drawn round
tube

IS:2673-1979

Dimensions
of
wrought
aluminium and aluminium
alloys, extruded round tubes

IS-5082

Wrought
Aluminium
and
Aluminium Alloy Bars Rods
Tubes and Sections for
Electrical purposes

ASTM-B 230-82

Aluminium 1350 H19 Wire for

electrical purposes

ASTM-B 231-81

Concentric - lay - stranded,

aluminium 1350 conductors

ASTM-B 221

Aluminium - Alloy extruded

bar, road, wire, shape

ASTM-B 236-83

Aluminium bars for electrical

purpose (Bus bars)

ASTM-B 317-83

Aluminium - Alloy extruded

bar, rod, pipe and structural
shapes for electrical purposes
(Bus Conductors)

IS: 1651

Stationary Cells and Batteries,

Lead - Acid Type (with Tubular
Positive Plates)

IS: 1652

Stationary Cells and Batteries,

STRAIN AND RIGID BUS - CONDUCTOR

BATTERIES AND BATTERIES

CHARGER
BATTERY

Glvii
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

Lead - Acid Type (with Plante

Positive Plates)
IS: 1146

Rubber and Plastic Containers

for Lead Acid storage batteries

IS: 6071

Synthetic Separators for Lead

Acid batteries

IS: 652

IS: 266

Wooden separators for lead

acid batteries
Specification for Sulphuric
Acid

IS: 1069

Specification for
storage batteries

IS: 3116

Specification
for
Sealing
Compound for lead acid
batteries

IS: 1248

Indicating instruments

IS: 8320

General
requirements
and
methods of tests for lead acid
storage batteries

IS: 6290 (Part IV)

Valve regulated batteries

IS: 3895

Mono-crystalline
Semiconductor Rectifier Cells
and Stacks

IS: 4540

Mono-crystalline
Semiconductor
Assemblies and
Equipment.

water

for

BATTERY CHARGER

Rectifier

IS: 6619

Safety Code for Semiconductor

Rectifier equipment

IS: 2026

Power Transformers

IS: 2959

AC Contactors for voltage not

exceeding 1000 V AC or 1200
V DC

IS: 1248

Indicating Instruments

Glviii
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

IS: 2208

HRC Fuses

IS: 4064

Air break switches

IS: 13947 (Part-3)

Air break switches, air break

disconnectors
&
fuse
combination units for voltage
not exceeding 1000 V AC or
1200V DC.

IS: 2147

Degree of protection provided

by enclosures for low voltage
switchgear and control gear.

IS: 6005

Code
of
practice
for
phosphating of Iron and Steel

IS: 3231

Electrical Relays for power

system protection

IS: 3842

IS: 5

Electrical Relay for AC

Systems
Colours for ready mix paint

IEEE: 484

Recommended
design
for
installation of large lead storage
batteries for generating stations
and substations

IEEE: 485

Sizing large lead storage

batteries for generating stations
and substations

ASTMD-2863

Measuring
the
minimum
oxygen
concentration
to
support candle like combustion
of plastics (oxygen index)

IS: 694

PVC insulated cables for

working voltages upto and
including 1100 Volts.

IS: 1255

Code of practice for installation

and maintenance of power
cables, upto and including 33
kV rating

IS: 1554 (Part 1 and Part 2)

PVC insulated (Heavy duty)

WIRES AND CABLES

Glix
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

electric cables
Part (1): for working voltage
upto and including 1100 V

Part (2): for working voltage

from 3.3 kV upto and including
11 kV

IS: 1753

Aluminium
conductor
insulated cables

IS: 2982

Copper Conductor in insulated

cables

IS: 3961 (Part 1 to Part 5)

Recommended current ratings

for cables

IS: 3975

Mild steel wires, formed wires

and tapes for armouring of
cables

IS: 5831

IS: 6380

PVC insulating and sheath of

electric cables
Elastometric insulating and
sheath of electric cables

IS: 7098 (Part-1)

Cross linked polyethylene

insulated PVC sheathed cables
for working voltage upto and
including 1100 volts

IS: 7098 (Part-2)

Cross linked polyethylene

insulated sheathed cables for
working voltage from 3.3 kV
upto and including 33kV

IS: 8130

Conductors
for
insulated
electrical cables and flexible
cords

IS: 1753

Aluminium Conductors
insulated cables

IS: 10418

Specification for drums for

electric cables

IEC: 60096 (Part 0 to Part 4)

Radio Frequency cables

IEC: 60183

Guide to the Selection of High

Voltage Cables

Glx
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

for

for

IEC: 60189(Part1 to Part 7)

Low frequency cables and

wires with PVC insulation and
PVC sheath

IEC: 60277 (Part 1 to Part 7)

Polyvinyl Chloride insulated

cables of rated voltages up to
and including 450/750V

IEC: 60228

Conductors of insulated cables

IEC: 60230

Impulse tests on cables and

their accessories

IEC: 60287(Part 1 to Part 3)

Calculation of the continuous

current rating of cables (100%
load factor)

IEC: 60304

IEC: 60331

Standard colours for insulation

for low-frequency cables and
wires
Fire resisting characteristics of
Electric cables

IEC: 60332 (Part 1 to Part 3)

Tests on electric cables under

fire conditions

IEC: 60502

Extruded
solid
dielectric
insulated power cables for rated
voltages from 1 kV upto 30 kV

IEC: 60540

Test methods for insulations

and sheaths of electric cables
and cords

IEC: 754 (Part 1 and Part 2)

Tests on gases evolved during

combustion of electric cables

IS: 659

Safety code for air conditioning

IS: 660

Safety code for Mechanical

Refrigeration

ARI: 520

Standard
for
Positive
Displacement
Refrigeration
Compressor and Condensing
Units

IS: 4503

Shell

AIR CONDITIONING AND VENTILATION

Glxi
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

and

tube

type

heat

exchanger
ASHRAE 24

Method of testing for rating of

liquid coolers

ANSI-B-31.5

Refrigeration Piping

IS: 2062

Steel for
purposes

IS: 655

Specification for Metal Air

Dust

IS: 277

Specification for Galvanized

Steel Sheets

IS: 737

Specification for Wrought

Aluminium and Aluminium
Sheet & Strip

IS: 1079

Hot rolled cast steel sheet &

strip

IS: 3588

Specification for
Axial Flow Fans

IS: 2312

Propeller Type AC Ventilation

Fans

BS: 848

Methods of Performance Test

for Fans

IS: 6540 (Part-I)

Air Filters
Conditioning
Ventilation

BS: 3928

Sodium Flame Test for Air

Filters (Other than for Air
Supply to I.C. Engines and
Compressors)

US-PED-2098

Method of cold DOP & hot

DOP test

MIL-STD-282

DOP
Smoke
method

ASHRAE 52

Air cleaning device used in

general
ventilation
for
removing particle matter

Glxii
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

general

used
and

structural

Electrical

in Air
General

penetration

IS: 3069

Glossary of Terms, Symbols

and Units Relating to Thermal
Insulation Materials

IS: 4671

Expanded
Polystyrene
for
Thermal Insulation Purposes

IS: 8183

Bonded Mineral Wool

IS: 3346

Evaluation
of
Thermal
Conductivity properties by
means of guarded hot plate
method

ASTM-C-591-69

Standard specification for rigid

performed cellular urethane
thermal insulation

IS: 4894

Centrifugal Fans

BS: 848

Method of Performance Test

for Centrifugal Fans

IS: 325

Three-phase Induction Motors

IS: 4722

Rotating electrical machines

IS: 1231

IS: 2233

Three phase foot mounted

Induction motors, dimensions
of
Designations of types of
construction and mounting
arrangements
of
rotating
electrical machines

IS: 2254

Vertical shaft motors

pumps, dimensions of

IS: 7816

Guide for testing insulation

resistance of rotating machines

IS: 4029

Guide for testing three phase

induction motors

IS: 4729

Rotating electrical machines,

vibration of, measurement of
evaluation of

IS: 4691

Degree of protection provided

by enclosures for rotating
electrical machinery

Glxiii
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

for

IS: 7572

Guide for testing single-phase

a.c. motors

IS: 2148

Flame proof enclosure

electrical apparatus

BS: 4999 (Part-51)

Noise levels

IS: 209

Zinc Ingot

IS: 2629

Recommended practice for

Hot-Dip galvanizing on iron
and steel

IS: 2633

Methods for testing uniformity

of coating of zinc coated
articles

ASTM-A-123

Specification for zinc (Hot

Galvanizing)
coatings,
on
products fabricated from rolled
pressed and forged steel shapes,
plates, bars and strips

ASTM-A-121-77

Zinc-coated (Galvanized) steel

barbed wire

IS: 6005

Code
of
practice
for
phosphating of iron and steel

IS:5-1994

Colours for ready mixed paints

and enamels

IS:104

Ready mixed paint, brushing,

zinc chrome, priming

IS:2932

ANSI-Z551

Enamel synthetic, exterior (a)

undercoating (b) finishing
Gray finishes for industrial
apparatus and equipment

SSPEC

for

GALVANIZING

PAINTING

Glxiv
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

Steel structure painting council

FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM

Fire protection manual issued by tariff advisory committee (TAC) of India

HORIZONTAL CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
-

IS: 1520

Horizontal centrifugal pumps

for clear, cold and fresh water

IS: 9137

Code for acceptance test for

centrifugal & axial pumps

IS: 5120

Technical
requirement

Rotodynamics special purpose

pumps

API-610

Centrifugal pumps for general

services
Hydraulic Institutes Standards

BS: 599

Methods of testing pumps

PTC-8.2

Power Test Codes Centrifugal

pumps

IS: 10000

Methods of tests for internal

combustion engines

IS: 10002

Specification for performance

requirements for constant speed
compression ignition engines
for general purposes (above 20
kW)

BS: 5514

The
performance
of
reciprocating
compression
ignition engines, utilising liquid
fuel only, for general purposes

IS: 3046

Reciprocating
combustion
performance

IS: 554

Dimensions for pipe threads

where pressure tight joints are

DIESEL ENGINES

Glxv
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

internal
engines

required on threads
ASME Power Test Codes

Internal
PTC-17

combustion

engine

IS: 636

Non percolating flexible fire

fighting delivery hose

IS: 638

Sheet rubber jointing

rubber inserting jointing

IS: 778

Gun metal gate, globe and

check valves for general
purpose

IS: 780

Sluice valves for general water

works purposes (50 to 300 mm)

IS: 901

Couplings, double male and

double female instantaneous
pattern for fire fighting

IS: 902

Suction hose coupling for fire

fighting purposes

IS: 903

Fire hose delivery couplings

branch pipe nozzles and nozzle
spanner

IS: 1538

Cast iron fittings for pressure

pipes for water, gas and sewage

IS: 1903

Ball valve (horizontal plunger

type) including floats for water
supply purposes

IS: 2062

SP for weldable structure steel

IS: 2379

Colour code for identification

of pipelines

IS: 2643

Dimensions of pipe threads for

fastening purposes

Codes of Diesel Engine Manufacturers

Association, USA
PIPING VALVES & SPECIALITIES

Glxvi
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

and

IS: 2685

Code of practice for selection,

installation and maintenance of
sluice valves

IS: 2906

Sluice valves for water-works

purposes (350 to 1200 mm size)

IS: 3582

Basket strainers for fire fighting

purposes (cylindrical type)

IS: 3589

Electrically welded steel pipes

for water, gas and sewage (150
to 2000 mm nominal diameter)

IS: 4038

Foot valves for water works

purposes

IS: 4927

Unlined flax canvas hose for

fire fighting

IS: 5290

Landing
hydrant)

IS: 5312 (Part-I)

Swing check type reflex (nonreturn) valves

IS: 5306

Code of practice for fire

extinguishing installations and
equipment on premises

Part-I

Hydrant systems, hose reels and

foam inlets

Part-II

Sprinkler systems

BS: 5150

Specification for cast iron gate

valves

IS: 325

Three phase induction motors

IS: 900

Code of practice for installation

and maintenance of induction
motors

IS: 996

Single phase small AC and

universal electric motors

IS: 1231

Dimensions of three phase foot

mounted induction motors

valves

(internal

MOTORS & ANNUNCIATION PANELS

Glxvii
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

IS: 2148

Flame proof enclosure

electrical apparatus

IS: 2223

Dimensions of flange mounted

AC induction motors

IS: 2253

Designations for types of

construction and mounting
arrangements
of
rotating
electrical machines

IS: 2254

Dimensions of vertical shaft

motors for pumps

IS: 3202

Code of practice for climate

proofing
of
electrical
equipment

IS: 4029

Guide for testing three phase

induction motors

IS: 4691

Degree of protection provided

by enclosure for rotating
electrical machinery

IS: 4722

Rotating electrical machines

IS: 4729

Measurement and evaluation of

vibration of rotating electrical
machines

IS: 5572

IS: 6362

Classification of hazardous
areas for electrical (Part-I)
installations (Areas having
gases and vapours)
Designation of methods of
cooling for rotating electrical
machines

IS: 6381

Construction and testing of

electrical apparatus with type of
protection e

IS: 7816

Guide for testing insulation for

rotating machine

IS:8544

AC motor starter of voltage not

exceeding 1000 volts

IS: 4064

Air break switches

Glxviii
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

of

IEC DOCUMENT 2

Three phase induction motor

VDE 0530 Part I/66

Three phase induction motor

IS: 9224 (Part-II)

HRC Fuses

IS: 6875

Push button
switches

IS: 694

PVC insulated cables

IS: 1248

Indicating instruments

IS: 375

Auxiliary wiring and busbar

markings

IS: 2147

Degree of protection

IS: 5

Colour relay and timers

IS: 2959

Contactors

NFPA-13

Standard for the installation of

sprinkler system

NFPA-15

Standard for water spray fixed

system for the fire protection

NFPA-12A

Standard for Halong 1301 Fire

Extinguishing System

NFPA-72E

Standard on Automatic Fire

Detectors

NFPA-12

Standard on Carbon dioxide

extinguisher systems

IS: 3034

Fire of industrial building

(Control Office) 432

and

control

PG TEST PROCEDURES

Fire Protection Manual by TAC (Latest Edition)

Electrical generating and distribution station code of practice

IS: 2878

Glxix
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

CO2 (Carbon dioxide) Type

Extinguisher

IS: 2171

DC (Dry Chemical Powder) type

IS: 940

Pressurised Water Type

IS: 10002

Specification for performance

requirements for constant speed
compression ignition (diesel
engine) for general purposes

IS: 10000

Method of tests for internal

combustion engines

IS: 4722

Rotating electrical machinesspecification

IS: 12063

Degree of protection provided

by enclosures

IS: 12065

Permissible limit of noise levels

for rotating electrical machines

IS : 226

Specification for
Standard quality

IS: 228 (1992)

Method of Chemical Analysis

of pig iron, cast iron and plain
carbon and low alloy steels

IS : 278

Galvanised steel barbed wire

for fencing

IS : 406

Specification for method of

chemical analysis for slab zinc

IS:513

Cold rolled carbon sheet steel

IS: 800

Code of practice for use of

structural steed in general
building construction

IS: 802

Code of practice for use of

structural steel in Overhead
Transmission line towers
Part 1: Load and permissible

D.G. SET

Indian explosive Act 1932

STEEL STRUCTURES

Glxx
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

Structural

Steel

stresses
Part 2: Fabrication, galvanizing,
inspection and packing
IS: 806

Code of practice for use of

steel tubes in general building
construction

IS: 808

Dimensions for hot rolled steel

beam, column channel and
angle sections
Part V: Equal leg angles
Part VI: Unequal leg angles

IS : 813

Scheme of symbols for welding

IS: 814

Covered electrodes for manual

arc
welding
of
carbon
manganese steel

IS : 815

Classification
coding
of
covered electrodes for metal arc
welding of structural steels

IS: 816

Code of Practice for use of

metal arc welding for general
construction in Mild steel

IS: 817

Code of practice for training

and testing of metal arc welders
Part 1: Manual Metal arc
welding

IS : 822

Code of practice for inspection

of welds

IS : 823

Code of practice for manual

metal arc welding of mild steel

IS: 875 (Part 1 to Part 4)

Code of practice for design

loads (other than earthquake)
for buildings and structures

IS: 919

Recommendation for limits and

fits for engineering

IS : 1083

Precision hexagonal bolts,

screws and nuts (BSW & BJF
threads)

IS: 1161

Steel

Glxxi
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

tubes

for

structural

purposes
IS : 1181

Qualifying tests for metal arc welders (engaged

in welding structures other than pipes)

IS: 1182

Recommended practice for

radiographic examination of
fusion welded butt joints in
steel plates

IS: 1363 (Part 1 to Part 3)

Hexagonal head bolts, screws

and nuts of product grades A
and B

IS: 1364

Hexagonal head bolts, screws

and nuts of product grades A an
B

IS: 1367 (Part 1 to Part 18)

Technical supply condition for

threaded steel fasteners

IS : 1477

Code of practice for finishing of ferrous metal

in buildings
Painting
and allied finishes Part-I (Operation and
workmanship)

IS: 1573

Specification for electroplated

coatings of zinc iron and steel

IS: 1599

Methods of bend test for steel products other

than sheet, wire &
tubes

IS: 1608

Methods for tensile testing of

steel products

IS : 1730

Dimensions for steel plate,

sheet and strip for structural
and
general engineering
purposes

IS : 1852

Specification for rolling and cutting tolerances

for hot rolled steel
products

IS: 1893

Criteria for earthquake resistant

design of structures

IS: 1978

Line Pipe

IS: 2016

Specification for plain washers

IS: 2062

Steel for
purposes

Glxxii
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

general

structural

IS : 2066

Specification for
structural steel

IS : 2074

Ready mix paint, red oxide zinc

chromate primer

IS : 2363

Black hexagonal bolts, nuts and

lock nuts and hexagonal screws

IS: 2595

Code
of
practice
Radiographic testing

IS : 2633

Method of testing uniformity of

coating of zinc coated articles

IS : 2721

Galvanised steel chain link

fence fabric

IS: 3063

Single coil rectangular section

spring washers for bolts, nuts
and screws

IS : 3502

Steel for checkered plates

IS : 3613

Acceptance tests for wire flux combination for

metal arc welding
for
mild steel

IS : 3658

Code of practice for liquid penetrant flow

detection

IS: 3664

Code of practice for ultrasonic

pulse echo testing by contact
and immersion methods

IS : 4000

Code of practice for assembly

of structural joints using high
tensile
friction grip fasteners

IS : 4759

Specification for hot-dip zinc

coatings on structural steel and
other allied products

IS : 5334

Code of practice for magnetic practice flow

detection of welds

IS : 5358

Method of hot dip galvanized

coatings on fasteners

Glxxiii
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

weldable

for

IS : 5613

Code of practice for design, installation and

maintenance of
overhead
power lines

IS : 5624

Foundation bolts

IS : 6610

Specification for heavy washers

for steel structures

IS : 6639

Specification for hexagonal

bolts for steel structures

IS : 6745

Specification for methods of

determination of weight of zinc
coating on zinc coated iron and
steel articles

IS: 7205

Safety code for erection of

structural steel work

IS : 7215

Tolerance for fabrication of

steel structures

IS : 7318

Approved tests for welders when welding

procedure approval is
not
required

IS: 9595

Recommendations for metal arc

welding of carbon and carbon
manganese steels

IS : 10238

Step bolts for steel structures

IS : 12427

Transmission Tower Bolts

ANSI: B18.2.1

Inch
series
square
and
hexagonal bolts and screws

ANSI: B18.2.2

Square and hexagonal nuts

ANSI: G8.14

Round head bolts

ASTM-A6

Specification
for
General
Requirements for rolled steel
plates, shapes, sheet piling and
bars of structural use

ASTM-A36

Specification of structural steel

ASTM-A47

Specification for malleable iron

castings

Glxxiv
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

ASTM-A143

Practice
for
safeguarding
against embalmment of Hot
Galvanized structural steel
products and procedure for
detaching embalmment

ASTM-A242

Specification for high strength

low alloy structural steel

ASTM-A283

Specification for low and

intermediate tensile strength
carbon steel plates of structural
quality

ASTM-A394

Specification for Galvanized

steel transmission tower bolts
and nuts

ASTM-441

Specification for High strength

low alloy structural manganese
vanadium steel

ASTM-A572

Specification for High strength

low
alloy
colombiumVanadium steel of structural
quality

AWS D1-0

Code for welding in building

construction welding inspection

AWS D1-1

Structural welding code

AISC

American institute
construction

NEMA-CG1

Manufactured
electrodes

IS: 1239 (Part1 & 2)

Mild steel tubes, tubulars and

other wrought steel fittings

IS: 3589

Seamless Electrically welded

steel pipes for water, gas and
sewage

IS: 6392

Steel pipe flanges

of

steel

graphite

PIPING AND PRESSURE VESSELS

Glxxv
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

ASME

Boiler and pressure vessel code

ASTM-A120

Specification for pipe steel,

black an hot dipped, zinccoated (Galvanized) welded
and seamless steel pipe for
ordinary use

ASTM-A53

Specification for pipe, steel,

black and hot-dipped, zinc
coated welded and seamless

ASTM-A106

Seamless carbon steel pipe for

high temperature service

ASTM-A284

Low and intermediate tensile

strength carbon-silicon steel
plates for machine parts and
general construction

ASTM-A234

Pipe fittings of wrought carbon

steel and allow steel for
moderate
and
elevated
temperatures

ASTM-S181

Specification for forgings,

carbon steel for general purpose
piping

ASTM-A105

Forging, carbon steel for piping

components

ASTM-A307

Carbon
steel
externally
threaded standard fasteners

ASTM-A193

Alloy steel and stainless steel

bolting materials for high
temperature service

ASTM-A345

Flat rolled electrical steel for

magnetic applications

ASTM-A197

Cupola malleable iron

ANSI-B2.1

Pipe threads (Except dry seal)

ANSI-B16.1

Cast iron pipe flanges and

flanged
fittings:
Class
25,125,250 and 800

ANSI-B16.1

Malleable

Glxxvi
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

iron

threaded

fittings: Class 150 and 300

ANSI-B16.5

Pipe flanges and flanged

fittings, steel nickel alloy and
other special alloys

ANSI-B16.9

Factory-made wrought
butt welding fittings

ANSI-B16.11

Forged steel fittings, socketwelding and threaded

ANSI-B16.14

Ferrous pipe plug, bushings and

locknuts with pipe threads

ANSI-B16.25

Butt welding ends

ANSI-B18.1.1

Fire hose couplings screws

thread

ANSI-B18.2.1

Inch
series
square
and
hexagonal bolts and screws

ANSI-B18.2.2

Square and hexagonal nuts

ANSI-B18.21.1

Lock washers

ANSI-B18.21.2

Plain washers

ANSI-B31.1

Power piping

ANSI-B36.10

Welding and seamless wrought

steel pipe

ANSI-B36.9

Stainless steel pipe

IS: 269

33 grade ordinary Portland

cement

IS: 2721

Galvanized steel chain link

fence fabric

IS: 278

Galvanized steel barbed wire

for fencing

IS: 383

Coarse and fine aggregates

from natural sources for
concrete

steel

OTHER CIVIL WORKS STANDARDS

Glxxvii
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

IS: 432 (Part 1 & 2)

Mild steel and medium tensile

steel bars and hard-dawn steel
wire for concrete reinforcement

IS: 456

Code of practice for plain and

reinforce concrete

IS:458

Specification for concrete pipes

IS: 516

Method of test for strength of

concrete

IS: 800

Code of practice for general

construction in steel

IS: 806

Steel tubes
purposes

IS: 1172

Basic requirements for water

supply, drainage and sanitation

IS: 1199

Methods of sampling
analysis of concrete

IS: 1566

Hard-dawn steel wire fabric for

concrete reinforcement

IS: 1742

Code of Practice for Building

drainage

IS: 1785

Plain hard-drawn steel wire for

prestressed concrete

IS: 1786

High strength deformed Steel

Bars and wires for concrete
reinforcement

IS: 1811

Methods of sampling Foundry

sands

IS: 1893

Criteria of earthquake resistant

design of structures

IS: 2062

Steel for
purposes

IS: 2064

Selection,
installation
and
maintenance
of
sanitary
appliances-code of practices

Glxxviii
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

for

general

structural

and

structural

IS: 2065

Code of practice for water

supply in building

IS: 2090

High tension steel bars used in

prestressed concrete

IS: 2140

Standard Galvanized steel wire

for fencing

IS: 2470 (Part 1 &Part 2)

Code of practice for installation

of septic tanks

IS: 2514

Concrete vibrating tables

IS: 2645

Integral cement waterproofing

compounds

IS: 3025 (Part1 to Part 48)

Methods of sampling and test

(Physical and chemical) for
water and waste water

IS: 4091

Code of practice for design and

construction of foundations for
transmission line towers and
poles

IS: 4111 (Part 1 to Part 5)

Code of practice for ancillary

structures in sewerage system

IS: 4990

Plywood for concrete shuttering

work

IS: 5600

Sewage and drainage pumps

NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA - 1970

USBR E12

Earth Manual by United States

Department of the interior
Bureau of Reclamation

ASTM-A392-81

Zinc/Coated steel chain link

fence fabric

ASTM-D1557-80

Test
for
moisture-density
relation of soils using 10-lb (4.5
kg) rame land 18-in. (457 mm)
Drop

ASTM-D1586 (1967)

Penetration

Glxxix
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

Test

and

Split

Barrel
- Sampling of Soils
ASTM-D2049-69

Test
method
Unconsolidated, (1982)

for

ASTM-D2435

Undrained
Strengths
of
Cohesive Soils in Triaxial
Compression

BS-5075

Specification for accelerating

Part I Admixtures, Retarding
Admixtures
and
Water
Reducing Admixtures

CPWD

Latest CPWD specifications

IS: 6745
BS: 443-1969

Methods for determination of

mass of zinc coating on zinc
coated iron and steel articles

IS: 8263
IEC: 437-1973
NEMA: 107-1964
CISPR

Methods for Radio Interference

Test on high voltage insulators

IS: 209
BS: 3436-1961

Zinc Ingot

IS: 398 (Part 5)

IEC: 209-1966

Aluminium
Overhead
Purposes

BS: 215 (Part-II)

IEC: 209-1966

Aluminium
conductors
galvanised steel reinforced
extra high voltage (400 kV and
above)

IS: 1778
BS: 1559-1949

Reels and drums for bare

conductors

IS: 1521
ISO/R89-1959

Method for tensile testing of

steel wire

IS: 2629

Recommended practice for hot

dip galvanizing on iron and
steel

ACSR MOOSE CONDUCTOR

Glxxx
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

conductors for
Transmission

IS: 2633

Method for testing uniformity

of coating of zinc coated
articles

IS: 4826
ASTM-A472-729

Hot dip galvanized coatings on

round steel wires

IS: 1521
ISO/R89-1959

Method for tensile testing of

steel wire

IS: 1778
BS: 1559-1949

Reels and drums for bare

conductors

IS: 2629

Recommended practice for hot

dip galvanizing on iron and
steel

IS: 2633

Method for testing uniformity

of coating of zinc coated
articles

IS: 4826
ASTM-A475-72a
BS: 443-1969

Hot dip galvanized coatings on

round steel wires

IS: 6745
BS: 443-1969

Method for Determination of

mass of Zinc Coating on Zinc
coated Iron and Steel Articles

IS: 209
BS: 3463-1961

Zinc ingot

IS: 398 (Part 1 to Part 5: 1992)

BS: 215 (Part-II)

Aluminium Conductors for

overhead transmission purposes

IS: 1913

General
and
requirements
for
lighting fittings

IS: 1777

Industrial lighting fittings with

metal reflectors

IS:1947

Specification for flood light

IS:2149

Luminaries for street lighting

GALVANIZED STEEL EARTHWIRE

LIGHTING FIXTURES AND ACCESSORIES

Glxxxi
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

safety
electric

IS:2183

High pressure mercury vapour

lamps

IS: 3528

Waterproof
fittings

IS: 4012

Dust proof electric lighting

fittings

IS: 4013

Dust
lightproof
lighting fittings

IS:5077

Specification for
lighting outfits

IS:6616-1982

Ballast for high mercury vapour

lamps

IS: 10322

Industrial lighting fittings with

metal reflectors

IS: 10322

Industrial lighting fittings with

plastic reflectors

IS: 2206

Well glass lighting fittings for

use under ground in mines (non
flameproof type)

IS: 10322

Specification for floodlight

IS: 10322

Specification for
lighting outfits

IS: 10322

Luminaries for street lighting

IS: 2418

Tubular fluorescent lamps

IS: 9900

High pressure mercury vapour

lamps

IS: 1258

Specification for Bayonet lamp

fluorescent lamp

IS: 3323

Bi-pin lamp holder tabular

fluorescent lamps

IS: 1534

Ballasts for use in fluorescent

lighting fittings (Part-I)

IS: 1569

Capacitors

Glxxxii
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

electric

for

lighting

electric

decorative

decorative

use

in

fluorescent lighting fittings

IS: 2215

Starters for fluorescent lamps

IS: 3324

Holders for starters for tubular

fluorescent lamps

IS: 418

GLS lamps

IS: 3553

Watertight electric fittings

IS: 2713

Tubular steel poles

IS: 280

MS wire for general engg

purposes

CONDUITS, ACCESSORIES AND JUNCTION BOXES

IS: 9537

Rigid steel conduits for electrical

wiring

IS:1653

Rigid steel conduits for electrical

wiring

IS: 3480

Flexible steel
electrical wiring

IS: 2667

Fittings for rigid steel conduits

for electrical wiring

IS: 3837/3838

Accessories for rigid steel

conduits for electrical wiring

IS: 4649

IS: 5133

Adaptors for flexible

conduits
Steel and Cast Iron Boxes

IS: 2629

Hot dip galvanizing of Iron &

Steel

IS: 13947

LV Switchgear and Control gear

(Part1 to 5)

IS: 8828

Circuit breakers for over current

protection for house hold and
similar installations

conduits

for

steel

LIGHTING PANELS

Glxxxiii
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

IS: 5

Ready mix paints

IS:2147

Degrees of protection provided

by enclosures for low voltage
switches and control gear

IS: 2551

Danger notice plates

IS: 2705

Current transformers

IS:2208

HRC cartridge fuse links

IS:2552

Danger notice plates

IS:2959

AC Contactors of voltage not

exceeding 1000 V

IS:3202

Code of practice for climate

proofing of electrical equipment

IS:4064

Normal duty air break switches

and composite units of air break
switches and fuses for voltages
not exceeding 1000V

IS: 9224

HRC Cartridge fuse links for

voltage above 650V (Part-2)

IS: 5082/5048

Wrought aluminium and Al

Alloys, bars, rods, tubes and
sections for electrical purposes

IS: 8623

Factory built Assemblies of

Switchgear and Control Gear for
voltages upto and including
1000V AC and 1200V DC

IS:8828

Miniature Air-Break circuit

breaker
for
voltages
not
exceeding 1000 volts

IS: 1248

Direct
Acting
electrical
indicating instruments

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
IS: 1293

3 pin plug

IS: 371

Two to three ceiling roses

Glxxxiv
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

IS: 3854

Switches for domestic and similar

purposes

IS: 5216

Guide for safety procedure and

practices in electrical work.

IS: 732

Code of practice for electrical

wiring installation (system voltage
not exceeding 650 Volts).

IS: 3043

Code of practice for earthing

IS:3106

Code of practice for selection,

installation and maintenance of
fuses (Voltage not exceeding 650
V)

IS: 3646

Code of practice of
illumination part II & III

IS: 1944

Code of practice for lighting of

public through fares

IS: 5571

Guide for selection of electrical

equipment for hazardous areas

IS: 800

Code of practice for use of

structural steel in general building
construction.

IS: 2633

Methods of Testing uniformity of

coating on zinc coated articles

IS: 6005

Code of practice for phosphating

iron and steel

IS:3043

Code of practice for earthing

IS:2309

Code of practice for the protection

of Building and allied structures
against lightning

IEEE Standard 80-1986

Guide for safety in Alternating

interior

INDIAN ELECTRICITY ACT

INDIAN ELECTRICITY RULES

EARTHING & EARTHMAT

Glxxxv
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

Current substation Grounding

Indian Electricity Rules
LT SWITCHGEAR

IS: 8623(Part-I)

Specification for
switchgear
and
assemblies

IS: 13947(Part-I)

Specification for low voltage

switchgear and control gear.
Part 1: General Rules

IS: 13947(Part-2)

Specification for low voltage

switchgear and control gear.
Part 2: circuit breakers

IS: 13947(Part-3)

Specification for low voltage

switchgear and control gear.
Part 3: Switches, Disconnectors,
switch-disconnectors
and
fuse
combination units

IS: 13947 (Part-4)

Specification for low voltage

switchgear and control gear.
Part 4: Contractors and motors
starters

IS: 13947 (Part-5)

Specification for low voltage

switchgear and control gear.
Part 5: Control-circuit devices and
switching elements.

IS: 13947(Part-6)

Specification for low voltage

switchgear and control gear.
Part 6: Multiple function switching
devices.

IS: 13947(Part-7)

Specification for low voltage

switchgear and control gear.
Part 7: Ancillary equipments.

IS: 12063

Degree of protection provided by

enclosures

Glxxxvi
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

low voltage
control
gear

General requirement of switchgear

and control gear for voltages not
exceeding 1 kV

IS: 2705

Current Transformers

IS: 3156

Voltage Transformers

IS: 2516 (Part I & II)

Air circuit breaker

IS: 3231

Electrical relays for power system

protection

IS: 1248

Electrical indicating instruments

IS: 722

AC Electricity meters

IS: 5578

Guide for Marking of insulated

conductors of apparatus terminals.

IS: 13703(Part1)

Low voltage fuses for voltage not

exceeding 1000V AC or 1500V DC
Part 1 General Requirements

IS: 13703(Part 2)

Low voltage fuses for voltage not

exceeding 1000V AC or 1500V DC
Part 2 Fuses for use of authorized
persons

IS: 6005

Code of practice of phosphating iron

and Steel

IS: 5082

Wrought
Aluminium
purposes

IS: 2633

Hot dip galvanizing.

H)

IS-4237

Hlxxxvii
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

Aluminium
and
alloys for electrical

ANNEXUREIII
LIST OF DRAWINGS/DOCUMENTS TO BE
SUBMITTED BY THE CONTRACTOR FOR
APPROVAL OF THE PURCHASER
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.

14.

15.

Single Line Diagram

Electrical Layout-Plan, Sections
Switchgear Structural Layout and Section
DSLP Calculation and drawing
Short circuit Force and Critical Span Calculations
Busbar Design calculations
Cantilever Strength calculations
Design calculation for Sag-Tension stringing chart
GTP and drawings for Bus-Post Insulator
Tension/suspension string insulator and Hardware Assembly GTP and drawing
Structure Layout (Plan & Section) drawing
Soil Investigation Report
Circuit Breakers
- GA drawing
- GTP
- Type test Reports
CTs & CVTs
- GA drawing
- GTP
- Type test Reports
Surge Arrestors
- GA drawing
- GTP
Hlxxxviii

Section

Specific Technical Requirements

16.

17.

18.

- Type test Reports

Isolators
- GA drawing
- GTP
- Type test Reports
Control and Relay Panels
- GTP and technical literature
- Type test report of Relays/Relays/Equipments
Civil Works
- Control Room Building
- Structure Design, Foundation Design & Drawings
- Tower foundation design/drawings.

Hlxxxix
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

SECTION SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

CONTENTS

CLAUSE

TITLE

PAGE NO.

CLIMATIC & SYSTEM PARAMETERS H1

A.
B.

CLIMATIC CONDITION ............................................................................. H1

SYSTEM PARAMETERS ............................................................................ H1

I.

MAJOR SUBSTATION EQUIPMENT

H2

A.
CIRCUIT BREAKER .................................................................................... H2
B.
ISOLATOR / DISCONNECT EARTH SWITCHES .................................... H6
C.
INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS ............................................................. H8
TABLE I H10
Requirements for 145 kV Current Transformers (CTs) ...................................................... H10
TABLE II H11
Requirements for 36 kV Current Transformers (CTs) ........................................................ H11
D.
SURGE ARRESTER .................................................................................... H-iii
II.
III.

CONTROL & RELAY PANELS

H-v
SUBSTATION AUXILIARIES H-xxviii

(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(E)
(F)
(G)
(H)
(I)

Air Conditioning / Central Heating: .................. Error! Bookmark not defined.

Salient features of maintenance free battery: .......................................... H-xxviii
Battery charger ............................................................................................H-xxx
AC / DC DISTRIBUTION BOARD...........................................................H-xxx
POWER & CONTROL CABLE.............................................................. H-xxxii
SUBSTATION STRUCTURE ............................................................... H-xxxiii
SUBSTATION LIGHTING SYSTEM ............. Error! Bookmark not defined.
FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENT ..............................................................H-xxxv
DG SET ....................................................................................................H-xxxvi

IV

ANCILLARY ITEMS H-xxxvi

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.

EARTHING SYSTEM ............................................................................H-xxxvi

TUBULAR BUS CONDUCTORS ................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
MARSHALLING KIOSK .......................................................................H-xxxvi
CLAMPS AND CONNECTORS .......................................................... H-xxxvii
BUS POST INSULATORS ................................................................... H-xxxvii
INSULATOR DISCS AND STRINGS ................................................ H-xxxviii
INSULATOR HARDWARES .................................................................H-xxxix
CONDUCTOR ............................................................................................. H-xli
GALVANISED STRANDED STEEL EARTHWIRE .............................. H-xliii
SPACERS/SPACER DAMPERS FOR 'MOOSE CONDUCTOR' ........... H-xliv
TENSION CLAMPS FOR EARTHWIRE ..................................................H-xlv
FLEXIBLE COPPER BONDS ....................................................................H-xlv

POWER TRANSFORMER

H-xlvi

Hxc
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

Hxci
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

CLIMATIC & SYSTEM PARAMETERS

A.
1.

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

7.

8.

9.

CLIMATIC CONDITION
Location of Siot Grid Substation
i)
Latitude
ii) Longitude
Max. Ambient temperature
Mean annual/every day temperature
Minimum temperature
Basic wind speed
Relative humidity
i)
Maximum
ii) Minimum
Average Rainfall (Max.) per annum
a) Rainy months
b) Rainy days in a year
a) Summer months
b) Monsoon months
c) Winter months
Average number of thunder storms

32o 44 00 N
74o 46 36 E
Deg. C
48
Deg. C
32
Deg. C
2
m/s
39
%
100
%
10
mm
1087.7
Months
5 (Feb., July. - Oct.)
Days
50
3
(Apr. - June)
2
(July - Aug.)
3
(Dec. - Feb.)
Days per
20
Annum
m
284

10. Average altitude from sea level

11. Seismic level
a) Horizontal Seismic coefficient
b) Vertical acceleration

B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

0.15g
Zone-4

SYSTEM PARAMETERS
Highest system voltage
System frequency
Number of phases
System earthing
Short circuit level

6. Auxiliary power
supply
AC
DC

145 kV
36 kV
50 Hz
50 Hz
3
3
Effectively Earthed system
31.5 kA for
25 kA for
1 Second
3 Second

415 Volts, 3 phase or 240 Volts, single phase

220 Volts DC

Note: The above power supplies are subjected to the variations given below:
H1
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

Voltage Variation 10%

Frequency Variation 5%
Voltage Variation 15% to + 10%

AC supply
DC supply

I. MAJOR SUBSTATION EQUIPMENT

A.

CIRCUIT BREAKER

Sl.
Description
No
1.
Type of Circuit Breaker
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

7.

8.
9.
10.

Number of Poles
Class
Rated voltage
Rated continuous current at an
ambient temp. of 48 deg C
Circuit breaker class with regard
to
electrical
endurance,
mechanical
endurance
and
restrike
probability
during
capacitive current breaking as
per IEC: 62271-100
Rated short circuit current
breaking capacity at specified
site conditions
a) Symmetrical Breaking
current
b) Percentage DC component

c) Asymmetrical
breaking
current
(including
DC
component)
Rated short circuit making
current
Short time current carrying
capability
Rated out of phase breaking
current

145 kV Class

36 kV Class

Sulphur Hexaflouride
(SF6) gas filled
Three (3)
Out door
145 kV
3150 Amps

Vacuum
Three (3)
Out door
36 kV
1600 Amps

C2-E1-M2

C2-E1-M2

31.5 kA(rms) at 145 kV 25 kA (rms) at

36 kV
As per Clause 4.101.2
As per Clause
of IEC -62271-100
4.101.2 of IEC Corresponding to
62271-100
minimum opening time Corresponding to
under operating
minimum
condition specified
opening time
under operating
condition
specified
To be stated by the
To be stated by
Contractor
the Contractor
80 kA (Peak)

63 kA (Peak)

31.5 kA (rms)
(for 1 sec.)
25% of rated breaking
capacity i.e. 8 kA

25 kA (rms)
(for 3 sec.)
25% of rated
breaking capacity
i.e. 6.25 kA

H2
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

11.

Rated operating duty cycle

12.

Auto reclosing

13.
14.

First pole to clear factor

a) Rated line charging breaking
current capacity

15.

16.
17.
18.

19.
20.

21.

(The breaker shall be able to

interrupt the rated line
charging current with test
voltage immediately before
opening equal to the product
of U/3 & 1.4 as per IEC:
62271- 100)
b) Rated
cable
charging
breaking current capacity
Total break time for any current
upto the rated breaking current
with
limit
conditions
of
operating and quenching media
pressure. The break time shall be
guaranteed for test duties 1, 2, 3,
4, 5, and short line fault duty.
Making time (Closing time)
Operating mechanism
Difference in instants of
closing/opening of contacts
i) Within a pole

O-0.3 sec.-CO-3 minCO

Where O stands for Opening operation and C
stands for Closing operation.
Three phase autoThree phase autoreclosing.
reclosing.
1.3
1.5
50 Amps (rms)
10 Amps (rms)

160 Amps (rms)

50 Amps (rms)

Not exceeding
65 ms (with
rated break
time of 60 ms)

Not
exceeding
100 ms

Not exceeding 150 ms

Not exceeding
150 ms
Spring charged

Spring ON/OFF

As per ISS/BIS/IEC
standards

As per
ISS/BIS/IEC
standards
ii) Between poles (for opening)
Not exceeding 3.33
Not exceeding
milliseconds
3.33 milliseconds
iii) Between poles ( for closing)
As per ISS/BIS/IEC
As per
standards
ISS/BIS/IEC
standards
The above shall be at rated control voltage and the rated operating & quenching
media pressures.
Control circuit voltage
220 Volts DC
220 Volts DC
(with voltage variation as specified in GTR)
Rated supply voltage of auxiliary
415 V AC, 3 phase, 50 415 V AC, 3
circuits
c/s, 240 V AC, 50 c/s,
phase, 50 c/s, 240
single phase
V AC, 50 c/s,
single phase
(With voltage and frequency variation as
specified in GTR)
Noise level at base and upto 50
140 dB (Max.)
140 dB (Max.)
H3

Section

Specific Technical Requirements

22.
23.

meters distance from the base of

the breaker
Type of tripping

Anti pumping & Trip

free
3625mm

Anti pumping &

Trip free
900 mm

24.

Minimum total creepage

distance (25 mm/kV of rated
voltage)
Minimum Clearance

1300 mm
1300 mm

320 mm
320 mm

2550 mm

2550 mm

25.

a) Phase to phase in air

b) Between live and grounded
objects
c) Ground clearance from
bottom of insulator
d) Section clearance
Phase to phase spacing

3800 mm
3000 mm

2800 mm
1500 mm

Temperature rise over the design

ambient temperature
Number of closing and tripping
coils

As per IEC 62271100

2 trip coils and one
closing coil per circuit
breaker with anti
pumping arrangement

28.

Number of auxiliary contacts

Each Circuit Breaker

shall be provided with
an auxiliary switch
with a total of 20
independent reversible
single pole contacts
exclusively for Owner's
use. The auxiliary
switch shall be factory
assembled with 5 NO
and 5 NC contacts for
each pole for future use
of the Owner/
Purchaser

29.

Requirement of Simultaneity of
poles

Breaker shall close,

open simultaneously on
all the 3 poles.

30.

Rating of auxiliary contacts

10 Amps, 220 V DC

As per IEC
62271-100
2 trip coils and
one closing coil
per circuit breaker
with anti pumping
arrangement
Each Circuit
Breaker shall be
provided with an
auxiliary switch
with a total of 20
independent
reversible single
pole contacts
exclusively for
Owner's use. The
auxiliary switch
shall be factory
assembled with 5
NO and 5 NC
contacts for each
pole for future
use of the Owner/
Purchaser
Breaker shall
close, open
simultaneously on
all the 3 poles.
10 Amps, 220 V
DC

26.
27.

(Values given below are for an altitude of 1000 m or less.

For an altitude of more than 1000 m, clearances will
increase by 1.25% for every 100 m rise in altitude above
1000 m)

H4
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

31.

Breaking capacity of auxiliary

contacts

32. Rated insulation level

32.1 1.2/50 Micro second lightning
impulse withstand voltage (+ve
or ve polarity)
a) To earth (line terminals and
earth and insulator housing)
b) Across the open CB
32.2 One minute power frequency
withstand voltage
a) To earth
b) Across terminals of open
Circuit Breaker
33. Maximum radio interference
voltage for any frequency
between 0.5 MHZ to 2.0 MHZ in
all positions
34. Corona extinction voltage with
circuit breaker in open and close
positions
35. Number of terminals in control
cabinet

2 A DC with circuit
time constant not less
than 20 ms

2 A DC with
circuit time
constant not less
than 20 ms

650 kVp

170 kVp

650 kVp

170 kVp

275 kV (rms)
275 kV (rms)

70 kV (rms)
70 kV (rms)

500 micro volts at

92 kV (rms)

As per
ISS/BIS/IEC
standards

105 kV (rms)
(Minimum)

As per
ISS/BIS/IEC
standards
All contacts in the
control circuits to
be wired out up to
common control
cabinet plus 24
spare terminals
evenly distributed
on all terminal
blocks
exclusively for
Purchaser's use
As per Annexure
III of SectionMajor substation
Equipment
0.3g Horizontal
As per IEC:
62271-100. The
breaker shall be
designed to
withstand the
rated terminal
loads, wind loads,
earth quake load
and short circuit
forces.

All contacts in the

control circuits to be
wired out up to
common control
cabinet plus 24 spare
terminals evenly
distributed on all
terminal blocks
exclusively for
Purchaser's use

36.

SF6 gas characteristics for SF6

Circuit Breaker

As per Annexure III of

Section-Major
substation Equipment

37.
38.

Seismic Acceleration
Rated terminal load

0.3g Horizontal
As per IEC: 62271100. The breaker shall
be designed to
withstand the rated
terminal loads, wind
loads, earth quake load
and short circuit forces.

H5
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

39.

Mounting

40.

Maximum allowable switching

surge over voltage under any
switching condition
Rated characteristic for short line As per IEC-62271-100 / relevant IS
faults

41.

B.
Sl.
No.
1.
2.
3.
4.

5.

6.

7.
8.

9.

On hot dipped
galvanized steel
support structures
(Lattice/tubular pipe
type)
As per IEC-62271-100

On hot dipped
galvanized steel
support structures
(Lattice/tubular
pipe type)
As per IEC62271-100

ISOLATOR / DISCONNECT EARTH SWITCHES

Description
Rated voltage
Type
Rated current at ambient
temperature of 48 deg C
Rated short time withstand
current of isolator and earth
switch.
Rated dynamic short withstand
current of isolator and earth
switch
Rated insulation level
a) 1.2/50 micro sec. lightning
impulse withstand voltage.
i) to earth & between poles
/ phases
ii) Across isolating distance
b) One minute power
frequency withstand
voltage
i) to earth
ii) across isolating distance
Corona extinction voltage
(Minimum)
Temperature rise over Design
ambient Temperature
Rated

induced

current

145 kV Class
3 Pole
145 kV
Out door horizontal
double break type
2500 Amps

36 kV Class
3 Pole
36 kV
Out door horizontal
double break type
1600 Amps

31.5 kA for 1 Sec.

25 kA for 3 Sec.

80 kAp

63 kAp

650 kVp

170 kVp

750 kVp

195 kVp

275 kV (rms)
315 kV (rms)

70 kV (rms)
As per ISS/BIS/IEC
standards
As per ISS/BIS/IEC
standards
As per IS: 9921,
IEC: 62271-102
IEC: 60694

105 kV (rms)
As per IS: 9921, IEC:
62271-102
IEC: 60694

&
H6

Section

Specific Technical Requirements

voltage for earth switches

a) For electrostatic coupling
- Rated induced current

2 A (rms)

Rated induced voltage

6 kV (rms)

b) For
electromagnetic
coupling
- Rated induced current

80A (rms)

Rated induced voltage

10. Rated mechanical terminal

load (Newton)
a)

for two/three column

horizontal break type
isolator

Straight load Fa1 & Fa2

Cross load Fb1 & Fb2

11. Operating mechanism of

a) Isolator
b) Earth switch
12. No. of auxiliary contacts wired
to terminal block on each
isolator exclusively for
Purchaser's use in future.
13. No. of auxiliary contacts wired
to terminal block on each
earthing switch exclusively for
Purchaser's use in future.
14. a) Rating of auxiliary
contacts
b)

15.
16.

17.

Breaking capacity of
auxiliary contacts

Phase to phase spacing

Minimum total creepage
distance (25 mm/kV of rated
voltage)
Radio Interference Voltage
for frequency between 0.5
MHz and 2 MHz in all

As per ISS/BIS/IEC
standards
2 kV (rms)
As per ISS/BIS/IEC
standards
As per Table 3 of IEC: 62271-102 (for 4000 A) or
as per value calculated in Part- GTR whichever is
higher

500 N
170 N

As per ISS/BIS/IEC
standards
As per ISS/BIS/IEC
standards

Both Motor & Manual

operated
Both Motor & Manual
operated
8 NO + 8 NC

Manual/motorized
operated
Manual/motorized
operated
8 NO + 8 NC

6 NO + 6 NC

6 NO + 6 NC

10 Amps
220 V DC

10 Amps
220 V DC

2A DC with time
constant of not less
than 20 ms.
2700 mm
3625 mm

2A DC with time
constant of not less
than 20 ms.
1500 mm
900 mm

Less than 500 micro

volts (at 92 kV rms)

As per ISS/BIS/IEC
standards

H7
Section

As per ISS/BIS/IEC
standards
As per ISS/BIS/IEC
standards

Specific Technical Requirements

18.
19.

positions of the equipment

Operation time
Number of terminal in control
cabinet

20.

Type of insulator

C.

---------------12 sec or less--------------All contacts and control All contacts and

circuits to be wired out control circuits to
upto control cabinet
be wired out upto
plus 24 spare terminals control cabinet plus
exclusively for
24 spare terminals
purchaser's use (Evenly exclusively for
distributed on all TBs ) purchaser's use
(Evenly distributed
on all TBs )
Porcelain Solid core or Polymer
Porcelain Solid core or
(as per relevant standard amended
Polymer
up to date ISS/BIS/IEC)
(as per relevant standard
amended up to date
ISS/BIS/IEC)

INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS

1.

Current Transformers

Sl.
No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Description

Highest system voltage

Rated frequency
System neutral Earthing
Installation
Type
Rated short time thermal
current
7. Rated dynamic current
8. Rated insulation levels
a) 1.2/50 microsecond
Lighting impulse
withstand voltage
b) 1 minute (Dry & Wet)
power frequency
withstand voltage
9. Maximum temperature rise
over an ambient temperature
of 48 deg C.
10. a) Rated primary current
b) Rated secondary current
11. Visual corona extinction
voltage
12. One minute power frequency

145 kV CTs

36 kV CTs

145 kV
50 Hz
Effectively earthed
Outdoor
Single Phase
31.5 kA for 1 Sec.

36 kV
50 Hz
Effectively earthed
Outdoor
Single Phase
25 kA for 3Sec.

80 kA (peak)

63 kA (peak)

650 kVp

170 kVp

275 kV (rms)

70 kV (rms)

As per IEC60044 1 /
IS:2705
1200-600-300 A
1 Amp
105 kV (rms)
(Minimum)
3 kV for metering

As per IEC60044 1 /
IS:2705
1200-600-300 A
1 Amp
As per ISS/BIS/IEC
standards
3 kV for metering

H8
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

withstand voltage of
secondary winding
13. Maximum Radio Interference
Voltage for frequency
between 0.5 MHz & 2 MHz
in all positions of the
equipment.
14. Partial discharge level
immediately after PF test
15. Minimum total creepage
distance (25 mm/kV of rated
voltage)
16. Type of insulation
17. Seismic Acceleration
18. Number of terminals in
control cabinet

19. Rated transformation ratio

winding and 4.5 kV

for protection
winding
500 micro volts at 92
kV (rms)

winding and 4.5 kV

for protection winding
As per ISS/BIS/IEC
standards

Less than 10 pico

Coulombs
3625 mm

Less than 10 pico

Coulombs
900 mm

Class A
0.3 g of horizontal
All terminals of
control circuits are to
be wired upto
junction box/
marshalling box plus
20 % spares terminals
exclusively for
owners use (evenly
distributed on all
TBs)
1200-600300/1-1-1-1-1
5

Class A
0.3 g of horizontal
All terminals of
control circuits are to
be wired upto junction
box/ marshalling box
plus 20 % spares
terminals exclusively
for owners use
(evenly distributed on
all TBs)
1200-600-300/11-1
3

20. Number of cores

21. Minimum safety clearance
4700 mm
3700 mm
i) Equipment
interconnection level
above plinth level of
300mm over ground(1st
level of interconnection)
ii) Phase to earth clearance
1300 mm
320 mm
iii) Minimum height of
2550 mm
2550 mm
lowest portion of
insulator supporting live
part above concrete
plinth / level of 300 mm
22. Rated continuous thermal
120% of the rated
120% of the rated
current
current
current
23. CTs shall also comply with requirements of Table I & II.
24. Housing - Porcelain housing with cantilever strength not less than 5 KN

H9
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

TABLE I
Requirements for 145 kV Current Transformers (CTs)

No.
of
Cores
5

Core
Application
No.

Current
ratio

Output
burden
(VA)

Accuracy
class as
Min. knee point
per IEC- voltage Vk (Volts)
44-1

Max. CT
Secondary
Winding
resistance
(Ohms) at
75 deg. C.
6/3

30 on 1200/1 tap
60 on 600/1 tap

6/3

30 on 1200/1 tap
60 on 600/1 tap

6/3

30 on 1200/1 tap
60 on 600/1 tap

6/3

30 on 1200/1 tap
60 on 600/1 tap

Bus diff. Check

1200-600/1

PS

Bus diff. Main

1200-600/1

PS

Metering

20 VA

0.2

Trans. back up/

Line protection

1200-600300/1
1200-600/1

PS

Trans. diff. Line 1200-600/1

protection

PS

1200 Volts at 1200/1

ratio, 600 Volts at
600/1 ratio
1200 Volts at 1200/1
ratio, 600 Volts at
600/1 ratio
1200 Volts at 1200/1
ratio, 600 Volts at
600/1 ratio
1200 Volts at 1200/1
ratio, 600 Volts at
600/1 ratio

Note: 1.
All relaying CTs shall be of accuracy class (PS) as per IS: 4201
2.
The Instrument Security Factor (ISF) for metering core shall be less than five (5) at all ratios.

H10
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

Maximum exciting
current in mA at
knee point voltage
(Vk)

TABLE II
Requirements for 36 kV Current Transformers (CTs)

No.
of
Cores
3

Core
Application
No.

Current
ratio

Output
burden
(VA)

Accuracy
class as
Min. knee point
per IEC- voltage Vk (Volts)
60044-1

Trans. diff. /
Line protection

1200-600300/1

PS

Metering

20 VA

0.2

Trans. back up/

Line protection

1200-600300/1
1200-600300/1

PS

H11
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

Max. CT
Secondary
Winding
resistance
(Ohms) at
75 deg. C.

Maximum exciting
current in mA at
knee point voltage
(Vk)

1200 Volts at 1200/1 6/3

ratio, 600 Volts at
600/1 ratio and 300V
at 300/1 ratio
-

30 on 1200/1 tap
60 on 600/1 tap

1200 Volts at 1200/1 6/3

ratio, 600 Volts at
600/1 ratio and 300V
at 300/1 ratio

30 on 1200/1 tap
60 on 600/1 tap

Note: 1.
All relaying CTs shall be of accuracy class (PS) as per IS: 4201
2.
The Instrument Security Factor (ISF) for metering core shall be less than five (5) at all ratios.

H12
Section

Specific Technical Requirements

2. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF VARIOUS CVTs

S.No. Description
145 KV Class
1
Type
Outdoor, single phase, oil immersed
2
Nominal system voltage
132 KV
3
Highest system voltage
145 KV
4
Rated frequency
50 Hz
5
System fault level
31.5 kA for 1 sec
6
System neutral earthing
Effectively earthed
7
Installation
Outdoor
8
Limits of temperature rise (immersed
550C
in oil)
(As per IEC:60186, IEC:60044-2/ IEC 60358
9
Voltage factor
1.5 for 30 sec, 1.2 for continous
10
Rated insulation level
a) 1.2/50 S lighting impulse
650 kVp
withstand voltage
b) 250/2500 lighting switching
impulse withstand voltage
c) 1 minute (Dry & Wet) power
frequency withstand voltage

11
12
13
14

15

16

N.A
275 kV rms

Total capacitance
High frequency capacitance for entire
carrier frequency range
Equivalent series resistance over the
entire carrier frequency range
Stray capacitance & Stray conductance
of the LV terminal of a complete CVT
including Electro Magnetic Unit over
the entire carrier frequency range.
One minute power frequency withstand
voltage
a) Between HF (Low Voltage)
terminal of intermediate
transformer & earth terminal
b) Withstand voltage for secondary
windings & earth terminal
c) Withstand voltage between HF
(LV) carrier coupling terminal &
earth terminal
Total creepage distance

17
18

Corona extinction voltage

Number of terminals in cabinet

19

Insulation class

4400 pico farads (+10% to -5%)

Within 80% to 150% of rated capacitance
Less than 40 ohms
520 pF (max.)
& 50 micro Siemens
(As per IEC: 60358)

4kV rms

3 kV rms
10 kV rms

3635 mm
105 kV rms (min.)
All terminals of control circuits shall be wired
upto Junction box/ marshalling box plus 20%
spare terminals exclusively for owners use
(Evenly distributed on all TBs)
A

H-i
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

20
21
22

Seismic acceleration
Whether CVT are suitable for carrier
coupling
Partial discharge level

Requirements of 145 kV CVTs

S.No.
Description
1
Rated Voltage primary
2
Type
3
No. of secondaries
4
Rated voltage Factor
5
Capcitance
6

Rated secondary voltage

7
8
9
10
11

0.3 g of horizontal
Yes
10 pico Coulombs

Requirements
(145/3) kV rms
Single phase CVT
3
1.2- continuous, 1.5 for 30 secs
4400(Min.) Pico farads ( +10% to -5%) C1= 10461 PF
C2=58740 PF
Secondary
Secondary
Secondary
I
II
III
(110/3)
(110/3)
(110/3)
Protection
Protection
Metering
3P
3P
0.2
50 VA
50VA
50VA
20 minutes (For metering core)
300 VA/400 VA

Application
Accuracy
Output burden (min.)
Phase angle error
Rated total thermal
burden
Note: The accuracy of 0.2 on winding III should be maintained upto and including a total
burden of 100 VA on all three windings. Voltage ratio 132 kv/3/ 110 v/3

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF 36KV PTs

S.No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Description
Type
Nominal system voltage
Highest system voltage
Rated frequency
System fault level
System neutral earthing
Installation
Limits of temperature rise
(immersed in oil)
Voltage factor

10
11

Voltage variation
Rated insulation level
d) 1.2/50 S lighting impulse
withstand voltage
e) 1 minute (Dry & Wet) power
frequency withstand voltage

12

36 KV Class
Outdoor, single phase, oil immersed
33 KV
36 KV
50 Hz
25 kA for 1 sec
Effectively earthed
Outdoor
550C
(As per IEC:60186, IEC:60044-2/ IEC 60358
1.9 for 8 hours & 1.2 continuous
10%
170 kVp
70 kVp

One minute power frequency

3 kV rms
H-ii

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

13
14
15

16
17

withstand voltage for secondary

windings & earth terminal
Total creepage distance
Accuracy
Ratio
Primary
Secondary
No. of cores
Insulation class
Partial discharge level

Requirements of 36 kV PTs
S.No.
Description
1
Rated Voltage primary
2
Type
3
No. of secondaries
4
Rated voltage Factor
5
Rated secondary voltage

6
7
8
9
10

Application
Accuracy
Output burden (min.)
Phase angle error
Rated total thermal
burden

900 mm
PTs shall be of accuracy class 0.2 for metering and
3P for protection as per IS: 3156/ IEC 186
33/3
110/3
2
A

Requirements
(33/3) kV rms
Single phase VT
3
1.2- continuous, 1.9 for 8 hours
Secondary
Secondary
I
II
(110/3)
(110/3)
Protection
Protection
3P
3P
50 VA
50 VA
20 minutes (For metering core)
300 VA

Note: The accuracy of 0.2 on winding III should be maintained upto and including a total
burden of 100 VA on all three windings.

D.
Sl.
No.
1.
2.
3.
4.

SURGE ARRESTER
Particulars
Rated voltage of arrester
Continuous Operating Voltage
(COV)
Installation
Type

145 kV System

33 kV System

120 kV (rms)
102 kV (rms)

30 kV (rms)
25 kV (rms)

--------------------Outdoor----------------------Heavy duty, station class, gapless

type with leakage current monitor(with
surge counter) with IP66
H-iii

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

5.
6.
7.

No. of columns
Type of mounting
Connection

8.

Nominal discharge current (8/20

micro sec.)
Long duration discharge class
Minimum energy handling
capacity (kJ/kV of rated voltage
of arrester)
Prospective symmetrical fault
current for pressure relief test
High current impulse test value
(4/10 micro sec.)
Maximum Residual voltage for

9.
10.

11.
12.
13.

14.
15.
16.

17.

a)

Lightning impulse current

b)

Switching impulse current

c)

Steep current impulse at

nominal discharge current

Maximum PD level at 1.05

COV
Seismic acceleration
Maximum RIV at 1.1 times
phase voltage) for frequency
between 0.5 MHz and 2 MHz in
all positions of the equipment
Arrester Housing
a)
Rated voltage
b) One minute power
frequency withstand
voltage
c)
Lightning impulse
withstand voltage
d) Minimum total creepage
distance

Single column
-------------------------Pedestal-------------Phase to ground
Phase to
ground
10 kAp
10 kAp
3
5 kJ/kV

3
4 kJ/kV

31.5 kA (rms) for

0.2 Sec.
100 kAp

25 kA (rms)
for 0.2 Sec.
100 kAp

310 kVp
(at 5 kA)
330 kVp
(at 10 kA)
280 kVp at
1 kA

100 kVp
(at 10 kA)

380 kVp
(10 kAp)

As per
ISS/BIS/IEC
standards
110 kVp
(10 kAp)

-----------------50 Pico coulombs----------------------------- 0.3 g of horizontal-----500 micro

V (at 92kV
rms)

H-iv
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

145 kV
275 kV
(rms)

36 kV
70 kV (rms)

650 kVp

170 kVp

3625 mm

900 mm

e)

18

Pollution level

Type of Insulator

25 mm/kV
rated
voltage
Heavy (as
per IEC 71)
Porcelain/Polymer

25 mm/kV
rated voltage
Heavy (as per
IEC 71)

Note:LA should be compatible with the circuit breaker duty cycle O-0.3s,-CO-3minCO. Other technical parameters and testing shall be as per relevant IS.

II. CONTROL & RELAY PANELS

TECHNICAL SPECS OF 132 KV C&R PANELS
SUPPLEMENT IV
S
N
o

Description

Make

Typ
e

Quantity/Pa
nel

132 KV
BILL OF MATERIAL TYPE 132 KV TRANSFORMER CONTROL & RELAY
PANEL
Simplex/Duplex(as per site) Panel cubicle with degree of protection not less than
IP31.
Earth bus bar 25x6 sq. mm
perforated copper with threaded
holes at a gap of 50 mm with the
As required
provision of bolts and nuts for
connection with cable armours and
mounted equipment
Terminal block with shorting,
disconnecting and testing facilities for
As required
CT circuits.
Terminal block with, disconnecting
As required
and testing facility for VT circuits.
Terminal Blocks for other control and
As required
protection wiring
Terminal Block Covers for Terminal
As required
Block items above
Extra terminals distributed uniformly
20%
on all terminals blocks
1100V FRLS grade single core
stranded copper conductor wires with
As required
PVC insulation for all Current
transformers circuits: One 2.5 sq. mm
H-v
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

copper per lead.

1100V FRLS grade single core

stranded copper conductor wires with
PVC insulation for all voltage
transformers circuits for energy
meters : two 2.5 sq. mm copper per
lead.
1100V FRLS grade single core
stranded copper conductor wires with
PVC insulation for all other circuits :
1.5 sq. mm copper per lead.
1100V FRLS, PVC insulated 2.5 sq.
mm stranded copper wire (green) for
earthing of all current free metallic
parts of all mounted equipment (i.e.
metallic cases of relays, instruments
and other panel mounted equipment
including gland plate)

As required

As required

As required

CONTROL PANEL approved by CEA/CDPF Make.

METERING DEVICE
CIRCUIT LABEL
MIMIC DIAGRAM
AMMETER-DIGITAL 96x96 mm
(0.5 ACCY)
MW METER-DIGITIAL 96x96 mm
(0.5 ACCY)
MVAR METER-DIGITIAL 96x96
mm (0.5 ACCY)
TRIVECTOR METER (0.2S ACCY)
DLMS COMPLIANT WITH
COMMUNICATION PORT TYPE
RSG-485
TEST TERMINAL BLOCK

Reputed make
Reputed make

1
1
3
1
1

1
1

CONTROL DEVICE
BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH
ISOLATOR CONTROL SWITCH
TRIP TRANSFER SWITCH
SYNCHRONIZING SELECTOR
SWITCH
SYNCHRONIZING SOCKET

1
7
1
1
1
H-vi

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

LOCAL/REMOTE SWITCH

INDICATION
3 POSITION SEMAPHORE
INDICATOR FOR CIRCUIT
BREAKER
3 POSITION SEMAPHORE
INDICATOR FOR ISOLATOR
INDICATING LED LAMP FOR
BREAKER FUNCTIONS
INDICATING LED LAMP FOR DC
FAIL
PUSH BUTTON FOR
ANNUNCIATION
ACCEPT/RESET/TEST
PUSH BUTTON FOR DC FAIL
ACCEPT/TEST
PUSH BUTTON FOR DC
HEALTHY CHECK
ANNUNCIATOR-24 WINDOWMICROPROCESSOR

1
7
4
2
3
2
2
1

PROTECTION RELAYS
NUMERICAL COMMUNICABLE
TRANSFORMER DIFFERENTIAL
RELAY WITH BUILT IN
OVERFLUXING, OVERLOAD
PROTECTION WITH 61850
COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL
NUMERICAL COMMUNICABLE
DIRECTIONAL 3 O/C AND 1 E/F
RELAY WITH 61850
COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL
(HV)
NUMERICAL COMMUNICABLE
RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT
RELAY WITH 61850
COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL
(HV)
METROSIL SURGE DIVERTERS
FOR REF
LOCAL BREAKER BACKUP
PROTECTION RELAY (STATIC)

1
1

VOLTAGE SELECTION RELAY

2
H-vii

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

HIGH SPEED TRIPPING RELAY

(MANUAL & ELECTRICAL
RESET) TRIPPING RELAY
TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION
RELAY

1 SET
2

DC SUPERVISION RELAY

CT SWITCHING RELAYS

2
6 No for 3Phase
Transformer
Unit and 18
No for three
1-Phase
Transformer
Banks

HAND RESET AUXILIARY

RELAY

ADDITIONAL AUXILIARY
RELAYS
CONTACT MULTIPLIER RELAY
(CMR)
TEST PLUG-MPG

AS
REQUIRED

7
2

MOUNTED INSIDE
CUBICLE ILLUMINATION LAMP
(LED)
MULTI-FUNCTION
TRANSDUCER
MCB
DOOR LIMIT SWITCH
BELL AND HOOTER
THERMOSTAT
SPACE HEATER-230V AC, 60 W
PLUG & SOCKET (COMBO OF
15/5A)

1
AS PER
SITE
1 SET
1
1 EACH
1
1
1
AS
REQUIRED

FUSES, LINKS

Note : 1. For specifications of above items please refer the Technical Speicification of
the NIT
2. Foundation channels, bolts, vibration dampers, special cables for interconnection
between Event Logger, Disturbance Recorder and external equipment, inter-panel
bus wires and all other accessories, special tools, spare parts, pamphlets, instruction,
operation and maintenance manuals for all equipment shall be deemed to be included
H-viii
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

in this BoM

SUPPLEMENT V
S
N
o

Description

Make

Typ
e

132 KV LEVEL
132 KV FEEDER CONTROL & RELAY PANEL
Duplex Panel cubicle with degree of protection not less than IP31.
Earth bus bar 25x6 sq. mm
perforated copper with threaded
holes at a gap of 50 mm with the
provision of bolts and nuts for
connection with cable armours and
mounted equipment
Terminal
block
with
shorting,
disconnecting and testing facilities for
CT circuits.
Terminal block with, disconnecting and
testing facility for VT circuits.
Terminal Blocks for other control and
protection wiring
Terminal Block Covers for Terminal
Block items above
Extra terminals distributed uniformly on
all terminals blocks
1100V FRLS grade single core stranded
copper conductor wires with PVC
insulation for all Current transformers
circuits: One 2.5 sq. mm copper per
lead.
1100V FRLS grade single core stranded
copper conductor wires with PVC
insulation for all voltage transformers
circuits for energy meters : two 2.5 sq.
mm copper per lead.
1100V FRLS grade single core stranded
copper conductor wires with PVC
insulation for all other circuits : 1.5 sq.
mm copper per lead.
H-ix
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

Quantity/Pa
nel

As required

As required
As required
As required
As required
20%

As required

As required

As required

1100V FRLS, PVC insulated 2.5 sq.

mm stranded copper wire (green) for
earthing of all current free metallic parts
of all mounted equipment (i.e. metallic
cases of relays, instruments and other
panel mounted equipment including
gland plate)
CONTROL PANEL
METERING DEVICE
CIRCUIT LABEL
MIMIC DIAGRAM
AMMETER-DIGITAL 95x95 mm (0.5
ACCY)
VOLTMETER-DIGITAL 95x95 mm
(0.5 ACCY)
VOLTMETER SELECTOR SWITCH
FREQUENCY METER 95x95 mm (0.5
ACCY)
MW METER-DIGITIAL 95x95 mm
(0.5 ACCY)
MVAR METER-DIGITIAL 95x95 mm
(0.5 ACCY)
TRIVECTOR METER (0.2S ACCY)
DLMS COMPLIANT WITH
COMMUNICATION PORT TYPE
RSG-485
TEST TERMINAL BLOCK

As required

Reputed make
Reputed make

3
1
1
1
1
1

1
1

CONTROL DEVICE
BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH
ISOLATOR CONTROL SWITCH
TRIP TRANSFER SWITCH
SYNCHRONIZING SELECTOR
SWITCH
AUTO-RECLOSE SELECTOR
SWITCH
SYNCHRONIZING SOCKET
CHECK SYNCHRONIZING/DLC
SELECTOR SWITCH
CARRIER SELECTOR SWITCH
LOCAL/REMOTE SWITCH

1
1

1
4
1
1
1
BCH
MAKE/REPUTED
SWITRON/KAYC
EE/RECOM

1
1
1
1

INDICATION
H-x
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

3 POSITION SEMAPHORE
INDICATOR FOR CIRCUIT
BREAKER
3 POSITION SEMAPHORE
INDICATOR FOR ISOLATOR
3 POSITION SEMAPHORE
INDICATOR FOR ES
INDICATINGLED LED LAMP FOR
BREAKER FUNCTIONS
INDICATING LED LAMP FOR DC
FAIL (For two battery bank)
PUSH BUTTON FOR
ANNUNCIATION
ACCEPT/RESET/TEST
PUSH BUTTON FOR DC FAIL
ACCEPT/TEST
PUSH BUTTON FOR DC HEALTHY
CHECK
ANNUNCIATOR-24 WINDOWMICROPROCESSOR

1
4
3
4
2
3
2
2
1

PROTECTION RELAYS
NUMERICAL DISTANCE
PROTECTION RELAY WITH 61850
COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL
AND FOLLOWING ARE THE BUILT
IN FEATURES
Four zones of impedance measurement
with three zones set forward and one
zone set reverse
Polygonal characteristics
Switch onto fault
Power swing blocking
VT supervision (Fuse failure protection)
Weak-end in feed feature
Broken conductor detection
Three phase tripping
Auto-Recloser with check
synchronizing
Under and over voltage element
Disturbance recorder
Fault locator
Event logger

H-xi
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

Over Voltage
Under and Over Frequency
Breaker Failure function
NUMERICAL COMMUNICABLE
DIRECTIONAL 3 O/C AND 1 E/F
RELAY WITH HIGHSET FOR
BACKUP WITH 61850
COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL
LOCAL BREAKER BACKUP
PROTECTION (STATIC)

VOLTAGE SELECTION RELAY

HIGH SPEED TRIPPING RELAY

(MANUAL & ELECTRICAL RESET)
TRIPPING RELAY
TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION
RELAY

1
2

DC SUPERVISION RELAY

CT SWITCHING RELAYS

SELF RESET TRIP RELAY

1
AS
REQUIRED

ADDITIONAL AUXILIARY RELAY

CONTACT MULTIPLIER RELAY
(CMR)
TEST PLUG-MPG

7
2

MOUNTED INSIDE
CUBICLE ILLUMINATION LAMP
(LED)

1
AS PER
SITE
1 SET
1
1
1
1

MULTI-FUNCTION TRANSDUCER
MCB
DOOR LIMIT SWITCH
BELL AND HOOTER
THERMOSTAT
SPACE HEATER-230V AC, 60 W
PLUG & SOCKET(COMBO OF
15/5A)

1
AS
REQUIRED

FUSES, LINKS

H-xii
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

1. For specifications of above items please refer the Technical Speicification of the
NIT
2. Foundation channels, bolts, vibration dampers, special cables for interconnection
between Event Logger, Disturbance Recorder and external equipment, inter-panel
bus wires and all other accessories, special tools, spare parts, pamphlets, instruction,
operation and maintenance manuals for all equipment shall be deemed to be
included in this BoM

SUPPLEMENT VI
S
N
o

Description

Make

Typ
e

Quantity/Pa
nel

132 KV BUS COUPLER CONTROL & RELAY PANEL

132 KV BUS COUPLER CONTROL & RELAY PANEL WITH NUMERICAL
LOW IMPEDANCE BUS BAR PROTECTION SCHEME
CONTROL PANEL
METERING DEVICE
CIRCUIT LABEL
1
Reputed make
MIMIC DIAGRAM
1
Reputed make
AMMETER-DIGITAL 96x96 mm
3
(0.5 ACCY)
VOLTMETER-DIGITAL 96x96 mm
2
(0.5 ACCY)
VOLTMETER SELECTOR SWITCH
2
FREQUENCY METER 96x96 mm
2
(0.5 ACCY)
POWER FACTOR METER 96x96
1
mm (0.5 ACCY)
VOLTAGE RECORDER
2
FREQUENCY RECORDER
2
CONTROL DEVICE
BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH
ISOLATOR CONTROL SWITCH
TRIP TRANSFER SWITCH

1
2
1
H-xiii

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

SYNCHRONIZING SELECTOR
SWITCH
BUS BAR PROTECTION SWITCH
(IN/OUT)
SYNCHRONIZING SOCKET

1
1
1

INDICATION
3 POSITION SEMAPHORE
INDICATOR FOR CIRCUIT
BREAKER
3 POSITION SEMAPHORE
INDICATOR FOR ISOLATOR
3 POSITION SEMAPHORE
INDICATOR FOR ES
INDICATING LED LAMP FOR
BREAKER FUNCTIONS
INDICATING LED LAMP FOR DC
FAIL
INDICATING LED LAMPS FOR
BUS BAR PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS
PUSH BUTTON FOR
ANNUNCIATION
ACCEPT/RESET/TEST
PUSH BUTTON FOR DC FAIL
ACCEPT/TEST
PUSH BUTTON FOR AC FAIL
ACCEPT/TEST
PUSH BUTTON FOR DC
HEALTHY CHECK
ANNUNCIATOR-12 WINDOWMICROPROCESSOR

1
2
4
4
2
6

3
2
2
2
1

PROTECTION RELAYS WITH LOW IMPEDANCE

NUMERICAL LOW IMPEDANCE
BUS BAR PROTECTION SCHEME
TO CATER FOR BUS
ARRANGEMENT FOR MAIN I,
MAIN II WITH BYPASS
ARRANGEMENT WITH BUILT IN
CT SWITCHING ARANGEMENT.
BUILT IN CT RATIO
CORRECTION THROUGH
SOFTWARE AND WITH BUILT IN
LBB PROTECTION AND 61850
H-xiv
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

3 (MAIN,
TRANSFER
AND
CHECK)

COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL

NUMERICAL COMMUNICABLE
DIRECTIONAL 3 O/C AND 1 E/F
RELAY WITH 61850
COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL
HIGH SPEED TRIPPING RELAY
FOR BUS BAR(MANUAL &
ELECTRICAL RESET) TRIPPING
RELAY
TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION
RELAY

1 SET

DC SUPERVISION RELAY

AC SUPERVISION RELAY

ADDITIONAL AUXILIARY
RELAY
CONTACT MULTIPLIER RELAY
(CMR)

AS
REQUIRED
5

MOUNTED INSIDE
CUBICLE ILLUMINATION LAMP
(LED)
MULTI-FUNCTION TRANSDUCER
MCB
DOOR LIMIT SWITCH
BELL, BUZZER AND HOOTER
THERMOSTAT
SPACE HEATER-230V AC, 60 W
PLUG & SOCKET (COMBO OF
15/5A)

1
2
1 SET
1
1 EACH
1
1
1
AS
REQUIRED

FUSES, LINKS

Note : 1. For specifications of above items please refer the Technical Speicification of
the NIT

H-xv
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

2. Foundation channels, bolts, vibration dampers, special cables for interconnection

between Event Logger, Disturbance Recorder and external equipment, inter-panel bus
wires and all other accessories, special tools, spare parts, pamphlets, instruction,
operation and maintenance manuals for all equipment shall be deemed to be included
in this BoM
SUPPLEMENT VII
S
N
o

Description

Make

Typ
e

Quantity/Pa
nel

33 KV LEVEL
33 KV FEEDER CONTROL & RELAY PANEL
Simplex Type Panel cubicle with degree of protection not less than IP31.
Earth bus bar 25x6 sq. mm perforated
copper with threaded holes at a gap of
50 mm with the provision of bolts and
nuts for connection with cable armours
and mounted equipment
Terminal
block
with
shorting,
disconnecting and testing facilities for CT
circuits.
Terminal block with, disconnecting and
testing facility for VT circuits.
Terminal Blocks for other control and
protection wiring
Terminal Block Covers for Terminal
Block items above
Extra terminals distributed uniformly on
all terminals blocks
1100V FRLS grade single core stranded
copper conductor wires with PVC
insulation for all Current transformers
circuits: One 2.5 sq. mm copper per lead.
1100V FRLS grade single core stranded
copper conductor wires with PVC
insulation for all voltage transformers
circuits for energy meters : two 2.5 sq.
mm copper per lead.
1100V FRLS grade single core stranded
copper conductor wires with PVC
insulation for all other circuits : 1.5 sq.
mm copper per lead.
H-xvi
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

As required

As required
As required
As required
As required
20%

As required

As required

As required

1100V FRLS, PVC insulated 2.5 sq. mm

stranded copper wire (green) for earthing
of all current free metallic parts of all
mounted equipment (i.e. metallic cases
of relays, instruments and other panel
mounted equipment including gland
plate)
CONTROL PANEL
METERING DEVICE
CIRCUIT LABEL
MIMIC DIAGRAM
AMMETER-DIGITAL 96x96 mm (0.5
ACCY)
MW METER-DIGITIAL 96x96 mm (0.5
ACCY)
MVAR METER-DIGITIAL 96x96 mm
(0.5 ACCY)
TRIVECTOR METER (0.2S ACCY)
DLMS COMPLIANT WITH
COMMUNICATION PORT TYPE RSG485
TEST TERMINAL BLOCK

As required

Reputed make
Reputed make

CONTROL DEVICE
BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH
TRIP TRANSFER SWITCH
LOCAL/REMOTE SWITCH

1
1
3
1
1

1
1

1
1
1

INDICATION
3 POSITION SEMAPHORE
INDICATOR FOR CIRCUIT
BREAKER
3 POSITION SEMAPHORE
INDICATOR FOR ISOLATOR
3 POSITION SEMAPHORE
INDICATOR FOR ES
INDICATING LED LAMP FOR
BREAKER FUNCTIONS
INDICATING LED LAMP FOR DC
FAIL (For two battery bank)
PUSH BUTTON FOR
ANNUNCIATION
ACCEPT/RESET/TEST

1
4
3
4
2
3

H-xvii
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

PUSH BUTTON FOR DC FAIL

ACCEPT/TEST
PUSH BUTTON FOR DC HEALTHY
CHECK
ANNUNCIATOR-12 WINDOWMICROPROCESSOR
PROTECTION RELAYS
NUMERICAL COMMUNICABLE
DIRECTIONAL 3 O/C AND 1 E/F
RELAY WITH HIGHSET WITH 61850
COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL

2
2
1

VOLTAGE SELECTION RELAY

HIGH SPEED TRIPPING RELAY

(MANUAL & ELECTRICAL RESET)
TRIPPING RELAY

TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION RELAY

DC SUPERVISION RELAY

AUXILIARY RELAY
df/dt AND UNDER-FREQUENCY
RELAY
ADDITIONAL AUXILIARY RELAY
CONTACT MULTIPLIER RELAY
(CMR)

AS
REQUIRED
1 (required
for only 2
No panels)
AS
REQUIRED
7

MOUNTED INSIDE
CUBICLE ILLUMINATION LAMP
(LED)
MULTI-FUNCTION TRANSDUCER
MCB
DOOR LIMIT SWITCH
BELL AND HOOTER
THERMOSTAT
SPACE HEATER-230V AC, 60 W
PLUG & SOCKET (COMBO OF 15/5
A)

1
1
1 SET
1
1
1
1
1
AS
REQUIRED

FUSES, LINKS
H-xviii
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

Note: 1. For specifications of above items please refer the Technical Specification of
the NIT
2. Foundation channels, bolts, vibration dampers, special cables for interconnection
between Event Logger, Disturbance Recorder and external equipment, inter-panel
bus wires and all other accessories, special tools, spare parts, pamphlets,
instruction, operation and maintenance manuals for all equipment shall be deemed
to be included in this BoM

SUPPLEMENT VIII
S
N
o

Description

Make

Type

Quantity/Pa
nel

33 KV LEVEL
33 KV TRANSFORMER CONTROL & RELAY PANEL
Simplex Panel cubicle with degree of protection not less than IP31.
Earth bus bar 25x6 sq. mm
perforated copper with threaded
holes at a gap of 50 mm with the
provision of bolts and nuts for
connection with cable armours
and mounted equipment
Terminal block with shorting,
disconnecting and testing facilities
for CT circuits.
Terminal block with, disconnecting
and testing facility for VT circuits.
Terminal Blocks for other control
and protection wiring
Terminal Block Covers for Terminal
Block items above
Extra terminals distributed uniformly
on all terminals blocks
1100V FRLS grade single core
stranded copper conductor wires
with PVC insulation for all Current
transformers circuits: One 2.5 sq.
mm copper per lead.
1100V FRLS grade single core
stranded copper conductor wires
with PVC insulation for all voltage
transformers circuits for energy

As required

As required
As required
As required
As required
20%

As required

As required

H-xix
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

meters : two 2.5 sq. mm copper per

lead.
1100V FRLS grade single core
stranded copper conductor wires
with PVC insulation for all other
circuits : 1.5 sq. mm copper per
lead.
1100V FRLS, PVC insulated 2.5 sq.
mm stranded copper wire (green) for
earthing of all current free metallic
parts of all mounted equipment (i.e.
metallic cases of relays, instruments
and other panel mounted equipment
including gland plate)
CONTROL PANEL
METERING DEVICE
CIRCUIT LABEL
MIMIC DIAGRAM
AMMETER-DIGITAL 96x96 mm
(0.5 ACCY)
MW METER-DIGITIAL 96x96 mm
(0.5 ACCY)
MVAR METER-DIGITIAL 96x96
mm (0.5 ACCY)
TRIVECTOR METER (0.2S
ACCY) DLMS COMPLIANT
WITH COMMUNICATION PORT
TYPE RSG-485
TEST TERMINAL BLOCK

As required

As required

Reputed make
Reputed make

1
1
3
1
1

1
1

CONTROL DEVICE
BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH
TRIP TRANSFER SWITCH
LOCAL/REMOTE SWITCH

1
1
1

INDICATION
3 POSITION SEMAPHORE
INDICATOR FOR CIRCUIT
BREAKER
3 POSITION SEMAPHORE
INDICATOR FOR ISOLATOR
3 POSITION SEMAPHORE

1
4
3
H-xx

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

INDICATOR FOR ES
INDICATING LED LAMP FOR
BREAKER FUNCTIONS
INDICATING LED LAMP FOR
DC FAIL
PUSH BUTTON FOR
ANNUNCIATION
ACCEPT/RESET/TEST
PUSH BUTTON FOR DC FAIL
ACCEPT/TEST
PUSH BUTTON FOR DC
HEALTHY CHECK
ANNUNCIATOR-18 WINDOWMICROPROCESSOR

4
2
3
2
2
1

PROTECTION RELAYS
NUMERICAL COMMUNICABLE
DIRECTIONAL 3 O/C AND 1 E/F
RELAY WITH HIGHSET WITH
61850 COMMUNICATION
PROTOCOL
NUMERICAL COMMUNICABLE
RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT
RELAY WITH 61850
COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL
(LV)
METROSIL SURGE DIVERTERS
FOR REF

VOLTAGE SELECTION RELAY

HIGH SPEED TRIPPING RELAY

(MANUAL & ELECTRICAL
RESET) TRIPPING RELAY
TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION
RELAY

1 SET
2

DC SUPERVISION RELAY

2
6 No for 3Phase
Transformer
Unit and 18
No for three
1-Phase
Transformer
Banks

AUXILIARY RELAYS

H-xxi
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

ADDITIONAL AUXILIARY
RELAYS
CONTACT MULTIPLIER RELAY
(CMR)

AS
REQUIRED
7

MOUNTED INSIDE
CUBICLE ILLUMINATION LAMP
(LED)
MULTI-FUNCTION
TRANSDUCER
MCB
DOOR LIMIT SWITCH
THERMOSTAT
SPACE HEATER-230V AC, 60 W
PLUG & SOCKET (COMBO
15/5A)

1
AS PER
SITE
1 SET
1
1
1
1
AS
REQUIRED

FUSES, LINKS

Note 1. For specifications of above items please refer the Technical Speicification of
the NIT
2. Foundation channels, bolts, vibration dampers, special cables for interconnection
between Event Logger, Disturbance Recorder and external equipment, inter-panel
bus wires and all other accessories, special tools, spare parts, pamphlets, instruction,
operation and maintenance manuals for all equipment shall be deemed to be included
in this BoM
SUPPLEMENT IX
S
N
o

Description

Make

Typ
e

Quantity/Pa
nel

33 KV BUS COUPLER CONTROL & RELAY PANEL

33 KV BUS COUPLER CONTROL & RELAY PANEL - No'S
Simplex Panel cubicle with degree of protection not less than IP31.
Earth bus bar 25x6 sq. mm
perforated copper with threaded
holes at a gap of 50 mm with the
As required
provision of bolts and nuts for
connection with cable armours and
mounted equipment
H-xxii
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

Terminal
block
with
shorting,
disconnecting and testing facilities for
CT circuits.
Terminal block with, disconnecting and
testing facility for VT circuits.
Terminal Blocks for other control and
protection wiring
Terminal Block Covers for Terminal
Block items above
1100V FRLS grade single core
stranded copper conductor wires with
PVC insulation for all Current
transformers circuits: One 2.5 sq. mm
copper per lead.
1100V FRLS grade single core
stranded copper conductor wires with
PVC insulation for all voltage
transformers circuits for energy meters
: two 2.5 sq. mm copper per lead.
1100V FRLS grade single core
stranded copper conductor wires with
PVC insulation for all other circuits :
1.5 sq. mm copper per lead.
1100V FRLS, PVC insulated 2.5 sq.
mm stranded copper wire (green) for
earthing of all current free metallic
parts of all mounted equipment (i.e.
metallic cases of relays, instruments
and other panel mounted equipment
including gland plate)
CONTROL PANEL
METERING DEVICE
CIRCUIT LABEL
MIMIC DIAGRAM
AMMETER-DIGITAL 96x96 mm (0.5
ACCY)
VOLTMETER-DIGITAL 96x96 mm
(0.5 ACCY)
VOLTMETER SELECTOR SWITCH
FREQUENCY METER 96x96 mm
(0.5 ACCY)
POWER FACTOR METER 96x96 mm
(0.5 ACCY)
VOLTAGE RECORDER
FREQUENCY RECORDER

As required
As required
As required
As required

As required

As required

As required

As required

Reputed make
Reputed make

H-xxiii
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

1
1
3
2
2
1
1
1
1

CONTROL DEVICE
BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH
LOCAL/REMOTE SWITCH

1
1

INDICATION
3 POSITION SEMAPHORE
INDICATOR FOR CIRCUIT
BREAKER
3 POSITION SEMAPHORE
INDICATOR FOR ISOLATOR
3 POSITION SEMAPHORE
INDICATOR FOR ES
INDICATING LED LAMP FOR
BREAKER FUNCTIONS
INDICATING LED LAMP FOR DC
FAIL
INDICATING LED LAMPS FOR
BUS BAR PROTECTION
FUNCTIONS
PUSH BUTTON FOR
ANNUNCIATION
ACCEPT/RESET/TEST
PUSH BUTTON FOR DC FAIL
ACCEPT/TEST
PUSH BUTTON FOR AC FAIL
ACCEPT/TEST
PUSH BUTTON FOR DC HEALTHY
CHECK
ANNUNCIATOR-12 WINDOWMICROPROCESSOR

1
2
4
4
2
6

3
2
2
2
1

PROTECTION RELAYS
NUMERICAL COMMUNICABLE
DIRECTIONAL 3 O/C AND 1 E/F
RELAY WITH HIGHSET WITH
61850 COMMUNICATION
PROTOCOL
HIGH SPEED TRIPPING RELAY
(MANUAL & ELECTRICAL RESET)
TRIPPING RELAY
TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION
RELAY

1
2

H-xxiv
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

HIGH SPEED TRIPPING RELAY

FOR BUS BAR (MANUAL &
ELECTRICAL RESET)

1 SET

DC SUPERVISION RELAY

AC SUPERVISION RELAY

ADDITIONAL AUXILIARY
RELAYS
CONTACT MULTIPLIER RELAY
(CMR)

AS
REQUIRED
5

MOUNTED INSIDE
CUBICLE ILLUMINATION LAMP
(LED)

1
AS PER
SITE
1 SET
1
1 EACH
1
1

MULTI-FUNCTION TRANSDUCER
MCB
DOOR LIMIT SWITCH
BELL, BUZZER AND HOOTER
THERMOSTAT
SPACE HEATER-230V AC, 60 W
PLUG & SOCKET( COMBO OF
15/5A)

1
AS
REQUIRED

FUSES, LINKS

Note : 1. For specifications of above items please refer the Technical Speicification
of the NIT
2. Foundation channels, bolts, vibration dampers, special cables for
interconnection between Event Logger, Disturbance Recorder and external
equipment, inter-panel bus wires and all other accessories, special tools, spare
parts, pamphlets, instruction, operation and maintenance manuals for all
equipment shall be deemed to be included in this BoM
SUPPLEMENT X
S
Quantity/Pa
N Description
Make
Type
nel
o
33 KV LEVEL
33 KV AUXILIARY TRANSFORMER CONTROL & RELAY PANEL
Simplex Panel cubicle with degree of protection not less than IP31.
H-xxv
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

Earth bus bar 25x6 sq. mm perforated

copper with threaded holes at a gap of 50
mm with the provision of bolts and nuts
for connection with cable armours and
mounted equipment
Terminal block with shorting, disconnecting
and testing facilities for CT circuits.

As required

As required

Terminal block with, disconnecting and

testing facility for VT circuits.
Terminal Blocks for other control and
protection wiring
Terminal Block Covers for Terminal Block
items above
Extra terminals distributed uniformly on all
terminals blocks
1100V FRLS grade single core stranded
copper conductor wires with PVC
insulation for all Current transformers
circuits: One 2.5 sq. mm copper per lead.
1100V FRLS grade single core stranded
copper conductor wires with PVC
insulation for all voltage transformers
circuits for energy meters : two 2.5 sq. mm
copper per lead.
1100V FRLS grade single core stranded
copper conductor wires with PVC
insulation for all other circuits : 1.5 sq. mm
copper per lead.
1100V FRLS, PVC insulated 2.5 sq. mm
stranded copper wire (green) for earthing of
all current free metallic parts of all mounted
equipment (i.e. metallic cases of relays,
instruments and other panel mounted
equipment including gland plate)
METERING DEVICE
CIRCUIT LABEL
MIMIC DIAGRAM
AMMETER-DIGITAL 96x96 mm (0.5
ACCY)
MW METER-DIGITIAL 96x96 mm (0.5
ACCY)
MVAR METER-DIGITIAL 96x96 mm
(0.5 ACCY)
H-xxvi
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

As required
As required
As required
20%

As required

As required

As required

As required

Reputed make
Reputed make

1
1
3
1
1

TRIVECTOR METER (0.2S ACCY)

DLMS COMPLIANT WITH
COMMUNICATION PORT TYPE RSG485

TEST TERMINAL BLOCK

CONTROL DEVICE
BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH
TRIP TRANSFER SWITCH
LOCAL/REMOTE SWITCH

1
1
1

INDICATION
3 POSITION SEMAPHORE INDICATOR
FOR CIRCUIT BREAKER
3 POSITION SEMAPHORE INDICATOR
FOR ISOLATOR
3 POSITION SEMAPHORE INDICATOR
FOR ES
INDICATING LED LAMP FOR
BREAKER FUNCTIONS
INDICATING LED LAMP FOR DC FAIL
PUSH BUTTON FOR ANNUNCIATION
ACCEPT/RESET/TEST
PUSH BUTTON FOR DC FAIL
ACCEPT/TEST
PUSH BUTTON FOR DC HEALTHY
CHECK
ANNUNCIATOR-12 WINDOWMICROPROCESSOR
PROTECTION RELAYS
NUMERICAL COMMUNICABLE
DIRECTIONAL 3 O/C AND 1 E/F
RELAY WITH HIGHSET WITH 61850
COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL

1
4
3
4
2
3
2
2
1

VOLTAGE SELECTION RELAY

HIGH SPEED TRIPPING RELAY

1 SET

TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION RELAY

H-xxvii
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

DC SUPERVISION RELAY

2
AS
REQUIRED
7

ADDITIONAL AUXILIARY RELAYS

CONTACT MULTIPLIER RELAY (CMR)
MOUNTED INSIDE

CUBICLE ILLUMINATION LAMP (LED)

AS PER
SITE
1 set
1
1 EACH
1
1
1
AS
REQUIRED

MULTI-FUNCTION TRANSDUCER
MCB
DOOR LIMIT SWITCH
BELL, BUZZER AND HOOTER
THERMOSTAT
SPACE HEATER-230V AC, 60 W
PLUG & SOCKET
FUSES, LINKS

Note : 1. For specifications of above items please refer the Technical Specification of the
NIT
2. Foundation channels, bolts, vibration dampers, special cables for interconnection
between Event Logger, Disturbance Recorder and external equipment, inter-panel bus
wires and all other accessories, special tools, spare parts, pamphlets, instruction,
operation and maintenance manuals for all equipment shall be deemed to be included
in this BoM

III.
(A)

SUBSTATION AUXILIARIES
Salient features of maintenance free battery:

1.

Type of battery

Maintenance free sealed with high

discharging performance indoor type
station battery.
48 Deg. C

2.
3.

Design ambient temp.

Rating
i)
Ampere hour capacity at 10 hour 300 AH minimum at 10 Hr. rate to an
discharge
rate
(electrolyte end cell voltage of 1.75 V
temperature 27 deg. C)
ii)
Rated voltage of battery
a)
Nominal voltage
220 V
H-xxviii

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

4.

5.

6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

11.

b)
Maximum voltage
c)
Minimum voltage
Number of cells

258.5 V (2.35 V per Cell)

236.5 V(2.15 V per Cell)
110 (May vary depending upon the
voltage of each cell at fully charged
condition to maintain the nominal
voltage)
Discharge current and cell end voltage of Amperes
Cell end voltage
battery
a)
1 Minute load
345 A
1.85
b)
2 Hr. emergency load
100 A
1.85
c)
10 Hr. continuous load without 30 A
1.75
trickle or boost charging
Nominal cell voltage
2 Volts
Ampere hour efficiency
90% minimum
Watt hour efficiency
80% minimum
Float charge current
30 A
Boost charge current
40 A (Shall not be less than the boost
charge current plus station load of
30A)
Time required for boost charging from
8-10 Hours
discharge
Constructional features

1.

Container and cover material

2.
3.

Thickness
Separator type
Material

4.

5.

Thickness
Electrolyte

6.
7.
8.
9.

Specific gravity of electrolyte at 27 deg.

(with cells fully discharged)
Specific gravity of fully charged cell
Type of positive plates
Type of negative plates
Type of vent plug

10.
11.
12.
13.

Rack material
Self discharge rate of battery
Life of the battery
Terminals

H-xxix
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

Flame retardant special grade poly

propylene copolymer
2-3 mm.
Highly absorbent glass mat separator
Spun glass microporous
matrix.
3 mm (approx)
Prepared from the battery grade
sulphuric acid conforming to IS: 2661961.
1.1
1.2+ 0.005 corrected to 27 Deg. C
Lead Calcium Tin Grid.
Lead Calcium Tin Alloy Grid.
Explosion proof, pressure regulating
and self-resealing safety vent plugs.
Mild steel
Less than 0.5% capacity per week.
20 years
Integral lead terminal with solid
copper core.

14.

(B)

Connectors

Heavy duty, lead plated copper

connectors.

Battery charger
Float-cum-Boost
charger
Solid state Full wave Controlled Rectifier
(Preferably half Controlled)
50 Hz, 415V with
50 Hz, 415Vwith
15% to +10%
15% to +10%
variation
variation
2.15 to 2.25 V per
2.3 to 2.35 V per cell
cell
30A
30 A
1%
1%
0- 400 V
0-400 V
0-100A
0-100A
Less than 5%
Less than 5%
+ 1%
+ 1%
Float charger

i)

Type

ii)

AC input

iii)

DC output

iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
ix)

Ripple content
DC voltmeter
DC Ammeter
Voltage ripple content
Voltage regulation
Blocking diode
PIV
Continuous rating

(C)
1.

2.

3.

4.

Min 600V
Min 100A

AC / DC DISTRIBUTION BOARD
AC System
i)
Voltage
ii)
Frequency
iii)
Combined variation
iv)
Fault level
DC system
i)
System voltage
ii)
Fault level
Control supply voltage
i)
Trip and closing coils
ii)
Spring charging motors
Busbar
Continuous Current Rating
a) AC distribution board

b) DC distribution Board

3 Phase, 4 wire, solidly earthed

415 volts with -15% to +10%
50 Hz 5%
-15% to +10% absolute sum in voltage &
frequency.
20 kA(rms)
2 wire unearthed
220V 10%
5 kA
220V DC
220V DC

Main Board 1000 Amp.

AC distribution Board 630 Amp.
Lighting Board 400 Amp.
Air conditioning / Central Heating Board 400 Amp.
250 Amp.
H-xxx

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

iii)
5.

6.

Short time current rating (1 sec)

Momentary current rating
One minute power frequency
withstand
i)
Power Circuits
ii)
Control circuit
Air circuit breaker
i)
Voltage
ii)
Frequency
iii)
Short Circuit performance
category
iv)
Short circuit breaking current
v)

Short time withstand current

for 1 sec
vi)
Making capacity
vii)
Operating Mechanism
viii) Number of Auxiliary
contacts
ix)
Rating of auxiliary contacts
x)
Temperature rise
xi)
Mechanical Life
Moulded Case Circuit Breaker
i)
No. of poles
ii)
Voltage & Frequency

20 kArms
50 kA peak

2.5 kV (rms)
2.5 kV (rms)
3 Phase 415 V + 10%
50 Hz + 5%
P2
20 kA (rms)
20 kA
2.5 times the breaking capacity
Motor operated, trip free and antipumping
6 NO, 6 NC

10 Amp. at 240 V AC
As per IS: 2516
As per IS: 2516
7.
AC System
DC System
4
2
415 V, -15% to +10%
50 Hz5%
iii)
Rated operating duty
P2
P2
iv)
Short circuit breaking current 20 kA(rms) for 1 sec. 5kA
v)
Short circuit making current 50 kAp
vi)
No. of auxiliary contacts
2 NO+2 NC
2 NO+2 NC
8. Indicating meters
i)
Accuracy class
1.5
ii)
One minute power frequency 2 kV
withstand voltage.
9. Accuracy class of Energy meter
1.0
10. Current Transformers
i)
Type
Cast resin, Bar primary
ii)
Secondary current
1 Amp.
iii)
Voltage class and no. of
1100 V, 50 Hz
cores frequency
iv)
Class of insulation
E or better
v)
Accuracy class and burden
a) Accuracy class metering
Class 1, VA adequate for specific application
core of CT
but not less than 10.
b) Accuracy class protection
5 P 10, VA adequate for specific application
core of CT
but not less than 15.
H-xxxi
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

vi)
vii)
viii)

11.

12.

13.

14.

(D)

Short time current rating

Dynamic rating
One minute power frequency
withstand voltage
Voltage Transformers
i)
Type
ii)
Rated voltage
a) Primary
b) Secondary
iii)
Accuracy class and VA
burden
a) Metering
b) Protection
iv)
Method of connection
a) Primary
b) Secondary
v)
Rated voltage factor
vi)
Class of insulation
vii)
One minute power frequency
withstand voltage
Relay
i)
One minute power frequency
withstand voltage
Cubicle colour finish
i)
Interior
ii)
Exterior
Isolating Transformer
i)
Type
ii)
Rating
iii)
Voltage ratio
iv)
Number of phases
v)
Connection
vi)
Class of insulation
vii)
Impedance
viii) No. of taps & steps
ix)
Reference standard

20 kA (rms) for 1 sec.

50 kA (Peak)
2.5 kV (rms)

Cast Resin
415/3 V
110/3 V

1.0, 30 VA
3P, 30 VA
Star
Star
1.1 continuous, 1.5 or 30 sec.
E or better
2.5 kV (rms)

2.0 kV (rms)

Glossy white
Grey shade no. 692 of IS: 5
Dry type natural air cooled.
100 kVA
415/415 Volts
3
Dy N 1
B
4% 10%
5, 5% insteps of 2.5%
IS: 1180/IS: 2026

POWER & CONTROL CABLE

Specific Technical Requirements of Power & Control Cables shall be as per relevant
Clauses of Section Substation Auxiliaries of this Document.

H-xxxii
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

(E)

ii)

SUBSTATION STRUCTURE
Note:- i) The steel to be used for tower foundations, column structures, equipment
structuires and other allied works should be procured from reputed firms only viz
Sail,Tisco,Jindal steel and any other reputed firms approved by central govt. in case
of non availability with the vendors the procurement of the same shall be got
approved from Engineer-in-Chief/Competent authority.
All the equipment structure foundations both for 132KV as well as 33KV should be
bolts based instead of Stubs and the bolts should be grouted during laying of
foundations.
1.

TOWERS / COLUMNS AND ACCESSORIES

a)

Configuration

S/C Horizontal

b)

Span

As per layout drawing

c)

Tower type

do

i)

Normal span

do

ii)

Wind span

do

iii)

Weight span

do

d)

No. of sub-conductor per phase

As per requirement and to be

decided during detailed engineering

e)

Spacing between sub-conductors

-do-

f)

Bundle arrangement

Horizontal

g)

No. of ground wires

As per requirement and to be

decided during detailed engineering

Shielding angle

20 Deg.

i)

Column footing resistance

10 ohms

j)

Minimum ground clearances from

lowest point of power conductor

As per requirement and to be

decided during detailed engineering

k)

Provision for ground undulation and sag error

l)

Minimum phase-to-phase clearance As per requirement and to be

based on maximum permissible
decided during detailed engineering
H-xxxiii

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

+150 mm

switching surge over voltage of

2.5 p.u. between phase and ground (mm)
m)

Minimum vertical mid span clearance

between power conductor and ground
wire in still air (mm)

n)

Swing angles and minimum clearance from live parts to

tower body and cross arms
a)

Suspension insulator string in still air and when

deflected by wind upto 22 deg. (mm)

-do-

b)

Suspension insulator string when deflected

due to wind upto 44 deg. (mm)

-do-

c)

Jumper connection on tension towers in still air

-doand when deflected by wind upto 20 deg. From
Vertical (mm)
Jumper connections on tension towers when
-dodeflected by wind upto 40 deg. from vertical (mm)

d)

2.

g)

Pilot insulator strings on tension towers (mm)

-do-

h)

Minimum width of Right-of-way

-do-

i)

Minimum clearance for crossing over power

lines upto 400 kV (mm)

-do-

j)

Swing angle in degrees and clearance in mm of

Pilot string when deflected upto 15 degrees.

-do-

Maximum Working Tension

Conductor in approach span
Strung Conductor
Shield wire in sub station
Ground wire in approach span

i)
ii)
iii)
3.

-do-

Shall be based on sag tension

calculations for specified design
wind as per IS: 802.

Design Wind Pressure for areas under wind zone-2

i)

On columns, lightning mast, beams, insulator string

and flat surfaces upto 10 m height
ii) On conductor, shield wire and cylindrical Surfaces
up to 10 m height
H-xxxiv

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

563 N / m2
563 N /m2

4.

Drag coefficient,Cdt for steel structures

Solidity Ratio
Up to 0.05
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5 and above

5.

Gust response factor for structures (Gt) and for insulators (Gi)
Height above ground
in meters
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80

6.

7.

(F)

Gust response factor (GT) & (Gi)

1.92
2.20
2.30
2.40
2.48
2.55
2.62
2.69

Gust response factor for (Gc) for conductor/groundwire

Terrain
category

8.

Drag coefficient, Cdt

3.6
3.4
2.9
2.5
2.2
2.0

Height above
ground (M)
Up to10
20
40
60
80

Ruling span
upto 200
meter
2.05
2.44
2.76
2.97
3.19

Ruling span
300 meter
1.98
2.35
2.67
2.87
3.04

Member thickness (Minimum)

(mm)

i)

Angle sections for columns & chords (leg members,

ground wire peak member etc.)

ii)

Bracings & Redundant

Maximum tension under short circuit

FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENT

H-xxxv

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

To be calculate as per
IEC- 865

Technical Specifications of fire fighting equipments are as per latest version available
in the market.

(G)

DG SET
Specific Technical Particulars of DG Sets shall be as per latest version available in
the market .

IV ANCILLARY ITEMS
A.

EARTHING SYSTEM
Item

Size

Conductor above ground level and earthing leads for 65x8 mm

equipment structures, columns and other auxiliary
structures buildings.
Earthing leads for equipment earthing cable trenches, 65x8 mm flat
cable trays & cables.
Rod electrode
30 mm diameter
3000 mm
long rod
CI pipe electrode (in treated earth pit)
155 mm dia
12.7 mm thick
3.05 m long
Earthing for Motors
25x3 mm flat

B.

Material
Galvanized
Steel
Galvanized
steel
Mild Steel

CI pipe

Galvanised
Steel

MARSHALLING KIOSK
1.

Type

2.
3.
4.

No. of terminals
Thickness of sheet steel
Conductor for internal wiring

5.

Incoming supplies

6.

Outgoing supplies

Free standing floor mounting type or

pedestal type with downed or sloping
roof.
200
2.0 mm cold rolled/2.5 mm hot rolled.
1100 V grade, single core 2.5 sq.mm
stranded copper conductor PVC insulated
Two (2) nos., 415 V, 3 phase, 63Amps.
AC with auto-change over and MCB.
i)
Four (4) Nos., 16 Amps,

H-xxxvi
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

7.

Terminal blocks

8.
9.

Degree of protection
Painting

10.

Other provision

C.

controlled by MCB with fuse failure

remote indication
ii)
Six (6) Nos. outgoing 240 V, 10
Amps, single phase supplies
controlled by MCB, to be drawn from
above 3 phase incomers.
150 nos. in vertical formation for interlocking facilities
IP:55 (As per IS:2147)
Outside (light grey) with shade no. 697 of
IS:5 and Inside (glossy white).
Double hinged doors with neoprene
gaskets, padlocking arrangement, space
heater.

CLAMPS AND CONNECTORS

The clamps and connectors shall be made of materials listed below:
1.

2.
3.
4.

5.

D.

For connecting ACSR conductors

and aluminium tubes

Aluminium alloy casting, conforming to

designation A6 of IS : 617 and shall be
tested for all tests as per IS : 617
Suspension clamps
-doDead end compression clamps Galvanized mild steel
connecting GI shield wire:
i)
Bolts, Nuts
Hot dip galvanized
ii)
Mild steel plain washers Electro galvanized
below M12.
iii)
Spring washers
Electro galvanized
For
connecting
equipment Bimetallic connectors made from
terminals made of copper with Aluminium alloy casting, conforming to
ACSR conductors.
designation A6 of IS:617 with 2 mm thick
comb- metallic liner and shall be tested as
per IS : 617.

BUS POST PORCELAIN INSULATORS

1.
2.
3.

4.

Rated Voltage
Type
Dry & wet one minute
power frequency with
stand voltage.
1.2 micro second
Lightning impulse

145 kV
Only solid core
275 kV (rms)

36 kV
Only solid core
70 kV (rms)

650 kVp

170 kVp

H-xxxvii
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

withstand voltage
250/2500 Switching
impulse withstand voltage
6. Minimum total creepage
distance
7. Total cantilever strength
8. Top p.c.d
9. Corona extinction voltage
10. Guaranteed loads
a) Bending
b) Torsion
c) Compression
11. RIV
for
frequency
between 0.5 MHz and 1
MHz and at 1.1x rated
phase to earth voltage
5.

E.
E.1

3625 mm
(minimum)
800 kg (minimum)
127+0.5 mm
105 kV (rms)

900 mm (minimum)
800 kg (minimum)

8000 N
4000 N-M
130000 N-M
500 microvolts at
92 kV (rms)

ANTIFOG DISC INSULATOR AND STRINGS

Disc Insulator units
Physical Characteristics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

E.2

Type
Colour (Porcelain insulator)
Surface
Locking device
Diameter
Spacing
Size and dimension of Pin ball shank
Minimum Creepage Distance
i) Disc Insulator for substation
Minimum Electro-Mechanical strength

Ball and Socket

Brown
Glazed
R type security clip
255/280 mm
145 mm
20 mm
430 mm
120 KN

Electrical characteristics
1
2
3

Minimum impulse dry withstand test

voltage (+Ve Wave)
Minimum power frequency puncture
withstand test voltage
Minimum power frequency one minute
withstand voltage
H-xxxviii

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

110 kVp
120 kV (rms)

4
5
E.3

i)
Dry
ii)
Wet
Minimum visible discharge test voltage
Maximum RIV at 10 kV (rms)

Complete insulator strings

1

2
3
4
5
6

145 kV

Number of Insulator discs

a) For Substation
i) Suspension string
ii) Double tension string
Switching surge withstand
voltage (dry & wet)
Lightning impulse withstand
voltage
Power frequency wet one minute
withstand voltage
Corona extinction voltage
RIV at 1 MHZ for complete
string i.e, including
grading/corona rings, arcing
horns, clamps etc., (not
exceeding)
Mechanical failing load
Suspension
Double Tension
Maximum voltage across any
disc.

F.
F.1

70 kV (rms)
40 kV (rms)
18 kV (rms)
50 microvolts
36 kV

10
2x10
-

4
2x4

650 kVp

170 kVp

275kV(rms)

70 kV (rms)

105 kV (rms)
500 microvolts at
92 kV (rms)

120 KN
240 KN
20% for suspension
and 22% for tension
insulator strings

90 KN
180 KN
20% for
suspension and
22% for tension
insulator strings

INSULATOR HARDWARE
Free center type Suspension clamp
Material
1

Clamp Body/
keeper piece

Cotter bolts
Hangers,
Shackles,
Brackets
U Bolts

High strength Al.

Alloy
4600
LM-6 OR 6061/
65032
Mild Steel

Stainless Steel or
H-xxxix

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

Process of
treatment
Casted or forged
& Heat treated

Reference
Standard
IS : 617 OR
ASTM-B429

Hot dip
galvanized

IS : 226-1975/ IS
: 2062-1992

Forged & Heat

AISI 302 OR

High Strength Al.

alloy 6061/ 6063
or 65032/ 63400

F.2

1)
2)

3)

Type
Material
i) Outer sleeve

Bolted
EC Grade Aluminium tube formed by
extrusion process.
Galvanised low carbon forged steel.
95% of the breaking load conductor.

ii) Inner sleeve

Minimum failing load (No
deformation)

Dimensions and dimensional tolerance of the cross section of aluminium and steel
ends.
Dimension before compression
No

1
2

304-L,ASTM
B429

Tension Clamp
I

II)

treated

For MOOSE
Al. Sleeve

Outer dia
(mm)

Inner dia (mm)

Dimension after compression

Corner to
Face to Face
Corner width
width (mm)
(mm)

34 0.5

54 1

53 0.5

46 0.5

11.1 0.2

21 0.5

20.2 0.5

17.5 0.5

Steel Sleeve
For ZEBRA
Al. Sleeve

31 0.5

48 1

46 0.5

40 0.5

Steel Sleeve

10 0.2

20 0.5

19 0.5

16 0.5

F.3.
1
2
F.4.

Arcing Horns
Type
Material

Loop or ball ended (on tower side)

Galvanised mild steel tube/rod hot dip galvanised

As per IS-226

Grading/Corona Ring

Material

Capacity to withstand load

for one minute

High strength heat-treated aluminium

alloy tube. (6061 / 6063/1100 type or
65032/63400 type)
150 kg

H-xl
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

As per ASTM
B-429

F.5.
1

Supporting Brackets and

Mounting Bolts

Material
i)
Socket ended item
ii)

Sag Adjustment device

iii)

Ball ended components,

U-clevis and chain link
Yoke plates

Security clips
i)
Type
ii)
Material
Rated Strength of fittings

G.
Conductor
IS applicable

Wire diameter
Aluminium:
Steel
Number of strands:
Steel centre
1st steel layer
1st Aluminium layer
2nd Aluminium layer
3rd Aluminium layer
Sectional Area of Aluminium
Total Sectional Area

5
6

Forged steel/Malleable cast

iron hot-dip galvanised.
High quality mild steel or
high tensile steel, hot-dip
galvanised.
Drop forged steel hot-dip
galvanised.
Mild steel hot-dip galvanised

R
Phosphor bronze or nonmagnetic stainless steel.
The load carrying hardware
should develop minimum
strengths as indicated in
drawing attached without
visual deformation.

CONDUCTOR

1
2

As per IS:226
OR IS-20621992 or
ASTM-B 429

Other String Hardware

iv)

High strength heat treated Alloy

6061/6063/1100/65032/63400 type or
Mild steel hot dip galvanised

MOOSE ACSR
IS-398 (part-V)-1982
latest revision
54/3.53 mm.
7/3.53 mm.
1
6
12
18
24
528.5 Sq.mm.
: 597.0 Sq.mm
H-xli

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

As per IS : 226
1975 / IS:20621992
As per IS:2004 1978
As per IS-2261975/ IS-20621992

7
8
9
10
11
12
13

14

Overall diameter
Approximate weight
Calculated D.C. resistance at
20 degrees C, maximum.
Ultimate tensile strength
Final modulus of elasticity
Coefficient of Linear
expansion
Lay-Ratio
Steel core 6 wire layer
Aluminium
1st layer (12 wire)
2nd layer (18 wire)
3rd layer (24 wire)
Technical particulars of
Aluminium and steel strands:
a)
Diameter
Standard
Maximum
Minimum
b)
Cross-sectional area of
nominal diameter wire
c)
Weight
d)

Minimum breaking
load
Before stranding
After stranding

15
16

17

D.C. Resistance at 20 degrees

C:
Zinc coating of steel core:
a) Number of 1 minute dips:
b) Minimum weight of Zinc
Coating:
c) Process of Galvanizing:
d) Quality of Zinc:
Joints in strands
a) Steel:
b) Aluminium:

31.77 mm.
2004 kg/km
0.05552 - ohms/km.
16434 Kg. or 161.2 KN.
0.703 x 106 kg/cm2 or
7030 kg/mm2
19.35 x 10-6 per deg. C.
Max.
18

Min
16

14
13
12
Steel

12
11
10
Aluminium

3.53 mm.
3.60 mm.
3.46 mm.
9.787
sq.mm
76.34
kg/km

3.53 mm.
3.55 mm.
3.51 mm.
9.787
sq.mm
26.45 kg/km

1311 Kg or 160 Kg or
12.86 KN
(1.57 KN)
1246 Kg or
152 Kg or
12.22 KN
1.49 KN
2.974 Ohm/Km.
(Aluminium)
(Moose & Zebra)
3
275 gms / sqm
Hot dip
IS-209/1979 or latest edition
Not permitted
No joint shall be permitted in the Aluminium wires in
the outer most layer of the ACSR conductor. But
permitted in the inner layers such that no two such
joints are within 15 meters of each other in complete
stranded conductor.
H-xlii

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

18

c) Method of making joint:

Cold pressure butt welding.
14.67 Kg/ sq mm
d) Ultimate tensile strength
of joint:
Chemical composition of high
carbon steel wire:
Element
% Composition
i)
Carbon
0.5 to 0.85
ii)
Manganese
0.5 to 1.10
iii)
Phosphorus
Not more than 0.035
iv)
Sulphur
Not more than 0.045
v)
Silicon
0.10 to 0.35

H.

GALVANISED STRANDED STEEL EARTHWIRE

1.
2.

Material:
Purity of Material:

3.
3a

Stranding and wire diameter:

No. of strands:

4.
5.

Weight:
Single wire before stranding:
a) Diameter of wire strand:
Max:
Min:
b) Minimum elongation in
200 mm length:
c) Minimum tensile strength:
d) D.C. resistance at 20 deg
C:
Stranded wire
a) Length of lay
Maximum:
Minimum:
b) Minimum breaking load:
c) Overall diameter:
d) Modulus of elasticity:
e) Coefficient of linear
expansion:
f) D.C. resistance at 20 deg
C:
g) Total sectional area:
Direction of lay of outer layer:
Zinc coating
a) Number of one minute
dips:

6.

7.
8.

STEEL
Sulphur and Phosphorous not exceeding 0.05 percent
each. Carbon content not exceeding 0.55 percent.
7/3.15 mm.
Steel core : 1
Outer steel layer : 6
575 kg/km
3.66 mm
3.74 mm
3.58 mm
4%
981 N / mm2
17.15 ohms/Km

307 mm
143 mm
6972 Kg or 68.4 KN
10.98 mm
19.0 x 103 kg/mm2
11.50 x 10-6 per deg C
2.5 ohms/km
73.65 mm2
Right hand
3

H-xliii
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

9.

b) Number of half-minute
dips:
c) Quality of Zinc:
d) Weight of coating on wire:
e) Process of galvanising:
Joints:

10.

Oiling:

11.

Chemical composition:
Element
Carbon
Manganese
Phosphorus
Sulphur
Silicon

I.

1
Zn 98 to IS: 209-1966/Latest revision.
275 g/sq.m
Hot dip
There shall be no joint in any of the wire constituting
the ground wire.
The galvanised ground wire shall be dipped in boiled
linseed oil.
% Composition
Not more than 0.55
0.4 to 1.10
Not more than 0.05
Not more than 0.05
0.15 to 0.35

SPACERS/SPACER DAMPERS

v)

Type
Sub-conductor spacing
Arrangement of sub-conductors in the
bundle
Galvanisation of spring washers
Other ferrous parts
Elastomers

vi)

Clamp bolt strength

vii)

Short-circuit rating

i)
ii)
iii)
iv)

viii) Equivalent compressive and tensile

strength requirements
ix) Slip strength of clamps (Both for bolted
and rubber surfaced type)

Twin/quadruple bundle
300 mm for 132kV and 250mm for 33kV
Horizontal
Electro-galvanised
Hot-dip galvanised
Elastomers, if used, shall have good
mechanical strength, adequate
resistance to the effects of ozone,
ultraviolet radiation, conductor
temperature upto 75 deg. C and
atmospheric contamination under the
service conditions. The elastomers
shall be electrically conducting.
The clamp bolts shall be capable of
withstanding a torque upto 150 percent
of the recommended bolt torque
without failure of component parts of
the spacer/spacer damper assembly.
31.5 kA for 1 Sec. for 132kV and 25kA
for 3 Sec. for 33kV
1500 kg(compressive)
750 kg (Tensile)
i)
Not less than 255 kg when an
untested spacer/spacer damper is
installed at the recommended bolt
torque on the conductor.

H-xliv
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

ii)

Not less than 200 kg without

retightening the bolts, after
conducting the fatigue test.

Mechanical Movements
Longitudinal parallel to conductors

+/- 50 mm (minimum)

Vertical perpendicular to conductors

+/- 25 mm (Minimum)

Torsional angular movement in a vertical plane

parallel to the conductors.

+/- 5 deg. (minimum)

Vibration Requirement
Spacer/Spacer damper shall be capable of withstanding all the external forces, due to
wind or otherwise, including sub span oscillations. Spacer damper shall also be
capable of damping out the aeolian vibrations to a dynamic strain level not exceeding
150 micro-strains.
Radio Interference voltage at 1 MHz and phase to
ground Voltage of 92 kV (rms)dry for 132kV
Corona extinction voltage

J.

500 micro volts

(for 132kV)
105 kV (rms) for 132kV

TENSION CLAMPS FOR EARTHWIRE

1.
2.

3.
4.
5.

K.

Type
Material
a) Body
b) Bolts & Nuts
Minimum failing load
Minimum slip strength
Galvanisation
a) Spring washers
b) Other ferrous parts

Bolted
Forged steel
Galvanised steel
6624 kg
6275 kg
Electrogalvanised
hot-dip galvanised

FLEXIBLE COPPER BONDS

1.
2.
3.
4.

Material
Strand & Wire diameter
Length
Connecting lugs suitable for

5.

HRH MS bolt hot-dip

galvanized with nut & lock
H-xlv

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

Tinned Copper
37/7/0.417 mm
500 mm (approx.)
One for 12mm dia bolt and other for 16
mm dia bolt
16 mm dia and 40 mm long

washer
M.1

Terminal Blocks:
1.
2.
3.

Voltage grade
Spare terminals
Suitable for connecting

4.

Clearance

5.

1100 V
20%
a) Minimum of two of 2.5 mm sq.
copper flexible conductor for all
circuits except CTs & PTs circuits
b) Minimum of four of 2.5 mm sq.
copper flexible conductor for all CT
circuits

Between first row of

terminal block & cable gland
plate or side of box
Between two rows of
terminal blocks

250 mm (minimum)

150 mm (minimum)

V POWER TRANSFORMER
A.

Technical parameters of 50 MVA, 132kV / 33kV three phase, two

winding transformer with NIFPS System.

a)

Type

b)

c)

Rating
HV
LV
Cooling

d)
e)
f)

Rating at different cooling

Type of transformer
Voltage ratio

g)
h)
i)

Frequency
Phases
Constant ohmic impedances
i) HV-IV impedance at 75
deg. C
- Principal tap
12.5 %
Air core reactance of HV 20% (Knee point voltage not less than 1.1

j)

Three phase, two winding, transformers

(constant ohmic impedance type).
50 MVA
50 MVA
ONAN/ONAF/OFAF with 2x50% radiator
banks.
60%/80% / 100% (30/40 / 50 MVA)
Constant ohmic impedance type
132 / 33 kV
3 3
50 Hz 3%
Three

H-xlvi
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

k)
l)
m)

n)
o)

p)
q)

winding (Min.)
Service:
Duty:
Max. flux density in any part
of core and yoke at rated
MVA and frequency and
110% rated voltage
Over load capacity:
Temperature
rise
over
corresponding
maximum
ambient temp. of 50 deg. C
- Of top oil measured by
thermometer:
- Of winding measured by
resistance method:
Cooling Medium:
Windings
i) Fault level

r)
s)

t)

p.u.)
Outdoor
Continuous
1.9 tesla

As per IS: 6600 / IEC 60354

50 deg. C
55 deg. C
Mineral oil as per IS: 335
Low Voltage
High Voltage
(33kV)
(132kV)
31.5 kA for
25 kA for
2 Sec.
3 Sec.
650 kVp
170 kVp

ii) 1.2/50 micro sec.

lightning impulse
withstand voltage
iii) One minute power
275 kV (rms)
70 kV (rms)
frequency with stand
voltage
iv) Winding connection
Star
Star
v) Neutral
Solidly grounded
Solidly grounded
vi) Insulation
Graded
Uniform
YNyn0
Vector Group:
Tap changer
On Load Tap Changer
i)Make
Reputed Make
ii)Tap range
The tap changer shall be located on the neutral side of
HV (132kV) winding for achieving HV voltage variation
from +5% to -15% in steps of 1.25% (16 steps). It shall
be of constant flux voltage variation type as per Cl. 3.2 of
IS: 2026 Part IV-1977
iii)Tap control
Full capacity-on load tap changer suitable for group /
independent, remote/local electrical and local manual
operation and bi-directional power flow. The OLTC gear
offered should be provided with automatic control to
maintain the set voltage.
iv) Tie resistor
Calculation for requirement of tie in resistor shall be
verified during detail engineering.
Bushing
HV
LV
Neutral
i)
Type
Oil filled
Solid Porcelain Solid Porcelain or
H-xlvii

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

ii)

u)

Rated
voltage
iii)
Rated
current
iv)
1.2/50
micro second
impulse
withstand
voltage
v)
One
minute power
frequency
withstand
voltage
vi)
Minimum
total creepage
istance
vii)
Mounting
viii) Type of
connection
Terminal Details
i)

High voltage

ii) Low voltage

v)

w)

x)

y)

Condenser
or oil
oil communicating
Type
communicating
------------ Without arcing horns-----------132 kV
36 kV
36 kV
1250A

1250A

1250A

650 kVp

170 kVp

170 kVp

275 kV
(rms)

70 kV
(rms)

70 kV
(rms)

3625 mm

900 mm

900 mm

Tank cover
Draw lead

Tank cover
Solid stem

Tank cover
Solid Stem

The 145 kV oil filled condenser bushings (with test tap

and no arcing horns) shall be provided with bimetallic
clamp suitable to receive flexible ACSR conductor and
horizontal take off or vertical take off.
36 kV suitable for overhead flexible
ACSR conductor.
Porcelain bushing. Copper or brass flat.
500 Pico coulombs for oil filled condenser bushings

iii) Neutral
Maximum Partial
discharge level at
1.5 p.u
Noise level at
ii)
The ONAN noise shall not exceed 75 dBA
rated voltage at
iii)
At full load and all cooling active, the noise level
principal tap
shall not exceed 80 dBA
The standard bay width in the substation for 132 kV is generally 12400 mm
and for 33 kV is generally 6000 mm centre to centre. 33 kV side will be
connected to overhead flexible ACSR conductor. The height of the buses will
be about 9 meters for 132 kV system and 6.5 meters for 33 kV system. The
height will be finalized during detailed engineering. The tenderer are
requested to note the above in the design of transformer size.
Bushing Current transformer parameter for three phase 50 MVA two
winding transformers
H-xlviii

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

i)

ii)

Ratio
Core 1
Core 2
Minimum knee point voltage &
Accuracy class
Core 1
Core 2

iii)

iv)

v)

Max. CT resistance
Core 1
Core -2
Application
Core 1 (Nearer the winding)

On each phase connection

HV side
LV side
Neutral side
300/1A
600/1A
600/1A
300/1A
600/1A

600 V
Class PS
0.2 Class
30 VA,
ISF < 5
1.5 ohms
-

Restricted
Earth Faults
(REF)
Core 2
Metering
Max. Magnetisation current (at
100 mA
knee point voltage) for Core -1

600 V
Class PS
0.2 Class
30 VA,
ISF < 5

600 V Class
PS
-

1.5 ohms
-

1.5 ohms
-

REF

REF

Metering
100 mA

Metering
100 mA

Note:
1. Accuracy Class PS as per IS: 2705.
2. Class (For the relevant protection and duties) as per IEC: 60044-1.
3. It shall be possible to remove the CTs from the transformer tank without removing the
transformer cover.
4. CT secondary leads shall be brought to a weatherproof terminal box near bushings.
5. CT characteristics are tentative and are liable to change within reasonable limits.
Bidder / manufacturer shall take Purchaser's approval before proceeding with the
design of bushing CTs.
6. Parameters of WTI CT for each winding shall be provided by the contractor /
manufacturer.

H-xlix
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

Bidding Document
For
Turnkey Package of 1 x 50MVA,
132/33 kV
Portion of the proposed 220/132/33Kv Grid Substation Siot

H-l
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Volume II, Part 2)
Tender No: - SE-II/S&O/J

November, 2015

BIDDING DOCUMENTS
FOR
TURNKEY PACKAGE OF 1 x 50MVA, 132/33 kV
GRID SUBSTATION SIOT
Jammu & Kashmir

VOLUME-II, PART 2
SECTION Power Transformer,
SECTION Control and Relay Panel
SECTION Major Substation Equipment.
SECTION List of Mandatory Spares.

H-li
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

Govt. Of Jammu & Kashmir

Power Development Department.
System & Operation Wing Jammu.
C O N T E N T S

VOLUME II (Part 2)

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1. SECTION - PROJECT DESCRIPTION AND SCOPE

2. SECTION- GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS (GTR)

H-lii
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

3. SECTION- SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR POWER

TRANSFORMER
CONTENTS
CLAUSE

TITLE

PAGE NO.

1.0
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS: ............................H-lv
1.1
GENERAL ..................................................................H-lv
1.2
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS ....... H-lvii
1.3
SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS ......... H-lvii
1.4
GUARANTEED AND OTHER TECHNICAL PARTICULARS I-lvii
1.5
DRAWINGS ..............................................................J-lvii
1.6
WORK SCHEDULE ................................................... J-lx
1.7
DUTY REQUIREMENT ............................................. J-lx
1.8
FREQUENCY............................................................J-lxii
1.9
RADIO INTERFERENCE AND NOISE LEVEL ....J-lxii
1.10 THERMAL AND MECHANICAL STRESS............J-lxii
1.11 OVER FLUXING ......................................................J-lxii
1.12 Void...........................................................................J-lxiii
1.13 TEMPERATURE RISE ............................................J-lxiii
1.14 GUARANTEE, EVALUATION OF LOSSES & PENALTIES J-lxiii
1.15 Void............................................................................ J-lxv
1.16 CLEARANCES ......................................................... J-lxv
1.17 CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS .............................. J-lxv
1.17.1 Tank and Tank accessories .................................... J-lxv
H-liii
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

1.17.2 Core ..................................................................... J-lxxiv

1.17.3 Windings .............................................................. J-lxxv
1.17.4 Insulating Oil ....................................................J-lxxviii
1.17.5 Terminal Arrangement ...................................... E-lxxxii
1.17.6 Terminal Marking ............................................ E-lxxxiv
1.17.7 Bushing Current Transformers ......................... E-lxxxv
1.18 NEUTRAL EARTHING ARRANGEMENT ....... E-lxxxv
1.19 Void....................................................................... E-lxxxv
1.20 AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY FOR OLTC, COOLER CONTROL AND
POWER CIRCUIT ........................................ E-lxxxvi
1.21 TAP CHANGING EQUIPMENT....................... E-lxxxvii
1.21.1 General Requirements ..................................... E-lxxxvii
1.21.2 On Load Tap Changing Gear (OLTC) ............ E-lxxxvii
1.21.3 OLTC Control .................................................. E-lxxxix
1.22 COOLING SYSTEM AND ITS CONTROL .......... E-xcii
1.22.1 Type of Cooling ................................................... E-xcii
1.22.2 Oil Natural Air Forced Cooling (ONAF)............ E-xciii
1.22.3 Oil Forced and Air Forced Cooling (OFAF) ...... E-xciii
1.22.4 Cooler Control .................................................... E-xciv
1.23 LOCAL OLTC CONTROL CABINET, COOLER CONTROL CABINET AND
REMOTE TAP CHANGER CONTROL PANEL (RTCC) E-xcvi
1.24 CONTROL CABINET/MARSHALLING BOX .. E-xcviii
1.25 BOLTS & NUTS .................................................... E-xcix
1.26 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES ......................... E-xcix
1.27 MOTORS ..................................................................... E-c
1.28 INSPECTION, TESTING AND INSPECTION CERTIFICATES
E-c
1.28.11.1 Type Tests ......................................................... E-cvii
1.28.11.2 Additional Type Test......................................... E-cvii
1.28.11.3 Routine Tests...................................................... E-cix
1.28.11.4 Additional Routine Tests ................................... E-cix
1.28.11.5 Special Tests....................................................... E-cxi
1.28.11.6 Tests on Transformer Bushings: ........................ E-cxi
1.28.11.7 Tests on insulating oil: ...................................... E-cxii
1.28.11.8 Tests on On-Load Tap Changer: ....................... E-cxii
1.28.11.9 Tests on Accessories: ........................................ E-cxii
1.28.11.10 Tests on Buchholz Relay: ................................. E-cxii
1.28.11.11 Cooling Plant: ................................................... E-cxii
1.28.11.12 Oil Pumps, Pipe works and Valves: .................. E-cxii
1.28.11.13 Other Auxiliary Equipments: ........................... E-cxiii
1.28.11.14 Additional Tests: .............................................. E-cxiii
1.28.11.15 Preshipment check at Manufacturer's works .... E-cxiii
1.28.11.16 Inspection and testing at site ............................ E-cxiv
1.28.11.17 Receipt and storage checks .............................. E-cxiv
1.28.11.18 Installation checks ............................................ E-cxiv
1.28.11.19 Commissioning Checks ..................................... E-cxv
1.29 OIL STORAGE TANK .......................................... E-cxvi
H-liv
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

1.30 OIL SAMPLING BOTTLE .................................. E-cxviii

1.31 Void....................................................................... E-cxviii
1.32 PACKING AND FORWARDING ....................... E-cxviii
1.33 DELIVERY.............................................................. E-cxx
1.34 FIRE PROTECTION ............................................... E-cxx
1.35 SPARE PARTS........................................................ E-cxx
1.36 ERECTION AND MAINTENANCE TOOLS/EQUIPMENT
E-cxx
1.37 TOOLS AND TACKLES ........................................ E-cxx
1.38 OPERATION, MAINTENANCE AND ERECTION MANUALS
K-cxxi
ANNEXURE - I ................................................................. K-cxxi
AUXILIARIES .................................................................. K-cxxi
ANNEXURE - II .............................................................. K-cxxix
ANNEXURE - III ..................................................................... 81
LIST OF TRANSFORMER ACCESSORIES AND TEST CERTIFICATES REQUIRED
FOR THEM.................................................... K-cxxix

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR POWER TRANSFORMER

1.0

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS:

1.1

GENERAL

1.1.1.

The scope covers the design, engineering, manufacture, testing at Manufacturers

works before dispatch, packing and forwarding, transportation, insurance,
handling, delivering at site, proper storage at site, erection testing and
commissioning of the transformers of following rating complete with all
materials, accessories and fittings, erection & maintenance tools & tackles,
mandatory spares, OLTC and RTCC cubicle and terminal connectors with first
filling of transformer oil including extra oil required during guarantee period, as
detailed in this specification.
(a)

50 MVA, 132kV/33 kV, three phase, two winding transformer with NIFPS
system

1.1.2.

The design and workmanship shall be in accordance with the best engineering
practices to ensure satisfactory performance throughout the service life.

1.1.3.

Any material and equipments not specifically stated in this specification but
which are necessary for satisfactory operation of the equipment shall be deemed
to be included unless specifically excluded and shall be supplied without any
extra cost.

1.1.4.

Components having identical rating shall be interchangeable.

H-lv
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

1.1.5.

The supply of all materials for connecting the neutral ends to form neutral point
and grounding connection thereof shall also be included in the scope of supply.

1.1.6.

The performance of the equipment shall be guaranteed as per Section

Guaranteed and Other Technical Particulars.

1.1.7.

The bidder has to furnish the testing facilities available at the manufacturers
works.

1.1.8.

Transportation

1.1.8.1

It shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor to transport as well as unload

the transformer to the specified sites. The Contractor shall be responsible to select
and verify the route, mode of transportation and make all necessary arrangements
with the appropriate authorities for the transportation of the equipment. The
dimension of the equipment shall be such that when packed for transportation, it
will comply with requirement of loading and clearance restrictions for the
selected route. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to coordinate the
arrangement for transportation of the transformer for all the stages from the
manufacturer's work to site. All metal blanking plates and covers which are
specifically required to transport the transformer shall be considered part of the
transformer and handed over to the purchaser after completion of the erection.
Bill of quantity and relevant drawings of these items shall also be included in the
manual to enable the purchaser to have it re-manufactured, if required.

1.1.8.2

The details of the proposed method of transportation shall be submitted for

approval. The transformers of 20 MVA and above shall preferably be
transported on Hydraulic Trailers so as to minimise the impact on winding
etc during transportation. The scope of any necessary modification / extension /
improvement to existing road, bridges, culverts etc. shall be included in the scope
of the bidder. The contractors shall carry out the route survey along with the
transporter and submit the detail proposal and methodology for transportation of
autotransformer for approval of purchaser within three months from the date of
award.

1.1.8.3

The Contractor shall despatch the transformer in an atmosphere of Nitrogen/

dry air. Necessary arrangement shall be ensured by the Contractor to take care of
pressure drop of nitrogen or dry air during transit and storage till completion of oil
filling during erection. The total duration of storage at site with dry gas shall be
limited to three months after which the transformer shall be processed and filled
with oil. A gas pressure testing valve with necessary pressure gauge and adaptor
valve shall be provided. During storage, internal pressure of dry air / nitrogen
shall be monitored and gas filling is to be carried out if required to maintain the
internal pressure. The transformer shall also be fitted with sufficient number
of impact recorders/accelerometer during transportation to record the
H-lvi

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

movement due to impact in all three directions perpendicular to each other,

out of which the main direction shall be in the direction of transportation. The
recording shall commence in the factory and must continue till the unit is installed
on its foundation. The records shall be submitted to purchaser as a part of quality
process.

GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

1.2

The transformers shall be of three phase, oil immersed type and shall be suitable
for the outdoor service as step down transformers. The transformer and its
accessories shall conform to IEC: 60076 / IS: 2026 and other relevant IEC / IS
standards of latest edition including amendments except to the extent explicitly
modified in the specification and shall also be in accordance with requirement
specified in this section. A list of relevant Standards are given in Annexure -I
of Section General Technical Requirements.

SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

1.3
I)

The technical parameters of the Transformer are detailed in Section Specific

Technical Requirements of the Specification.

GUARANTEED AND OTHER TECHNICAL PARTICULARS

1.4
J)

The bidder shall furnish all the Guaranteed and other technical particulars for the
offered Transformer as called for in Section Guaranteed and Other
Technical Particulars. Any other particulars considered necessary may also be
given in addition to those listed in that Section.
1.5

DRAWINGS

1.5.1

Drawings to be submitted along with the Bid

1.5.1.1

In addition to any other drawings which the tenderer may like to supply, the
following drawings/catalogues shall be submitted with the tender:
(a)

(b)
(c)

General outline drawing showing front and side elevation and plan views
of the transformer and all accessories and external features with detailed
dimensions, net and shipping weights, crane lift for untanking and/or
erection/removal of bushings, size of lifting lugs and pulling eyes, HV
and LV terminal clearances, quantity of insulating oil etc.
Drawings showing mounting details including foundation, track gauge for
each equipment offered.
Technical and descriptive literature giving details of the equipment and
accessories offered including bought out items.

J-lvii
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

1.5.1.2

The Contractor shall furnish completely filled in Schedule for submission of

drawings.

1.5.1.3

Each drawing shall be identified by a drawing number and each subsequent

resubmission/revision or addition to the drawing shall be identified by a revision
number.
All drawings shall be thoroughly checked for accuracy and
completeness and signed by a responsible officer of the Contractor on his behalf.
Any mistakes or errors in drawings shall not form a basis for seeking extension of
delivery period.

1.5.2

Drawings and documents to be submitted after receipt of order

After receipt of the order, the successful tenderer will be required to furnish
softcopy and five (5) prints of the following drawings and documents for approval
of Purchaser/ Owner.

1.5.2.1

Outline General Arrangement drawing of transformer showing

a) Plan
b) Elevation
c) End view
List of all accessories with detailed weights, quantity of insulating oil, dimensions
clearances, spacing of wheels in direction, center of gravity, location of cooler etc.

1.5.2.2

Loading details for transformer foundation

1.5.2.3

Foundation Plan showing reaction at points of support, clamping arrangement &

location of jacking pads

1.5.2.4

Technical Data requirement sheet of transformer

1.5.2.5

Over fluxing withstand duration curve

1.5.2.6

Schematic wiring diagram of cooling arrangement along with write up on scheme

1.5.2.7

Schematic wiring diagram of OLTC along with write up on scheme

1.5.2.8

Mounting Arrangement and wiring diagram of remote WTI along with write up.

1.5.2.9

Bushing Drawing showing electrical and mechanical characteristics

a) HV Bushing
b) LV Bushing
c) Neutral Bushing

J-lviii
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

1.5.2.10

Assembly drawings of HV & LV bushings

1.5.2.11

Outline and General Arrangement of Cooler Control Cabinet

1.5.2.12

Cooler Control cabinet schematic and wiring diagram

1.5.2.13

Magnetisation Characteristics of bushing CTs and neutral CTs

1.5.2.14

Hysterisis Characteristics of iron core

1.5.2.15

Rating and Diagram Plate giving details of terminal marking and connection
diagram

1.5.2.16

Overall Transport dimension Drawing of transformer

1.5.2.17

Drawing showing typical sectional view of the windings with details of insulation,
cooling circuit, method of cooling and core construction etc.

1.5.2.18

Oil Flow Diagram

1.5.2.19

Valve Schedule Plate drawing

1.5.2.20

Twin Bi-directional Roller

1.5.2.21

Connection Diagram of all protective devices to marshalling box showing

physical location

1.5.2.22

List of spares

1.5.2.23

Technical Literature of all fittings and accessories

1.5.2.24

Calculation to support short circuit withstand capacity of transformer

1.5.2.25

Calculation of hot spot temperature

1.5.2.26

Value of air core reactance with a typical write-up of calculation

1.5.2.27

Oil sampling Bottle details

1.5.2.28

Typical heating and cooling curves

1.5.2.29

GA of RTCC panel

1.5.2.30

Transformer oil storage tank drawing

1.5.2.31

Complete bill of material

J-lix

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

1.5.2.32

Customer inspection schedule

1.5.2.33

Test procedure of transformer

1.5.2.34

Type test reports of transformer

1.5.2.35

O&M manual of transformer

1.6

WORK SCHEDULE

1.6.1

The tenderer shall furnish with his offer a detailed programme for manufacturing
and delivery, erection, testing and commissioning of the equipment offered by
him in the form of master network identifying key phases in the various areas of
work.

1.6.2

The Bidder shall attach a proposed Bar or PERT chart, starting from the date of
letter of intent till completion as per delivery schedule

1.6.3

The programme shall include but not limited to commencement and completion
of all engineering and design works including the time required for the Consulting
Engineers comments.

1.6.4

The work schedule shall be discussed and finalised at the time of award.

1.6.5

Within one month of acceptance of letter of award, the successful tenderer shall
submit for review and approval, detailed schedules (mutually agreed by the
Purchaser and Tenderer) showing the logic and duration of following activities:
(a)
(b)
(c)(b)
(d)(c)

Detailed engineering, procurement (bought out items and raw material),

manufacture, shop inspection, testing, despatch and receipt at site.
Erection, testing and commissioning activities.
Inputs required from Purchaser, data/information to be submitted by the
Tenderer for further related engineering.

1.7

DUTY REQUIREMENT

1.7.1

The transformers shall be of three phase, oil immersed and shall be suitable for
the outdoor service. The transformers shall be suitable for highly polluted
atmospheres.

1.7.2

The transformer shall be capable of being operated without danger on any tapping
at the rated MVA with voltage variation of 10% corresponding to the voltage of
that tapping.
J-lx

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

1.7.3

Transformers shall be capable of operating under the natural cooled conditions

upto the specified load. The forced cooling equipment shall then come into
operation by pre-set contacts of Winding Temperature Indicator (WTI) and the
transformer shall operate as a forced cooling unit initially as ONAF upto specified
load and then as OFAF upto full specified load. Cooling shall be so designed
that during total failure of power supply to cooling fans and oil pumps, the
transformer shall be able to operate at full load for atleast ten (10) minutes
without the calculated winding hot spot temperature exceeding 150 Deg C.
Transformers shall be fitted with two numbers of cooler banks each capable
of dissipating 50% of the losses at Continuous Maximum Rating (CMR).
Transformers shall be capable of operating for 20 minutes in the event of
failure of oil circulating pumps or blowers associated with all cooler banks
except one cooler bank without the calculated winding hot spot temperature
exceeding 150 Deg C. The Contractor shall submit supporting calculations for the
above for Purchasers approval.

1.7.4

The maximum flux density in any part of the core and yoke at rated MVA,
normal voltage and frequency shall be such that under 10% continuous over
voltage condition it does not exceed 1.9 Tesla at the lowest tap position.

1.7.5

The transformers shall be having constant ohmic impedance between HV and LV

as specified.

1.7.6

External or Internal reactors shall not be used to achieve the HV / LV impedance

specified.

1.7.7

Necessary provision is to be kept in the transformer control scheme for parallel

operation with any forthcoming/existing transformer.

1.7.8

The air core reactance of HV winding of transformer shall not be less than
20%. Successful bidder is to furnish supporting calculation for Purchasers
reference. The knee point voltage shall not be less than 1.1 per unit.

1.7.9

The transformers and all its accessories like CTs etc. shall be designed to
withstand without injury, the thermal and mechanical effects of any external short
circuit to earth and of short circuits at the terminals of any winding for a
period of 2 seconds for 132 kV and for a period of 3 seconds for 33 kV. The
short circuit level of the HV and LV system to which the subject transformer will
be connected is 31.5 KA for 1 second (sym, rms, 3 phase fault on 132 kV) & 25
kA for 3 seconds (sym, rms, 3 phase fault on 33 kV). For transformer design
purpose, the through fault current shall be considered limited only by the
transformer self impedance.

1.7.10

The transformer shall be capable of being loaded in accordance with IS: 6600 /
IEC: 60354 upto 150% of rated load. There shall be no limitation for
J-lxi

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

overloading imposed by bushing, tap changer etc or any other associated

equipment.
1.7.11

The transformer shall be free from any Electrostatic Charging Tendency

(ECT) i.e static electricity problem under all operating conditions when all
oil circulation systems are in operation.

1.7.12

Dissolved gas analysis (DGA) of oil shall be periodically monitored by the

Purchaser during the service of the transformer and the interpretation of DGA
results will be as per IEC: 60599. The Contractor may take separate samples for
DGA during warranty period as it is the responsibility of the Contractor to make
their own assessment regarding the overall health of the transformer during this
period.

1.7.13

The equipment shall generally be designed and manufactured to have at least 30

years life under rated conditions.

1.8

FREQUENCY
Transformer shall be suitable for continuous operation with a frequency variation
of 5% from normal value of 50 Hz without the temperature rise exceeding the
specified limit.

1.9

RADIO INTERFERENCE AND NOISE LEVEL

1.9.1.

The transformer shall be designed with particular attention to the suppression of

harmonic voltage, especially the third so as to minimise interference with
communication circuit.

1.9.2.

The noise-level of transformer, when energised at normal voltage and frequency

with fans and pumps running shall not exceed, when measured under standard
condition, the values specified at relevant clauses.

1.10

THERMAL AND MECHANICAL STRESS

Transformer shall be capable of withstanding thermal and mechanical stresses
caused by symmetrical or asymmetrical faults on any terminals. The maximum
short circuit output current at the tertiary terminals shall be limited to make the
transformer short circuit proof.

1.11

OVER FLUXING
Transformer shall withstand, without injurious heating combined voltage and
frequency fluctuations which produce the following overfluxing conditions and
give desired performance:.
J-lxii

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

(a)
(b)
(c)

125% for 1 minute

140% for 5 seconds
Bidder shall also indicate 150% and 170% over voltage withstand time.

The transformer shall be provided with over fluxing protection device.

1.12

Void

1.13

TEMPERATURE RISE

1.13.1.

The transformers shall be capable of operating continuously without exceeding

temperature rise (over corresponding maximum ambient temp. of 50o C) limits as
specified below:

1.13.2.

(a)

Winding temperature
(Measured by resistance method)

55 Deg. C

(b)

Top Oil temperature

(Measured by thermometer)

50 Deg. C

Transformers with tapping ranges extending more than 5% below the nominal
voltage shall meet the temperature rise limits specified in IS: 2026 on all tapping.
They shall operate continuously without injurious heating. The loading of the
transformers is to be accordance with IS: 6600 Guide for loading of oil
immersed transformers.

GUARNATEE
1.14
GUARANTEE, EVALUATION OF LOSSES & PENALTIES
The Indian Standards specification IS: 2126 allow certain tolerances for acceptance of the
transformer no load and load losses. The Bidder shall indicate the Guaranteed values of No
load losses (Iron losses), load losses (copper losses) and auxiliary losses in his Bid. He shall
indicate whether losses are firm or subject to tolerance. In case losses are subject to
tolerance ceiling shall be indicated for tolerance. In the absence of any information to this
effect, the figures for no load and load losses (including auxiliary losses) will be increased by
10% as provided in IEC-60076 & IS: 2026. Any changes in the figures assigned for
transformer loses will not be permitted after opening of the bids and bid evaluation will be
carried out on the basis of information made available at the time of bid opening.
1.14.1 The no load loss in kilo-watts at rated voltage and rated frequency and the total
losses in kilo-watts at rated output, rated voltage and rated frequency shall be
guaranteed under penalty, For the purpose of penalty computations, the test

J-lxiii
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

figures of these losses shall be compared with the corresponding guaranteed

figures.
1.14.2 The penalties shall be separately evaluated from the excess of the test figures of the
no-load loss in kilo-watts, over the corresponding guaranteed value and the excess
of the difference between the test values of the total losses and the no-load loss in
kilowatts, over the difference of the corresponding guaranteed values. No
tolerance shall be permitted over the test figures of the losses.
1.14.3 The penalties shall be calculated at the rate of Rs.1,20,235/-per kilo-watt for the
excess of no-load loss, the rate of Rs. 1,24,684/-per kilo watt for the excess of
difference in the total and the load losses and the rate of Rs.48,094/- per KW for
cooler Loss. For fraction of kilo-watt, the penalties shall be applied pro-rata.
1.14.4 The tenderer should note that values assigned for the capitalization of losses are based
on the present worth and therefore capitalization of investment will not be made
separately.
1.14.5 GUARANTEE,
EVALUATION
OF
CONSUMPTION AND PENALITIES

AUXILIARY

POWER

1.14.7.1

The power consumed at full load by the fans, oil pumps and any other
auxiliary apparatus shall be stated in the offer which shall be guaranteed.
Tolerance, if any on this figure shall also be indicated failing which a tolerance of
10% shall be assumed. For the purpose of evaluation of tenders and imposition of
penalty the guaranteed figure after taking in account the maximum tolerance if
any, shall be assumed.

1.14.7.2

For the purpose of evaluation of tenders, the power consumption of the

auxiliaries shall be considered for 20% of the capacity and shall be capitalized to
arrive at the final evaluated price for comparison. For the purpose of evaluation,
the rates as given in para 1.14.4 above shall be taken.

1.14.6 REJECTION
The Employer may reject any transformer if during tests or service any of the
following conditions arise:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)

No load loss exceeds the guaranteed value by 15% or more.

Load loss exceeds the guaranteed value by 15% or more.
Total losses exceed the guaranteed value by 10% or more.
Impedance value exceeds the guaranteed value by + 10% or more.
Transformer fails on impulse test.
Transformer fails on power frequency voltage withstand test.
Transformer is provided to have been manufactured not in accordance
with the specification.
J-lxiv

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

1.15

Void

1.16

CLEARANCES

1.16.1

The clearances between two live conductive parts and a live conductive part to
earthed structures shall be as follows for the transformers:

Sl.
No.

Nominal System
Voltage

BIL
(kV)

1)
6)1)
7)2)

2)
132 kV
33 kV

3)
650
170

Clearance
Phase to Phase
Phase to Earth
(in mm)
(in mm)
4)
5)
1300
1300
320
320

The values in above Table refer to an altitude not exceeding 1000 m. For an
altitude above 1000 m and upto 3000 m, clearances will increase by 1.25% for
every 100 m rise in altitude above 1000 m.
1.17

CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS
The features and construction details of each Power Transformer shall be in
accordance with the requirement stated hereunder.

1.17.1

Tank and Tank accessories

1.17.1.1

Tank

(a)

Tank shall be of welded construction and fabricated from tested quality

low carbon steel of adequate thickness. The quality of steel shall be as per
IS: 2062.

(b)

All seams and those joints not required to be opened at site shall be
factory welded and wherever possible they shall be double welded.
Welding shall conform to BS: 5135. After completion of tank
construction and before painting, dye penetration test shall be carried out
on welded parts of jacking bosses, lifting lugs and all load bearing

J-lxv
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

members. The requirement of post weld, heat treatment of tank / stress

relieving shall be based on recommendation of BS: 5500.
(c)

Tank stiffeners shall be provided for general rigidity and these shall be
designed to prevent retention of water.

(d)

The transformer shall be preferably of bell type tank construction

with belted/ welded top cover. In case the joint is welded, it shall be
provided with flanges suitable for repeated welding. The joint shall be
provided with a suitable gasket to prevent weld splatter inside the tank.
Proper tank shielding shall be done to prevent excessive temperature rise
of the joint. Neoprene or equivalent gaskets shall be used to ensure
perfect oil tightness.

(e)

The tanks shall be designed to withstand:

(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)

Mechanical shocks during transportation

Full vacuum
Continuous internal pressure of 35 KN/Sq. m over normal
hydrostatic pressure of oil
Short circuit forces

(f)

Wherever possible the transformer tank and its accessories shall be

designed without pockets wherein gas may collect. Where pockets can
not be avoided, pipes shall be provided to vent the gas into the main
expansion pipes.

(g)

Adequate space shall be provided at the bottom of the tank for collection
of sediments/sludge.

(h)

The base of each tank shall be so designed that it shall be possible to

move the complete unit by skidding in any direction without injury when
using plates or rails.

(i)

Tank shields shall be such that no magnetic fields shall exist outside the
tank. They shall be of magnetically permeable material.

(j)

Suitable guides shall be provided in the tank for positioning the core and
coil assembly.

(k)

Each tank shall be provided with

(i)

Lifting lugs suitable for lifting the transformer when filled with oil
without structural damage to any part of the transformer. Lifting
eyes shall be provided on all parts of the transformer requiring

J-lxvi
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

independent handling. The factor of safety at any point shall not

be less than 2.
The lifting lugs shall be so arranged and located so as to be
accessible for use when the transformer is loaded on the transport
vehicle.

(l)

1.17.1.2

(ii)

A minimum of four jacking pads in accessible position to enable

the transformer complete with oil, to be raised or lowered using
hydraulic or mechanical screw jacks.

(iii)

Suitable haulage holes shall be provided.

The lid inside the tank shall be shaped to ensure efficient collection and
direction of free gas to the buchholz relay.

Tank cover

(a)

The tank cover shall be sloped to prevent retention of rain water and shall
not distort when lifted.

(b)

Atleast two adequately sized inspection openings, one at each end of the
tank shall be provided for easy access to bushings and earth connections.
The inspection covers shall not weigh more than 25 kg. The inspection
covers shall be provided with two handles to facilitate lifting. The
inspection covers shall be of bolted type.

(c)

The tank cover shall be fitted with pockets at the position of maximum oil
temperature at maximum continuous rating for bulbs of oil and winding
temperature indicators. It shall be possible to remove these bulbs without
lowering the oil in the tank. The thermometer shall be fitted with a
captive screw to prevent the ingress of water.

(d)

Bushings, turrets, covers of inspection openings, thermometer, pockets

etc. shall be designed to prevent ingress of water into or leakage of oil
from the tank.

(e)

All bolted connections shall be fitted with weatherproof hot oil resistant
gasket in between, for complete oil tightness. If gasket is compressible,
metallic stops/other suitable means shall be provided to prevent overcompression.
All gasketed joints shall be designed, manufactured and assembled to
ensure long term leak and maintenance free operation.

(f)

Gas venting
J-lxvii

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

The transformer cover, and generally the internal spaces of the

transformer and all pipe connections shall be so designed as to provide
efficient venting of any gas in any part of the transformer to the Buchholz
relay. The space created under inspection and manhole cover shall be
filled with suitable material to avoid inadvertent gas pockets.

1.17.1.3

When the transformers are provided with separately mounted radiators,

flexible joints shall be provided in the main oil pipes connecting the
transformer tank to the radiator tanks to reduce vibration and facilitate
erection and dismantling.

1.17.1.4

The transformer tank, fittings, radiators and all accessories shall be designed
to withstand seismic events to the extent of static co-efficient of 0.15 g.

1.17.1.5

Axles and wheels

1.17.1.6

i)

The transformer shall be mounted on rollers.

ii)

The roller mounted transformers are to be provided with flanged bidirectional wheels and axles. This set of wheels and axles shall be suitable
for fixing to the under carriage of transformer to facilitate its movement on
rail track. These shall be so designed as not to deflect excessively to
interfere with the movement of the transformer (under both direction of
movement). Wheels shall be provided with suitable bearings, which shall be
rust and corrosion resistant. Fittings for lubrication shall also be provided.

iii)

Suitable locking arrangement alongside foundation bolts shall be provided

for wheels to prevent accidental movement of transformer.

iv)

The wheels are required to swivel and they shall be arranged so that they
can be turned through an angle of 90 deg. when the tank is jacked up to
clear of rails. Means shall be provided for locking the swivel movements in
positions parallel to and at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the tank.

v)

The rail track gauge shall be two (2) rails with 1676 mm between adjacent
rails on shorter axis as well as on longer axis.

Conservator and Oil Preservation System

1.17.1.6.1 The Contractor shall provide main conservator with air cell type constant oil
pressure system to prevent oxidation and contamination of oil due to contact with
moisture/air, and shall be fitted with magnetic oil level gauge at a convenient
height for reading from ground level with low oil level potential free contacts.

J-lxviii
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

1.17.1.6.2 Separate conservator tank shall be provided for OLTC. OLTC shall have
conventional type conservator with prismatic oil level gauge unless otherwise
approved.
1.17.1.6.3 Conservator tank and pipe work
(a)

The conservator tank shall have adequate capacity between highest and
lowest visible levels (not less than 7.5% of the cold oil volume in the
transformer and cooling equipment) to meet the requirement of expansion
of the total cold oil volume in the transformer and cooling equipment
from minimum ambient temperature to top oil temperature of 100o C.
The capacity of the conservator tank shall be such that the transformer
shall be able to carry the specified overload without overflowing of oil.

(b)

The conservator shall be fitted with integral lifting lugs in such a position
so that it can be removed for cleaning purposes. Suitable provision shall
be kept to replace air cell and cleaning of the conservator as applicable.

(c)

High and low level alarm contacts shall be provided together with the oil
level indication.

(d)

Conservator shall be provided in such a position as not to obstruct the

electrical connections to the transformer.

(e)

A double flange valve of preferably 50 mm and 25 mm size shall be

provided to fully drain the oil from the main tank conservator and OLTC
conservator tank respectively.

(f)

To prevent oil filling into the air cell, the oil filling aperture shall be
clearly marked.

(g)

The transformer rating and diagram plate shall bear a warning statement
that the conservator is fitted with an air cell.

(h)

The conservator tank shall be stencilled on its underside with the words
"Caution: Air cell fitted". Lettering of at least 150 mm size shall be used
in such a way to ensure clear legibility from ground level when the
transformer is fully installed.

(i)

The transformer manual shall give full and clear instructions on the
operation, maintenance, testing and replacement of the air cell. It shall
also indicate shelf life, life expectancy in operation, the recommended
replacement intervals and the supplier.

J-lxix
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

(j)

Pipe work connections shall be of adequate size for their duty and as short
and direct as possible.

(k)

The feed pipe to the transformer tank shall enter the transformer cover
plate at its highest point and shall be straight for a distance not less than
five times its internal diameter on the transformer side of the Buchholz
relay, and straight for not less than three times that diameter on the
conservator side of the relay.

(l)

The pipe connecting the transformer tank with the oil conservator,
through the Buchholz relay, shall be at a rising angle of not less than 5
degrees.

(m)

The feed pipe diameter for the main conservator shall be not less than 75
mm.

(n)

Gas venting pipes shall be connected to the final rising pipe to the
Buchholz relay as nearly as possible in an axial direction, and preferably
not less than five times pipe diameters from the Buchholz relay, on the
transformer side of the relay.

(o)

Pipe work shall neither obstruct the removal of tap changers for
maintenance nor the opening of inspection of manhole covers.

1.17.1.6.4 Oil preservation equipment

The requirement of air cell type oil sealing system are given below:
(a)

Contact of the oil with atmosphere shall be prohibited by using a flexible

air cell of nitrile rubber reinforced with nylon cloth.

(b)

The temperature of oil in the conservator is likely to rise upto 1000 C

during operation. As such air cell used shall be suitable for operating
continuously at least at 1000 C.

(c)

The conservator tank and piping shall be designed for complete vacuum
filling of the main tank and conservator tank. Provision must be made for
equalising the pressure in the conservator tank and the air cell during
vacuum filling operations to prevent rupturing of the air cell.

(d)

The connection of the air cell to the top of the reservoir is by an air proof
seal permitting entrance of air into the conservator only.

1.17.1.6.5 Dehydrating Filter Breather

Conservator shall be fitted with dehydrating filter breathers. Connection shall be
made to a point in the oil conservator not less than 50 mm above the maximum
J-lxx
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

working oil level by means of a pipe with a minimum diameter of 25 mm.

Breathers having a mass less than 10 kg may be supported by the connecting pipe,
whereas units of 10 kg and above shall be supported independent of the
connecting pipe. Connecting pipes shall be securely cleated to the transformer, or
other structure supplied by the Contractor, in such a manner so as to eliminate
undesirable vibration and noise. In the case where a breather of less than 10 kg is
supported by the pipe, there shall be a cleat directly above the breather flange. It
shall be so designed that:

1.17.1.7

(a)

Passage of air is through a dust filter and silica gel.

(b)

Silica gel is isolated from atmosphere by an oil seal.

(c)

Moisture absorption indicated by a change in colour of the tinted crystals

can be easily observed from a distance.

(d)

Breather is mounted not more than 1200 mm above rail top level.

(e)

To minimise the ingress of moisture following shall be provided:

i)

Three breathers (of identical size) shall be connected in series for

main tank conservator.

ii)

Two breathers (each of 2.5 litres minimum volume) shall be

connected in series for OLTC tank conservator.

Pressure Relief Device (PRD)

Adequate no. of Pressure Relief Devices (at least 2 nos.) shall be provided at
suitable locations. These shall be of sufficient size for rapid release of any
pressure that may be generated in the tank and which may result in damage to the
equipment. The device shall operate at a static pressure of less than the hydraulic
test pressure of transformer tank. It shall be mounted directly on the tank. One set
of electrically insulated contacts per device shall be provided for tripping.
Contractor shall recommend type of protection desired when pressure relief
device operates. Discharge of pressure relief device shall be properly taken
through pipes and directed away from the transformer/other equipment and this
shall be prevented from spraying on the tank. The terminal box/boxes of PRD
should conform to degree of protection as per IP-55 of IS: 13947.
Following normal routine tests shall be conducted on PRD:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)

Air pressure test

Liquid pressure test
Contact test
Leakage test
Dielectric test
J-lxxi

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

1.17.1.8

Buchholz Relay

A double float type buchholz relay shall be provided in the connecting pipe
between the oil conservator and the transformer tank with at least a distance of
five pipe diameters between them. Any gas evolved in the transformer shall
collect in this relay. The relay shall be provided with a test cock suitable for a
flexible pipe connection for checking its operation and taking gas sample. A
copper or stainless steel tube, shall be connected from the gas collector to a valve
located about 1200 mm above ground level to facilitate sampling with the
transformer in services. The device shall be provided with two electrically
independent ungrounded contacts, one for alarm on gas accumulation and
the other for tripping on sudden rise of pressure.
The Buchholz relay shall not operate during starting/stopping of the transformer
oil circulation pumps under any oil temperature conditions. The use of pipe or
relay aperture baffles shall not be used to decrease the sensitivity of the relay. The
relay shall not maloperate for through fault conditions or be influenced by the
magnetic fields around the transformer during the external fault conditions.
1.17.1.9

Foundation and anti earthquake clamping device

To prevent transformer movement during earthquake, suitable clamping device

shall be provided for fixing transformer to the foundation. The Bidder shall
supply necessary bolts for embedding in the concrete foundation. The
arrangements shall be such that the transformer can be fixed to or unfastened from
these bolts as and when required. The fixing of the transformers to the
foundations shall be designed to withstand seismic events to the extent of static
co-efficient of 0.15 g. Special steps must be taken to prevent mal-operation of
Buchholz relay in such conditions.
1.17.1.10 Centre of gravity

The Centre of gravity of assembled transformer shall be as low and as near the
vertical line as possible. The transformer shall be stable with and without oil. The
location of the centre of gravity relative to track shall be clearly marked in the
outline drawing.
1.17.1.11 Temperature Indicators

(a)

Oil Temperature Indicator (OTI)

Transformers shall be provided with dial type thermometer of about 150
mm size or digital thermometer for top oil temperature indication. The
thermometer shall have adjustable, electrically independent
ungrounded alarm and trip contacts, maximum reading pointer and
resetting device shall be provided in the OTI. A temperature-sensing
J-lxxii

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

element suitably located in a pocket on top oil shall be furnished. This

shall be connected to the OTI by means of capillary tubing. Accuracy
class of OTI shall be 1.5% or better. The temperature indicator dials
shall have linear gradations to clearly read at least every 2 Deg C.
The setting of alarm & tripping contacts shall be adjustable at site and
typical values are as given below:
Alarm- 850 C
Trip -950 C
(b)

Winding Temperature Indicator (WTI)

A device for measuring the hot spot temperature of each of the windings
(HV, IV, and LV) shall be provided. It shall comprise of the following:
(i)

Temperature sensing element.

(ii)

Image coil.

(iii)

Auxiliary CTs, if required, to match the image coil

provided and mounted in the cooler control cabinet.

(iv)

150 mm dia (approximately) local indicating instrument with

maximum reading pointer and two adjustable electrically
independent ungrounded contacts (besides that required for
control of cooling equipment), one for high winding temperature
alarm and one for trip. The temperature indicator dials shall have
linear graduations to clearly read atleast every 2 Deg C.

(v)

Calibration device.

(vi)

Accuracy class of WTI shall be + 1.5% or better.

shall

The setting of alarm & tripping contacts shall be adjustable at

and typical values are as given below:

be

site

Alarm- 1000 C
Trip - 1100 C
(vii)

In addition to the above, the following indication equipment shall

be provided for remote indication of winding temperature for each
of the winding:
(a) Signal transmitter details are given in Annexure-I of this
Section.
(b) Remote Winding Temperature Indicator (RWTI).
J-lxxiii

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

It shall be suitable for flush mounting on Purchasers panel [may be Remote tap changer control (RTCC) panel which is to be
decided during detailed engineering]. This shall not be repeater dial of local WTI and shall operate by signal transmitter. The
difference between local and remote WT indication at any given time shall not exceed 1 Deg C.

Auxiliary supply if required, in RTCC panel, for Remote

Winding Temperature Indicator (RWTI), shall be 220 V
DC only.

Any special cables required for shielding purpose, for

connection between cooler control cabinet and Remote
Winding Temperature Indicator (RWTI) control circuit
shall be in Bidders scope of work.

Only one RWTI with a four point selector switch shall be

provided for all the windings(HV, IV and / or LV).

1.17.1.12 Earthing Terminals

(a)

Two (2) earthing pads (each complete with two (2) nos. tapped holes, M
10 bolts, plain and spring washers) suitable for connection to 75X12 mm
galvanised steel grounding flat shall be provided each at position close to
earth of the two (2) diagonally opposite bottom corners of tank. .

(b)

Two earthing terminals suitable for connection to 75x12 mm galvanised

steel flat shall also be provided on cooler marshalling box and any other
equipment mounted separately.

1.17.2

Core

1.17.2.1

The core shall be constructed from high grade non-ageing cold rolled super grain
oriented silicon steel laminations.

1.17.2.2

The design of the magnetic circuit shall be such as to avoid static discharges,
development of short circuit paths within itself or to the earthed clamping
structure and production of flux component at right angles to the plane of
laminations, which may cause local heating.
The temperature of any part of the core or its support structure in contact with oil
shall not exceed 1200 C under normal operating condition and 1300 C under most
extreme operating condition. Adequate temperature margin shall be provided to
maintain the minimum life expectancy of 30 years for this material.

1.17.2.3

The insulation of core to bolts and core to clamps plates shall be able to withstand
a voltage of 2 KV (rms) for one minute.

1.17.2.4

Core and winding shall be capable of withstanding the shock during transport,
installation, and service. Adequate provision shall be made to prevent movement
of core and winding relative to tank during these conditions and reduce vibrations
to a minimum for all operation conditions.
J-lxxiv

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

1.17.2.5

All steel sections used for supporting the core shall be thoroughly sand blasted
after cutting, drilling and welding.

1.17.2.6

When core type construction is offered, suitable projecting guides shall be

provided on core-assembly to facilitate removal from tank.

1.17.2.7

After shearing of laminations, the laminations shall be treated to remove all burrs.
Each core lamination shall be insulated with a material that will not deteriorate
due to pressure and hot oil. Paper and varnish insulation shall not be accepted.
Nature of insulation shall be specified alongwith properties.

1.17.2.8

The supporting framework of core shall be so designed as to avoid presence of

pockets which would prevent complete emptying of the tank through drain valve
or cause trapping of air during oil filling.

1.17.2.9

The maximum flux density in any part of the core and yoke at rated MVA, normal
voltage and frequency shall be such that under 10% over voltage condition it does
not exceed 1.9 Tesla.

1.17.2.10 The bolts in the assembly of the core shall be suitably insulated and the clamping
structure shall be so constructed that eddy currents are minimum.
1.17.2.11 Every care shall be exercised in the treatment and handling of core steel to ensure
that the laminations are flat and that the finally assembled core is free from
distortions.
1.17.2.12 Oil ducts shall be provided where necessary to ensure adequate cooling. The
winding structures and major insulation shall not obstruct the free flow of oil
through such ducts.
1.17.2.13 Adequate lifting lugs will be provided to enable the core & winding to be lifted.
1.17.2.14 The core shall be securely grounded directly to the tank in such a way that
the ground connection can be detached, when required.
1.17.2.15 In case core laminations are divided into sections by insulating barriers or cooling
ducts parallel to the plane of the lamination, tinned copper bridging strips shall be
inserted to maintain electrical continuity between sections.
A drawing furnishing the details of the earthing design shall be included in the
manual.

1.17.3

Windings

1.17.3.1

The Contractor shall ensure that windings of all transformers are made in dust
proof conditioned atmosphere. The Bidder shall furnish the details of the
facilities available at his works alongwith the Bid.
J-lxxv

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

1.17.3.2

The conductors shall be of electrolytic grade copper free from scales and burrs
and shall have properly rounded corners to reduce electro-static flux
concentration.

1.17.3.3

The insulation of transformer windings and connections shall be free from

insulating compounds which are liable to soften, ooze out, shrink or collapse and
be non-catalytic and chemically inactive in transformer oil during service. The
insulation of coils shall be treated with a suitable insulating compound to develop
the full electrical strength of windings.

1.17.3.4

Coil assembly and insulating spacers shall be so arranged as to ensure free

circulation of oil and to reduce the hot spot of the winding.

1.17.3.5

Washers in contact with non-ferrous parts which carry current shall be of

Phosphor bronze.

1.17.3.6

The conductor shall be transposed at sufficient intervals in order to minimise eddy

currents and to equalise the distribution of currents and temperature along the
winding.

1.17.3.7

The windings shall be designed to withstand the dielectric tests specified.

1.17.3.8

Tappings shall be so arranged as to preserve the magnetic balance of the

transformer at all voltage ratios.

1.17.3.9

The coils would be made up shaped and braced to provide for expansion and
contraction due to temperature changes.

1.17.3.10 Individual loading of any winding should not exceed its rated capacity under any
loading condition.
1.17.3.11 Air core reactance of the HV winding shall not be less than 20% and knee point
voltage shall not be less than 1.1 per unit.
1.17.3.12 All permanent current carrying joints in the windings and the leads shall be made
as per best manufacturing practice and shall be capable of giving trouble-free
service.
1.17.3.13 The design of the power transformer (for three winding transformer) shall ensure
that the amplitude of surges transferred from the HV winding to the LV winding
is effectively controlled well below the maximum limit admissible with the BIL
of the LV winding.
1.17.3.14 In case the amplitude of transformed / transferred surges of the LV winding of the
assembled transformers (for three winding transformer) is found to be exceeding
the safe limit and if considered desirable, the Contractor/ manufacturer shall
provide necessary surge protection for the LV winding and shall furnish the
details of the surge protection arrangement during detailed engineering stage.
J-lxxvi
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

Prices for surge protection arrangement shall be included in the prices of

transformers; no extra payment on account of surge protection system shall be
paid.
1.17.3.15 The barrier insulation including spacers shall be made from high - density precompressed pressboard to minimize dimensional changes.
1.17.3.16 All spacers shall have rounded edges and radially stepped spacers between
winding disks will not be accepted.
1.17.3.17 The conductor insulations shall be made from high density paper having high
mechanical strength.
1.17.3.18 Bracings of windings:
(a)

All winding insulation shall be processed to ensure that there will be no

detrimental shrinkage after assembly. All windings shall be pre-sized
before being clamped.

(b)

Windings shall be provided with clamping arrangements, which will

distribute the clamping forces evenly over the ends of the winding.

(c)

The bracing of the windings and connections shall be such that these parts
shall safely withstand the cumulative effects of stresses which may occur
during handing, transportation, installation and service including line to
line and line to line ground faults.

(d)

Full details of the windings clamping arrangements, and their adjustment

in or out of the tank together with relevant drawings and value, shall be
submitted for evaluation and approval, and shall form part of the
instruction manual.

1.17.3.19 Current carrying connections:

(a)

The mating faces of bolted connections shall be appropriately finished

and prepared for achieving good long lasting, electrically stable and
effective contacts.

(b)

All lugs for crimping shall be of the correct size for the conductors.

(c)

Connections shall be carefully designed to limit hot spot due to

circulating eddy currents.

1.17.3.20 Winding terminations into bushings:

J-lxxvii
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

(a)

Winding termination interfaces with bushings shall be designed to allow

for repeatable and safe connection under site conditions to ensure the
integrity of the transformer in service.

(b)

The winding - end termination, insulation system and transport fixings

shall be so designed that the integrity of the insulation system generally
remain intact during repeated work in this area.

(c)

Allowances shall be made on the winding-ends for accommodating

tolerance on the axial dimensions of the set of bushings and also for the
fact that bushings may have to be rotated to get oil level inspection
gauges to face in a direction for ease of inspection from ground level.

(d)

In particular, rotation or stringing of insulated connections shall be

avoided during the fastening of conductor pads (or other methods) on the
winding ends onto the termination surfaces of the bushing.

(e)

Suitable inspection and access facilities into the tank in the bushing oilend area shall be provided to minimize the possibility of creating faults
during the installation of bushings.

1.17.4

Insulating Oil

1.17.4.1

The quality of the transformer oil to be supplied with transformer shall conform to
IS: 335 of latest edition with upto date amendments. The general parameters to
which the oil shall conform and the test methods to be adopted are detailed in the
table given below. However, wherever these differs from the latest edition of IS:
335 the parameters of IS: 335 (latest edition) shall prevail. The oil supplied with
the transformer shall conform to all parameters specified below, while tested at
suppliers premises. No inhibitors shall be used in the oil.

E)
Sl.
No.

Characteristics

Requirement

E-lxxviii
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

1.

Appearance

2.

Density
Deg.C.

3.

Kinematic viscosity

at

29.5

The oil shall be clear and

transparent and free from
suspended matter or
sediment.

A representative
sample of oil shall
be examined in a
100mm
thick
layer, at ambient
temperature.

0.89 g/cm(Max.)

IS:1448
IS: 1448

at 27Deg.C.

27 CST(Max.)

at 40 Deg.C

less than 9 CST (Max)

4.

Interfacial tension
at 27 Deg.C. (min.)

0.04 N/m

IS: 6104

5.

Flashpoint Penskey
Marten
(closed)
(Min.)

140 deg. C

IS:1448

6.

Pour point (Max.)

-15 Deg C

IS:1448

7.

Neutralization
value
(Total
acidity) (Max.)

0.03 mg KOH/g

IS: 335

Corrosive sulphur
(in
terms
of
classification
of
copper strip)

Non-corrosive

8.

9.

10.

(Appendix A)
IS: 335
(Appendix B)

Electric
strength
(breakdown
voltage) (Min.)
(a) New untreated
oil

30 kV (rms) (if the above

value is not attained, the
oil shall be treated)

(b) After treatment

60 KV(rms)

Factor (tan delta) at

0.002(Max.)
E-lxxix

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

IS: 6792

IS: 6262

90 Deg. C
11.

Specific resistance
(resistivity) (Min.)
(a) at 90 Deg. C
(b) at 27 Deg C

12.

1500x10

12

IS: 6103

ohm-cm

Oxidation stability

13.

14.

(a) Neutralisation
value
after
oxidation.

0.4 mg KOH/gm (max.)

(b) Total sludge

after oxidation

0.10 % by weight (Max.)

Presence
of
oxidation inhibitor

The oil shall not contain

antioxidant
additives/inhibitors

IS: 335

(a)
New
untreated oil

50 ppm (Max.)

IS: 2362

(b)
After
treatment

15 ppm (Max.)

IS:1866

(AppendixD)

Water content

15.

Ageing
Characteristics after
96 hrs as per
ASTM-D1934/IS:
12177 with catalyst
copper
(a)

1.17.4.2

35x1012 ohm-cm

Resistivity

(i) at 27 Deg.C

2.5x(10)12 ohm cm (min)

(ii) at 90 Deg.C

0.2x(10) 12ohm cm (min)

(b)

Tan delta at
90 Deg .C

0.2 (max.)

(c)

Total acidity

0.05 mg KOH/gm (Max.)

(d) Sludge content

0.05% by weight (Max.)

(e) PCB content

Less than 2 ppm

At manufacturers works oil sample shall be drawn before, during and after heat
run and dielectric test and shall be tested for the following:
(a)
(b)

Break Down Voltage (kV rms)

Moisture content
E-lxxx

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

60 kV(min.)
15 ppm

(c)

Dissolved gas analysis(DGA):

Sample for DGA shall be taken from sampling device within 24 hrs prior
to commencement of temperature rise test, during the test and after the
test (as per approved plan). The acceptance norms with reference to
various gas generation rates during the temperature rise test shall be as
per IS: 10593 (based on IEC-60599)/CIGRE Guidelines.

1.17.4.3

Subsequently oil samples shall be drawn

(a)

Prior to filling the main tank at site and shall be tested for
i)

BDV

ii)

Moisture content

iii)

Resistivity at 90 Deg. C.

iv)

Tan delta at 90 Deg C.

v)

Inter facial tension

The acceptance norms for the above test shall be as per Clause No.
1.17.4.1.
(b)

Prior to energisation at site for following properties and

norms:
i)

Break Down Voltage (KV rms)

60 kV (min.)

ii)

Moisture content

15 ppm (max.)

iii)

Tan delta at 90 Deg C.

0.05 (max.)

iv)

Resistivity at 90 Deg C.

1x1012 ohm-cm.(Min.)

v)

Interfacial tension

0.03 N/m(Min.)

acceptance

1.17.4.4

Sufficient quantity of oil necessary for maintaining required oil level in tank
radiators and conservator, coolers alongwith 10% extra oil for topping up shall be
supplied for Purchasers use in non-returnable container suitable for outdoor
storage.

1.17.4.5

Moisture content in the solid insulation

An oil/paper moisture equilibrium chart shall be applied for the analysis of the
moisture-in-oil results obtained from an oil sample taken after complete winding
drying and oil filling in the tank at site. In order or ensure that equilibrium
E-lxxxi

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

conditions are properly assessed, the sample shall be taken not earlier than 7 days
after completing the oil and impregnation treatment. Recording the temperature
of transformer oil during sampling is essential.
With this sample it shall be demonstrated that the moisture content in the paper
insulation body of the transformer is less than at least 0.5%.
1.17.4.6

Drying and Oil filling

1.17.4.6.1 Oil impregnation or drying under vacuum at site shall be done with the
transformer and oil at a temperature not exceeding 80oC.
1.17.4.6.2 The duration of the vacuum treatment shall be demonstrated as adequate by
means of water measurement with a cold trap or other suitable method but shall
generally not be less than 72 hours.
1.17.4.6.3 Vacuum shall not be broken until the transformer is oil filled up to the Buchholz
relay. Whenever the active insulation or any paper insulation HV connections,
especially those from the windings to the bushings are exposed, these shall be reimpregnated under vacuum along with the complete transformer. For this purpose
the transformer shall first be drained to expose all insulation material.
1.17.4.6.4 Clear instructions shall be included in the maintenance manual regarding special
precautionary measure which must be taken before applying the specified vacuum
treatment. The maximum vacuum which the complete transformer/reactor can
safely withstand without any special precautionary measures, shall also be stated
in the maintenance manual.
1.17.4.6.5 The minimum safe level of oil filling (if different from the Buchholz level) to
which transformer shall be oil filled under vacuum, shall be indicated in the
manual.
1.17.4.6.6 Procedures for site drying, oil purification, oil fill etc shall be submitted for
approval and complete instructions shall form part of the manual.

1.17.5

Terminal Arrangement

1.17.5.1

Bushings

1.17.5.1.1 The electrical and mechanical characteristics of bushings shall be in accordance

with
IS:
2099/IEC:
60137
and
IS:
3347
(Part-III/SectionI)/DIN 42530.
1.17.5.1.2 145 kV bushings shall be hermetically sealed oil filled condenser type. 36 kV
bushing shall be solid porcelain or oil communicating type. Neutral bushing shall
be of Porcelain. Dimensions of 36 kV bushing shall conform to IS: 3347 Part-V.

E-lxxxii
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

1.17.5.1.3 No arcing horns shall be provided on any bushings.

1.17.5.1.4 Bushing shall be as per technical particulars furnished in Clause no. 1 of
Annexure-I: Auxiliaries of this section. Dimensions of bushing shall be
furnished by the Contractor at detailed engineering stage.
1.17.5.1.5 Oil filled Condenser type bushings shall be provided with atleast the following
fittings:
(a)

Oil level gauge;

(b)

Oil filling plug and drain valve if not hermetically sealed;

(c)

Tap for capacitance/tan delta test.

1.17.5.1.6 Where current transformers are specified, the bushings shall be removable
without disturbing the current transformers.
1.17.5.1.7 Bushings of identical rating shall be inter-changeable.
1.17.5.1.8 Porcelain used in bushing manufacture shall be homogenous, free from
laminations, cavities and other flaws or imperfections that might affect the
mechanical or dielectric quality and shall be thoroughly vitrified tough and
impervious to moisture.
1.17.5.1.9 Glazing of porcelain and bushing shall be of uniform brown colour, free from
blisters and burrs.
1.17.5.1.10Special precaution shall be taken to exclude moisture from paper insulation
during manufacture, assembly, transport and erection. The surface of all paper
insulation shall be finished with non-hygroscopic varnish which can not be
damaged easily.
1.17.5.1.11Clamps and fittings shall be of hot dip galvanised steel and they shall be rust
proof.
1.17.5.1.12Bushings turrets shall be provided with vent pipes which shall be connected to
route any gas collection through the Buchholz relay.
1.17.5.1.13Bushings shall be robust and designed for adequate cantilever strength to meet the
requirement of seismic condition, substation layout.
1.17.5.1.14All details of the bushing shall be submitted for approval.
1.17.5.2

Terminal Connectors

1.17.5.2.1 External terminals, clamps etc of the condenser type bushings and plain porcelain
bushings shall be properly designed to avoid external corona during operation.
E-lxxxiii
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

1.17.5.2.2 Bushing terminals shall be provided with terminal connectors of approved type
and size for connection to external parts. Terminal connectors offered must have
been successfully designed and type tested as per IS: 5561. The external current
carrying contacts shall be silver plated/tinned adequately.
1.17.5.2.3 Terminal connectors for HV side shall be suitable for flexible conductor of
required size which will be finalised during detailed engineering. These shall be
suitable for either horizontal or vertical take off.
1.17.5.2.4 (a)

1.17.6

All castings shall be free from blow holes, surface blisters and
cavities.
All
sharp edges and corners shall be blurred and round off. The
Aluminium alloy castings if used, shall conform to designation A6 of IS:
617.

(b)

No part of clamp shall be less than 10 mm thick.

(c)

All ferrous part shall be hot dip galvanised conforming to IS: 2633 / IS
2629.

(d)

For bimetallic clamp, copper alloy liner of minimum thickness of 2 mm

shall be cast integral with aluminium body. Alternatively the bidder may
offer bimetallic connector with loose terminal sleeves.

(e)

Flexible connections shall be made from tinned copper sheets.

(f)

Size of terminal/conductor for which the clamp is suitable and rated

current under site conditions shall be embossed/ punched on each
component of the clamp, except hardware.

(g)

All current carrying parts shall be designed and manufactured to have

minimum contact resistance.

(h)

132 kV clamps shall be corona controlled to achieve extinction voltage of

105 kV (rms)

(i)

The short time rating of terminal connector shall correspond to the short
time rating of respective bushing.

Terminal Marking
The terminal marking and their physical position shall be in accordance with IS:
2026.

E-lxxxiv
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

1.17.7

Bushing Current Transformers

1.17.7.1

Current Transformers shall comply with IS: 2705/ IEC: 60044-1.

1.17.7.2

It shall be possible to remove the turret mounted CTs from the transformer tank
without removing the tank cover. Necessary precautions shall be taken to
minimise the eddy currents and local heat generated in the turret.

1.17.7.3

Current Transformers secondary leads shall be brought to a weather proof

terminal box near each bushing. These terminals shall be wired out to Cooler
Control Cabinet/ marshalling boxes using separate cable for each core.

1.17.7.4

Bushing CT parameters indicated in the specification are tentative and liable

to change within reasonable limits. The Contractor shall obtain Purchasers
approval before proceeding with design of bushing CTs.

1.17.7.5

Additional CTs shall be provided as may be required for winding temperature

indicators for each winding and OLTC for parallel operation of the transformers.
CT characteristics shall have to match with protective relays, meters and
instruments.

1.17.7.6

Technical parameters of BCT are detailed in Section- Specific Technical

Requirements

1.18

NEUTRAL EARTHING ARRANGEMENT

1.18.1

The neutral terminal(s) of the star connected windings of three phase two winding
transformer shall be brought to the ground level by brass/tinned copper grounding
bar through two independent paths, supported from the tank by porcelain
insulators.

1.18.2

The end of the grounding bar (for three phase transformer) of brass/tinned copper
shall be brought to the bottom of the tank (to the ground level), at a convenient
point, for connection to treated earth pit (Pipe earth) which in turn to be connected
to substation grounding mat through two (2) 75x12 mm galvanised steel flats at a
single point to avoid any loop formation in the earthing circuit. The connection
shall be made by using two bolted neutral grounding terminals with necessary
accessories.

1.19

Void

E-lxxxv
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

1.20

AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY FOR OLTC, COOLER CONTROL AND

POWER CIRCUIT

1.20.1

Duplicate (Main & Reserve) 415 volt, three phase, four (4) wire auxiliary Power
Supplies shall be provided by the Purchaser at cooler control cabinet for OLTC,
cooler control and power circuit.

1.20.2

All loads shall be fed by one of the two feeders through an electrically interlocked
automatic transfer switch housed in the cooler control cabinet for tap changer
control and cooler circuits.

1.20.3

Design features of the transfer switch shall include the following:

1.20.4

1.20.5

(a)

Provision for the selection of one of the feeders as normal source and
other as standby.

(b)

Upon failure of the normal source, the loads shall be automatically

transferred after an adjustable time delay to the standby source.

(c)

Indication to be provided at cooler control cabinet for failure of normal

source and for transfer to standby source and also for failure to transfer.

(d)

Automatic re-transfer to normal source without any intentional time delay

following re-energisation of the normal source.

(e)

Both the transfer & re-transfer shall be dead transfers and AC feeders
shall not be paralleled at any time.

Power supply for OLTC circuits

(a)

A.C. feeder shall be brought to the local OLTC control cabinet by the
Bidder, after suitable selection at cooler control cabinet for which
description is given in clause no. 2.21.2 & 2.21.3 above, for control power
circuit of OLTC.

(b)

The Bidder shall derive AC power for OLTC control circuit from the AC
feeder as mentioned above by using appropriately rated dry type
transformers. If the control circuit is operated by DC supply then suitable
main & standby converters shall be provided by the Bidder to be operated
from AC power source (Main & Standby).

Power supply for Cooler circuits

(a)

Control and power supplies are to be given for cooler circuit as mentioned
in clause no. 2.21.2 & 2.21.3 above.

(b)

The Bidder shall derive AC power for Cooler control circuit from the AC
feeder as mentioned above. If the control circuit is operated by DC supply
E-lxxxvi

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

then suitable main & standby converters shall be provided by the Bidder to
be operated from AC power source (Main & Standby).
1.20.6

Necessary isolating switches and HRC fuses shall be provided at suitable points
as per Purchasers approved scheme during detailed engineering.

1.21

TAP CHANGING EQUIPMENT

1.21.1

General Requirements
a) In case of separate winding transformers, the On Load Tap Changer shall
be provided on the neutral side of HV winding for achieving HV variation
from +5% to -15% in steps of 1.25% (16 steps). It shall be of constant flux
voltage variation type as per clause 3.2 of IS: 2026.

1.21.1.1

OLTC gear shall be motor operated for local as well as remote operation. An
external handle shall be provided for local manual operation. This handle shall be
suitable for operation by a man standing at ground level.

1.21.1.2

Arrangement shall be made for securing and padlocking the tap changer wheel in
any of the working positions and it shall not be possible for setting or padlocking
the wheel in any intermediate position. The arrangement shall be such that no
padlock key can be inserted unless all contacts are correctly engaged and switch
set in a position where no open or short circuit is possible. An indicating device
shall be provided to show the tap in use.

1.21.2

On Load Tap Changing Gear (OLTC)

1.21.2.1

The transformer shall be provided with tap changer for varying the effective
transformation ratio (while the transformers are on load) without producing phase
displacement.

1.21.2.2

The details of the method of diversion of the load current during tap changing, the
mechanical construction of the gear and the control features for OLTC gear
alongwith detailed drawings on inner view and the arrangement of connections
shall be submitted with the bid. Information regarding the service experience
on the gear and a list of important users shall be furnished.

1.21.2.3

The current diverting contacts shall be housed in a separate oil chamber not
communicating with the oil in main tank of the transformer.

1.21.2.4

The contacts shall be accessible for inspection without lowering oil level in the
main tank and the contact tips shall be replaceable.
E-lxxxvii

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

1.21.2.5

The Bidder shall indicate the safeguards in order to avoid harmful arcing at the
current diverting contacts in the event of operation of the OLTC gear under overload conditions of the transformer. Necessary tools and tackles shall be furnished
for maintenance of OLTC gear.

1.21.2.6

The OLTC oil chamber shall have oil filling and drain plug, oil sampling valve,
relief vent and level glass. It shall also be fitted with a Buchholz relay, the outlet
of which shall be connected to a separate conservator tank.

1.21.2.7

The diverter switch or arcing switch shall be so designed as to ensure that its
operation once commenced shall be completed independently of the control relays
or switches, failure of auxiliary supplies etc. To meet any contingency which
may result in incomplete operation of the diverter switch, adequate means shall be
provided to safeguard the transformer and its ancillary equipment.

1.21.2.8

Tap changer shall be so mounted that bell cover of transformer can be lifted
without removing connections between windings and tap changer.

1.21.2.9

Local OLTC Control Cabinet shall be mounted on the tank in accessible position.
It should be adequately ventilated and provided with anti condensation metal clad
heaters. All contactors, relay coils and other parts shall be protected against
corrosion, deterioration due to condensation, fungi etc.

1.21.2.10 An ON-OFF tap changer control switch shall be provided in the local OLTC
control cabinet for transformer. The tap changer shall be inoperative in the OFF
position.
1.21.2.11 Operating mechanism for on load tap changer shall be designed to go through one
step of tap change per command. Subsequent tap changes shall be initiated only
by a new or repeat command.
1.21.2.12 On load tap changer shall be equipped with a time delayed INCOMPLETE STEP
alarm consisting of a Normally Open contact which closes, if the tap changer fails
to make a complete tap change. The alarm shall not operate for momentary loss of
auxiliary power.
1.21.2.13 The selsyn units or approved equivalents shall be installed in the local OLTC
control cabinet to provide tap position indication for the transformer. The Bidder
shall also provide a loose set of instruments for tap position indication in the
control room. Complete mounting details shall be included in the approved
diagram.
1.21.2.14 Transformer on load tap changer shall be equipped with a fixed resistor network
capable of providing discrete voltage steps for input to the supervisory system.
1.21.2.15 Limit switches shall be provided to prevent overrunning of the mechanism and
shall be directly connected in the circuit of the operating motor. In addition, a

E-lxxxviii
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

mechanical stop shall be provided to prevent overrunning of the mechanism under

any condition.
1.21.2.16 Limit switches may be connected in the control circuit of the operating motor
provided that a mechanical-de-clutching mechanism is incorporated.
1.21.2.17 Thermal device or other means shall be provided to protect the motor and control
circuit. All relays, switches, fuses etc. shall be mounted in the Local OLTC
Control Cabinet and shall be clearly marked for the purpose of identification.
1.21.2.18 A permanently legible lubrication chart, if required, shall be fitted within the local
OLTC control cabinet.
1.21.2.19 Any DROP DOWN tank associated with the tap changing apparatus shall be
fitted with guide rod to control the movements during lifting or lowering.
1.21.2.20 A counter of at least five-digits shall be fitted to the tap changing equipment to
indicate the number of operations completed and shall have no provision for
resetting.
1.21.2.21 All relays and operating devices shall operate correctly at any voltage between the
limits specified.
1.21.2.22 It shall not be possible to operate the electric drive when the manual operating
gear is in use.
1.21.2.23 It shall not be possible for any two controls to be in operation at the same time.
1.21.2.24 The equipment shall be suitable for supervisory control and indication with
make before break multi-way switch, having one potential free contact for
each tap position. This switch shall be provided in addition to any other
switch/switches, which may be required for remote tap position indication.
1.21.2.25 Operation from the local or remote control switch shall cause one tap movement
only until the control switch is returned to the off position between successive
operations.
1.21.2.26 All electrical control switches and the local operating gear shall be clearly
labelled in a suitable manner to indicate the direction of tap changing.
1.21.2.27 Transfer of source in the event of failure of one AC supply shall not affect tapchanging operation.

1.21.3

OLTC Control

1.21.3.1

Control of Three Phase Transformer

E-lxxxix

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

Each three-phase transformer shall be suitable for local and remote control. The
control feature shall provide the following:
1.21.3.1.1
1.21.3.1.21.21.3.1.1

Local electrical control

(a) Local-remote selector switch mounted in the local OLTC control cabinet
shall switch control of all load tap changers as follows:
(i)

When the selector switch is in local position, it shall be possible to

operate the raise-lower control switches specified in clause
1.21.3.1.1(b) below. Remote control of the raise lower functions
shall be prevented.
(ii)
When the selector switch is in remote position the local OLTC
control cabinet mounted raise-lower switch specified in clause
1.21.3.1.1(b) below shall be in-operative. Remote control of the
raise / lower function shall be possible from the remote control panel.
The local remote selection switch shall have at least two spare
contacts per position, which are closed in that position but open in
the other position.
(b) A raise-lower control switch/push button shall be provided in the local
OLTC control cabinet. This switch shall be operative only when local
remote selector switch is in local position.
(c) An OFF-ON tap changer control switch shall be provided in the local OLTC
control cabinet of the transformer. The tap changer shall be
in-operative
in the OFF position. Also the OFF-ON switch shall have at least one spare
contact per position, which is closed in that position but open in the other
position.
1.21.3.1.31.21.3.1.2

Manual control

The cranking device for manual operation of the OLTC gear shall be removable
and suitable for operation by a man standing at ground level. The mechanism
shall be complete with the following:
(a) Mechanical tap position indicator which shall be clearly visible from near
the transform.
(b) A mechanical operation counter.

(c) Mechanical stops to prevent over cranking of the mechanism beyond the
extreme tap positions.

E-xc
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

(d) The manual control considered as back up to the motor operated load tap
changer control shall be interlocked with the motor to block motor start up
during manual operation. The manual operating mechanism shall be
labelled to show the direction of operation for raising the HV terminal
voltage and vice-versa.
1.21.3.1.4
1.21.3.1.51.21.3.1.3

Remote electrical group control

The OLTC control scheme offered shall have provision of remote electrical group
control during the parallel operation of transformer. This is in addition to
independent control of OLTC:
(a) A four position selector switch having Master, Follower, Independent
and Off position shall be provided in the remote OLTC control panel for
each transformer. This shall be wired to enable operator to select operation
of OLTC in Master, Follower or Independent mode.
(b) Out of step relays with timer contacts shall also be provided to give alarm
and indication in case tap position in all the transformers under group control
are not in same position.
(c) Master Position
If the selector switch is in Master position, it shall be possible to control
the OLTC units in the Follower mode by operating the control of the
master unit. Independent operation of the units under Follower mode shall
have to be prevented. However the units under Independent mode will be
controlled independently.
(d) Follower Position
If the selector switch is in Follower mode, control of OLTC shall be
possible only from panel of the Master unit.
(e) Independent Position
In this position of selector switch, control of OLTC of Individual unit shall
only be possible.
1.21.4
1.21.51.21.4
(a)

The control circuit shall comply with following conditions:

An interlock to cut off electrical control automatically upon recourse
being taken to the manual control in emergency.

E-xci
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

(b)
(c)

(d)
(e)

(f)

(g)

Reinforcement of the initiating impulse for a tap change, ensuring a

positive completion once initiated to the next (higher or lower) tap.
Step by Step operations ensuring only one tap change from each tap
changing impulse and a lock out of the mechanism if the control switch
(or push button) remains in the operate position.
An interlock to cut-out electrical control when it tends to operate the gear
beyond either of the extreme tap positions.
An electrical interlock to cut-off counter impulse for reverse step change
being initiated during a progressing tap change and until the mechanism
comes to rest and resets circuits for a fresh position.
Tap change in progress indication shall be provided by means of an
indicating lamp at the Purchasers control panel. Necessary contacts for
this and for remote tap position indicator at Purchasers control panel
shall be provided by the Bidder.
Protective apparatus, considered essential by the Bidder according to
specialities of the gear.

1.22

COOLING SYSTEM AND ITS CONTROL

1.22.1

Type of Cooling
The design of cooling system shall satisfy the performance requirement.

1.22.1.1

The transformer shall be of ONAN/ONAF/OFAF cooled type and shall be

capable of delivering its full rated output under OFAF cooling. The ONAN rating
of the transformers shall be guaranteed at 60% of the OFAF rating and rating
under ONAF condition although un-guaranteed shall be about 80% of the OFAF
rating.

1.22.1.2

The transformer cooling shall be effected by the use of 2x50% radiator banks or
coolers. Each 50% bank shall have adequate number of fans and/ pumps and
standby fan and/pump. The required nos. of standby fans and/pumps of
approximately 20% capacity shall also be provided with each radiator bank.

1.22.1.3

Each radiator bank shall have its own cooling fans, shut off valves at the top and
bottom (at least 80 mm size), lifting lugs, top and bottom oil filling valves, air
release plug at the top, a drain and sampling valve and thermometer pocket fitted
with captive screw cap on the inlet and outlet.

1.22.1.4

Transformer shall be capable of operating at full load for 10 minutes after failure
of the oil circulating pumps and fans / blowers without the calculated winding hot
spot temperature exceeding 150 deg C. Transformers shall be capable of
operating for 20 minutes in the event of the failure of oil circulating pumps or
blowers (or fans) associated with all cooler banks except one cooler bank, without
the calculated winding hot spot temperature exceeding 150 deg C.

E-xcii
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

1.22.2

Oil Natural Air Forced Cooling (ONAF)

1.22.2.1

The transformer shall be fitted with tubular type detachable radiators fabricated
from pressed steel of adequate thickness with built in AC motor driven fans for air
blast cooling. The air force shall be well directed for uniform cooling over the
radiator surface. The air force should not be directed to the main tank in any case.

1.22.2.2

Air blowers shall be complete with all necessary air ducting. Coolers shall be
designed so that they operate with the minimum noise or drumming. In order to
reduce the transmission of noise and vibration, the blowers shall be either
mounted independent of the coolers or alternatively an approved frame of anti
vibration mounting shall be adopted. The fans shall be provided with guards of
close mesh wire netting for safety. It shall be possible to remove the blowers
complete with motor without disturbing or dismantling the cooler structure
framework. Fans shall have double (Mains + Standby) source of electrical power
supply. Facilities and devices for automatic changeover from running source to
standby source in the event of failure of running source shall be provided. The
fans shall be so located to prevent ingress of rainwater.

1.22.2.3

A cooler control cabinet of weatherproof construction shall be provided at the

transformer for housing control equipment for the fans. It shall be complete with
hinged door and pad lock arrangement, thermostatically controlled space heaters
to prevent condensation, cubicle light switch and cable terminal glands, air circuit
breaker / MCCB of adequate capacity for the incoming supply and MCB for each
fan motor.

1.22.2.4

The terminal connection of fan motors shall be accessible and the greasing
possible without the need for removing any fan guards.

1.22.2.5

Moving parts of motor and pump, if provided, shall be readily removable without
dismounting the coolers, without draining the oil in the transformer tank and with
minimum slippage of oil.

1.22.2.6

Fans shall be so located that they are readily accessible for inspection and repair.
Heat exchangers, fans and oil pumps shall be completely interchangeable.

1.22.3

Oil Forced and Air Forced Cooling (OFAF)

1.22.3.1

The transformer shall be equipped with circulating pumps, driving motors, fans
and associated control gear, pipes, valves, flow indicators etc., so as to provide a
complete independent oil forced and air forced type of cooling system for the
transformer.

1.22.3.2

Each cooler/ radiator bank shall be provided with two (2) nos. of a totally
enclosed oil immersed 100% centrifugal or axial on line oil pump (out of which
one pump shall be standby) with forced air-cooled heat exchangers and motors.
E-xciii

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

Motors and pumps shall be enclosed in all oil tight containers with motor leads
brought out through hermetically sealed bushings. Each cooler unit shall be
arranged for detaching without draining the oil in the transformer tank. Moving
parts of motor and pump shall be readily removable without dismounting the
coolers and with minimum slippage of oil. Pump shall have impeller so as to
permit oil circulation, when pump is idle. Fans shall be so located that they are
readily accessible for inspection and repair. Heat exchangers, fans and oil pumps
shall be completely interchangeable.
1.22.3.3

The oil pump motor shall be of low speed. Measures shall be taken to prevent
maloperation of Buchholz relay due to oil surge caused by starting of all the oil
pumps together.

1.22.3.4

The oil pumps shall be so designed that on failure of power supply to the pump
motor, the pump impeller will not limit the natural circulation of oil by
convection. Technical details for the oil pumps shall be submitted to Purchaser for
approval.

1.22.3.5

Cooler units shall be designed to withstand pressure conditions specified for the
tank but all components entering into the oil circuit shall be capable of
withstanding an internal over pressure without leakage occurring at oil
temperature of 100 deg. C.

1.22.3.6

Cooler units shall be so designed as to be accessible for cleaning and painting

which prevent accumulation of water on outer surfaces, permit complete draining
of oil in the tank and prevent formation of gas pockets when tank is being filled.
Proper clearance shall be kept between all pipe works and live parts.

1.22.3.7

Cooler units shall be connected to tank by machined steel flanges welded to

cooler units and tank and provided with gaskets. At each cooler unit connection,
two valves of 100 mm size shall be provided between the tank and cooler unit,
which can be padlocked in either open or closed position. A separate oil tight
blanking plate shall be provided for each tank connection for use when cooler unit
is detached. The blanking plates when not in use shall be bolted to suitable
structure on the tank. Each cooler unit shall have lifting eye, an oil drain valve at
the bottom with plug and a vent valve with plug at the top. A valve for sampling
oil shall also be provided at the bottom of cooling units.

1.22.3.8

An oil flow indicator with alarm contacts shall be supplied with each pump
assembly to indicate normal pump operation and direction of oil flow.
Disposition of flow indicator shall be shown in the schematic diagram of the
cooling system. An indication shall be provided in the flow indicator to indicate
reverse flow of oil/ loss of oil flow.

1.22.4

Cooler Control

E-xciv
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

1.22.4.1

Cooling system shall be suitable for automatic, local manual and remote operation
and necessary devices for these modes of operations shall be provided. Each
motor (for cooler fans and oil pumps) shall be provided with contactor and control
gear of suitable design both for starting and stopping the motor manually and also
automatically.

1.22.4.2

Automatic control operation of fans/pumps shall be provided (with temperature

change) from the contacts of the Winding Temperature Indicator (WTI). Selector
switches and push buttons shall also be provided in the cooler control cabinet to
disconnect the automatic control and start/stop the fans and pump manually.

1.22.4.3

Each cooling fan and oil pump motors shall be provided with thermal overload,
short circuit and single phasing protection. MCB shall be provided for main
supply and for supply to each fan and pump,.

1.22.4.4

The Bidder shall recommend the setting of WTI for automatic change over of
cooler control from ONAN to ONAF and then to OFAF. The setting shall be such
that is no hunting (i.e. frequent start up operations for small temperature
differences) do not occur. All control and indicating devices for the cooling
system shall be supplied and mounted in transformer marshalling box or a
separate control cabinet, if necessary.

1.22.4.5

The changeover to standby radiator bank oil pump in case of failure of any service
oil pump shall be automatic.

1.22.4.6

All cooling fans and oil pump motors shall be suitable for operation on 415 V, 3
phase, 50 Hz a.c. supply system and shall confirm to latest edition of IS: 325/IEC:
34 as amended upto date except when specified otherwise.

1.22.4.7

Where blowers and oil pumps are provided, the connections shall be arranged so
as to allow the motors or group of motors to be started up and shut down either
collectively or individually.

1.22.4.8

Suitable manual control facility for cooler fans and oil pumps shall be provided.

1.22.4.9

Adequate warning/safety labels are required to indicate that the fans may start at
any time.

1.22.4.10 All settings shall be adjustable.

1.22.4.11 If any one group(s) is out of service and isolated, this shall not affect the
automatic starting of the other radiator banks.
1.22.4.12 All motor contactors and their associated apparatus shall be capable of holding in
and operating satisfactorily without overheating for a period of 10 minutes if the
supply voltage falls for that period to 75 per cent of normal voltage at normal
E-xcv
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

frequency. The motor contactor and associated apparatus shall also be capable of
continuous operation with a supply voltage of 85 percent of normal value and at
normal frequency. The terminals of the motors shall be marked.
1.22.4.13 Alarm & Indications
(a)

The following alarm initiating devices shall be included in the

transformer cooling system:
i)
ii)
iii)

(b)

415 V cooler supply auto changeover

Cooling fan failure for each radiator bank
Oil pump failure for each pump

The following indication shall be provided in cooler control cabinet:

i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
ix)
x)
xi)

Cooling fans start

Oil pump start
Cooling system on automatic control
Cooling system on manual control
Selector switch in auto or manual for each group of fan and pumps
No flow or reverse flow of oil for pumps
Cooler supply failure for each supply
Control supply failure for main and stand by
Cooling fan failure for each cooling fan
Cooling pump failure for each pump
Common thermal overload trip

1.22.4.14 One potential free initiating contact for all the above conditions shall be wired
independently to the terminal blocks of the cooler control cabinet exclusively for
Purchaser's use.
1.22.5

The cooler and its accessories shall preferably be hot dip galvanised or corrosion
resistant paint should be applied to it.

1.22.6

Expansion joints shall be provided, on top and bottom cooler pipe connections as
per requirement.

1.22.7

Air release device and oil plug shall be provided on oil pipe connections. Drain
valves shall be provided in order that each section of pipe work can be drained
independently.

1.23

LOCAL OLTC CONTROL CABINET, COOLER CONTROL CABINET

AND REMOTE TAP CHANGER CONTROL PANEL (RTCC)
(a)

The transformer unit shall be provided with local OLTC control cabinet,
cooler control cabinet and RTCC panel.
E-xcvi

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

(b)

(c)
(d)

1.23.1
1.23.21.23.1

The sheet steel used for cooler control cabinet and local OLTC control
cabinet shall be at least 2.5 mm thick. The degree of protection shall be
IP: 55 in accordance with IS: 13947/IEC: 947. The gaskets used shall be
of neoprene rubber. All the separately mounted cabinets and panels shall
be free standing floor mounted type and have sloping roof. All the control
cabinets shall be provided with suitable lifting arrangement.
A space heater and cubicle lighting with ON-OFF switch shall be
provided in each panel.
Necessary shorting of terminals shall be done at cooler control cabinet,
local OLTC cabinet and remote OLTC panel. All the CT secondary
terminals in the cooler control cabinet shall have provision for shortcircuiting to avoid CT open circuit while it is not in use.

Local OLTC control cabinet

The local OLTC control cabinet shall house all necessary devices meant for
OLTC control & indication.
The auxiliary devices for electrical control of the OLTC shall be housed in a
weatherproof cabinet. The local OLTC control cabinet shall be complete with the
following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)

A circuit breaker/contactor with thermal overload devices for controlling

the AC auxiliary supply to the OLTC motor.
Cubicle light with door switch.
Space heaters to prevent condensation of moisture.
Pad locking arrangement for hinged door of cabinet.
Cable terminal glands for power and control cables to the OLTC gear.
The following alarm initiating devices shall be provided on the local
OLTC control cabinet:
i)
ii)
iii)

1.23.31.23.2
(a)

Failure of AC supply to OLTC control panel.

Tap change in progress.
Tap changers of all parallel operating transformers are not on the
same tap.

Cooler Control Cabinet

The cooler control cabinet shall have all necessary devices meant for
cooler control and local temperature indicators. All the contacts of
various protective devices mounted on the transformer and all the
secondary terminals of the bushing CTs shall also be wired upto the
terminal board in the cooler control cabinet. All the necessary terminals
for remote connection to Purchasers C&R panel shall be wired upto the
cooler control cabinet.
E-xcvii

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

(b)

The cooler control cabinet shall have two (2) sections. One section shall
have the control equipment exclusively meant for cooler control. The
other section shall house the temperature indicators, aux. CTs and the
terminal boards meant for termination of various alarm and trip contacts
as well as various bushing CT secondary. Alternatively the two sections
may be provided as two separate panels depending on the standard
practice of the Bidder.

(c)

The temperature indicators shall be so mounted that the dials are not more
than 1200 mm from ground level. Glazed door of suitable size shall be
provided for convenience of reading.

(d)

One cooler control cabinet of each type shall be tested for IP: 55
protection in accordance with IS: 13947.

1.23.41.23.3

Remote Tap Changer Control (RTCC)

(a)

The Contractor shall supply a Remote Tap Changer Control (RTCC)

panel for remote operation of On Load Tap Changing gear.

(b)

The RTCC panel shall be located in Purchasers control room. The size
and colour of the RTCC panel to be supplied by the Contractor shall
match with Purchasers Control Panel. The matching details shall be
finalised during detailed engineering.

(c)

The RTCC panel shall house the actuating switch for electrical
raise/lower control, tap position indicator, signal lamps for Tap changer
in progress and Tap changer out of step, switch for failure of AC
supply to OLTC motor and other auxiliary devices for the remote
electrical control of OLTC. For tap position indicator, OLTC
transducer shall be provided in the RTCC panel.

(d)

AutoManual maintained contact selector switch for each transformer

for parallel operation of transformer and MasterFollower maintained
contact selector switch for each transformer for parallel operation of
transformer shall be provided in RTCC Panel.

(e)

All the controls, indications and alarms shall be provided in the RTCC
panel.

1.24

CONTROL CABINET/MARSHALLING BOX

1.24.1

All control cabinets, panels and marshalling boxes being supplied as transformer
accessories except for remote control panels shall be suitable for outdoor
operation.
E-xcviii

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

1.24.2

Local control cabinets and marshalling boxes shall preferably be mounted on the
transformer tank. In case control cabinets cannot be conveniently mounted on the
transformer tank, floor mounting type cabinets may be offered suitable for
mounting on foundations near the transformers.

1.24.3

The external cables shall terminate at the central control cabinet for which
necessary termination arrangement shall be provided. The central control cabinet
shall be provided with adequate number of terminal strips. All the terminals for
remote connection shall be wired upto the central control cabinet from the
individual local control cabinet viz., cooler control cabinet. OLTC control cabinet
etc.

1.24.4

Other requirements of control cabinets/marshalling box are given in Clause No.

2.0 of Annexure 1: Auxiliaries of this section.

1.25

BOLTS & NUTS

1.25.1

All bolts & nuts exposed to atmosphere shall be of hot dip galvanised steel.

1.26

FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES

1.26.1

The following fittings shall be provided with each transformer covered in this
Specification:
(a)

(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)

(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
(m)

Conservator for main tank with oil filling hole and cap, isolating valves,
drain valve, magnetic oil level gauge with low level alarm contacts,
minimum maximum - normal oil level indicator, dehydrating breather
with oil seal.
Conservator for OLTC with drain valve, oil surge relay, filling hole with
cap, prismatic oil level gauge and silica gel breather.
Signal transmitter: as detailed in Annexure-I: Auxiliaries of this Section
Pressure relief device with alarm/trip contact
Buchholz relay double float / reed type with one shut off / isolating valve
(80 mm size) on both sides, bleeding pipe with test cock at the end to
collect gases, alarm and trip contacts. (Rating: 1 Amp, 220 V DC), gas
collection box and gas check valve at ground level.
Air release plug
Inspection openings and covers
Bushing with metal parts and gaskets to suit the termination arrangement.
Winding temperature indicators for local and remote mounting.
Oil temperature indicators.
Oil preservation equipment
Oil flow indicator
Cooling accessories

E-xcix
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

(n)
(o)
(p)
(q)
(r)
(s)
(t)
(u)
(v)
(w)
(x)
(y)
(z)
(aa)
(bb)
(cc)

Cover lifting eyes, transformer lifting lugs, jacking pads, towing holes
and core and winding lifting lugs.
Protected type mercury or alcohol in glass thermometer.
The rating and diagram plates on transformers and auxiliary apparatus.
Two Earthing terminals
Flanged bi-directional wheels/ trolley for movement
Cooler control cabinet
On load tap changing equipment and OLTC control cabinet/cooler control
cabinet
Drain valves/plugs shall be provided in order that each section of pipe
work can be drained independently.
Bushing CTs.
Insulating oil.
Terminal marking plate
Lifting bollards
Haulage lugs
Weather proof marshalling box for housing control equipment and
terminal connections
Valve schedule plate
Valves:
i)
Oil valves between cooler and main tank
ii)
Drain valve with padlocking arrangement (size: 100mm)
iii) Two filter valves (size: 50 mm) on diagonally opposite ends-one at
top and other at bottom with padlocking arrangement on bottom
valve.
iv) Two sampling valves (size: 15mm) at top and bottom of main tank.
v)
Weather proof marshalling box for equipment & control terminal
connections

Note: The fittings listed above are only indicative and any other fittings, which
generally are required for satisfactory operation of the transformer are deemed to be
included at no extra cost to the purchaser.
1.27

MOTORS

1.27.1

Motors for fans, OLTC shall conform to IS: 325 shall be of self ventilated type
having totally enclosed fan cooled enclosures. Motors shall be "Squirrel Cage"
three phase induction motors of sufficient size capable of satisfactory operation
for the application and duty as required for the driven equipment. Motor winding
insulation shall be conventional class "B" type. Motors shall be provided with
starter, thermal overload, short circuit and single phasing protection. Motors shall
have hose proof enclosure equivalent to IP: 55 as per relevant IS.

1.28

INSPECTION, TESTING AND INSPECTION CERTIFICATES

E-c
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

1.28.1

The Transformer equipment/material shall be offered for inspection in accordance

with relevant clauses of Section General Technical Requirements.

1.28.2

In accordance with the requirements stipulated in relevant clauses of Section

General Technical Requirements, the transformer along with its accessories
should have been successfully type tested as per IEC 60076/IS-2026 and shall
be subjected to routine and acceptance tests as per IEC: 60076/IS-2026.

1.28.3

The test reports of all type tests as per IEC: 60076/IS-2026, IS: 9921/IEC: 129, if
not submitted with the bid or with the post bid clarification shall be submitted by
the Bidder during detailed engineering stage.

1.28.4

All additional type tests, additional routine tests and special tests listed in Clause
no. 1.28.11.2, 1.28.11.4 and 1.28.11.5 shall be carried out in presence of
Purchasers representative. The price for thee tests shall be included in bid
price.

1.28.5

Cabinet/ panel of each type should have been tested for IP-55 degree of protection
in accordance with IS: 13947 / relevant IEC. Copy of these type test reports shall
be submitted by the Contractor at detailed engineering stage.

1.28.6

The Contractor shall furnish a comprehension testing and inspection

programme for inspection and testing of transformer during the manufacture of
transformer. The type of the inspection envisaged by the Purchaser/Owner is
given in Clause no. 1.28.10. A typical test plan is given in Cl. No. 1.28.11.
However this is not a comprehensive programme as it is Contractor's
responsibility to draw up and carry out such programme in the form of detailed
Quality Assurance Plan indicating customer hold points duly approved by the
Purchaser/Owner for necessary implementation. The requirement of Quality
Assurance Plan (QAP) are indicated in Section General Technical
Requirements of this Document.

1.28.7

Bushings insulating oil and accessories shall comply with the requirements of
type and routine tests specified in Clause No. 1.28.11.6 to 1.28.11.13.

1.28.8

No equipment / material shall be despatched until the test reports are duly
approved by the Purchaser and Material Despatch Clearance Certificate (MDCC)
is issued.

1.28.9
1.28.10
1.28.111.28.9 Manufacturing and Testing Facilities
1.28.9.1

The Bidder shall submit details of test facilities available at the

Bidders/manufacturers works for carrying out all the routine and type tests as
specified. Any limitations shall be clearly stated by the Bidder.
E-ci

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

1.28.9.2

In case the test facilities for any particular test are not available in the
Bidder's/ Manufacturers works, the proposed arrangement of carrying out
of that test shall be clearly indicated. The Contractor shall bear all additional
costs related to tests which are not possible to carry out at his own works.

1.28.121.28.10

INSPECTION

1.28.10.1 Tank and Conservators

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)

(i)
(j)

(k)
(l)

Certification of chemical analysis and material tests of plates

Check for flatness
Electrical interconnection of top & bottom by braided tinned copper
flexible
Welder's qualification and weld procedure
Testing of electrodes for quality weld base materials and coatings
Inspection major weld preparation
Crack detection of major strength of weld seams by dye penetration test
Measurement of film thickness of:
i)
Oil insoluble varnish
ii)
Zinc chromate paint
iii) Finished coat
Check correct dimensions between wheels, demonstrate turning of
wheels, through 90 deg. C and further dimensional check
Check for physical properties of materials for lifting lugs, jacking pads,
etc. All load bearing welds including lifting lug welds shall be subjected
to Non Destructive Testing (NDT)
Leakage tests of the conservator
Certification of all test results.

1.28.10.2 Core
(a)
(b)

(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)

Sample testing of core materials for checking specific loss, bend

properties, magnetisation characteristics and thickness.
Check on the quality of varnish if used on the stampings.
i)
Measurement of thickness and hardness of varnish on stampings.
ii)
Solvent resistance test to check that varnish does not react in hot
oil.
iii) Check over all quality of varnish by sampling to ensure uniform
shining colour, no bare spot, no over burnt varnish layer and no
bubbles on varnished surface.
Check on the amount of burrs.
Bow check on stampings
Check for overlapping of stampings. Corners of the sheet are to be flat.
Visual and dimensional check during assembly stage.
E-cii

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

(g)
(h)

(i)
(j)
(k)

Check for interlaminar insulation between core sections, before and after
pressing.
Check on completed core for measurement of iron loss and check for any
hot spot by exciting the core so as to induce the designed value of flux
density in the core.
Visual and dimensional check for straightness and roundness of core,
thickness of limbs and suitability of clamps.
High voltage test (2 kV for one minute) between core and clamps.
Certification of all test results.

1.28.10.3 Insulating Material:

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)

Sample check for physical properties of materials.

Check for dielectric strength.
Visual and dimensional checks.
Check for reaction of hot oil on insulating materials.
Dimension stability test at high temperature for insulating material
Tracking resistance test on insulating materials
Check for tensile strength.
Certification of all test results.

1.28.10.4 Winding
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
(m)

Sample check on winding conductor for mechanical properties and

electrical conductivity.
Visual and dimensional checks on conductor for scratches, dent marks
etc.
Sample check on insulating paper for pH value, bursting strength, electric
strength.
Check for the reaction of hot oil on insulating paper.
Check for bonding of the insulating paper with conductor.
Check and ensure that physical condition of all material taken for winding
is satisfactory and free of dust.
Check for absence of short circuit between parallel strands.
Check for brazed joints wherever applicable.
Measurement of voltage ratio to be carried out when core/yoke is
completely restacked and all connections are ready.
Conductor enamel tests for checking of cracks, leakage and pin holes.
Conductor flexibility test.
Heat shrink test for enamelled wire.
Certification of all test results.

1.28.10.5 Checks before Drying Process

(a)

Check condition of insulation on the conductor and between the winding.

E-ciii

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)

Check insulation distance between high voltage connection, cables and

earth and other live parts.
Check insulation distances between low voltage connection and earth and
other parts.
Insulation test of core earthing. Insulation of the core shall be tested at 2
kV / Min. between core to bolts and core to clamp plates.
Check for proper cleanliness and absence of dust etc.
Certification of all test results.

1.28.10.6 Checks during Drying Process

(a)
(b)
(c)

Measurement and recording of temperature, vacuum and drying time

during vacuum treatment.
Check for completeness of drying by periodic measuring IR and Tan
delta.
Certification of all test results.

1.28.10.7 Assembled Transformer

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)

Check completed transformer against approved outline drawings,

provision for all fittings, finish level etc.
Die Penetration test shall be carried out after jacking test.
Jacking test with oil on all the assembled transformers.
Test to check effectiveness of shielding of the tank.

1.28.10.8 Oil
Site tests shall be performed on oil samples before and after filling in the
transformer. Oil parameters shall conform to Clause. no. 1.17.4 prior to filing at
site and oil samples taken from the tank top, bottom and cooling system (after
filling) shall possess characteristics indicated in Clause. no. 1.17.4. The
contractor shall warrant that oil furnished is in accordance with the specification
as given under Clause. no. 1.17.4.
1.28.10.9 Bought out items
The Manufacturers name/ makes of all major bought out items shall be subject to
Purchasers approval. The contractor shall also prepare a comprehensive
inspection & testing programme for all bought out/ sub contracted items (as per
relevant IS) and shall submit the same to the Purchaser for approval. The
purchaser reserves the right to insist for witnessing the acceptance, routine testing
or waiving off of tests of the bought out items. Such programme shall include the
following components:
(a)
(b)

Buchholz Relay.
Axles and wheels
E-civ

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
(m)
(n)
(o)
(p)
(q)
(r)

Winding temperature indicators for local and remote mounting.

Oil temperature indicators.
Bushings.
Bushings current transformers
Cooler control cabinet /OLTC control cabinet.
Cooling equipments
Fans/air Blowers
Oil pumps
Auxiliary motors and motor starting contacts
On Load Tap change gear.
Pressure relief device
Terminal connectors
Control devices
Oil level indicator
Radiator
Pressure gauges

The above list is not exhaustive and the Contractor shall also include other bought
out items in his programme.
The list of transformer accessories and routine test certificates required for them are
given in Annexure-II of this Section. The Manufacturers test report shall be
submitted by the Contractor for approval of Purchaser/Owner.

1.28.131.28.11

TESTINGS

A typical test plan is indicated below:

No.

Item

Test category

1.

Measurement of winding
resistance
Voltage
ratio
measurements
Polarity test
No-load loss and current
measurement
Impedance voltage and
load loss measurement
Short duration heat run
test
Temperature rise test

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Routine

First
unit*

Other
units

Routine

Routine
Routine

Routine

Routine

Additional Type
Test

E-cv
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

Not
Applicable
(NA)

8.

Type

NA

Routine

Special Test

Special Test
NA

NA

NA

Special Test

Special Test

Special Test

NA

Routine
Routine
Special Test
Routine

Routine

Special Test

NA

Additional
Routine Test
Measurement of no load Additional
current with 415 V, 50 Hz Routine Test
AC on LV side.

Overload testing in short

circuit method
9.
Measurement
of
insulation resistance
10. Measurement
of
insulation power factor
and capacitance between
winding and earth
11. Lightning impulse test
11a. Measurement
of
transferred surge on LV
(Tertiary) due to HV
lightning impulse and IV
lighting impulse (in case
of
transformer
with
tertiary winding).
12. Switching impulse test
12a. Measurement
of
transferred surge on LV
(Tertiary) due to HV
switching impulse and IV
switching impulse (in
case of transformer with
tertiary winding).
13. Separate source voltage
withstand test
14. Induced over voltage test
with Partial Discharge
measurement
15. Measurement of acoustic
noise level
16. Test of cooling device
17. On load tap changer test
18. Gas-in-oil analysis
19. Core assembly dielectric
and earthing continuity
test
20. Appearance, construction
and dimension check
21. Measurement of harmonic
level in no load current
22. Magnetic balance test
23.

NA
NA

E-cvi
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

24.
25.

26.
27.
28.
29.
30.

31.

32.
33.

Frequency
Response
analysis (FRA)
High voltage with stand
test
on
auxiliary
equipment and wiring
after assembly
Over excitation test
Oil leakage test on
transformer tank
Tank vacuum test
Tank pressure test
Measurement of power
taken by fans and oil
pumps of cooler banks.
Transformer Tank
(a) Vacuum Test
(b) Pressure Test on
completely
assembled
transformer
Pressure Relief Device
(PRD)
Power Frequency Voltage
Withstand Test

Additional
Routine Test
Routine

Routine
Routine

Routine
Routine
Special Test

NA

Additional Type
Test

NA

Additional Type
Test
Additional
Routine Test

NA

* means the first unit manufactured at each manufacturing plant.

NOTE: Additional type tests and additional routine tests shall be carried out in
presence of Purchaser representatives.

1.28.11.1

Type Tests

Type tests shall be carried out as per relevant IS / IEC. The test reports of all type
tests shall be submitted by the Contractor for the Purchasers review.

1.28.11.2

Additional Type Test

Following additional type tests shall be conducted on one transformer of each

rating (for 3 phase transformer):
(A) Temperature rise test as per IS: 2026 (Part-II)
Measurement of auxiliary losses shall also be made along with the test for
calculation of temperature rise.
Gas chromatographic analysis on oil shall also be conducted before and after this test and the values shall be
recorded in the test report. The sampling shall be in accordance with IEC 60567. For the evaluation of the gas

E-cvii
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

analysis in temperature rise test, the procedure shall be as per IS: 9434 (based on IEC: 60567) and results will be
interpreted as per IS: 10593 (based on IEC: 60599).

The temperature rise test shall be conducted at a tap for the worst combination
of loadings on the windings (two/three) of the transformer.
(B) On the transformer tank
a)

Vacuum Test:
The transformer tank shall be subjected to full vacuum. The tank
designed for full vacuum (760 mm of mercury at sea level) shall be
tested at an internal pressure of 3.33 kN/m2 absolute (25 mm of Hg) for
one hour. The permanent deflection of flat plates after the vacuum has
been released shall not exceed the values specified below and the
performance of the transformers shall not be affected in any way.
Horizontal length of flat plate (mm) Permanent deflection (mm)
Upto and including 750
5
751 to 1250
6.5
1251 to 1750
8
1751 to 2000
9.5
2001 to 2250
11
2251 to 2500
12.5
2501 to 3000
16
Above 3000
19

b)

Pressure Test on completely assembled transformer

The transformer tank together with its active part as assembled for
type test (i.e. including pipe work and cooling equipment and excluding
PRD and conservator when air
cell is provided) shall be subjected
to a pressure corresponding to twice the normal head of oil or to the
normal pressure plus 35 KN/m2 whichever is lower. The applied
pressure shall be measured at the base of the tank and maintained for
eight (8) hours. The permanent deflection of flat plates after excess
pressure has been released shall not exceed the values specified in (a)
above.
Before conducting the pressure test, the following are to be taken care
of:
i)

Pressure relief valve / relief vent are to be removed and the opening
blanked.
ii) Transformer and tap changer conservators are to be disconnected.
iii) Divertor switch compartment of tap changer to be connected with
transformer tank for equalising the pressure on both sides.
E-cviii
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

iv) Oil should be completely filled and all trapped air released.
(C) Pressure Relief Device (PRD)
The Pressure Relief Device of each size shall be subjected to increasing oil
pressure. It shall operate before reaching the test pressure specified in the test
at Clause No.1.28.11.2 (B)(b). The operating pressure shall be recorded. The
device shall seal off after the excess pressure has been released. The routine
tests mentioned in Clause 1.17.1.7 shall be conducted on PRD.

1.28.11.3

Routine Tests

All standard routine tests in accordance with IS: 2026 / IEC: 60076 shall be
carried out on each transformer and complete test report shall be submitted to the
Purchaser after proper scrutiny and signing on each page by the test engineer of
the contractor.

1.28.11.4

Additional Routine Tests

In addition to the routine test mentioned in IS: 2026 (Part I) the following
additional test shall be carried out on each transformer.
a)

All welds shall be tested by the manufacturer for leakage by a standard

practice like dye penetration test etc. and the factory test results shall be
furnished.

b)

Oil leakage test on transformer tank:

Fabrication Stage:
i)

The tank shall be tested for oil tightness by being completely filled
with air at a pressure corresponding to twice the normal head of oil
or to normal pressure plus 35 kN/m2 whichever is lower. The
pressure shall be maintained for a period of minimum one hour
during which time no leakage shall occur. The equivalent air
pressure corresponding to oil pressure calculated at the base of the
tank to be considered for air pressure test. Permanent deflection of
flat plates shall be measured on one tank of each design, after the
excess pressure has been released and shall not exceed the figures
specified in Clause No. 1.28.11.2(B)(a) above.

ii)

The conservator shall be tested for leakage by being completely

filled with air at 35 kN/m2. The pressure shall be maintained for a
period of one hour during which time no leakage shall occur.
E-cix

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

iii)

The radiator shall be tested for leakage by placing them

horizontally in a tank filled with clean water and applying air
pressure 2 kg/m2 for atleast 15 minutes during which time no
leakage shall occur.

Transformer Assembly stage:

Oil pressure test to be conducted on tank with turret and all other
accessories as assembled for routine test by filling completely with oil of a
viscosity not greater than that of a insulating oil conforming to IS: 335 at
the ambient temperature, at a pressure corresponding to twice the normal
head of oil or to normal pressure plus 35 kN/m2, measured at the base of
the tank, whichever is lower. The pressure shall be maintained for a
period not less than twelve (12) hours during which time no leakage shall
occur.
c)

Magnetic circuit test

After assembly each core shall be tested for one minute at 2000 volts
between all bolts, side plates and structural steel work.

d)

Power frequency voltage withstand test

e)

Measurement of exciting current, harmonics

Measurement of exciting current, excitation losses and harmonics in Noload current shall be carried at 85%, 90%, 100% and 105% of rated
voltage as per IS: 2026 (Part I) as amended up to date. Excitation losses
given in the test report shall be those measured after the impulse tests are
completed. Endeavour shall be made to carry out the measurement of
exciting current beyond 105% of rated voltage by the method to be
mutually agreed between the Contractor and the Purchaser. The Contractor
shall specify the method of such measurement and its limitations during
detailed engineering stage.

f)

Frequency Response Analysis (FRA)

FRA test shall be conducted on each transformer at factory as well as after
transportation to site, prior to energisation of transformer. The site test
result has to be compared with factory test result and the signature shall be
kept for future reference. If there is abnormality in the site test result,
necessary action has to be taken by the manufacturer / the contractor for
rectification of defects of transformer.

E-cx
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

g)

Measurement of no-load current with 415 V, 50 Hz supply on LV side

h)

High voltage withstand test shall be performed on auxiliary

equipment and wiring after complete assembly.

1.28.11.5

Special Tests

Following special tests shall also be conducted in presence of Purchasers

representative on 3 phase transformer:.

i)

Dielectric tests
The following dielectric tests shall be carried out:
145 kV winding
a)
b)

Lightning impulse voltage (withstand) test on all the line

terminals.
Induced over voltage withstand test with partial discharge
indication.

36 kV winding

ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)

1.28.11.6

a)

Separate source voltage withstand test on all the line terminals.

b)

Lightning impulse voltage (withstand) test on all the line terminals.

Measurement of zero-sequence impedance (for three phase transformer

only) as per IS: 2026/ IEC: 60076.
Measurement of acoustic noise level.
Measurement of the harmonics in the no load current.
Measurement of the power taken by the fans and oil pumps.
Dissolved Gas Analysis before and after the temperature rise test
Measurement of capacitance and tan delta to determine capacitance
between windings and to earth
One cooler control cabinet, oil surge relay, magnetic oil level gauge and
all junction terminal boxes, PRD enclosure shall be tested for IP: 55
protection in accordance with IS: 13947.

Tests on Transformer Bushings:

Transformer bushings shall comply in all respects with the type and routine tests
laid down in IS: 2099 (as amended upto date).

E-cxi
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

1.28.11.7

Tests on insulating oil:

Samples of oil from each bulk consignment shall be tested in accordance with IS:
335 (as amended upto date) before any oil is despatched.

1.28.11.8

Tests on On-Load Tap Changer:

On-load tap changers shall comply in all respects with type and routine tests
specified in IS: 8468 (As amended upto date). Manufacturer's tests report shall be
submitted by the Contractor.

1.28.11.9

Tests on Accessories:

Auxiliary wiring in all equipment connected thereto shall be subjected to a test

voltage of 2000 Volts at 50 Hz for one minute.

1.28.11.10 Tests on Buchholz Relay:

The Buchholz relay when completely assembled and ready for mounting in
service shall be subjected to the type and routine tests specified in IS: 3637 (as
amended upto date). Where oil is referred to it shall have a viscosity at 27 deg. C
not greater than that of insulating oil conforming to IS: 335. In addition to the
above each Buchholz relay shall conform to the following tests:
i)

ii)

The empty relay shall be tilted, as if mounted in pipe work rising from
tank to conservator at an increasing angle until the gas collection contacts
open. The angle of tilt shall then reduce to less than 13 deg. to the
horizontal.
With relay mounted at a falling angle of 16 deg. to the horizontal and full
of oil gas collection contacts shall be open.

The Contractor shall carry out additional type tests or furnish type test reports to
prove that the Buchholz relays offered by him, satisfy the above requirements
during earthquakes and do not mal operate.
The correct functioning of all apparatus fitted with alarm or tripping contacts shall
be checked with a buzzer.

1.28.11.11 Cooling Plant:

Unless otherwise approved coolers shall be tested for pressure tests as per Clause
No. 2.30.10.2(B)(b). No leakage shall occur.

1.28.11.12 Oil Pumps, Pipe works and Valves:

E-cxii
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

All oil pumps and oil pipe work and valves work shall withstand hydraulic
pressure of 1.41 kg / sq cm for 15 minutes. The testing medium shall be oil of
viscosity not greater than that of insulating oil conforming to IS: 335 at 27 deg. C.
Relevant routine and type test reports shall be furnished.

1.28.11.13 Other Auxiliary Equipments:

Equipment mentioned below shall conform in all respects to the requirements of
IEC/IS standards mentioned against each:
a)

Fans
IS: 2312 for propeller type AC ventilating fans.

b)

Motors
IS: 325 for three phase induction motors.
IS: 996 for single phase small AC and universal motors.

c)

Oil pumps
IS: 5120 for rotor dynamics special purpose pumps.

d)

Switchgear
IS: 2607 for isolators with rated voltage not exceeding 1 kV.
IS: 1882 or IEC: 992 for motor starters.
IS: 2516 for circuit breaker for rated voltage not exceeding 1 kV.
IEC: 337 for control switches.

For the equipments and auxiliaries for which no IEC or IS standard has been
specially stipulated, the Contractor shall indicate details of the standards to which
these conform.

1.28.11.14 Additional Tests:

The Purchaser reserves the right to have other reasonable tests carried out at his
own expense either before despatch or at site to ensure that the transformer
complies with the requirements of this specification.

1.28.11.15 Preshipment check at Manufacturer's works

(a)
(b)

(c)
(d)

Check for interchangeability of components of similar transformers for

mounting dimensions.
Check for proper packing and preservation of accessories like radiators,
bushings, explosion vent, dehydrating breather, rollers, buchholz relay,
fans, control cubicle, connecting pipes, conservator etc.
Check for proper provision for bracing to arrest the movement of core
and winding assembly inside the tank.
Gas tightness test to conform tightness.
E-cxiii

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

(e)

Determination of leakage rate and ensure the adequate reserve gas

capacity.

1.28.11.16 Inspection and testing at site

The supplier shall furnish a detailed inspection and testing programme for field
activities, covering areas right from the receipt of material stage upto
commissioning stage. An indicative programme of inspection as envisaged by the
Purchaser is given below. This is however not intended to form a comprehensive
programme as it is Contractor's responsibility to draw up and carry out such a
programme duly approved by the Purchaser.
Site test shall be performed on oil sample before and after filling in the
transformer. Oil parameters shall conform to Clause no. 2.17.4 prior to filling at
site and oil samples taken from the tank top, bottom and cooling system (after
filling) shall possess characteristics indicated in clause no. 2.17.4. The Contractor
shall warrant that oil furnished is in accordance with the specification as given
under Clause no. 2.17.4.

1.28.11.17 Receipt and storage checks

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)

Check and record condition of each package, visible parts of the

transformers etc. for any damage.
Check and record the gas pressure in the transformer tank as well as in
the gas pressure cylinder.
Visual check for wedging of core and coils before fillings up with oil and
also check conditions of core and winding in general.
Check and record reading of impact recorder at receipt and verify the
allowable limits as per Manufacture's recommendations.

1.28.11.18 Installation checks

(a)

Inspection and performance testing of accessories like tap changers,

cooling fans, oil pumps etc.

(b)

i) Check the direction of rotation of fans and pumps.

ii) Check the bearing lubrication.

(c)

Check the whole assembly for tightness, general appearance etc.

(d)

Oil leakage tests.

(e)

Capacitance and tan delta measurement of bushing before

fixing/connecting to the winding. The Contractor shall furnish these
values for site reference.

E-cxiv
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

(f)

Leakage test on bushing before erection.

(g)

Test on oil samples shall be carried out in accordance with clause no.
1.17.4. Sample shall be taken only after the oil has been allowed to settle
for 24 hours.

(h)

Removal of blanking plates.

(i)

Measure & record the dew point of Nitrogen or dry air in the main
tank before assembly.

1.28.11.19 Commissioning Checks

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)

(e)
(f)
(g)

(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
(m)
(n)
(o)
(p)

Check the colour of silica gel breather.

Check the oil level in the breather housing, conservator tanks, cooling
system, condenser bushing etc.
Check the bushing for conformity of connection to the lines and tan delta
test for bushings at 10 kV (Min.)
Check for correct operation of all protection devices and alarm
i)
Buchholz relay
ii)
Excessive winding temperature
iii) Excessive oil temperature
iv) Low oil flow
v)
Low oil level indication
vi) Fan & pump failure protection.
Check for the adequate protection on the electric circuit supplying the
accessories.
Check resistance of all windings on all steps of the tap changer.
Insulation resistance measurement for the following:
i)
Control wiring
ii)
Tap changer motor and control
iii) Cooling system motor and control
iv) Main windings
Check for cleanliness of the transformer and the surroundings.
Phase out and vector group test.
Ratio test on all taps.
Magnetising current test.
Capacitance & Tan delta measurement of winding & bushing.
Frequency Response Analysis (FRA)
Dissolved Gas Analysis (DGA) of oil just before commissioning and after
24 hours energisation at site
Continuously observe the transformer operation at no load for 72 hours.
Gradually put the transformer on load, check and measure increase in
temperature in relation to the load and check the operation with respect to
temperature rise, noise level etc.

E-cxv
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

(q)

(r)

Partial Discharge (PD) test at site at 1.0 or 1.1 p.u. However, conduction
of PD test shall be decided during detailed engineering in consultation
with manufacturer.
Any other tests recommended by manufacturer.

The Contractor shall prepare a comprehensive commissioning report including all

commissioning test results & forward to Purchaser for future record.
1.28.141.28.12

TEST REPORTS

i)

Five (5) copies of type test reports shall be furnished to the Purchaser /
Owner within one month of conducting the tests. One copy will be
returned duly certified by Purchaser to the Contractor within three weeks
thereafter and on receipt of the same, Contractor shall commence with the
commercial production of the concerned material.

ii)

Five (5) copies of acceptance test reports shall be furnished to the

Purchaser. One copy will be returned duly certified by the Purchaser and
only thereafter shall the material be despatched.

iii)

All records of routine tests reports shall be maintained by the Contractor at

his works for periodic inspection by the Purchaser.

iv)

All test reports for tests conducted during manufacturing shall be

maintained by the Contractor. These shall be produced for verification as
and when requested for by the Purchaser having following details:
a. Complete identification data including serial number of the
transformer / equipment tests.
b. Method of application, where applied, during and interpretation of
results of each test.
c. Temperature dependent data corrected to 75 deg. C.

Routine test reports shall also contain the following information:

i)
ii)
iii)

Calculated values of regulation at unity, 0.9, 0.8 lagging and 0.8 leading
power factors.
Calculated values of positive, negative and zero phase sequence
impedance of three-phase bank.
Calculated values of efficiency of transformer at 50, 75 & 100% of rated
capacity at 1.0 and 0.9 power factors.

1.29

OIL STORAGE TANK

1.29.1

General
E-cxvi

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

This specification covers supply of oil storage tank of 15 cubic meter capacity
alongwith complete accessories.
1.29.2

Standard
The oil storage tank shall be designed and fabricated as per relevant Indian
standards e.g. IS: 803 or other internationally acceptable standards.

1.29.3

Specifications
Transformer oil storage tanks shall be tow able & rested on pneumatic tyres of
adequate quantity & size. The tank shall be of cylindrical shape & mounted
horizontally and made of mild steel plate of adequate thickness. Size of the
storage tank shall be as follows:
Diameter
Capacity

:
:

2.5 meter
15 cubic meter

The tank shall be designed for storage of oil at a temperature of 100oC

1.29.3.1

The Bidder may further note than maximum height of any part of the complete
assembly of the storage tank shall not exceed 4.0 metres above road top.

1.29.3.2

The tank shall have adequate number of jacking pad so that it can be kept on jack
while completely filled with oil. The tank shall be provided with suitable saddles
so that tank can be rested on ground after removing the pneumatic tyres.

1.29.3.3

The tank shall also be fitted with manhole, outside & inside access ladder, silica
gel breather assembly, inlet & outlet valve, oil sampling valve with suitable
adopter, oil drainage valve, air vent etc. Pulling hook on both ends of the tank
shall be provided so that the tank can be pulled from either end while completely
filled with oil. Bidder shall indicate the engine capacity in horsepower to pull one
tank completely fitted with oil. Oil level indicator shall be provided with
calibration in terms of litre so that at any time operator can have an idea of oil in
the tank. Suitable arrangement shall also be provided to prevent overflow in the
tank. Four nos. suitable rubber hoses with couplers and unions each not less than
10 metre long shall also be provide.

1.29.3.4

The internal & external surfaces to be paid shall be shot or sand blasted to remove
all rust and scale of foreign adhering matter or grease. All steel surfaces in
contact with insulating oil shall be painted with two coats of heat & oil resistant
anti corrosive paint.
All steel surfaces exposed to weather shall be given a primary coat of zinc
chromate, second coat of oil & weather resistant paint of a colour distinct from
E-cxvii

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

primary and final two coats of glossy oil & weather resistant light grey paint in
accordance with shade no. 631 of IS: 5. All paints shall be carefully selected to
withstand heat & extremes of weather. The pain shall not scale off or crinkle or
be removed by abrasion due to normal handling. The minimum thickness of
outside painting of tank shall be 20 microns per coat, the total thickness shall be
within 70 to 100 microns.
1.29.3.5

The tank shall contain a self-mounted centrifugal oil pump with inlet and outlet
valves, with couplers - suitable for flexible rubber hoses and necessary switchgear
for its control. These shall be no rigid connection to the pump. The pump shall
be electric motor driven, and shall have a discharge of not less than 6.0 kl/hr. with
a discharge head of 8.0 m. the pump motor and the control cabinet shall be
enclosed in a cubical with IP-55 enclosure.

1.29.3.6

The scope of oil storage tank shall be included in the bid price as per the quantity
indicate din the bid price schedule.

1.30

OIL SAMPLING BOTTLE

1.30.1.1

Oil sampling bottles shall be suitable for collecting oil samples from transformers
and shunt reactors, for Dissolved Gas Analysis. Bottles shall be robust enough, so
that no damage occurs during frequent transportation of samples from site to
laboratory.

1.30.1.2

Oil sampling bottles shall be made of stainless steel having capacity of 1 litre.

1.30.1.3

Oil sampling bottles shall be capable of being sealed gas tight and shall be fitted
with cocks on both ends.

1.30.1.4

The design of bottles & seal shall be such that loss of hydrogen shall not exceed
5% per week.

1.30.1.5

An impermeable oil proof, transparent plastic or rubber tube of about 5 mm

diameter, and of sufficient length shall also be provided with each bottle
alongwith suitable connectors to fit the tube on to the oil sampling valve of the
equipment and the oil collecting bottles respectively.

1.30.1.6

The scope of oil sampling bottles shall be included in the bid price as per the
quantity indicated in the bid price schedule.

1.31

Void

1.32

PACKING AND FORWARDING

1.32.1

The equipment shall be packaged in crates suitable for Vertical/ Horizontal

transport as the case may be and suitable to withstand handling during transport
E-cxviii

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

and outdoor storage during transit. The Bidder shall be responsible for any
damages to the equipment during transit, due to improper and inadequate packing.
The easily damageable material shall be carefully packed and marked with the
appropriate caution symbol. Wherever necessary, proper arrangement for lifting
such as lifting hooks etc. shall be provided. Any material found short inside the
packing cases shall be supplied by the Bidder without any extra cost. The
replacement of damaged equipment will not be linked with settlement of
insurance claim.
1.32.2

Each consignment shall be accompanied by a detailed packing list containing the

following information:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)

Name of the Consignee

Details of consignment
Destination
Total weight of consignment
Sign showing top/bottom side of the crate.
Handling and unpacking instruction.
Bill of material indicating contents of each package
Cost of consignment

1.32.3

The Bidder shall ensure that the packing and bill of material are approved by the
Purchaser before despatch. Transformer has to be transported either oil filled or
filled with nitrogen gas according to the standard practice of the supplier. If the
transformers are despatched partly filled with oil, a suitable oil level gauge should
be provided on the transformer tank to indicate oil level during transport Care
shall be taken regarding weight limitation during transport and handling facility at
site. If filled with inert gas, necessary arrangement shall be ensured by the
Contractor to take care of pressure drop of Nitrogen during transit and storage till
completion of oil filling during erection. Detailed instructions must be given for
checking the tightness of gasket, as soon as transformer arrives at site.

1.32.4

Weight of the transformer shall be so designed that the transformer can be

transported by road.

1.32.5

All removable external accessories and other components susceptible to damage if

transported mounted on the equipment, shall be dismantled, adequately packed
and shipped separately. All openings thus resulted shall be sealed by means of
temporary steel plates.

1.32.6

Packing shall be sturdy and adequate to protect all assembly components,

auxiliary devices and accessories from injury by corrosion, dampness, heavy rain,
breakage and vibration encountered at the plant site.

1.32.7

Spare parts shall be packed separately and clearly marked.

E-cxix
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

1.33

DELIVERY

1.33.1

The complete design, manufacture, assembly, delivery, erection & commissioning

period (time) shall be furnished by the Bidder.

1.33.2

The Contractor shall furnish the delivery schedule against the required delivery.

1.33.3

Insulating oil shall be delivered at the time of delivery of transformers.

1.34

FIRE PROTECTION

1.34.1

All apparatus connections and cabling (Fire Retardant Low Smoke cable) shall be
designed and arranged to minimise the risk of fire and any damage which may be
caused in the event of fire.

1.34.2

The transformer foundation shall be surrounded by a suitable soak pit enclosed by

a 150mm high non-combustible curb. The soak pit shall be fitted with coarse
crushed stones about 25mm in diameter to a minimum depth of 300mm. The
volume of soak pit minus the volume of the stones should be sufficient to contain
the entire quantity of oil of the transformer.

1.35

SPARE PARTS

1.35.1

Mandatory spare parts are as indicated in Section List of Mandatory spares.

1.36

ERECTION AND MAINTENANCE TOOLS/EQUIPMENT

The Contractor may indicate separately in his offer any special erection and
maintenance tools required for installing the equipments offered. Prices of these
shall be indicated separately in Schedule of Prices. Purchaser reserves the right
to procure any quantity of any item at the rates specified any time during the
period of contract.

1.37

TOOLS AND TACKLES

Each transformer shall be supplied each with a full kit of tools, spanners in all
sizes, with a rack for holding them; alongwith four hydraulic jacks for lifting the
transformers, and for changing the plane of rotation of wheels. All spanners shall
be single ended and case hardened. Tirfors with wire rope and slings with
grippers etc. for hauling the transformers to the plinth are to be supplied
alongwith each transformer. The rate quoted by the bidder is deemed to have
included the above items in the quoted price.

E-cxx
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

K)

1.38

OPERATION, MAINTENANCE AND ERECTION MANUALS

1.38.1

Four months prior to despatch of the equipment, five (5) copies of operation,
maintenance and erection manuals shall be supplied to the Purchaser. Manuals
shall be bound volume and shall contain all the drawings and information required
for erection, testing and commissioning, operation and maintenance of the
equipment supplied. Softcopy (in CDs) of complete manual is also to be
supplied to the purchaser.
Other requirements regarding operation, maintenance and erection manuals are
given relevant clause of Section General Technical Requirements.

ANNEXURE - I

AUXILIARIES
1.0

BUSHINGS

1.1

The bushings shall have high factor of safety against leakage to ground and shall be
so located as to provide adequate electrical clearance between bushings of various
voltage and between bushings and grounded parts. Bushings of identical voltage
rating shall be interchangeable. All bushings shall be equipped with suitable
terminals of approved type and size and shall be suitable for bimetallic connection.

1.2

Stresses due to expansion and contraction in any part of the bushing insulator shall
not lead to development of any defects. Outdoor insulators and fittings shall be
unaffected by atmospheric conditions e.g. Ozone, acid fumes, alkalise, dust and rapid
changes of temperature. Stress shield, if provided shall be considered as an integral
part of the bushing assembly.

1.3

Porcelain shall not engage directly with hard metal and where necessary, gaskets shall
be interposed between the porcelain and the fittings. All porcelain clamping surface
in contact with gaskets shall be accurately grounded and shall be free from glaze.

1.4

All fixing material used shall be of suitable quality and properly applied and shall not
enter into chemical action with the metal parts or cause fracture by expansion in
service or dissolve in oil.
Cement thickness shall be as small and even as possible and proper care shall be
taken to locate individual parts correctly during cementing.
K-cxxi

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

1.5

All porcelain insulators shall be designed to facilitate natural cleaning.

1.6

Special precautions shall be taken to exclude moisture from paper insulation during
manufacture, assembly transports and erection. The surface of all paper insulations
shall be finished with non-hygroscopic varnish.

1.7

Each condenser porcelain bushing or insulator and paper bushing shall have marked
upon it the Manufacture's identification mark and such other marks as may be
required to assist in the representative selection of batches for the purpose of sample
tests etc.

1.8

Clamps and fitting made of steel or malleable iron shall be galvanised. All bolt
threads shall be greased before erection.

1.9

The bushing flanges shall not be of re-entrant shape, which may trap air.

1.10

All outdoor type bushings through which the main winding and neutral leads are
brought out shall be so located that the phase to ground clearance obtained are
adequate to ensure availability of the full flash over strength of the bushing. Main
terminals shall be of an approved design.

1.11

The insulation provided by the bushings shall be so co-ordinated with transformer

insulation that all flashovers will occur outside the tank.

1.12

All porcelain used in bushing shall be made by the wet process, shall be homogenous
and free from cavities or other flaws. The glazing shall be uniform in colour (brown)
and free from blisters, burrs, and other defects. Porcelain shall be thoroughly vitrified
and shall be impervious to moisture. The bushings shall be capable of withstanding
earthquake forces. Porcelain shall have a smooth surface to shed away rainwater.

1.13

All bushings shall have puncture strength greater than the dry flashover value.

1.14

Support insulator/bushings shall be designed to have ample insulation, mechanical

strength and rigidity for the conditions under which they will be used. The torsional,
tensile strength and parameters of insulator shall suit the requirements of the
specification.

1.15

In accordance with the requirements stipulated under bushings, hollow column

insulators and support insulators shall conform to type tests and shall be subjected to
routine tests in accordance with IS: 2099, IS: 2544, IEC: 137, IEC: 233.

2.0

CONTROL CABINETS/MARSHALLING BOX:

2.1

Control cabinets. Marshalling box shall, in general conform to IS: 5039.

K-cxxii
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

2.2

Control cabinets shall be sheet steel/aluminium enclosed and shall be dust, water and
vermin proof. Sheet. Steel used shall be at least 2.5 mm thick and properly braced to
prevent wobbling.

2.3

The enclosure of the control cabinet shall provide a degree of protection equivalent to
IP-55 as per IS: 13947.

2.4

Control cabinets shall be provided with hinged doors with padlocking arrangement.
The distance between two hinges shall not exceed 350 mm to ensure uniform sealing
pressure against atmosphere. The gaskets used shall be of neoprene rubber.

2.5

To prevent internal condensation, space heater shall be provided. Heater shall be

suitable for operation at 240 V AC supply. An ON-OFF switch and fuse shall be
provided with the heater.

2.6

For illumination of cabinet, switch controlled incandescent lamp shall be provided.

The cabinet shall also be provided with fuse or MCB on incoming power supply and
one 15 amp switch and socket.

2.7

All steel work shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove all rust scale, foreign matter,
and grease and then applied with two coats zinc chromate primmer and two coats of
finished synthetic enamel paint, both inside and outside. The colour of the finishing
paints shall be light grey in accordance with shade No. 631 of IS: 5.

2.8

The incoming cable shall enter from bottom and the gland plate shall not be less than
450 mm from the base of the cabinet. The gland plate and associated compartment
shall be sealed in a suitable manner to prevent ingress of moisture from the cable
trench or conduit. Gland plates shall have provision for more glands if needed to be
provided in future. The glands shall have provision for securing armour of the cable
separately and shall be provided with earthing lug.

3.0

TERMINAL BLOCK

3.1

All internal wiring to be connected to the external equipment shall terminate on

blocks, preferably vertically mounted on the side of cabinet, junction box.

3.2

The terminal blocks shall be made of moulded, non-inflammable thermosetting

plastic. The material of terminal block moulding shall not deteriorate because of
varied condition of heat, cold humidity, dryness etc that would be anticipated at the
location the equipment is proposed to be installed.

3.3

The terminal shall be such that maximum contact area is achieved when a cable is
terminated. The terminal shall have a locking characteristic to prevent cable from
escaping from the terminal clamp unless it is done intentionally. The terminals shall
be non-disconnecting stud type equivalent to Elmex type CAT M4. Washers, nuts
and locknuts shall be provided.
K-cxxiii

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

3.4

The terminal blocks shall be of extensible design.

3.5

The terminal blocks shall have locking arrangement to prevent its escape from the
mounting rails.

3.6

The terminal blocks shall be 1100 V grade and shall be rated to carry continuously
the maximum current that it expected to be carried by the terminals.

3.7

The terminal blocks shall be fully enclosed with removable covers of transparent,
non-inflammable, non-deteriorating type plastic materials, insulating barriers shall not
hinder the operator from carrying out the wiring without removing the barriers. The
barriers shall be moulded integrally.

3.8

The terminals shall be provided with the marking tags for wiring identification. The
terminal blocks shall have white marking tags for circuit-identification.

3.9

The boxes shall be provided with 20% spare terminals unless otherwise specified.
Unless otherwise specified, terminal blocks shall be suitable for connecting the
following conductors of Purchaser's cable on each side:
a)

All circuits except CT

and PT circuits

Min. One No. 2.5 mm2 copper cable

b)

All CT circuits

Min. of 4 nos. of 2.5 mm2 copper cable

c)

All PT circuits

Min. of 2 nos. of 2.5 mm2 copper cable

3.10

There shall be a minimum clearance of 250 mm between the first row of terminal
block and the cable gland plate or side of the box. Also the clearance between two
rows of terminal blocks shall be minimum 150 mm.

3.11

The arrangements shall be in such a manner so that it is possible to safely connect or

disconnect terminals on live circuits and replace fuse links when the cabinet is live.
Cabinet wiring should be suitable for 60 deg. C temperature as the space heaters will
keep the temperature 10 deg. C higher than the ambient.

3.12

Terminal blocks for current transformer secondary leads shall be provided with test
links and isolating facilities. Also current transformer secondary leads shall be
provided with short-circuiting and earthing facilities.

3.13

Arrangement of the terminal block assemblies and the wiring channel within the
enclosure shall be such that a row of terminal is run parallel and in close proximity
along each side of the wiring duct to provide for convenient attachment of internal
panel wiring. The side of the terminal block opposite to the wiring duct shall be
K-cxxiv

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

reserved for the Purchaser's external cable connection. All adjacent terminal blocks
shall also share this field wiring corridor. A steel strip shall be connected between
adjacent terminal block rows at 450 mm intervals for support of incoming cables.
4.0

CONTROL WIRING AND CABLING:

4.1

Supply, laying and termination of all cables and accessories required for proper
termination from the control cabinet/marshalling box to make transformer/reactor
functional shall be supplied by the Contractor.

4.2

Contractor shall also supply rigid GI conduits/pipes and all accessories required for
routing cable in ground and the concrete.

4.3

Flexible conduits with accessories made up of cold rolled annealed and electrogalvanised mild steel wires shall be used for running cables in embedded pipe.

4.4

Wire terminations shall be made with solder less crimping type of tinned copper lugs,
which firmly grip the conductor and insulation. Insulated sleeves shall be provided at
all the wire terminations.

4.5

All wires directly connected to grip circuit breaker shall be distinguished by the
addition of a red coloured unlettered ferrule. Number 6 & 9 shall not be included for
ferrules purpose.

4.6

In accordance with the requirement as stipulated under Section-General Technical

Requirement, control cabinets, junction boxes, terminal boxes and marshalling boxes
shall conform to type tests and shall be subjected to routine tests in accordance with
IS: 5039. In addition to the type tests, verification of the degree of protection, as per
IS: 2147 for IP-55, shall be conducted. After protection degree tests on control
cabinet, 2.0 kV rms for 1 minute, for checking insulation resistance shall be applied
and functional test shall also be conducted.

4.7

All control wiring from transformer/reactor accessories to control cabinet/marshalling

box shall be 1100 volts grade PVC insulated 2.5 sq. mm stranded copper cable with
armour.

4.8

Power cable (415 V) used from transformer/reactor accessories to control

cabinet/marshalling box shall be 1100 volts grade, PVC insulated armoured
Aluminium conductor cables.

4.9

Compression type cable connector shall be provided for the termination of power and
control cables.

4.10

All devices and terminal blocks with the control cabinet/marshalling box shall be
clearly identified by symbols corresponding to those used on applicable schematic or
wiring diagram.
K-cxxv

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

4.11

All internal wiring shall be securely supported, neatly arranged, readily accessible
and connected to equipment terminals and terminal blocks.

4.12

Engraved core identification plastic ferrules marked to correspond with schematic

diagram shall be fitted at both ends of wires. Ferrules shall fit tightly on wires and
shall not fall off when the wire is disconnected from terminal block.

5.0

SIGNAL TRANSMITTERS FOR EACH WINDING:

5.1

Signal Transmitter shall have additional facility to transmit signal for recording
winding temperature at Purchaser's Data Acquisition System (DAS), for which a
duplex platinum RTD with nominal resistance of 100 Ohms at zero deg. C shall be
supplied. The RTD shall be three wire ungrounded system. The calibration shall be
as per SAMA (USA) / DIN standard or equivalent.
The RTD may be placed in the pocket containing temperature sensing element and
image coil for Winding temperature Indicator (WTI) system, which will be used for
both remote WTI and DAS. Necessary equipment for sending the signal to remote
WTI and DAS shall be provided. In lieu, separate RTD for each of the functions shall
be provided.

6.0

LABELS:

6.1

Labels shall be provided for all apparatus such as relays, switches, fuses contained in
control cabinets/marshalling box.

6.2

Description labels for mounting indoor or inside control cabinets/marshalling box

shall be of such a material that will ensure permanence of lettering. A matt or satin
finish shall be provided to avoid dazzle from reflected light. Labels mounted on dark
surfaces shall have white lettering on a black background. All plates shall be of a
material, which will not get corroded.

6.3

Labelling shall be clear, concise and adequate.

6.4

Labels shall be supplied as far as possible in the following four standard sizes.
b)

c)
d)

Label for fuses and links shall measure approximately 28 mm to 45 mm by 13

mm to 19 mm and lettering of 3 mm to 6 mm shall be used according to the
amount of inscription required. The lettering shall have strokes of
approximately 1 mm width.
Labels for relays, contactors, thermal devices and similar apparatus shall
measure 65 mm by 20 mm and shall have lettering as specified in (a) above.
Labels for controllers and change over switches shall measure 70 mm by 30
mm and where practicable have 20 mm lettering with 1.5 mm strokes.

K-cxxvi
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

e)

6.5

6.6

Labels for the doors of junction boxes, marshalling boxes and similar
equipment shall measure 125 mm x 50 mm and have 13 mm lettering with 1.5
mm wide strokes.

The labels for mounting outdoor shall be weather and corrosion proof. The
letters/diagrams thereon shall be formed by etching or any other such process which
will be ensure permanence of the lettering/marking.
Labels shall be attached to panels with brass screws or with steel screws, which have
received rust preventive treatment.

7.0

JOINT AND GASKETS:

7.1

All gaskets used for making oil tight joints shall be of proven material such as
granulated cork bonded with synthetic rubber.

7.2

Synthetic rubber, if used for gaskets for joints, shall be resistant to hot oil and ageing.

8.0

CLEANING AND PAINTING:

8.1

Before painting all un-galvanised parts shall be completely clean and free from rust,
scale and grease, and all external surface cavities on castings, shall be filled by metal
deposition.

8.2

The interior of transformer/reactor tanks and other oil filled chambers and internal
structural steel work shall be cleaned of all scales and rust by sand blasting or other
approved method. These surfaces shall be painted with two coats of heat resistance
oil insoluble insulating varnish or paint. Unexposed welds need not be painted.

8.3

Except for nuts, bolts and washers, which may have to be removed for maintenance
purpose, all external surfaces exposed to weather shall receive a minimum of three
coats of paint.

8.4

The primary coats shall be of zinc chromate and applied immediately after cleaning.
The second coat shall be of oil and weather resisting nature and of a shade or colour
easily distinct from the primary coat. The final coat shall be applied after the primary
coat has been touched up where necessary. The final coat at site shall be of a glossy
oil paint which shall be corrosion resisting and non-fading, light grey in accordance
with shade No. 631 of IS: 5. The final coats shall be 20 microns and total thickness
of all the three coats shall be minimum 80 microns. All paints selected shall withstand
heat and extremes of weather.

K-cxxvii
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

8.5

Nuts, bolts and washers which may have to be removed for maintenance purposes
shall receive a minimum of one coat of paint after erection.

8.6

All interior surfaces of mechanism chambers and boxes except those, which have
received anti-corrosion treatment, shall receive three coats of paint, which shall be
applied to the thoroughly cleaned metal surfaces. The final coats shall be of light
grey colour with anti corrosion mixture.

8.7

Any damage to paint work incurred during transport and erection shall be made good
by thoroughly cleaning the damaged portion and applying the full number of coats of
paint that had been applied before damage was caused. Paint shall not scale off or be
removed by abrasion while handling.

8.8

One coat of additional paint shall be given at site. The Contractor shall supply the
requisite quantity of paint.

9.0

VALVES:
a)

b)

c)
d)
e)
f)

g)

h)
i)

j)

All valves upto and including 100 mm shall be of gun metal or of cast
steel or cast iron. Larger valves may have cast iron bodies with gun metal
fittings. They shall be of full way type with internal screw and shall open
when turned counter clockwise when facing the hand wheel.
Alternatively, butterfly type of valves are also acceptable.
Suitable means shall be provided for pad-locking the valves in the open
and close positions. Provision is not required for locking individual
radiator valves.
Each valve shall be provided with the indicator to show clearly the
position of the valve.
All valve flanges shall have machined faces.
All valves in oil line shall be suitable for continuous operation with
transformer oil at 115 deg. C.
Gland packing/Gasket material shall be of teflon rope/nitrile rubber. In
case of gate/globe valves, gland packing preferably of teflon rope shall be
used to prevent oil seepage through the gland.
The oil sampling point for main tank should have two identical valves to
be put in series. Oil sampling valve shall have provision to fix rubber hose
of 10 mm size to facilitate oil sampling.
All hardware used shall be cadmium plated/electro galvanised.
A valve or other suitable means shall be provided to fix the on line
dissolved gas-monitoring system to facilitate continuous dissolved gas
analysis. The location and size of the same shall be finished detailed
engineering stage.
Suitable small bore (8mm copper) piping with an appropriate valves shall
be provided to take sample of oil from the OLTC chamber during
operation of the transformer.

K-cxxviii
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

ANNEXURE - II

LIST OF TRANSFORMER ACCESSORIES AND TEST CERTIFICATES

REQUIRED FOR THEM
Sl.
No.
1)

Accessory
Condenser Bushing

Ref.
Std.
IS 2099

Test Certificates required.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Appearance, construction and dimensional

check.
Test for leakage of internal filling at a pressure
of 1.0 kg/cm2 for 12 h.
Insulation resistance measurement with 2000 V
Megger,
Dry power frequency voltage withstand test
Dry power frequency voltage withstand test for
test tap insulation

K-cxxix
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

2)

Porcelain Bushings

IS 2099

6.
7.
1.
2.

3)

OLTC

IS 8468

3.
1.

2.
3.
4.
5.

6.

7.
8.
4)

Winding
Temperature
Indicator

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

5)

6)

7)

Oil Temperature
Indicator

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.

Pressure Relief Valve

Cooling fan

IS 2312

2.
3.
1.
2.

Partial discharge measurement 1.5UN / 3 kV.

Measurement of tangent delta and capacitance.
Appearance, construction and dimensional
check.
Insulation resistance measurement with 2000 V
Megger,
Dry power frequency voltage withstand test.
Oil tightness test for the diverter switch oil
chamber at an oil pressure of 0.5 kg/ cm2 at
100o C for 1 h.
Mechanical operation test.
Operation sequence measurement.
Insulation resistance measurement using 2000
V Megger,
Power frequency voltage withstand test on
diverter switch to earth and between even and
odd contacts.
Power frequency voltage withstand test on tap
selector between stationary contacts, between
max. and min. taps, between phases and
supporting frames, between phases.
Operation test of complete tap changer.
Operation and dielectric test of driving
mechanism.
Calibration test
Dielectric test at 2 kV for one minute.
Accuracy test for indication and switch setting
scales.
Test for adjustability of switch setting.
Test for switch rating.
Measurement of temperature rise with respect
to the heater coil current.
Calibration test
Dielectric test at 2 kV for one minute.
Accuracy test for indication and switch setting
scales.
Test for adjustability of switch setting.
Test for switch rating.
Functional test with compressed air to check
bursting pressure, indication flag operation and
switch operation.
Dielectric test at 2 kV for one minute.
Switch contact testing at 5A, 240 V AC.
Insulation resistance measurement.
Dielectric test at 2 kV between winding and
body for one minute.

K-cxxx
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

3.
4.
8)

Transformer oil
Pump

IS: 325
& IS
9137

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

9.
9)

Oil flow indicator /

Water flow Indicator

1.
2.
3.
4.

10)

Buchholz/Relay

IS: 3637

1.

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
11)

Oil level indicator

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Operation check
Appearance, construction and dimensional
check
Insulation resistance measurement.
Cold resistance measurement at ambient
temperature.
Motor efficiency at full load
No load voltage, current, power input,
frequency and speed.
Locked rotor readings of voltage, current and
power input,
Water pressure test for pump casing at 5
kg/cm2 for 10 minutes at ambient temperature.
Transformer oil pressure test for the pump set
assembly at 2 kg/cm2 for 30 minutes at 80o C.
Measurement of head, discharge, current,
power input to motor and overall efficiency of
the pump set at rated voltage.
Appearance, construction and dimensional
check.
Observation of flow with respect to
requirement.
Switch contact test at 5 A 240 V AC.
Dielectric test at 2 kV for one minute.
Appearance, construction and dimensional
check.
Leak test with transformer oil at a pressure of 3
kg/cm2 for 30 minutes at ambient temperature
for relay casing
Insulation resistance measurement with 500 V
Megger.
Dielectric test at 2 kV for one minute.
Elements test at 1.75 kg/cm2 for 15 minutes
using transformer oil at ambient temperature.
Loss of oil and surge test.
Gas volume test.
Mechanical strength test.
Velocity calibration test.
Appearance construction and dimensional
check.
Test for oil levels
Switch operation for low level alarm.
Switch contact test at 5 A 240 V AC
Dielectric test at 2 kV for one minute.
Appearance construction and dimensional
check

K-cxxxi
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

12)

Pressed Steel
Radiator

13)

OLTC Control
Cubicle/Cooler
control cubicle.

14)

Bushing current
transformer

15)

Oil to water heat

exchanger

16)

Pressure
Gauges/Differential
pressure Gauges.

Air pressure test at 2 kg/cm2 under water for 15

minutes
2. Appearance construction and dimensional
check
1. Appearance construction and dimensional
check
2. Electrical operation.
3. Insulation resistance measurement using 500 V
Megger at ambient temperature.
4. Dielectric test at 2 kV for one minute
1. Appearance construction and dimensional
check
2. Polarity check.
3. Measurement of insulation resistance.
4. High voltage power frequency test.
5. Determination of ratio error and phase angle of
measuring and protection BCTs.
6. Determination of turns ratio error for PS class
BCT.
7. Interturn insulation withstand test.
8. Exciting current characteristic test.
9. Secondary winding resistance measurement
10. Knee point voltage, measurement for PS class
BCT.
1. Test certificates for the materials for
construction
2. Manufacturers in process inspection records
for all parts, sub assemblies, accessories and
complete assembly.
3. Shell side pressure test at 10 kg/cm2 with
transformer oil at a temperature of 70 deg. C
10 deg. C for 6h.
4. Water side pressure test at 5 kg/cm2 with water
at ambient temperature for 6 h.
1. Appearance construction and dimensional
check
2. Calibration test.
3. Alarm contact setting test.
1.

IS: 2705

K-cxxxii
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

ANNEXURE - III

NITROGEN INJECTION FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM

Each oil filled transformer / reactor shall be provided with a dedicated Nitrogen Injection
Fire Protection System (NIFPS) which shall use nitrogen as fire quenching medium. The fire
protective system shall prevent transformer/Reactor oil tank explosion and possible fire in
case of internal faults. In the event of fire by external causes such as bushing fire. OLTC
fires, fire from surrounding equipment etc, it shall act as a fast and effective fire fighter. It
shall accomplish its role as fire preventer and extinguisher without employing water and / or
carbon dioxide. Fire shall be extinguished within 3 minutes (Maximum) of system activation
and within 30 seconds (maximum) of commencement of nitrogen injection. The fire
protection system shall have been in successful operation in Indian installations for at
least last three years for protection of transformers of 220kV and higher voltage class.
The list of past supplies in India along with performance certificate from users of the
system shall be submitted for approval of purchaser.
1.1

Activation of the fire protective system

Mal-functioning of fire prevention/ extinguishing system could lead to interruption in
power supply. The supplier shall ensure that the probability of chances of
malfunctioning of the fire protective system are practically zero. To achieve this
objective, the supplier shall plan out his scheme of activating signals which should
not be too complicated to make the fire protective system inoperative in case of actual
need. The system shall be provided with automatic control for fire prevention and fire
extinction. Besides automatic control, remote electrical push button control at Control
box and local manual control in the fire extinguishing cubicle shall also be provided.
The following electrical-signals shall be required for activating the fire protective
system under prevention mode / fire extinguishing mode.
Auto Mode
(a) For prevention of fire:

Differential relay operation

Buchholz relay paralleled with pressure relief valve or RPRR (Rapid Pressure
Rise Relay)
Tripping of all circuit breakers (on HV &LV/IV side) associated with
transformer / reactor is the pre-requisite for activation of system.

(b) For extinguishing fire

Fire detector

K-cxxxiii
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

Buchholz relay paralleled with pressure relief valve or RPRR (Rapid Pressure
Rise Relay)
Tripping of all circuit breakers (on HV &LV/IV side) associated with
transformer / reactor is the pre-requisite for activation of system.

Manual Mode (Local / Remote)

Tripping of all circuit breakers (on HV &LV/IV side) associated with

transformer / reactor is the pre-requisite for activation of system.

Manual Mode (Mechanical)

Tripping of all circuit breakers (on HV &LV/IV side) associated with

transformer / reactor is the pre-requisite for activation of system.

The system shall be designed to be operated manually in case of failure of power

supply to fire protection system.
1.2

General description
Nitrogen injection fire protection system should be a dedicated system for each oil
filled transformer / reactor. It should have a Fire Extinguishing Cubicle (FEC) placed
on a plinth at a distance of 5-10 m away from transformer / reactor or placed next to
the fire wall (if fire fighting wall exists). The FEC shall be connected to the top of
transformer/reactor oil tank for depressurization of tank and to the oil pit (capacity is
approximately equal to 10% of total volume of oil in transformer/reactor tank) from
its bottom through oil pipes. The fire extinguishing cubicle should house a
pressurized nitrogen cylinder(s) which is connected to the oil tank of
transformer/reactor oil tank at bottom. The Transformer Conservator Isolation Valve
(TCIV) is fitted between the conservator tank and Buchholz relay. Cable connections
are to be provided from signal box to the control box in the control room, from
control box to fire extinguishing cubicle and from TCIV to signal box. Fire detectors
placed on the top of transformer/reactor tank are to be connected in parallel to the
signal box by Fire survival cables. Control box is also to be connected to relay panel
in control room for receiving system activation signals.

1.3

Operation
On receipt of all activating signals, the system shall drain pre-determined volume of
hot oil from the top of tank (i.e top oil layer), through outlet valve, to reduce tank
pressure by removing top oil and simultaneously injecting nitrogen gas at high
pressure for stirring the oil at pre-fixed rate and thus bringing the temperature of top
oil layer down. Transformer conservator isolation valve blocks the flow of oil from
conservator tank in case of tank rupture / explosion or bushing bursting. Nitrogen
occupies the space created by oil drained out and acts as an insulating layer over oil in
the tank and thus preventing aggravation of fire.
K-cxxxiv

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

1.4

System components
Nitrogen injection fire protection system shall broadly consist of the following
components. However, all other components which are necessary for fast reliable and
effective working of the fire protective system shall deemed to be included in the
scope of supply.

(a)

Fire Extinguishing Cubicle (FEC)

The FEC shall be made of CRCA sheet of 3 mm (minimum) thick complete with the
base frame, painted inside and outside with post office red colour (shade 538 of IS-5).
It shall have hugged split doors fitted with high quality tamper proof lock. The degree
of protection shall be IP55. The following items shall be provided in the FEC.

(b)

Nitrogen gas cylinder with regulator and falling pressure electrical

contact manometer.
Oil drain pipe with mechanical quick drain valve.
Electro mechanical control equipment for draining of oil of predetermined volume and injecting regulated volume of nitrogen gas
Pressure monitoring switch for back-up protection for nitrogen release
Limit switches for monitoring of the system
Butterfly valve with flanges on the top of panel for connecting oil drain
pipe and nitrogen injection pipes for transformer/reactors
Panel lighting (CFL Type)
Oil drain pipe extension of suitable sizes for connecting pipes to oil pit.

Control box
Control box is to be placed in the control room for monitoring system operation,
automatic control and remote operation. The following alarms, indications, switches,
push buttons, audio signal etc. shall be provided.

System on
TCIV open
Oil drain valve closed
Gas intlet valve closed
TCIV closed*
Fire detector trip *
Buchholz relay trip
Oil drain valve open*
Extinction in progress *
Cylinder pressure low *
Differential relay trip
PRV / RPRR trip
K-cxxxv

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

Transformer/reactor trip
System out of service *
Fault in cable connecting fault fire detector
Fault in cable connecting differential relay
Fault in cable connecting Buchholz relay
Fault in cable connecting PRV / RPRR
Fault in cable connecting transformer /reactor trip
Fault in cable connecting TCIV
Auto/ Manual / Off
Extinction release on / off
Lamp test
Visual/ Audio alarm*
Visual/ Audio alarm for DC supply fail *

* Suitable provision shall be made in the control box, for monitoring of the
system from remote substation using the substation automation system.
(c)

Transformer Conservator Isolation Valve

Transformer conservator isolation valve (TCIV) to be fitted in the conservator pipe
line, between conservator and buchholz relay which shall operate for isolating the
conservator during abnormal flow of oil due to rupture / explosion of tank or bursting
of bushing. The valve shall not isolate conservator during normal flow of oil during
filtration or filling or refilling, locking plates to be provided with handle for pad
locking. It shall have proximity switch for remote alarm,indication with visual
position indicator.
The TCIV should be of the best quality as malfunctioning of TCIV could lead to
serious consequence. The closing of TCIV means stoppage of breathing of
transformer/reactor.
Locking plates shall be provided for pad locking.

(d)

Fire detectors
The system shall be complete with adequate number of fire detectors (quartz bulb)
fitted on the top cover of the transformer / reactor oil tank.

(e)

Signal box
It shall be mounted away from transformer / reactor main tank, preferably near the
transformer marshalling box, for terminating cable connections from TCIV & fire
detectors and for further connection to the control box. The degree of protection shall
be IP55.

(f)

Cables
K-cxxxvi

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

Fire survival cables (capable to withstand 750 C.) of 4 core x 1.5 sq. mm size for
connection of fire detectors in parallel shall be used> The fire survival cable shall
conform to BS 7629-1,BS 8434-1, BS 7629-1 and BS 5839-1,BS EN 50267-2-1 or
relevant Indian standards.
Fire Retardant Low Smoke (FRLS) cable of 12 core x 1.5 sq. mm size shall be used
for connection of signal box / marshalling box near transformer/reactor and FEC
mounted near transformer/reactor with control box mounted in control room.
Fire Retardant Low Smoke (FRLS) cable of 4 core x 1.5 sq. mm size shall be used for
connection between control box to DC and AC supply source, fire extinguishing
cubicle to AC supply source, signal box/ marshalling box to transformer conservator
isolation valve connection on transformer/reactor.
(g)

Pipes
Pipes, complete with connections, flanges, bends and tees etc. shall be supplied
alongwith the system.

1.5

Other items
(a)

Oil drain and nitrogen injection openings with gate valves on transformer /
reactor tank at suitable locations.

(b)

Flanges with dummy piece in conservator pipe between Buchholz relay and
conservator tank for fixing TCIV.

(c)

Fire detector brackets on transformer / reactor tank top cover.

(d)

Spare potential free contacts for activating the system i.e. in differential relay,
Buchholz relay, Pressure Relief Device / RPRR, Circuit Breaker of
transformer/reactor

(e)

Pipe connections between transformer / reactor and FEC and between FEC and
oil pit required for collecting top oil.

(f)

Cabling for fire detectors mounted on transformer /reactor top cover

(g)

Inter cabling between signal box, control box and Fire Extinguishing
Cubicle(FEC).

(h)

Butterfly valves /Gate valves on oil drain pipe and nitrogen injection pipe which
should be able to withstand full vacuum.

(i)

Supports, signal box etc. which are to be painted with enamelled paint.
K-cxxxvii

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

1.6

Technical particulars
Fire extinction period from commencement
of nitrogen injection
Total duration from activation of fire
protection system to complete cooling
Fire detectors heat sensing temperature
Heat sensing area per detector
Transformer Conservator Isolation valve
setting
Capacity of nitrogen cylinder

Power supply
For Control Box
For Fire extinguishing cubicle for lighting

30 secs.(Max.)
30minutes (Max.)
141 deg.C
Upto a radius of 800 mm
60 ltr / min (Minimum)
68 ltr (Minimum) water
capacity and shall hold 10 m3
(Minimum)gas at pressure of
150 kg/cm2
220 V / 110 V DC
230V AC

The doors, removable covers and panels shall be gasketted all round with neoprene
gaskets.
1.7

Mandatory Spares
Cylinder filled with Nitrogen of required capacity per substation
Fire Detectors per transformer
Regulator assembly per sub-station

1.8

1 No.
3 Nos.
1 No.

Tests
Reports of all type test conducted as per relevant IS/IEC standards in respect of
various bought out items including test reports for degree of protection for FEC /
control box / signal box shall be submitted by the supplier.
The supplier shall demonstrate the functional test associated with the following :
Fire Extinguishing Cubicle, Control Box.
Fire Detector.
Transformer Conservator Isolation Valve
The performance test of the complete system shall be carried out after erection of the
system with transformer at site.

1.9

Detailed layout drawings, equipment drawing alongwith 4 sets of Operation and

Maintenance manual along with soft copies (in CDs) shall be submitted by the
supplier alongwith the consignment.

K-cxxxviii
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

1.10

The guaranteed and other technical particulars for the offered NIFP system are
indicated in Section- Guaranteed and Other Technical Particulars. Any other
particulars considered necessary in addition to those listed in that Section may be
furnished by the Bidder.

SECTION - CONTROL AND RELAY PANELS

PART-I: CONTROL AND PROTECTION PANELS
(APPLICABLE FOR SUBSTATIONS WITHOUT AUTOMATION SYSTEM)
K-cxxxix
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

CONTENTS
CLAUSE
1
2
3
4
5
5.1
5.2
6
6.1
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15.1
15.2
15.3
15.4
15.5
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
27.1
27.2
27.3

TITLE

PAGE NO.

GENERAL
i
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
i
SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
ii
GUARANTEED AND OTHER TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
ii
DRAWINGS/DOCUMENTS
ii
Drawings/Document submitted with the bid .............................................................................. ii
Drawings/Document to be submitted after Award of the Contract ............................................. ii
CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES iii
Type of panels ..........................................................................................................................iii
PAINTING
iv
MOUNTING
v
PANEL INTERNAL WIRING AND OTHER ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT
v
TERMINAL BLOCKS
vi
MIMIC DIAGRAM
vii
NAME PLATES AND MARKINGS
vii
SUPPORTING STEEL & BASE FRAMES viii
MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES
viii
Plug Point................................................................................................................................ viii
Interior Lighting ....................................................................................................................... viii
Switches, MCBs and fuses ..................................................................................................... viii
Space heaters .......................................................................................................................... ix
Other accessories .................................................................................................................... ix
EARTHING
ix
INDICATING INSTRUMENTS, RECORDERS & TRANSDUCERS x
ANNUNCIATION SYSTEM
xiii
CONTROL AND SELECTOR SWITCHES xv
POSITION INDICATORS xvi
INDICATING LAMPS
xvii
SYNCHRONIZING EQUIPMENT xvii
TEST BLOCKS xviii
PUSH BUTTONS
xviii
DISTURBANCE RECORDER
xix
DISTANCE TO FAULT LOCATOR
xxii
EVENT LOGGERS
xxii
RELAYS xxiv
General ................................................................................................................................. xxiv
Auxiliary / Monitoring Relay.................................................................................................. xxvii
Trip Circuit Supervision relays ............................................................................................. xxvii
K-cxl

Section III : Control and Relay Panels

27.4
27.5
27.6
27.7
27.8
28
28.1

Pole Discrepancy Protection Scheme ................................................................................. xxviii

DC supply supervision Relay .............................................................................................. xxviii
Voltage selection scheme (wherever applicable) ................................................................ xxviii
High Speed Tripping Relay ................................................................................................. xxviii
Flag relays .......................................................................................................................... xxviii
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF PROTECTIONS xxviii
General ............................................................................................................................... xxviii
Error! Bookmark not defined.
28.3 Transmission Line Protection .................................................................................................xxx
28.4 Bus Bar Protection .............................................................................................................. xxxvi
28.5 Local Breaker Back Up Protection Relay (Breaker Failure Relay) ...................................... xxxix
28.6 Stub Protection ................................................................................................................... xxxix
28.7 Bus coupler breaker protection ................................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
28.8 Trip Transfer Switch ................................................................................................................. xl
28.9 Suitable manual scheme should be offered with necessary interlocks to carry out operation of
concerned breakers and isolators in such a sequence that at no time the supply to the
circuit proposed to be transferred is affected................................................................. xl
28.10 The procedure to transfer a circuit from one of the Main buses to another main bus through
Bus Coupler Breaker and vice versa shall be furnished by the Contractor. ................... xl
29
TIME SYNCHRONISATION EQUIPMENT xl
30
QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN (QAP)
xli
31
INSPECTION AND TESTING
xli
32
FIRE PROTECTION
xliii
33
RELAY TEST KIT
xliii
34
ERECTION AND MAINTENANCE TOOL EQUIPMENTS xliii
35
TROPICALISATION
xliii
36
LIST OF EQUIPMENT xliii
ANNEXURE - III .................................................................................................................................... xlvii

BUS SWITCHING SCHEMES, LINE LENGTHS AND LINE PARAMETERS

K-cxli
Section III : Control and Relay Panels

xlvii

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR CONTROL AND RELAY PANELS

GENERAL

1.1

This part of the specification covers detailed technical requirement for control and relay
panels complete with all necessary instruments, meters, switches, relays and other
miscellaneous equipment, accessories and auxiliaries, disturbance recorder, time
synchronization equipment, personal computer including necessary software etc.

1.2

The various control and relay panels and other equipment specified under this section shall
be complete in themselves, with all main and auxiliary relays, fuses, links, switches,
instruments, meters, timers, annunciators, indicating lamps semaphore indicators, bells
and hooters, illuminating lamps, test terminal blocks, space heater, MCBs, fuses, mimic
diagrams, name plates and other devices completely wired and assembled as per the
approved schematics including inter-panel wiring between adjacent panels, labels, terminal
boards, Earthing terminals, foundation bolts etc.

1.3

The contractor shall include in his scope dummy panels, if necessary, to meet the
arrangement of panel layout.

1.4

Foundation channels, bolts, vibration dampers and all other accessories, special tools,
testing equipment and instruments, spare parts, pamphlets, instruction, operation and
maintenance manuals for all equipment shall also be supplied by the contractor.
Preparation and furnishing of all drawings including schematic wiring, internal wiring and
external cable connection, all types of protection, single line diagrams etc. is also in the
scope of supply.

1.5

If any special cables are required for interconnection between event logger, disturbance
recorder and external equipment, the same shall also be included in Contractors scope
and specially brought out in the bid. Equipment furnished shall be complete in every
respect.

1.6

Materials and components not specifically stated in this specification, but which are
necessary for satisfactory operation of the equipment, and accessories shall be deemed to
have been included in the scope of specification unless specifically excluded.

1.7

The supply and laying of the control and power cables interconnecting the various
equipment are covered under the scope of supply of Contractor.

GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

2.1

The design, manufacture and performance of all the equipment and material provided
under this specification shall generally conform to the relevant IEC/IS standards of latest
edition except to the extent explicitly modified in the specification and shall also be in
accordance with requirements specified in this section. A list of relevant Standards are
given in Annexure-I of Section General Technical Requirements.

Major Substation Equipment

2.2

The equipment shall comply with the latest revisions to Indian Electricity Act and Indian
Electricity rules and any other applicable statutory provisions, rules and regulations
applicable in the locations where these are to be installed.

SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

Some of the technical parameters relating to Control & Relay panel are given in Section
Specific Technical Requirements of the specification. However, most of the technical
requirements are detailed in this section.

GUARANTEED AND OTHER TECHNICAL PARTICULARS

The guaranteed and other technical particulars for the offered control and relay panels,
relays, instruments and meters etc. are as indicated in Section Guaranteed and Other
Technical Particulars. Any other particulars considered necessary in addition to those
listed in that Section or not submitted in the bid shall be given by the contractor at detailed
engineering stage.

DRAWINGS/DOCUMENTS

5.1

Drawings/Document submitted with the bid

In addition to any other drawings which the tenderer may like to supply, the Contractor
shall submit following Drawings / Documents with each copy of bidding document
incorporating the following particulars in support of the performance and suitability of the
equipment offered along with relevant descriptive and illustrative literature.
Principal dimensional details of each control and relay panel along with foundation details
etc.
Inside, front and rear views, of the panels with terminal blocks, instruments, devices and
relay positions marked.
Details of protection schemes of lines and transformers etc. with annunciation system,
interlocking system etc.offered.
Literature describing the instruments, relays and their characteristics, technical details etc.
Schematic wiring diagrams.
Bill of material listing equipment designation, make, type, rating etc. of the various
equipments mounted on the panels.

5.2

Drawings/Document to be submitted after Award of the Contract

Within (30) thirty days of the award of the contract, the Contractor shall furnish the time
schedule of submission of the following for approval of the purchaser. This schedule shall
be prepared so as to ensure the delivery commitments made in the contract:
a)

b)

c)

Detailed dimensional drawings of control and relay panels showing all equipment
mounted on them along with the complete panel wise lists of equipment and lists of
name plates.
Outline drawings and internal wiring diagrams of the panels i.e. instruments, relays,
meters, annunciators and other equipment showing external wiring terminations
also.
Outline drawings, mounting details, internal wiring diagrams, and item wise bill of
material for all devices supplied by the contractor with the board.

Major Substation Equipment

d)

e)
f)

g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
m)

n)

Complete AC and DC schematic drawings of all elements of control and relay

boards. These shall show all AC power connections secondary connections for
relays, meters etc. with vector relationships.
Complete schematic drawings for annunciation system.
Complete schematic control diagrams of all equipment controlled from the panel
including synchronizing circuits. These diagrams shall incorporate complete internal
circuits of the controlled equipment, and clearly indicate the terminal marking for
extra connections.
Isolator interlocking schematic drawings with write up, marshalling box, wiring
diagrams and cable termination schedule for the substation.
Foundation drawings and floor plans of control and relay panels. The cable entry
shall also be shown on these drawings.
Cable interconnection drawings indicating terminal block numbers, number of
cores, instruments/panels at which cable is to be connected etc.
The tenderer may submit any other drawings considered necessary in addition to
the drawings stated above.
The contractor shall furnish the recommended relay setting along with necessary
calculations / procedures for all the protection relays furnished by them.
Commissioning, operating and maintenance instruction manual for each relay shall
also be supplied by the contractor.
One copy of reproducible for the schematic control protection covering, interpanel
wiring, connection schematic including termination schedule shall also be supplied
for the sub station by the contractor.
Contractor shall furnish the complete drawings as called for. He shall be
responsible for providing effective, efficient and reliable protection, interlock, control
and annunciation schemes. Approval of contractors drawings will not in any way
reduce his responsibility in this respect.

CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES

6.1

Type of panels

6.1.1

Simplex Panels
Control and Relay panels shall consist of separate vertical stationary front panels with
equipment mounted thereon and having wiring access from rear for control panels & either
front or rear for relay panels. Each cubicle assembly shall be provided with doors on the
rear having handles with built in locking facility or with pad lock. It shall have double leaf
doors with lift off hinges at the back for panels of width more than 800 mm.

6.1.2

Dummy Panels
If any dummy panels are needed, they shall be arranged by the Contractor / Supplier. The
dummy panels shall contain only mimic diagrams and no equipment shall be provided in
the dummy panel. The other constructional features of dummy panels shall be similar to
main panels. The prices of these dummy panels shall be deemed to be included in the
cost of main panel.

6.2

The Control & Relay Panel shall be of simplex type, as specified. It is the responsibility of
the Contractor to ensure that the equipment specified and such unspecified complementary
equipment required for completeness of the Protection/Control Schemes is properly
accommodated in the panels without congestion and if necessary, provide panels with

Major Substation Equipment

large dimensions. No price increase at a later date on this account shall be allowed.
However, the width of panels that are being offered to be placed in exiting switchyard
control rooms should be in conformity with the space availability in the control room.
6.3

Panels shall be completely metal enclosed to ensure a dust, moisture and vermin proof.
The enclosure shall provide a degree of protection not less than IP- 31 in accordance with
IS: 13947/IS: 2147.

6.4

Panels shall be rigid, free standing and floor mounting type and comprise of structural
frames enclosed completely with specially selected, smooth finished, Cold Rolled Sheet
steel of thickness not less than 3 mm for weight bearing members of the panels
such as base frame, front sheet and door frames and not less than 2.0 mm for sides,
door, top and bottom portions. There shall be sufficient reinforcement to provide level
surfaces, resistance to vibration and rigidity during transportation and installation.

6.5

The doors, removable covers and panels shall be gasketed all round with neoprene
gaskets. Ventilating louvers, shall have screens and filters. The screens shall be made of
either brass or GI wire mesh.

6.6

All joints shall be made flush and all edges shall be bent at right angles and rounded. All
structural members shall be bolted or welded together. Necessary arrangement shall be
provided for bolting together the adjacent panels as well as for fastening them to the floor.
The opening required for mounting the equipment shall be punched or cut and filed
smooth.

6.7

Panels shall have base frame with smooth bearing surface, which shall be fixed on the
embedded foundation channels / insert plates. Antivibration strips made of shock absorbing
materials which shall be supplied by the Contractor, shall be placed between panel and
base frame.

6.8

Cable entries to the panels shall be from the bottom. Cable gland plate fitted on the bottom
of the panel shall be connected rigidly to the earthing of panel/station through a flexible
braided copper conductor.

6.9

Necessary foundation drawings showing cable entry positions and foundation bolt locations
shall be supplied by the Contractor.

6.10

All necessary arrangements shall be made inside the control panel to hold the cables so
that no load comes on terminals due to the weight of hanging cable. The external cable
connections will be terminated on the terminal blocks.

6.11

Design, material selection and workmanship shall be such as to result in neat appearance,
inside and outside with no welds, rivets or bolt head apparent from outside with all exterior
surfaces trim and smooth.

6.12

Relay panels of modern, modular construction shall also be acceptable.

PAINTING
Painting and Phosphating of all sheet steel works shall be in accordance with IS: 6005 and
requirement stipulated in Section-General Technical Requirement.

Major Substation Equipment

MOUNTING

8.1

All equipment on and in panels shall be mounted and completely wired to the terminal
blocks ready for external connection. The equipment on the front of the panel shall be
flush mounted.

8.2

No equipment shall be mounted on the doors.

8.3

Equipment shall be mounted such that removal and replacement can be accomplished
individually without interruption of service to adjacent devices and shall be readily
accessible without use of special tools. Terminal marking shall be clearly visible.

8.4

The Contractor shall carry out cutout, mounting and wiring of the equipment to be mounted
in panels in accordance with the corresponding equipment manufacturer's drawings.
Cutouts if any, provided for future mounting of equipment shall be properly blanked off with
blanking plate.

8.5

The center lines of switches, push buttons and indicating lamps shall be not less than 750
mm from the bottom of the panel. The center lines of relays, meters and recorders shall be
not less than 450 mm from the bottom of the panel.

8.6

The center lines of switches, push buttons and indicating lamps shall be matched to give a
neat and uniform appearance. Like wise the top lines of all meters, relays and recorders
etc. shall be matched.

8.7

At existing station, panels shall be matched to the extent possible with other panels in the
control room in respect of dimensions, colour, appearance and arrangement of equipment
(center lines of switches, push buttons and other equipment) on the front of the panel.

8.8

All the equipment connections and cabling shall be designed and arranged to minimize the
risk of fire and damage which may be caused by fire.

PANEL INTERNAL WIRING AND OTHER ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT

9.1

Panels shall be supplied complete with interconnecting wiring provided between all
electrical devices mounted and wired in the panels and between the devices and terminal
blocks for the devices to be connected to equipment outside the panels. When panels are
arranged to be located adjacent to each other all interpanel wiring and connections
between the panels shall be furnished and the wiring shall be carried out internally. These
adjacent interpanel wiring shall be clearly indicated in the drawing furnished by the
Contractor.

9.2

All wiring shall be carried out with 1100 V grade, single core, stranded copper conductor
wires with PVC insulation and shall be Fire Retardant Low Smoke (FRLS) grade, vermin
and rodent proof, which shall have oxygen index not less than 29 and temperature
index not less than 250 deg. C. The minimum size of the multi-stranded copper
conductor used for internal wiring shall be as follows:
a)
b)
c)

All circuits except Current Transformer circuits and Voltage transformer circuits
meant for energy metering: One 1.5 sq. mm copper per lead.
All Current transformers circuits: One 2.5 sq. mm copper per lead.
Voltage transformer circuit (for energy meters): Two 2.5 sq. mm per lead

Major Substation Equipment

9.3

9.4

All internal wiring shall be securely supported, neatly arranged, readily accessible and
connected to equipment terminals and terminal blocks. Wiring gutters & troughs shall be
used for this purpose.
Auxiliary bus wiring for AC and DC supplies, voltage transformer circuits, annunciation
circuits and other common services shall be provided near the top of the panels running
throughout the entire length of the panels. These buses shall have a nominal cross section
equivalent to a copper diameter of 6mm and shall be suitably insulated for along their run.
DC buses shall be divided into two sections to permit two independent supply points.

9.5

Wire termination shall be made with solder-less crimping type and tinned copper lugs
which firmly grip the conductor and insulation. Insulated sleeves shall be provided at all
the wire terminations. Engraved core identification plastic ferrules marked to correspond
with panel wiring diagram shall be fitted at both ends of each wire. Ferrules shall fit tightly
on the wire and shall not fall off when the wire is disconnected from terminal blocks.

9.6

All wires directly connected to trip circuit breaker or device shall be distinguished by the
addition of red coloured T lettered ferrule. Number 6 and 9 shall not be included for
ferrule purposes. The wire numbers shown in the wiring diagram shall be as per IS: 305.

9.7

Longitudinal troughs extending throughout the full length of the panel shall be preferred for
inter panel wiring. Interconnections to adjacent panel shall be brought out to a separate
set of terminal blocks located near the slots of holes meant for taking the inter-connections
to adjacent panels at site and wires for this purposes shall be provided by Contractor
looped and bunched properly inside the panel.

9.8

Contractor shall be solely responsible for the completeness and correctness of the internal
wiring and for the proper functioning of the connected equipment.

10

TERMINAL BLOCKS

10.1

All internal wiring to be connected to the external equipment shall terminate on terminal
blocks, preferably vertically mounted on the side of each panel. Terminal blocks shall be
1100 V grade and have 10 Amps continuous rating, moulded piece, complete with
insulated barriers, stud type terminals, washers, nuts and lock nuts. Markings on the
terminal strips shall correspond to wire number and terminal numbers on the wiring
diagrams. All terminal blocks shall have shrouding with transparent unbreakable material.

10.2

Not more than 2 wires shall be connected to any terminal. Suitable supports shall be
provided for the incoming cables. The terminal blocks shall be arranged to provide
maximum accessibility to all conductor terminations. The terminal blocks shall be fully
enclosed with easily removable covers and made of moulded, non-inflammable plastic
material with bases and barriers moulded integrally.

10.3

Disconnecting type terminal blocks shall be provided for Current Transformer and Voltage
Transformer secondary leads. Also Current Transformer secondary leads shall be provided
with short circuiting and earthing facilities.

10.4

At least 20% spare terminals shall be provided on each panel and these spare terminals
shall be uniformly distributed on all terminal blocks.

Major Substation Equipment

10.5

Unless otherwise specified, terminal blocks shall be suitable for connecting the following
conductors of external cables on each side:
i)
ii)
iii)

All CT & PT circuits: Minimum of two of 2.5 sq. mm. copper

AC/DC power supply circuits: one of 6 sq. mm Aluminium/Copper.
All other circuits: Minimum of one of 2.5 sq. mm copper.

10.6

There shall be minimum clearance of 250 mm between the first row of terminal blocks and
the associated cable gland plate or panel side wall. Also, the clearance between two rows
of terminal blocks shall be a minimum of 150 mm.

10.7

Arrangement of the terminal block assemblies and the wiring channel within the enclosure
shall be such that a row of terminal blocks is run in parallel and in close proximity along
each side of the wiring duct to provide for convenient attachment of internal panel wiring.
The side of the terminal block opposite the wiring duct shall be reserved for the
Purchasers external cable connection. All adjacent terminal block shall also share this
field wiring corridor. A steel strip shall be connected between adjacent terminal block rows
at 450 mm intervals for support of incoming cables. All wiring shall be provided with
adequate support inside the panels to hold them firmly and to enable free and flexible
termination without causing strain on terminals.

10.8

The number and sizes of the multicore incoming cables will be as specified in the
specification. All necessary cable terminating accessories such as gland plates, packing
glands, crimp type tinned copper lugs, supporting clamps and brackets, wiring troughs and
gutters etc. shall be included in the scope of supply.

11

MIMIC DIAGRAM

11.1

Coloured mimic diagram and symbols showing the exact representation of the system shall
be provided in the front of control panels.

11.2

Mimic diagram shall be made preferably of anodized aluminium material which shall be
screwed on to the panel and can be easily cleaned. Painted overlaid mimic is also
acceptable. The mimic bus shall be 2 mm thick. The width of the mimic bus shall be 10
mm for bus bars and 7 mm for other connections.

11.3

Mimic bus colour will be decided by the Purchaser and shall be obtained from the
Purchaser by the Contractor.

11.4

When semaphore indicators are used for isolator and circuit breaker positions they shall be
so mounted in the mimic that the isolator and circuit breaker position shall complete the
continuity of mimic.

11.5

Indicating lamp, one for each phase for each bus shall be provided on the mimic to indicate
bus charged condition.

11.6

Specific numbers shall be assigned to various isolators, earthing switches and circuit
breakers on mimic diagram. The Contractor shall undertake to paint the same in suitable
colour.

12

NAME PLATES AND MARKINGS

Major Substation Equipment

12.1

All equipment mounted on front and rear side as well as equipment mounted inside the
panels shall be provided with individual name plates with equipment designation engraved.
Also on the top of each panel on front as well as rear side, large and bold name plates
shall be provided for circuit/feeder designation. These circuit labels shall be larger than
that of other name plates.

12.2

All front mounted equipment shall also be provided at the rear with individual name plates
engraved with tag numbers corresponding to the one shown in the panel internal wiring to
facilitate easy tracing of the wiring. The name plates shall be mounted directly by the side
of the respective equipment and shall not be hidden by the equipment wiring.

12.3

Name plates shall be made of non-rusting metal or 3 ply lamicoid. Name plates shall be
black with white engraving lettering.

12.4

Each instrument and meter shall be prominently marked with the quantity measured (e.g.
kV, A, MW etc.). All relays and other devices shall be clearly marked with manufacturers
name, serial numbers and electrical rating data.

12.5

Each switch shall bear clear inscription identifying its function e.g BREAKER, 52A,
SYNCHRONISHING etc. Similar inscription shall also be provided on each device whose
function is not otherwise identified. If any switch device does not bear this inscription
separate name plate giving its function shall be provided for it. Switch shall also have clear
inscription for each position indication e.g. Trip-Neutral-Close, ON-OFF, R-Y-B-OFF
etc.

12.6

All the panels shall be provided with name plate mounted inside the panel bearing LOA No.
& Date, Name of the Sub-station & feeder and reference drawing number.

13

SUPPORTING STEEL & BASE FRAMES

All necessary embedded leveling steel, sills, anchor bolts, channels and other parts for
supporting and fastening the panels and vibration damper shall be supplied by the
Contractor.

14

MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES

15.1

Plug Point
240 Volts, Single Phase, 50 Hz, AC socket with switch suitable to accept 5 Amps and 15
Amps pin (round, standard Indian plug) shall be provided in the interior of each cubicle with
ON-OFF switch.

15.2

Interior Lighting
Each panel shall be provided with a compact fluorescent lighting fixture rated for 240 Volts,
single phase, 50 Hz supply for the interior illumination of the panel during maintenance.
The fittings shall be complete with switch-fuse unit and switching on the lighting shall be
controlled by the respective panel door switch.

15.3

Switches, MCBs and fuses

Major Substation Equipment

Each panel shall be provided with necessary arrangements for receiving, distributing and
isolating DC and AC supplies for various control, signalling, lighting and space heater
circuits. The incoming and sub-circuits shall be separately provided with Miniature Circuit
Breaker (MCB). Selection of MCB rating for the main and sub-circuits shall be such as to
ensure selective clearance of sub-circuit faults. MCBs shall confirm to IS: 13947. Each
MCB shall be provided with one potential free contact and the same shall be wired
for annunciation purpose. However, Voltage Transformer circuits for relaying and
metering shall be protected by fuses. All fuses shall be HRC cartridge type conforming
to IS: 13703 mounted on plug-in type bakelite fuse bases. All accessible line connection to
fuse bases shall be adequately shrouded. Fuses shall have operation indicators for
indicating blown fuse condition. Fuse carrier base as well as MCBs shall have imprints of
the rating and voltage.

15.4

Space heaters
Tubular space heaters of adequate capacity and suitable for connection to single phase,
240V, 50 Hz supply shall be provided inside each panel to prevent condensation of
moisture on the wiring and panel mounted equipment when the panel is not in operation.
These shall not be mounted close to the wiring or any panel mounted equipment. Heaters
shall be complete with MCB and thermostat.

15.5

Other accessories
Test link, special terminal boards and other accessories normally required for testing,
operation and maintenance of all relays and meters shall be furnished by the Contractor.

15

EARTHING

16.1

All panels shall be equipped with an earth bus securely fixed. Location of earth bus shall
ensure no radio interference for effectively earthed systems under various switching
conditions of isolators and breakers. The material and the sizes of the bus bar shall be
at least 25x6 sq. mm perforated copper with threaded holes at a gap of 50 mm with
the provision of bolts and nuts for connection with cable armours and mounted
equipment etc. for effective earthing. When several panels are mounted adjoining each
other, the earth bus shall be made continuous and necessary connectors and clamps for
this purpose shall be included in the scope of supply of contractor. Provision shall be
made for extending the earth bus bars to future adjoining panels on either side.

16.2

Provision shall be made on each earth bus bars of the end panels for connecting to Substation earthing grid. Necessary terminal clamps and connectors for the purpose shall be
included in the scope of supply of Contractor. The wire or screens should be clearly
bonded and earthed at the gland plate.

16.3

All current free metallic parts of all mounted equipment (i.e. metallic cases of relays,
instruments and other panel mounted equipment including gland plate) shall be looped by
PVC insulated 2.5 sq. mm stranded copper wire and final two leads shall be connected to
earth bus. The colour code of earthing wires shall be green.

16.4

Looping of earth connections shall be such that it would not result in loss of earth
connection to other devices when the loop is broken. However, Looping of earth
connections between equipment to provide alternative paths to earth bus shall be
provided.

Major Substation Equipment

16.5

VT and CT secondary neutral or common lead shall be earthed at one place only at
the terminal blocks where they enter the panel. Such earthing shall be made through
links so that earthing may be removed from one group without disturbing continuity of
earthing system for other groups.

16.6

An electrostatic discharge point shall be provided in each panel connected to earth bus via
1 Mega Ohm resistor.

16.7

The detailed earthing scheme shall be submitted for approval of the Purchaser.

16

INDICATING INSTRUMENTS, RECORDERS & TRANSDUCERS

17.1

All instruments, meters, recorders and transducers shall be enclosed in dust proof,
moisture resistant, black finished cases and shall be suitable for tropical use. The analogue
indicating instruments(e.g. MW, MVAR, Bus voltage & frequency) and recorders shall be
provided with individual transducers and these shall be calibrated along with transducers
to read directly the primary quantities. They shall be accurately adjusted and calibrated at
works and shall have means of calibration, check and adjustment at site. The supplier shall
submit calibration certificates at the time of delivery. However no separate transducers are
envisaged for digital bus voltmeters and digital frequency meters and the indicating meters
provided in the synchronising equipment. The Bidder shall confirm that the instruments,
meters and recorders offered by them are suitable for connecting to the instrument
transformers having technical particulars given under Section Specific Technical
Requirements of the specification. All accessories including the test switches and test
plugs, where applicable shall be furnished. Their elements shall be shock resistant and
shielded from external magnetic fields.

17.2

Indicating instruments
a)

Unless otherwise specified all electrical indicating instruments shall be of

digital type with a dial of 96 mm x 96 mm size. They shall be suitable for flush
mounting.

b)

Instruments shall have 4-digit display; display height being not less than 25 mm.

c)

Instruments shall conform to IS: 1248 and shall have accuracy class of 0.5 or
better. Watt and Var meters shall have an indication of (+) and (-) to indicate
EXPORT and IMPORT respectively.

d)

Digital voltage and frequency meters shall be of class 0.5 and shall have digital
display of five (5) and four (4) digits respectively with display size not less than 25
mm (height).

17.3

Electronic / Static Meter

17.3.1

The Electronic/Static Meter having hardware accuracy class of 0.2 with facility to give
readings for different time segments for import as well as export parameters separately for
the following components of power:
a)
b)
c)

kW
kVAR
kWh

Major Substation Equipment

d)
e)

kVARh
Maximum Demand

The meter shall have non-volatile memory to store data for one year. The meter shall be
supplied with Tele metering facility so that data can be sent to remote station / computer for
processing or records. The Contractor shall submit details of the Energy Meter for approval
of the Purchaser.
17.4

Bus Voltage & Frequency Recording Instrument

17.4.1

The recorders shall have square or rectangular display windows and shall be suitable for
flush mounting on panels. These shall be of draw out type and suitable for back
connection. The recorders shall record voltage and frequency. The recorders shall have
fast response and critical damping.
The recorders shall be provided with dust tight cases with gasketed doors and shall require
minimum maintenance.

17.4.2

17.4.3

Recording may be made with ink on ordinary paper or by any other suitable means. The
recorders shall incorporate means for giving advance indications for replacement of chart
paper and replenishing ink. The arrangement for feeding chart paper or removal of chart
paper shall be simple and shall neither require switching off the supply nor opening the
back cover. The Contractor may include adequate number of chart rolls and ink for
successful operation of the recorder for two years period.

17.4.4

The recorder shall:

i)

be single pen type employing potentiometer servo drive principle.

ii)

be of continuous recording type with disposable fibre tip cartridge pens, employing
ink on paper.

iii)

have a Calibrated chart width of at least 100 mm and a viewing area of 100x50
mm, at least.

iv)

have accuracy of + 1.0% span.

v)

have full span response time of less than 2 seconds.

vi)
vii)

have maximum chart speed facilcity of 60 mm per hour.

be directly calibrated for PT ratios in use.

viii)

be provided with chart rolls of adequate length requiring replacement, not earlier
than 30 days at a speed indicated above. The quantity of chart rolls and ink
included with the offer shall be 1000 metre length of paper and five pens with each
recorder.

ix)

be suitable for operation with station DC source, in case of AC supply (230 volts, 1
phase, 50Hz) failure (inverter may be included ,if required).

x)

Voltage recorders
Range
Input voltage

Major Substation Equipment

:
:

140-250 kV, 250-450 kV

110 V

xi)

Frequency recorder
(a)
(b)

Range
Input voltage

:
:

45-55 Hz
110 V

17.4.5

Alternatively, Static/Digital type frequency recorder and voltage recorder either as

individual units or composite unit for total Sub-station with time tagged information shall
also be acceptable if it meets the accuracy of + 1.0% span and full span response time of
less than 2 seconds. The static/digital type frequency and voltage recorders shall also
meet the high voltage susceptibility test, impulse voltage withstand test, high frequency
disturbance test Class III and fast transient disturbance test level III as per IEC-60255.

17.5

Transducers

17.5.1

Transducers (for use with Indicating Instruments and Telemetry/Data Communication

Application) shall in general conform to IEC: 688-1.

17.5.2

The transducers shall be suitable for measurement of active power, reactive power,
voltage, current and frequency in three phase four wire unbalanced system.

17.5.3

The input to the transducers will be from sub-station Current & Potential Transformers. The
output shall be in milli Ampere DC proportional to the input & it shall be possible to feed the
output current directly to the telemetry terminal or indicating instruments.

17.5.4

The transducer characteristic shall be linear throughout the measuring range.

17.5.5

The transducer output shall be load independent.

17.5.6

The input & output of the transducer shall be galvanically isolated.

17.5.7

The transducer shall derive its auxiliary supply from the quantity to be measured without
need for any external auxiliary supply.

17.5.8

Each transducer shall be housed in a separate compact case and have suitable terminals
for inputs & outputs. Input side terminal connectors (from CT & PT) shall to be suitable for
three phase, 4 wire connection

17.5.9

The transducers shall be suitably protected against transient high peaks of voltage &
current.

17.5.10

The transducer shall withstand indefinitely without damage and work satisfactorily at 120%
of the rated voltage and 120% of the rated input current as applicable.

17.5.11

The voltage, frequency & current transducers shall have an output of 0-10 mA and
the active & reactive power transducer shall have an output of 10 - 0 - 10 mA.

17.5.12

The response time of the transducers shall be less than 1 second.

17.5.13

The accuracy class of transducers shall be 0.5 or better (for voltage / current transducer),
0.5 or better (for watt / VAR transducer) and 0.2 or better (for frequency transducers).

17.5.14 The transducers shall have a low AC ripple on output less than 1%.
Major Substation Equipment

17.5.15 The transducers shall be suitable for load resistance of 1000-1500 ohms.
17.5.16

The transducer shall have dual output.

17

ANNUNCIATION SYSTEM

Alarm annunciation system shall be provided on the control panel by means of visual and audible alarm
in order to draw the attention of the operator to the abnormal operation conditions or the
operation of some protective device. The annunciation equipment shall be suitable for
operation on DC supply as specified in the specification.
The annunciation shall be of visual and audible type. The audible annunciation for the emergency
signals and the warning signals shall be by means of hooter and bell respectively.
The visual annunciation shall be provided by annunciation facia flush mounted on the top of the
control panels.
The annunciator facia shall be provided with translucent glass or plastic cover plates of white colour
with inscriptions in black block letters. The size of the facia window shall be 35 mm
x 50 mm and the size of the lettering shall not be less than 5 mm. Alarm inscriptions
shall be engraved on each window in not more than three lines and shall be visible only
when the facia light is on. The cover plates of the facia window shall be capable of easy
removal to facilitate replacement of lamps and individual inscription plates. The
transparency of cover and wattage of the lamps provided in the facia window shall be
adequate to ensure clear visibility of the inscription from the location of the operators table
in the control room having high illumination intensity (350 Lux).
Each annunciation window shall be provided with two lamps in parallel to provide safety against lamp
failure. Long life lamps shall be used.
TRIP and NONTRIP facia shall be differentiated. All TRIP facia shall have red colour and all NONTRIP
facia shall have white colour.
The audible alarm shall be provided by Buzzer/ Hooter /Bell having different sounds and shall be used
as follows:
Hooter
Bell
Buzzer

- Alarm Annunciation
Annunciation DC failure
- AC supply failure

Acknowledge, Reset and Test push buttons for the annunciator shall be provided.
The sequence of operation of the annunciator shall be as follows:
Alarm condition

1 Normal
2 Abnormal
3 Acknowledge/Accept push
button pressed
Major Substation Equipment

Fault
Contact
Open
Close
a) Close
b) Open

Visual
Annunciation
Off
Flashing
Steady On
Steady On

Audible
Annunciation
Off
On
Off
Off

4 Reset Push button is pressed

5 Lamp Test push button pressed

a)

a) Close
b) Open
Open

On
Off
Steady On

Off
Off
Off

Visual and audible annunciation for the failure of DC supply to the annunciation system
shall also be provided and this annunciation shall operate on a 240 Volts AC supply
with separate fuses. On failure of the DC power supply to the annunciation system
for more than 2 to 3 Secs. (adjustable setting), a facia shall light up and the audible
alarm shall sound. A separate push button shall be provided for cancellation of this
audible alarm alone, but the facia window shall remain steadily lighted till the supply
to the annunciation system is restored
b)

A separate voltage check relay shall be provided to monitor the failure of 240 V AC
supply to the scheme mentioned in item (a) above. If the failure of supply exists for
more than 2 to 3 seconds, this shall initiate the visual and audible annunciation.
Visual and audible annunciation for the failure of AC supply to the annunciation
system shall be provided and this annunciation shall operate on Annunciation DC
and buzzer shall sound.

The annunciation system described above shall meet the following additional requirements:
a)

The annunciation system shall be capable of catering for at least 20 simultaneous

signals at a time.

b)

One set each of the following push buttons shall be provided on each panel:
i)
ii)
iii)

c)

Reset push button for annunciation system.

Accept push button for annunciation system.
Lamp test push button for testing the facia windows.

One set of the following items shall be provided common for all the control panel
Flasher relay for annunciation system
Push button for flasher test
Three Push buttons for test of all audible alarm systems

d)

These testing circuits shall be so connected that while test is being done it shall
not prevent the registering of any new annunciation that may land during the test.

e)

Provision shall be made for switching off the entire annunciation system.

f)

The annunciations shall be of repetitive type and shall be capable of registering the
fleeting signals. Minimum duration of the fleeting signal registered by the system
shall be 15 milliseconds.

g)

Auxiliary relay for annunciation system shall have adequate auxiliary potential free
contacts for use in event logger. The annunciator shall be suitable for operation
with normally open fault contacts which close on a fault. For fault contacts which
open on fault, it shall be possible at site to change annunciator from close to fault
to open to fault and vice versa.

Major Substation Equipment

h)

In case reset push button is pressed before abnormality is cleared, lamps shall
continue to glow and shall go out only when normal condition is restored.

i)

Any new annunciation appearing after the operation of accept for previous
annunciation, shall provide a fresh audible alarm.

j)

In case of static annunciator scheme, special precaution shall be taken to ensure

that spurious alarm condition does not appear due to influence of external
electromagnetic/electrostatic interference on the annunciator wiring and switching
disturbances from the neighbouring circuits within the panels. The static
annunciator shall meet the high voltage susceptibility test, impulse voltage
withstand test, high frequency disturbance test class III and fast transient
disturbance test Level III as per IEC: 60255.

k)

The annunciation system to be supplied for existing sub-stations shall be

engineered as an extension to the existing scheme.

18

CONTROL AND SELECTOR SWITCHES

18.1

Control and instrument switches shall be rotary operated type preferably with silver to silver
contacts of adequate making, carrying and breaking current ratings. They shall be provided
with easily removable protective terminal covers and escutcheon plates clearly marked to
show operating position and circuit designation plates and suitable for flush mounting with
only switch front plate and operating handle projecting out. Handles of different shapes
and suitable inscriptions on switches as per Clause No. 12 of this section shall be provided
as an aid to switch identification. The connections shall be from the back. The contact
assembly at the back of the switch shall be enclosed in dust proof removable covers.

18.2

The selection of operating handles for different types of switches shall be as follows:
a)
b)

Breaker and Isolator control switches

Synchronizing switch

c)
d)
e)

Selector switches
Instrument switches
Protection Transfer switch

Pistol grip, Black

Oval, Black, keyed handle (one
common removable handle for a
group of synchronizing switches or
locking facility having common key).
Oval or knob, black
Round, Knurled, black
Pistol grip, lockable and black.

18.3

The control switch of breaker and isolator shall be of 3 position, 12 / 16 ways, spring return
to neutral type with lost motion device, with locking facility. The spring return type shall be
provided with target which shall indicate the last operation of the switch. The control
springs shall be strong and robust enough to prevent inadvertent operation due to light
touch. The spring return type switch shall have spring return from close and trip positions
to after close and after trip positions respectively. Adequate number of spare contacts
shall be provided on breaker control switch for control, interlocking, annunciation and
discrepancy indication.

18.4

Instrument selection switches shall be of maintained contact (stay put) type. Ammeter
selection switches shall have make-before-break type contacts so as to prevent open
circuiting of CT secondaries when changing the position of the switch. Voltmeter transfer
switches for AC shall be suitable for reading all line-to-line and line to neutral voltages for

Major Substation Equipment

non effectively earthed systems and for reading all line to line voltages for effectively
earthed systems.
18.5

Synchronizing switches shall be of maintained contact (stay put)type having a common

removable handle for a group of switches. The handle shall be removable only in the OFF
position and it shall be coordinated to fit in to all the synchronizing switches. These
switches shall be arranged to connect the synchronizing equipment when turned to the ON
position. One contact of each switch shall be connected in the closing circuit of the
respective breaker so that the breaker cannot be closed until the switch is turned to the ON
position.

18.6

Lockable type of switches which can be locked in particular position shall be provided when
specified. The key locks shall be fitted on the operating handles.

18.7

The contacts of all switches shall preferably open and close with snap action to minimize
arcing. Contacts of switches shall be spring assisted and contact faces shall be with rivets
of pure silver or silver alloy. Springs shall not be used as current carrying parts.

18.8

The contact combination and their operation shall be such as to give completeness to the
interlock and function of the scheme. The contact rating of the switches shall be as
follows:
Contact rating in Amps
Description

240 V AC
220 V DC

a) Make and carry continuously

b)
c)

50 V DC

Make and carry for 0.5 sec.

10
30

10
30

10
30

Break for
i) Resistive load
ii) Inductive load with L/R = 40 milli sec.

3
0.2

20

18.9

The connections shall be from the back. The contact assembly at the back of the switch
shall be enclosed in dust tight removable cover. The access to the cover shall be from the
back by the removal of nuts.

18.10

Discrepancy switches: As an alternative to the pistol grip type control switch, the
Contractor can offer control switch with discrepancy lamp. Control switch with
discrepancy lamp shall be used for the remote operations like closing and tripping the
circuit breakers or closing and opening of the isolator. The built in lamp shall be connected
to the annunciator, to show any discrepancy between the position of the switches and
controlled objects. Suitable flasher relay shall also be included in the scope. The
discrepancy switches shall be black in colour and knob type with built in lamp. Wherever
discrepancy switches are provided, the Contractor shall provide necessary auxiliary relays
for interlock schemes. The corresponding breaker position of indicating lamps shall flash
for condition of discrepancy between the last operation of the circuit breaker (ON-OFF) and
become steady when the switch is operated to correspond with the position of the circuit
breaker. The discrepancy signal, when the breaker is tripped, shall also be followed by the
sound signal.

19

POSITION INDICATORS

Major Substation Equipment

Position indicators of SEMAPHORE type shall be provided when specified as part of the mimic
diagrams on panels for indicating the position of circuit breakers, isolating / earthing
switches etc. The indicator shall be suitable for semi-flush mounting with only the front disc
projecting out and with terminal connection from the rear. Their strips shall be of the same
colour as the associated mimic.
Position indicator shall be suitable for DC operation as specified. When the supervised object is in the
closed position, the pointer of the indicator shall take up a position in line with the mimic
bus bars, and at right angles to them when the object is in the open position. When the
supply failure to the indicator occurs, the pointer shall take up an intermediate position to
indicate the supply failure. The rating of the indicator shall not exceed 2.5 W.
It shall not be possible to displace the position of the indicator disc due to the accidental touch during
the cleaning of the panel.
The position indicators shall withstand 120% of rated voltage on a continuous basis.
20

INDICATING LAMPS

Indicating lamps shall be cluster LED type suitable for panel mounting with rear terminal connections.
Lamps shall be provided with series connected resistors preferably built in the lamp
assembly. Lamps shall have translucent lamp cover to diffuse lights colored red, green,
amber, clear white or blue as specified. The lamp cover shall be preferably of screwed
type, unbreakable and molded from heat resisting material. The supply for these lamps
shall be from DC station batteries unless stated otherwise.
Lamps and lenses shall be interchangeable and easily replaceable from the front of the panel. Tools, if
required for replacing the Lamps and lenses shall also be included in the scope of supply.
Lamps shall be furnished 20% in excess of the actual numbers required and caps shall be
furnished 10% in excess of actual numbers used for each colour.
The indicating lamps with resistors shall withstand 120% of rated voltage on a continuous basis.
21

SYNCHRONIZING EQUIPMENT

The synchronizing instruments shall be mounted on a synchronizing trolley. The trolley shall be
equipped with double analog voltmeters, double analog frequency meters, synchroscope
and lamps fully wired. The size of voltmeters and frequency meters provided in the
synchronising panel shall not be less than 144 X 144 sq.mm. Suitable auxiliary Voltage
Transformers wherever necessary shall also be provided for synchronizing condition.
The instruments shall be suitable for 110/3 V phase to neutral VT secondaries.
The synchroscope shall indicate synchronism between incoming and running supplies when pointer is
at the time Twelve O clock position only and shall have arrows on the face to show that
the incoming supply frequency is fast or slow with respect to the running supply frequency
when the pointer is moving clockwise or anti-clockwise respectively. The instrument
pointer shall move at least 45 degrees from the vertical position when either or both
supplies are removed and then remain stationary without any tendency to creep.
The synchroscope shall be 360 degrees type and preferably be larger in size than other instruments. It
shall be capable of withstanding sustained out-of-synchronism conditions.
Major Substation Equipment

In case the synchroscope is not continuously rated, a synchroscope cut-off switch shall be provided and
an indicating lamp to indicate that the synchroscope is energized, shall also be provided.
Synchronizing check relay with necessary ancillary equipment shall be provided which shall permit
breakers to close after checking the requirements of synchronizing of incoming and running
supply. The phase angle setting shall not exceed 35 degree and have voltage difference
setting not exceeding 10% rated value. This relay shall have response time of less than
200 milliseconds when the two system conditions are met within present limits with the
timer disconnected. The relay shall have frequency difference setting not exceeding 0.45%
at rated value and at the minimum time setting. The relay shall have a continuously
adjustable time setting range of 0.5 to 20 sec. A guard relay shall be provided to prevent
the closing attempt by means of synchronizing check relay when control switch is kept in
closed position long before the two systems are in synchronism. The synchronizing by
pass switch shall also be provided.
The trolley shall be mobile type with four rubber padding wheels capable of rotating in 360 deg. round
the vertical axis. Suitable bumpers with rubber paddings shall be provided all round the
trolley to prevent any accidental damage to any panel in the control room while the trolley
is in movement.
The trolley shall have 5.0 meter long flexible cord comprising stranded tinned copper conductors fully
wired to the instruments and terminated in plug in order to facilitate connecting the trolley to
any of the panels. The trolley shall be provided with all equipment/accessories necessary
for proper synchronization.
Receptacle to accept the plug shall be provided on each control panel.
At existing substations, the synchronizing scheme shall be engineered to be compatible with the
existing synchronizing scheme and synchronizing socket / switch on the panel. In
substations, where synchronizing panel are available, the bidder shall carry out the shifting
of the above panels, if required, to facilitate the extension of control panel placement.
22

TEST BLOCKS
Switchboard type, back connected semi flush mounting type test blocks with contacts
suitably rated shall be provided with links or other devices to enable insertion of series
devices into the circuit without causing open circuit in the CT secondary or to enable short
circuiting of the CT secondary. Test block covers shall be removable from the front of the
panels and shall be provided with suitable sealing arrangement to prevent unauthorized
access to the test studs. If any test plugs are to be used with the test studs, 6 nos. of each
type of such test plugs shall be supplied free with the main equipment.

23

PUSH BUTTONS
Push Buttons shall be of momentary contact type with rear terminal connection. These
shall be suitably shrouded to prevent inadvertent operation. Integral inscription plates
engraved with their functions shall be provided. All push buttons shall have two Normally
Closed and two Normally Open contacts. The contact faces shall be silver plated. The
contacts shall be able to make and carry 5 Amp. , break 1 Amp. inductive load at 250 V
DC.

Major Substation Equipment

24

DISTURBANCE RECORDER

Disturbance Recorder (DR) shall record the graphic form of instantaneous values of voltage and current
in all three phases, the open delta voltage & neutral current. The open or closed position of
relay contacts and breaker during the system disturbances shall also be recorded.
Disturbance Recorder shall be in-built in line Distance Relay and should meet the requirement of
following clauses.
The disturbance recorder shall consist of individual acquisition units, one for each feeder and an
Evaluation unit which is common for the entire substation.
The disturbance recorder shall have eight (8) analog and sixteen (16) digital channels for each feeders
The Acquisition units shall acquire the disturbance data for pre-fault, fault & post-fault period, and
transfer them to Evaluation unit automatically to store them on a storage device.
The acquisition unit shall be suitable for inputs from Current Transformers with 1Amp rated
secondaries and Capacitive Voltage Transformers with 63.5V (phase to neutral voltage)
rated secondaries.
The acquisition unit shall have the following features:
a)

Facility shall exist to alert the operator in case of any internal faults in the
acquisition units (such as power supply fail, processor/memory fail etc.) and the
same shall be wired to annunciation system.

b)

The frequency response shall be zero on lower side and 250 Hz or better on upper
side.

c)

The pre-fault time shall not be less than 200 ms and the post fault time shall
not be less than 2 seconds (adjustable). If another system disturbance occurs
during one post fault run time, the recorder shall also be able to record this
subsequent disturbance. However, the total memory of the acquisition unit shall not
be less than 5 seconds.

d)

The acquisition units shall have a scan rate in the range of 1000 Hz to 5000 Hz or
better so that all practical wave shape distortions can be recorded from the time of
inception of a fault.

e)

The open delta voltage and neutral current shall be derived either through software
or externally by providing necessary auxiliary transformer.

f)

The acquisition unit shall be typically used to record the following digital channels.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Main Circuit Breaker (CB) R Phase open

Main CB Y Phase open
Main CB B Phase open
Main 1 carrier received
Main 1 protection operated
Main / Tie/ TBC (Transfer Bus Coupler) Auto reclosed operated
Over voltage stage 1 / 2 operated
Stub TEE-1/2 protection operated
Direct Trip received

Major Substation Equipment

10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.

Main -2 carrier received

Main- 2 / back up protection operated
Bus bar protection operated
LBB operated of main / Tie / TBC (Transfer Bus Coupler) circuit breaker
Tie / TBC CB R Phase Open
Tie / TBC CB Y Phase Open
Tie / TBC CB B Phase Open
Reactor protection operated

The necessary hardware and software shall also be supplied for the on-line transfer of data from all
acquisition units to the evaluation unit. The disturbance recording system shall be capable
of handling the full complement of feeders in the substation.
Immunity from the Effects of Hostile Environment
The DR equipment shall be carefully screened, shielded, earthed and protected as may be
required for its safe and proper functioning. Also, the disturbance recorder shall have
stable software, reliable hardware, simplicity of maintenance and immunity from the effects
of the hostile environment of an EHV switchyard which is prone to numerous interference
signals such as large switching transients.
Interface with PC
The evaluation unit shall comprise all the necessary hardware and software for the proper
evaluation of disturbances. The hardware would typically consist of a desktop personal
computer (including a large high resolution colour monitor, mouse and keyboard) and a
high-speed colour printer. The desktop PC shall have Pentium P4 processor or better and
shall have a clock speed of 2 GHz or better with CD/DVD writer. The mass storage
capacity of PC shall not be less than 80 GB and the RAM capacity shall not be less than 1
GB. The evaluation software required for the analysis and evaluation of the recorded data
shall run on the PC under Microsoft Windows environment. The software features shall
provide:

clear and unambiguous display of all channels;

the ability to reposition the analog and digital traces;
recording of maximum/minimum values etc. of the analog channels;
calculation of maximum/minimum frequency and phase difference values;
grouping of signals for drawing on the same axis;
listing and identification of all analog and digital channels as well as and current,
voltage, frequency and phase difference values at the time of fault/tripping;
the capability of carrying out Fourier/Harmonic analysis of the current and voltage
waveforms; and,
the availability of the disturbance records in COMTRADE format.

Printer
The Evaluation unit shall be connected to the printer to obtain the graphic form of
disturbances whenever desired by the operator. The printer shall be compatible with
desktop PC. Minimum acceptable paper width shall be of standard A4 size (210 mm x 296
mm). The print out shall contain the following
i)
ii)

Feeder identity
Date and time (in hour, minute and second up to 1000th of a second).

Major Substation Equipment

iii)
iv)

Identity of trigger source.

Graphic representation of analogue and digital signals of all the channels.

Type & Quantity of paper

i)

Preferably plain paper or any other paper having long shelf life, available ex-stock
on demand not requiring any special storage facility for the printer. Photographic
paper and Thermal paper are not acceptable.

ii)

The Contractor shall provide 10 packets of paper (500 sheets in each packet).

iii)

The arrangement of feeding and removing paper foils shall be quick and simple.

Power supply
DR acquisition unit shall be suitable to operate from the station DC 220 V as available at
substation. The Evaluation unit along with the printer shall normally be connected to 230 V,
single phase AC supply. In case of failure of AC supply, Evaluation unit and printer shall
be switched automatically to the station DC through Inverter of adequate capacity which
shall form a part of Disturbance recorder system. Any other power supply that may be
required for proper functioning of the equipment shall form an integral part of the
equipment.
All external & internal faults in the disturbance recording device equipment such as power supply fail,
printer faulty, paper exhausted, processor/memory fail etc. are required to appear on
screen of PC.
The disturbance recorder shall be capable of being triggered by the following user specified quantities:
External start, both software and hardware
Cross triggering of groups of channels, either software or hardware or both
Binary channel (NO & NC contacts)
Over voltage and under voltage
Overcurrent
Negative sequence voltage
Zero sequence voltage
Rate of change, voltage or current
Overfrequency or under frequency
Logical or Boolean expressions, programmable
Power swing
Rate of change of active or reactive power
Time Generator
The disturbance recorder shall have its own time generator and the clock of the time
generator shall be such that the drift is limited to less than 0.5 seconds per day, if
allowed to run without synchronisation. Further, the disturbance recorder shall have the
facility to synchronise its time generator from the station Time Synchronisation Equipment
using IRIG-B. The recorder shall give an alarm in the case of the absence of the
synchronising pulse for a pre-determined time.
The accuracy of the time generators shall be 1 x 10 5, or better. The recorder shall give
annunciation in case of absence of synchronizing pulse within a specified time.
Major Substation Equipment

The technical particulars are as given below:

1
2
3

Capacity of recorder
Pre-fault memory
Post fault memory

4
5
6

Scanning rate
Accuracy of the internal clock
Ambient Temp.

Analog channels 8, Digital channels 16.

Not less than 200 ms.
Not less than 2 sec.( Adjustable between 2 sec.
to 5 sec.)
1000 Hz to 5000 Hz
Better than 1x105 sec.
5 deg. C to 50 deg. C

25

DISTANCE TO FAULT LOCATOR

27.1

The distance to fault locator shall be built-in feature of line Distance Relay (Main I
Protection Scheme) and
a)

shall be On-line type

b)

shall be suitable for breaker operating time of two (2) cycle i.e. the measurement
time for fault locator shall not exceed 2 cycles (40 ms).

c)

shall have built in display unit.

d)

The display shall be directly in percentage of line length or kilometers without

requiring any further calculations

e)

shall have an accuracy of 3% or better for the typical conditions defined for
operating timings measurement of distance relays.

f)

The above accuracy should not be impaired under the following conditions

26

presence of remote end in-feed

predominant DC component in fault current
high fault arc resistance
magnitude of line loading before occurrence of faults.

g)

shall have facility for remote data transmission

h)

shall meet IEC: 255 or any other equivalent internationally recognized standards

i)

shall have mutual zero sequence compensation unit if fault locator is to be

used on double circuit transmission line

j)

shall have built in supervision and testing facility.

EVENT LOGGERS

The Event Logger shall be used to record the open and close states of switchyard / substation
equipment, relays and change of alarms. The Event Logger shall include Video Display
Unit (VDU), printer and keyboard. Alternatively, desktop PC with VDU, printer and
keyboard shall be supplied with Event Logger. Configuration of PC is stipulated in Clause
No. 26.10 of this section.
Major Substation Equipment

The equipment is used to record changes in digital events. When such changes occur, a display in VDU
as well as print out on Printer should result.
The equipment should be constructed in clearly defined plug-in modules. A monitor module should be
provided for indicating internal faults such as processor failure, memory failure and
other internal hardware failures. These failures should be displayed on the LEDs mounted
on the monitor module and facility shall exist to alarm the operator.
The Event Logger shall have stable software, reliable hardware, simplicity of maintenance & repair. The
equipment should be carefully screened, shielded, earthed and protected & designed to
operate satisfactorily in severe hostile electrical environment of EHV switchyard which are
prone to various interference signals, typically from large switching transients.
The event logger must meet the following requirements:
a) At least about 500 digital events should be accommodated in a single equipment.
b) The date and time should be printed to the nearest 1 milli sec. followed by a message
describing the event which has operated. Such messages may be abbreviated or in
full English forms.
c) The operator shall be able to change the date and time from the key board and allow
normal inputs of Accept, Alarm demand log, lant status, demand log date & time.
d) Cope with up to 40 changes in any one 10 mill sec. interval.
e) The time resolution shall be 1 milli second.
f) Events occurring whilst a previous event is in process of being printed are stored to
await printing. Over 100 such events must be stored.
g) Necessary facility to change the text of the event by the operator shall exit.
Each Event Logger shall have its own time generator. The clock of the time generator shall be such that
the drift is limited to 0.5 seconds per day, if allowed to run without synchronization.
Further, Event Logger shall have facility to synchronize its time generator from station Time
Synchronization Equipment having output of following types

Voltage signal
(0 to 5 Volts continuously settable with 50 milli seconds minimum pulse duration.)
Potential free contacts
(Minimum pulse duration of 50 milli seconds.)
IRIG-B
RS 232 C.

The Event Logger shall give annunciation in case of absence of synchronizing pulse within
the specified time.
The Contractor shall furnish along with the offer a typical print out for simulated conditions. These shall
be furnished on the original paper at least in two copies.

Major Substation Equipment

The printer shall be compatible with Event Logger and VDU / desktop PC. Only plain paper shall be
used for printer. The arrangement of feeding and removing paper rolls/stacks shall be

quite simple. The Contractor has to provide 10 packets of paper suitable for the printer.
Each
packet shall have 500 sheets.
26.9

The printout of event shall contain at least the following

Station identification
Date and time (in hours, minutes, seconds and milli seconds)
Event number
Event description (at least 40 characters)

26.10

Facility shall be provided for advance indication of paper exhaust condition by means of a
potential free contact for external connection to annunciation scheme.

26.11

The Event Logger shall be suitable to operate from 220 V DC as available at substation. VDU
unit along with the printer shall normally be connected to 230 V, single phase AC supply.
In case of failure of AC supply, VDU and printer shall be switched automatically to the
station DC through Inverter of adequate capacity. The inverter supplied along with
Disturbance Recorder can be shared for the Event Logger also. Any other power supply
that may be required for proper functioning of the equipment shall form an integral part of
the equipment.

26.12

At existing substations where event logger is provided, necessary potential free contacts of
various relays / equipment for plant and alarm states shall be provided and coordinated
with existing Event Logger for proper logging of events. The drawings containing schedule
of events with necessary termination details shall be submitted during Engineering of the
project.

26.13

Necessary software for transferring the data automatically from the local Event Logger to a
remote station and receiving the same at the remote station through owners
VSAT/LEASED LINE shall be provided

26.14

The equipment Input/output circuits should withstand the following tests.

i)
ii)

5 kV impulse tests. (as per IEC: 255 - Part IV).

High frequency disturbance test in line with the relevant IEC: 255 Part IV.

26.15

The cost of Event Logger, its evaluation unit (PC with Pentium IV Processor, 1 GB RAM,
80 GB Hard Disk with CD/DVD writer, Keys keyboard and mouse etc.), Printer and
software shall be included in the cost of C&R Panels, no extra payment shall be made on
account of these equipment.

27
27.1

RELAYS

27.1.1

All relays shall conform to the requirements of IS-3231/ IEC-60255/ IEC-61000 or other
applicable approved standards. Relays shall be suitable for flush or semi flush mounting on
the front with connections from the rear.

General

Major Substation Equipment

27.1.2

All main protection relays shall be of numerical type and communication protocol
shall be as per IEC- 61850. Further, the test levels of EMI as indicated in IEC-61850
shall be applicable to these. The relay should have a communication port for local
communication for relay settings, modifications etc.

27.1.3

All protective relays shall be in draw out or plug in type/modular cases with proper testing
facilities. The testing facilities provided on the relays shall be specifically stated in the bid.
Necessary test plugs/handles shall be supplied loose and shall be included in
Contractors scope of supply.

27.1.4

All AC operated relays shall be suitable for operation at 50 Hz. AC voltage operated relays
shall be suitable for 110 volts VT secondary and current operated relays for 1 Amp. CT
secondary. All DC operated relays & timers shall be designed for DC voltage specified, and
shall operate satisfactorily between 70% and 110 % of rated voltage. Voltage operated
relays shall have adequate thermal capacity for continuous operation.

27.1.5

The protective relays shall be suitable for efficient and reliable operation of the protection
scheme described in the specification. Necessary auxiliary relays and timers required for
interlocking schemes for multiplying of contacts to suit contact duties of protective relays
and monitoring of control supplies and circuit, lockout relay monitoring of circuits etc. and
also required for the complete protection schemes described in the specification shall be
provided. All protective relays shall be provided with at least two pairs of potential
free isolated output contacts. Auxiliary relays and timers shall have pairs of contacts as
required to complete the scheme, contacts shall be silver faced with spring action. Relay
case shall have adequate number of terminals for making potential free external
connections to the relay coils and contacts including spare contacts. Relay case size shall
be so chosen as not to introduce any limitations on the use of available contacts on the
relay due to inadequacy of terminals. Paralleling of contacts, if any shall be done at the
terminals on the casing of the relay.

27.1.6

All protective relays, auxiliary relays and timers except the lock out relays and
interlocking relays specified shall be provided with self reset type contacts. All
protective relays and timers shall be provided with externally hand reset positive
action operation indicators with inscription, subject to Purchasers approval. All
protective relays which do not have built in hand reset operation indicators shall have
additional auxiliary relays with operating indicators (Flag relays) for this purpose. Similarly
separate operating indicator (Auxiliary relays) shall also be provided in the trip circuits of
protections located outside the board such as Buchcholz relays, oil and winding
temperature protection, sudden pressure devices, fire protection etc.

27.1.7

Timers shall be of solid state type. Short time delays in terms of milli seconds may be
obtained by using copper slugs on auxiliary relays. In such case it shall be ensured that
the continuous rating of the relay is not affected. Time delay in terms of milli seconds
obtained by the external capacitor resistor combination is not acceptable.

27.1.8

No control relay which shall trip the power circuit breaker when the relay is de- energized
shall be employed in the circuits. All relays shall be self reset type unless otherwise
specified.

27.1.9

Provision shall be made for easy isolation of trip circuits of each relay for the purpose of
testing and maintenance.

Major Substation Equipment

27.1.10

Auxiliary seal-in-units provided on the protective relays shall preferably be of shunt

reinforcement type. If series seal-in-units are used the following shall be strictly ensured:
a)

The operating time of the series seal-in-unit shall be sufficiently shorter than that of
the trip coil or trip relay in series with which it operates to ensure definite operation
of the flag indicator of the relay.

b)

Seal-in-unit shall obtain adequate current for operation when one or more relays
operate simultaneously.

c)

Impedance of the seal-in-unit shall be small enough to permit satisfactory

operation of the trip coil on trip relays when the DC supply voltage is minimum.

d)

Trip-circuit seal-in is required for all trip outputs, irrespective of the magnitude of
the interrupted current. The trip-circuit seal-in logic shall not only seal-in the trip
output(s),but also the relevant initiation signals to other scheme functions, (e.g.
initiate signals to the circuit-breaker failure function, reclosing function etc.), and
the alarm output signals.

e)

Two methods of seal-in are required, one based on the measurement of AC

current, catering for those circumstances for which the interrupted current is above
a set threshold, and one based on a fixed time duration, catering for those
circumstances for which the interrupted current is small (below the set threshold).

f)

For the current seal-in method, the seal-in shall be maintained until the circuit
breaker opens, at which time the seal-in shall reset and the seal-in method shall
not now revert to the fixed time duration method. For this seal-in method, the sealin shall be maintained for the set time duration. For the line protection schemes,
this time duration shall be independently settable for single- and three-pole
tripping.

g)

Seal-in by way of current or by way of the fixed duration timer shall occur
irrespective of whether the trip command originates from within the main protection
device itself (from any of the internal protection functions), or from an external
device with its trip output routed through the main protection device for tripping.
Trip-circuit seal-in shall not take place under sub-harmonic conditions (e.g. reactor
ring down).

27.1.11

All protective relays and alarm relays shall be provided with one extra isolated pair
of contacts wired to terminals exclusively for Purchasers future use.

27.1.12

The setting ranges of the relays offered, if different from the ones specified shall also be
acceptable if they meet the functional requirements.

27.1.13

Any alternative/additional protections or relays considered necessary for providing

complete effective and reliable protection shall also be offered separately. The acceptance
of this alternative/ additional equipment shall lie with the Purchaser.

27.1.14

The bidder shall include in the bid a list of installations where the relays quoted have
been in satisfactory operation.

27.1.15

All relays and their drawings shall have phase indications as R- Red, Y- Yellow, B- Blue.

Major Substation Equipment

27.1.16

27.2

For numerical relays, the scope shall include the following:

a)

Necessary software and hardware to up/down load the data to/from the relay
from/to the personal computer installed in the sub-station.

b)

The relay shall have suitable communication facility for future connectivity to
SCADA. Neither the interface hardware nor the software for connectivity to SCADA
will form part of the scope of this specification.

c)

Numerical relays shall be capable of supporting IEC 60870-5-103 and IEC-61850

communication protocol.

d)

All Numerical relays shall have a keypad on front for relay setting.

e)

In addition, the relays should also have LED & LCD display in the front panel, which
should automatically get illuminated for a short period when any settings are
changed from the relay keyboard.

Auxiliary / Monitoring Relay

Self reset auxiliary/monitoring voltage relays for specified DC voltage shall be provided for use in the
interlocking schemes for multiplication of contacts, and for monitoring of control supplies
and circuit. Monitoring relays for lockout relay circuit shall be connected in series with
lockout relay coils. The tenderer shall be responsible to ensure that the monitoring relay
ratings are such that they shall positively pick up through the breaker coils / lockout relay
coils monitored, but the breakers/lockout relays shall not operate with such a connection.
The supply and circuit monitoring relay shall be connected to initiate an alarm upon failure of respective
supply circuit. They shall preferably have reverse flags, which drop when the relay is deenergized. Otherwise, an indicating lamp shall be provided with each monitoring relay for
indication of its operation.
27.3

Trip Circuit Supervision relays

27.3.1

The trip circuit shall be supervised by means of relays. The scheme shall continuously
monitor the healthiness of trip circuit of circuit breaker before closing and after closing of
the breaker. The scheme shall detect healthiness of (i) failure of trip supply to trip coil of
each phase (ii) open circuit of trip circuit wiring and (iii) failure of mechanism to complete
the tripping operation.

27.3.2

The relays shall have necessary contacts to be connected to the alarm or to the
annunciator available for visual and audible indication of the failure of trip circuit (in case
control panel is provided) and event logger.

27.3.3

The relay shall have time delay on drop off of not less than 200 milli seconds and be
provided with operation indication/flags for each phase.

27.3.4

Trip circuit supervision relay shall be provided for each pole of breaker for each DC source.

27.3.5

Necessary external resistors for trip circuit supervision relays shall be supplied.

Major Substation Equipment

27.4

Pole Discrepancy Protection Scheme

In case close or trip signal is given to the circuit breaker and all the three poles of the
breaker do not close or trip simultaneously due to some mechanical defect or otherwise,
necessary scheme should be provided to give visual and audible indication of the
discrepancy of the poles. In case of discrepancy under closing ,a trip signal shall be given
to all the three poles. The scheme shall have adjustable time relays (with a range of 0.1 to
1 sec.) to avoid its operation in case of single phase auto reclosing of the breaker.

27.5

DC supply supervision Relay

a)
b)
c)

27.6

The relay shall be capable of monitoring the failure of DC supply to which it is

connected.
It shall have adequate potential free contacts to meet the scheme requirement.
The relay shall have a "time delay on drop off" of not less than 100 milliseconds and
be provided with operation indicator / flag.

Voltage selection scheme (wherever applicable)

A suitable scheme shall be provided to select appropriate bus voltages for protection and
metering purpose. The scheme shall use auxiliary contacts of bus isolators. It shall ensure
that there is no interruption of supply to the protection and metering circuits while
changeover is taking place.

27.7

High Speed Tripping Relay

High Speed Tripping Relay shall
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)

27.8

be instantaneous (operating time not to exceed 10 milli seconds).

have self resetting time less than 20 milli seconds.
have necessary supervisory relays
be DC operated
be provided with operation indicators for each element/coil.
have adequate contacts to meet the requirement of the scheme, other functions
like auto reclose relay, LBB relay as well as cater to associated equipment like
event logger, disturbance recorder and fault locator etc.

Flag relays
These shall have
a)
b)
c)

hand reset flag indication

two elements
4 nos. contacts (NC or NO or combination as required) for each element/coil.

28

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF PROTECTIONS

28.1

General

Major Substation Equipment

a)

The protective relays, auxiliary relays and timers that are required to be provided
are included in the list of equipment and the detailed description of each protection
and the associated equipment are described in the subsequent clauses.

b)

The setting ranges of the relays offered, if different from the one specified shall
also be acceptable if they meet the functional requirements. The Contractor shall
quote the protection equipment meeting the requirements specified in the
subsequent clauses.

a)

Numerical Restricted Earth Fault Protection shall

b)

i)

be single pole type

ii)

be of current / voltage operated high impedance type with a suitable

setting to cover at least 90% of winding

iii)

have a current setting range of 10-40% of 1 Amp / have suitable voltage

setting range.

iv)

be tuned to the system frequency

v)

have a suitable adjustable non linear resistor to limit the peak voltage to
1000 volts.

vi)

have alarm and trip output contacts.

vii)

have a high speed operation of 10-20 ms to trip.

viii)

not be in-built in differential protection.

Numerical Back up Over Current and Earth fault protection scheme with high
set feature
i)

ii)

Shall have three overcurrent and one earth fault element(s) which shall be
either independent or composite unit(s).
(for HV side and IV / LV side)
The scheme shall include necessary VT fuse failure relays for alarm
purposes.

iii)

Shall be single pole type

iv)

Directional Over current relay shall

a)
b)
c)
d)

e)

Shall be single pole type

have directional IDMT characteristic with a definite minimum time
of 3 sec. at 10 times setting
have a variable setting range of 50-200% of rated current
have a characteristic angle of 30/45 deg. (lead), a directional
controlled, low transient over reach, high set instantaneous unit of
continuously variable setting range 500-2000% of rated current.
Both the inverse and high set relays shall be directional
include hand reset flag indicators or LEDs.

Major Substation Equipment

f)
v)

Directional Earth fault relay shall

a)
b)
c)
d)

e)
f)
g)
c)

not be in-built in differential protection.

Shall be single pole type

have directional IDMT characteristic with a definite minimum time
of 3 sec. at 10 times setting
have a adjustable setting range of 10-80% of rated current
have a characteristic angle of 45/60 deg. (lag), a directional
controlled, low transient over reach, high set instantaneous unit of
continuously variable setting range 200-800% of rated current.
Both the inverse and high set relays shall be directional.
include hand reset flag indicators or LEDs.
include necessary separate interposing voltage transformer or
have internal feature in the relay for open delta voltage to the relay.
not be in-built in differential protection.

Local breaker back up protection

This shall be provided on both HV and LV/ IV sides. The relay shall be as per
Clause No. 28.5 of this section

d)

High speed tripping relays as per Clause No. 27.7 of this section.

e)

Flag relays

Be hand reset auxiliary relays with flag indication

Have six elements
Have four nos. NO and NC (or combination as required) contacts for each
element/coil

number of contacts as will be required for the scheme.

28.2

Transmission Line Protection

a)

The line protection relays are required to protect the line and clear the faults on
line within shortest possible time with reliability, selectivity and full sensitivity to all
type of faults on lines. The general concept is to have two Main protections having
equal performance requirement specially in respect of time as called Main &
backup protection for 132 kV transmission lines. The 132 kV lines shall be
provided with distance protection as main protection and Directional Over Current
and Directional Earth protection as back up protection. The 33kV overhead lines
shall be provided with over current and earth fault protection.

b)

All relays shall be suitable for series compensated line.

c)

The transmission system for which the line protection equipment are required is
shown in reference drawing/document(s). The length of lines and the line
parameters (Electrical Constants), are indicated in Annexure III of this section.
The maximum fault current could be as high as 31.5 kV for 132kV system and
25kV for 33kV system, but the minimum fault current could be as low as 20% of

d)

Major Substation Equipment

rated current of CT secondary. The starting & measuring relays characteristics

should work satisfactorily under these extremely varying conditions.

28.3.1

28.3.2

e)

The protective relays shall be suitable for use with Potential Transformers having
non electronic damping and transient response as per IEC. It should be ensured
that there is no additional delay in relay operating time created intentionally to have
stable operation.

f)

Disturbance recording, fault locator and Over voltage relay (stage-I) functions, if
offered as an integral part of the line protection relay and meeting the technical
requirement as per specified in relevant clauses, shall also be acceptable.

g)

Auto reclose relay function if offered as an integral part line of line distance
protection relay, shall be acceptable for 132 kV line only provided the auto reclose
relay feature meets the technical requirements as specified in the respective
clause.

The following protections shall be provided for 132kV transmission line

Main:

Numerical distance protection scheme

Back up:

Directional Over current and Earth fault protection

The detailed description of the above line protections is given here under:

Main-I & Main-II Numerical Distance Protection scheme shall

i)

have continuous self monitoring and diagnostic feature.

ii)

be of non-switched type with separate measurements for all phase to phase and
phase to ground faults (3 for phase to phase faults and 3 for phase to ground faults
i.e. total 18).

iii)

have stepped time-distance characteristics with three (3) independent zones(Zone1, Zone-2 and Zone-3, Zone-4) of protection as under:
a)
b)
c)
d)

1st zone shall have instantaneous operation & the relay shall be set to protect
80% to 90% of the protected line section.
2nd zone will operate with time delay and will be set to protect 100% of the
protected line section and 50% of the next line section.
3rd zone will operate with time delay longer than that in the 2nd zone and will
cover the entire length of protected line and the next line section.
4th zone for reverse reach

Major Substation Equipment

iv)

have Mho or quadrilateral or other suitably shaped characteristics for zone-1, zone2 and zone-3.

v)

have following maximum operating time (including trip relay time , if any) under
given set of conditions and with PT being used on line (with all filters included).

vi)

(a) for 132KV lines:

A relaxation of 5 ms in above timings is allowed for 132 KV lines from the
below data.
Source to Impedance Ratio
(SIR)
Relay setting (Ohms)
Fault Locations (as % of
relay setting)
Fault resistance (Ohms)
Maximum
operating
time(Milliseconds )

15

(10 or 20) and 2

50

2
50

0
40 for all faults

0
45 for 3 ph Faults &
60 for all other faults

vii)

The relay shall have an adjustable characteristics angle setting range of 30 85

degree or shall have independent resistance(R ) and reactance (X) setting.

viii)

have two independent continuously variable time setting range of 0-3 seconds for
zone 2, 0-5 seconds for zone 3 and 0-5 seconds for zone 4.

ix)

have a maximum resetting time of less than 55 milli seconds (including the
resetting time of trip relays).

x)

have facilities for offset features with adjustable 10-20% of zone 3 setting.

xi)

have variable residual compensation.

xii)

The setting/reach should not be affected by mutual coupling effect of D/C line or
nearby paralleled circuits. The proof of compensation should be given if provided.

xiii)

have memory circuits with defined characteristics in all three phases to ensure
correct operation during close-up three phase faults and other adverse conditions
and shall operate instantaneously when circuit breaker is closed to zero volt 3
phase fault.

xiv)

have weak end in-feed feature.

xv)

be suitable for single & three phase tripping. However relays offered for 132 kV
lines provided with mechanically ganged circuit breakers, single pole tripping
need not be provided.

xvi)

have a continuous current rating for two times rated current. The voltage circuit
shall be capable of operation at 1.2 times rated voltage. The relay shall also be

Major Substation Equipment

capable of carrying a high short time current of 70 times rated current without
damage for a period of 1 sec.
xvii)

be selective between internal and external faults.

xviii)

incorporate three separate high-speed trip relays for single-phase faults and a
fourth high-speed trip relay for multi phase faults. Each of these shall have
adequate contacts to meet the complete scheme requirement.

xix)

be provided with necessary self reset type trip duty contacts for completion of the
scheme (Minimum number of these trip duty contacts shall be four per phase) either
through built in or through separate high speed trip relays . Making capacity of
these trip contacts shall be 30 amp for 0.2 seconds with an inductive load of L/R >
10 mill seconds. If separate high speed trip relays are used , the operating time of
the same shall not be more than 10 milliseconds.

xx)

be suitable for use in permissive under reach / over reach /blocking communication
mode.

xxi)

include power swing blocking protection which shall

a)
b)
c)
d)
e)

xxii)

have suitable setting range to encircle the distance protection described

above.
have a continuously adjustable time delay on pick up of setting range 0-2
seconds.
block tripping during power swing conditions.
be able to select the power swing blocking in zone 1, 2 or 3 or any
combination of the zones.
release blocking in the event of actual fault

include fuse failure protection which shall

a)
b)
c)
d)
e)

monitor all the three fuses of PT and associated cable against open circuit.
inhibit trip circuits on operation and initiate annunciation.
have an operating time less than 7 milli seconds.
remain inoperative for system earth faults.
have sufficient number of contacts, one for alarm and other for blocking the
tripping.

xxiii)

have suitable number of potential free contacts for Carrier aided tripping, Auto
reclosing, CB failure, Sequence of Events Recorder, Disturbance Recorder & Data
Acquisition System.

xxiv)

In case the numerical distance relay is not having the built in feature as per above
clause, the same can be supplied as an independent relay.

xxv)

Must have a current reversal guard feature.

xxvi)

include continuous DC supply supervision.

Major Substation Equipment

xxvii) have Operation immune to the presence of DC transients during fault condition in
the voltage / current inputs to the relays.
xxviii) The distance protection offered shall have features for the TEE zone protection
(where applicable) which shall act even when one of the lines (along with
concerned line PTs) is taken out of service and the other line/transformer in the
same diameter is getting fed from both the buses. This protection called stub
protection shall be as per Clause No. 28.6 of this Section.
xxix)

have the relay, which shall have indicators to show the phase or phases involved in
a fault and the zone in which the scheme has operated.

Back-up Directional Over Current and Earth fault protection scheme

(a)

shall have three over current and one earth fault element(s) which shall be either
independent or composite unit(s)

(b)

shall be of Numerical type

(c)

shall include necessary VT fuse failure relays for alarm purposes.

(d)

Directional Overcurrent protection shall

(e)

have IDMT characteristic (O/C) with a definite minimum time of 3.0 seconds at
10 times setting
have a variable setting range of 50-200% of rated current
have a characteristic angle of 30/45 degree lead
include hand reset flag indicators or LEDs.

Earth fault protection shall

have IDMT characteristic (E/F) with a definite minimum time of 3.0 seconds at
10 times setting
have a variable setting range of 10-80% of rated current
have a characteristic angle of 45/60 degree lag
include hand reset flag indicators or LEDs
include necessary separate interposing voltage transformers or have internal
feature in the relay for open delta voltage to the relay.

Line Over Voltage Protection Relay

This relay shall:
i)

monitor all three phases

ii)

have two independent stages and stage-I & II relay are acceptable as built in
with line distance relays Main-I & II respectively.

iii)

have an adjustable setting range of 100-170% of rated voltage with an adjustable

time delay range of 1 to 60 seconds for the first stage.

Major Substation Equipment

iv)

have an adjustable setting range of 100-170% of rated voltage with a fixed delay of
100-200 milli second for the second stage.

v)

have power frequency filters (be tuned to power frequency)

vi)

have a drop off to pick up ratio greater than 95%

vii)

Incorporate a high speed trip relay conforming to Clause No. 27.7 of this Section
except that it shall have self reset type of contacts

viii)

have independent output contacts available for each phase and stage for breaker
trip relays, event logger and other scheme requirements.

ix)

be provided with separate operation indicators (flag target) for each stage relays.

x)

be in-built in distance protection.

Auto reclosing
Auto reclosing function shall be separate from / built in with Main-I & Main-II
protection and shall:
i)

have single phase or/and three phase reclosing facilities

ii)

have a continuously variable single phase dead time of 0.1 2 seconds.

iii)

have a continuously variable three phase dead time range of 0.1 2 seconds.

iv)

have a continuously variable reclaim time range of 5-300 seconds.

v)

incorporate a four position selector switch from which single phase/three phase/
single and three phase auto reclosure and non auto reclosure mode can be
selected. Alternatively, the mode of auto reclosing can be selected through
programming.

vi)

have facilities for selecting check synchronizing or dead line charging features. It
shall be possible at any time to change the required feature by reconnection of
links.

vii)

be of single shot type.

viii)

have priority circuit to closing of both circuit breakers in case one and half breaker
arrangement to allow sequential closing of breakers.

ix)

be acceptable as built-in with line distance relay

x)

be acceptable as built-in with Bay Control Unit (BCU) [in case substation
Automation is considered] .

xi)

include check synchronizing relay which shall

a)

have a time setting continuously variable between 0.5 5 seconds with a

facility of additional 10 seconds.

Major Substation Equipment

b)
c)
d)
xii)

include dead line charging relay which shall

a)

b)

xiii)

have a response time within 200 milli seconds with the timer disconnected.
have a phase angle setting not exceeding 35 deg.
have a voltage difference setting not exceeding 10%

have two sets of relays and each set shall be able to monitor the three
phase voltage where one set connected to the line PTs with a fixed setting
of 20% of rated voltage and other set connected to the bus PTs with a
fixed setting of 80% of rated voltage.
incorporate necessary auxiliary relays and timers to give comprehensive
scheme.

The auto reclosure of the line shall take place only when fault is cleared in the 1st
zone by the main protection(s). The auto reclosure shall not take place when
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)

the fault is cleared in 2nd zone or 3rd zone time,

when the tripping takes place after a power swing condition,
tripping due to operation of bus bar protection.
Tripping immediately after the manual closure of line breaker.
In event of a trip on pole discrepancy.
When carrier is out of service.

Provide suitable auto reclose lockout for the above.

xiv)

Have positive phase selections under all operating conditions. The scheme should
be such as to have Main I and Main II fully segregated such that shutdown and
testing on one Main protection should not affect the other Main protection. The
auto reclosure should then be connected to one protection.

xv)

Come in to operation with either or both Main I and Main II protection when these
protections operate for Zone I faults and trip the breaker.

xvi)

Pole discrepancy relay

Incorporate a separate pole discrepancy relay with timing range of 0.1 to 1 second
as per Cl .17.4.

28.3

Bus Bar Protection

28.4.1

Single bus bar protection Scheme shall be provided for each main and transfer bus for 132
kV voltage level. The bus bar protection could be Numerical or static type. The bidder
has to quote for 132KV type with numerical busbar protection as alternate offer. The
type of busbar protection (numerical /static type) shall be finalized during detail
engineering.

28.4.2

The bus bar arrangement at 132 kV level shall be double main bus with bypass
arrangement as shown in the single line diagram. The bus bar protection shall cater for
present scope as well as future scope. Bus Coupler / Transfer bay can be connected to
Main bus through isolator selection. The procedure for a transfer of circuit from the
dedicated breaker to the bus coupler breaker and vice versa should be without any
interruption.

Major Substation Equipment

Necessary CT selection auxiliary relays to ensure that the bus bar protection CT cores are
connected to the appropriate zone CT bus wires shall be supplied. The CT selection shall
be carried out through electrically reset relays which shall be so arranged that the
secondary circuits are made before and broken after the primary circuits. These relays, as
required for all circuits of the substation shall be supplied. CT selection relays shall be
housed inside related relay panels.
28.4.3

Each Bus bar protection scheme shall

i)

have maximum operating time up to trip impulse to trip relay for all types of faults
of 25 milli seconds at 5 times setting value.

ii)

operate selectively for each zone of bus bars.

iii)

give hundred per cent security up to 31.5 kA for 132 kV.

iv)

incorporate check feature relays.

v)

incorporate continuous supervision for CT secondaries against any possible open

circuit and if it occurs shall render the relevant zone of protection inoperative and
initiate an alarm.
Zonal protection contact shall be by-passed automatically by CT supervision relay
contacts and the affected zone shall be protected by check zone only.

vi)

not give false operation during normal load flow in bus bars.

vii)

incorporate clear zone indication.

viii)

be of phase segregated and triple pole type.

ix)

incorporate suitable non-linear resistors to limit peak voltage to 1000 volts

for each zone of relay in case of high impedance scheme. But low
impedance scheme shall be preferred.

x)

include individual high speed hand reset tripping relay (operating time not to
exceed 10 ms.) with sufficient number of contacts for simultaneous operation of
two trip coils of each pole of three pole breaker and also for tripping the remote
end breaker, for each circuit.

xi)

be transient free in operation.

xii)

include suitable range of adequately rated adjustable resistors in case of high

impedance schemes ensuring that the ohmic value of resistors covers both for
minimum and maximum current settings.

xiii)

include continuous DC supply supervision.

xiv)

Not cause tripping for differential current below the load current of heaviest
loaded feeder. Bidder shall submit application check for the same.

Major Substation Equipment

xv)

Include protection in/out switch for each zone.

xvi)

shall include trip relays, CT switching relays(if applicable) , auxiliary CTs (if
applicable) as well as additional power supply modules, input modules etc. as may
be required to provide a Bus-bar protection scheme for the complete bus
arrangement i.e. for all the bay or breakers under this specification as well as for
the future bays as per the Single line diagram for new substations. However, for
extension of bus bar protection scheme ( if specified in BPS) in existing
substations , scope shall be limited to the bay or breakers covered under this
specification . Suitable panels to mount these are also included in the scope of the
work.

xvii)

Built-in Local Breaker Backup protection feature as a part of numerical bus

bar protection scheme shall also be acceptable.

xviii)

At existing substations, Bus-bar protection scheme with independent zones for

each bus, will be available. All necessary co-ordination for 'AC' and 'DC'
interconnections between existing schemes (Panels) and the bays proposed under
the scope of this contract shall be fully covered by the bidder. Any auxiliary relay,
trip relay, flag relay and multi tap auxiliary CTs (in case of biased differential
protection) required to facilitate the operation of the bays covered under this
contract shall be fully covered in the scope of the bidder.

xix)

If required, it shall include multitap auxiliary CTs for each bay including future bays
as per Layout Drawings.

xx)

have necessary auxiliary relays to make a comprehensive scheme.

xxi)

include remote end lockout trip relay for each feeder ICT circuit for tripping the
remote end breaker, so as to achieve simultaneous tripping of remote end breaker.

xxii)

be inoperative for through faults, but shall operate correctly and positively for faults
within the protected zone(s) even under condition of CT saturation.

xxiii)

The scheme shall have on line testing facility to ensure maximum availability of the
scheme.

xxiv)

The test terminal blocks (TTB) to be provided shall be fully enclosed with
removable covers and made of moulded, non-inflammable plastic material with
boxes and barriers moulded integrally. All terminals shall be clearly marked with
identification numbers or letters to facilitate connection to external wiring. Terminal
block shall have shorting, disconnecting and testing facilities for CT circuits.

xxv)

incorporate check zone covering both main buses and transfer bus (if applicable)
in case of High impedance scheme.

28.4.4

The Contractor shall offer his equipment to meet the above requirements and make the
scheme fully comprehensive if necessary by providing auxiliary relays.

28.4.5

The Contractor shall supply bus bar protection trip relays as per Clause No. 28.4.3 (x)
indicated above for all the bays under this specification as well as for the future bays.

Major Substation Equipment

Suitable panels for mounting these trip relays shall be included in the scope of supply by
the Contractor.
28.4

Local Breaker Back Up Protection Relay (Breaker Failure Relay)

Each circuit breaker shall be provided with a stuck breaker protection scheme to take
care of instances of failure of breaker mechanism or other operational failure of circuit
breaker or for such faults which are not cleared by the protection. In such an event, the
other circuits connected to the affected zone shall be tripped and locked out after a short
time delay. The protection shall not give trip signal during operation of the main protection
relay of the circuit concerned.
Breaker failure relay scheme described above shall

28.5

i)

be triple pole type

ii)

be suitable for 220 VDC supply

iii)

have an operating time of less than 15 milli seconds.

iv)

have a resetting time of less than 15 milli seconds.

v)

have three over current elements and each element shall be arranged to get
individual initiation from the corresponding phase of main protection of line for
each over current element. However, common three phase initiation is
acceptable for other protections and transformer/reactor protections.

vi)

have a setting range of 20-320% of rated current for phase over current and 2080% for ground over current

vii)

have a continuous thermal withstand rating of two times rated current irrespective
of the setting.

viii)

have three separate timers one for each phase with a continuously adjustable
setting range of 0.1 to 1 second.

ix)

have necessary auxiliary relays to make a comprehensive scheme.

x)

provide output for connection to the bus bar protection scheme to trip other
breakers connected to the same bus.

xi)

The relay shall have reset/pick up ratio of not less than 90%.

xii)

initiate remote end tripping wherever required.

xiii)

Be stand alone type (if bus bar protection is not numerical)

xiv)

Built-in LBB protection feature as a part of numerical bus bar protection

scheme shall also be acceptable.

Stub Protection

Major Substation Equipment

A definite time over current relay with a variable setting range of 0.2 to 2A having a timer
with a time delay of 0 to 2 secs. shall be provided in the same CT core along with Main I
distance relay for each feeder. This shall operate through isolator auxiliary contacts and
shall not operate when isolator is in closed position.

28.6

Trip Transfer Switch

The trip transfer scheme shall employ a two position (NT) i.e Normal / Transfer, switch in
the following manner:
i)

ii)

28.7

28.8

The protection tripping of dedicated breaker shall not be routed through the Trip
Transfer Switch and shall remain connected to the dedicated breaker irrespective
of the trip transfer switch position.
The protection trip shall get connected to the Bus Coupler breaker when Trip
Transfer Switches is taken to T (Transfer) Position.

Suitable manual scheme should be offered with necessary interlocks to carry out
operation of concerned breakers and isolators in such a sequence that at no time
the supply to the circuit proposed to be transferred is affected.
The procedure to transfer a circuit from one of the Main buses to another main bus
through Bus Coupler Breaker and vice versa shall be furnished by the Contractor.

TIME SYNCHRONISATION EQUIPMENT

29.1

The Time Synchronisation equipment shall receive the co-ordinated Universal Time (UTC)
transmitted through Geo Positioning Satellite (GPS) System and synchronise equipment to
the Indian Standard Time (IST) in the substation.

29.2

The offered time synchronization equipment shall be complete in all respects including
antenna, all special cables and processing equipment etc., to receive synchronizing pulse
through GPS.

29.3

It shall be compatible for synchronization of Event logger, SCADA and Disturbance

Recorder at a substation through individual port or through Ethernet realized through optic
fibre bus.

29.4

Equipment should operate up to the ambient temperature of 50 deg. C and 100% humidity.

29.5

The equipment shall meet the requirement of IEC: 60255 for storage and operation.

29.6

The synchronization equipment shall have two (2) micro second accuracy.
Equipment shall give real time corresponding to Indian Standard Time (taking into
consideration all factors like voltage, temperature variations, propagation and processing
delays etc.) including communication time for satellite link to achieve real time signal.

29.7

The system should be able to track the satellites to ensure no interruption of

synchronization signal.

Major Substation Equipment

29.8

The output signal from each port of the equipment shall be programmable at site for either
one hour, half hour, minute or second pulse as per requirement.

29.9

The equipment offered shall have six (6) output ports. Various combinations of output
ports shall be selected by the customer during the detailed engineering from the following:
i)

ii)
iii)
iv)

Variable voltage signal : Normally 0-5 volts with 50 milli seconds minimum pulse
duration. In case any other voltage signal required, it shall be decided during
detailed engineering.
Potential free contact (minimum pulse duration of 50 milli seconds)
IRIG B
RS 232C

29.10

The equipment shall have periodic time correction facility of one (1) second periodicity.

29.11

Time synchronization equipment shall be suitable to operate from 220 V DC supply

available at the sub station with voltage variation as specified in the specification. Any other
power supply that may be required for proper functioning of the equipment shall form an
integral part of the equipment.

29.12

The equipment shall also have real time display in hour, minute, seconds (24 hours mode)
and shall have a separate time display unit to be mounted on the top of control panels
having display size of approximately 100 mm height.

29.13

The Contractor shall quote unit rate for each type of output for the purpose of
addition/deletion.

29.14

Time synchronization unit shall be supplied along with spares consisting of 1 set of PCB
cards of each type.

QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN (QAP)

30.1

The Bidder shall furnish the QAP for manufacturing activities as per Section- General
Technical Requirement alongwith:
a)
b)

Details of Inspection/Tests/Checks carried out as per agreed QAP.

Routine test on all associated equipment including disturbance recorder & event
recorder, meters, indicating instruments & cables etc. as per relevant Indian
Standards/IEC standard.

30.2

One copy of quality manual will be submitted within one month from the date of signing of
the Contract Agreement.

30.3

Bidder shall also submit the quality plan for bought out items/imported items etc.

INSPECTION AND TESTING

31.1

The Control & relay panels shall be offered for Inspection in accordance with relevant
Clauses of Section - General Technical Requirements. The control and relay panels
shall be completely assembled and subjected to the various routine and acceptance tests

Major Substation Equipment

as per the relevant standards in the premises of manufacturer of relay panel in the
presence of the Purchasers representative, if desired by the Purchaser.
31.2

The Contractor shall specifically state the details of testing facilities available at his own or
his sub vendors works.

31.3

The test reports of following type tests conducted on the Protective Relays, Distance to
Fault Locator, Disturbance Recorder and Event Logger shall be submitted alongwith the
bid for Purchasers review.
a)
b)
c)
d)

Insulation tests as per IEC 60255-5

High Frequency (HF) disturbance test as per IEC 60255-4 (Appendix-E)- Class III
(not applicable for electromechanical relays)
Fast transient test as per IEC 1000-4, Level III (not applicable for
electromechanical relays)
Relay characteristics, performance and accuracy test as per IEC 60255

e)
f)
g)
h)
i)

31.4

Steady state Characteristics and operating time

Dynamic Characteristics and operating time for distance protection relays
and current differential protection relays
For Disturbance Recorder and Event Logger only performance tests are
intended under this item.

Tests for thermal and mechanical requirements as per IEC 60255-6

Tests for rated burden as per IEC 60255-6
Contact performance test as per IEC 60255-0-20 (not applicable for Event Logger,
Distance to fault locator and Disturbance recorder)
Test for overshoot time for IDMT relays.
Verification of degree of protection as per IS: 13947/2147/IEC from independent
approved laboratory.

Control & Relay Panel shall also be subjected to following tests

i)
ii)
iii)
iv)

Mechanical operation Test

High voltage test/insulation resistance test.
Electrical control, inter lock & sequential operation test.
Verification of wiring as per approved schematic.

31.5

Steady state & Dynamic characteristics tests on the relays, as type test, shall be based on
test programme specified in Appendix A on simulator/network analyzer / PTL.
Alternatively, the files generated using Electromagnetic transient Programme (EMTP) can
also be used for carrying out the above tests. Single source dynamic tests on transformer
differential relay shall be/ should have been conducted based on general guidelines
specified in CIGRE committee 34th report on Evaluation of characteristics and performance
of Power system protection relays and protective systems.

31.6

Contractor shall carry out burn through `test at the variable voltages to prove the
performance of event logger (in case of stand alone EL) /disturbance recorder (in case of
stand alone DR).

31.7

Contractor will finalize with Purchaser, field quality plan within 3 months from the date of
signing of Contract Agreement which will include the site commissioning check lists for

Major Substation Equipment

various relays protection scheme, event logger, disturbance recorder, indicating and
recording instrument etc.
31.8

The Certified copies of tests reports of the type tests conducted on the relay panels shall
be submitted by the Bidder during detailed engineering stage.

FIRE PROTECTION
All equipment connections and cabling should be designed and arranged to minimize the
risk of fire and damage which may be caused by fire.
RELAY TEST KIT
One automatic relay test kit suitable for both Steady state and Dynamic testing of all
types of relays (voltage, current, frequency, distance and differential),
electromechanical/ Static/ Numerical alongwith all accessories, test leads, carrying
case etc. shall be supplied by the Bidder. The technical requirements shall be as per
Annexure IV.
The supply of relay test kit shall be included in the bid price as per the quantity
indicated in the bid price schedule.
ERECTION AND MAINTENANCE TOOL EQUIPMENTS
All special testing equipment required for the installation and maintenance of the
apparatus, instruments devices shall be furnished in relevant schedule.
TROPICALISATION
Control room will be normally air conditioned/air cooled. All equipment shall however be
suitable for installation in a tropical monsoon area having hot, humid climate and dry and
dusty seasons with ambient conditions specified. All control wiring, equipment and
accessories shall be protected against fungus growth, condensation, vermin and other
harmful effects due to tropical environment.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT
The equipment to be provided in the various control and relay panels are listed in
Annexure I & II respectively.

Major Substation Equipment

ANNEXURE I
CONTROL PANEL
Various types of control panels shall consist of the following
Ammeter

3 set

Ammeter with Selector switch

Wattmeter with transducer
Varmeter with transducer
Varmeter with transducer
CB Control switch
Isolator control switch
Semaphore
Red indicating lamp
Red indicating lamp
Green indicating lamp
Green indicating lamp
White indicating lamp (DC healthy
lamp)
Annunciation
windows
with
associated annunciation relays
Push button for alarm accept/ reset
/ lamp test
Synchronising socket
Synchronising selector
Protection transfer

1 set
1 set
1 set
1 set
1 No.
1 no.
1 no.
1 no.
1 no.
1 no.
1 no.
2 nos.

For each Line, BC, TBC Bus Section, Bus

Reactor and Transformer
For each line reactor
For each line, transformer
For each line, Bus reactor
For each line reactor
For each circuit breaker
For each isolator
For each earth switch
For each circuit breaker
For each isolator
For each circuit breaker
For each isolator
For each feeder

20 nos

For each feeder

3 nos.

for each control panel

1 no.
1 no.
1 no.

For each circuit breaker if required

For each circuit breaker switch if required
For each breaker in case of DMT / DM*/
SMT schemes (Except TBC and BC
breaker) - * with by pass isolator
In all control panels
For each line, transformer, bus reactor
For transformers / reactors

Mimic to represent SLD

Lot
Voltmeter with selector switch
1 no.
Cut out, mounting and wiring for Lot
RWTI and selector switch
Note:
1.
2.

3.

4.

For transformer feeders, all equipments of control panel shall be provided separately for
HV and MV sides.
In Case of incomplete diameter (D and I type layouts), control panel shall be equipped fully
as if the diameter is complete, unless otherwise specified. Annunciation relays shall also
be provided for the same and if required, necessary panel shall be supplied to
accommodate the same.
The above list of equipments mentioned for control panels is generally applicable unless it
is defined elsewhere and in case of bay extension in existing substations, necessary
equipments for matching the existing control panels shall be supplied
Common synchronizing switch is also acceptable in synchronizing trolley for new
Substations. In this case, individual synchronizing selector switch is not required for each
circuit breaker in control panel.

Major Substation Equipment

5.

Each line / HV side of transformer / MV / LV side of transformer / Bus reactor / TBC / BC /

Bus section shall be considered as one above purpose.

ANNEXURE-II
CONFIGURATION OF RELAY AND PROTECTION PANELS
The following is the general criteria for the selection of the equipments to be provided in each type of
panel.
LINE PROTECTION PANEL
The Line Protection panel for transmission lines shall consist of following relays and protection
Major Substation Equipment

Schemes:
Sl. No.
1.

Description
Main-I
Numerical
Protection scheme

2.

Main-II
Numerical
Distance
Protection Scheme
Over voltage Protection Scheme
Disturbance recorder
Distance to fault Locator
3 phase trip relays
Flag relays, carrier receive relays,
aux. Relays timers etc as per
scheme requirements
Under voltage relay for isolator /earth
switch
Cutout & wiring with TTB for energy
meter
Teed protection for 5 CT scheme in
one & half Breaker schemes
(if applicable)
Directional back up
Over current and E/F
Protection scheme
Energy Meter (Microprocessor based
Trivector meter)

3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

8.
9.
10.

11.

12.

Distance

132 kV
1 set

33kV
NIL

NIL

NIL

NIL
NIL
1 set
2nos.
Lot

NIL
NIL
NIL
1 No
Lot

2nos

2 Nos.

1 set

1set

NIL

NIL

1 set

1 Set

1 No.

1 No.

BREAKER RELAY PANEL

The breaker relay panel shall comprise of the following:
Sl. No.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Description
Breaker failure
Protection Scheme
DC supply Supervision relay
Trip circuit
supervision relays
Auto reclose scheme with check
synchronizing and Dead line charging
relay

Major Substation Equipment

With A/R
1 no.

With out A/R

1 no.

2 no.
6 nos.#

2 no.
6 nos.#

1 no.

NIL

5.

Flag relays ,aux .relays ,timers, trip

relays etc as per scheme requirements

Lot

Lot

# Trip supervision relays shall be 2 numbers for each 132KV Circuit breaker.
COMMON EQUIPMENT
The following common equipment shall be provided for each new Substation. These equipment shall be
mounted and wired in the C&R panel offered.
1
2

Common Annunciation Scheme

Bus voltage recorder

Bus frequency recorder

Bus voltmeter (Digital)

Bus frequency meter (Digital)

Bus healthy indication lamps

1 set
1 No. for
main bus
1 No. for
main bus
1 No. for
main bus
1 No. for
main bus
3Nos. for
main bus

each
each
each
each
each

ANNEXURE - III
BUS SWITCHING SCHEMES, LINE LENGTHS AND LINE PARAMETERS
1.

BUS SWITCHING SCHEMES

Major Substation Equipment

Owner proposes to adopt Double main bus scheme with bypass arrangement at 132 kV level
and Main and transfer bus scheme at 33kV level.

2.

LINE LENGTHS
a)

The approximate lengths or various lines, terminating/ originating from the Substation
are given below:Sl.
No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Line

Length in KM (Approximately)

132KV D/C Barn-siot Line

132KV D/C Siot-Kalakote Line
33KV Sunderbani
33KV Siot
33KV MES
33KV Army
33KV Irrigation
33 KV Nowshera

ANNEXURE - IV

AUTOMATIC THREE PHASE RELAY TESTING EQUIPMENT

General
In order to ensure healthiness and maximum availability of protective relays it is necessary to carry out
periodic testing. The automatic relay test kit shall be suitable for both Steady state and Dynamic testing
of all types of three phase electromechanical / Static / Numerical protection relays based on voltage,
current, frequency, impedance, differential, harmonics, synchronization in automatic as well as in
manual mode.
Technical Requirements
The equipment must be capable of efficiently testing all types of three phase electromechanical
/ Static / Numerical protection relays with a high degree of accuracy.
The test kit shall be capable of being operated with a computer and also without a computer. A
laptop computer pre-loaded with the easy to use relay testing software shall be provided for
fully automatic operation of the relay testing set.

Major Substation Equipment

The instrument shall be supplied with all standard accessories including test leads of required
length with shock proof carrying case. The test set shall be portable and handy for
transportation from one station to other.The testing equipment is generally meant for
carrying out tests at site and movement from one place to another is unavoidable.
Therefore equipments shall be robust in design so that it gives desired performance even
in adverse site conditions.
The instrument shall be suitable for 250Volts AC, 50 Hz with voltage variations of +10% and
frequency variation of 5%.
The kit should be capable of operating and storing data in following environment
Operating Temp. range
: -20 deg. C to 50C
Operating Relative Humidity
(RH) : at least upto 90% (non condensing)
The equipment should be designed to operate under the adverse conditions of external
influence like electrostatic discharge, magnetic field, electromagnetic field induction, RF
Interference, input waveform distortion and harmonics, input voltage and frequency
variation.
Apart from automatic testing capability, the testing kit shall be capable to simulate all the
waveforms (e.g. fault recording) and transients as recorded on the disturbance
recorder/numerical relay and also draw the relay characteristics for which it shall include
necessary software and hardware.

Calibration
The test set should have provision for auto calibration/ self-calibration through software. The
system can also be provided with an independent calibration box as an independent external
means of verifying the relevant parameters e.g. to calibrate the current and voltage of the test
kit. It should be possible to calibrate the calibration box and therefore the kit to relevant
International traceable standards.
The test kit/set should be capable of performing the following functions in automatic as well as
in manual mode.

Steady-state testing of current, voltage, frequency & impedance relays to test the
characteristic of protective relays.
Testing of over-fluxing relay and check synchronizing relay.
Testing of Electromechanical backup over current Relays for operating current upto 2x, 5x
and 10x of rated current (minimum pickup, Instantaneous and time delayed characteristic)
Testing of Frequency Relays for rate of change of frequency, minimum pickup, pickup to
dropout ratio, under/over frequency settings and time characteristic.
Testing of distance relays of 3-phase including features such as power swing blocking,
Switch On To Fault and weak end infeed features.
Testing of voltage relay for pickup to dropout ratio, Instantaneous and time delayed
characteristic.
Testing of 3 winding differential Relays including checking of Percentage Bias, Inrush
stability, Over-excitation stability.
Programmable Relay test kit should work as
(a) Relay test tool for all type of relays mentioned
(b) Database to document Relay settings.
(c) Storage of test history

Major Substation Equipment

(d) Storage of test methods

Software program should be menu-driven and should run on Microsoft Windows (NT,
2000/XP or latest version)
The test program /plan should allow user to define the Control Parameters to control
changes to magnitude, phase & frequency of selected source values and allow user to:
(a) Ramp up/down (at user defined rates) to test the pickup/dropout values.
(b) Step up/Step down the magnitude, phase-angle of frequency.
(c) Quickly find the pick-up value.
(d) Test the characteristic angle for impedance-relays/directional relays.

The programmable/automatic Relay test kit should be capable of doing simulation of

power system states like pre-fault, fault and post fault conditions for dynamic state testing.
Test program / plan should enable user of creating a number of system states to test
protection scheme/relay for realistic fault conditions and should be capable of calculating
voltage and current phasors during fault conditions.
Suitable ANSI-SQL92 compliant RDBMS Database system to allow user to store historical
test parameters and test results.
For observing the performance of distance relay under various grid conditions, the
Transient and Dynamic testing shall be possible.
Replay of Disturbance recorder output through COMTRADE format should be possible.
Through Report generation software, it shall be possible to compare previous test results
and deviations can be brought out with permissible tolerance in the report.
Through test set, it shall be possible to generate conditions such as Breaker failure,
carrier-fail etc.
Test kit shall have provision to carryout comprehensive end to end test using in conjunction
with Time synchronizing equipment available at both local and remote substations.
Features of Software
Licensed, latest version of automatic testing software certified by manufacturer only to be
supplied. It shall be WINDOWS based and can be customized by user without knowledge of
programming language. All operations using software shall be through user friendly
GUI(Graphical User Interface). Calibration Software & Hardware to be supplied. The software
should also contain an automatic test plan editor to create automatic test plans for
new/unknown relays easily and without programming knowledge. Equipment shall be capable
of upgrading to latest version manufactured for next 5 years.
Output Requirements
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)

Voltage Output : 3 Phase, 0 300V per phase, accuracy: 0.1% or better

Current output
: 3 Phase, 10 Amps per phase, 400 VA at 40Volts,
Accuracy: 0.1% or better
Phase angle
: 0 to 360 degrees
Frequency
: DC to 250 Hz

Major Substation Equipment

Appendix - A
Test programme for distance relays
General Comments:
These test cases are evolved from the report of working group 04 of study committee 34
(Protection) on evaluation of characteristics and performance of power system protection relays
and protective systems. For any further guidelines required for carrying out the tests, reference
may be made to the above document.
The test shall be carried out using network configuration and system parameters as shown in the
Figure-1
All denotations regarding fault location, breakers etc are referred in Figure 1
The fault inception angles are referred to R- N voltage for all types of faults
The fault inception angle is zero degree unless otherwise specified
Where not stated specifically, the fault resistance (Rf) shall be zero or minimum as possible in
simulator
Single pole circuit breakers are to be used
The power flow in double source test is 500 MW
System parameters
System voltage =132KV
CTR= 1000/1
PTR = 132000/110 (with PT, the parameters of PT model are shown in Figure 2)

Major Substation Equipment

Line parameters/km
Positive Sequence Resistance, (r1) = 0. 02897 Ohms
Positive Sequence Reactance (x1) = 0.3072 Ohms
Zero Sequence Resistance (r0) = 0.2597 Ohms
Zero Sequence Reactance (x1) = 1.0223 Ohms
Zero Sequence Mutual Resistance (rm) = 0.2281 Ohms
Zero Sequence Mutual Reactance (xm) = 0.6221 Ohms
Zero Sequence succeptance (bo) = 2.347 mho
Positive Sequence succeptance (b1) =3.630 mho
Type of line
Short
2
Secondary line impedance
Length of line in Kms
23.57
SIR
4
15
29.09
109.09
Source impedance (pry) (at a
time constant of 50 ms)
(5500
(1467 MVA)
MVA)

Long
20 _*
235.7
4
290.9
(550 MVA)

* Alternatively , the tests can be done with 10 Ohms secondary impedance and source
impedance may accordingly be modified

Major Substation Equipment

Details of fault cases to be done

Sl
no

Description

Dynamic
accuracy for
zone 1

Single source with short line (2 Ohms)

line

Single source
long line (20
ohms)

Double source with

short double line (2
Ohms)

Double source
with long single
line (20 Ohms)

CLOSE C1, OPEN C2,C3,C4

CLOSE C1,
OPEN
C2,C3,C4
SIR =4

CLOSE C1,C2,C3,
C4

CLOSE C1,C3
OPEN C2,C4

SIR = 4

SIR=4

SIR=4

SIR=15

Tests to be done
at 2 locations ( 84
% and 76 %
of line length ) X
4 faults (RN ,
YB, YBN, RYB) X
2 fault inception
angle
(0,
90)= 16 cases

Tests to be done
at 2 locations ( 84
% and 76 %
of line length ) X 4
faults (RN , YB,
YBN, RYB) X 2
fault inception
angle (0,90)=
16 cases

Major Substation Equipment

Tests to be
done at 2
locations ( 84 %
and
76 % of line
length ) X 4
faults (RN , YB,
YBN, RYB) X 2
fault inception
angle (0,90)=
16
cases

Tests to be done
at 2 locations
(84% and 76% of
line length) X 4
faults (RN , YB,
YBN, RYB) X 2
fault inception
angle (0, 90)=
16 cases

Operating time
for
zone 1 at SIR
=4

Tests to be done
at 3
locations (0% ,
40% and 64% of
line
length ) X 4 faults
(RN, YB, YBN,
RYB) X 4 fault
inception angle
(0, 30,60 and
90) = 48 cases

Tests to be done
at 3
locations (0 % ,
40 % and 64 % of
line
length ) X 4 faults
(RN , YB, YBN,
RYB) X 4 fault
inception angle
(0,30,60an d
90)= 48 cases

Tests to be
done at 3
locations ( 0 % ,
40 % and 64 %
of
line length ) X 4
faults (RN , YB,
YBN, RYB) X 4
fault inception
angle (0,
30,60 and
90)= 48
cases

Operating time
for
zone II and
Zone III

Tests to be done
at 1
location ( 100 %
of line
length ) X 1 faults
(RN, YB, YBN,
RYB) X 2 zones
(II and III) = 2
cases

Tests to be done
at 1
location (100 % of
line
length) X 1 faults
(RN , YB, YBN,
RYB) X 2 zones
(II and III) = 2
cases

Tests to be
done at 1
location (100 %
of line
length ) X 1
faults (RN , YB,
YBN, RYB) X 2
Zones (II and
III) = 2
cases

Sl
no

Description

Single source with short line (2

Ohms)

Single source long

line (20 Ohms)

Tests to done at
be 1
location (40 % of
line length) X 4
faults
(RN, YB, YBN,
RYB) X 4 fault
inception angle
(0,30,60 and 90
)= 16 cases

Tests to be done
at 1
location (40 % of
line length ) X 4
faults
(RN, YB, YBN,
RYB) X 4 fault
inception angle
(0,30,60 and
90)= 16cases

Double source with

short double line (2
Ohms)

Double source
with long single
line (20 Ohms)

Tests to be
done at 2
location ( 0 % and
32
%) X 1 faults (RYB)
Any fault inception
angle = 2
cases

Switch on to
fault feature

Operation during
current
reversal

Tests to be done at
2 location (0 %
and 80 % of
line length ) X 1
faults ( RN)
X 1 fault
inception angle (0
degrees) = 2
cases

CLOSE C1, OPEN C2,C3,C4

Major Substation Equipment

CLOSE C1,
OPEN C2,C3,C4

CLOSE C1,
C2,C3,C4

CLOSE C1,C3
OPEN C2,C4

SIR=4
6

SIR=15

SIR =4

Operation at
simultaneous
faults

SIR = 4
Tests to done at be
2 location (8 % and
64 % of line length
) X 2 faults ( RN in
circuit 1 to
BN in circuit 2
and RN in
circuit 1 to
RYN in circuit
2 in 10 ms) X 1
fault inception
angle ( 0 ) = 4
cases (*1)

Tests to be
done at 1 location
(0% reverse) X 6
faults ( RN ,YB,
YBN ,

Directional
sensitivity

Sl
no

Description

SIR=4

Single source with short line (2 Ohms)

Single source
long line (20
Ohms)

Double source
with short double
line (2 Ohms)

Double source
with long single
line (20 Ohms)

RYB,RN with
Rf=13.75
ohm(sec) and
RYN with Rf=
13.75 Ohm
(sec) X 2
fault inception
angle (0 ,90 ) =
12cases

Limit for
fault
resistance

Major Substation Equipment

Tests to be
done at 2
location ( 0% and
68 % of
line length) X 1
fault ( RN with
Rf=13.75
ohm(sec) X 2 fault
inception angle
(0,90) = 4 cases

Operation at
evolving faults

Fault locator
function , in
case the
same is
offered as
built in
feature

Tests to be done
at 2 location (32 %
and 0% of line
length) X 2 faults
(RN to RYN) x in 2
timings (10 ms
and 30 ms) X 2
load
direction (from A
to B and
from B to A) = 16
cases

Measure fault
location for all
cases under 1
and 2

Measure
fault location
for all cases
under 1 and
2

Measure
fault location
for all cases
under 1 and
2

Measure
fault location
for all cases
under 2 and 6

MAJOR SUBSTATION EQUIPMENT

Major Substation Equipment

Measure fault
location for all
cases under 2,
7 and 9

CONTENTS

CLAUSE
1.
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.13
1.14
1.15
1.16
1.17
1.18
1.19
1.20
1.21
2.
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
2.15
2.16
2.17
2.18
2.19
2.20
2.21
2.22
2.23

TITLE

PAGE NO.

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
1
GENERAL
1
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT 1
SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT 3
GUARANTEED AND OTHER TECHNICAL PARTICULARS 3
DUTY REQUIREMENT
3
CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES 7
MANDATORY MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT 10
OPERATING MECHANISM AND CONTROL
13
SUPPORT STRUCTURE
18
PAD / TERMINAL CONNECTORS 18
INTER-POLE CABLING AND TERMINAL BLOCKS
19
FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES
19
EARTHING TERMINAL
21
AUXILIARY SWITCHES 21
GALVANISATION AND PAINTING
21
ADDITIONAL DATA TO BE FURNISHED BY THE BIDDER ALONG
WITH THE BID:
21
INSPECTION & TESTING 22
DRAWINGS/ DOCUMENTS 25
MANDATORY SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT 26
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 26
COMPLETENESS OF THE OFFER 26
ISOLATORS / DISCONNECTORS 26
GENERAL
26
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
27
SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS 27
GUARANTEED AND OTHER TECHNICAL PARTICULARS 27
DRAWINGS/ DOCUMENTS 27
TYPE AND DUTY REQUIREMENTS
28
CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES 29
EARTHING SWITCHES
32
OPERATING MECHANISM 33
OPERATION 34
TERMINALS, CONNECTORS AND EARTHING TERMINALS 36
INTERLOCKING
36
AUXILIARY SWITCHES 37
PADLOCKS 38
SUPPORTING STRUCTURE 38
GALVANISING AND PAINTING 38
CONTROL WIRING, CONTROL CABINET
38
NAMEPLATE 38
TANDEM PIPES FOR 145 kV ISOLATORS
38
DOWN PIPES 38
COMPLETENESS OF THE OFFER 39
INSPECTION AND TESTING
39
MANDATORY SPARE PARTS
41

Major Substation Equipment

3.
INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS CTs & PTs 41
3.1
GENERAL
41
3.2
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
41
3.3
SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS 42
3.4
GUARANTEED AND OTHER TECHNICAL PARTICULARS 42
3.5
CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES 43
3.6
DRAWINGS/ DOCUMENTS 45
3.7
MANDATORY SPARE PARTS
46
3.8
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
46
3.9
Void 51
3.10
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
51
3.11
SUPPORTING STRUCTURE 54
4.
SURGE ARRESTERS 54
4.1
GENERAL
54
4.2
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
54
4.3
SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS 55
4.4
GUARANTEED AND OTHER TECHNICAL PARTICULARS 55
4.5
DRAWINGS/DOCUMENTS 55
4.6
DUTY REQUIREMENTS
56
4.7
CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES 57
4.8
FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES
58
4.9
INSPECTIONS & TESTING 60
4.10
MANDATORY SPARES/SPARE PARTS 62
4.11
SUPPORTING STRUCTURE 62
ANNEXURE I 63
AUXILIARIES 63
1.0
BUSHINGS,
HOLLOW
COLUMN
INSULATORS,
SUPPORT
INSULATORS 63
2.0
CONTROL CABINETS, JUNCTION BOXES, TERMINAL BOX AND
MARSHALLING BOXES FOR OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT (e.g. Circuit
Breaker, Isolator, Instrument Transformer, surge Arrester) 64
3.0
TERMINAL BLOCK 66
6.0
UNIT COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM
72
7.0
FUSES 74
8.0
Isolating switches
75
9.0
TERMINAL CONNECTORS 75
10.0
MOTOR CONTROL CENTRE
75
ANNEXURE - II 77
BUS SWITCHING SCHEMES, LINE LENGTHS AND LINE PARAMETERS
77
SPECIFICATION AND ACCEPTANCE OF NEW SULPHUR HEXAFLUORIDE (SF6)
GAS 79
ANNEXURE - IV 80
TEMPERATURE RISE 80

Major Substation Equipment

MAJOR SUBSTATION EQUIPMENT

CIRCUIT BREAKERS

GENERAL
This part of the specification covers detailed technical requirement for the
following Circuit Breakers(CBs) complete with all associated accessories such as
terminal connectors, cables, cables glands, terminal blocks, switches, gauges,
support structures and auxiliaries such as SF6 Gas handling plant, SF6 Gas
composition analyzing equipment, SF6 Gas leakage detector, operational
analyzer, tripping and closing coils etc.
a.
b.a. 145 kV, 3 pole SF6 gas filled outdoor circuit breakers of 3150 A, 31.5 KA
without closing resistors.
c.b. 36 kV, 3 pole vacuum outdoor circuit breakers of 1600 A, 25 kA.

GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT

1.2.1

The Circuit Breaker and accessories shall conform to IEC-62271-100 / IS:2516,

IEC:60694, IS-13118/IEC-60565 and other relevant IEC/IS standards of latest
edition except to the extent explicitly modified in the specification and shall also
be in accordance with requirement specified in this section as well as in SectionGeneral Technical Requirement. A list of relevant Standards is given in
Annexure-I of Section- General Technical Requirement.

1.2.2

The circuit breaker shall be designed for use in the geographical and
meteorological conditions as given in Section- Specific Technical
Requirement.

1.2.3

The circuit breaker shall be complete with terminal connectors; operating

mechanism; control cabinets; piping; valves; interpole cable; cable accessories
like glands, terminal blocks, marking ferrules, lugs; pressure gauge; density
monitor (with graduated scale) with adequate temperature compensation;
galvanized support structure for CB & control cabinets, their foundation bolts and
all other circuit breaker accessories necessary for carrying out all functions that
the CB is required to perform.

1.2.4

All necessary parts to provide a complete and operable Circuit Breaker installation
such as main equipment, terminals, control parts, connectors and other devices
whether specifically called for herein or not shall be provided.

1.2.5

Complete breaker assembly should have interchangeability with identical rating

breaker.

1.2.6

145 kV & 36 kV Circuit Breakers shall be designed for high speed three pole
reclosing with an operating sequence and timing as specified in SectionSpecific Technical Requirement.

Major Substation Equipment

1.2.7

The support structure of Circuit Breaker as well as that of control cabinet shall be
hot dip galvanized. All other parts shall be painted as per shade 697 of IS: 5.

1.2.8

Each Circuit Breaker pole shall be provided with two (2) independent tripping
circuits, pressure switches & coils each connected to a different set of
protective relays. The trip coils shall be suitable for trip circuit supervision
during both open and close position of breaker. The trip circuit supervision relay
would be provided on relay panels.

1.2.9

All the three poles of the Circuit Breaker shall close/open simultaneously.

1.2.10

The design shall be such as to minimize switching overvoltages and the Circuit
Breaker shall be suitable for full out of phase switching.

1.2.11

The Circuit Breaker shall be of the single pressure type. The design &
construction of SF6 circuit breaker shall be such that there is minimum possibility
of gas leakage and entry of moisture. There should not be any condensation of
SF6 gas on the internal insulating surfaces of the circuit breaker.

1.2.12

The breakers shall be provided with the following:

i)
ii)
iii)

iv)

v)
vi)

Anti pumping arrangement in the closing circuit.

Close and trip coils suitable for operation on 220 V DC.
The breaker shall be complete by itself with all provisions such as heater
with thermostat, counter, 3 pin plug with socket, illumination lamp with
door switch, MCBs for the control circuit and 10 NO and 10 NC breaker
auxiliary contacts as spares exclusively for purchasers use. The
terminal strip for the control circuit shall be of stud type with two nuts.
Push button arrangement for safe manual operation of the breaker in
case of emergency tripping with protective cover to avoid inadvertent
operation.
Lock & key for the mechanism box.
Set of rigid type, aluminium terminal connectors for each Breaker suitable
as per Clause 9.0 of Auxiliaries (Annexure I) of this section.

1.2.13

Necessary interlocks to prevent the closing or opening of the breaker under low
air and gas pressure and device for initiating alarm shall be provided. Audio
visual indications under such conditions shall also be provided in the purchasers
control room. It is proposed to interlock (electrically) the isolators associated
with the Circuit Breaker so that they may not open/close, when breaker is closed
etc. The details of switchyard safety interlocking scheme shall be furnished
by the Bidder. All accessories required on breaker side for satisfactory operation
of the scheme will be deemed to have been included in the scope of supply of this
specification.

1.2.14

Miniature Circuit Breaker shall be provided for all auxiliary power and control
circuits. Over load protection for motors shall be provided wherever required.
Single phase preventer shall be provided. The motor shall meet the requirement
stated in Clause No. 5 of Auxiliaries (Annexure I) of this section.

Major Substation Equipment

1.2.15

Complete equipment for local control of switchgear indications and alarms, etc.
shall be provided.

SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT

The technical parameters of the Circuit Breakers are detailed in SectionSpecific Technical Requirement of the specification.

GUARANTEED AND OTHER TECHNICAL PARTICULARS

The guaranteed and other technical particulars for the offered circuit breakers are
indicated in Section- Guaranteed and Other Technical Particulars. Any
other particulars considered necessary in addition to those listed in that Section
may be furnished by the Bidder.

DUTY REQUIREMENT
1.5.1

The Circuit Breaker shall be totally restrike free as per IEC under all duty
conditions and shall be capable of performing their duties without opening
resistors. The circuit breakers shall be of class C2-E1-M2 (as per IEC) with
regard to restrike probability during capacitive current breaking, electrical
endurance and mechanical endurance. The circuit breaker shall be of Live
tank type.

1.5.2

The rated transient recovery voltage for terminal faults shall be as per IEC
62271-100. The measures adopted for ensuring proper operation at high rate of
rise of restriking voltage and for limiting the actual values across the breaker shall
be described. No opening resistors shall be necessary for ensuring conformity
with the duty cycle.

1.5.3

The Circuit Breaker shall meet the duty requirements, for any type of fault or for
any fault location, also for line switching when used on 132 kV and 33 kV
(effectively grounded system) with transmission lines of length mentioned in the
Annexure II of this section and perform make and break operations as per the
stipulated duty cycles satisfactorily.

1.5.4

The guaranteed over voltages under all possible operating conditions including,
but not limited to, the rapid reclosing with or without faults, interrupting line
charging current under conditions of high dynamic overvoltage or transformer
magnetizing current, energizing or de-energizing shunt reactors, shunt capacitor
banks or transformer banks shall not exceed the peak value of 2.3 p.u. of the
normal phase to ground voltage crest for 132kV circuit breakers.

1.5.5

The Circuit Breaker shall also be capable of

Major Substation Equipment

i)

Interrupting the steady state and transient magnetizing current

corresponding to 132 kV rating transformers without switching
overvoltage exceeding 2.3 p.u.

ii)

Interrupting line/ cable charging current as per Section -Specific

Technical Requirement without any restrikes and without use of
opening resistors.

iii)

Clearing short line fault (kilometric faults) with source impedance behind
the bus equivalent to symmetrical fault current specified. The overvoltage
factors under such conditions shall not exceed 1.4 p.u.

iv)

Breaking 25% of the rated fault currents at twice rated voltage under phase
opposition condition.

v)

Breaking small inductive current of 0.5 A to 10A without switching over

voltage exceeding 2.3 p.u. The maximum over voltage value which will
not be exceeded under such conditions shall also be stated.

1.5.6

The breaker shall be designed to interrupt at its rated interrupting capacity when
restriking voltage has a frequency of not less than 400 cycles per second and at
least 50% of nominal breaking capacity when restriking voltage has frequency of
2000 cycles per second. The complete data for the frequency, amplitude factor
etc., for the rate of rise of restriking voltage shall be furnished.

1.5.7

The rated characteristics for short line faults (kilo metric faults) shall be as
specified under Section- Specific Technical Requirement. All Circuit
Breakers shall have high capacity for breaking kilometric faults. The interrupting
capacity of the Circuit Breaker for kilometric faults should be equal to its rated
rupturing capacity and shall be stated. The interrupting capacity of Circuit
Breaker for kilometric faults at distances equivalent to 90%, 75 % and 60% of the
fault current shall be indicated. The details of tests conducted for proving the
capability of the Circuit Breaker under kilometric fault conditions shall be
furnished.

1.5.8

The breaker shall be capable of operating satisfactorily even under conditions of

phase opposition that may arise due to faulty synchronization. The maximum
power which the breakers can interrupt satisfactorily under phase opposition
conditions shall also be furnished.

1.5.9

The breaker shall satisfactorily withstand the high stresses imposed on them
during fault clearing, load rejection and re-energisation of lines with trapped
charges. The breaker shall also withstand the voltage specified under SectionSpecific Technical Requirement.

1.5.10

Noise level
The Circuit Breaker shall be reasonably quiet in operation. Noise level in excess
of 140 dB measured at the base of the breaker would be unacceptable. Bidder

Major Substation Equipment

shall indicate the noise level of breaker at distances of 50, 100 and 150 m from the
breaker.

1.5.11

Total Break Time

1.5.11.1

The total break time as specified in Section- Specific Technical Requirement

shall not be exceeded under any of the following duties:
i)
ii)

Test duties 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Short line faults L75, L90

(TRV as per IEC 62271-100)

(TRV as per IEC 62271-100)

1.5.11.2

Total break time of the breaker shall not be exceeded under any duty conditions
specified such as with the combined variation of the trip coil voltage, (70-110%)
pneumatic/hydraulic pressure and pressure of arc extinguishing medium etc.
While furnishing the proof of the total break time of complete Circuit Breaker, the
Bidder may specifically bring out the effect of non-simultaneity between contacts
within a pole or between poles and show how it is covered in the guaranteed total
break time.

1.5.11.3

The guaranteed values shall be supported with the type test reports.

1.5.12

DC Component and Minimum Opening time

While furnishing particulars regarding the percentage DC component of the rated
short circuit breaking current of circuit breaker, the Bidder shall note that IEC62271-100 requires that this value should correspond to a time interval equal to
the minimum opening time of the first opening pole of the circuit breaker.

1.5.13

The Circuit Breaker shall be capable of satisfactorily performing all their duties
including, but not limited to, clearing of faults and interrupting line charging and
transformer charging currents without causing undue over voltage and showing
signs of undue strain while operating under conditions of high temporary over
voltage (power frequency) of the order of 1.5 p.u. for 132 kV system. The
suitability of Circuit Breaker for working satisfactorily under such conditions
should be explicitly guaranteed by the Bidder and it should be supported with
clear technical elaboration & details.

1.5.14

Trip free operation

The Circuit Breaker shall be trip free.

1.5.15

Recovery voltage and power factor

Each Circuit Breaker shall be capable of interrupting rated short circuit breaking
current under the conditions of recovery voltage corresponding to highest system
voltage and power factor not exceeding 0.15.

1.5.16

Automatic rapid reclosing

Major Substation Equipment

The Circuit Breaker shall be suitable for three pole and/ or single pole automatic rapid
reclosing. The operating duty of these Circuit Breakers shall be as follows:

O 0.3 sec CO 3 min CO

where C Closing & O Opening.
1.5.17

Temperature rise

The temperature rise and the maximum temperature attained by any part of the equipment
when in service at site under continuous full load conditions and exposed continuously to
the direct rays of the sun shall not exceed the permissible limits as per the limits given in
IEC-62271-100.

1.5.18

Insulating supports
i)

Insulating supports shall be designed to have ample insulation and

mechanical strength and rigidity for satisfactory operation under various
operating conditions detailed in this specification.

ii)

The basic impulse insulation level of the external insulator supports shall
match with that of the Circuit Breaker and shall be suitable for insulation
in the contaminated atmosphere. The porcelain used shall be homogenous
and free from cracks, cavities, and other flaws or blemishes and glazed all
over the exposed surfaces. The insulator supports used shall meet the
condition specified under Clause No. 1 of Auxiliaries (Annexure I)
of this section.

iii)

All bushings of identical rating shall be interchangeable. The puncture

strength of the bushing shall be greater than the flashover value.

iv)

All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanized.

v)

The insulator including all the live metallic parts shall be free from
external and internal corona.

vi)

All insulators shall conform to IEC-61264 (for pressurized hollow column

insulators) and IEC-60233 (for others). All routine and sample tests shall
be conducted on the hollow column insulators (and their test reports shall
be submitted) as per these standards with requirements and procedures
modified as under:
Pressure test as a routine test

Major Substation Equipment

Bending load test as a routine test

Bending load test as a sample test on each lot
Burst pressure test as a sample test on each lot
In addition to above, ultrasonic test shall be carried out as additional
routine test.

CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES
The features and constructional details of circuit breakers shall be in accordance
with following requirements:
1.6.1

Contacts

1.6.1.1

All making and breaking contacts shall be sealed from atmospheric effects.
Contacts shall be designed to have adequate thermal and current carrying capacity
for the duty specified and to have a life expectancy, so that frequent replacement
due to excessive burning will not be necessary. Provision shall be made for rapid
dissipation of heat generated by the arc on opening.

1.6.1.2

Main contacts shall be first to open and the last to close so that there will be little
contacts burning and wear.

1.6.1.3

If arcing contacts are used, they shall be first to close and the last to open. These
shall be easily accessible for inspection and replacement. If there are no
separately mounted arcing contacts the main contacts shall be easily accessible for
inspection and replacements. Tips of arcing contacts and main contacts shall
be silver plated or shall have tungsten alloy tipping.

1.6.1.4

Any device provided for voltage grading to damp oscillations or to prevent

restrikes prior to the complete interruption of the circuit or to limit over voltage
on closing, shall have a life expectancy comparable to that of breaker as a whole.

1.6.1.5

Breakers shall be so designed that when operated within the specified rating, the
temperature of each part will be limited to values consistent with a long life for
the material used. The temperature shall not exceed that indicated in IEC 62271100 under specified ambient conditions.

1.6.1.6

The contacts shall be permanently under the pressure of SF6 gas. The gap between
the open contacts shall be such that it can withstand at least the rated phase to
ground voltage continuously for 8 hrs at zero gauge pressure of SF6 gas due to its
leakage. The breaker should be able to withstand all dielectric stresses imposed on
it in open condition at lock out pressure continuously (i.e. 2 p.u. across the
breaker continuously).

1.6.1.7

Main contacts shall have ample area and contact pressure for carrying the rated
current and the short time rated current of the breaker without excessive
temperature rise which may cause pitting or welding.

Major Substation Equipment

1.6.1.8

Diagrams showing contacts in the following positions shall be furnished at

detailed engineering stage:
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)

Close position
Arc initiation position
Full arcing position
Arc extinction position
Open position.

1.6.2

Sulphur Hexafluoride (SF6) Gas

1.6.2.1

SF6 gas shall comply with the requirement of the latest IEC: 60376, 60376A and
60376B and shall be suitable for use in the switchgear under the operating
conditions. The various parameters of SF6 gas are given in Annexure III of this
section.

1.6.2.2

Sufficient SF6 gas including that will be required for Gas Analysis during
filling shall be provided to fill all the Circuit Breaker installed. In addition,
10% of total gas requirement shall be supplied in separate unused cylinders
as spare requirement.

1.6.2.3

The high pressure cylinders in which the SF6 gas is shipped and stored at the site
shall comply with requirements of the following standards and regulations:
a)
b)
c)

IS: 4379
IS: 7311

Identification of the contents of industrial gas cylinders.

Seamless high carbon steel cylinders for permanent and high
pressure liquefiable gases.
Indian Boiler Regulations

1.6.2.4

Test: SF6 gas shall be tested for purity, dew point, air, hydrolysable fluorides and
water content as per IEC: 60376, 60376A and 60376B and test certificates shall
be furnished to Employer indicating all the tests as per IEC: 60376 for each lot of
SF6 gas in stipulated copies as indicated in Section- General Technical
Requirement. Gas bottles should be tested for leakage during receipt at site.

1.6.3

All gasketed surfaces shall be smooth, straight and reinforced, if necessary, to

minimize distortion and to make a tight seal. The operating rod connecting the
operating mechanism to the arc chamber (SF6 media) shall have adequate seals.

1.6.4

Temperature compensated gas density or pressure devices shall be provided along

with pressure gauges for continuous indication of gas pressure in the gas chamber
of each pole. The devices shall provide continuous and automatic monitoring of
the stage of the gas.
The monitoring device shall have alarm setting and additional trip setting
appliances. These shall be set so that
Advanced warning can be given that the gas density pressure has reduced to an
unacceptable level.

Major Substation Equipment

After an urgent alarm, the breaker shall get locked out if the pressure falls below
predetermined value.
1.6.5

Each Circuit Breaker pole shall form an enclosure filled with SF6 gas independent
of two other poles. The SF6 gas density of each pole shall be monitored and
regulated by individual pressure switches.

1.6.6

The dial type SF6 density monitor shall be adequately temperature compensated
to monitor the density changes due to variations in ambient temperature within the
body of Circuit Breaker as a whole. The density monitor shall meet the following
requirements:
ii)

It shall have graduated scale.

iii)

It shall be possible to dismantle the density monitor for

checking/replacement without draining the SF6 gas by using suitable
interlocked non return valve coupling.

iv)

It shall damp the pressure pulsation while filling the gas in service so that
the flickering of the pressure switch contacts does not take place.

1.6.7

Each Circuit Breaker pole is to be equipped with static filters and desiccants.
These shall be able to absorb any water vapour penetrating into the switchgear
installation and all decomposed gas.

1.6.8

In the interrupter assembly there shall be an absorbing product box to minimize

the effect of SF6 decomposition products and moisture. The material used in the
construction of the Circuit Breaker shall be such as fully compatible with SF6 gas
decomposition products.

1.6.9

The circuit breaker shall be single pressure type. All the gas seals shall be
designed to ensure that leakage rate is kept to an absolute minimum under normal
pressure, temperature, electrical load and fault conditions. All gas seals located at
the flanges shall be of the O ring type. Double O-ring seals shall be provided on
each static joint. Single O ring seals having guaranteed leakage rate as specified
shall also be acceptable. The material and method of sealing used and the
maximum gas leakage rate that can normally be tolerated under working
conditions shall be stated. The material for the O-rings shall be suitable for -15 to
4050 deg C.

1.6.10

The SF6 gas leakage shall not be more than 1% per year under normal operating
conditions. In case the leakage is found to be greater than 1% within one year of
commissioning of Circuit Breaker, the SF6 gas leaked shall be replenished by the
Bidder at his own cost and also necessary rectification of the defects causing
leakage more than 1% shall be carried out by the Bidder without any cost to the
Purchaser. In addition to above requirement, the manufacturer shall have to
supply free of cost, the total gas requirement for subsequent ten (10) years, based
on actual leakage observed during first year of operation after commissioning.

Major Substation Equipment

1.6.11

Each Circuit Breaker shall be capable of withstanding a vacuum of minimum 8

milli bars without distortion or failure of any part. Facility shall be there to
reduce the gas pressure within the breaker to a value not exceeding 8 milli bars
within 4 hrs. or less.

1.6.12

Each Circuit Breaker shall be provided with suitable means to prevent gas from
being conveyed to the operating mechanism housing from the tanks or porcelain
enclosures or operating rods or other components.

1.6.13

The quantity of SF6 gas for each breaker shall be clearly stated.

1.6.14

The design and construction of the plant, couplings, and connections shall be such
that leakage of any SF6 gas shall be so handled that accidental loss of gas to the
atmosphere shall be minimum.

1.6.15

Provisions shall be made for attaching an operational analyzer after

installation of circuit breaker at site (as per Clause No. 1.7.4 of the section) to
record contact travel, speed & making measurement of operating timings
and synchronization of contacts in one pole. In case operational analyzer is
already available at a particular site, the Contractor shall have to supply a
suitable adopter/ transducer so that the offered circuit breaker can be used
with the operational analyzer.

MANDATORY MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT

The Bidder shall include in his proposal the following mandatory
maintenance equipment. Calibration certificate of each maintenance
equipment shall be supplied along with the equipment. The technical details,
make and model of instruments to be supplied shall be submitted for
approval of purchaser during detailed engineering.
1.7.1

The SF6 Gas Handling Plant

The Equipment shall meet the following:
SF6 gas filling and evacuating equipment (Portable): The capacity of this plant
shall be such that it shall not take appreciable time for filling or evacuating
the breaker. The required vacuum as specified in Clause No. 1.6.11 for
complete evacuation shall be attained with the help of this plant. The gas
filling unit shall include a trolley with compressed SF6 cylinder gas
regulator with manometer and necessary accessories for filling the gas in
the breaker.
SF6 gas filtering, drying, storage and recycling plant: This shall include all
necessary devices for measurement of purity, moisture content,
decomposition products etc. of SF6 gas. Mixing with air/oil/moisture
during above process should be proved to be NIL during testing. The
storage capacity of the reservoir should be sufficient for storing complete
SF6 gas for at least three 132 kV/33 kV Circuit Breakers.

Major Substation Equipment

The plant shall be complete with accessories and fittings so that SF6 from
the breaker can be directly filled in to the plant storage reservoir. In case
purging of the equipment before filling with SF6 gas is desirable, then the
required equipment for drying gases etc shall be furnished as a part of the
plant.
For heavy items within the plant, lifting hooks shall be provided for lifting
and moving with the overhead cranes.
The Plant shall be complete with all the necessary pipes, couplings, flexible tubes
and valves for coupling to the equipment for the filling or evacuating SF6
gas to be used with all necessary instructions for storage and handling of
the plant.
The design and construction of the plant, valves, couplings, and connections shall
be such that leakage of SF6 gas is minimum. Similarly valves, couplings
and pipe work shall be so arranged that accidental loss of gas to the
atmosphere is minimum.
1.7.2

SF6 gas composition analyzing equipment and instruments for the following
function shall be provided:
a)
b)
c)
d)

The moisture content measurement or alternatively dew point

measurement
The air content measurement
Equipment should have in built calibration facility
Sensitivity should be specified and should not be affected by dust,
humidity, heat etc. Wind velocity at which maximum sensitivity will be
retained is to be specified.

1.7.3

SF6 Gas Leak Detector

1.7.3.1

The SF6 gas leak detector shall be complete with required accessories.

1.7.3.2

The detector shall be free from induced voltage effects.

1.7.3.3

The sensing probe shall be such that it can reach all the points on the breaker
where leakage is to be sensed.

1.7.4

Operational Analyzer
The operational analyzer shall meet the following requirements:

1.7.4.1

The equipment shall be portable, easy to handle, robust for field application so
that it can be moved from one site to other. It shall be supplied with suitable
transportable case.

1.7.4.2

The circuit breaker operational analyzer shall be able to measure, record and
analyze the circuit breaker operation timings (close, open, close-open, open

Major Substation Equipment

close, open-close-open). It shall also be able to measure and record rise and fall of
current of tripping coils as well as closing coil of all poles of circuit breaker
simultaneously; travel and speed of movement of operating mechanism of circuit
breaker; dynamic contact resistance of main and arcing contacts of circuit
breaker (to assess condition of contacts) with injection of minimum 100 Amp
DC current; pole discrepancy timing; contact closing & opening times of all PIR
contacts.
1.7.4.3

The analyzer shall have provisions for recording at least 12 different functions of
the Circuit Breaker. All necessary transducers i.e. one for speed record and one
for travel record of breaker cables, pickups and attachments required for the
breaker shall be supplied with the analyzer.

1.7.4.4

The required transducers test leads with suitable clamps & connectors, sensors
along with connecting cables of suitable length shall also be supplied with circuit
breaker analyzer system.

1.7.4.5

The entry of various data/parameters (pertaining to CB) shall be possible using

built in display monitor.

1.7.4.6

The analyzer should be provided with facility to interface with PC for

communication and data transfer. The required software should enable one to
view, analyze and handle test data, getting the test results in graphical and tabular
form with date and time stamping and generating suitable report.

1.7.4.7

The analyzer shall be suitable for outdoor operation and shall be suitably shielded
against electrostatic & electromagnetic induction present in the EHV switchyard.
The Bidder shall submit a certificate proving the satisfactory performance of the
analyzer in outdoor switchyards with induced voltage of up to 10 kV/m.

1.7.4.8

The analyzer shall be complete with rechargeable battery and built-in charger and
suitable for use with power supplies as mentioned in the specification.

1.7.4.9

The analyzer shall have adequate memory to store at least 10 set of readings for
later recall and review.

1.7.4.10

The analyzer shall have automatic transducer calibration facilities.

1.7.4.11

For good resolution, a sampling frequency of 15 kHz (min.) shall be provided.

1.7.4.12

The analyzer shall provide data on over travel and penetration of the contacts
along with the capability for continuous or long term monitoring of a Circuit
Breaker.

1.7.4.13

Time measurement range of 0-500 ms, resolution 0.1 ms, accuracy 0.1 ms.

1.7.4.14

The output of the analyzer shall be on a plain paper having long shelf life and the
output thus obtained shall have a long life and shall not require any special storage

Major Substation Equipment

facility. Photographic paper is not acceptable.

deteriorating in the light.
1.7.4.15

The output shall be non-

Bidder shall submit the exact type of analyzer and its peripheral system for
Purchasers approval. All the necessary catalogues, write up for operation and
maintenance of the analyzer shall be furnished along with each analyzer and
peripheral system. Mandatory maintenance equipment shall be delivered along
with list of the equipment.

OPERATING MECHANISM AND CONTROL

1.8.1

The 145 kV class Circuit Breakers shall be operated by pneumatic

mechanism or spring charged mechanism or hydraulic mechanism or a
combination of these. The 36 kV class circuit breakers shall be operated by
spring charged mechanism. The mechanism shall be suitable for operation in
sub-zero temperature conditions.

1.8.2

The mechanism shall be housed in a weatherproof and dust proof control cabinet
as stipulated in Section- General Technical Requirements.

1.8.3

The operating mechanism shall be strong, rigid, not subject to rebound and shall
be readily accessible for maintenance for a man standing on ground. It shall be
removable without disturbing the other parts of the Circuit Breaker. It shall be
fast in action needing no critical adjustment.

1.8.4

The operating mechanism shall be suitable for high speed reclosing and other
duties specified. During reclosing the breaker contacts shall close fully and then
open.

1.8.5

The mechanism shall be antipumping and trip free (as per IEC definition) under
every method of closing (except during manual closing of a breaker for
maintenance).

1.8.6

The mechanism shall be such that the failure of any auxiliary spring will not
prevent tripping and will not cause trip or closing operation of the power
operating devices.

1.8.7

The breakers shall have a mechanical open/close indicator, in addition to facilities

for remote electrical indication. It shall be located in a position where it will be
visible to a man standing on the ground level with the mechanism housing closed.

1.8.8

An operation counter visible from outside with four digit recording mechanism for
counting the number of opening operations shall be provided in the central control
cabinet.

1.8.9

Working parts of the mechanism shall be of corrosion-resistive material. Bearings

which require grease shall be equipped with pressure type grease fittings. Bearing

Major Substation Equipment

pin, bolts, nuts and other parts shall be adequately pinned or locked to prevent
loosening or changing adjustment with repeated operation of the breaker.
1.8.10

When pneumatic pressure falls, in case of pneumatic operating mechanism, at a

preset value the alarm and indications shall come. If the pressure is still falling,
provision shall be made for automatic locking out of the breaker in the status-quo
position followed by an alarm and indications.

1.8.11

The Contractor shall furnish detailed operation and maintenance manual of the
mechanism along with the operation manual for the Circuit Breaker. The
operation manuals shall contain exploded diagrams with complete storage,
handling, erection, commissioning, trouble shooting, servicing and overhauling
instructions.

1.8.12

The operating mechanism along with its accessories shall be mounted in sheet
metal cabinet with hinged doors located near the breaker. The operating
mechanism shall be provided for electrical, local and remote control. An
emergency safe hand- tripping (mechanical) device shall be provided in drive
mechanism. The local control cabinet is to be provided with adequate clearance/
spacing inside to facilitate maintenance or repairs.

1.8.13

Controls

1.8.13.1

Each Circuit Breaker pole of 132kV shall be provided with two (2) independent
tripping circuits, pressure switches & coils each connected to a different set
of protective relays. Each Circuit Breaker pole of 33kV shall be provided with
one (1) tripping circuit.

1.8.13.2

The trip coils shall be suitable for trip circuit supervision during both open and
close position of breaker. The trip circuit supervision relay would be provided on
relay panels.

1.8.13.3

The breaker shall normally be operated by remote electrical control. Electrical

tripping shall be performed by shunt trip coil. However, provisions shall be made
for local electrical control. For this purpose a local / remote selector switch and
close and trip control switch / push buttons shall be provided in the breaker central
control cabinet.

1.8.13.4

The close and trip circuits shall be designed to permit use of momentary contact
switches and push buttons.

1.8.13.5

Closing coil and associated circuits shall operate correctly at all values of voltage
between 85% and 110% of the rated voltage. Shunt trip coil and associated circuit
shall operate correctly under all operating conditions of the Circuit Breaker upto
the rated breaking capacity of the circuit breaker and at all values of supply
voltage between 70% and 110% of rated voltage. However, even at 50% of rated
voltage the breaker shall be able to operate. If additional elements are introduced
in the trip coil circuit their successful operation and reliability for similar
applications on out door Circuit Breakers shall be clearly brought out in the

Major Substation Equipment

additional information schedules. In the absence of adequate details the offer is

likely to be rejected.
1.8.13.6

Density meter contacts and pressure switch contacts shall be suitable for direct use
as permissive in closing and tripping circuits. Separate contacts have to be used
for each of tripping and closing circuits. If contacts are not suitably rated and
multiplying relays are used then fail-safe logic/schemes are to be employed.
Density monitors are to be so mounted that the contacts do not change on
vibration during operation of Circuit Breaker.

1.8.13.7

The auxiliary switch of the breaker shall be positively driven by the breakeroperating rod.

1.8.13.8

A plug in device shall be provided to simulate the opening and closing operations
of Circuit Breaker for the purpose of testing control circuits.

1.8.13.9

The design of operating mechanism shall be such that it shall be practically

maintenance free. The guaranteed number of full load and full rated short circuit
current breaking operations without requiring any maintenance or overhauling
shall be as indicated in Section Guaranteed Technical Particulars. As far as
possible the need for lubricating the operating mechanism shall be kept to the
minimum and eliminated altogether if possible. There shall be no rebounds in the
mechanism and it shall not require any critical adjustments at site.

1.8.13.10 DC Supply for auxiliary circuits shall be monitored and provision shall be
made for remote annunciations and operation lockout in case of DC failure.
1.8.13.11 Curves/Graphs supported by test data indicating the opening time under closeopen operation with combined variation of the trip coil voltage and pneumatic /
hydraulic pressure shall be submitted by the Bidder at detailed engineering stage.
1.8.14

Pneumatically operated mechanism

Each pneumatic operated breaker shall have its own compressed air system for the
supply of compressed air. The requirements of unit compressed air system
shall be as per Clause 6.0 of Auxiliaries (Annexure-I) of this Section.
Details of pneumatically operated mechanism giving operating air pressure
requirements; compressor details, operation and working shall be
furnished. The plant shall include all valves, controls and alarms and pipe
work, etc.
The breaker local air receivers shall comply with the requirements under Clause
6.3 of Auxiliaries (Annexure-I) of this Section and shall have sufficient
capacity for at least two CO operations of the breaker at the lowest
pressure for auto reclosing duty without refilling.
Independently adjustable pressure switches with potential free, ungrounded
contacts to actuate a lock out device shall be provided. This lockout device
with provision of remote alarm indication shall be incorporated in the
Circuit Breaker to prevent operation whenever the pressure of the

Major Substation Equipment

operating mechanism is below that required for satisfactory operation of

the Circuit Breaker. The scheme should permit operation of all blocking
and alarm relays as soon as the pressure transient present during the rapid
pressure drop has been damped and a reliable pressure measurement can
be made. Such facilities shall be provided for following conditions:
Trip lockout pressure
Close lockout pressure
Auto reclose lockout pressure
Extreme low pressure

2 Nos.
1 No.
1 No.
1 No.

The compressed air mechanism shall be capable of operating the Circuit Breaker
under all duty conditions with the air pressure immediately before
operation between 85% and 110% of the rated supply pressure. The
make/break time at this supply pressure shall not exceed the specified
make/break time within any value of trip coil supply voltage as specified.
1.8.15

Spring operated mechanism

a)

Spring operated mechanism shall be complete with motor which shall

comply with Clause 5.0 of Auxiliaries (Annexure I) of this section.
Opening spring and closing spring with limit switch for automatic
charging and other necessary accessories to make the mechanism a
complete operating unit shall also be provided.

b)

As long as power is available to the motor, a continuous sequence of the

closing and opening operations shall be possible. The motor shall have
adequate thermal rating for this duty. It shall be adequately rated for a
minimum of 10 continuous closing and opening operations.

c)

After failure of power supply to the motor, one close open operation
shall be possible with the energy contained in the operating
mechanism.

d)

Breaker operation shall be independent of the motor which shall be used

solely for compressing the closing spring. Facility for manual charging of
the closing spring shall also be provided. The motor rating shall be such
that it requires not more than 30 seconds for full charging of the closing
spring.

e)

Closing action of Circuit Breaker shall compress the opening spring ready
for tripping.

f)

When closing springs are discharged after closing a breaker, closing

springs shall be automatically charged for the next operation and an
indication of this shall be provided in the local and remote control cabinet.

g)

Provisions shall be made to prevent a closing operation of the breaker

when the spring is in the partial charged condition. Mechanical interlocks

Major Substation Equipment

shall be provided in the operating mechanism to prevent discharging of

closing springs when the breaker is already in the closed position.
h)

Motors for spring charging mechanism shall operate satisfactorily at all

AC voltages between 85% and 110% of the rated voltage. Motors shall be
AC motors only. Universal motors are preferred. Provision shall be made
to protect motors against overloads.

i)

The spring operating mechanism shall have adequate energy stored in the
operating spring to close and latch the Circuit Breaker against the rated
making current and also to provide the required energy for the tripping
mechanism in case the tripping energy is derived from the operating
mechanism.

1.8.16

Hydraulically operated Mechanism

1.8.16.1

It shall be a totally self contained unit without the need for external assistance.

1.8.16.2

Hydraulically operated mechanism shall comprise of operating unit with power

cylinder, control valves, Nitrogen (N2) gas accumulators, high and low pressure
reservoir, oil pump, etc. The electric driven motor shall comply with Cl. No. 5.0
of Auxiliaries (Annexure I) of this section. One hand pump set shall also
be provided for emergency operation.

1.8.16.3

The hydraulic oil used shall be fully compatible for the specified temperature
range.

1.8.16.4

The oil pressure switch controlling the oil pump and pressure in the high pressure
reservoir shall have adequate number of spare contacts to be used for continuous
monitoring of low pressure, high pressure etc at Purchasers control room. The
necessary remote mounted equipment shall be supplied loose.

1.8.16.5

Number of pump starts, excessive motor running time etc. shall be provided.

1.8.16.6

The mechanism shall be suitable for at least two Close Open (2 CO)
operations after failure of AC supply to the motor starting at pressure equal
to the lowest pressure of auto reclose duty plus pressure drop for one Close
Open (CO) operation.

1.8.16.7

The mechanism shall be capable of operating the Circuit Breaker correctly and
performing the duty cycle specified under all conditions with the pressure of
hydraulic operated fluid in the operating mechanism at the lowest permissible
pressure before make up. The opening time at the lowest pressure for a particular
operation shall not exceed the guaranteed operating time within any value of trip
coil supply voltage as specified.

1.8.16.8

Trip lock out shall be provided to prevent operations of the Circuit Breaker below
the minimum specified hydraulic pressure. Alarm contacts for loss of Nitrogen
shall be provided.

Major Substation Equipment

1.8.16.9

All hydraulic joints shall have no oil leakage under the site conditions and joints
shall be tested at factory against oil leakage at a min. of 1.5 times maximum
working pressure.

1.8.16.10 Details of the type of mechanism, giving type of medium, requirements, operation
and working shall be furnished.

SUPPORT STRUCTURE
1.9.1

The Bidder shall provide support structures along with the foundation bolts required. Both pipe / lattice type
structures are acceptable. The supplier shall also furnish complete loading particulars including following forces for
foundation designs.

a)
b)
c)

Weight of the breaker and self-weight of structure.

Tension, compression and shear forces on the structure.
Loading details during opening and closing operations.

1.9.2

The structure design shall be such that during operation of circuit breaker vibrations are reduced to minimum.

1.9.3

If required, the Bidder shall provide suitable platform with steps on both sides of the circuit breaker for easy accessibility
for monitoring the density/ pressure of gas.

1.9.4

The support structure shall meet the following mandatory requirements:

a)

The minimum vertical clearance from any energized metal part at terminal
level to the bottom of the Circuit Breaker, where it rests on the foundation pad,
shall be in line with layout drawings.

b)

The minimum vertical distance from the bottom of the lowest porcelain part of
the bushings, porcelain enclosures or supporting insulators to the bottom to the
Circuit Breaker base, where it rests on the foundation pad shall be 2.55 meters.

c)

The minimum clearance between the live parts and earth as well as between
live parts of adjacent phases shall be 1.3 meters (excluding altitude correction
factor) and 0.320 meters (excluding altitude correction factor) for 132kV &
33kV systems respectively.

d)

The structure shall be of galvanized steel and conform to the latest edition of
IS: 802. Galvanisation & painting shall be done as specified in Section:
General Technical Requirement.

PAD / TERMINAL CONNECTORS

1.10.1

TERMINAL PAD
The Circuit Breaker terminal pads shall be made up of high quality electrolytic
copper or aluminum. The terminal pad shall have protective covers, which shall
be removed before interconnections.

Major Substation Equipment

1.10.2

TERMINAL CONNECTORS
The terminal connectors shall comply with the requirements as given in Clause
No.9.0 of Auxiliaries (Annexure I) of this section.

INTER-POLE CABLING AND TERMINAL BLOCKS

1.11.1

All cables (1100 Volts grade) to be used by Contractor shall be armoured and
shall be as per IS: 1554/relevant IEC.

1.11.2

All cables within & between circuit breaker poles shall be supplied by the CB
Manufacturer.

1.11.3

Only stranded conductor shall be used. Minimum size of the conductor shall be
2.5 sq. mm (copper).

1.11.4

The cables shall be with oxygen index Min-29 and temperature index as 250 deg.
C as per relevant standards.

1.11.5

The wiring and terminal blocks shall be as per Clause No. 3.0 of Auxiliaries
(Annexure I) of this section.

FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES

1.12.1

Following is a list of some of the major fittings and accessories to be furnished by

Bidder in the Central Control Cabinet as an integral part of the circuit breaker.
Number and exact location of these parts shall be indicated in the bid. Central
control cabinet shall be in accordance with Clause 2.0 of Auxiliaries (Annexure
I) of this section.
a)
Cable glands (double compression type), lugs, ferrules etc.
b)
Local / remote changeover switch.
c)
Manually operated tripping push button conveniently located to trip
all three phases simultaneously with protective cover to avoid
inadvertent operation.
d)
Operation counter.
e)
Control switches to cut off control power supply.
f)
Fuses as required as per Clause 7.0 of Auxiliaries (Annexure I) of this
section.
g)
Anti pumping relay
h)
Pole discrepancy relay
i)
DC supervision relay
j)
Pneumatic/Hydraulic pressure gauges, pump start counter
k)
The number of terminals provided shall be adequate enough to wire out all
contacts and control circuits plus 24 terminals spare for Purchasers future
use.
l)
Rating and diagram plate in accordance with IEC incorporating year of
manufacture. The data, as per Clause No. 1.12.3 but not limited to it, shall
be marked indelibly.
m)
Control switching equipment like sensors, timers, relays etc.

Major Substation Equipment

1.12.2

Additional fittings for pneumatically operated circuit breaker

a)
b)
c)
d)

e)

1.12.3

Unit compressed air system in accordance with Clause No. 6.0 of

Auxiliaries of this section.
Breaker air receivers.
Pressure gauge, spring loaded safety valve and pressure switch with
adjustable contacts.
Pressure switch to initiate an alarm if the pressure in the auxiliary reservoir
remains below a preset level for longer than it is normally necessary to
refill the reservoir.
Stop, non-return and other control valves, pipings and all accessories upto
breaker mechanism housing.

Nameplate Details

This shall be as per IEC: 62271-100

A)

Circuit Breaker

a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)

Name of the Manufacturer and supplier;

Type designation and serial no.;
Rated service voltage, kV;
Normal continuous current, A;
Rated frequency cycles/sec.;
Rated breaking capacity, kVA.;
i)
ii)

Symmetrical current, kA (rms)

Asymmetrical current, kA (rms)

g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
m)
n)
o)
p)

Making capacity, kA (peak);

Rated short time current in kA (rms) with duration;
Operating duty;
Standard to which it conforms;
Name of purchaser and purchase order No. against which supply is made;
Location;
Year of manufacture;
Rated insulation level;
First pole to clear factor ;
Break time, make time of complete breaker.

B)

Control cabinet

a)
b)
c)
d)
e)

Rated voltage for operation of closing/tripping coils;

Maximum permissible voltage for operation;
Minimum Permissible voltage for operation of closing/tripping coils;
Operating mechanism for closing & opening;
Rated supply voltage and frequency of auxiliary circuit.

Major Substation Equipment

The rating plate shall be weather proof, corrosion proof and shall be visible to a man
standing on the ground during normal service.

EARTHING TERMINAL
Each breaker shall be provided with at least two numbers of grounding terminals
and clamps for receiving grounding connection. Size of grounding conductor shall
be 50 mm x 8 mm GS flat.

AUXILIARY SWITCHES
1.14.1

Positively driven (in both directions) auxiliary switches (Contact) each of the
Normally Open and Normally Closed types with continuous current carrying
capacity at least 10 Amps shall be provided on each Circuit Breaker for remote
indication, control of the Circuit Breaker and providing supply, interlocking.
Auxiliary switches shall be capable of breaking at least 2 Amps at 220 V DC with
Circuit Breaker time constant of not less than 20 milliseconds. These shall be
installed on the frame of the breakers and shall be suitably protected against
accidental arcing from the main circuit. The insulating materials for the switches
and terminals shall be of ceramic or other non-tracking and non-hygroscopic
materials.

1.14.2

The auxiliary switches shall be tested for following tests and test reports for the
same shall be submitted for approval of Purchaser:
i)

ii)
iii)
iv)

Electrical endurance test A minimum of 2000 operations for 2A DC with

a time constant greater than or equal to 20 milliseconds with a subsequent
examination of millivolt drop/visual defects/temperature rise test.
Mechanical endurance test A minimum of 1,00,000 operations with
subsequent checking of contact pressure test/visual examination.
Heat run test on contacts.
IR/HV test etc.

GALVANISATION AND PAINTING

The galvanisation of ferrous parts and painting of sheet steel work shall conform
to the stipulation under SectionGeneral Technical Requirement of the
specification.

ADDITIONAL DATA TO BE FURNISHED BY THE BIDDER ALONG WITH THE

BID:
Major Substation Equipment

b)

Drawing showing contacts in close, arc initiation, full arcing, arc

extinction and open position.
The temperature v/s pressure curves for each setting of density monitor
along with details of density monitor.
Method of checking the healthiness of voltage distribution devices
(capacitors) provided across the breaks of the interrupter at site.
Data on capabilities of Circuit Breakers in terms of time and number of
operations at duties ranging from 100% fault currents to load currents of
the lowest possible value without requiring any maintenance or checks.
The effect of non simultaneity between contacts within a pole or between
poles and also show how it is covered in the guaranteed total break time.
Sectional view of non return couplings if used for SF6 pipes.
Details & type of filters used in interrupter assembly and also the operating
experience with such filters.
Details related to SF6 gas in circuit breaker.

c)
d)
e)

f)
g)
h)
i)
i.
ii.

iii.

j)
k)

l)

m)

The test methods used in controlling the quality of gas used in the
Circuit Breaker particularly purity and moisture content.
Proposed tests to assess the conditions of the SF6 within a Circuit
Breaker after a period of service particularly with regard to
moisture contents of the gas.
The precise procedure to be adopted by maintenance personnel for
handling equipment who are exposed to the products of arcing in
SF6 gas so as to ensure that they are not affected by possible
irritants of the skin and respirator system. Recommendations shall
be submitted for suitable protection clothing, methods of disposal
of Circuit Breaker cleaning utensils and other relevant matters.

A complete catalogue on operation analyzer satisfying all the requirements

stipulated under Clause No. 1.7.4 of this section.
Curves/Graphs supported by test data indicating the opening time under
close open operation with combined variation of the trip coil voltage and
pneumatic/hydraulic pressure.
All duty requirements as applicable to 145 kV & 36 kV CBs specified
under Clause No. 1.5 of this section shall be provided with the
adequate supporting test reports, failing which the bid is likely to be
rejected.
Field test report or laboratory test report in case of CB meant for reactor
switching duty.

INSPECTION & TESTING

1.17.1

Equipment/material shall be offered for inspection in accordance with requirement

of Section- General Technical Requirements.

1.17.2

In accordance with the requirements stipulated in Section General Technical

Requirements, the circuit breaker along with its operating mechanism should
have been successfully type tested as per IEC: 62271-100 and shall be subjected

Major Substation Equipment

to routine and acceptance tests as per IEC: 62271-100. Testing facilities available
at the Bidder's/Manufacturer's works shall be indicated in the bid.
1.17.3

The test reports of all type tests and the following additional tests shall be
submitted by the Bidder for Purchasers review.
i)
ii)
iii)

iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
ix)
x)
1.17.4

Seismic Withstand Test as per Annexure-II of section- General Technical

Requirement in unpressurised condition.
Radio Interference Voltage Test (RIV) as per Annexure-II of sectionGeneral Technical Requirement
Test to demonstrate the Power Frequency withstand capability of breaker
in open condition at zero Gauge pressure and at lockout pressure. (Refer
Clause No. 1.6.1.6)
Out of phase closing test
Line charging breaking current for proving parameters as specified in
Section- Specific Technical Requirement
Verification of the degree of protection
Low & high temperature test
Humidity test
Static terminal load test
Critical current test (if applicable)

Tests on Associated components

Indicating and recording meters, porcelain bushings, current transformers,
instruments, relays, auxiliary motors, air compressors, gas and air chambers etc.,
control devices, fans, valves, and other associated components as applicable
should have been tested in accordance with the relevant Indian Standards/
International Standards and the type test reports of above associated components
shall be submitted during detailed engineering stage

1.17.5

The following routine tests shall be done on all Circuit Breakers as per IEC62271-100 as detailed below
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)

Power frequency voltage withstand dry tests

Measurement of resistance
Voltage withstand test on control and auxiliary Circuits
Mechanical operating tests
In addition to the mechanical and electrical tests specified by IEC, the
following shall also be performed.
i)

Speed curves for each breaker shall be obtained with the help of a
suitable operation analyzer to determine the breaker contact
movement during opening, closing, auto- reclosing and trip free
operation under normal as well as limiting operating conditions
(control voltage, pneumatic / hydraulic pressure etc.). The tests
shall show the speed of contacts directly at various stages of
operation, travel of contacts, opening time, closing time, shortest
time between separation and meeting of contacts at break make
operation etc. This test shall also be performed at site for which the

Major Substation Equipment

necessary operation analyzer alongwith necessary transducers,

cables, console etc. shall have to be supplied by the Bidder without
any extra cost to the owner/ purchaser. In case of Substations where
operation analyzer is existing, the Bidder shall utilize the same.
However, necessary adopter & transducers etc. if required shall
have to be supplied by the Bidder.
ii)

1.17.6

Measurement of Dynamic Contact resistance for arcing & main

contacts. The measured value / signature of Dynamic Contact
resistance measurement shall be taken as reference for comparing
the same during operation and maintenance in future in order to
ascertain the healthiness of contacts.

Site tests
All routine tests except power frequency voltage dry withstand test on breaker
shall be repeated on the completely assembled breaker at site.

1.17.7

Commissioning Tests

1.17.7.1

Testing and commissioning at site shall be conducted in accordance with Section

- General Technical Requirement.

1.17.7.2

Bidder shall perform any additional test based on specialties of the items as per
the Field Quality Program / instructions of the equipment Supplier or Owner
/employer without any extra cost to the Owner/employer. The Bidder shall
arrange all instruments required for conducting these tests along with calibration
certificates and shall furnish the list of instruments to the Purchaser for approval.
An indicative list of tests is given below.
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
m)
n)
o)

1.17.7.3

Insulation resistance of each pole

Check adjustments, if any, suggested by manufacturer
Breaker closing and tripping time
Slow and power closing operating and opening
Trip free and anti pumping operation
Minimum pick up volts of coils
Dynamic Contact resistance measurement
Functional checking of compressed air plant and all accessories
Functional checking of control circuits, interlocks, tripping through
protective relays and auto reclose operation
Insulation resistance of control circuits, motor etc.
Resistance of closing and tripping coils
SF6 gas leakage check
Dew point measurement and SF6 gas content measurement
Calibration of pressure switches and gas density monitor
Checking of mechanical CLOSE interlock, wherever applicable

After commissioning tests have been satisfactorily completed, the Bidder, in

cooperation with and under the supervision of the purchaser/owner shall conduct

Major Substation Equipment

the final acceptance tests to determine whether all the manufacturer's guarantees
and requirements of these specifications have been fulfilled.

DRAWINGS/ DOCUMENTS
1.18.1

Drawings to be submitted with the tender

In addition to any other drawings which the tenderer may like to supply, the
following drawings/catalogues shall be submitted:.
a)
b)
c)

1.18.2

Drawings showing the outline, weight of the equipment and accessories

offered including bushings.
Drawings showing mounting details including foundation, for equipment
offered.
Technical and descriptive literature giving details of the equipment
offered.

Drawings to be submitted after award of contract

Within 30 (thirty) days of the award of contract, the Bidder shall furnish 5 (five)
prints of the following drawings for the approval of the Purchaser.
a)

b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)

h)

1.18.3

General arrangement drawings showing plan, front and side elevations of

Circuit Breaker with all accessories, showing dimensional details,
clearances, net and shipping weights etc. Dimensions shall be marked in
metric units.
Drawing of mounting details and their recommended method of mounting.
Control and wiring diagrams of operating mechanism showing salient
details required for connecting equipment at site.
Drawing giving details of name plate, terminal markings, terminal
connectors etc.
Detailed assembly drawings showing the parts properly identified for field
assembly of equipment.
Complete bill of materials listing out all the equipment materials and
hardware to be supplied.
Drawing showing complete particulars of foundation and structural
drawings including weights of all components, forces acting and impact
loading.
Design drawings for the structure suitable for mounting the Circuit
Breaker.

Each drawing shall be identified by a drawing number and each subsequent

resubmission/revision or addition to the drawing shall be identified by a revision
number.
All drawings shall be thoroughly checked for accuracy and
completeness and signed by a responsible officer of the Bidder on his behalf. Any
mistakes or errors in drawings shall not form a basis for seeking extension of
delivery period.

Major Substation Equipment

MANDATORY SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT

Mandatory spare parts and mandatory maintenance equipment shall be supplied as
listed.

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

The Bidder shall furnish detailed operation and maintenance manual of the
mechanism along with the operation manual for the Circuit Breaker. The
instruction manuals shall contain exploded diagrams with complete storage,
handling, erection, commissioning, troubleshooting, servicing and overhauling
instructions.

COMPLETENESS OF THE OFFER

Circuit Breakers shall be offered complete with all parts and accessories,
which are necessary for its efficient and safe operation. Such parts and
accessories shall be deemed to be within the scope of this specification
whether specifically mentioned herein or not.
ISOLATORS / DISCONNECTORS

GENERAL
This part of the specification covers detailed technical requirements for the
following 145 kV & 36 kV outdoor type isolators / disconnectors complete with
all associated accessories and auxiliaries:.
a)

145 kV, three (3) pole, outdoor, horizontal double break type isolator of
3150 Amps

b)

without earth switches

with earth switch on one side
with earth switches on both sides

36 kV, Three (3) pole, outdoor, horizontal double break type isolator of
1600 Amps.

without earth switches

with earth switch on one side
with earth switches on both sides

Major Substation Equipment

GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

2.2.1

The isolators / disconnects shall be of horizontal, double break type for 145
kV and 36 kV system. The isolators / disconnects and accessories shall
conform to IEC-62771-102 or IS: 9921 & IS: 1818, IEC: 60694 and other
relevant IEC/IS standards of latest edition except to the extent explicitly modified
in the specification and shall also be in accordance with requirements specified in
this section. A list of relevant Standards are given in Annexure-I of Section General Technical Requirements.

2.2.2

The isolator shall be designed for use in the geographic and meteorological
conditions as given in Section- Specific Technical Requirement.

2.2.3

Isolators shall be outdoor, off-load type. Earth switches shall be provided on

Isolators wherever called for, with possibility of being mounted on any side of the
isolator.

2.2.4

Complete isolator with all the necessary items for successful operation shall be
supplied including but not limited to the following:
a)

Isolator assembled with complete base frame, linkage, operating

mechanism, control cabinet, interlocks etc.

b)

All necessary parts to provide a complete and operable isolator

installation, control parts and other devices whether specifically called for
herein or not.

SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

The technical parameters of the isolators / disconnects are detailed in Section
Specific Technical Requirements of the specification.

GUARANTEED AND OTHER TECHNICAL PARTICULARS

The guaranteed and other technical particulars for the offered isolators /
disconnects are indicated in Section- Guaranteed and Other Technical
Particulars. Any other particulars considered necessary in addition to those
listed in that Section may be furnished by the Bidder.

DRAWINGS/ DOCUMENTS
2.5.1

Drawings to be submitted with the tender

2.5.1.1

In addition to any other drawings which the tenderer may like to supply, the
following drawings/catalogues shall be submitted:
a)

Drawings showing the outline, weight of each equipment (isolator/earth

switch) and accessories offered including support insulators.

Major Substation Equipment

b)
c)

Drawings showing mounting details including foundation, for equipment

offered.
Technical and descriptive literature giving details of the equipment
offered.

2.5.1.2

The Bidder shall furnish completely filled in Schedule for submission of

drawings.

2.5.1.3

Each drawing shall be identified by a drawing number and each subsequent

resubmission/revision or addition to the drawing shall be identified by a revision
number. All drawings shall be thoroughly checked for accuracy and completeness
and signed by a responsible officer of the Bidder on his behalf. Any mistakes or
errors in drawings shall not form a basis for seeking extension of delivery period.

2.5.2

Drawings to be submitted after award of contract

2.5.2.1

Within 30 (thirty) days of the award of contract, the Bidder shall furnish 5 (five)
prints of the following drawings for the approval of the Purchaser.
a)

b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)

h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
m)
n)

o)

General arrangement drawings showing plan, front and side elevations of

isolators with/without earthing switches with all accessories, showing
dimensional details, clearances, net and shipping weights etc. Dimensions
shall be marked in metric units.
Drawing of mounting details and their recommended method of mounting.
Control and wiring diagrams of operating mechanism showing salient
details required for connecting equipment at site.
Drawing giving details of name plate, terminal markings, terminal
connectors etc.
Detailed assembly drawings showing the parts properly identified for field
assembly of equipment.
Complete bill of materials listing out all the equipment materials and
hardware to be supplied.
Drawing showing complete particulars of foundation and structural
drawings including weights of all components, forces acting and impact
loading.
Drawings of the operating mechanism, mechanism cubicle, auxiliary
devices and interlocking devices.
Drawing showing the arrangement of contacts.
Drawing showing the details of terminal connectors.
Outline drawings for insulators with dimensions.
Records of all shop testing and inspection of materials, components,
subassemblies, equipment, machinery, etc.
Erection and installation sequence and procedures.
The drawings, data and information shall be elaborate enough to enable the
purchaser to comprehend and assess the vital details. Features, capabilities
and functioning of the equipment and their arrangements.
Any other drawing, literature, documents not specifically listed herein but
considered essential.

TYPE AND DUTY REQUIREMENTS

Major Substation Equipment

2.6.1

145kV & 36 kV isolators shall be horizontal double break type.

2.6.2

Horizontal double break type isolators shall have one rotating posts per pole. The
blades of horizontal break type isolators shall open and close in a horizontal plane.

2.6.3

The isolators and earth switches shall be capable of withstanding the dynamic
and thermal effects of the rated short circuit current of the systems in their closed
position. They shall be constructed such that they do not open under the influence
of short circuit current.

2.6.4

The earth switches, wherever provided, shall be constructionally interlocked so

that the earth switches can be operated only when the isolator is open and vice
versa. The constructional interlocks shall be built in construction of isolator and
shall be in addition to the electrical and mechanical interlocks provided in the
operating mechanism.

2.6.5

In addition to the constructional interlock, isolator and earth switches shall have
provision to prevent their electrical and manual operation unless the associated
and other interlocking conditions are met. All these interlocks shall be of fail safe
type. Suitable individual interlocking coil arrangements shall be provided. The
interlocking coil shall be suitable for continuous operation from DC supply and
within a variation range as stipulated in Section- General Technical
Requirement.

2.6.6

The isolators shall be capable of making/breaking normal currents when no

significant change in voltage occurs across the terminals of each pole of the
isolator on account of make/break operation.

2.6.7

The isolators shall be capable of making/breaking the magnetizing and capacitive

currents of 0.7 Amps. at 0.15 power factor at rated voltage.

2.6.8

The isolators and earthing switches shall be able to bear on the terminals the total
forces including wind loading and electrodynamic forces on the attached
conductor without impairing reliability or current carrying capacity.

2.6.9

The earthing switches shall be capable of discharging trapped charges of the

transmission Lines.

2.6.10

Insulation to ground, insulation between open contacts and the insulation between
phases of the completely assembled isolators shall be capable of withstanding the
dielectric test voltages specified in Section- Specific Technical Requirement.

2.6.11

The isolator design shall be such that it is free from visible corona discharges in
both closed and open position at the visible discharge test voltage specified for the
insulators in relevant IS. Necessary stress relieving rings or shields shall be
provided to meet these requirements.

CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES

Major Substation Equipment

The features and constructional details of horizontal double break isolators, earth
switches and accessories shall be in accordance with the requirements stated
hereunder:
2.7.1

Contacts

2.7.1.1

The horizontal break type isolators and isolators-cum-earthing switches shall have
heavy-duty self-aligning, self-cleaning and high-pressure contacts. The contacts
shall be made of hard drawn electrolytic copper strip. High-pressure type
contacts shall wipe the contact surface while opening and closing. The contacts
shall be so designed that the wiping action shall not cause scouring or abrasion on
the contact surfaces. The wiping action shall be sufficient to remove any film of
oxide which may be formed during the operation of the switches and so designed
that binding cannot occur after remaining closed for prolonged periods of time in
polluted atmosphere.

2.7.1.2

The contacts and other current carrying parts shall be so designed that their
temperature rise under different conditions of operation shall not exceed the
values stipulated in relevant standard. The temperature rise due to the passage of
rated short circuit current for a period of 1 second shall not cause any
annealing or welding of contacts.

2.7.1.3

Moving contacts shall be dimensioned to withstand the rated short circuit current
during service. The surface of the contact shall be rendered smooth and shall be
silver plated. The thickness of silver plating shall not be less than 25 microns.

2.7.1.4

No undue wear or scuffing shall be evident during the mechanical endurance tests.
Contacts and springs shall be so designed that readjustments in contact pressure
shall not be necessary throughout the life of the isolator or earthing switch. Each
contact or pair of contacts shall be independently sprung so that full pressure is
maintained on all contacts at all times

2.7.1.5

Contact springs shall not carry any current and shall not loose their characteristics
due to heating effects.

2.7.1.6

The female contact and its tensioning by spring shall be such that there will be
always a positive contact with adequate pressure to give enough contact surface
for the passing of current. The springs provided shall not go out of alignment or
get entangled with male contact during operation.

2.7.1.7

Necessary arrangement shall be provided for proper alignment of the contacts.

Factory adjustments shall be so made on each pole that no changes in the field are
required on the isolators and isolator cum earthing switches supplied. Gang
operated links shall be so designed that all phases shall make and break
simultaneously.

2.7.2

Blades

2.7.2.1

All metal parts shall be of non rusting and non corroding material. All current
carrying parts shall be of non-ferrous material (e.g. high conductivity electrolytic

Major Substation Equipment

copper / aluminum). Bolts, screws and pins shall be provided with lock washers.
Keys or equivalent locking facilities, if provided on current carrying parts, shall be
made of copper silicon alloy or stainless steel or equivalent. The bolts or pins used
in current carrying parts shall be made of non corroding material. All ferrous
castings except current carrying parts, shall be made of malleable cast iron or cast
steel. No grey iron shall be used in the manufacture of any part of the isolator.
2.7.2.2

The live parts shall be designed to eliminate sharp joints, edges and other corona
producing surface. Where this is impracticable adequate corona shields shall be
provided. Corona shields/rings etc shall be made up of aluminum/ aluminum
alloy.

2.7.2.3

Isolators and earthing switches including their operating parts shall be such that
they cannot be dislodged from their open or closed positions by short circuit
forces, gravity, wind pressure, vibrations, shocks or accidental touching of the
connecting rods of the operating mechanism.

2.7.2.4

The isolators and earthing switches shall be designed such that lubrication of any
part is not required except at infrequent intervals i.e. after every 1000 operations
or after 5 years whichever is earlier.

2.7.2.5

The design of isolators and isolator-cum-earthing switches shall provide for

positive control of blade in all positions with the minimum of mechanical stress
on the insulators. Fixed guides shall be so provided that proper seating of
contacts shall be obtained when a blade is out of alignment even by 25 ( twenty
five) mm in either direction. All movable parts which may be in the path of
current flow shall be shunted by flexible copper conductors of adequate cross
section and strength.

2.7.2.6

The isolators and earth switches shall be so constructed that the isolator switch
blade shall be locked in the open/closed position and shall not fall to the
closed/open position in case the operating shaft gets disconnected.

2.7.2.7

The position of movable contact (main blades) of each of the isolators and
earthing switches shall be indicated by a mechanical indicator. The indicator
shall be of metal and shall be visible from operating level.
The details of inscriptions and coloring for the indicator are given as under:

Open position
Closed position

Sign
O
I

Background Colour
Green
Red

2.7.3

Base

2.7.3.1

Each pole of the isolator shall be provided with a complete galvanized steel base
provided with holes and designed for mounting on supporting structure. The base
shall be rigid and self-supporting and shall require no guying or cross bracing
between phases other than the supporting structures.

Major Substation Equipment

2.7.4

Insulators

2.7.4.1

The type of insulators used for the isolators and isolator cum earthing switches
shall be as specified in Clause No. 1.0 of Auxiliaries (Annexure I) of this
section.

2.7.4.2

The porcelain used shall conform to the requirements stipulated in Clause No. 1.0
of Auxiliaries (Annexure I) of this section and shall smply with the
requirements of IS: 2544 (as amended up to date) and/or IEC: 60168. The
insulators shall be fabricated by the wet process. The porcelain and metal parts
shall be assembled together with such material and in such manner that any
thermal expansion of the metal and the porcelain part throughout the range of
operating temperature shall not loosen the parts or create undue stress adversely
affecting the mechanical and electrical strength. The porcelain of the insulator
shall have minimum cantilever strength of 600 Kgs. for 145 kV as well as 36
kV insulators.

2.7.4.3

The test reports of all type tests and the following additional tests (as per IEC:
60168) shall be submitted by the Bidder for Purchasers review.
a)
b)
c)
d)

2.7.4.4

Bending load test in four directions at 50% of minimum bending load

guaranteed on all insulators, as a routine test.
Bending load test in four directions at 100% of minimum bending load as
a sample test on each lot.
Torsional test on sample insulators of a lot.
Ultrasonic test as a routine test. As per IEC: 383 / IS: 4318

Pressure due to the contact shall not be transferred to the insulators after the main
blades are fully closed.

2.7.4.5
2.7.4.62.7.4.5 For 145 kV Insulator: (For Isolator)
Top PCD
No. of holes
Bottom PCD
No. of holes

=
=
=
=

127 mm
4 x M16
254 mm
8 x 18 dia

EARTHING SWITCHES
2.8.1

Earthing switches shall be only locally operated and shall form an integral
part of the isolator and shall be mounted on the base frame of the isolator.

2.8.2

Where earthing switches are specified these shall include the complete operating
mechanism and auxiliary contact.

Major Substation Equipment

2.8.3

145 kV class earthing switches shall be both motor and manually operated. 36 kV
class earthing switches shall be manually operated. These switches shall be
constructionally interlocked with the isolator so that the earthing switches can be
operated only when the isolator is open and vice versa. The constructional
interlocks shall be built in construction of isolator and shall be in addition to the
electrical and mechanical interlocks provided in the operating mechanism.

2.8.4

The earthing switches shall be able to carry the same fault current as the main
blades of the isolators and shall withstand dynamic stresses.

2.8.5

Each earthing switch shall be provided with flexible copper braids for connection
to ground mat. These braids shall have the same short time current rating as the
earth blade. The transfer of fault current through swivel connection will not
be accepted.

2.8.6

The earthing switch shall be of non-ferrous material and the design shall match
the quality with that of the main isolating switch except that high-pressure
contacts are not required.

2.8.7

The plane of movement and final position of the earth blades shall be such that
adequate electrical clearances are obtained from adjacent live parts in the course
of its movement between ON & OFF positions.

2.8.8

The isolator (without earth switch or with one earth switch) design should be such
as to permit addition of earth switches on either side at a future date. It should be
possible to interchange position of earth switch to either side.

2.8.9

The frame of each isolator and earthing switches shall be provided with two
reliable earth terminals for connection to the earth mat.

2.8.10

The earth switches shall also comply with the requirements of IEC: 62271-102 in
respect of induced current switching duty as defined for Class-B earthing
switches.

2.8.11

Earth switch (having rated voltage of 52kV and above) shall be capable of making
and breaking induced current at rated induced voltage (due to electrostatic
coupling & electromagnetic coupling) as defined for Class-B earthing switches
and shall be able to carry rated induced current without excess temperature rise in
line with the requirement of IEC: 62271-102. Relevant tests, if not conducted
earlier shall be conducted as stipulated in above IEC document without any
extra cost to the Purchaser.

OPERATING MECHANISM
2.9.1

The 145 kV isolators and earth switches shall be motor operated. 36 kV class
isolators and earth switches shall be manually operated. The 145 kV isolators shall
be remote controlled from the control room. Manual operation facility shall be
provided with necessary electrical/ mechanical interlock to disconnect the motor.

Major Substation Equipment

2.9.2

Control cabinet/operating mechanism box shall conform to the requirement

stipulated in Section- General Technical Requirement and shall be made of
aluminium sheet of adequate thickness (minimum 3 mm).

2.9.3

Limit switches for control shall be fitted on the isolator/ earth switch shaft, within
the cabinet to sense the open and close positions of the isolators and earth
switches.

2.9.4

A "Local/Remote" selector switch and a set of open/close push buttons shall be

provided on the control cabinet of the isolator to permit its operation through local
or remote push buttons.

2.9.5

Provision shall be made in the control cabinet to disconnect power supply to

prevent local/remote electrical operation during manual operation.

2.9.6

Motor shall be an AC motor and conform to the requirements of Clause No. 5.0
of Auxiliaries (Annexure I) of this section.

2.9.7

Suitable reduction gearing shall be provided between the motor and the drive shaft
of the isolator. The mechanism shall stop immediately when motor supply is
switched off. If necessary, a quick electro mechanical brake shall be fitted on the
higher speed shaft to effect rapid braking.

2.9.8

Gear should be of forged material suitably chosen to avoid bending/jamming on

operation after a prolonged period of non-operation. Also all gear and connected
material should be so chosen/surface treated to avoid rusting.

2.9.9

Motor operated mechanism shall be subject to blocked rotor test as sample test/
type test, at no extra cost to owner/ purchaser.

OPERATION
2.10.1

Isolator and earth switches shall be gang operated in case of 145 kV & 36 kV. The
operating mechanism of the three poles shall be well synchronized and
interlocked. 145 kV & 36 kV three-phase isolators shall have single drive for all
the three poles and all the poles shall be mechanically coupled.

2.10.2

The motor operated isolators shall also be suitable for local manual operation and
shall have local controls for electrical operation. Earthing switches shall be
suitable for manual as well as electrical operation for 145 kV systems.

2.10.3

Each isolator/ pole of isolator and earth switch shall be provided with a manual
operating handle enabling one man to open or close the isolator with ease in one
movement while standing at ground level. The manual operating handle shall
have provision for pad locking. All brackets, angles or tower members necessary
for attaching the operating mechanism to the isolator supporting structure shall be
supplied as an integral part of the isolator. The height of the operating handle for
manual operation shall be approximately 1000 mm above ground level.

Major Substation Equipment

2.10.4

The isolator shall be provided with positive continuous control throughout the
entire cycle of operation. The operating pipes and rods shall be sufficiently rigid
to maintain positive control under the most adverse conditions and when operated
in tension or compression for isolator closing. They shall also be capable of
withstanding all torsional and bending stresses due to operation of the isolator.
Wherever supported the operating rods/pipe shall be provided with bearings on
either ends. The operating rods/pipes shall be provided with suitable universal
couplings to account for any angular misalignment.

2.10.5

Each rotating insulator stack/ part shall be supported on grease packed double
rollers or ball bearings. These shall be protected from ingress of moisture, dirt or
other foreign matter by means of cover and grease retainers. The roller or ball
bearing shall be adjustable and shall be easily accessible for dismantling in the
field. Bearings pressure shall be kept low to ensure long life and ease of
operation. Rust proof pins shall be provided.

2.10.6

The signaling of closed position shall not take place unless it is certain that the
movable contacts have reached a position in which rated normal current, peak
withstand current and short time withstand current can be carried safely.
Signaling of open position shall not take place unless movable contacts have
reached position such that clearance between contacts is at least 80% of the
isolating distance or unless it is certain that the movable contacts will reach their
fully open position.

2.10.7

Counter balance springs/weight shall be provided for counter balancing the

isolators to prevent impact at the end of travel both on opening and closing of the
isolator. The spring /weight shall be made of non-rusting type alloy.

2.10.8

Auxiliary switches installed on the frame of isolators & earth switches shall be
suitably protected against accidental arcing from the main contact.

2.10.9

The design shall be such as to provide maximum reliability under all service
conditions. All operating linkages carrying mechanical loads shall be designed
for negligible deflection. The length of inter insulator and interpole operating
rods shall be capable of adjustments, by means of screw thread which can be
locked with a lock nut after an adjustment has been made. The isolator and earth
switches shall be provided with "over center" device in the operating mechanism
to prevent accidental opening by wind, vibration, short circuit forces or movement
of the support structures.

2.10.10

The position of movable contact system (main blades) of each of the isolators and
earthing switches shall be indicated by a mechanical indicator at the lower end of
the vertical rod of shaft for the isolators and earthing switch. The indicator shall
be of metal and shall be visible from operating level.

2.10.11

The Bidder shall furnish the following details along with quality norms, during
detailed engineering stage:
i) Current transfer arrangement from main blades of isolator along with milli volt
drop immediately across transfer point.

Major Substation Equipment

ii) Details to demonstrate smooth transfer of rotary motion from motor shaft to
the insulator along with stoppers to prevent over travel.

TERMINALS, CONNECTORS AND EARTHING TERMINALS

2.11.1

The isolators and isolator cum earthing switches shall be provided with aluminum
alloy bimetallic clamp type terminal connectors suitable for ACSR conductor /
aluminum tube for taking line and bus connections.

2.11.2

Each isolator and isolator-cum-earthing switch and control mechanism shall be

provided with at least two numbers of grounding terminals and clamps for
receiving ground connection. Size and type of grounding conductor shall be 50
mm x 8 mm GS flat.

2.11.3

Other requirements for terminal connector shall be as per Clause No. 9.0 of
Auxiliaries (Annexure I) of this section.

INTERLOCKING
2.12.1

The earth switches, wherever provided, shall be constructionally interlocked so

that the earth switch can be operated only when the isolator is open and viceversa.

2.12.2

In addition to the constructional interlock; isolator and earth switches shall have
provision to prevent their electrical and manual operation unless the other
interlocking conditions are met. All these interlocks shall be of fail safe type.
Suitable individual interlocking arrangements shall be provided. The interlocking
coil shall be suitable for continuous operation from 220 V DC supply and within
variation limits stipulated in Section- General Technical Requirement.

2.12.3

Interlocks are required to be provided

i)
ii)
iii)

To prevent opening of the isolators on load

To prevent closing of the earthing switch when the isolator is closed
To prevent closing of the line isolator when the earth switch is closed.

2.12.4

Provision shall also be made for interlocking isolators with Circuit Breaker so that
these are closed before the Circuit Breaker is closed and opened after the Circuit
Breaker is opened.

2.12.5

The electrical interlocking scheme shall operate on 220 V DC supply as specified

in clause 2.12.2 of this specification. It shall not be possible to operate the

Major Substation Equipment

isolator either manually or electrically when the 220 V DC coil of the electromagnet is not energized.
2.12.6

The details of interlocking system including the interlocking schemes for isolators
on tertiary side of transformer shall be furnished by the Bidder and shall be
subject to the Purchaser's approval.

AUXILIARY SWITCHES
2.13.1

Auxiliary switches (contacts) shall be provided for automatic indication of the

isolator and isolator cum earthing switch position, control, interlocking and other
supervisory purposes. They shall be mechanically actuated by the operating
mechanism of its associated isolator and isolator-cum-earthing switch. Design
which permits the change of normally closed contact to a normally open contact
or vice versa with minimum modification would be preferred. The auxiliary
switches shall be suitable for continuous current carrying capacity of at least 10
Amps and shall be capable of breaking at least 2 Amps at 220 V DC with time
constant of not less than 20 milliseconds.

2.13.2

Auxiliary switches shall be mounted in weather proof housing which shall have
provision for entry of conduits of proper sizes or for fixing of cable glands. The
insulating materials for the switches and terminals shall be of ceramic or other
non-tracking and non-hygroscopic materials.

2.13.3

The Bidder shall give details of arrangements provided for protecting the auxiliary
switches against accidental arcing from the main circuit.

2.13.4

CT switching relays of the bus bar protection (145kV) shall be operated through
auxiliary switches of the bus isolators. Auxiliary switches shall be suitable for
this application, if required. Necessary make before break contacts shall be
incorporated for bus bar protection.

2.13.5

CT leads of the bus bar protection may be routed through auxiliary switches of
bus isolators. Auxiliary switches shall be suitable for this application, if required.
Necessary make before break contacts shall be incorporated for bus bar protection.

2.13.6

The auxiliary switches shall be tested for following tests and test reports for the
same shall be submitted for approval of Purchaser:
v)

vi)
vii)
viii)

Electrical endurance test A minimum of 2000 operations for 2A DC with

a time constant greater than or equal to 20 milliseconds with a subsequent
examination of millivolt drop/visual defects/temperature rise test
Mechanical endurance test A minimum of 1,00,000 operations with
subsequent checking of contact pressure test/visual examination
Heat run test on contacts
IR/HV test etc.

Major Substation Equipment

PADLOCKS
2.14.1

Padlocks or other approved locking arrangement shall be provided for locking the
operating handle of each isolator and earthing switch in the ON or OFF positions.

2.14.2

The locking arrangements shall be of approved designs and all locks shall be
provided with two ordinary keys each. In addition, a master key shall also be
provided.

SUPPORTING STRUCTURE
The isolators shall be suitable for mounting on lattice / pipe type supporting
structures. The details of the supporting structures are stipulated in Section - PartAuxiliaries, support structures of the Specification.

GALVANISING AND PAINTING

The galvanisation of ferrous parts and painting of sheet steel work shall conform
to the stipulation under Section General Technical Requirement of the
specification.

CONTROL WIRING, CONTROL CABINET

Control Wiring, Control Cabinet shall meet the requirements as stipulated under
Auxiliaries (Annexure I) of this section.

NAMEPLATE
2.18.1

The nameplate shall conform to the requirements of IS: 9921/ IEC-62271-102/

IEC-60694 incorporating year of manufacture.

2.18.2

The nameplate shall be weather and corrosion proof and shall be mounted in such
a position that it shall be visible in the position of normal services installation.

TANDEM PIPES FOR 145 kV ISOLATORS

For 145 kV & 36 kV grade disconnectors tandem G.I pipes shall be of at least
25mm internal diameter (ID) and class B. Base plate of insulators for
connection of tandem pipe shall be made out of one piece 10 (ten) mm thick MS
plate. Bolt and shackle device shall be used to connect tandem pipe to the base
plate.

DOWN PIPES
50 mm ID, Class B G.I pipe shall be provided for operating rod of the 145 kV
isolator. For operating rod of 36 kV isolator 40 mm ID, medium class G.I. pipe
Major Substation Equipment

shall be provided. The pipe shall be terminated into a suitable swivel or universal
type joint between the insulator bottom bearing and the operating mechanism to
take care of marginal angular misalignment at site. All brackets, guides etc. shall
be mounted on the base of the isolator. Arrangement of mounting any guide,
bracket, part etc. on support structure except the operating mechanism and the
base shall not be accepted.

COMPLETENESS OF THE OFFER

2.21.1

Equipment shall be offered complete with all parts and accessories, which are
useful and necessary for its efficient and safe operation. Such parts and
accessories shall be deemed to be within the scope of this specification
whether specifically mentioned herein or not.

INSPECTION AND TESTING

2.22.1

Equipment/material shall be offered for inspection in accordance with requirement

of Section General Technical Requirement.

2.22.2

In accordance with the requirements stipulated under Section- General

Technical Requirement, the isolator alongwith its earthing switch and
operating mechanism should have been successfully type tested as per IEC/IS and
shall be subjected to the routine and acceptance tests as per IS: 9921/IEC: 62271102.

2.22.3

Minimum 50 Nos. mechanical operations will be carried out (in presence of

purchasers representative) on one isolator out of every ten isolators assembled
completely with all accessories as acceptance test for the lot. Testing facilities
available at the Bidders/ Manufacturers works shall be indicated in the bid.

2.22.4

Power frequency voltage withstand tests shall be performed on atleast one

completely assembled isolator / isolator pole of each type. Alternatively, power
frequency withstand test may be performed on two Nos. of Post Insulators
(complete) for each voltage rating and type of isolator.

2.22.5

The test report of following type tests, if conducted, for earthing switches having a
rated induced making and breaking capability as per IEC: 1129/ IEC: 62271-102
shall be submitted by the Bidder for the Purchasers review(if the tests have
already been conducted earlier), otherwise, tests shall be carried out by the Bidder
at no extra cost to the Purchaser.

Tests to prove electromagnetically induced current making and breaking

capability

Tests to prove electrostatically induced current making and breaking

capability as per IEC: 62271-102

Major Substation Equipment

2.22.6

The test reports of the type tests (as per IS: 9921/IEC: 62271-102) and the
following additional type tests shall be submitted by the Bidder for the Owners /
Purchasers review.
These tests should have been conducted as per the procedure given in Annexure
II of Section General Technical Requirement.
i)
ii)

Radio Interference Voltage test

The seismic withstand test on isolator mounted on support structure

The seismic withstand test should have been performed under following positions:
Isolator open
Isolator open
Isolator closed

Earth switch Closed

Earth switch Open
Earth switch Open

2.22.7

Site tests

2.22.7.1

All routine tests including 50 (fifty)-operation test, except power frequency dry
voltage withstand test on isolator shall be repeated on completely assembled
isolator of each type at site.

2.22.7.2

After erection at site, the Bidder shall carryout the following tests to demonstrate
proper assembly and operation of the supplied and erected isolators and earth
switches:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)

Closing and opening of isolators and earthing switches.

Measurement of resistance across the main contacts of isolators.
Measurement of resistance between the contacts of earthing switches.
Verification of proper functioning of interlocking scheme.
Verification of proper operation of auxiliary contacts and signaling.

2.22.8

Commissioning Tests

2.22.8.1

Testing and commissioning at site shall be conducted in accordance with

requirement of Section- General Technical Requirement.

2.22.8.2

An indicative list of tests on isolator and earth switch is given below. Bidder shall
perform any additional test based on specialities of the items as per the Field
Quality Program / instructions of the manufacturer without any extra cost to the
Purchaser. The Bidder shall arrange all instruments required for conducting these
tests along with calibration certificates and shall furnish the list of instruments to
the Purchaser for approval.
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)

Insulation resistance of each pole

Manual and electrical operation and interlocks
Insulation resistance of control circuits and motors
Ground connections
Contact resistance
Proper alignment so as to minimize the vibration during operation

Major Substation Equipment

g)
h)
i)

2.22.8.3

Measurement of operating Torque for isolator and Earth switch

Resistance of operating and interlocks coils
Functional check of the control schematic and electrical & mechanical
interlocks.

After commissioning tests have been satisfactorily completed, the manufacturer,

in co-operation with and under the supervision of the purchaser shall conduct the
final acceptance tests to determine whether all the manufacturer's guarantees and
requirements of these specifications have been fulfilled.

MANDATORY SPARE PARTS

The mandatory spare parts shall be supplied as listed in Schedule of Prices.
INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS CTs & PTs

GENERAL
This part of the specification covers detailed technical requirements for the following
with all associated accessories and auxiliaries.
a)
b)
c)
d)

132 kV Class single Phase Current Transformers

132 kV Class single Phase Potential Transformers
33 kV Class single Phase Current Transformers
33 kV Class single Phase Potential Transformers

GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

3.2.1

The Instrument Transformer and accessories shall conform to IEC: 60044-1, IEC:
60044-2, IEC: 60186, IEC: 60358, or IS: 2705, IS: 9348, IS: 3156 and other
relevant IEC/IS standards of latest edition except to the extent explicitly modified
in the specification and shall also be in accordance with requirements specified in
this section as well as in Section- General Technical Requirement. A list of
relevant Standards is given in Annexure-I of Section General Technical
Requirement.

3.2.2

The Instrument transformers shall be designed for use in geographic and

meteorological conditions as given in Section- Specific Technical
Requirement.

3.2.3

The instrument transformers offered shall be complete with all components

necessary for their effective and trouble free operation. Such components shall be
within the scope of supply of the supplier/Bidder, irrespective of the fact whether
these are specifically mentioned in this specification or not.

3.2.4

The instrument transformers covered in this specification are intended for use at
the substation for protection and metering services in an effectively grounded

Major Substation Equipment

system. The instrument transformers shall be suitable for simultaneous loading of

the secondary windings/cores as specified in Section- Specific Technical
Requirement. This shall be specifically confirmed by the Bidder.
3.2.5

The instrument transformers shall preferably be hermetically sealed units with

inbuilt provision to dissipate excessive pressure buildup. The Bidder/
Manufacturer shall furnish details of the arrangements made for sealing of
instrument transformers along with the bid. The Bidder/ Manufacturer shall also
furnish the details of site tests to check the effectiveness of hermetic sealing for
approval. The sealing proposed by the Bidder at various locations including the
following ones shall be described, supported by sectional drawings.
a)
b)
c)

Location of emergence of primary and secondary terminals

Interface between porcelain housing and metal tank.
Cover of secondary terminal box.

3.2.6

The instrument transformers shall be provided with Earthing terminal for bolted
connection 50 mm x 8 mm GS flat, for connection to earth mat.

3.2.7

The polarity shall be indelibly marked on each instrument transformer and at the
lead terminations at the associated terminal block.

3.2.8

The instrument transformers shall operate satisfactorily in system with high X/R
ratios.

3.2.9

The instrument transformers shall be complete with its terminal box and a
common marshalling box/ junction box for a set of 3 instrument transformers.
They shall conform to Clause 2.0 of Auxiliaries (Annexure I) of this
section.

3.2.10

The instrument transformer tank along with top metallics shall be hot dip
galvanized as per IS: 2629 and requirement of Section General Technical
Requirement or painted as per IS 5, Shade 697 and as per requirement of
Section General Technical Requirement.

3.2.11

The impregnation details along with tests/checks to ensure successful completion

of impregnation cycle shall be furnished for approval.

SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

The specific technical parameters of the Instrument Transformers are detailed in
Section Specific Technical Requirements of the specification.

GUARANTEED AND OTHER TECHNICAL PARTICULARS

The guaranteed and other technical particulars for the offered Instrument
Transformers are indicated in Section Guaranteed and Other Technical
Particulars. Any other particulars considered necessary in addition to those
listed in that Section shall be submitted by the Bidder.

Major Substation Equipment

CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES
The features and constructional details of instrument transformers shall be in accordance
with requirement stipulated hereunder:
3.5.1

3.5.2

Bushings/Insulators
a)

Instrument transformers shall be of 145 kV & 36 kV class, oil filled, with

shaded porcelain bushing/insulator suitable for outdoor service and up
right mounting on steel structures.

b)

Bushings/insulators shall conform to Clause 1.0 of Auxiliaries

(Annexure I) of this section. The bushing/insulator for CT shall be one
piece without any metallic flange joint.

c)

Bushings shall be provided with oil filling and drain plugs, oil sight glass
for CT and for electromagnetic unit of CVT, etc. The bushing/insulator of
instrument transformer shall be provided with lifting arrangements. The
bushing/insulator of instrument transformer shall have a cantilever strength
of not less than 350 kg for 145 kV & 36 kV class instrument transformers
or as per the value obtained vide requirement of Section- General
Technical Requirement, whichever is higher.

d)

Nuts and bolts or screws used for fixation of the interfacing porcelain
bushings for taking out terminals shall be provided on flanges cemented to
the bushings and not on the porcelain.

Terminal Box and Marshalling Box/Junction box

Terminal Box and Marshalling Box / junction box shall conform to the
requirements of Clause 2.0 of Auxiliaries (Annexure I) of this section.
Polarity shall be indelibly marked at the lead terminals of terminal block. All
secondary terminals shall be brought out in a compartment on one side of each
instrument transformer. The exterior of this terminal box shall be hot dip
galvanized as per section General Technical Requirement.

3.5.3

Insulating oil
Insulating oil used for instrument transformers shall be of EHV grade &
shall conform to IS: 335/ IEC: 60296. The quantity for first filling along with
10% extra oil shall be supplied.

3.5.4

For gasket joints wherever used, nitrite butyl rubber gaskets shall be used. The
gasket shall be fitted in properly machined groove with adequate space for
accommodating the gasket under compression

3.5.5
3.5.63.5.5 Oil level indicators

Major Substation Equipment

Instrument transformer (CT) shall be supplied with suitable expansion chamber

for compensation of oil volume variation. A ground glass window shall be
provided to monitor the position of metal bellow or nitrogen with naked eye to an
observer standing at ground level.
3.5.73.5.6 Lifting Arrangement
Instrument transformer shall be provided with suitable lifting arrangement to lift
the entire unit. The lifting arrangement shall be clearly shown in the general
arrangement drawing. Lifting arrangement (lifting lug) shall be positioned in
such a way as to avoid any damage to the porcelain housing or the tanks during
lifting for installation/transport. Necessary sling guides shall be offered which
shall be of removable type.
3.5.83.5.7 The terminal connectors required for connection of the instrument transformer to
the bus bar shall be suitable for both vertical and horizontal take off of flexible
ACSR conductor/ Al tube as per requirement.
3.5.93.5.8 Fittings and Accessories
Standard accessories including but not limited to the following shall be provided
on/with all instrument transformers:
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
ix)
x)
3.5.103.5.9

Oil level gauge

Pressure releasing device to release abnormal internal pressure
Oil filling hole with cap
Lifting lugs/holes
Earthing terminals with terminal connectors
Phase terminal connectors
Combined Rating and diagram plate
Sampling plug
Drain valve
Secondary terminal box.

Other details pertaining to instrument transformers (CT/ CVT/ PT) shall be as

described under Clause No. 3.8 to 3.10.

3.5.113.5.10 Nameplate
3.5.10.1

The instrument transformers shall be provided with non-corrosive, legible

combined rating and diagram plate with the information as specified in relevant
standards, duly engraved/punched on it.

3.5.10.2

Nameplate shall conform to the requirements of IEC incorporating the year of

manufacture. The rated current, extended current rating in case of current
transformers and rated voltage, voltage factor in case of voltage transformers shall
be clearly indicated on the name plate. The rated thermal current in case of CT
shall be also be marked on the nameplate.

Major Substation Equipment

The intermediate voltage in case of capacitor voltage transformer shall be

indicated on the name plate.

3.5.123.5.11 GALVANISATION & PAINTING

The galvanisation of ferrous parts and painting of sheet steel work shall conform
to the stipulation under Section General Technical Requirements of the
specification.

DRAWINGS/ DOCUMENTS
3.6.1

Drawings to be submitted with the tender

In addition to any other drawings which the tenderer may like to supply, the
following drawings/catalogues shall be submitted.
a) Drawings showing the outline, weight of instrument transformer (CT, and PT)
and accessories offered including bushings
b) Drawings showing mounting details including foundation for instrument
transformer (CT, and PT) offered
c) Details of secondary termination box
d) Technical and descriptive literature giving details of the instrument
transformer (CT, and PT) offered.

3.6.2

Drawings/ Documents to be submitted after award of contract

3.6.2.1

Within 30 (thirty) days of the award of contract, the Bidder shall furnish 5 (five)
prints of the following drawings for the approval of the Purchaser.
a)

b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)

h)
i)

General arrangement drawings showing plan, front and side elevations of

instrument transformer (CT & PT) with all accessories, showing
dimensional details, clearances, net and shipping weights etc. Dimensions
shall be marked in metric units
Drawing of mounting details and their recommended method of mounting
Control and wiring diagrams showing salient details required for
connecting equipment at site
Drawing giving details of nameplate, terminal markings, terminal
connectors etc.
Detailed assembly drawings showing the parts properly identified for field
assembly of equipment
Complete bill of materials listing out all the equipment materials and hard
wares to be supplied
Drawing showing complete particulars of foundation and structural
drawings including weights of all components, forces acting and impact
loading
Details of secondary termination box
Records of all shop testing and inspection of materials, components
subassemblies, equipment, machinery, etc.

Major Substation Equipment

j)
k)

l)

3.6.2.2

Erection and installation sequence and procedures

The drawings, data and information shall be elaborate enough to enable the
purchaser to comprehend and assess the vital details, features, capabilities
and functioning of their arrangement
Any other drawing, literature, documents not specifically listed herein but
considered essential.

Each drawing shall be identified by a drawing number and each subsequent

resubmission/revision or addition to the drawing shall be identified by a revision
number. All drawings shall be thoroughly checked for accuracy and completeness
and signed by a responsible officer of the Bidder on his behalf. Any mistakes or
errors in drawings shall not form a basis for seeking extension of delivery period.

MANDATORY SPARE PARTS

The mandatory spare parts shall be supplied as listed in Schedule of Price
Schedules.

CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
3.8.1

Type of CTs

3.8.1.1

Current transformers shall have single primary either ring type, or hair pin
type and suitably designed for bringing out the secondary terminals in a
weather proof (IP 55) terminal box at the bottom. These secondary terminals
shall be terminated to stud type non disconnecting terminal blocks inside the
terminal box. This shall be wired up to marshalling box / junction box, if
required. In case Bar Primary inverted type current transformers are offered the
manufacturer will meet the following additional requirements:

i)
ii)
iii)

iv)
v)

3.8.1.2

The secondaries shall be totally encased in metallic shielding providing a

uniform equipotential surface for even electric field distribution.
The lowest part of the insulation assembly shall be properly secured to
avoid any risk of damage due to transportation stresses.
The upper part of insulation assembly resting on primary bar shall be
properly secured to avoid any damage during transportation due to relative
movement between insulation assembly and top dome.
Bidder/Manufacturer shall recommend whether any special storage facility
is required for spare CT.
Nitrogen if used for hermetic sealing (in case of live tank design) should
not come in direct contact with oil.

The CTs shall be supplied with suitable expansion chamber for compensation
of oil volume variation. The expansion chamber at the top of the porcelain
shall be provided for expansion of transformer oil and shall be tested in
accordance with relevant standards. Steel Bellows / nitrogen cushion may be
provided for the purpose. Nitrogen if used for hermetic sealing (in case of

Major Substation Equipment

Live tank design) should not come in direct contact with oil. The details of the
same are to be furnished for approval.

3.8.1.3

145 kV CTs shall be suitable for high speed autoreclosing.

3.8.2

Co-ordination/ Compatibility with the Protection Scheme

The characteristics of current transformers e.g. Knee point voltage,
excitation current, accuracy limit factor, secondary winding resistance etc.
are based on the requirements of the protection scheme as envisaged at
present. The CTs shall have to match with the requirements of the protection
schemes offered by the Bidder. Before manufacture of CTs, various
parameters as mentioned above shall have to be approved by the Purchaser.

3.8.3

Core

3.8.3.1

All the cores may be continuous without any air gap. The area of cross section of
core and the flux density at rated primary current and rated burden shall be
consistent with the required characteristics of the CTs. The cores shall be carefully
annealed and bonded after they are wound to relieve the stress during winding.

3.8.3.2

The physical disposition of the cores shall be in the same order as given in TableI and Table II under Section Specific Technical Requirement for CTs.

3.8.3.3

The magnetization curves for cores shall invariably be furnished specifically

marking the point on the curve at which knee point voltage is obtainable and also
the corresponding excitation current shall be indicated on curve.

3.8.3.4

All the protection cores shall be formed out of laminations of non-ageing, high
grade, Cold Rolled Grain Oriented silicon steel or other equivalent alloys and
shall be of low reactance type so as to produce undistorted secondary current
under transient conditions at all the ratios with specified CT parameters. The cores
to be used for protective relaying proposed shall be of specified accuracy class.

3.8.3.5

The metering cores in which high accuracy at low ampere turns and low
Instrument Security Factor (ISF) are required may be of metal or such other
ferromagnetic materials as dictated by design consideration. The metering core
shall be of specified accuracy class. The Instrument Security Factor (ISF) at all
ratios shall be less than five (5). The desired ISF shall be achieved without the
use of reactor etc in the secondary winding for metering core.

3.8.4

Winding
The main insulation for the windings shall consist of paper and oil system and
possess high mechanical strength, superior electrical withstand properties and
good ageing qualities to ensure long trouble free life for the CTs. The windings
shall have high mechanical strength for safety against short circuit stresses. The
rating of the secondary winding shall be one ampere.

Major Substation Equipment

3.8.5

Primary winding

3.8.5.1

The primary winding shall consist of a single primary of suitable design. The
conducting material for primary winding may consist of electrolytic high
conductivity copper strip or aluminum tube of sufficient area of cross-section to
cater for the guaranteed short time as well as continuous thermal current rating
under the site conditions.

3.8.5.2

The winding may be hairpin type or ring type.

3.8.6

Secondary winding

3.8.6.1

The secondary winding shall be made of high conductivity electrolytic copper

wire of suitable cross section. The copper wire shall have heavy enamel
insulation which shall be immune to the effect of insulating oil. The winding shall
be provided with paper insulation to enhance the reliability. The secondary
winding shall be uniformly distributed on the total circumference of the core.

3.8.6.2

The rating of the secondary winding shall be one ampere.

3.8.6.3

The secondary windings shall have continuous thermal rating, as specified, for all
ratios. The CT design shall permit the selection of CT ratio of a particular core,
different from and independent of the CT ratio of the other cores in the same CT.

3.8.6.4

Different ratios specified shall be achieved by secondary taps only and primary
reconnection shall not be accepted.

3.8.7

Primary Terminals

3.8.7.1

The primary terminals shall be of heavily tinned electrolytic copper or aluminum

alloy of 99.9% conductivity. The minimum thickness of tinning shall be 15
microns.

3.8.8

Secondary Terminals

3.8.8.1

Secondary terminal studs shall be provided with at least three nuts and adequate
plain and spring washers for fixing the leads. The studs, nuts and washers shall be
of brass, duly nickel plated. The minimum outside diameter of the studs shall be 6
mm. A length of at least 15mm shall be available on the studs for inserting the
leads. The horizontal spacing between centers of the adjacent studs shall be at
least 1.5 (one point five) times the outside circumdia of the nuts.

3.8.9

The CT shall be provided with Power factor testing terminal for

measurement of tan delta and capacitance of the unit.

3.8.10

Facilities shall be provided at terminal blocks in the marshalling box for star delta
formation, short circuiting and grounding of CT secondary terminals.

3.8.11

For 145/36 kV class CTs, the rated extended primary current of the CTs shall be
120% (or 150%, if applicable) of rated primary on all cores of the CTs.

Major Substation Equipment

3.8.12

Characteristics shall be such as to provide satisfactory performance of burdens

ranging from 25% to 100% of rated burden over a range of 10% to 100% of rated
current in case of metering CTs and up to the accuracy limit factor /knee point
voltage in case of protection CTs.

3.8.13

Current transformers guaranteed burdens and accuracy class are to be intended as

simultaneous for all cores.

3.8.14

The current transformer shall be suitable for horizontal transportation. It shall be

ensured that the CT is able to withstand all the stresses imposed on it while
transporting and there shall be no damage in transit. The Bidder shall submit the
details of packing design to the Purchaser for review.

3.8.15

The CT shall be designed as to achieve the minimum risks of explosion in service.

Bidder/Manufacturer shall bring out in his offer, the measures taken to achieve
this.

3.8.16

The wiring diagram plate for the interconnections of the three single phase CTs
shall be provided inside the marshalling box / Junction box.

3.8.17

INSPECTION & TESTING

3.8.17.1

Equipment/material shall be offered for inspection in accordance with requirement

of Section General Technical Requirement.

3.8.17.2

In accordance with the requirement stipulated under Section General

Technical Requirement, the 145 kV & 36kV Current Transformers should
have been successfully type tested as per relevant IEC/IS and shall be subjected to
the routine and acceptance tests as per relevant IS/IEC.

3.8.17.3

The test reports of all type tests (as per relevant IS/IEC) and the following
additional type test shall be submitted by the Bidder for the Purchasers review.

3.8.17.4

i)

Radio interference voltage test as per Annexure II of Section- General

Technical Requirement.

ii)

Seismic withstand test as per Annexure II of Section- General

Technical Requirement.

iii)

Thermal stability test i.e. application of rated voltage and rated extended
thermal current simultaneously by synthetic test circuit.

iv)

Thermal co-efficient test i.e. measurement of tan delta as a function of

temperature (at ambient and between 80 deg. C & 90 deg. C) and voltage
[at 0.3, 0.7, 1.0 and 1.1*Um / 3 ]

Routine Tests

Major Substation Equipment

The routine tests as per IEC: 60044-1/IS: 2705 (as amended up to date) shall be
conducted on CTs.
In addition to this, following routine tests shall also be conducted:

3.8.17.5

3.8.17.6

i)

High Voltage Power frequency withstand test on Secondary winding as per

IS: 2705 (Part-I) 1992

ii)

Over voltage inter turn test as per IS: 2705 Part I: 1992

iii)

Oil leakage test

iv)

Measurement of tan delta at 0.3, 0.7, 1.0 and 1.1xUm / 3

v)
vi)

Measurement of capacitance
Measurement of partial discharge shall be carried out as per IEC

Site tests
i)

Dissolved gas analysis is to be carried out at the time of commissioning.

CTs must have adequate provision for taking oil samples from the bottom
of the CT without exposure to atmosphere. Manufacturer/Bidder shall
recommend the frequency at which oil samples should be taken and norms
for various gases in oil after being in operation for different durations.
Bidder/ Manufacturer should also indicate the total quantity of oil which
can be withdrawn from CT for gas analysis before refilling or further
treatment of oil becomes necessary.

ii)

The Bidder shall carry out other test recommended in the bid during
installation and commissioning to ensure satisfactory performance of all
the equipment supplied.

Commissioning Tests

3.8.17.6.1 Testing and commissioning at site shall be conducted in accordance with

requirement of Section General Technical Requirements.
3.8.17.6.2 An indicative list of commissioning tests is given below. Bidder shall perform any
additional test based on specialties of the items as per the Field Quality Program /
instructions of the equipment Supplier/Manufacturer or Purchaser without any
extra cost to the Purchaser. The Bidder shall arrange all instruments required for
conducting these tests alongwith calibration certificates and shall furnish the list
of instruments to the Purchaser for approval.
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)

Insulation resistance test for primary and secondary

Polarity test and verification of terminal markings
Ratio identification test - checking of all ratios on all cores by primary
injection of current
Dielectric test of oil (wherever applicable)
Magnetizing characteristics test

Major Substation Equipment

f)
g)

Tan Delta and capacitance measurement

Secondary winding resistance measurement.

3.8.17.6.3 After commissioning tests have been satisfactorily completed, the manufacturer,
in co-operation with and under the supervision of the Purchaser shall conduct the
final acceptance tests to determine whether all the manufacturer's/Bidders
guarantees and requirements of these specifications have been fulfilled.

Void
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
3.10.1

Type
The 145 kV & 36 kV voltage transformers shall be of electromagnetic type single
phase, 50 Hz, oil-immersed and self cooled suitable for outdoor use in the
specified climatic conditions without protection from wind, rain and dust. The
voltage transformers shall be complete in all respects and shall conform to the
latest practice of design and manufacture suitable for 145 kV & 36 kV.

3.10.2

Design and Construction

3.10.2.1

The core shall be made of non-ageing, cold rolled, grain oriented, laminated
electrical grade silicon steel of low hysterisis loss and high permeability to ensure
high accuracy both under normal as well as over voltage conditions.

3.10.2.2

The voltage transformers shall be sealed to eliminate breathing and prevent air and
moisture from entering the tank. The voltage transformer shall be provided with
oil level gauge readable from ground level and pressure relieving devices capable
of releasing abnormal internal pressure, without damage to the metal or porcelain
housings. Particulars of gas above the oil level and the means of separation of gas
from oil shall be indicated.

3.10.2.3

3 Nos. single phase Voltage transformers at 132 kV level shall be provided on

both buses (Main I, Main-II) for protection & metering purpose. At 33 kV level 3
Nos. single phase Voltage transformers shall be provided on main bus and 1 No.
single phase VT shall be provided on any one phase on transfer bus.

3.10.3
3.10.43.10.3 Windings
3.10.3.1

Primary windings
The primary of the voltage transformer shall be connected phase to neutral, which
shall be solidly grounded. The neutral of the system is also solidly grounded.

3.10.3.2

Secondary windings

Major Substation Equipment

3.10.3.2.1 All voltage transformers shall be provided with three separate secondary
windings. One winding shall be used for metering, the other two windings for
protection. The class of accuracy and rated burden of voltage transformers shall
be as specified in Section- Specific Technical Requirement.
3.10.5
3.10.63.10.4 Insulation
The voltage transformers shall withstand satisfactorily the dielectric tests
corresponding to basic insulation level specified in Section Specific Technical
Requirements.
3.10.73.10.5 Temperature rise
The voltage transformers shall be so designed that at 1.2 times the rated primary
voltage when supplied continuously at rated frequency and at rated burden the rise
of temperature in windings and other parts shall not exceed the limits specified in
the Annex-IV of this section after correction for the difference between the
temperature prevailing at the site and the reference ambient temperature specified
in the relevant Indian standard. The temperature rise at 1.5 times rated primary
voltage when applied for 30 secs starting from previous stable operating condition
at rated frequency and rated burden shall not exceed the above temperature limits
specified in Annexure-IV of this Section by more than 10 deg. C.
3.10.83.10.6 Terminal box.
Each voltage transformer shall be provided with a terminal box suitably located to
house the terminals of the three secondary windings. The secondary terminals
shall be easily accessible. The box shall be hot dip galvanized as per IS: 2629 and
relevant clauses of Section - General Technical Requirements, outdoor type,
weather and vermin proof and the cover shall be easily detachable. HRC fuses
with mountings of adequate size shall provided for every core/winding. Terminal
Boxes & Fuses shall confirm to Clause no. 7.0 of Annexure I Auxiliaries of
this section.
3.10.93.10.7 Type of Mounting
The voltage transformer shall be suitable for mounting on lattice type structure.
The necessary flanges, bolts etc. for base mounting of voltage transformers shall
be galvanized. The data regarding minimum clearance in relation to the adjacent
metallic grounded structure shall be stated.
3.10.103.10.8 Metal Parts
All ferrous metal parts of voltage transformers which shall be subjected to
corrosion, such as lifting hooks, adjustable arcing horns, etc. shall be hot dip
galvanized. All current carrying parts shall be of non ferrous metals or alloys and
shall be designed to eliminate sharp points, edges and sharp faces. The
galvanizing in all respects shall conform to the latest edition of IS: 2629 (as
amended upto date) and as specified in relevant clauses of Section - General

Major Substation Equipment

Technical Requirements, of this Document and shall withstand all tests

specified in latest edition of IS: 2633 (as amended upto date).
3.10.113.10.9 Terminal connectors
Terminal connectors shall be suitable for ACSR conductor or aluminum tube.
Size of the ACSR conductor/aluminum tube and earth conductor shall be as
specified in respective section of the specification. These shall confirm to Clause
no. 9.0 of Annexure I Auxiliaries of this section.
3.10.123.10.10

Name Plate

Voltage transformers shall be provided with non-cutting and non-corroding

nameplates legibly and indelibly marked and securely attached to the equipment
in accordance with the applicable standard.
3.10.133.10.11

Erection marks

Before dispatch from manufacturers works, all components and fittings shall be
match marked.
3.10.143.10.12

INSPECTION & TESTING

3.10.12.1 Voltage Transformers shall be offered for inspection in accordance with relevant
clauses of Section - General Technical Requirements.
3.10.12.2 In accordance with the requirements stipulated under relevant clauses of Section
- General Technical Requirements, the voltage transformers should have been
successfully type tested as per relevant IEC/IS and shall be subjected to the
routine tests and acceptance test as per relevant IS: 3156/IEC.
3.10.12.3 Site tests
The Contractor shall carry out other test recommended in the bid during
installation and commissioning to ensure satisfactory performance of all the
equipment supplied.
3.10.12.4

Commissioning Tests
i)

Testing and commissioning at site shall be conducted in accordance

with relevant clauses of Section - General Technical
Requirements.

ii)

Contractor shall perform any additional test based on specialities of

the items as per the field Quality Program / instructions of the
equipment Supplier/Manufacturer or Owner without any extra cost to
the Owner. The Contractor shall arrange all instruments required for
conducting these tests alongwith calibration certificates and shall
furnish the list of instruments to the Owner for approval. An indicative
list of tests is given below.

Major Substation Equipment

a)
b)
c)
d)
e)

Insulation resistance test for primary (if applicable) and

secondary winding
Polarity test.
Ratio test.
Dielectric test of oil (wherever applicable)
Tan Delta and capacitance measurement between

f)

HV Ground point

Secondary winding resistance measurement

3.10.12.5 After commissioning tests have been satisfactorily completed, the manufacturer,
in cooperation with and under the supervision of the purchaser /owner shall
conduct the final acceptance tests to determine whether all the
contractors/manufacturer's guarantees and requirements of these specifications
have been fulfilled.

SUPPORTING STRUCTURE
Each Current Transformer, Capacitor Voltage Transformer and Voltage
Transformer shall be suitable for mounting on Lattice type support structure. The
details of supporting structures are stipulated in Section- Auxiliaries:
Supporting Structure.
SURGE ARRESTERS

GENERAL
This part of the specification covers detailed technical requirements for 132 kV &
33 kV out door, single phase, gapless, station class Metal Oxide Surge Arresters
complete with all associated accessories required.

GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

4.2.1

The Surge Arresters shall be outdoor, gapless, and metal oxide type. The Surge
Arresters shall conform in general to IEC: 60099-4 and other relevant IEC/IS
standards of latest edition except to the extent explicitly modified in the
specification and shall also be in accordance with requirements specified in this
section as well as in Section- General Technical Requirement. All
accessories, terminal connectors etc. shall conform to relevant standards. A list of
relevant Standards is given in Annexure-I of Section General Technical
Requirement.

Major Substation Equipment

4.2.2

The Surge Arresters are required complete with surge counters, insulating base
and all associated accessories and auxiliaries. The scope also includes terminal
connectors.

4.2.3

It is not the intent to specify completely all details of design and construction of
the equipment. However, the equipment shall conform, in all respects to high
standards of design, engineering and workmanship. Material and components not
specifically stated in this specification but which are necessary for satisfactory
operation of the equipment and accessories specified in this specification shall be
deemed to be included unless specifically excluded and shall be supplied without
any extra cost.

4.2.4

Arrester shall be designed for use in the geographic and meteorological

conditions as given in Section- Specific Technical Requirement.

SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

The technical parameters of the Surge Arresters are detailed in Section- Specific
Technical Requirement of the specification.

GUARANTEED AND OTHER TECHNICAL PARTICULARS

The guaranteed and other technical particulars for the offered Surge Arresters are
indicated in Section Guaranteed and Other Technical Particulars. Any
other particulars considered necessary in addition to those listed in that Section.

DRAWINGS/DOCUMENTS
4.5.1

Drawings to be submitted with the tender

In addition to any other drawings which the tenderer may like to supply the
following drawings/catalogues shall be submitted along with the offer:
a)
b)

c)

Drawing showing general outline of the complete arrester.

The detailed dimensional drawing of porcelain housing giving internal and
external diameter, thickness height, shed profiles, creepage distance, dry
arcing distance etc.
TOV characteristic curve and V-I characteristic curve of ZnO elements/blocks.

4.5.2

Drawings/Documents to be submitted after receipt of order

4.5.2.1

Within 30 (thirty) days of the award of contract, the Bidder shall furnish the five
(5) copies of the following drawings for approval of the Purchaser:
a)
b)

Drawing showing general outline of the complete arresters

Drawing showing mounting structure and installation details with
recommended minimum clearances

Major Substation Equipment

c)
d)
e)
f)
g)

h)
4.5.2.2

Drawing showing details of pressure relief device

Drawing showing details of surge monitor (counter and leakage current
meter)
Drawing showing details of terminal connectors, insulating base, grading
rings
Detailed drawing of mounting structure
The detailed dimensional drawing of porcelain housing giving internal and
external diameter, thickness, height, shed profiles, creepage distance, dry
arcing distance etc.
V-t and V-I characteristic curves of ZnO elements / blocks.

Each drawing shall be identified by a drawing number and each subsequent

resubmission/revision or addition to the drawing shall be identified by a revision
number. All drawings shall be thoroughly checked for accuracy and completeness
and signed by a responsible officer of the Bidder on his behalf. Any mistakes or
errors in drawings shall not form a basis for seeking extension of delivery period.

DUTY REQUIREMENTS
4.6.1

The Surge Arresters shall be of outdoor heavy duty station class metal oxide and
gapless type (without any series or shunt gaps).

4.6.2

Surge Arresters shall be adequately designed to withstand specified dynamic overvoltages. The Bidder shall furnish the data for the durations and over voltage
factors which the offered arresters can withstand after absorption of energy
equivalent to specified energy discharge class (Two long duration discharge
current impulses).

4.6.3

The Surge Arresters shall be capable of discharging over voltage occurring during
switching of unloaded transformers, reactors and long lines.

4.6.4

145 kV & 36 kV class surge arresters shall be capable of discharging energy

equivalent to line discharge Class 3 of IEC for 145/36kV on two successive
operations.

4.6.5

The surge arresters are being provided to protect the following equipment whose
insulation levels are indicated in the table given below:

Equipment to be
protected
Power
transformer
Instrument
Transformer
+Reactor

Lightning impulse Lightning impulse

(kVp) for 145 kV (kVp) for 36 kV
system
system
650
170

Major Substation Equipment

650

170

CB/Isolator
(a) Phase to
ground
(b) Across open
contacts

650

170

750

195

4.6.6

The reference current of the surge arresters shall be high enough to eliminate the
influence of grading and stray capacitance on the measured reference voltage of
the arrester units (with designed grading system).

4.6.7

Arresters shall be designed with sufficient cantilever strength to meet stress due to
specified wind speed and seismic acceleration.

4.6.8

The protection of tertiary winding of transformer(s) shall be decided during

detailed engineering.

4.6.9

The duty cycle of CB installed in 145 kV & 36 kV system of the Purchaser shall
be O-0.3 sec-CO-3 min-CO. The Surge Arrester shall be suitable for such circuit
breaker duties in the system.

CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES
The constructional features of surge arresters shall be generally in accordance
with the requirements stipulated hereunder:
4.7.1

The surge arresters shall be of hermetically sealed units, self supporting

construction suitable for mounting on galvanized steel structure.

4.7.2

The non linear blocks shall be of sintered metal oxide material. These shall be
provided in such a way as to obtain robust construction with excellent mechanical
and electrical properties even after repeated operations.

4.7.3

The surge arresters shall be fitted with pressure relief devices suitable for
preventing shattering of porcelain housing and providing path for release of gas
pressure built up due to flow of rated fault currents in the event of arrester failure.
Details shall be furnished in the bids alongwith quality checks.

4.7.4

The surge arresters shall have anti-contamination feature to prevent arrester failure
consequent to uneven voltage gradient across the stack, in the event of
contamination of the arrester porcelain.

4.7.5

Seals shall be provided in such a way that these are always effectively maintained
even when discharging rated lightning current.

4.7.6

The heat treatment cycle details alongwith necessary quality checks used for
individual blocks alongwith insulation layer formed across each block are to be
furnished. Metalizing coating thickness for reducing resistance between adjacent
discs is to be furnished with additional information Schedule of bid proposal

Major Substation Equipment

sheets alongwith procedure for checking the same. Details of thermal stability
test for uniform distribution of current on individual disc is to be furnished.
4.7.7

The manufacturer will submit Data for rejection rate of ZnO blocks during
manufacturing / operation for the past three years.

4.7.8

The nameplate shall conform to the requirements of relevant IEC standard

incorporating the year of manufacture.

4.7.9

The arrester housing, fittings and accessories and surge monitor shall conform to
the requirements stipulated in Clause No. 4.8.

4.7.10

To prevent moisture entry, O rings of Neoprene rubber in grooves shall be used

for sealing surge arrester stacks.

FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES

4.8.1

The surge arresters shall be complete with insulating bases having provision for
bolting to flat surface of structure, fasteners for stacking units together, surge
counters with leakage current meters and terminal connectors.

4.8.2

The end fittings shall be of non-magnetic and corrosion proof material suitable for
outdoor installations. All ferrous parts exposed to atmosphere shall be hot dip
galvanized as per relevant standard. The galvanisation of ferrous parts and
painting of sheet steel work shall conform to the stipulation under Section
General Technical Requirement of the specification.

4.8.3

Grading/ corona control rings, if necessary, shall be provided on each complete

arrester pole for proper stress distribution. Suitable terminal connectors shall be
supplied by the Contractor.

4.8.4

The terminal connectors shall be suitable for ACSR conductor or aluminum tube
for horizontal or vertical take off. The terminal connector shall conform to the
requirements stipulated in Annexure-I: Auxiliaries of this Section.

4.8.5

The ground terminal shall be suitable for 50 mm x 8 mm G. S. flat for connection

to grounding mat.

4.8.6

Surge Monitor

4.8.6.1

The surge monitor shall consist of discharge counter and a leakage current meter.
Self contained discharge counters suitably enclosed for outdoor use, fully weather
proofed and sealed for life and requiring no auxiliary or battery supply for
operation shall be provided with a suitable cyclometric counter for each pole of
the surge arrester to record the number of discharges through the surge arrester. A
leakage current meter with suitable scale range to measure the leakage current of
the surge arrester shall also be provided along with the surge counter within the
same enclosure.

Major Substation Equipment

4.8.6.2

An inspection window shall also be provided through which the readings of

milliammeter and counter can be taken. The reading of milliammeter and counters
shall be visible through the inspection glass window. The terminals shall be robust
and of adequate size and shall be so located that incoming and outgoing
connections are made with minimum possible bends.

4.8.6.3

The design of the surge monitor shall be such that it is possible to tilt the surge
monitor downwards by an angle of upto 45 degrees from horizontal plane.

4.8.6.4

Microprocessor based instruments for monitoring resistive current or wattloss of

the arrester shall have to be supplied, if required.

4.8.6.5

The surge monitor shall be suitable to be mounted on the supporting structure of

the arrester and should be tested for degree of protection of IP: 66. The standard
supporting structure for surge arrester should be provided with a mounting pad,
for fixing the surge monitor. The surge monitor should be suitable for mounting
on this standard mounting pad. Also all nuts, bolts, washers etc. required for
fixing the surge monitor shall have to be supplied by the Contractor. It should be
possible to mount it as near as possible to the surge arrester so that length of
connectors is as short as possible. The connectors used between the surge monitor
and the surge arrester shall be supplied along with the equipment.

4.8.6.6

The Bidder shall give a detailed description alongwith block diagrams of the surge
counter and leakage current meter.

4.8.6.7

The material used in the surge counter shall be such that it can safely withstand
discharge current of the surge arrester.

4.8.6.8

Following performance is desired from the surge counter:

i)

The surge counter shall operate for a minimum lightning impulse current
(8/20 micro sec) of 100 Amps.

ii)

The surge counter shall operate perfectly if the interval time of multiple
lightning strokes is more than 0.1 second.

iii)

The surge counter shall have negligible effect on the protection level of the
surge arrester.

iv)

The potential across the surge counter shall be less than 50V (crest) under
normal conditions.

4.8.6.9

The supplier will be responsible for proper functioning of the surge monitors with
the surge arresters.

4.8.7

Arrester housing

4.8.7.1

The housing of arresters shall be porcelain / polymer confirming to requirements

stipulated in Section- General Technical Requirement. Housing shall be so

Major Substation Equipment

co-ordinated that external flashover will not occur due to application of any
impulse of switching surge voltage upto the maximum design value for arrester.

4.8.7.2

The porcelain housing shall be in accordance with following requirements:

a)

Porcelain Arrester housing shall be manufactured and tested in accordance

with IEC: 60233/IS: 5621.

b)

Housing shall be manufactured from high quality porcelain. Porcelain used

shall be homogenous, free from laminations, cavities and other flaws or
imperfections that might affect the mechanical or dielectric quality and
shall be thoroughly vitrified and impervious to moisture.

c)

Glazing of the porcelain shall be uniform, brown in colour, free from

blisters, burrs and similar other defects. Housing shall incorporate suitable
profile preferably of self cleaning type (aerofoil design) meeting with IEC60815/IS: 2544 and with required minimum creepage distance so that
arrester shall function satisfactorily under specified pollution environment.

INSPECTIONS & TESTING

4.9.1

Surge Arresters shall be offered for inspection in accordance with requirement of

Section General Technical Requirement.

4.9.2

In accordance with the requirements stipulated under Section General

Technical Requirement, the surge arrester and the housing should have been
type tested and shall be subjected to acceptance and routine tests listed in
accordance with IEC standards. Testing facilities available at the Bidders/
Manufacturers works shall be indicated in the bid.

4.9.3

In the switching surge operating duty test, the samples shall be preheated to
70 deg. C (instead of 60 deg. C as given in IEC) prior to application of long
duration surges.

4.9.4

The test reports of the type tests (as per relevant IS/IEC) and the following
additional type test reports (conducted on same model as offered) shall be
submitted by the Bidder for the Purchasers review.
i)

Radio interference voltage test (as per Annexure II of Section-General

Technical Requirement).

ii)

Seismic withstand test (as per Annexure II of Section-General

Technical Requirement).

iii)

Contamination test (As per IEC / ANSI-C62 - 11 -1987)

iv)

Temporary Over Voltage withstand test (procedure to be mutually agreed).

Major Substation Equipment

Each metal oxide block of surge arresters shall be tested for the guaranteed specific
energy capability in addition to the routine / acceptance test as per / IEC: 60099.

4.9.5

(a)

Acceptance tests:

i)

Measurement of Power frequency reference voltage of the arrester

units

(b)

ii)

Lightening Impulse Residual Voltage on arrester units (as per IEC)

iii)

Internal ionization or Partial Discharge Test

Special Acceptance Tests:

i)
ii)
iii)

(c)

Routine Tests:

i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)

4.9.6

Thermal stability test on three parts (as per IEC)

Ageing & Energy Capability Test on blocks (procedure to be
mutually agreed)
Wattloss test

Measurement of reference Voltage

Residual voltage test of arrester unit
Internal ionization or Partial Discharge Test
Sealing Test
Verticality check on completely assembled surge arresters as a
sample test on each lot.

Tests on Surge Monitors

Functional test report on surge counters shall be submitted by the Bidder. The
surge monitors shall also be connected in series with the test specimens during

Major Substation Equipment

residual voltage and current impulse withstand tests to verify efficacy of the same.
The surge counter with leakage current meter shall have practically no effect on
protection level and performance of surge arrester. Additional routine/functional
tests with one 100A and 10 KA current impulse, (8/20 micro sec.) shall also be
performed on the surge monitor without any extra cost to the Purchaser. The
Bidder will submit, test certificates of tests conducted to prove that the surge
counter will register every impulse of more than 100 Amps.
4.9.7

Tests on insulators
All routine/acceptance tests shall be conducted on the hollow column insulators /
polymeric housing as per IEC: 60233. The following additional tests shall be
carried out as per relevant IS/IEC standards.
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)

Ultrasonic test as a routine test

Pressure test as a routine test.
Bending load test in 4 directions at 50% specified bending load as a
routine test.
Bending load test in 4 directions at 100% specified bending load as a
sample test on each lot.
Burst pressure test as a sample test on each lot.
Polymer housing shall be tested in accordance with IEC.

4.9.8

Commissioning Tests
An indicative list of commissioning tests is given below. Bidder shall perform any
additional test based on specialities of the items as per the Field Quality Program /
instructions of the equipment Supplier/Manufacturer or Purchaser without any
extra cost to the Purchaser. The Bidder shall arrange all instruments required for
conducting these tests alongwith calibration certificates and shall furnish the list
of instruments to the Purchaser for approval.
a)
b)

Leakage current.
Resistance of ground connection.

MANDATORY SPARES/SPARE PARTS

The mandatory spare parts shall be supplied as listed in Schedule of Prices.

SUPPORTING STRUCTURE
Each Surge Arrester shall be suitable for mounting on galvanised supporting
structure. The details of the supporting structure are stipulated in SectionAuxiliaries.

Major Substation Equipment

ANNEXURE I
AUXILIARIES

1.0

BUSHINGS, HOLLOW COLUMN INSULATORS, SUPPORT INSULATORS

1.1

Bushings shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with IS: 2099 & IEC: 60137
while hollow column insulators shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with
IEC: 60233 / IS: 5621. The support insulators shall be manufactured and tested as per
IS: 2544 / IEC: 60168 and IS: 2099 / IEC: 60273. The insulators shall also conform
to IEC: 60815 as applicable.
The Bidder may also offer Composite Silicon Rubber Insulator conforming to IEC:
1109.

1.2

Support insulators, bushings and hollow column insulators shall be manufactured

from high quality porcelain. Porcelain used shall be homogenous, free from
laminations, cavities and other flaws or imperfections that might affect the mechanical
or dielectric quality and shall be thoroughly vitrified, tough and impervious to
moisture.

1.3

Glazing of the porcelain shall be uniform, brown in colour, free from blisters, burrs
and similar other defects. Porcelain shall have a smooth surface arranged to shed
away rainwater.

1.4

Support insulator/bushings/hollow column insulators shall be designed to have ample

insulation, mechanical strength and rigidity for the conditions under which they will
be used. The torsional strength, tensile strength and other parameters of insulators
shall suit the requirements of the specification.

1.5

When operating at normal rated voltage, there shall be no electric discharge between
the conductors and bushings, which would cause corrosion or injury to conductors,
insulators or supports by the formation of substances produced by chemical action.
No radio interference shall be caused by the insulators/bushings when operating at the
normal rated voltage.

1.6

Bushing porcelain shall be robust and capable of withstanding the internal pressures
likely to occur in service. The design and location of clamps, the shape and the
strength of the porcelain flange securing the bushing to the tank shall be such that
there is no risk of fracture. All portions of the assembled porcelain enclosures and
supports other than gaskets, which may in any way be exposed to the atmosphere shall
be composed of completely non hygroscopic material such as metal or glazed
porcelain.

1.7

All iron parts shall be hot dip galvanized complying with relevant IS and all joints
shall be air tight. Surface of joints shall be trued up with porcelain parts by grinding
and metal parts by machining. Insulator/bushing design shall be such as to ensure a
uniform compressive pressure on the joints.

Major Substation Equipment

1.8

The puncture strength of the bushings shall be greater than the dry flash over voltage.

1.9

The mechanical characteristics of bushings shall match with the requirements

specified.

1.10

Bushings shall be either of oil filled condenser type, hermetically sealed to prevent
ingress of moisture and with suitable facility to indicate oil level or shall be of
polycone or solid core type depending upon application.

1.11

The bushings, hollow column insulators and support insulators shall conform to type
tests and shall be subjected to routine tests in accordance with IS: 2099, IS: 2544,
IEC: 60233 & IEC: 60137. In addition to this, the following tests are also to be
conducted on the hollow column insulator as per standards mentioned hereunder.
i)
ii)
iii)

Ultrasonic test as a routine test

IEC: 60383 and IS: 4318
Bending test for bushing of Surge Arrester, CT, IS: 3070 (1993)/relevant
CVT and PT
IEC
Bending test for insulator of isolators
IS: 2544/relevant IEC

1.12

All insulators of identical ratings shall be inter-changeable. The insulators shall be

suitable for hot line washing.

1.13

Pressure due to the contacts shall not be transferred to the insulators after the main
blades of isolator are fully closed.

CONTROL CABINETS, JUNCTION BOXES, TERMINAL BOX AND

MARSHALLING BOXES FOR OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT (e.g. Circuit
Breaker, Isolator, Instrument Transformer, surge Arrester)

1.10.17

The control cabinets/ boxes shall generally conform to IS: 5039/IS: 8623, IEC: 60439
as applicable and the clauses given below:
1.10.18Cabinets/ boxes shall be free standing floor mounting type, wall mounting type or
pedestal mounting type as per requirement. A canopy and sealing arrangements for
operating rods shall be provided in marshalling boxes/ control cabinets to prevent
entry of rain water.
1.10.19 Control cabinets/ junction boxes/ terminal boxes shall be outdoor type, rigidly
constructed out of sheet steel or aluminium and shall be dust, water and vermin proof.
Sheet steel used shall be at least 2.0 mm thick cold rolled / 2.5 mm hot rolled and
properly braced to prevent wobbling. There shall be sufficient reinforcement to
provide level surfaces, resistance to vibrations and rigidity during transportation and
installation. In case of aluminium enclosed boxes the thickness of aluminium shall be
such that it provides adequate rigidity and long life as comparable with sheet steel of
specified thickness.

Major Substation Equipment

1.10.20 Control cabinets/ junction boxes/ terminal boxes shall be provided with double hinged
doors with padlocking/ suitable locking arrangements. The distance between two
hinges shall be adequate to ensure uniform sealing pressure against atmosphere.

1.10.21 All doors, removable covers and plates shall be gasketed all around with EPDM/
Neoprene gaskets. The gasket shall be tested in accordance with approved quality
plan. The quality of gasket shall be such that it does not get damaged/ cracked during
the ten years of operation of the equipment or its major overhaul whichever is earlier.
All gasketed surfaces shall be smooth, straight and reinforced if necessary to minimise
distortion and to make a tight seal. Ventilating louvers, if provided, shall have screen
and filters. The screen shall be fine wire mesh made of brass.
1.10.22 All sheet steel works shall be degreased, pickled, phosphated and then applied with
two coats of zinc chromate primer and two coats of finishing synthetic enamel paint.
The colour of finishing paint shall be light admiral grey in accordance with Shade No.
697 of IS: 5 outside and inside shall be glossy white.
1.10.23 The terminal boxes/ control cabinets/ junction boxes/ marshalling boxes shall be
designed for the entry of cable from bottom by means of weather proof and dust proof
connections. Boxes and cabinets shall be so designed with generous clearances to
avoid interference between the wiring entering from below and any terminal blocks or
accessories mounted within the box or cabinet. Suitable cable gland plate projecting at
least 150 mm above the base of the marshalling kiosk shall be provided for this
purpose. Necessary number of cable glands shall be supplied and fitted on this gland
plate. This gland plate shall have provision for some glands if needed to be provided
in the future. The glands shall project at least 25 mm above the gland plate to prevent
the entry of moisture in the cable crutch. The glands shall be dust tight, screw or
double compression type and made up of brass. The glands shall have provision for
securing armour of the cable separately and shall be provided with earthing tag. The
glands shall be Nickel plated and shall conform to BS: 6121.
1.10.24 All electrical connections and contacts shall possess ample cross section and capacity
for carrying continuously the specified current without undue heating.
1.10.25 All cubicles shall be provided with a thermostatically controlled space heater, interior
lighting facilities and one single-phase power outlet (3 pin) with socket. All indicating
and control devices shall be mounted on the front door.
2.9

Thermostatically controlled space heater shall maintain cubicle temperature

approximately 10 deg. C above the outside air temperature. The heaters shall be
suitable for 240 V AC supply voltage.

2.10

A 240 V, single phase, 50 Hz, AC plug and socket shall be provided in the cabinet
with ON OFF switch. Plug and 15 Amp socket with switch shall be of industrial
grade.

2.11

For illumination of control cabinet/ boxes, a 20 watts fluorescent tube shall be

provided. The illumination lamp shall be controlled by the door switch.

Major Substation Equipment

2.12

All control switches shall be of rotary switch type and toggle/ piano switches shall not
be accepted.

2.13

Positive earthing of the cabinet shall be ensured by providing two separate earthing
pads. The earth wire shall be terminated on the earthing pad and secured by the use of
star or self-etching washers. Earthing of hinged door shall be done by using a
separate earth wire.

2.14

The bay marshalling kiosks shall be provided with danger plate and a diagram
showing the numbering/connection/ferruling by pasting the same on the inside of the
door.

2.15

In accordance with the requirements stipulated in relevant clauses of SectionGeneral Technical Requirement, control cabinets, junction boxes, terminal boxes
and marshalling boxes shall conform to type tests and shall be subjected to routine
tests in accordance with IS: 5039.
a)

The following routine tests along with routine test as per IS:5039 shall also be
conducted:
i)
ii)

b)

Check for wiring

Visual and dimension check

The enclosure of bay marshalling kiosk, control cabinet, junction box and
terminal box shall conform to IP-55 degree of protection as per IS: 13947.
After degree of protection test on control cabinet, HV test [2.5 kV (rms) for 1
minute], insulation resistance and functional test shall also be conducted.

2.16

Motor control centre installed in control cabinets shall be as per Clause No. 10.0 of
this section.

3.0

TERMINAL BLOCK

3.1

All internal wiring and external connections to equipment or to control cubicle shall
be made through terminal blocks, preferably vertically mounted on the internal side of
cabinet/junction box.

3.2

The terminal blocks shall be 650 V grade and shall be rated to carry continuously the
maximum current that is expected to be carried by the terminals. These shall be made
of moulded, non-inflammable, complete with insulated barriers, stud type terminals,
washers, nuts and lock nuts. Screw clamp, overall insulated, insertion type, rail
mounted terminals can be used in place of stud type terminals. But preferably the
terminals blocks shall be non disconnecting stud type equivalent to Elmex type
CATM4, Phoenix cage clamp type of Wago or equivalent.

3.3

The material of terminal block moulding shall not deteriorate because of varied
conditions of heat, cold, humidity, dryness etc that would be anticipated at the
location where the equipment is proposed to be installed.

Major Substation Equipment

3.4

The terminal shall be such that maximum contact area is achieved when a cable is
terminated. The terminal shall have a locking characteristic to prevent cable from
escaping from the terminal clamp unless it is done intentionally.

3.5

The conducting part in contact with cable shall preferably be tinned or silver plated,
however Nickel plated Copper or Zinc plated Steel shall also be acceptable.

3.6

The terminal blocks shall be of extendable design.

3.7

The terminal blocks shall have locking arrangement to prevent its escape from the
mounting rails.

3.8

The terminal blocks shall be fully enclosed with removable covers of transparent,
non-inflammable, non-deteriorating type plastic material. Insulating barriers shall be
provided between the terminal blocks. These barriers shall not hinder the operator
from carrying out the wiring without removing the barriers.

3.9

The terminals shall be provided with the marking tags for wiring identification.

3.10

Each terminal boxes/ cubicle/ panel shall be provided with 20% spare terminals unless
otherwise specified and these spare terminals shall be uniformly distributed on all
terminal blocks.

3.11

Unless otherwise specified, terminal blocks shall be suitable for connecting the
following conductors on each side:
a)

All circuits except CT

Minimum of 2 (two) Nos. of 1.5 (one point

five) sq. mm copper flexible.

b)

All CT circuits

Minimum of 4 (four) nos. of 2.5 (Two point

five) sq. mm copper flexible.

3.12

There shall be a minimum clearance of 250 (two hundred fifty) mm between the first /
bottom row of terminal block and the cable gland plate or side of the box. Also, the
clearance between two rows of terminal blocks shall be a minimum of 150 (one
hundred fifty) mm.

3.13

The arrangements shall be in such a manner that it is possible to safely connect or

disconnect terminals on live circuits and replace fuse links when the cabinet is live.
Cabinet wiring would be suitable for 60 (sixty) Deg. C as the space heater will keep
the temperature 10 (ten) deg C higher than the ambient temperature.

4.0

Wiring

4.1

All wiring shall be carried out with 650 V grade, PVC insulated stranded copper
wires. The minimum size of the cable used for internal wiring shall be as follows:
c)
d)

All circuits except CT circuit

CT circuits

Major Substation Equipment

: 1.5 sq. mm Copper

: 2.5 sq. mm Copper

4.2

All internal wiring shall be securely supported, neatly arranged, readily accessible and
connected to equipment terminals and terminal blocks.

4.3

Wire terminations shall be made with solder-less crimped type of tinned copper lugs,
which firmly grip the conductor and insulation. Insulated sleeves shall be provided at
all the wire terminations. Engraved core identification plastic ferrules marked to
correspond with the wiring diagram shall be fitted at both ends of each wire. Ferrules
shall fit tightly on the wires and shall not fall off when the wire is disconnected from
terminal block.

4.4

All wires directly connected to trip circuit breaker shall be distinguished by the
addition of red coloured lettered ferrule. Number 6 & 9 shall not be included for
ferrule purposes.

4.5

All terminals including spare terminals of auxiliary equipment shall be wired upto
terminal blocks. Each equipment shall have its own central control cabinet in which
all contacts including spare contacts from all poles shall be wired out. Interpole
cabling shall be done for all equipment.

4.6

The Contractor shall furnish all wires, conduits and terminals for the necessary
inter-phase electrical connections (where applicable) as well as between phases and
common terminal boxes or control cabinets.

4.7

All input and output terminals of each control cubicle shall be tested for surge
withstand capability in accordance with relevant IEC publications, in both
longitudinal and transverse modes. The contractor shall also provide all necessary
filtering, surge protection, interface relays and any other measures necessary to
achieve an impulse withstand level at the cable interfaces of the equipment.

5.0

MOTORS
Motors shall be Squirrel Cage induction motors of sufficient size, capable of
satisfactory operation for the application and duty as required by the driven equipment
and shall be subjected to routine tests as per applicable standards. The motor shall be
of approved make.

5.1

Stator
d)

Stator Frame
The stator frames and all external parts of the motors shall be of rigid
fabricated steel or of casting. They shall be suitably annealed to eliminate any
residual stresses introduced during the process of fabrication of machines.

e)

Stator Core
The stator laminations shall be made from suitable grade magnetic sheet steel
varnished on both sides. They shall be pressed and clamped adequately to
reduce the core and teeth vibrations to minimum.

Major Substation Equipment

f)

5.2

i)

All insulated winding conductors shall be of copper. The overall

motor winding insulation shall be of conventional class E type. The
winding shall be suitable for successful operation in hot, humid and
tropical climate with the ambient temperature of 48 deg. C. The
insulation shall be given fungicidal and tropical treatment as per IS:
3202/relevant IEC.

ii)

Any joints in the motor insulation such as at coil connections or

between slot and winding section shall have strength equivalent to that
of slot sections for the coil.

iii)

For 415-volt motors, after the coils are placed in slots and all
connections are made, entire motor assembly shall be impregnated by
completely submerging core and winding in suitable insulating
compound or varnish followed by proper baking. At least two
additional submersions and bakes shall be applied making a total of
atleast three submersions and bake treatment.

Rotor
g)
h)
i)

j)
k)
l)

5.3

Insulation and winding

Rotor shall be adequately designed to avoid overheating during the starting

and running conditions
Rotor shall be properly balanced so as to keep the vibration under running
condition within the limits.
Rotor of induction motors shall be of rigid core construction with bars firmly
secured and solidly bonded to the end rings. The end ring assembly shall be
such that it is free to move with the expansion of the bars without distortion.
The connection of the bars to the end ring shall be made by brazing or fusion
welding.
Rotors shall be so designed as to keep the combined critical speed with the
driven equipment away from the running speed by at least 20%.
Rotors shall also be designed to withstand 120% of the rated speed for 2
minutes in either direction of rotation.
All high-speed rotors shall be constructed with provision of rebalancing the
rotor on its site position without major disassembly.

Bearings
f)
g)

Depending upon the capacity and loading conditions, manufacturer shall

design suitable grease lubricated or oil lubricated bearings.
Greased ball and roller bearings when used shall be of reputed make subject to
purchasers approval. The minimum standard life of the bearings shall not be
less than 30,000 working hours taking all motor and driven loads into account.
These shall be pressure grease gun lubricated type fitted with grease nipple
and shall have grease relief devices.

Major Substation Equipment

h)

i)

j)

5.4

Enclosures
e)

f)
g)
h)

5.5

Bearings shall be so constructed that the loss of grease and its creeping along
with shaft into motor housing is prevented. It shall also prevent dirt and water
from getting into the motor.
Unless otherwise approved, bearing lubrication system shall be such that no
external forced oil or water is necessary to maintain the required oil supply or
keep bearing temperature within permissible limits.
For oil-lubricated bearings, drain plugs shall be provided for draining any
residual oil when required.

Motors to be installed outdoor shall have enclosure equivalent to IP 55 as per

IS: 4691/relevant IEC. For motors to be installed indoor, the enclosure shall
be dust proof equivalent to IP 54 as per IS: 4691/relevant IEC.
Two independent earthing points shall be provided on opposite sides of the
motor for bolted connection of earthing conductor.
Motors shall have drain plugs so located that they will drain water, resulting
from condensation or other causes from all pockets in the motor casting.
Motors weighing more than 25 kg shall be provided with eye bolts, lugs or
other means to facilitate lifting.

Cooling method
Motors shall be of self-ventilated type having TEFC (Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled)
enclosure.

5.6

Rating plate
The rating plate shall conform to the requirements of IEC incorporating the year of
manufacture.

5.7

5.8

Operational features
c)

Continuous motor rating (name plate rating) shall be at least ten (10) percent
above the maximum load demand of the driven equipment at design duty point
and the motor shall not be overloaded at any operating point of driven
equipment that will arise in service.

d)

Motors shall be capable of giving rated output without reduction in the

expected life span when operated continuously in the system having the
particulars as given under Section Specific Technical Requirements.

Starting requirements
f)

All induction motors shall be suitable for full voltage, direct-on-line starting.
These shall be capable of starting and accelerating to the rated speed along
with the driven equipment without exceeding the acceptable winding

Major Substation Equipment

temperature even when the supply voltage drops down to 85% of the rated
voltage.

5.9

g)

Motors shall be capable of withstanding the electrodynamic stresses and

heating imposed if it is started at a voltage of 110% of the rated value.

h)

The locked rotor current shall not exceed six (6) times the rated full load
current for all motors, subject to tolerance as given in IS: 325/relevant IEC.

i)

Motors when started with the driven equipment imposing full starting torque
under the supply voltage conditions specified under Section- General
Technical requirement shall be capable of withstanding at least two
successive starts from cold condition at room temperature and one start from
hot condition without injurious heating of winding. The motors shall also be
suitable for three equally spread starts per hour under the above referred
supply condition.

j)

The locked rotor withstand time under hot condition at 110% of rated voltage
shall be more than the starting time with the driven equipment at minimum
permissible voltage by at least two seconds or 15% of the accelerating time
which ever is greater. In case, it is not possible to meet the above requirement,
the Bidder shall offer centrifugal type speed switch mounted on the motor
shaft which shall remain closed for speeds lower than 20% and open for
speeds above 20% of the rated speed. The speed switch shall be capable of
withstanding 120% of the rated speed in either direction of rotation.

Running requirements
e)

The maximum permissible temperature rise over the ambient temperature of

48 deg. C shall be within the limits specified in IS: 325/relevant IEC (for 3
phase induction motors) after adjustment due to increased ambient
temperature specified.

f)

The double amplitude of motor vibration shall be within the limits specified in
IS: 4729/relevant IEC. Vibration shall also be within the limits specified by
the relevant standard for the driven equipment when measured at the motor
bearings.

g)

All the induction motors shall be capable of running at 80% of rated voltage
for a period of 5 minutes.

h)

Motors shall be capable of developing the rated full load torque even when the
supply voltage drops to 70% of rated voltage. Such operation is envisaged for
a period of one second. The pull out torque of the induction motors to meet
this requirement shall not be less than 20% of full load torque.

i)

The motors shall be capable of withstanding for 10 seconds, without stalling

or abrupt change in speed (under gradual increase of torque) an excess torque
of 60% percent of their rated torque, the voltage and frequency being
maintained at their rated value.

Major Substation Equipment

5.10

Tests shall be carried out in accordance with the requirement stipulated under Section
General Technical Requirements. Motors shall conform to the type tests and
shall be subjected to routine tests as per IS: 325/relevant IEC.

5.11

TESTING & COMMISIONING

An indicating list of tests is given below. Bidder shall perform any additional test
based on specialties of the items as per the Field Quality Program /instructions of the
equipment Supplier or Purchaser without any extra cost to the Purchaser. The Bidder
shall arrange all instruments required for conducting these tests along with calibration
certificates and shall furnish the list of instruments to the Purchaser for approval.
a)
b)
c)

Insulation resistance
Phase sequence and proper direction of rotation
Any motor operating incorrectly shall be checked to determine the cause and
the conditions corrected.

6.0

UNIT COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM

6.1

The unit compressed air system shall meet the following requirements:
a)

b)

c)

d)

6.2

The compressed air system shall be provided with necessary piping, piping
accessories, control valves, safety valves, filters, reducing valves, isolating
valves, drain ports, etc. Also the unit compressed air system shall be provided
with suitable anti-vibration pads.
The compressors or pumps shall be of the air-cooled type and mounted within
the operating mechanism housing or a separate weatherproof and dust-proof
housing.
The air receiver shall have stored energy for 2 CO-operations of the breaker
at the lowest pressure for auto reclosing duty without refilling. The unit
compressor shall be capable of building up required pressure for another 2
CO-operations within 30 minutes.
The size of the compressor shall be determined by the Bidder. The
compressor shall be of sufficient capacity for performing all the operations
above mentioned. Breakers not requiring central compressed air system are
preferred.

Air Compressor
a)

The air compressor shall be of air cooled type complete with cylinder
lubrication, drive motor etc. The compressor shall be rated for the following
duty:
i)

Total running time of compressor to not exceeding 80 minutes

build up the rated pressure from
atmospheric pressure

ii)

Normal running at charging

Major Substation Equipment

not exceeding 15 minutes

considering 10% leakage per

day
iii) Air charging time after one close-open not exceeding 15 minutes
operation
b)
c)
d)
6.3

Compressor shall be driven by automatically controlled motors. The motors

shall be as per Clause 4.0 of this section.
The compressor shall be provided with automatic adjustable unloading device
during starting.
The compressor shall be equipped with a time totaliser and a pressure gauge.

Intercooler and After cooler (If applicable)

Intercooler between compressor stages and after cooler at discharge if any of H.P.
cylinder shall be included in Contractors scope. They shall be of air cooled type and
shall be designed as per ASME code of IEMA standards. The design pressure on the
air side of cooler shall be 1.25 times the working pressure. A corrosion allowance of 3
mm shall be included for all steel parts.

6.4

Air receivers
a)

Air receiver shall be designed in accordance with the latest edition of the
ASME code for pressure vessel and Part VIII of BS: 5179. A corrosion
allowance of 3.0 mm shall be provided for shell and dished ends.
Receivers shall be coated on the inside face with antirust medium if it is not
hot dip galvanized.

6.5

b)

Connections for air inlet and outlet, drain and relief valves shall be flanged
type or screwed type. Pressure gauge and pressure switch connections shall be
screwed type only.

c)

Accessories such as suitable sized safety valve to relieve full compressor

discharge at a set pressure equal to 1.1 times the maximum operating pressure,
blow off valve, auto drain tap with isolating and bypass valve, dial type
pressure gauge with isolating and drain valve and test connection shall be
provided.

d)

Air receiver shall be offered with at least 50% spare capacity, calculated on
the basis of total air requirement for 2 CO-operations.

Quality of air
Compressed air used shall be dry and free of dust particles and fully compatible with
the materials used in the pneumatic operating mechanism. Arrangement for
conditioning the compressed air, if required, shall be provided as an integral part of air
compressor system.
If situation warrants, because of the severe ambient conditions, the supplier may offer
centralized compressed air system.

Major Substation Equipment

6.6

Control and control equipment

a)

The compressor control shall be of automatic start/stop type initiated by

pressure switches.

b)

All the necessary compressor control equipment shall be housed in a totally

enclosed sheet steel cabinet conforming to Clause 2.0 of this section. Pressure
gauges and other indicating devices, control switches shall be mounted on the
control cabinet.
A glass window shall be provided for viewing the indicating
instrument/gauges. The maximum height shall be abuot 1400 mm.

c)

d)

6.7

6.8

Duplicate incoming supply of 415 V. AC shall be provided at switchyard

bay marshalling box from where the input supply to the operating
mechanism can be obtained.

Compressed air piping, valves and fittings

a)

The flow capacity of all valves shall be at least 20% greater than the total
compressor capacity.

b)

The high-pressure pipe and air system shall be such that after one O 0.3 sec
CO operation, the breaker shall be capable of performing one CO
operation within 3 minutes.

c)

All compressed air piping shall be bright annealed, seamless, phosphorous

De-oxidized Non-Arsenical Copper alloy as per BS: 2874 or stainless steel
pipe (C-106 of BS: 2871-1957).

d)

All joints and connections in the piping system shall be brazed or flared as
necessary.

e)

All compressed air piping shall be carried out in accordance with BS: 162.

f)

Compressed air piping system shall be complete with Saddle clamps to

support the piping system at suitable intervals. Necessary bolts, nuts, pipefixing clamps etc shall be included in the scope of Bidder.

Tests
In accordance with the requirements stipulated under Section General Technical
Requirements, the compressors and its accessories should have been type tested and
shall be subjected to routine tests as per applicable standards.

6.9

Spares and Maintenance equipment

Bidder shall include spares and maintenance equipment in the proposal.

7.0

FUSES

Major Substation Equipment

All fuses shall be of the HRC cartridge type, conforming to IS: 2208 and suitable to
mount on plug-in type of fuse bases. Fuses shall be provided with visible operation
indicators to show that they have operated. All accessible live connections shall be
adequately shrouded, and it shall be possible to change fuses with the circuit live,
without danger of contact with live conductor. Insulated fuses pulling handle shall be
supplied with each control cabinet.

8.0

Isolating switches
The incoming power supply isolating switch & operating handle shall be interlocked
with the control cabinet door as to prevent opening of door when main switch is
closed. Device for by passing the door interlock shall also be provided. Switch
handle shall have provision for locking in both fully open and fully closed positions.

9.0

TERMINAL CONNECTORS
The terminal connectors shall meet the following requirements:

9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.9

9.10

Terminal Connectors shall be manufactured and tested as per IS: 5561/relevant IEC.
All castings shall be free from blow holes, surface blisters, cracks and cavities. All
sharp edges and corners shall be burred and rounded off.
No part of a clamp shall be less than the required thickness.
All ferrous parts shall be hot dipped galvanised confirming to IS: 2629/relevant IEC.
For bimetallic connectors, copper alloy liner of minimum required thickness of 2 mm
shall be cast integral with aluminium body.
Flexible connectors shall be made from tinned copper/aluminium sheets.
All current carrying parts shall be designed and manufactured to have minimum
contact resistance.
Connectors shall be designed to be corona free in accordance with the requirement
stipulated in IS: 5561/relevant IEC.
All tests/checks on terminal connectors shall be as per IS: 5561/relevant IEC. In
addition, the Bidder shall carryout an additional test to demonstrate withstand
capability of wind load. The test procedure and acceptance norms shall be furnished
for Purchasers approval.
Terminal connectors supplied shall also be suitable to withstand all forces due to
ACSR jumper of required lengths/ equipment interconnecting aluminium tube of
required diameter.

10.0 MOTOR CONTROL CENTRE

The 415 volt motor control centre conforming to requirements for control cabinets
stipulated in Clause No. 2.0 of Annexure - I shall be of fixed type and fully
sectionalized and shall be equipped with load break switches. Motor feeder shall be
provided with isolating switch fuse unit and contactor with thermal overload relay and
open phase protection. The motor contactor shall have one normally open auxiliary
contact for alarm purposes. An ammeter shall be provided on the motor feeders. The
motor control cabinet shall be independent from all other control circuits.

Major Substation Equipment

Major Substation Equipment

ANNEXURE - II

BUS SWITCHING SCHEMES, LINE LENGTHS AND LINE PARAMETERS

1.

BUS SWITCHING SCHEMES

Double Main with by-pass and Main & transfer bus with sectionalizer switching
scheme shall be used at 132 kV and 33 kV voltage level respectively for Siot
substation in Jammu region.

2.

LINE LENGTHS

(a)

132 kV / 33 kV Grid Station at Siot in Jammu region

Associated Transmission lines are

132kV Transmission Lines

D/C Barn- Siot

D/C Siot- Kalakote

53.87 km
14.86 km

33kV Transmission Lines

3.

Feeder - I
Feeder - II
Feeder - III
Feeder - IV

LINE PARAMETERS

Major Substation Equipment

(App.)
(App.)
(App.)
(App.)

35.00 km
35.00 km
25.00 km
25.00 km

(A)

The line parameters for 132kV Double circuit line with Panther conductors are as
follow:

a)

Positive Sequence

b)

for Double Circuit

Resistance per KM

ohm

Reactance per KM

ohm

Susceptance per KM

micro mho

Zero Sequence
i)
ii)
iii)

Resistance per KM
Reactance per KM
Susceptance per KM

Major Substation Equipment

for Double Circuit

ohm.
ohm
micro

mho

ANNEXURE - III
SPECIFICATION AND ACCEPTANCE OF NEW SULPHUR HEXAFLUORIDE (SF6) GAS
1.

Physical properties

2.
3.
4.

Density at 20 Deg. C and 1 bar

Electric strength
Compatibility

5.

Toxic impurities

6.

Impurities

7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.

Colourless, odourless, non toxic and nonflammable.

6.08g/l
2 1/2 times that of Nitrogen
Upto temperature of about 180 deg. C its
compatibility with material used in electrical
construction is similar to that of nitrogen.
SF6 gas shall comply with the requirements
of the test as per clause 22 of IEC: 376-1971
SF6 shall not contain more than the maximum
allowable quantities of impurities given below:
Impurity or group of Max. permitted
impurities
concentration mass by
mass
CF4
0.05 per cent
Oxygen + Nitrogen 0.05 per cent
(Air)
Water
15 ppm
Acidity expressed as 0.3 ppm
HF
Hydrolysable fluorides 1.0 ppm free from oil
expressed as H F

Oil content
Substantially
Standard sizes of cylinders
3, 5, 10, 20, 40, 80, 150 & 500 litres
Preferred sizes of cylinders
10 and 40 litres
Test pressure of cylinder
70 bars
Maximum filling ratio for tropical 0.75 kg/l
country
Tests
IEC 376-1976
Toxicity test
Clause No. 22
Water content and condensation Clause no. 23, 24, 25, & 26 of IEC: 376B 1974
temperature
Carbon tetra Fluoride, Oxygen and Clause No. 27, 28, 29, 30 & 31 of IEC: 376B
Nitrogen
Hydrolysable fluoride
Clause No. 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, & 37 of IEC: 376
B
Acidity
Clause No. 38, 39, 40, 41 & 42 of IEC: 376B
Oil Content
Section 13 of IEC: 376 A-1973.

Major Substation Equipment

ANNEXURE - IV

TEMPERATURE RISE
The temperature rise on any part of equipment to be supplied shall not exceed the maximum
temperature rise specified below under the conditions specified in test clauses. The
permissible temperature rise indicated is for a maximum ambient temperature of 50 deg. C

Sl.
No.
1.

2.

3.

4.
5.

6.

7.

Nature of the Part or of the Liquid

Contacts in air, silver faced copper,
copper alloy or aluminium alloy (see
notes (i) and (ii).
Bare copper or tinned aluminium
alloy.
Contacts in oil
Silver faced copper, copper alloy or
aluminium alloy (See note (ii))
Bare copper or tined aluminium
alloy.
Terminals to be connected to external
conductors by screws or bolts silver
faced (see note III)
Bare
Metal parts acting as springs
Metal parts in contact with insulation
of the following classes:
Class Y: (for non impregnated
materials)
Class A: (For materials immersed in
oil or impregnated)
Class E: In air
In oil
Class B: In air
In oil
Class F: In air
In oil
Enamel: Oil base
Synthetic, in air
Synthetic, in oil
Any part of metal or of insulating
material in contact with oil except
contacts
Oil

Major Substation Equipment

Temp.
(Deg. C)

Maximum Value of
Temp rise at a max. ambient
air temp. not exceeding 50o C
(Deg. C)

105

55

75

25

90

40

80

30

105

55

90

40
- (see note iv)-

90

40

100

50

120
100
130
100
155
100
100
120
100

70
50
80
50
105
50
50
70
50

100

50

90

40

Note:
i)
ii)

iii)
iv)

When applying the temperature rise of 55 deg. C, care should be taken to

ensure that no damage is caused to the surrounding insulating materials.
The quality of the silver facing shall be such that a layer of silver remains at
the point of contact after the mechanical endurance test. Otherwise, the
contacts shall be regarded as bare.
The values of temperature and temperature rise are valid whether or not the
conductor connected to the terminals is silver faced.
The temperature shall not reach a value where the elasticity of the material is
impaired. For pure copper, this implies a temperature limit of 75 deg. C.

Major Substation Equipment

LIST OF MANDATORY SPARES

MAJOR SUBSTATION EQUIPMENT
POWER TRANSFORMER (50 MVA)

Sl. No.

Description

Quantity

1.

Bushing with metal parts & gaskets of each rating including Neutral bushing

1 set

2.

1 set

3.

Set of starter, contactor, relays and switch for electrical control panels (1 set of each type and
range)
Fuses/ MCB(complete set for one transformer)

4.

Indicating lamps (one set consisting of complete replacement for one transformer)

1 set

5.

Oil sampling bottles (one liter capacity)

6.

Set of pressure switch 1 no of each type and range

1 set

10 nos.
1 set

SF6 GAS CIRCUIT BREAKER

Quantity

Sl. No.

Description

1.

Closing coils with resistor (220 V operating

voltage)
Tripping coils with resistor (220 V operating
voltage)
SF6 gas
Relays, Power contactors, Push buttons, limit
switches, timers, MCBs and switch fuse units etc.
(220 V operating voltage)
Rubber gaskets, O rings & seals (complete
replacement for one CB/one pole)
Closing coil assembly
Trip coil assembly
Rubber gaskets, O rings & seals for operating
mechanism
Rubber gaskets, O rings & seals for operating
mechanism

2.
3.
4.

5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

145 kV
3 Nos.

36 kV
3 Nos.

3 Nos.

3 Nos.

40% of ordered quantity

One set of each type

One set of each type

1 Set

1 Set

1 No.
1 No.
1 set

1 No.
1 No.
1 set

1 set

1 set

ISOLATORS / DISCONNECTS/EARTH SWITCHES

Sl. No.

1.

Item

Quantity

One complete pole of isolator including support insulator

without earth switch with operating mechanism for main
isolator (without operating mechanism of each rating)

2.

145 kV

36 kV

3 Nos.

3 Nos.

3 Nos.

3 Nos.

1 Set

1 Set

2 Sets

2 Sets

One complete pole of isolator including support insulator with

one earth switch with operating mechanism for main isolator
and earth switch (without operating mechanism of each rating)
3.
Copper contact finger for female & male
type
4.
Bearings for isolators

Major Substation Equipment

contacts of each

INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS

Sl. No.

Quantity

Item

1.

Single Phase
set

Current Transformer complete

2.

Single Phase Potential Transformer /CVT Complete

set

145 kV
1 No

33 kV
1 No

1 No

1 No

SURGE ARRESTER
Sl. No.

Quantity

Item

1.

Single Phase Surge Arrester complete in all respects

with terminal connector etc.

2.

Surge counter

145 kV class
2 Nos.

36 kV class
2Nos.

1 No.

1 No.

CONTROL AND RELAY PANEL

Sl.
No.
A.

Description

Quantity

Spare for Transformer Protection Panel

1.
2.
3.
B.
Sl.
No.
1.

Set of fuses of each type and rating

Cabinet / panel space heaters with switch control
Thermostat
METERS AND INSTRUMENTS

Voltmeter (Digital)

2 nos.

2.

Ammeter (Digital)

2 nos.

3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Wattmeter (Digital)
Varmeter (Digital)
Voltmeter selector switch
Control switch for circuit breaker
Control switch for isolator
Semaphore for earth switch
Indicating lamps with resistor & lamp cover

1 no.
1 no.
2 nos.
3 nos.
4 nos.
6 nos.
50nos.

10.
11.
12.
13.
14.

Trip transfer switch

Push buttons
Synchronising socket
Synchronising selector switch (if applicable)
Annunciation windows with necessary annunciation relays
Red/Green/White indicating lamps (with complete assembly) (3

15.

nos. for each colour)

16.

Description

MCB & HRC fuses used in C & R panel

Major Substation Equipment

1 set
5 nos.
5 nos.
Quantity

2 nos.
10 nos.
1 no.
1 no.
5 nos.
1 set

5 nos. of
each type

SUBSTATION AUXILIARIES
Sl.
No.
1

Item

Quantity

ACSR Moose conductor

200m

AC/DC DISTRIBUTION BOARD

a) Moving contacts
b) Arcing contacts (Fixed/Moving)
c) Springs (Closing/Opening)
d) Closing coil
e) Tripping coil
f) Aux. finger contact
g) Limit switches
h) Jaw contacts
i)Battery Charger
SPARES FOR D.G. SETS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

Element Lube Oil filter

Element Lube Oil bypass filter
Element fuel filter
Screen filter for fuel pump
Coil assembly 24 V
Solenoid coil system for fuel oil system
AVR complete
Switches
Power contactor
Aux contactor
Aux relay
Timers
DC starter assembly with clutch engaging an disengaging arrangements
complete with motor
Coil for the contactors (for both power an aux contactor
Lube oil pressure safety control
High water temperature safety control
Diodes
Diode fuses

Major Substation Equipment

2 set
2 set each
2 no. each
2 no.
2 no.
2 set
2 set
1 set
1 No

1 No.
1 No.
1 No.
1 No.
1 No.
1 No.
1 No.
1 set
1 set
1 set
1 set
1 set
1 No.
1 No.
1 No.
1 No.
1 No.
1 No.